STMICROELECTRONICS ST92F124JCV1QC

ST92F124/ST92F150/ST92F250
8/16-BIT SINGLE VOLTAGE FLASH MCU FAMILY WITH RAM,
E3 TM(EMULATED EEPROM), CAN 2.0B AND J1850 BLPD
■
Memories
– Internal Memory: Single Voltage FLASH up to 256
Kbytes, RAM up to 8Kbytes, 1K byte E3 TM (Emulated EEPROM)
– In-Application Programming (IAP)
– 224 general purpose registers (register file) available as RAM, accumulators or index pointers
■
■
■
14x14
■
Up to 80 I/O pins
Interrupt Management
DMA controller for reduced processor
overhead
Timers
– 16-bit Timer with 8-bit Prescaler, and Watchdog Timer (activated by software or by hardware)
– 16-bit Standard Timer that can be used to generate
a time base independent of PLL Clock Generator
– Two 16-bit independent Extended Function Timers
(EFTs) with Prescaler, up to two Input Captures and
up to two Output Compares
– Two 16-bit Multifunction Timers, with Prescaler, up
to two Input Captures and up to two Output Compares
14x20
TQFP100
– 4 external fast interrupts + 1 NMI
– Up to 16 pins programmable as wake-up or additional external interrupt with multi-level interrupt handler
■
PQFP100
14x14
Clock, Reset and Supply Management
– Register-oriented 8/16 bit CORE with RUN, WFI,
SLOW, HALT and STOP modes
– 0-24 MHz Operation (Int. Clock), 4.5-5.5 V range
– PLL Clock Generator (3-5 MHz crystal)
– Minimum instruction time: 83 ns (24 MHz int. clock)
■
TQFP64
■
■
Communication Interfaces
– Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) with Selectable
Master/Slave mode
– One Multiprotocol Serial Communications Interface
with asynchronous and synchronous capabilities
– One asynchronous Serial Communications Interface
with 13-bit LIN Synch Break generation capability
– J1850 Byte Level Protocol Decoder (JBLPD)
– Up to two full I²C multiple Master/Slave Interfaces
supporting Access Bus
– Up to two CAN 2.0B Active interfaces
Analog peripheral (low current coupling)
– 10-bit A/D Converter witvalh up to 16 robust input
channels
Development Tools
– Free High performance Development environment
(IDE) based on Visual Debugger, Assembler, Linker,
and C-Compiler; Real Time Operating System (OSEK OS, CMX) and CAN drivers
– Hardware Emulator and Flash Programming Board
for development and ISP Flasher for production
DEVICE SUMMARY 2)
Features
ST92F124R9 ST92F124V1 ST92F150CR9/1 ST92F150CV9/1
FLASH - bytes
64K
128K
64K/128K
64K/128K
RAM - bytes
2K
4K
2K/4K
2K/4K
E3 TM - bytes
1K
1K
1K
1K
Timers and
2 MFT, 2 EFT, 2 MFT, 2 EFT, 2 MFT, 2 EFT,
2 MFT, 2 EFT,
Serial
STIM, WD,
STIM, WD,
STIM, WD,
STIM, WD,
Interface
SCI, SPI, I²C 2 SCI, SPI, I²C SCI, SPI, I²C
2 SCI, SPI, I²C
ADC
16 x 10 bits
16 x 10 bits
16 x 10 bits
16 x 10 bits
Network InterLIN Master
CAN
CAN, LIN Master
face
Packages
TQFP64
P/TQFP100
TQFP64
P/TQFP100
ST92F150JDV1 ST92F250CV2
128K
256K
6K
8K
1K
1K
2 MFT, 2 EFT, 2 MFT, 2 EFT,
STIM, WD,
STIM, WD, 2 SCI,
2 SCI, SPI, I²C
SPI, 2 I²C 1)
16 x 10 bits
16 x 10 bits
2 CAN,J1850,
CAN, LIN Master
LIN Master
P/TQFP100
1) see Section 12.4 on page 406 for important information
2) see Table 71 on page 403 for the list of supported part numbers
Rev. 4.0
November 2004
1/426
9
Table of Contents
1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.2 PIN DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1.3 VOLTAGE REGULATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
1.4 I/O PORTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
1.5 ALTERNATE FUNCTIONS FOR I/O PORTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
1.6 OPERATING MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
2 DEVICE ARCHITECTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
2.1 CORE ARCHITECTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
2.2 MEMORY SPACES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
2.3 SYSTEM REGISTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
2.4 MEMORY ORGANIZATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
2.5 MEMORY MANAGEMENT UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
2.6 ADDRESS SPACE EXTENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
2.7 MMU REGISTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
2.8 MMU USAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
3 SINGLE VOLTAGE FLASH & E3 TM (EMULATED EEPROM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
3.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
3.2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
3.3 REGISTER DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
3.4 WRITE OPERATION EXAMPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
3.5 PROTECTION STRATEGY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
3.6 FLASH IN-SYSTEM PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
4 REGISTER AND MEMORY MAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
4.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
4.2 MEMORY CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
4.3 ST92F124/F150/F250 REGISTER MAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
5 INTERRUPTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
5.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
5.2 INTERRUPT VECTORING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
5.3 INTERRUPT PRIORITY LEVELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
5.4 PRIORITY LEVEL ARBITRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
5.5 ARBITRATION MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
5.6 EXTERNAL INTERRUPTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
5.7 STANDARD INTERRUPTS (CAN AND SCI-A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
5.8 TOP LEVEL INTERRUPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
5.9 DEDICATED ON-CHIP PERIPHERAL INTERRUPTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
5.10 INTERRUPT RESPONSE TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
5.11 INTERRUPT REGISTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
5.12 WAKE-UP / INTERRUPT LINES MANAGEMENT UNIT (WUIMU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
6 ON-CHIP DIRECT MEMORY ACCESS (DMA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
6.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
6.2 DMA PRIORITY LEVELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
6.3 DMA TRANSACTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
. . . 121
6.4 DMA CYCLE TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
6.5 SWAP MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
2/426
9
Table of Contents
6.6 DMA REGISTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
7 RESET AND CLOCK CONTROL UNIT (RCCU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
7.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
7.2 CLOCK CONTROL UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
7.3 CLOCK MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
7.4 CLOCK CONTROL REGISTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
7.5 CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
7.6 RESET/STOP MANAGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
8 EXTERNAL MEMORY INTERFACE (EXTMI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
8.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
8.2 EXTERNAL MEMORY SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
8.3 REGISTER DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
9 I/O PORTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
9.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
9.2 SPECIFIC PORT CONFIGURATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
9.3 PORT CONTROL REGISTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
9.4 INPUT/OUTPUT BIT CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
9.5 ALTERNATE FUNCTION ARCHITECTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
9.6 I/O STATUS AFTER WFI, HALT AND RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
10 ON-CHIP PERIPHERALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
10.1 TIMER/WATCHDOG (WDT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
10.2 STANDARD TIMER (STIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
10.3 EXTENDED FUNCTION TIMER (EFT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
10.4 MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (MFT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
10.5 MULTIPROTOCOL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI-M) . . . . . . . . . . . 211
10.6 ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI-A) . . . . . . . . . . . 236
10.7 SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (SPI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
10.8 I2C BUS INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
10.9 J1850 BYTE LEVEL PROTOCOL DECODER (JBLPD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
10.10 CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (BXCAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
10.11 10-BIT ANALOG TO DIGITAL CONVERTER (ADC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
11 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
12 GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
12.1 ORDERING INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
12.2 VERSION-SPECIFIC SALES CONDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
12.3 PACKAGE MECHANICAL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
12.4 DEVELOPMENT TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
13 KNOWN LIMITATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
13.1 ST92F124/F150/F250 KNOWN LIMITATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
13.2 ST92F150-EMU2 EMULATION CHIP KNOWN LIMITATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
14 REVISION HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
3/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1.1 INTRODUCTION
The ST92F124/F150/F250 microcontroller is developed and manufactured by STMicroelectronics
using a proprietary n-well HCMOS process. Its
performance derives from the use of a flexible
256-register programming model for ultra-fast context switching and real-time event response. The
intelligent on-chip peripherals offload the ST9 core
from I/O and data management processing tasks
allowing critical application tasks to get the maximum use of core resources. The new-generation
ST9 MCU devices now also support low power
consumption and low voltage operation for powerefficient and low-cost embedded systems.
1.1.1 ST9+ Core
The advanced Core consists of the Central
Processing Unit (CPU), the Register File, the Interrupt and DMA controller, and the Memory Management Unit. The MMU allows a single linear address space of up to 4 Mbytes.
Four independent buses are controlled by the
Core: a 22-bit memory bus, an 8-bit register data
bus, an 8-bit register address bus and a 6-bit interrupt/DMA bus which connects the interrupt and
DMA controllers in the on-chip peripherals with the
core.
This multiple bus architecture makes the ST9 family devices highly efficient for accessing on and offchip memory and fast exchange of data with the
on-chip peripherals.
The general-purpose registers can be used as accumulators, index registers, or address pointers.
Adjacent register pairs make up 16-bit registers for
addressing or 16-bit processing. Although the ST9
has an 8-bit ALU, the chip handles 16-bit operations, including arithmetic, loads/stores, and memory/register and memory/memory exchanges.
The powerful I/O capabilities demanded by microcontroller applications are fulfilled by the
ST92F150/F124 with 48 (64-pin devices) or 77
(100-pin devices) I/O lines dedicated to digital Input/Output and with 80 I/O lines by the ST92F250.
These lines are grouped into up to ten 8-bit I/O
Ports and can be configured on a bit basis under
software control to provide timing, status signals,
an address/data bus for interfacing to the external
memory, timer inputs and outputs, analog inputs,
external interrupts and serial or parallel I/O. Two
memory spaces are available to support this wide
range of configurations: a combined Program/
Data Memory Space and the internal Register File,
4/426
9
which includes the control and status registers of
the on-chip peripherals.
1.1.2 External Memory Interface
100-pin devices have a 22-bit external address
bus allowing them to address up to 4M bytes of external memory.
1.1.3 On-chip Peripherals
Two 16-bit Multifunction Timers, each with an 8 bit
Prescaler and 12 operating modes allow simple
use for complex waveform generation and measurement, PWM functions and many other system
timing functions by the usage of the two associated DMA channels for each timer.
Two Extended Function Timers provide further
timing and signal generation capabilities.
A Standard Timer can be used to generate a stable time base independent from the PLL.
An I2C interface (two in the ST92F250 device) provides fast I2C and Access Bus support.
The SPI is a synchronous serial interface for Master and Slave device communication. It supports
single master and multimaster systems.
A J1850 Byte Level Protocol Decoder is available
(ST92F150JDV1 device only) for communicating
with a J1850 network.
The bxCAN (basic extended) interface (two in the
ST92F150JDV1 device) supports 2.0B Active protocol. It has 3 transmit mailboxes, 2 independent
receive FIFOs and 8 filters.
In addition, there is an 16 channel Analog to Digital
Converter with integral sample and hold, fast conversion time and 10-bit resolution.
There is one Multiprotocol Serial Communications
Interface with an integral generator, asynchronous
and synchronous capability (fully programmable
format) and associated address/wake-up option,
plus two DMA channels.
On 100-pin devices, there is an additional asynchronous Serial Communications interface with
13-bit LIN Synch Break generation capability.
Finally, a programmable PLL Clock Generator allows the usage of standard 3 to 5 MHz crystals to
obtain a large range of internal frequencies up to
24 MHz. Low power Run (SLOW), Wait For Interrupt, low power Wait For Interrupt, STOP and
HALT modes are also available.
ST92F124/F150/F250 - GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Figure 1. ST92F124R9: Architectural Block Diagram
FLASH
64 Kbytes
E3 TM
1 Kbyte
NMI
256 bytes
Register File
Fully
Prog.
I/Os
MEMORY BUS
RAM
2 Kbytes
P0[7:0]
P1[2:0]
P2[7:0]
P3[7:4]
P4[7:4]
P5[7:0]
P6[5:2,0]
P7[7:0]
8/16 bits
CPU
INT[5:0]
WKUP[13:0]
Interrupt
Management
I2C BUS
SDA
SCL
ST9 CORE
WATCHDOG
RCCU
STOUT
ST. TIMER
ICAPA0
OCMPA0
ICAPB0
EF TIMER 0
ICAPA1
OCMPA1
ICAPB1
TINPA0
TOUTA0
TINPB0
TOUTB0
TINPA1
TOUTA1
TINPB1
TOUTB1
VREG
REGISTER BUS
OSCIN
OSCOUT
RESET
CLOCK2/8
INTCLK
CK_AF
SPI
ADC
WDOUT
HW0SW1
MISO
MOSI
SCK
SS
AVDD
AVSS
AIN[15:8]
EXTRG
EF TIMER 1
MF TIMER 0
SCI M
TXCLK
RXCLK
SIN
DCD
SOUT
CLKOUT
RTS
MF TIMER 1
VOLTAGE
REGULATOR
The alternate functions (Italic characters) are mapped on Port 0, Port 1, Port2, Port3, Port4, Port5, Port6
and Port7.
5/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Figure 2. ST92F124V1: Architectural Block Diagram
FLASH
128 Kbytes
AS
DS
RW
WAIT
NMI
DS2
RW
INT[6:0]
WKUP[15:0]
OSCIN
OSCOUT
RESET
CLOCK2/8
INTCLK
CK_AF
RAM
4 Kbytes
256 bytes
Register File
MEMORY BUS
E3 TM
1 Kbyte
Ext. MEM.
ADDRESS
DATA
Port0
A[7:0]
D[7:0]
Ext. MEM.
ADDRESS
Ports
1,9
A[10:8]
A[21:11]
Fully
Prog.
I/Os
8/16 bits
CPU
Interrupt
Management
ST9 CORE
I2C BUS
STOUT
ST. TIMER
WATCHDOG
ICAPA0
OCMPA0
ICAPB0
OCMPB0
EXTCLK0
EF TIMER 0
ICAPA1
OCMPA1
ICAPB1
OCMPB1
EXTCLK1
EF TIMER 1
TINPA0
TOUTA0
TINPB0
TOUTB0
TINPA1
TOUTA1
TINPB1
TOUTB1
VREG
MF TIMER 0
REGISTER BUS
RCCU
SPI
ADC
SCI M
MF TIMER 1
SCI A
P0[7:0]
P1[7:3]
P1[2:0]
P2[7:0]
P3[7:4]
P3[3:1]
P4[7:4]
P4[3:0]
P5[7:0]
P6[5:2,0]
P6.1
P7[7:0]
P8[7:0]
P9[7:0]
SDA
SCL
WDOUT
HW0SW1
MISO
MOSI
SCK
SS
AVDD
AVSS
AIN[15:8]
AIN[7:0]
EXTRG
TXCLK
RXCLK
SIN
DCD
SOUT
CLKOUT
RTS
RDI
TDO
VOLTAGE
REGULATOR
The alternate functions (Italic characters) are mapped on Port 0, Port 1, Port2, Port3, Port4, Port5, Port6, Port7,
Port8 and Port9.
6/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Figure 3. ST92F150C(R/V)1/9: Architectural Block Diagram
FLASH
128/64 Kbytes
AS
DS
RW
WAIT
NMI
DS2
RW*
INT[5:0]
INT6*
WKUP[13:0]
WKUP[15:14]*
OSCIN
OSCOUT
RESET
CLOCK2/8
INTCLK
CK_AF
RAM
2/4 Kbytes
256 bytes
Register File
MEMORY BUS
E3 TM
1 Kbyte
Ext. MEM.
ADDRESS
DATA
Port0
A[7:0]
D[7:0]
Ext. MEM.
ADDRESS
Ports
1,9*
A[10:8]
A[21:11]*
Fully
Prog.
I/Os
8/16 bits
CPU
Interrupt
Management
ST9 CORE
I2C BUS
STOUT
ST. TIMER
WATCHDOG
ICAPA0
OCMPA0
ICAPB0
OCMPB0*
EXTCLK0*
EF TIMER 0
ICAPA1
OCMPA1
ICAPB1
OCMPB1*
EXTCLK1*
TINPA0
TOUTA0
TINPB0
TOUTB0
TINPA1
TOUTA1
TINPB1
TOUTB1
VREG
EF TIMER 1
MF TIMER 0
REGISTER BUS
RCCU
SPI
ADC
SCI M
MF TIMER 1
SCI A*
VOLTAGE
REGULATOR
CAN_0
P0[7:0]
P1[7:3]*
P1[2:0]
P2[7:0]
P3[7:4]
P3[3:1]*
P4[7:4]
P4[3:0]*
P5[7:0]
P6[5:2,0]
P6.1*
P7[7:0]
P8[7:0]*
P9[7:0]*
SDA
SCL
WDOUT
HW0SW1
MISO
MOSI
SCK
SS
AVDD
AVSS
AIN[15:8]
AIN[7:0]
EXTRG
TXCLK
RXCLK
SIN
DCD
SOUT
CLKOUT
RTS
RDI
TDO
RX0
TX0
* Not available on 64-pin version.
The alternate functions (Italic characters) are mapped on Port 0, Port 1, Port2, Port3, Port4, Port5, Port6, Port7,
Port8* and Port9*.
7/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Figure 4. ST92F150JDV1: Architectural Block Diagram
FLASH
128 Kbytes
AS
DS
RW
WAIT
NMI
DS2
RW
INT[6:0]
WKUP[15:0]
RAM
6 Kbytes
256 bytes
Register File
MEMORY BUS
E3 TM
1K byte
A[7:0]
D[7:0]
Ext. MEM.
ADDRESS
Ports 1,9
A[21:8]
Fully Prog.
I/Os
8/16 bit
CPU
J1850
JBLPD
Interrupt
Management
ST9 CORE
I2C BUS
RCCU
WATCHDOG
STOUT
ST. TIMER
ICAPA0
OCMPA0
ICAPB0
OCMPB0
EXTCLK0
EF TIMER 0
ICAPA1
OCMPA1
ICAPB1
OCMPB1
EXTCLK1
EF TIMER 1
TINPA0
TOUTA0
TINPB0
TOUTB0
MF TIMER 0
TINPA1
TOUTA1
TINPB1
TOUTB1
MF TIMER 1
VREG
VOLTAGE
REGULATOR
REGISTER BUS
OSCIN
OSCOUT
RESET
CLOCK2/8
CLOCK2
INTCLK
CK_AF
Ext. MEM.
ADDRESS
DATA
Port0
SPI
ADC
P0[7:0]
P1[7:0]
P2[7:0]
P3[7:1]
P4[7:0]
P5[7:0]
P6[5:0]
P7[7:0]
P8[7:0]
P9[7:0]
VPWI
VPWO
SDA
SCL
WDOUT
HW0SW1
MISO
MOSI
SCK
SS
AVDD
AVSS
AIN[15:0]
EXTRG
SCI M
TXCLK
RXCLK
SIN
DCD
SOUT
CLKOUT
RTS
SCI A
RDI
TDO
CAN_0
RX0
TX0
CAN_1
RX1
TX1
The alternate functions (Italic characters) are mapped on Port0, Port1, Port2, Port3, Port4, Port5, Port6, Port7,
Port8 and Port9.
8/426
1
ST92F124/F150/F250 - GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Figure 5. ST92F250CV2: Architectural Block Diagram
FLASH
256 Kbytes
AS
DS
RW
WAIT
NMI
DS2
RW
INT[6:0]
WKUP[15:0]
RAM
8 Kbytes
256 bytes
Register File
MEMORY BUS
E3 TM
1K byte
Ext. MEM.
ADDRESS
DATA
Port0
A[7:0]
D[7:0]
Ext. MEM.
ADDRESS
Ports 1,9
A[21:8]
Fully Prog.
I/Os
8/16 bit
CPU
Interrupt
Management
I2C BUS _0
SDA0
SCL0
I2C BUS _1
SDA1
SCL1
ST9 CORE
STOUT
RCCU
ST. TIMER
ICAPA0
OCMPA0
ICAPB0
OCMPB0
EXTCLK0
EF TIMER 0
ICAPA1
OCMPA1
ICAPB1
OCMPB1
EXTCLK1
EF TIMER 1
TINPA0
TOUTA0
TINPB0
TOUTB0
MF TIMER 0
TINPA1
TOUTA1
TINPB1
TOUTB1
VREG
REGISTER BUS
OSCIN
OSCOUT
RESET
CLOCK2/8
CLOCK2
INTCLK
CK_AF
P0[7:0]
P1[7:0]
P2[7:0]
P3[7:0]
P4[7:0]
P5[7:0]
P6[7:0]
P7[7:0]
P8[7:0]
P9[7:0]
WATCHDOG
SPI
ADC
WDOUT
HW0SW1
MISO
MOSI
SCK
SS
AVDD
AVSS
AIN[15:0]
EXTRG
SCI M
TXCLK
RXCLK
SIN
DCD
SOUT
CLKOUT
RTS
SCI A
RDI
TDO
CAN_0
RX0
TX0
MF TIMER 1
VOLTAGE
REGULATOR
The alternate functions (Italic characters) are mapped on Port0, Port1, Port2, Port3, Port4, Port5, Port6, Port7,
Port8 and Port9.
9/426
1
ST92F124/F150/F250 - GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1.2 PIN DESCRIPTION
AS. Address Strobe (output, active low, 3-state).
Address Strobe is pulsed low once at the beginning of each memory cycle. The rising edge of AS
indicates that address, Read/Write (RW), and
Data signals are valid for memory transfers.
DS. Data Strobe (output, active low, 3-state). Data
Strobe provides the timing for data movement to or
from Port 0 for each memory transfer. During a
write cycle, data out is valid at the leading edge of
DS. During a read cycle, Data In must be valid prior to the trailing edge of DS. When the ST9 accesses on-chip memory, DS is held high during
the whole memory cycle.
RESET. Reset (input, active low). The ST9 is initialised by the Reset signal. With the deactivation
of RESET, program execution begins from the
Program memory location pointed to by the vector
contained in program memory locations 00h and
01h.
RW. Read/Write (output, 3-state). Read/Write determines the direction of data transfer for external
memory transactions. RW is low when writing to
external memory, and high for all other transactions.
OSCIN, OSCOUT. Oscillator (input and output).
These pins connect a parallel-resonant crystal, or
an external source to the on-chip clock oscillator
and buffer. OSCIN is the input of the oscillator inverter; OSCOUT is the output of the oscillator inverter.
HW0SW1. When connected to VDD through a 1K
pull-up resistor, the software watchdog option is
selected. When connected to VSS through a 1K
pull-down resistor, the hardware watchdog option
is selected.
VPWO. This pin is the output line of the J1850 peripheral (JBLPD). It is available only on some devices.
RX1/WKUP6. Receive Data input of CAN1 and
Wake-up line 6. Available only on some devices.
When the CAN1 peripheral is disabled, a pull-up
resistor is connected internally to this pin.
TX1. Transmit Data output of CAN1. Available on
some devices.
10/426
9
P0[7:0], P1[7:0] or P9[7:2] (Input/Output, TTL or
CMOS compatible). 11 lines (64-pin devices) or 22
lines (100-pin devices) providing the external
memory interface for addressing 2K or 4M bytes of
external memory.
P0[7:0], P1[2:0], P2[7:0], P3[7:4], P4.[7:4],
P5[7:0], P6[5:2,0], P7[7:0] I/O Port Lines (Input/
Output, TTL or CMOS compatible). I/O lines
grouped into I/O ports of 8 bits, bit programmable
under software control as general purpose I/O or
as alternate functions.
P1[7:3], P3[3:1], P4[3:0], P6.1, P8[7:0], P9[7:0]
Additional I/O Port Lines available on 100-pin versions only.
P3.0, P6[7:6] Additional I/O Port Lines available
on ST92F250 version only.
AVDD. Analog VDD of the Analog to Digital Converter (common for ADC 0 and ADC 1).
AVDD can be switched off when the ADC is not in
use.
AVSS. Analog VSS of the Analog to Digital Converter (common for ADC 0 and ADC 1).
VDD. Main Power Supply Voltage. Four pins are
available on 100-pin versions, two on 64-pin versions. The pins are internally connected.
VSS. Digital Circuit Ground. Four pins are available on 100-pin versions, two on 64-pin versions.
The pins are internally connected.
VTEST Power Supply Voltage for Flash test purposes. This pin must be kept to 0 in user mode.
VREG. Stabilization capacitors for the internal voltage regulator. The user must connect external stabilization capacitors to these pins. Refer to Figure
16.
1.2.1 I/O Port Alternate Functions
Each pin of the I/O ports of the ST92F124/F150/
F250 may assume software programmable Alternate Functions as shown in Section 1.4.
1.2.2 Termination of Unused Pins
For unused pins, input mode is not recommended.
These pins must be kept at a fixed voltage using
the output push pull mode of the I/O or an external
pull-up or pull-down resistor.
ST92F124/F150/F250 - GENERAL DESCRIPTION
HW0SW1
RESET
OSCOUT
OSCIN
VDD
VSS
P7.7/AIN15/WKUP13
P7.6/AIN14/WKUP12
P7.5/AIN13/WKUP11
P7.4/AIN12/WKUP3
P7.3/AIN11
P7.2/AIN10
P7.1/AIN9
P7.0/AIN8/CK_AF
AVSS
AVDD
Figure 6. ST92F124R9: Pin Configuration (Top-view TQFP64)
64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49
1
48
2
47
3
46
4
45
5
44
6
43
42
7
41
8
40
9
39
10
38
11
37
12
36
13
35
14
34
15
33
16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
ST92F124R9
N.C
P6.5/WKUP10/INTCLK
P6.4/NMI
P6.3/INT3/INT5
P6.2/INT2/INT4
P6.0/INT0/INT1/CLOCK2/8
P0.7(/AIN7***)
P0.6(/AIN6***)
P0.5(/AIN5***)
P0.4(/AIN4***)
P0.3(/AIN3***)
P0.2(/AIN2***)
P0.1(/AIN1***)
P0.0(/AIN0***)
Reserved*
Reserved*
Reserved*
TINPA0/P2.0
TINPB0/P2.1
TOUTA0/P2.2
TOUTB0/P2.3
TINPA1/P2.4
TINPB1/P2.5
TOUTA1/P2.6
TOUTB1/P2.7
VSS
VDD
VREG
**VTEST
(ICAPA0***/OCMPA0***/)P1.0
(ICAPA1***/OCMPA1***/)P1.1
(ICAPB1***/ICAPB0***/)P1.2
WAIT/WKUP5/P5.0
WKUP6/WDOUT/P5.1
SIN/WKUP2/P5.2
WDIN/SOUT/P5.3
TXCLK/CLKOUT/P5.4
RXCL0/WKUP7/P5.5
DCD/WKUP8/P5.6
WKUP9/RTS/P5.7
WKUP4/P4.4
EXTRG/STOUT/P4.5
SDA/P4.6
WKUP1/SCL/P4.7
SS/P3.4
MISO/P3.5
MOSI/P3.6
SCK/WKUP0/P3.7
* Reserved for ST tests, must be left unconnected
** VTEST must be kept low in standard operating mode
*** The ST92F150-EMU2 emulator does not emulate ADC channels from AIN0 to AIN7 and extended function timers because they are not implemented on the emulator chip. See also Section 13.2 on page 418
11/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - GENERAL DESCRIPTION
P9.2/A16
P9.1/TDO
P9.0/RDI
HW0SW1
RESET
OSCOUT
OSCIN
VDD
VSS
P7.7/AIN15/7/WKUP13
P7.6/AIN14/WKUP12
P7.5/AIN13/WKUP11
P7.4/AIN12/WKUP3
P7.3/AIN11
P7.2/AIN10
P7.1/AIN9
P7.0/AIN8/CK_AF
AVSS
AVDD
P8.7/AIN7
Figure 7. ST92F124V1: Pin Configuration (Top-view PQFP100)
100 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81
80
1
2
79
3
78
4
77
5
76
6
75
7
74
8
73
9
72
10
71
11
70
12
69
13
68
14
67
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
ST92F124
25
26
27
28
29
30
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
66
65
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
VREG
RW
TINPA0/P2.0
TINPB0/P2.1
TOUTA0/P2.2
TOUTB0/P2.3
TINPA1/P2.4
TINPB1/P2.5
TOUTA1/P2.6
TOUTB1/P2.7
VSS
VDD
VREG
*VTEST
A8/P1.0
A9/P1.1
A10/P1.2
A11/P1.3
WKUP6
NC
A17/P9.3
A18/P9.4
A19/P9.5
A20/P9.6
A21/P9.7
WAIT/WKUP5/P5.0
WKUP6/WDOUT/P5.1
SIN/WKUP2/P5.2
WDIN/SOUT/P5.3
TXCLK/CLKOUT/P5.4
RXCLK/WKUP7/P5.5
DCD/WKUP8/P5.6
WKUP9/RTS/P5.7
ICAPA1/P4.0
CLOCK2/P4.1
OCMPA1/P4.2
VSS
VDD
ICAPB1/OCMPB1/P4.3
EXTCLK1/WKUP4/P4.4
EXTRG/STOUT/P4.5
SDA/P4.6
WKUP1/SCL/P4.7
ICAPB0/P3.1
ICAPA0/OCMPA0/P3.2
OCMPB0/P3.3
EXTCLK0/SS/P3.4
MISO/P3.5
MOSI/P3.6
SCK/WKUP0/P3.7
* VTEST must be kept low in standard operating mode.
12/426
9
P8.6/AIN6
P8.5/AIN5
P8.4/AIN4
P8.3/AIN3
P8.2/AIN2
P8.1/AIN1/WKUP15
P8.0/AIN0/WKUP14
NC
P6.5/WKUP10/INTCLK
P6.4/NMI
P6.3/INT3/INT5
P6.2/INT2/INT4/DS2
P6.1/INT6/RW
P6.0/INT0/INT1/CLOCK2/8
P0.7/A7/D7
VDD
VSS
P0.6/A6/D6
P0.5/A5/D5
P0.4/A4/D4
P0.3/A3/D3
P0.2/A2/D2
P0.1/A1/D1
P0.0/A0/D0
AS
DS
P1.7/A15
P1.6/A14
P1.5/A13
P1.4/A12
ST92F124/F150/F250 - GENERAL DESCRIPTION
P7.6/AIN14/WKUP12
P7.5/AIN13/WKUP11
P7.4/AIN12/WKUP3
P7.3/AIN11
P7.2/AIN10
P7.1/AIN9
P7.0/AIN8/CK_AF
AVSS
AVDD
P8.7/AIN7
P8.6/AIN6
P8.5/AIN5
P7.7/AIN15/7/WKUP13
P9.5/A19
P9.4/A18
P9.3/A17
P9.2/A16
P9.1/TDO
P9.0/RDI
HW0SW1
RESET
OSCOUT
OSCIN
VDD
VSS
Figure 8. ST92F124V1: Pin Configuration (Top-view TQFP100)
100 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76
A20/P9.6
A21/P9.7
WAIT/WKUP5/P5.0
WKUP6/WDOUT/P5.1
SIN/WKUP2/P5.2
WDIN/SOUT/P5.3
TXCLK/CLKOUT/P5.4
RXCLK/WKUP7/P5.5
DCD/WKUP8/P5.6
WKUP9/RTS/P5.7
ICAPA1/P4.0
CLOCK2/P4.1
OCMPA1/P4.2
VSS
VDD
ICAPB1/OCMPB1/P4.3
EXTCLK1/WKUP4/P4.4
EXTRG/STOUT/P4.5
SDA/P4.6
WKUP1/SCL/P4.7
ICAPB0/P3.1
ICAPA0/OCMPA0/P3.2
OCMPB0/P3.3
EXTCLK0/SS/P3.4
MISO/P3.5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
ST92F124V1
75
74
73
72
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
P8.4/AIN4
P8.3/AIN3
P8.2/AIN2
P8.1/AIN1/WKUP15
P8.0/AIN0/WKUP14
NC
P6.5/WKUP10/INTCLK
P6.4/NMI
P6.3/INT3/INT5
P6.2/INT2/INT4/DS2
P6.1/INT6/RW
P6.0/INT0/INT1/CLOCK2/8
P0.7/A7/D7
VDD
VSS
P0.6/A6/D6
P0.5/A5/D5
P0.4/A4/D4
P0.3/A3/D3
P0.2/A2/D2
P0.1/A1/D1
P0.0/A0/D0
AS
DS
P1.7/A15
MOSI/P3.6
SCK/WKUP0/P3.7
VREG
RW
TINPA0/P2.0
TINPB0/P2.1
TOUTA0/P2.2
TOUTB0/P2.3
TINPA1/P2.4
TINPB1/P2.5
TOUTA1/P2.6
TOUTB1/P2.7
VSS
VDD
VREG
*VTEST
A8/P1.0
A9/P1.1
A10/P1.2
A11/P1.3
WKUP6
NC
A12/P1.4
A13/P1.5
A14/P1.6
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
* VTEST must be kept low in standard operating mode.
13/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - GENERAL DESCRIPTION
HW0SW1
RESET
OSCOUT
OSCIN
VDD
VSS
P7.7/AIN15/WKUP13
P7.6/AIN14/WKUP12
P7.5/AIN13/WKUP11
P7.4/AIN12/WKUP3
P7.3/AIN11
P7.2/AIN10
P7.1/AIN9
P7.0/AIN8/CK_AF
AVSS
AVDD
Figure 9. ST92F150: Pin Configuration (Top-view TQFP64)
64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49
1
48
2
47
3
46
4
45
5
44
6
43
42
7
41
8
40
9
39
10
38
11
37
12
36
13
35
14
34
15
33
16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
ST92F150
Reserved*
TINPA0/P2.0
TINPB0/P2.1
TOUTA0/P2.2
TOUTB0/P2.3
TINPA1/P2.4
TINPB1/P2.5
TOUTA1/P2.6
TOUTB1/P2.7
VSS
VDD
VREG
**VTEST
(ICAPA0***/OCMPA0***/)P1.0
(ICAPA1***/OCMPA1***/P1.1
(ICAPB1***/ICAPB0***/)P1.2
TX0/WAIT/WKUP5/P5.0
RX0/WKUP6/WDOUT/P5.1
SIN/WKUP2/P5.2
WDIN/SOUT/P5.3
TXCLK/CLKOUT/P5.4
RXCL0/WKUP7/P5.5
DCD/WKUP8/P5.6
WKUP9/RTS/P5.7
WKUP4/P4.4
EXTRG/STOUT/P4.5
SDA/P4.6
WKUP1/SCL/P4.7
SS/P3.4
MISO/P3.5
MOSI/P3.6
SCK/WKUP0/P3.7
* Reserved for ST tests, must be left unconnected
** VTEST must be kept low in standard operating mode.
*** Not emulated. Refer to Section 13.2 on page 418
14/426
9
N.C
P6.5/WKUP10/INTCLK
P6.4/NMI
P6.3/INT3/INT5
P6.2/INT2/INT4
P6.0/INT0/INT1/CLOCK2/8
P0.7(/AIN7***)
P0.6(/AIN6***)
P0.5(/AIN5***)
P0.4(/AIN4***)
P0.3(/AIN3***)
P0.2(/AIN2***)
P0.1(/AIN1***)
P0.0(/AIN0***)
Reserved*
Reserved*
ST92F124/F150/F250 - GENERAL DESCRIPTION
P9.2/A16
P9.1/TDO
P9.0/RDI
HW0SW1
RESET
OSCOUT
OSCIN
VDD
VSS
P7.7/AIN15/7/WKUP13
P7.6/AIN14/WKUP12
P7.5/AIN13/WKUP11
P7.4/AIN12/WKUP3
P7.3/AIN11
P7.2/AIN10
P7.1/AIN9
P7.0/AIN8/CK_AF
AVSS
AVDD
P8.7/AIN7
Figure 10. ST92F150C: Pin Configuration (Top-view PQFP100)
100 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81
80
1
2
79
3
78
4
77
5
76
6
75
7
74
8
73
9
72
10
71
11
70
12
69
13
68
14
67
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
ST92F150C
25
26
27
28
29
30
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
66
65
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
P8.6/AIN6
P8.5/AIN5
P8.4/AIN4
P8.3/AIN3
P8.2/AIN2
P8.1/AIN1/WKUP15
P8.0/AIN0/WKUP14
NC
P6.5/WKUP10/INTCLK
P6.4/NMI
P6.3/INT3/INT5
P6.2/INT2/INT4/DS2
P6.1/INT6/RW
P6.0/INT0/INT1/CLOCK2/8
P0.7/A7/D7
VDD
VSS
P0.6/A6/D6
P0.5/A5/D5
P0.4/A4/D4
P0.3/A3/D3
P0.2/A2/D2
P0.1/A1/D1
P0.0/A0/D0
AS
DS
P1.7/A15
P1.6/A14
P1.5/A13
P1.4/A12
VREG
RW
TINPA0/P2.0
TINPB0/P2.1
TOUTA0/P2.2
TOUTB0/P2.3
TINPA1/P2.4
TINPB1/P2.5
TOUTA1/P2.6
TOUTB1/P2.7
VSS
VDD
VREG
*VTEST
A8/P1.0
A9/P1.1
A10/P1.2
A11/P1.3
WKUP6
NC
A17/P9.3
A18/P9.4
A19/P9.5
A20/P9.6
A21/P9.7
TX0/WAIT/WKUP5/P5.0
RX0/WKUP6/WDOUT/P5.1
SIN/WKUP2/P5.2
WDIN/SOUT/P5.3
TXCLK/CLKOUT/P5.4
RXCLK/WKUP7/P5.5
DCD/WKUP8/P5.6
WKUP9/RTS/P5.7
ICAPA1/P4.0
CLOCK2/P4.1
OCMPA1/P4.2
VSS
VDD
ICAPB1/OCMPB1/P4.3
EXTCLK1/WKUP4/P4.4
EXTRG/STOUT/P4.5
SDA/P4.6
WKUP1/SCL/P4.7
ICAPB0/P3.1
ICAPA0/OCMPA0/P3.2
OCMPB0/P3.3
EXTCLK0/SS/P3.4
MISO/P3.5
MOSI/P3.6
SCK/WKUP0/P3.7
* VTEST must be kept low in standard operating mode.
15/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - GENERAL DESCRIPTION
P9.2/A16
P9.1/TDO
P9.0/RDI
HW0SW1
RESET
OSCOUT
OSCIN
VDD
VSS
P7.7/AIN15/7/WKUP13
P7.6/AIN14/WKUP12
P7.5/AIN13/WKUP11
P7.4/AIN12/WKUP3
P7.3/AIN11
P7.2/AIN10
P7.1/AIN9
P7.0/AIN8/CK_AF
AVSS
AVDD
P8.7/AIN7
Figure 11. ST92F150JD: Pin Configuration (Top-view PQFP100)
100 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81
80
1
2
79
3
78
4
77
5
76
6
75
7
74
8
73
9
72
10
71
11
70
12
69
13
68
14
67
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
ST92F150JD
25
26
27
28
29
30
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
66
65
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
VREG
RW
TINPA0/P2.0
TINPB0/P2.1
TOUTA0/P2.2
TOUTB0/P2.3
TINPA1/P2.4
TINPB1/P2.5
TOUTA1/P2.6
TOUTB1/P2.7
VSS
VDD
VREG
*VTEST
A8/P1.0
A9/P1.1
A10/P1.2
A11/P1.3
RX1/WKUP6
TX1
A17/P9.3
A18/P9.4
A19/P9.5
A20/P9.6
A21/P9.7
TX0/WAIT/WKUP5/P5.0
RX0/WKUP6/WDOUT/P5.1
SIN/WKUP2/P5.2
WDIN/SOUT/P5.3
TXCLK/CLKOUT/P5.4
RXCLK/WKUP7/P5.5
DCD/WKUP8/P5.6
WKUP9/RTS/P5.7
ICAPA1/P4.0
CLOCK2/P4.1
OCMPA1/P4.2
VSS
VDD
ICAPB1/OCMPB1/P4.3
EXTCLK1/WKUP4/P4.4
EXTRG/STOUT/P4.5
SDA/P4.6
WKUP1/SCL/P4.7
ICAPB0/P3.1
ICAPA0/OCMPA0/P3.2
OCMPB0/P3.3
EXTCLK0/SS/P3.4
MISO/P3.5
MOSI/P3.6
SCK/WKUP0/P3.7
* VTEST must be kept low in standard operating mode.
16/426
9
P8.6/AIN6
P8.5/AIN5
P8.4/AIN4
P8.3/AIN3
P8.2/AIN2
P8.1/AIN1/WKUP15
P8.0/AIN0/WKUP14
VPWO
P6.5/WKUP10/INTCLK/VPW
P6.4/NMI
P6.3/INT3/INT5
P6.2/INT2/INT4/DS2
P6.1/INT6/RW
P6.0/INT0/INT1/CLOCK2/8
P0.7/A7/D7
VDD
VSS
P0.6/A6/D6
P0.5/A5/D5
P0.4/A4/D4
P0.3/A3/D3
P0.2/A2/D2
P0.1/A1/D1
P0.0/A0/D0
AS
DS
P1.7/A15
P1.6/A14
P1.5/A13
P1.4/A12
ST92F124/F150/F250 - GENERAL DESCRIPTION
P7.6/AIN14/WKUP12
P7.5/AIN13/WKUP11
P7.4/AIN12/WKUP3
P7.3/AIN11
P7.2/AIN10
P7.1/AIN9
P7.0/AIN8/CK_AF
AVSS
AVDD
P8.7/AIN7
P8.6/AIN6
P8.5/AIN5
P7.7/AIN15/7/WKUP13
P9.5/A19
P9.4/A18
P9.3/A17
P9.2/A16
P9.1/TDO
P9.0/RDI
HW0SW1
RESET
OSCOUT
OSCIN
VDD
VSS
Figure 12. ST92F150C: Pin Configuration (Top-view TQFP100)
100 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76
A20/P9.6
A21/P9.7
TX0/WAIT/WKUP5/P5.0
RX0/WKUP6/WDOUT/P5.1
SIN/WKUP2/P5.2
WDIN/SOUT/P5.3
TXCLK/CLKOUT/P5.4
RXCLK/WKUP7/P5.5
DCD/WKUP8/P5.6
WKUP9/RTS/P5.7
ICAPA1/P4.0
CLOCK2/P4.1
OCMPA1/P4.2
VSS
VDD
ICAPB1/OCMPB1/P4.3
EXTCLK1/WKUP4/P4.4
EXTRG/STOUT/P4.5
SDA/P4.6
WKUP1/SCL/P4.7
ICAPB0/P3.1
ICAPA0/OCMPA0/P3.2
OCMPB0/P3.3
EXTCLK0/SS/P3.4
MISO/P3.5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
ST92F150C
75
74
73
72
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
P8.4/AIN4
P8.3/AIN3
P8.2/AIN2
P8.1/AIN1/WKUP15
P8.0/AIN0/WKUP14
NC
P6.5/WKUP10/INTCLK
P6.4/NMI
P6.3/INT3/INT5
P6.2/INT2/INT4/DS2
P6.1/INT6/RW
P6.0/INT0/INT1/CLOCK2/8
P0.7/A7/D7
VDD
VSS
P0.6/A6/D6
P0.5/A5/D5
P0.4/A4/D4
P0.3/A3/D3
P0.2/A2/D2
P0.1/A1/D1
P0.0/A0/D0
AS
DS
P1.7/A15
MOSI/P3.6
SCK/WKUP0/P3.7
VREG
RW
TINPA0/P2.0
TINPB0/P2.1
TOUTA0/P2.2
TOUTB0/P2.3
TINPA1/P2.4
TINPB1/P2.5
TOUTA1/P2.6
TOUTB1/P2.7
VSS
VDD
VREG
*VTEST
A8/P1.0
A9/P1.1
A10/P1.2
A11/P1.3
WKUP6
NC
A12/P1.4
A13/P1.5
A14/P1.6
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
* VTEST must be kept low in standard operating mode.
17/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - GENERAL DESCRIPTION
P7.6/AIN14/WKUP12
P7.5/AIN13/WKUP11
P7.4/AIN12/WKUP3
P7.3/AIN11
P7.2/AIN10
P7.1/AIN9
P7.0/AIN8/CK_AF
AVSS
AVDD
P8.7/AIN7
P8.6/AIN6
P8.5/AIN5
P7.7/AIN15/7/WKUP13
P9.5/A19
P9.4/A18
P9.3/A17
P9.2/A16
P9.1/TDO
P9.0/RDI
HW0SW1
RESET
OSCOUT
OSCIN
VDD
VSS
Figure 13. ST92F150JD: Pin Configuration (Top-view TQFP100)
100 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76
A20/P9.6
A21/P9.7
TX0/WAIT/WKUP5/P5.0
RX0/WKUP6/WDOUT/P5.1
SIN/WKUP2/P5.2
WDIN/SOUT/P5.3
TXCLK/CLKOUT/P5.4
RXCLK/WKUP7/P5.5
DCD/WKUP8/P5.6
WKUP9/RTS/P5.7
ICAPA1/P4.0
CLOCK2/P4.1
OCMPA1/P4.2
VSS
VDD
ICAPB1/OCMPB1/P4.3
EXTCLK1/WKUP4/P4.4
EXTRG/STOUT/P4.5
SDA/P4.6
WKUP1/SCL/P4.7
ICAPB0/P3.1
ICAPA0/OCMPA0/P3.2
OCMPB0/P3.3
EXTCLK0/SS/P3.4
MISO/P3.5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
ST92F150JD
MOSI/P3.6
SCK/WKUP0/P3.7
VREG
RW
TINPA0/P2.0
TINPB0/P2.1
TOUTA0/P2.2
TOUTB0/P2.3
TINPA1/P2.4
TINPB1/P2.5
TOUTA1/P2.6
TOUTB1/P2.7
VSS
VDD
VREG
*VTEST
A8/P1.0
A9/P1.1
A10/P1.2
A11/P1.3
RX1/WKUP6
TX1
A12/P1.4
A13/P1.5
A14/P1.6
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
* VTEST must be kept low in standard operating mode.
18/426
9
75
74
73
72
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
P8.4/AIN4
P8.3/AIN3
P8.2/AIN2
P8.1/AIN1/WKUP15
P8.0/AIN0/WKUP14
VPWO
P6.5/WKUP10/INTCLK/VPW
P6.4/NMI
P6.3/INT3/INT5
P6.2/INT2/INT4/DS2
P6.1/INT6/RW
P6.0/INT0/INT1/CLOCK2/8
P0.7/A7/D7
VDD
VSS
P0.6/A6/D6
P0.5/A5/D5
P0.4/A4/D4
P0.3/A3/D3
P0.2/A2/D2
P0.1/A1/D1
P0.0/A0/D0
AS
DS
P1.7/A15
ST92F124/F150/F250 - GENERAL DESCRIPTION
P9.2/A16
P9.1/TDO
P9.0/RDI
HW0SW1
RESET
OSCOUT
OSCIN
VDD
VSS
P7.7/AIN15/7/WKUP13
P7.6/AIN14/WKUP12
P7.5/AIN13/WKUP11
P7.4/AIN12/WKUP3
P7.3/AIN11
P7.2/AIN10
P7.1/AIN9
P7.0/AIN8/CK_AF
AVSS
AVDD
P8.7/AIN7
Figure 14. ST92F250: Pin Configuration (Top-view PQFP100)
100 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81
80
1
2
79
3
78
4
77
5
76
6
75
7
74
8
73
9
72
10
71
11
70
12
69
13
68
14
67
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
ST92F250
25
26
27
28
29
30
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
66
65
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
P8.6/AIN6
P8.5/AIN5
P8.4/AIN4
P8.3/AIN3
P8.2/AIN2
P8.1/AIN1/WKUP15
P8.0/AIN0/WKUP14
P3.0
P6.5/WKUP10/INTCLK
P6.4/NMI
P6.3/INT3/INT5
P6.2/INT2/INT4/DS2
P6.1/INT6/RW
P6.0/INT0/INT1/CLOCK2/8
P0.7/A7/D7
VDD
VSS
P0.6/A6/D6
P0.5/A5/D5
P0.4/A4/D4
P0.3/A3/D3
P0.2/A2/D2
P0.1/A1/D1
P0.0/A0/D0
AS
DS
P1.7/A15
P1.6/A14
P1.5/A13
P1.4/A12
VREG
RW
TINPA0/P2.0
TINPB0/P2.1
TOUTA0/P2.2
TOUTB0/P2.3
TINPA1/P2.4
TINPB1/P2.5
TOUTA1/P2.6
TOUTB1/P2.7
VSS
VDD
VREG
*VTEST
A8/P1.0
A9/P1.1
A10/P1.2
A11/P1.3
P6.6
P6.7
SDA1/A17/P9.3
SCL1/A18/P9.4
A19/P9.5
A20/P9.6
A21/P9.7
TX0/WAIT/WKUP5/P5.0
RX0/WKUP6/WDOUT/P5.1
SIN/WKUP2/P5.2
WDIN/SOUT/P5.3
TXCLK/CLKOUT/P5.4
RXCLK/WKUP7/P5.5
DCD/WKUP8/P5.6
WKUP9/RTS/P5.7
ICAPA1/P4.0
CLOCK2/P4.1
OCMPA1/P4.2
VSS
VDD
ICAPB1/OCMPB1/P4.3
EXTCLK1/WKUP4/P4.4
EXTRG/STOUT/P4.5
SDA0/P4.6
WKUP1/SCL0/P4.7
ICAPB0/P3.1
ICAPA0/OCMPA0/P3.2
OCMPB0/P3.3
EXTCLK0/SS/P3.4
MISO/P3.5
MOSI/P3.6
SCK/WKUP0/P3.7
* VTEST must be kept low in standard operating mode.
19/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - GENERAL DESCRIPTION
P7.6/AIN14/WKUP12
P7.5/AIN13/WKUP11
P7.4/AIN12/WKUP3
P7.3/AIN11
P7.2/AIN10
P7.1/AIN9
P7.0/AIN8/CK_AF
AVSS
AVDD
P8.7/AIN7
P8.6/AIN6
P8.5/AIN5
P7.7/AIN15/7/WKUP13
P9.5/A19
P9.4/A18/SCL1
P9.3/A17/SDA1
P9.2/A16
P9.1/TDO
P9.0/RDI
HW0SW1
RESET
OSCOUT
OSCIN
VDD
VSS
Figure 15. ST92F250: Pin Configuration (Top-view TQFP100)
100 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76
A20/P9.6
A21/P9.7
TX/WAIT/WKUP5/P5.0
RX/WKUP6/WDOUT/P5.1
SIN/WKUP2/P5.2
WDIN/SOUT/P5.3
TXCLK/CLKOUT/P5.4
RXCLK/WKUP7/P5.5
DCD/WKUP8/P5.6
WKUP9/RTS/P5.7
ICAPA1/P4.0
CLOCK2/P4.1
OCMPA1/P4.2
VSS
VDD
ICAPB1/OCMPB1/P4.3
EXTCLK1/WKUP4/P4.4
EXTRG/STOUT/P4.5
SDA0/P4.6
WKUP1/SCL0/P4.7
ICAPB0/P3.1
ICAPA0/OCMPA0/P3.2
OCMPB0/P3.3
EXTCLK0/SS/P3.4
MISO/P3.5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
75
74
73
72
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
ST92F250
* VTEST must be kept low in standard operating mode.
20/426
9
A12/P1.4
A13/P1.5
A14/P1.6
P6.6
P6.7
MOSI/P3.6
SCK/WKUP0/P3.7
VREG
RW
TINPA0/P2.0
TINPB0/P2.1
TOUTA0/P2.2
TOUTB0/P2.3
TINPA1/P2.4
TINPB1/P2.5
TOUTA1/P2.6
TOUTB1/P2.7
VSS
VDD
VREG
*VTEST
A8/P1.0
A9/P1.1
A10/P1.2
A11/P1.3
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
P8.4/AIN4
P8.3/AIN3
P8.2/AIN2
P8.1/AIN1/WKUP15
P8.0/AIN0/WKUP14
P3.0
P6.5/WKUP10/INTCLK
P6.4/NMI
P6.3/INT3/INT5
P6.2/INT2/INT4/DS2
P6.1/INT6/RW
P6.0/INT0/INT1/CLOCK2/8
P0.7/A7/D7
VDD
VSS
P0.6/A6/D6
P0.5/A5/D5
P0.4/A4/D4
P0.3/A3/D3
P0.2/A2/D2
P0.1/A1/D1
P0.0/A0/D0
AS
DS
P1.7/A15
ST92F124/F150/F250 - GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Table 1. ST92F124/F150/F250 Power Supply Pins
Name
Function
Main Power Supply Voltage
VDD
(Pins internally connected)
Digital Circuit Ground
VSS
(Pins internally connected)
AVDD
TQFP64
27
60
26
59
PQFP100 TQFP100
18
15
42
39
65
62
93
90
17
14
41
38
64
61
92
89
Analog Circuit Supply Voltage
49
82
79
AVSS
Analog Circuit Ground
50
83
80
VTEST
Must be kept low in standard operating mode
29
44
41
VREG
Stabilization capacitor(s) for internal voltage regulator
28
31
43
28
40
Table 2. ST92F124/F150/F250 Primary Function Pins
Name
AS
DS
RW
OSCIN
OSCOUT
RESET
HW0SW1
VPWO1)
RX1/WKUP61)
TX11)
Function
Address Strobe
Data Strobe
Read/Write
Crystal Oscillator Input
Crystal Oscillator Output
Reset to initialize the Microcontroller
Watchdog HW/SW enabling selection
J1850 JBLPD Output
CAN1 Receive Data / Wake-up Line 6
CAN1 Transmit Data.
TQFP64 PQFP100 TQFP100
56
53
55
52
32
29
61
94
91
62
95
92
63
96
93
64
97
94
73
70
49
46
50
47
Note 1: ST92F150JDV1 only.
21/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1.3 VOLTAGE REGULATOR
The internal Voltage Regulator (VR) is used to
power the microcontroller starting from the external power supply. The VR comprises a Main voltage regulator and a Low-power regulator.
– The Main voltage regulator generates sufficient
current for the microcontroller to operate in any
mode. It has a static power consumption (300
µA typ.).
– The separate Low-Power regulator consumes
less power is used only when the microcontroller is in Low Power mode. It has a different design from the main VR and generates a lower,
non-stabilized and non-thermally-compensated
voltage sufficient for maintaining the data in
RAM and the Register File.
For both the Main VR and the Low-Power VR, stabilization is achieved by an external capacitor,
connected to one of the VREG pins. The minimum
recommended value is 300 nF, and care must be
taken to minimize distance between the chip and
the capacitor. Care should also be taken to limit
the serial inductance to less than 60nH.
Figure 16. Recommended Connections for VREG
TQFP100
PQFP100
Pin 31
Pin 43
Pin 28
QFP64
Pin 40
C
Pin 28
C
L
C
L
L
C = 300 to 600nF
L = Ferrite bead for EMI protection.
Suggested type: Murata BLM18BE601FH1: (Imp. 600 Ω at 100 MHz).
IMPORTANT: The VREG pin cannot be used to drive external devices.
Figure 17. Minimum Required Connections for VREG
PQFP100
Pin 31
TQFP100
Pin 43
C
Pin 28
QFP64
Pin 40
C
Pin 28
C
C = 300 to 600nF
Note: Pin 31 of PQFP100 or pin 28 of TQFP100 can be left unconnnected. A secondary stabilization network can also be connected to these pins.
22/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1.4 I/O PORTS
Port 0, Port 1 and Port 9[7:2] provide the external
memory interface. All the ports of the device can
be programmed as Input/Output or in Input mode,
compatible with TTL or CMOS levels (except
where Schmitt Trigger is present). Each bit can be
programmed individually (Refer to the I/O ports
chapter).
Internal Weak Pull-up
As shown in Table 3, not all input sections implement a Weak Pull-up. This means that the pull-up
must be connected externally when the pin is not
used or programmed as bidirectional.
TTL/CMOS Input
For all those port bits where no input schmitt trigger is implemented, it is always possible to program the input level as TTL or CMOS compatible
by programming the relevant PxC2.n control bit.
Refer I/O Ports Chapter to the section titled “Input/
Output Bit Configuration”.
Schmitt Trigger Input
Two different kinds of Schmitt Trigger circuitries
are implemented: Standard and High Hysteresis.
Standard Schmitt Trigger is widely used (see Ta-
ble 3), while the High Hysteresis Schmitt Trigger is
present on ports P4[7:6] and P6[5:4].
All inputs which can be used for detecting interrupt
events have been configured with a “Standard”
Schmitt Trigger, apart from the NMI pin which implements the “High Hysteresis” version. In this
way, all interrupt lines are guaranteed as “edge
sensitive”.
Push-Pull/OD Output
The output buffer can be programmed as pushpull or open-drain: attention must be paid to the
fact that the open-drain option corresponds only to
a disabling of P-channel MOS transistor of the
buffer itself: it is still present and physically connected to the pin. Consequently it is not possible to
increase the output voltage on the pin over
VDD+0.3 Volt, to avoid direct junction biasing.
Pure Open-Drain Output
The user can increase the voltage on an I/O pin
over VDD+0.3 Volt where the P-channel MOS transistor is physically absent: this is allowed on all
“Pure Open Drain” pins. In this case, the push-pull
option is not available and any weak pull-up must
be implemented externally.
Table 3. I/O Port Characteristics
Port 0[7:0]
Port 1[7:0]
Port 2[1:0]
Port 2[3:2]
Port 2[5:4]
Port 2[7:6]
Port 3[2:0] 1)
Port 3.3
Port 3[7:4]
Port 4.0, Port 4.4
Port 4.1
Port 4.2, Port 4.5
Port 4.3
Port 4[7:6]
Port 5[2:0], Port 5[7:4]
Port 5.3
Port 6[3:0]
Port 6[5:4]
Port 6[7:6] 1)
Port 7[7:0]
Port 8[1:0]
Port 8[7:2]
Port 9[7:0]
Input
TTL/CMOS
TTL/CMOS
Schmitt trigger
TTL/CMOS
Schmitt trigger
TTL/CMOS
Schmitt trigger
TTL/CMOS
Schmitt trigger
Schmitt trigger
Schmitt trigger
TTL/CMOS
Schmitt trigger
High hysteresis Schmitt trigger
Schmitt trigger
TTL/CMOS
Schmitt trigger
High hysteresis Schmitt trigger
Schmitt trigger
Schmitt trigger
Schmitt trigger
Schmitt trigger
Schmitt trigger
Output
Push-Pull/OD
Push-Pull/OD
Push-Pull/OD
Pure OD
Push-Pull/OD
Push-Pull/OD
Push-Pull/OD
Push-Pull/OD
Push-Pull/OD
Push-Pull/OD
Push-Pull/OD
Push-Pull/OD
Push-Pull/OD
Pure OD
Push-Pull/OD
Push-Pull/OD
Push-Pull/OD
Push-Pull/OD
Push-Pull/OD
Push-Pull/OD
Push-Pull/OD
Push-Pull/OD
Push-Pull/OD
Weak Pull-Up
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Reset State
Bidirectional
Bidirectional
Input
Input CMOS
Input
Input CMOS
Input
Input CMOS
Input
Input
Bidirectional WPU
Input CMOS
Input
Input
Input
Input CMOS
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Bidirectional WPU
Bidirectional WPU
Legend:
WPU = Weak Pull-Up, OD = Open Drain.
Note 1: Port 3.0 and Port6 [7:6] present on ST92F250 version only.
23/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - GENERAL DESCRIPTION
How to Configure the I/O Ports
To configure the I/O ports, use the information in
Table 3, Table 4 and the Port Bit Configuration Table in the I/O Ports Chapter (See page 152).
Input Note = the hardware characteristics fixed for
each port line in Table 3.
– If Input note = TTL/CMOS, either TTL or CMOS
input level can be selected by software.
– If Input note = Schmitt trigger, selecting CMOS
or TTL input by software has no effect, the input
will always be Schmitt Trigger.
Alternate Functions (AF) = More than one AF
cannot be assigned to an I/O pin at the same time:
An alternate function can be selected as follows.
AF Inputs:
– AF is selected implicitly by enabling the corresponding peripheral. Exception to this are ADC
inputs which must be explicitly selected as AF input by software.
AF Outputs or Bidirectional Lines:
– In the case of Outputs or I/Os, AF is selected explicitly by software.
24/426
9
Example 1: SCI-M input
AF: SIN, Port: P5.2. Schmitt Trigger input.
Write the port configuration bits:
P5C2.2=1
P5C1.2=0
P5C0.2 =1
Enable the SCI peripheral by software as described in the SCI chapter.
Example 2: SCI-M output
AF: SOUT, Port: P5.3, Push-Pull/OD output.
Write the port configuration bits (for AF OUT PP):
P5C2.3=0
P5C1.3=1
P5C0.3 =1
Example 3: External Memory I/O
AF: A0/D0, Port : P0.0, Input Note: TTL/CMOS input.
Write the port configuration bits:
P0C2.0=1
P0C1.0=1
P0C0.0 =1
Example 4: Analog input
AF: AIN8, Port : 7.0, Analog input.
Write the port configuration bits:
P7C2.0=1
P7C1.0=1
P7C0.0 =1
ST92F124/F150/F250 - GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1.5 Alternate Functions for I/O Ports
All the ports in the following table are useable for general purpose I/O (input, output or bidirectional).
Table 4. I/O Port Alternate Functions
Port
Name
P0.0
P0.1
P0.2
P0.3
P0.4
P0.5
P0.6
P0.7
P1.0
P1.1
P1.2
Pin No.
Alternate Functions
TQFP64 PQFP100 TQFP100
-
57
54
A0/D0
35
-
-
AIN0
-
58
55
A1/D1
36
-
-
AIN11)
-
59
56
A2/D2
37
-
-
AIN2
-
60
57
A3/D3
-
-
AIN31)
-
61
58
A4/D4
-
-
AIN4
-
62
59
A5/D5
-
-
AIN51)
-
63
60
A6/D6
-
-
AIN6
-
66
63
A7/D7
-
-
AIN71)
-
45
42
30
-
-
-
46
43
31
-
-
-
47
44
I
I
Analog Data Input 2
I/O Address/Data bit 3
I
Analog Data Input 3
I/O Address/Data bit 4
I
Analog Data Input 4
I/O Address/Data bit 5
I
Analog Data Input 5
I/O Address/Data bit 6
I
Analog Data Input 6
I/O Address/Data bit 7
I
A8
ICAPA0
Analog Data Input 1
I/O Address/Data bit 2
1)
42
Analog Data Input 0
I/O Address/Data bit 1
1)
40
41
I
1)
38
39
I/O Address/Data bit 0
1)
Analog Data Input 7
I/O Address bit 8
1)
OCMPA0
1)
A9
I
Ext. Timer 0 - Input Capture A
O
Ext. Timer 0 - Output Compare A
I/O Address bit 9
ICAPA11)
OCMPA1
1)
A10
I
Ext. Timer 1- Input Capture A
O
Ext. Timer 1- Output Compare A
I/O Address bit 10
ICAPB11)
I
Ext. Timer 1- Input Capture B
1)
I
Ext. Timer 0- Input Capture B
32
-
-
P1.3
-
48
45
A11
I/O Address bit 11
P1.4
-
51
48
A12
I/O Address bit 12
P1.5
-
52
49
A13
I/O Address bit 13
P1.6
-
53
50
A14
I/O Address bit 14
P1.7
-
54
51
A15
I/O Address bit 15
P2.0
18
33
30
TINPA0
I
Multifunction Timer 0 - Input A
P2.1
19
34
31
TINPB0
I
Multifunction Timer 0 - Input B
P2.2
20
35
32
TOUTA0
O
Multifunction Timer 0 - Output A
P2.3
21
36
33
TOUTB0
O
Multifunction Timer 0 - Output B
P2.4
22
37
34
TINPA1
I
Multifunction Timer 1 - Input A
ICAPB0
25/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Port
Name
Pin No.
Alternate Functions
TQFP64 PQFP100 TQFP100
P2.5
23
38
35
TINPB1
I
Multifunction Timer 1 - Input B
P2.6
24
39
36
TOUTA1
O
Multifunction Timer 1 - Output A
P2.7
25
40
37
TOUTB1
O
Multifunction Timer 1 - Output B
-
73
70
-
24
21
P3.0
2)
P3.1
ICAPB0
I
Ext. Timer 0 - Input Capture B
ICAPA0
I
Ext. Timer 0 - Input Capture A
OCMPA0
O
Ext. Timer 0 - Output Compare A
OCMPB0
O
Ext. Timer 0 - Output Compare B
EXTCLK0
I
Ext. Timer 0 - Input Clock
SS
I
SPI - Slave Select
P3.2
-
25
22
P3.3
-
26
23
P3.4
-
27
24
P3.5
14
28
25
MISO
I/O SPI - Master Input/Slave Output Data
P3.6
15
29
26
MOSI
I/O SPI - Master Output/Slave Input Data
P3.7
16
30
27
P4.0
-
14
11
SCK
I
SPI - Serial Input Clock
WKUP0
I
Wake-up Line 0
SCK
O
SPI - Serial Output Clock
ICAPA1
I
Ext. Timer 1 - Input Capture A
P4.1
-
15
12
CLOCK2
O
CLOCK2 internal signal
P4.2
-
16
13
OCMPA1
O
Ext. Timer 1 - Output Compare A
P4.3
-
19
16
ICAPB1
I
Ext. Timer 1 - Input Capture B
OCMPB1
O
Ext. Timer 1 - Output Compare B
P4.4
-
20
17
EXTCLK1
I
Ext. Timer 1 - Input Clock
WKUP4
I
Wake-up Line 4
P4.5
10
21
18
EXTRG
I
ADC Ext. Trigger
STOUT
O
Standard Timer Output
P4.6
11
22
19
SDA0
I/O I2C 0 Data
P4.7
12
23
20
WKUP1
SCL0
WAIT
P5.0
P5.1
2
6
7
3
4
P5.2
3
8
5
P5.3
4
9
6
26/426
9
1
I
Wake-up Line 1
I/O I2C 0 Clock
I
External Wait Request
WKUP5
I
Wake-up Line 5
TX0 2)
O
CAN 0 output
WKUP6
I
Wake-up Line 6
I
CAN 0 input
WDOUT
O
Watchdog Timer Output
SIN0
I
SCI-M - Serial Data Input
WKUP2
I
Wake-up Line 2
WDIN
I
Watchdog Timer Input
SOUT
O
SCI-M - Serial Data Output
RX0
2)
ST92F124/F150/F250 - GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Port
Name
Pin No.
P5.4
5
10
7
P5.5
6
11
8
P5.6
7
12
9
P5.7
8
13
10
P6.0
P6.1
P6.2
43
-
44
67
68
69
64
65
66
P6.3
45
70
67
P6.4
46
71
68
P6.5
Alternate Functions
TQFP64 PQFP100 TQFP100
47
72
69
TXCLK
I
SCI-M - Transmit Clock Input
CLKOUT
O
SCI-M - Clock Output
RXCLK
I
SCI-M - Receive Clock Input
WKUP7
I
Wake-up Line 7
DCD
I
SCI-M - Data Carrier Detect
WKUP8
I
Wake-up Line 8
WKUP9
I
Wake-up Line 9
RTS
O
SCI-M - Request To Send
INT0
I
External Interrupt 0
INT1
I
External Interrupt 1
CLOCK2/8 O
CLOCK2 divided by 8
INT6
I
External Interrupt 6
RW
O
Read/Write
INT2
I
External Interrupt 2
INT4
I
External Interrupt 4
DS2
O
Data Strobe 2
INT3
I
External Interrupt 3
INT5
I
External Interrupt 5
NMI
I
Non Maskable Interrupt
WKUP10
I
Wake-up Line 10
VPWI2)
I
JBLPD input
INTCLK
O
Internal Main Clock
AIN8
I
Analog Data Input 8
CK_AF
I
Clock Alternative Source
P6.62)
-
49
46
P6.72)
-
50
47
P7.0
51
84
81
P7.1
52
85
82
AIN9
I
Analog Data Input 9
P7.2
53
86
83
AIN10
I
Analog Data Input 10
P7.3
54
87
84
AIN11
I
Analog Data Input 11
P7.4
55
88
85
WKUP3
I
Wake-up Line 3
AIN12
I
Analog Data Input 12
P7.5
56
89
86
AIN13
I
Analog Data Input 13
WKUP11
I
Wake-up Line 11
P7.6
57
90
87
AIN14
I
Analog Data Input14
WKUP12
I
Wake-up Line 12
P7.7
58
91
88
AIN15
I
Analog Data Input 15
WKUP13
I
Wake-up Line 13
27/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Port
Name
Pin No.
Alternate Functions
TQFP64 PQFP100 TQFP100
AIN0
I
Analog Data Input 0
WKUP14
I
Wake-up Line 14
AIN1
I
Analog Data Input 1
WKUP15
I
Wake-up Line 15
73
AIN2
I
Analog Data Input 2
77
74
AIN3
I
Analog Data Input 3
-
78
75
AIN4
I
Analog Data Input 4
-
79
76
AIN5
I
Analog Data Input 5
P8.6
-
80
77
AIN6
I
Analog Data Input 6
P8.7
-
81
78
AIN7
I
Analog Data Input 7
2)
P8.0
-
74
71
P8.1
-
75
72
P8.2
-
76
P8.3
-
P8.4
P8.5
P9.0
-
98
95
RDI
I
SCI-A Receive Data Input
P9.1
-
99
96
TDO2)
O
SCI-A Transmit Data Output
P9.2
-
100
97
A16
O
Address bit 16
A17 3)
O
Address bit 17
SDA12)
I/O I²C 1 Data
A18 3)
O
SCL12)
I/O I²C 1 Clock
P9.3
-
1
98
-
2
99
P9.5
-
3
100
A19
O
Address bit 19
P9.6
-
4
1
A20
O
Address bit 20
P9.7
-
5
2
A21
O
Address bit 21
Note1: The ST92F150-EMU2 emulator does not
emulate ADC channels from AIN0 to AIN7 and extended function timers because they are not implemented on the emulator chip. See also Section
13.2 on page 418.
28/426
9
Address bit 18
P9.4
Note 2: Available on some devices only.
Note 3: For the ST92F250 device, since A[18:17]
share the same pins as SDA1 and SCL1 of I²C_1,
these address bits are not available when the
I²C_1 is in use (when I2CCR.PE bit is set).
ST92F124/F150/F250 - GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1.6 OPERATING MODES
To optimize the performance versus the power
consumption of the device, the ST92F124/F150/
F250 supports different operating modes that can
be dynamically selected depending on the performance and functionality requirements of the application at a given moment.
RUN MODE: This is the full speed execution mode
with CPU and peripherals running at the maximum
clock speed delivered by the Phase Locked Loop
(PLL) of the Clock Control Unit (CCU).
SLOW MODE: Power consumption can be significantly reduced by running the CPU and the peripherals at reduced clock speed using the CPU
Prescaler and CCU Clock Divider.
WAIT FOR INTERRUPT MODE: The Wait For Interrupt (WFI) instruction suspends program execution until an interrupt request is acknowledged.
During WFI, the CPU clock is halted while the peripheral and interrupt controller keep running at a
frequency depending on the CCU programming.
LOW POWER WAIT FOR INTERRUPT MODE:
Combining SLOW mode and Wait For Interrupt
mode it is possible to reduce the power consumption by more than 80%.
STOP MODE: When the STOP is requested by
executing the STOP bit writing sequence (see
dedicated section on Wake-up Management Unit
paragraph), and if NMI is kept low, the CPU and
the peripherals stop operating. Operations resume
after a wake-up line is activated (16 wake-up lines
plus NMI pin). See the RCCU and Wake-up Man-
agement Unit paragraphs in the following for the
details. The difference with the HALT mode consists in the way the CPU exits this state: when the
STOP is executed, the status of the registers is recorded, and when the system exits from the STOP
mode the CPU continues the execution with the
same status, without a system reset.
When the MCU enters STOP mode the Watchdog
stops counting. After the MCU exits from STOP
mode, the Watchdog resumes counting from
where it left off.
When the MCU exits from STOP mode, the oscillator, which was sleeping too, requires about 5 ms
to restart working properly (at a 4 MHz oscillator
frequency). An internal counter is present to guarantee that all operations after exiting STOP Mode,
take place with the clock stabilised.
The counter is active only when the oscillation has
already taken place. This means that 1-2 ms must
be added to take into account the first phase of the
oscillator restart.
In STOP mode, the oscillator is stopped. Therefore, if the PLL is used to provide the CPU clock
before entering STOP mode, it will have to be selected again when the MCU exits STOP mode.
HALT MODE: When executing the HALT instruction, and if the Watchdog is not enabled, the CPU
and its peripherals stop operating and the status of
the machine remains frozen (the clock is also
stopped). A reset is necessary to exit from Halt
mode.
29/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - DEVICE ARCHITECTURE
2 DEVICE ARCHITECTURE
2.1 CORE ARCHITECTURE
The ST9 Core or Central Processing Unit (CPU)
features a highly optimised instruction set, capable
of handling bit, byte (8-bit) and word (16-bit) data,
as well as BCD and Boolean formats; 14 addressing modes are available.
Four independent buses are controlled by the
Core: a 16-bit Memory bus, an 8-bit Register data
bus, an 8-bit Register address bus and a 6-bit Interrupt/DMA bus which connects the interrupt and
DMA controllers in the on-chip peripherals with the
Core.
This multiple bus architecture affords a high degree of pipelining and parallel operation, thus making the ST9 family devices highly efficient, both for
numerical calculation, data handling and with regard to communication with on-chip peripheral resources.
which hold data and control bits for the on-chip
peripherals and I/Os.
– A single linear memory space accommodating
both program and data. All of the physically separate memory areas, including the internal ROM,
internal RAM and external memory are mapped
in this common address space. The total addressable memory space of 4 Mbytes (limited by
the size of on-chip memory and the number of
external address pins) is arranged as 64 segments of 64 Kbytes. Each segment is further
subdivided into four pages of 16 Kbytes, as illustrated in Figure 18. A Memory Management Unit
uses a set of pointer registers to address a 22-bit
memory field using 16-bit address-based instructions.
2.2.1 Register File
The Register File consists of (see Figure 19):
2.2 MEMORY SPACES
– 224 general purpose registers (Group 0 to D,
There are two separate memory spaces:
registers R0 to R223)
– The Register File, which comprises 240 8-bit
– 6 system registers in the System Group (Group
registers, arranged as 15 groups (Group 0 to E),
E, registers R224 to R239)
each containing sixteen 8-bit registers plus up to
– Up to 64 pages, depending on device configura64 pages of 16 registers mapped in Group F,
tion, each containing up to 16 registers, mapped
to Group F (R240 to R255), see Figure 20.
Figure 18. Single Program and Data Memory Address Space
Data
16K Pages
Address
255
254
253
252
251
250
249
248
247
3FFFFFh
3F0000h
3EFFFFh
3E0000h
Code
64K Segments
63
62
up to 4 Mbytes
21FFFFh
210000h
20FFFFh
02FFFFh
020000h
01FFFFh
010000h
00FFFFh
000000h
30/426
9
Reserved
135
134
133
132
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
33
2
1
0
ST92F124/F150/F250 - DEVICE ARCHITECTURE
MEMORY SPACES (Cont’d)
Figure 19. Register Groups
Figure 20. Page Pointer for Group F mapping
PAGE 63
UP TO
64 PAGES
255
240 F PAGED REGISTERS
239
E SYSTEM REGISTERS
224
223 D
PAGE 5
R255
PAGE 0
C
B
A
R240
9
R234
8
224
GENERAL
PURPOSE
REGISTERS
7
6
PAGE POINTER
R224
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
0
0
VA00432
R0
VA00433
Figure 21. Addressing the Register File
REGISTER FILE
255
240 F PAGED REGISTERS
239 E SYSTEM REGISTERS
224
223 D
GROUP D
C
R195
(R0C3h)
B
R207
A
9
(1100) (0011)
8
GROUP C
7
6
R195
5
4
R192
3
GROUP B
2
1
0
0
15
0
VR000118
31/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - DEVICE ARCHITECTURE
MEMORY SPACES (Cont’d)
2.2.2 Register Addressing
Register File registers, including Group F paged
registers (but excluding Group D), may be addressed explicitly by means of a decimal, hexadecimal or binary address; thus R231, RE7h and
R11100111b represent the same register (see
Figure 21). Group D registers can only be addressed in Working Register mode.
Note that an upper case “R” is used to denote this
direct addressing mode.
Working Registers
Certain types of instruction require that registers
be specified in the form “rx”, where x is in the
range 0 to 15: these are known as Working Registers.
Note that a lower case “r” is used to denote this indirect addressing mode.
Two addressing schemes are available: a single
group of 16 working registers, or two separately
mapped groups, each consisting of 8 working registers. These groups may be mapped starting at
any 8 or 16 byte boundary in the register file by
means of dedicated pointer registers. This technique is described in more detail in Section 2.3.3
Register Pointing Techniques, and illustrated in
Figure 22 and in Figure 23.
System Registers
The 16 registers in Group E (R224 to R239) are
System registers and may be addressed using any
of the register addressing modes. These registers
are described in greater detail in Section 2.3 SYSTEM REGISTERS.
Paged Registers
Up to 64 pages, each containing 16 registers, may
be mapped to Group F. These are addressed using any register addressing mode, in conjunction
with the Page Pointer register, R234, which is one
of the System registers. This register selects the
page to be mapped to Group F and, once set,
does not need to be changed if two or more registers on the same page are to be addressed in succession.
32/426
9
Therefore if the Page Pointer, R234, is set to 5, the
instructions:
spp #5
ld R242, r4
will load the contents of working register r4 into the
third register of page 5 (R242).
These paged registers hold data and control information relating to the on-chip peripherals, each
peripheral always being associated with the same
pages and registers to ensure code compatibility
between ST9 devices. The number of these registers therefore depends on the peripherals which
are present in the specific ST9 family device. In
other words, pages only exist if the relevant peripheral is present.
Table 5. Register File Organization
Hex.
Address
Decimal
Address
Function
Register
File Group
F0-FF
240-255
Paged
Registers
Group F
E0-EF
224-239
System
Registers
Group E
D0-DF
208-223
Group D
C0-CF
192-207
Group C
B0-BF
176-191
Group B
A0-AF
160-175
Group A
90-9F
144-159
Group 9
80-8F
128-143
Group 8
General
Purpose
Registers
70-7F
112-127
60-6F
96-111
Group 7
50-5F
80-95
Group 5
40-4F
64-79
Group 4
30-3F
48-63
Group 3
20-2F
32-47
Group 2
10-1F
16-31
Group 1
00-0F
00-15
Group 0
Group 6
ST92F124/F150/F250 - DEVICE ARCHITECTURE
2.3 SYSTEM REGISTERS
The System registers are listed in Table 6. They
are used to perform all the important system settings. Their purpose is described in the following
pages. Refer to the chapter dealing with I/O for a
description of the PORT[5:0] Data registers.
Table 6. System Registers (Group E)
R239 (EFh)
SSPLR
R238 (EEh)
SSPHR
R237 (EDh)
USPLR
R236 (ECh)
USPHR
R235 (EBh)
MODE REGISTER
R234 (EAh)
PAGE POINTER REGISTER
R233 (E9h)
REGISTER POINTER 1
R232 (E8h)
REGISTER POINTER 0
R231 (E7h)
FLAG REGISTER
R230 (E6h)
CENTRAL INT. CNTL REG
R229 (E5h)
PORT5 DATA REG.
R228 (E4h)
PORT4 DATA REG.
R227 (E3h)
PORT3 DATA REG.
R226 (E2h)
PORT2 DATA REG.
R225 (E1h)
PORT1 DATA REG.
R224 (E0h)
PORT0 DATA REG.
GCE
TLIP
N
0
TLI
IEN
IAM
Bit 6 = TLIP: Top Level Interrupt Pending.
This bit is set by hardware when a Top Level Interrupt Request is recognized. This bit can also be
set by software to simulate a Top Level Interrupt
Request.
0: No Top Level Interrupt pending
1: Top Level Interrupt pending
Bit 5 = TLI: Top Level Interrupt bit.
0: Top Level Interrupt is acknowledged depending
on the TLNM bit in the NICR Register.
1: Top Level Interrupt is acknowledged depending
on the IEN and TLNM bits in the NICR Register
(described in the Interrupt chapter).
2.3.1 Central Interrupt Control Register
Please refer to the ”INTERRUPT” chapter for a detailed description of the ST9 interrupt philosophy.
CENTRAL INTERRUPT CONTROL REGISTER
(CICR)
R230 - Read/Write
Register Group: E (System)
Reset Value: 1000 0111 (87h)
7
Note: If an MFT is not included in the ST9 device,
then this bit has no effect.
CPL2 CPL1 CPL0
Bit 7 = GCEN: Global Counter Enable.
This bit is the Global Counter Enable of the Multifunction Timers. The GCEN bit is ANDed with the
CE bit in the TCR Register (only in devices featuring the MFT Multifunction Timer) in order to enable
the Timers when both bits are set. This bit is set after the Reset cycle.
Bit 4 = IEN: Interrupt Enable .
This bit is cleared by interrupt acknowledgement,
and set by interrupt return (iret). IEN is modified
implicitly by iret, ei and di instructions or by an
interrupt acknowledge cycle. It can also be explicitly written by the user, but only when no interrupt
is pending. Therefore, the user should execute a
di instruction (or guarantee by other means that
no interrupt request can arrive) before any write
operation to the CICR register.
0: Disable all interrupts except Top Level Interrupt.
1: Enable Interrupts
Bit 3 = IAM: Interrupt Arbitration Mode.
This bit is set and cleared by software to select the
arbitration mode.
0: Concurrent Mode
1: Nested Mode.
Bits 2:0 = CPL[2:0]: Current Priority Level.
These three bits record the priority level of the routine currently running (i.e. the Current Priority Level, CPL). The highest priority level is represented
by 000, and the lowest by 111. The CPL bits can
be set by hardware or software and provide the
reference according to which subsequent interrupts are either left pending or are allowed to interrupt the current interrupt service routine. When the
current interrupt is replaced by one of a higher priority, the current priority value is automatically
stored until required in the NICR register.
33/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - DEVICE ARCHITECTURE
SYSTEM REGISTERS (Cont’d)
2.3.2 Flag Register
The Flag Register contains 8 flags which indicate
the CPU status. During an interrupt, the flag register is automatically stored in the system stack area
and recalled at the end of the interrupt service routine, thus returning the CPU to its original status.
This occurs for all interrupts and, when operating
in nested mode, up to seven versions of the flag
register may be stored.
FLAG REGISTER (FLAGR)
R231- Read/Write
Register Group: E (System)
Reset value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7
C
0
Z
S
V
DA
H
-
DP
Bit 7 = C: Carry Flag.
The carry flag is affected by:
Addition (add, addw, adc, adcw),
Subtraction (sub, subw, sbc, sbcw),
Compare (cp, cpw),
Shift Right Arithmetic (sra, sraw),
Shift Left Arithmetic (sla, slaw),
Swap Nibbles (swap),
Rotate (rrc, rrcw, rlc, rlcw, ror,
rol),
Decimal Adjust (da),
Multiply and Divide (mul, div, divws).
When set, it generally indicates a carry out of the
most significant bit position of the register being
used as an accumulator (bit 7 for byte operations
and bit 15 for word operations).
The carry flag can be set by the Set Carry Flag
(scf) instruction, cleared by the Reset Carry Flag
(rcf) instruction, and complemented by the Complement Carry Flag (ccf) instruction.
Bit 6 = Z: Zero Flag. The Zero flag is affected by:
Addition (add, addw, adc, adcw),
Subtraction (sub, subw, sbc, sbcw),
Compare (cp, cpw),
Shift Right Arithmetic (sra, sraw),
Shift Left Arithmetic (sla, slaw),
Swap Nibbles (swap),
Rotate (rrc, rrcw, rlc, rlcw, ror,
rol),
Decimal Adjust (da),
Multiply and Divide (mul, div, divws),
Logical (and, andw, or, orw, xor,
xorw, cpl),
Increment and Decrement (inc, incw, dec,
34/426
9
decw),
Test (tm, tmw, tcm, tcmw, btset).
In most cases, the Zero flag is set when the contents
of the register being used as an accumulator become zero, following one of the above operations.
Bit 5 = S: Sign Flag.
The Sign flag is affected by the same instructions
as the Zero flag.
The Sign flag is set when bit 7 (for a byte operation) or bit 15 (for a word operation) of the register
used as an accumulator is one.
Bit 4 = V: Overflow Flag.
The Overflow flag is affected by the same instructions as the Zero and Sign flags.
When set, the Overflow flag indicates that a two'scomplement number, in a result register, is in error, since it has exceeded the largest (or is less
than the smallest), number that can be represented in two’s-complement notation.
Bit 3 = DA: Decimal Adjust Flag.
The DA flag is used for BCD arithmetic. Since the
algorithm for correcting BCD operations is different for addition and subtraction, this flag is used to
specify which type of instruction was executed
last, so that the subsequent Decimal Adjust (da)
operation can perform its function correctly. The
DA flag cannot normally be used as a test condition by the programmer.
Bit 2 = H: Half Carry Flag.
The H flag indicates a carry out of (or a borrow into) bit 3, as the result of adding or subtracting two
8-bit bytes, each representing two BCD digits. The
H flag is used by the Decimal Adjust (da) instruction to convert the binary result of a previous addition or subtraction into the correct BCD result. Like
the DA flag, this flag is not normally accessed by
the user.
Bit 1 = Reserved bit (must be 0).
Bit 0 = DP: Data/Program Memory Flag.
This bit indicates the memory area addressed. Its
value is affected by the Set Data Memory (sdm)
and Set Program Memory (spm) instructions. Refer to the Memory Management Unit for further details.
ST92F124/F150/F250 - DEVICE ARCHITECTURE
SYSTEM REGISTERS (Cont’d)
If the bit is set, data is accessed using the Data
Pointers (DPRs registers), otherwise it is pointed
to by the Code Pointer (CSR register); therefore,
the user initialization routine must include a Sdm
instruction. Note that code is always pointed to by
the Code Pointer (CSR).
Note: In the current ST9 devices, the DP flag is
only for compatibility with software developed for
the first generation of ST9 devices. With the single
memory addressing space, its use is now redundant. It must be kept to 1 with a Sdm instruction at
the beginning of the program to ensure a normal
use of the different memory pointers.
2.3.3 Register Pointing Techniques
Two registers within the System register group,
are used as pointers to the working registers. Register Pointer 0 (R232) may be used on its own as a
single pointer to a 16-register working space, or in
conjunction with Register Pointer 1 (R233), to
point to two separate 8-register spaces.
For the purpose of register pointing, the 16 register
groups of the register file are subdivided into 32 8register blocks. The values specified with the Set
Register Pointer instructions refer to the blocks to
be pointed to in twin 8-register mode, or to the lower 8-register block location in single 16-register
mode.
The Set Register Pointer instructions srp, srp0
and srp1 automatically inform the CPU whether
the Register File is to operate in single 16-register
mode or in twin 8-register mode. The srp instruction selects the single 16-register group mode and
specifies the location of the lower 8-register block,
while the srp0 and srp1 instructions automatically select the twin 8-register group mode and specify the locations of each 8-register block.
There is no limitation on the order or position of
these register groups, other than that they must
start on an 8-register boundary in twin 8-register
mode, or on a 16-register boundary in single 16register mode.
The block number should always be an even
number in single 16-register mode. The 16-register group will always start at the block whose
number is the nearest even number equal to or
lower than the block number specified in the srp
instruction. Avoid using odd block numbers, since
this can be confusing if twin mode is subsequently
selected.
Thus:
srp #3 will be interpreted as srp #2 and will allow using R16 ..R31 as r0 .. r15.
In single 16-register mode, the working registers
are referred to as r0 to r15. In twin 8-register
mode, registers r0 to r7 are in the block pointed
to by RP0 (by means of the srp0 instruction),
while registers r8 to r15 are in the block pointed
to by RP1 (by means of the srp1 instruction).
Caution: Group D registers can only be accessed
as working registers using the Register Pointers,
or by means of the Stack Pointers. They cannot be
addressed explicitly in the form “Rxxx”.
35/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - DEVICE ARCHITECTURE
SYSTEM REGISTERS (Cont’d)
POINTER 0 REGISTER (RP0)
R232 - Read/Write
Register Group: E (System)
Reset Value: xxxx xx00 (xxh)
POINTER 1 REGISTER (RP1)
R233 - Read/Write
Register Group: E (System)
Reset Value: xxxx xx00 (xxh)
7
RG4
RG3
RG2
RG1
RG0
RPS
0
0
7
0
RG4
Bits 7:3 = RG[4:0]: Register Group number.
These bits contain the number (in the range 0 to
31) of the register block specified in the srp0 or
srp instructions. In single 16-register mode the
number indicates the lower of the two 8-register
blocks to which the 16 working registers are to be
mapped, while in twin 8-register mode it indicates
the 8-register block to which r0 to r7 are to be
mapped.
Bit 2 = RPS: Register Pointer Selector.
This bit is set by the instructions srp0 and srp1 to
indicate that the twin register pointing mode is selected. The bit is reset by the srp instruction to indicate that the single register pointing mode is selected.
0: Single register pointing mode
1: Twin register pointing mode
0
RG3
RG2
RG1
RG0
RPS
0
0
This register is only used in the twin register pointing mode. When using the single register pointing
mode, or when using only one of the twin register
groups, the RP1 register must be considered as
RESERVED and may NOT be used as a general
purpose register.
Bits 7:3 = RG[4:0]: Register Group number.
These bits contain the number (in the range 0 to
31) of the 8-register block specified in the srp1 instruction, to which r8 to r15 are to be mapped.
Bit 2 = RPS: Register Pointer Selector.
This bit is set by the srp0 and srp1 instructions to
indicate that the twin register pointing mode is selected. The bit is reset by the srp instruction to indicate that the single register pointing mode is selected.
0: Single register pointing mode
1: Twin register pointing mode
Bits 1:0: Reserved. Forced by hardware to zero.
Bits 1:0: Reserved. Forced by hardware to zero.
36/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - DEVICE ARCHITECTURE
SYSTEM REGISTERS (Cont’d)
Figure 22. Pointing to a single group of 16
registers
REGISTER
GROUP
BLOCK
NUMBER
REGISTER
GROUP
BLOCK
NUMBER
Figure 23. Pointing to two groups of 8 registers
REGISTER
FILE
REGISTER
FILE
31
REGISTER
POINTER 0
&
REGISTER
POINTER 1
F
31
REGISTER
POINTER 0
set by:
F
30
srp #2
29
instruction
E
30
29
E
set by:
28
srp0 #2
28
&
points to:
27
D
27
D
srp1 #7
instructions
26
point to:
26
25
25
addressed by
BLOCK 7
9
4
9
8
4
r15
8
7
GROUP 3
3
7
r8
6
3
6
5
2
5
4
2
4
3
r15
1
3
1
GROUP 1
r7
2
r0
2
r0
1
0
addressed by
BLOCK 2
1
GROUP 1
addressed by
BLOCK 2
0
0
0
37/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - DEVICE ARCHITECTURE
SYSTEM REGISTERS (Cont’d)
2.3.4 Paged Registers
Up to 64 pages, each containing 16 registers, may
be mapped to Group F. These paged registers
hold data and control information relating to the
on-chip peripherals, each peripheral always being
associated with the same pages and registers to
ensure code compatibility between ST9 devices.
The number of these registers depends on the peripherals present in the specific ST9 device. In other words, pages only exist if the relevant peripheral is present.
The paged registers are addressed using the normal register addressing modes, in conjunction with
the Page Pointer register, R234, which is one of
the System registers. This register selects the
page to be mapped to Group F and, once set,
does not need to be changed if two or more registers on the same page are to be addressed in succession.
Thus the instructions:
spp #5
ld R242, r4
will load the contents of working register r4 into the
third register of page 5 (R242).
Warning: During an interrupt, the PPR register is
not saved automatically in the stack. If needed, it
should be saved/restored by the user within the interrupt routine.
PAGE POINTER REGISTER (PPR)
R234 - Read/Write
Register Group: E (System)
Reset value: xxxx xx00 (xxh)
7
PP5
0
PP4
PP3
PP2
PP1
PP0
0
0
Bits 7:2 = PP[5:0]: Page Pointer.
These bits contain the number (in the range 0 to
63) of the page specified in the spp instruction.
Once the page pointer has been set, there is no
need to refresh it unless a different page is required.
– Management of the clock frequency,
– Enabling of Bus request and Wait signals when
interfacing to external memory.
MODE REGISTER (MODER)
R235 - Read/Write
Register Group: E (System)
Reset value: 1110 0000 (E0h)
7
SSP
0
USP
DIV2
PRS2 PRS1 PRS0 BRQEN HIMP
Bit 7 = SSP: System Stack Pointer.
This bit selects an internal or external System
Stack area.
0: External system stack area, in memory space.
1: Internal system stack area, in the Register File
(reset state).
Bit 6 = USP: User Stack Pointer.
This bit selects an internal or external User Stack
area.
0: External user stack area, in memory space.
1: Internal user stack area, in the Register File (reset state).
Bit 5 = DIV2: Crystal Oscillator Clock Divided by 2.
This bit controls the divide-by-2 circuit operating
on the crystal oscillator clock (CLOCK1).
0: Clock divided by 1
1: Clock divided by 2
Bits 4:2 = PRS[2:0]: CPUCLK Prescaler.
These bits load the prescaler division factor for the
internal clock (INTCLK). The prescaler factor selects the internal clock frequency, which can be divided by a factor from 1 to 8. Refer to the Reset
and Clock Control chapter for further information.
Bit 1 = BRQEN: Bus Request Enable.
0: External Memory Bus Request disabled
1: External Memory Bus Request enabled on
BREQ pin (where available).
Note: Disregard this bit if BREQ pin is not available.
Bits 1:0: Reserved. Forced by hardware to 0.
2.3.5 Mode Register
The Mode Register allows control of the following
operating parameters:
– Selection of internal or external System and User
Stack areas,
38/426
9
Bit 0 = HIMP: High Impedance Enable.
When a port is programmed as Address and Data
lines to interface external Memory, these lines and
the Memory interface control lines (AS, DS, R/W)
can be forced into the High Impedance state.
0: External memory interface lines in normal state
1: High Impedance state.
ST92F124/F150/F250 - DEVICE ARCHITECTURE
Note: Setting the HIMP bit is recommended for
noise reduction when only internal Memory is
used.
If the memory access ports are declared as an address AND as an I/O port (for example: P10... P14
= Address, and P15... P17 = I/O), the HIMP bit has
no effect on the I/O lines.
2.3.6 Stack Pointers
Two separate, double-register stack pointers are
available: the System Stack Pointer and the User
Stack Pointer, both of which can address registers
or memory.
The stack pointers point to the “bottom” of the
stacks which are filled using the push commands
and emptied using the pop commands. The stack
pointer is automatically pre-decremented when
data is “pushed” in and post-incremented when
data is “popped” out.
The push and pop commands used to manage the
System Stack may be addressed to the User
Stack by adding the suffix “u”. To use a stack instruction for a word, the suffix “w” is added. These
suffixes may be combined.
When bytes (or words) are “popped” out from a
stack, the contents of the stack locations are unchanged until fresh data is loaded. Thus, when
data is “popped” from a stack area, the stack contents remain unchanged.
Note: Instructions such as: pushuw RR236 or
pushw RR238, as well as the corresponding
pop instructions (where R236 & R237, and R238
& R239 are themselves the user and system stack
pointers respectively), must not be used, since the
pointer values are themselves automatically
changed by the push or pop instruction, thus corrupting their value.
System Stack
The System Stack is used for the temporary storage of system and/or control data, such as the
Flag register and the Program counter.
The following automatically push data onto the
System Stack:
– Interrupts
When entering an interrupt, the PC and the Flag
Register are pushed onto the System Stack. If the
ENCSR bit in the EMR2 register is set, then the
Code Segment Register is also pushed onto the
System Stack.
– Subroutine Calls
When a call instruction is executed, only the PC
is pushed onto stack, whereas when a calls instruction (call segment) is executed, both the PC
and the Code Segment Register are pushed onto
the System Stack.
– Link Instruction
The link or linku instructions create a C language stack frame of user-defined length in the
System or User Stack.
All of the above conditions are associated with
their counterparts, such as return instructions,
which pop the stored data items off the stack.
User Stack
The User Stack provides a totally user-controlled
stacking area.
The User Stack Pointer consists of two registers,
R236 and R237, which are both used for addressing a stack in memory. When stacking in the Register File, the User Stack Pointer High Register,
R236, becomes redundant but must be considered as reserved.
Stack Pointers
Both System and User stacks are pointed to by
double-byte stack pointers. Stacks may be set up
in RAM or in the Register File. Only the lower byte
will be required if the stack is in the Register File.
The upper byte must then be considered as reserved and must not be used as a general purpose
register.
The stack pointer registers are located in the System Group of the Register File, this is illustrated in
Table 6.
Stack Location
Care is necessary when managing stacks as there
is no limit to stack sizes apart from the bottom of
any address space in which the stack is placed.
Consequently programmers are advised to use a
stack pointer value as high as possible, particularly when using the Register File as a stacking area.
Group D is a good location for a stack in the Register File, since it is the highest available area. The
stacks may be located anywhere in the first 14
groups of the Register File (internal stacks) or in
RAM (external stacks).
Note. Stacks must not be located in the Paged
Register Group or in the System Register Group.
39/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - DEVICE ARCHITECTURE
SYSTEM REGISTERS (Cont’d)
USER STACK POINTER HIGH REGISTER
(USPHR)
R236 - Read/Write
Register Group: E (System)
Reset value: undefined
SYSTEM STACK POINTER HIGH REGISTER
(SSPHR)
R238 - Read/Write
Register Group: E (System)
Reset value: undefined
7
0
USP15 USP14 USP13 USP12 USP11 USP10 USP9
USP8
USER STACK POINTER LOW REGISTER
(USPLR)
R237 - Read/Write
Register Group: E (System)
Reset value: undefined
USP6
USP5
USP4
USP3
USP2
USP1
SSP15 SSP14 SSP13 SSP12 SSP11 SSP10 SSP9
0
7
USP0
SSP7
Figure 24. Internal Stack Mode
SSP6
SSP5
REGISTER
FILE
STACK POINTER (LOW)
F
SSP4
SSP3
SSP2
SSP1
F
STACK POINTER (LOW)
&
STACK POINTER (HIGH)
point to:
MEMORY
E
E
STACK
D
D
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
STACK
40/426
9
SSP8
0
Figure 25. External Stack Mode
REGISTER
FILE
points to:
0
SYSTEM STACK POINTER LOW REGISTER
(SSPLR)
R239 - Read/Write
Register Group: E (System)
Reset value: undefined
7
USP7
7
SSP0
ST92F124/F150/F250 - DEVICE ARCHITECTURE
2.4 MEMORY ORGANIZATION
Code and data are accessed within the same linear address space. All of the physically separate
memory areas, including the internal ROM, internal RAM and external memory are mapped in a
common address space.
The ST9 provides a total addressable memory
space of 4 Mbytes. This address space is arranged as 64 segments of 64 Kbytes; each segment is again subdivided into four 16 Kbyte pages.
The mapping of the various memory areas (internal RAM or ROM, external memory) differs from
device to device. Each 64-Kbyte physical memory
segment is mapped either internally or externally;
if the memory is internal and smaller than 64
Kbytes, the remaining locations in the 64-Kbyte
segment are not used (reserved).
Refer to the Register and Memory Map Chapter
for more details on the memory map.
41/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - DEVICE ARCHITECTURE
2.5 MEMORY MANAGEMENT UNIT
The CPU Core includes a Memory Management
Unit (MMU) which must be programmed to perform memory accesses (even if external memory
is not used).
The MMU is controlled by 7 registers and 2 bits
(ENCSR and DPRREM) present in EMR2, which
may be written and read by the user program.
These registers are mapped within group F, Page
21 of the Register File. The 7 registers may be
Figure 26. Page 21 Registers
sub-divided into 2 main groups: a first group of four
8-bit registers (DPR[3:0]), and a second group of
three 6-bit registers (CSR, ISR, and DMASR). The
first group is used to extend the address during
Data Memory access (DPR[3:0]). The second is
used to manage Program and Data Memory accesses during Code execution (CSR), Interrupts
Service Routines (ISR or CSR), and DMA transfers (DMASR or ISR).
Page 21
FFh
R255
FEh
R254
FDh
R253
FCh
R252
FBh
R251
FAh
R250
F9h
DMASR
R249
F8h
ISR
R248
F7h
9
MMU
R247
F6h
EMR2
R246
F5h
EMR1
R245
F4h
CSR
R244
F3h
DPR3
R243
F2h
DPR2
R242
F1h
DPR1
R241
F0h
DPR0
R240
42/426
Relocation of P[3:0] and DPR[3:0] Registers
EM
MMU
MMU
SSPLR
SSPHR
USPLR
USPHR
MODER
PPR
RP1
RP0
FLAGR
CICR
P5DR
P4DR
P3DR
P2DR
P1DR
P0DR
DMASR
ISR
EMR2
EMR1
CSR
DPR3
DPR2
DPR1
DPR0
Bit DPRREM=0
(default setting)
SSPLR
SSPHR
USPLR
USPHR
MODER
PPR
RP1
RP0
FLAGR
CICR
P5DR
P4DR
DPR3
DPR2
DPR1
DPR0
DMASR
ISR
EMR2
EMR1
CSR
P3DR
P2DR
P1DR
P0DR
Bit DPRREM=1
ST92F124/F150/F250 - DEVICE ARCHITECTURE
2.6 ADDRESS SPACE EXTENSION
To manage 4 Mbytes of addressing space, it is
necessary to have 22 address bits. The MMU
adds 6 bits to the usual 16-bit address, thus translating a 16-bit virtual address into a 22-bit physical
address. There are 2 different ways to do this depending on the memory involved and on the operation being performed.
2.6.1 Addressing 16-Kbyte Pages
This extension mode is implicitly used to address
Data memory space if no DMA is being performed.
The Data memory space is divided into 4 pages of
16 Kbytes. Each one of the four 8-bit registers
(DPR[3:0], Data Page Registers) selects a different 16-Kbyte page. The DPR registers allow access to the entire memory space which contains
256 pages of 16 Kbytes.
Data paging is performed by extending the 14 LSB
of the 16-bit address with the contents of a DPR
register. The two MSBs of the 16-bit address are
interpreted as the identification number of the DPR
register to be used. Therefore, the DPR registers
Figure 27. Addressing via DPR[3:0]
are involved in the following virtual address ranges:
DPR0: from 0000h to 3FFFh;
DPR1: from 4000h to 7FFFh;
DPR2: from 8000h to BFFFh;
DPR3: from C000h to FFFFh.
The contents of the selected DPR register specify
one of the 256 possible data memory pages. This
8-bit data page number, in addition to the remaining 14-bit page offset address forms the physical
22-bit address (see Figure 27).
A DPR register cannot be modified via an addressing mode that uses the same DPR register. For instance, the instruction “POPW DPR0” is legal only
if the stack is kept either in the register file or in a
memory location above 8000h, where DPR2 and
DPR3 are used. Otherwise, since DPR0 and
DPR1 are modified by the instruction, unpredictable behaviour could result.
16-bit virtual address
MMU registers
DPR0
DPR1
DPR2
DPR3
00
01
10
11
8 bits
2M
SB
14 LSB
22-bit physical address
43/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - DEVICE ARCHITECTURE
ADDRESS SPACE EXTENSION (Cont’d)
2.6.2 Addressing 64-Kbyte Segments
This extension mode is used to address Data
memory space during a DMA and Program memory space during any code execution (normal code
and interrupt routines).
Three registers are used: CSR, ISR, and DMASR.
The 6-bit contents of one of the registers CSR,
ISR, or DMASR define one out of 64 Memory segments of 64 Kbytes within the 4 Mbytes address
space. The register contents represent the 6
MSBs of the memory address, whereas the 16
LSBs of the address (intra-segment address) are
given by the virtual 16-bit address (see Figure 28).
2.7 MMU REGISTERS
The MMU uses 7 registers mapped into Group F,
Page 21 of the Register File and 2 bits of the
EMR2 register.
Most of these registers do not have a default value
after reset.
2.7.1 DPR[3:0]: Data Page Registers
The DPR[3:0] registers allow access to the entire 4
Mbyte memory space composed of 256 pages of
16 Kbytes.
2.7.1.1 Data Page Register Relocation
If these registers are to be used frequently, they
may be relocated in register group E, by programming bit 5 of the EMR2-R246 register in page 21. If
this bit is set, the DPR[3:0] registers are located at
R224-227 in place of the Port 0-3 Data Registers,
which are re-mapped to the default DPR's locations: R240-243 page 21.
Data Page Register relocation is illustrated in Figure 26.
Figure 28. Addressing via CSR, ISR, and DMASR
16-bit virtual address
MMU registers
CSR
1
1
2
3
Fetching program
instruction
Data Memory
accessed in DMA
Fetching interrupt
instruction or DMA
access to Program
Memory
DMASR
2
ISR
3
6 bits
22-bit physical address
44/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - DEVICE ARCHITECTURE
MMU REGISTERS (Cont’d)
DATA PAGE REGISTER 0 (DPR0)
R240 - Read/Write
Register Page: 21
Reset value: undefined
This register is relocated to R224 if EMR2.5 is set.
7
0
DPR0 DPR0
_7
_6
DPR0 DPR0
_5
_4
DPR0 DPR0 DPR0 DPR0
_3
_2
_1
_0
DATA PAGE REGISTER 2 (DPR2)
R242 - Read/Write
Register Page: 21
Reset value: undefined
This register is relocated to R226 if EMR2.5 is set.
7
DPR2
_7
0
DPR2
_6
DPR2
_5
DPR2
_4
DPR2
_3
DPR2
_2
DPR2
_1
DPR2
_0
Bits 7:0 = DPR0_[7:0]: These bits define the 16Kbyte Data Memory page number. They are used
as the most significant address bits (A21-14) to extend the address during a Data Memory access.
The DPR0 register is used when addressing the
virtual address range 0000h-3FFFh.
Bits 7:0 = DPR2_[7:0]: These bits define the 16Kbyte Data memory page. They are used as the
most significant address bits (A21-14) to extend
the address during a Data memory access. The
DPR2 register is involved when the virtual address
is in the range 8000h-BFFFh.
DATA PAGE REGISTER 1 (DPR1)
R241 - Read/Write
Register Page: 21
Reset value: undefined
This register is relocated to R225 if EMR2.5 is set.
DATA PAGE REGISTER 3 (DPR3)
R243 - Read/Write
Register Page: 21
Reset value: undefined
This register is relocated to R227 if EMR2.5 is set.
7
DPR1
_7
DPR1
_6
DPR1
_5
DPR1
_4
DPR1
_3
DPR1
_2
DPR1
_1
0
7
DPR1
_0
DPR3
_7
Bits 7:0 = DPR1_[7:0]: These bits define the 16Kbyte Data Memory page number. They are used
as the most significant address bits (A21-14) to extend the address during a Data Memory access.
The DPR1 register is used when addressing the
virtual address range 4000h-7FFFh.
0
DPR3
_6
DPR3
_5
DPR3
_4
DPR3
_3
DPR3
_2
DPR3
_1
DPR3
_0
Bits 7:0 = DPR3_[7:0]: These bits define the 16Kbyte Data memory page. They are used as the
most significant address bits (A21-14) to extend
the address during a Data memory access. The
DPR3 register is involved when the virtual address
is in the range C000h-FFFFh.
45/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - DEVICE ARCHITECTURE
MMU REGISTERS (Cont’d)
2.7.2 CSR: Code Segment Register
This register selects the 64-Kbyte code segment
being used at run-time to access instructions. It
can also be used to access data if the spm instruction has been executed (or ldpp, ldpd, lddp).
Only the 6 LSBs of the CSR register are implemented, and bits 6 and 7 are reserved. The CSR
register allows access to the entire memory space,
divided into 64 segments of 64 Kbytes.
To generate the 22-bit Program memory address,
the contents of the CSR register is directly used as
the 6 MSBs, and the 16-bit virtual address as the
16 LSBs.
Note: The CSR register should only be read and
not written for data operations (there are some exceptions which are documented in the following
paragraph). It is, however, modified either directly
by means of the jps and calls instructions, or
indirectly via the stack, by means of the rets instruction.
CODE SEGMENT REGISTER (CSR)
R244 - Read/Write
Register Page: 21
Reset value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7
0
0
0
CSR_5 CSR_4 CSR_3 CSR_2 CSR_1 CSR_0
Bits 7:6 = Reserved, keep in reset state.
Bits 5:0 = CSR_[5:0]: These bits define the 64Kbyte memory segment (among 64) which contains the code being executed. These bits are
used as the most significant address bits (A21-16).
0
46/426
9
0
0
Bits 7:6 = Reserved, keep in reset state.
Bits 5:0 = ISR_[5:0]: These bits define the 64Kbyte memory segment (among 64) which contains the interrupt vector table and the code for interrupt service routines and DMA transfers (when
the PS bit of the DAPR register is reset). These
bits are used as the most significant address bits
(A21-16). The ISR is used to extend the address
space in two cases:
– Whenever an interrupt occurs: ISR points to the
64-Kbyte memory segment containing the interrupt vector table and the interrupt service routine
code. See also the Interrupts chapter.
– During DMA transactions between the peripheral
and memory when the PS bit of the DAPR register is reset : ISR points to the 64 K-byte Memory
segment that will be involved in the DMA transaction.
2.7.4 DMASR: DMA Segment Register
DMA SEGMENT REGISTER (DMASR)
R249 - Read/Write
Register Page: 21
Reset value: undefined
7
0
0
0
DMA
SR_5
DMA
SR_4
DMA
SR_3
DMA
SR_2
DMA
SR_1
DMA
SR_0
Bits 7:6 = Reserved, keep in reset state.
2.7.3 ISR: Interrupt Segment Register
INTERRUPT SEGMENT REGISTER (ISR)
R248 - Read/Write
Register Page: 21
Reset value: undefined
7
ISR and ENCSR bit (EMR2 register) are also described in the chapter relating to Interrupts, please
refer to this description for further details.
ISR_5 ISR_4 ISR_3 ISR_2 ISR_1 ISR_0
Bits 5:0 = DMASR_[5:0]: These bits define the 64Kbyte Memory segment (among 64) used when a
DMA transaction is performed between the peripheral's data register and Memory, with the PS bit of
the DAPR register set. These bits are used as the
most significant address bits (A21-16). If the PS bit
is reset, the ISR register is used to extend the address.
ST92F124/F150/F250 - DEVICE ARCHITECTURE
MMU REGISTERS (Cont’d)
Figure 29. Memory Addressing Scheme (example)
4M bytes
3FFFFFh
16K
294000h
DPR3
240000h
23FFFFh
DPR2
DPR1
DPR0
16K
20C000h
16K
200000h
1FFFFFh
64K
040000h
03FFFFh
030000h
DMASR
020000h
ISR
64K
CSR
16K
64K
010000h
00C000h
000000h
47/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - DEVICE ARCHITECTURE
2.8 MMU USAGE
2.8.1 Normal Program Execution
Program memory is organized as a set of 64Kbyte segments. The program can span as many
segments as needed, but a procedure cannot
stretch across segment boundaries. jps, calls
and rets instructions, which automatically modify
the CSR, must be used to jump across segment
boundaries. Writing to the CSR is forbidden during
normal program execution because it is not synchronized with the opcode fetch. This could result
in fetching the first byte of an instruction from one
memory segment and the second byte from another. Writing to the CSR is allowed when it is not being used, i.e during an interrupt service routine if
ENCSR is reset.
Note that a routine must always be called in the
same way, i.e. either always with call or always
with calls, depending on whether the routine
ends with ret or rets. This means that if the routine is written without prior knowledge of the location of other routines which call it, and all the program code does not fit into a single 64-Kbyte segment, then calls/rets should be used.
In typical microcontroller applications, less than 64
Kbytes of RAM are used, so the four Data space
pages are normally sufficient, and no change of
DPR[3:0] is needed during Program execution. It
may be useful however to map part of the ROM
into the data space if it contains strings, tables, bit
maps, etc.
If there is to be frequent use of paging, the user
can set bit 5 (DPRREM) in register R246 (EMR2)
of Page 21. This swaps the location of registers
DPR[3:0] with that of the data registers of Ports 03. In this way, DPR registers can be accessed
without the need to save/set/restore the Page
Pointer Register. Port registers are therefore
moved to page 21. Applications that require a lot of
paging typically use more than 64 Kbytes of external memory, and as ports 0, 1 and 9 are required
to address it, their data registers are unused.
2.8.2 Interrupts
The ISR register has been created so that the interrupt routines may be found by means of the
same vector table even after a segment jump/call.
When an interrupt occurs, the CPU behaves in
one of 2 ways, depending on the value of the ENCSR bit in the EMR2 register (R246 on Page 21).
If this bit is reset (default condition), the CPU
works in original ST9 compatibility mode. For the
duration of the interrupt service routine, the ISR is
48/426
9
used instead of the CSR, and the interrupt stack
frame is kept exactly as in the original ST9 (only
the PC and flags are pushed). This avoids the
need to save the CSR on the stack in the case of
an interrupt, ensuring a fast interrupt response
time. The drawback is that it is not possible for an
interrupt service routine to perform segment
calls/jps: these instructions would update the
CSR, which, in this case, is not used (ISR is used
instead). The code size of all interrupt service routines is thus limited to 64 Kbytes.
If, instead, bit 6 of the EMR2 register is set, the
ISR is used only to point to the interrupt vector table and to initialize the CSR at the beginning of the
interrupt service routine: the old CSR is pushed
onto the stack together with the PC and the flags,
and then the CSR is loaded with the ISR. In this
case, an iret will also restore the CSR from the
stack. This approach lets interrupt service routines
access the whole 4-Mbyte address space. The
drawback is that the interrupt response time is
slightly increased, because of the need to also
save the CSR on the stack. Compatibility with the
original ST9 is also lost in this case, because the
interrupt stack frame is different; this difference,
however, would not be noticeable for a vast majority of programs.
Data memory mapping is independent of the value
of bit 6 of the EMR2 register, and remains the
same as for normal code execution: the stack is
the same as that used by the main program, as in
the ST9. If the interrupt service routine needs to
access additional Data memory, it must save one
(or more) of the DPRs, load it with the needed
memory page and restore it before completion.
2.8.3 DMA
Depending on the PS bit in the DAPR register (see
DMA chapter) DMA uses either the ISR or the
DMASR for memory accesses: this guarantees
that a DMA will always find its memory segment(s), no matter what segment changes the application has performed. Unlike interrupts, DMA
transactions cannot save/restore paging registers,
so a dedicated segment register (DMASR) has
been created. Having only one register of this kind
means that all DMA accesses should be programmed in one of the two following segments:
the one pointed to by the ISR (when the PS bit of
the DAPR register is reset), and the one referenced by the DMASR (when the PS bit is set).
ST92F124/F150/F250 - SINGLE VOLTAGE FLASH & E3 TM (EMULATED EEPROM)
3 SINGLE VOLTAGE FLASH & E3 TM (EMULATED EEPROM)
3.1 INTRODUCTION
The Flash circuitry contains one array divided in
two main parts that can each be read independently. The first part contains the main Flash array
for code storage, a reserved array (TestFlash) for
system routines and a 128-byte area available as
one time programmable memory (OTP). The sec-
ond part contains the two dedicated Flash sectors
used for EEPROM Hardware Emulation.
The write operations of the two parts are managed
by an embedded Program/Erase Controller.
Through a dedicated RAM buffer the Flash and the
E3 TM can be written in blocks of 16 bytes.
Figure 30. Flash Memory Structure (Example for 64K Flash device)
sense amplifiers
Address
230000h
231F80h
000000h
002000h
004000h
TestFlash
8 Kbytes
User OTP and Protection registers
Data
Register
Interface
Sector F0
8 Kbytes
Sector F1
8 Kbytes
RAM buffer
16 bytes
Sector F2
Program / Erase
Controller
48 Kbytes
010000h
22CFFFh
228000h
2203FFh
220000h
Hardware emulated EEPROM sectors
8 Kbytes (Reserved)
Emulated EEPROM
1 Kbyte
sense amplifiers
49/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - SINGLE VOLTAGE FLASH & E3 TM (EMULATED EEPROM)
Figure 31. Flash Memory Structure (Example for 128K Flash device)
sense amplifiers
Address
230000h
231F80h
000000h
002000h
004000h
TestFlash
8 Kbytes
User OTP and Protection registers
RAM buffer
16 bytes
Sector F2
48 Kbytes
Program / Erase
Controller
Sector F3
64 Kbytes
228000h
2203FFh
220000h
Hardware emulated EEPROM sectors
8 Kbytes (Reserved)
Emulated EEPROM
1 Kbyte
sense amplifiers
50/426
9
Register
Interface
Sector F0
8 Kbytes
Sector F1
8 Kbytes
010000h
22CFFFh
Data
ST92F124/F150/F250 - SINGLE VOLTAGE FLASH & E3 TM (EMULATED EEPROM)
3.2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
3.2.1 Structure
The memory is composed of three parts:
– a sector wih the system routines (TestFlash) and
the user OTP area
– 4 main sectors for code
– an emulated EEPROM
124 bytes are available to the user as an OTP area. The user can program these bytes, but cannot
erase them.
3.2.2 EEPROM Emulation
A hardware EEPROM emulation is implemented
using special flash sectors to emulate an EEPROM memory. This E3 TM is directly addressed
from 220000h to 2203FFh.
(For more details on hardware EEPROM emulation, see application note AN1152)
Table 7. Memory Structure for 64K Flash device
Sector
Addresses
Max Size
TestFlash (TF) (Reserved)
230000h to 231F7Fh
8064 bytes
OTP Area
Protection Registers (reserved)
231F80h to 231FFBh
231FFCh to 231FFFh
124 bytes
4 bytes
Flash 0 (F0)
000000h to 001FFFh
8 Kbytes
Flash 1 (F1)
002000h to 003FFFh
8 Kbytes
Flash 2 (F2)
004000h to 00FFFFh
48 Kbytes
Hardware Emulated EEPROM sectors
(reserved)
228000h to 22CFFFh
8 Kbytes
Emulated EEPROM
220000h to 2203FFh
1 Kbyte
Table 8. Memory Structure for 128K Flash device
Sector
Addresses
Max Size
TestFlash (TF) (Reserved)
230000h to 231F7Fh
8064 bytes
OTP Area
Protection Registers (reserved)
231F80h to 231FFBh
231FFCh to 231FFFh
124 bytes
4 bytes
Flash 0 (F0)
000000h to 001FFFh
8 Kbytes
Flash 1 (F1)
002000h to 003FFFh
8 Kbytes
Flash 2 (F2)
004000h to 00FFFFh
48 Kbytes
Flash 3 (F3)
010000h to 01FFFFh
64 Kbytes
Hardware Emulated EEPROM sectors
(reserved)
228000h to 22CFFFh
8 Kbytes
Emulated EEPROM
220000h to 2203FFh
1 Kbyte
51/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - SINGLE VOLTAGE FLASH & E3 TM (EMULATED EEPROM)
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION (Cont’d)
Table 9. Memory Structure for 256K Flash device
Sector
Addresses
Max Size
TestFlash (TF) (Reserved)
230000h to 231F7Fh
8064 bytes
OTP Area
Protection Registers (reserved)
231F80h to 231FFBh
231FFCh to 231FFFh
124 bytes
4 bytes
Flash 0 (F0)
000000h to 001FFFh
8 Kbytes
Flash 1 (F1)
002000h to 003FFFh
8 Kbytes
Flash 2 (F2)
004000h to 00FFFFh
48 Kbytes
Flash 3 (F3)
010000h to 01FFFFh
64 Kbytes
Flash 4 (F4)
020000h to 02FFFFh
64 Kbytes
Flash 5 (F5)
030000h to 03FFFFh
64 Kbytes
Hardware Emulated EEPROM sectors
(reserved)
228000h to 22CFFFh
8 Kbytes
Emulated EEPROM
220000h to 2203FFh
1 Kbyte
52/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - SINGLE VOLTAGE FLASH & E3 TM (EMULATED EEPROM)
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION (Cont’d)
3.2.3 Operation
The memory has a register interface mapped in
memory space (segment 22h). All operations are
enabled through the FCR (Flash Control Register),
ECR (E3 TM Control Register).
All operations on the Flash must be executed from
another memory (internal RAM, E3 TM, external
memory).
Flash (including TestFlash) and E3 TM are independent, this means that one can be read while
the other is written. However simultaneous Flash
and E3 TM write operations are forbidden.
An interrupt can be generated at the end of a
Flash or an E3 TM write operation: this interrupt is
multiplexed with an external interrupt EXTINTx
(device dependent) to generate an interrupt INTx.
The status of a write operation inside the Flash
and the E3 TM memories can be monitored through
the FESR[1:0] registers.
Control and Status registers are mapped in memory (segment 22h), as shown in the following figure.
Figure 32. Control and Status Register Map.
Register Interface
224000h
224001h
224002h
224003h
/
/
/
/
221000h
221001h
221002h
221003h
FCR
ECR
FESR0
FESR1
In order to use the same data pointer register
(DPR) to point both to the E3 TM (220000h2203FFh) and to these control and status registers, the Flash and E3 TM control registers are
mapped not only at page 0x89 (224000h224003h) but also on page 0x88 (221000h221003h).
If the RESET pin is activated during a write operation, the write operation is interrupted. In this case
the user must repeat this last write operation following power on or reset. If the internal supply voltage drops below the VIT- threshold, a reset sequence is generated automatically by hardware.
3.2.4 E3 TM Update Operation
The update of the E3 TM content can be made by
pages of 16 consecutive bytes. The Page Update
operation allows up to 16 bytes to be loaded into
the RAM buffer that replace the ones already contained in the specified address.
Each time a Page Update operation is executed in
the E3 TM, the RAM buffer content is programmed
in the next free block relative to the specified page
(the RAM buffer is previously automatically filled
with old data for all the page addresses not selected for updating). If all the 4 blocks of the specified
page in the current E3 TM sector are full, the page
content is copied to the complementary sector,
that becomes the new current one.
After that the specified page has been copied to
the next free block, one erase phase is executed
on the complementary sector, if the 4 erase phases have not yet been executed. When the selected
page is copied to the complementary sector, the
remaining 63 pages are also copied to the first
block of the new sector; then the first erase phase
is executed on the previous full sector. All this is
executed in a hidden manner, and the End Page
Update Interrupt is generated only after the end of
the complete operation.
At Reset the two status pages are read in order to
detect which is the sector that is currently mapping
the E3 TM, and in which block each page is
mapped. A system defined routine written in TestFlash is executed at reset, so that any previously
aborted write operation is restarted and completed.
53/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - SINGLE VOLTAGE FLASH & E3 TM (EMULATED EEPROM)
Figure 33. Hardware Emulation Flow
Emulation Flow
Reset
Program selected
Page from RAM buffer
in next free block
Read Status Pages
new
sector ?
Map E3 TM
in current sector
Yes
No
Write operation
to complete ?
No
Yes
Complete
Write operation
Update
Status page
Complementary
sector erased ?
No
1/4 erase of
complementary sector
Wait for
Update commands
Page
Update
Command
Update
Status Page
End Page
Update
Interrupt
(to Core)
3.2.5 Important note on Flash Erase Suspend
Refer to Section 13.1.1 on page 407;
54/426
9
Copy all other Pages
into RAM buffer;
then program them
in next free block
Yes
ST92F124/F150/F250 - SINGLE VOLTAGE FLASH & E3 TM (EMULATED EEPROM)
3.3 REGISTER DESCRIPTION
3.3.1 Control Registers
FLASH CONTROL REGISTER (FCR)
Address: 224000h / 221000h- Read/Write
Reset value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
FWMS FPAGE FCHIP FBYTE FSECT FSUSP PROT FBUSY
The Flash Control Register is used to enable all
the operations for the Flash and the TestFlash
memories.
Bit 7 = FWMS: Flash Write Mode Start (Read/
Write).
This bit must be set to start each write/erase operation in Flash memory. At the end of the write/
erase operation or during a Sector Erase Suspend
this bit is automatically reset. To resume a suspended Sector Erase operation, this bit must be
set again. Resetting this bit by software does not
stop the current write operation.
0: No effect
1: Start Flash write
Bit 6 = FPAGE: Flash Page program (Read/Write).
This bit must be set to select the Page Program
operation in Flash memory. This bit is automatically reset at the end of the Page Program operation.
The Page Program operation allows to program
“0”s in place of “1”s. From 1 to 16 bytes can be entered (in any order, no need for an ordered address sequence) before starting the execution by
setting the FWMS bit. All the addresses must belong to the same page (only the 4 LSBs of address
can change). Data to be programmed and addresses in which to program must be provided
(through an LD instruction, for example). Data
contained in page addresses that are not entered
are left unchanged.
0: Deselect page program
1: Select page program
Bit 5 = FCHIP: Flash CHIP erase (Read/Write).
This bit must be set to select the Chip Erase operation in Flash memory. This bit is automatically reset at the end of the Chip Erase operation.
The Chip Erase operation erases all the Flash locations to FFh. The operation is limited to Flash
code: sectors F0-F3 (or F0-F5 for the ST92F250),
TestFlash and E3 TM excluded. The execution
starts by setting the FWMS bit. It is not necessary
to pre-program the sectors to 00h, because this is
done automatically.
0: Deselect chip erase
1: Select chip erase
Bit 4 = FBYTE: Flash byte program (Read/Write).
This bit must be set to select the Byte Program operation in Flash memory. This bit is automatically
reset at the end of the Byte Program operation.
The Byte Program operation allows “0”s to be programmed in place of “1”s. Data to be programmed
and an address in which to program must be provided (through an LD instruction, for example) before starting execution by setting bit FWMS.
0: Deselect byte program
1: Select byte program
Bit 3 = FSECT: Flash sector erase (Read/Write).
This bit must be set to select the Sector Erase operation in Flash memory. This bit is automatically
reset at the end of the Sector Erase operation.
The Sector Erase operation erases all the Flash
locations to FFh. From 1 to 6 sectors (F0-F5) can
be simultaneously erased. These sectors can be
entered before starting the execution by setting
the FWMS bit. An address located in the sector to
erase must be provided (through an LD instruction, for example), while the data to be provided is
don’t care. It is not necessary to pre-program the
sectors to 00h, because this is done automatically.
0: Deselect sector erase
1: Select sector erase
Bit 2 = FSUSP: Flash sector erase suspend
(Read/Write).
This bit must be set to suspend the current Sector
Erase operation in Flash memory in order to read
data to or from program data to a sector not being
erased. The FSUSP bit must be reset (and FWMS
must be set again) to resume a suspended Sector
Erase operation.
The Erase Suspend operation resets the Flash
memory to normal read mode (automatically resetting bit FBUSY) in a maximum time of 15µs.
55/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - SINGLE VOLTAGE FLASH & E3 TM (EMULATED EEPROM)
REGISTER DESCRIPTION (Cont’d)
When in Erase Suspend the memory accepts only
the following operations: Read, Erase Resume
and Byte Program. Updating the E3 TM memory is
not possible during a Flash Erase Suspend.
0: Resume sector erase when FWMS is set again.
1: Suspend Sector erase
E3 TM CONTROL REGISTER (ECR)
Address: 224001h /221001h- Read/Write
Reset value: 000x x000 (xxh)
7
6
5
EWMS EPAGE ECHIP
Bit 1 = PROT: Set Protection (Read/Write).
This bit must be set to select the Set Protection operation. This bit is automatically reset at the end of
the Set Protection operation.
The Set Protection operation allows “0”s in place
of “1”s to be programmed in the four Non Volatile
Protection registers. From 1 to 4 bytes can be entered (in any order, no need for an ordered address sequence) before starting the execution by
setting the FWMS bit. Data to be programmed and
addresses in which to program must be provided
(through an LD instruction, for example). Protection contained in addresses that are not entered
are left unchanged.
0: Deselect protection
1: Select protection
Bit 0 = FBUSY: Flash Busy (Read Only).
This bit is automatically set during Page Program,
Byte Program, Sector Erase or Set Protection operations when the first address to be modified is
latched in Flash memory, or during Chip Erase operation when bit FWMS is set. When this bit is set
every read access to the Flash memory will output
invalid data (FFh equivalent to a NOP instruction),
while every write access to the Flash memory will
be ignored. At the end of the write operations or
during a Sector Erase Suspend this bit is automatically reset and the memory returns to read mode.
After an Erase Resume this bit is automatically set
again. The FBUSY bit remains high for a maximum of 10µs after Power-Up and when exiting
Power-Down mode, meaning that the Flash memory is not yet ready to be accessed.
0: Flash not busy
1: Flash busy
9
3
2
1
0
WFIS FEIEN EBUSY
3 TM
The E
Control Register is used to enable all the
operations for the E3 TM memory.
The ECR also contains two bits (WFIS and FEIEN)
that are related to both Flash and E3 TM memories.
Bit 7 = EWMS: E3 TM Write Mode Start.
This bit must be set to start every write/erase operation in the E3 TM memory. At the end of the write/
erase operation this bit is automatically reset. Resetting by software this bit does not stop the current write operation.
0: No effect
1: Start E3 TM write
Bit 6 = EPAGE: E3 TM page update.
This bit must be set to select the Page Update operation in E3 TM memory. The Page Update operation allows to write a new content: both “0”s in
place of “1”s and “1”s in place of “0”s. From 1 to 16
bytes can be entered (in any order, no need for an
ordered address sequence) before starting the execution by setting bit EWMS. All the addresses
must belong to the same page (only the 4 LSBs of
address can change). Data to be programmed and
addresses in which to program must be provided
(through an LD instruction, for example). Data
contained in page addresses that are not entered
are left unchanged. This bit is automatically reset
at the end of the Page Update operation.
0: Deselect page update
1: Select page update
Bit 5 = ECHIP: E3 TM chip erase.
This bit must be set to select the Chip Erase operation in the E3 TM memory. The Chip Erase operation allows to erase all the E3 TM locations to FFh.
The execution starts by setting bit EWMS. This bit
is automatically reset at the end of the Chip Erase
operation.
0: Deselect chip erase
1: Select chip erase
Bit 4:3 = Reserved.
56/426
4
ST92F124/F150/F250 - SINGLE VOLTAGE FLASH & E3 TM (EMULATED EEPROM)
REGISTER DESCRIPTION (Cont’d)
Bit 2 = WFIS: Wait For Interrupt Status.
If this bit is reset, the WFI instruction puts the
Flash macrocell in Stand-by mode (immediate
read possible, but higher consumption: 100 µA); if
it is set, the WFI instruction puts the Flash macrocell in Power-Down mode (recovery time of 10µs
needed before reading, but lower consumption:
10µA). The Stand-by mode or the Power-Down
mode will be entered only at the end of any current
Flash or E3 TM write operation.
In the same way following an HALT or a STOP instruction, the Memory enters Power-Down mode
only after the completion of any current write operation.
0: Flash in Stand-by mode on WFI
1: Flash in Power-Down mode on WFI
Note: HALT or STOP mode can be exited without
problems, but the user should take care when exiting WFI Power Down mode. If WFIS is set, the
user code must reset the XT_DIV16 bit in the
R242 register (page 55) before executing the WFI
instruction. When exiting WFI mode, this gives the
Flash enough time to wake up before the interrupt
vector fetch.
Bit 1 = FEIEN: Flash & E3 TM Interrupt enable.
This bit selects the source of interrupt channel
INTx between the external interrupt pin and the
Flash/E3 TM End of Write interrupt. Refer to the Interrupt chapter for the channel number.
0: External interrupt enabled
1: Flash & E3 TM Interrupt enabled
Bit 0 = EBUSY: E3 TM Busy (Read Only).
This bit is automatically set during a Page Update
operation when the first address to be modified is
latched in the E3 TM memory, or during Chip Erase
operation when bit EWMS is set. At the end of the
write operation or during a Sector Erase Suspend
this bit is automatically reset and the memory returns to read mode. When this bit is set every read
access to the E3 TM memory will output invalid data
(FFh equivalent to a NOP instruction), while every
write access to the E3 TM memory will be ignored.
At the end of the write operation this bit is automatically reset and the memory returns to read mode.
Bit EBUSY remains high for a maximum of 10ms
after Power-Up and when exiting Power-Down
mode, meaning that the E3 TM memory is not yet
ready to be accessed.
0: E3 TM not busy
1: E3 TM busy
3.3.2 Status Registers
Two Status Registers (FESR[1:0] are available to
check the status of the current write operation in
Flash and E3 TM memories.
During a Flash or an E3 TM write operation any attempt to read the memory under modification will
output invalid data (FFh equivalent to a NOP instruction). This means that the Flash memory is
not fetchable when a write operation is active: the
write operation commands must be given from another memory (E3 TM, internal RAM, or external
memory).
FLASH & E3 TM STATUS REGISTER 0 (FESR0)
Address: 224002h /221002h -Read/Write
Reset value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
FEERR FESS6 FESS5 FESS4 FESS3 FESS2 FESS1 FESS0
Bit 7 = FEERR: Flash or E3 TM write ERRor (Read/
Write).
This bit is set by hardware when an error occurs
during a Flash or an E3 TM write operation. It must
be cleared by software.
0: Write OK
1: Flash or E3 TM write error
Bit 6:0 = FESS[6:0]. Flash and E3 TM Sectors Status Bits (Read Only).
These bits are set by hardware and give the status
of the 7 Flash and E3 TM sectors.
– FESS6 = TestFlash and OTP
– FESS5:4 = E3 TM sectors
For 128K and 64K Flash devices:
– FESS3:0 = Flash sectors (F3:0)
For the ST92F250 (256K):
– FESS3 gives the status of F5, F4 and F3 sectors:
the status of all these three sectors are ORed on
this bit
– FESS2:0 = Flash sectors (F2:0)
57/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - SINGLE VOLTAGE FLASH & E3 TM (EMULATED EEPROM)
REGISTER DESCRIPTION (Cont’d)
The meaning of the FESSx bit for sector x is given
in Table 10.
Table 10. Sector Status Bits
FBUSY
FEERR
EBUSY
FSUSP
FESSx=1
meaning
1
-
-
Write Error in
Sector x
0
1
-
Write operation
on-going in sector x
0
0
1
Sector Erase
Suspended in
sector x
0
0
0
Don’t care
FLASH & E3 TM STATUS REGISTER 1 (FESR1)
Address: 224003h /221003h-Read Only
Reset value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ERER PGER SWER
Bit 7 = ERER. Erase error (Read Only).
This bit is set by hardware when an Erase error occurs during a Flash or an E3 TM write operation.
This error is due to a real failure of a Flash cell,
that can no longer be erased. This kind of error is
fatal and the sector where it occurred must be discarded. This bit is automatically cleared when bit
FEERR of the FESR0 register is cleared by software.
0: Erase OK
1: Erase error
Bit 6 = PGER. Program error (Read Only).
This bit is automatically set when a Program error
occurs during a Flash or an E3 TM write operation.
This error is due to a real failure of a Flash cell,
that can no longer be programmed. The byte
where this error occurred must be discarded (if it
was in the E3 TM memory, the byte must be reprogrammed to FFh and then discarded, to avoid the
error occurring again when that byte is internally
moved). This bit is automatically cleared when bit
FEERR of the FESR0 register is cleared by software.
0: Program OK
1: Flash or E3 TM Programming error
58/426
9
Bit 5 = SWER. Swap or 1 over 0 Error (Read Only).
This bit has two different meanings, depending on
whether the current write operation is to Flash or
E3 TM memory.
In Flash memory this bit is automatically set when
trying to program at 1 bits previously set at 0 (this
does not happen when programming the Protection bits). This error is not due to a failure of the
Flash cell, but only flags that the desired data has
not been written.
In the E3 TM memory this bit is automatically set
when a Program error occurs during the swapping
of the unselected pages to the new sector when
the old sector is full (see AN1152 for more details).
This error is due to a real failure of a Flash cell,
that can no longer be programmed. When this error is detected, the embedded algorithm automatically exits the Page Update operation at the end of
the Swap phase, without performing the Erase
Phase 0 on the full sector. In this way the old data
are kept, and through predefined routines in TestFlash (Find Wrong Pages = 230029h and Find
Wrong Bytes = 23002Ch), the user can compare
the old and the new data to find where the error occurred.
Once the error has been discovered the user must
take to end the stopped Erase Phase 0 on the old
sector (through another predefined routine in TestFlash: Complete Swap = 23002Fh). The byte
where the error occurred must be reprogrammed
to FFh and then discarded, to avoid the error occurring again when that byte is internally moved.
This bit is automatically cleared when bit FEERR
of the FESR0 register is cleared by software.
Bit 4:0 = Reserved.
ST92F124/F150/F250 - SINGLE VOLTAGE FLASH & E3 TM (EMULATED EEPROM)
3.4 WRITE OPERATION EXAMPLE
Each operation (both Flash and E3 TM) is activated
by a sequence of instructions like the following:
OR
LD
LD
..
LD
FCR, #OPMASK
ADD1, #DATA1
ADD2, #DATA2
...., ......
ADDn, #DATAn
OR
FCR, #80h
;Operation selection
;1st Add and Data
;2nd Add and Data
;nth Add and Data
;n range = (1 to 16)
;Operation start
The first instruction is used to select the desired
operation by setting its corresponding selection bit
in the Control Register (FCR for Flash operations,
ECR for E3 TM operations).
The load instructions are used to set the addresses (in the Flash or in the E3 TM memory space) and
the data to be modified.
The last instruction is used to start the write operation, by setting the start bit (FWMS for Flash operations, EWMS for E3 TM operation) in the Control
register.
Once selected, but not yet started, one operation
can be cancelled by resetting the operation selection bit. Any latched address and data will be reset.
Warning: during the Flash Page Program or the E3
TM Page Update operation it is forbidden to change
the page address: only the last page address is effectively kept and all programming will effect only
that page.
A summary of the available Flash and E3 TM write
operations are shown in the following tables:
Table 11. Flash Write Operations
Operation
Selection bit
Addresses and Data
Start bit
Typical Duration
Byte Program
FBYTE
1 byte
FWMS
10 µs
Page Program
FPAGE
From 1 to 16 bytes
FWMS
160 µs (16 bytes)
Sector Erase
FSECT
From 1 to 4 sectors
FWMS
1.5 s (1 sector)
Sector Erase Suspend
FSUSP
None
None
15 µs
Chip Erase
FCHIP
None
FWMS
3s
Set Protection
PROT
From 1 to 4 bytes
FWMS
40 µs (4 bytes)
Start bit
Typical Duration
30 ms
Table 12. E3 TM Write Operations
Operation
Selection bit
Addresses and Data
Page Update
EPAGE
From 1 to 16 bytes
EWMS
Chip Erase
ECHIP
None
EWMS
59/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - SINGLE VOLTAGE FLASH & E3 TM (EMULATED EEPROM)
3.5 PROTECTION STRATEGY
The protection bits are stored in the 4 locations
from 231FFCh to 231FFFh (see Figure 34).
All the available protections are forced active during reset, then in the initialisation phase they are
read from the TestFlash.
The protections are stored in 2 Non Volatile Registers. Other 2 Non Volatile Registers can be used
as a password to re-enable test modes once they
have been disabled.
The protections can be programmed using the Set
Protection operation (see Control Registers paragraph), that can be executed from all the internal
or external memories except the Flash or TestFlash itself.
The TestFlash area (230000h to 231F7Fh) is always protected against write access.
Figure 34. Protection Register Map
231FFCh
231FFDh
231FFEh
231FFFh
NVAPR
NVWPR
NVPWD0
NVPWD1
3.5.1 Non Volatile Registers
The 4 Non Volatile Registers used to store the protection bits for the different protection features are
one time programmable by the user.
Access to these registers is controlled by the protections related to the TestFlash. Since the code to
program the Protection Registers cannot be
fetched by the Flash or the TestFlash memories,
this means that, once the APRO or APBR bits in
the NVAPR register are programmed, it is no longer possible to modify any of the protection bits. For
this reason the NV Password, if needed, must be
set with the same Set Protection operation used to
program these bits. For the same reason it is
strongly advised to never program the WPBR bit in
the NVWPR register, as this will prevent any further write access to the TestFlash, and consequently to the Protection Registers.
60/426
9
NON VOLATILE ACCESS PROTECTION REGISTER (NVAPR)
Address: 231FFCh - Read/Write
Delivery value: 1111 1111 (FFh)
7
1
6
5
4
APRO APBR APEE
3
2
1
0
APEX PWT2 PWT1 PWT0
Bit 7 = Reserved.
Bit 6 = APRO: FLASH access protection.
This bit, if programmed at 0, disables any access
(read/write) to operands mapped inside the Flash
address space (E3 TM excluded), unless the current
instruction is fetched from the TestFlash or from
the Flash itself.
0: ROM protection on
1: ROM protection off
Bit 5 = APBR: TestFlash access protection.
This bit, if programmed at 0, disables any access
(read/write) to operands mapped inside the TestFlash, the OTP and the protection registers, unless the current instruction is fetched from the
TestFlash or the OTP area.
0: TestFlash protection on
1: TestFlash protection off
Bit 4 = APEE: E3 TM access protection.
This bit, if programmed at 0, disables any access
(read/write) to operands mapped inside the E3 TM
address space, unless the current instruction is
fetched from the TestFlash or from the Flash, or
from the E3 TM itself.
0: E3 TM protection on
1: E3 TM protection off
Bit 3 = APEX: Access Protection from External
memory.
This bit, if programmed at 0, disables any access
(read/write) to operands mapped inside the address space of one of the internal memories (TestFlash, Flash, E3 TM, RAM), if the current instruction
is fetched from an external memory.
0: Protection from external memory on
1: Protection from external memory off
ST92F124/F150/F250 - SINGLE VOLTAGE FLASH & E3 TM (EMULATED EEPROM)
PROTECTION STRATEGY (Cont’d)
Bit 2:0 = PWT[2:0]: Password Attempt 2-0.
If the TMDIS bit in the NVWPR register (231FFDh)
is programmed to 0, every time a Set Protection
operation is executed with Program Addresses
equal to NVPWD1-0 (231FFE-Fh), the two provided Program Data are compared with the
NVPWD1-0 content; if there is not a match one of
PWT2-0 bits is automatically programmed to 0:
when these three bits are all programmed to 0 the
test modes are disabled forever. In order to intentionally disable test modes forever, it is sufficient to
set a random Password and then to make 3 wrong
attempts to enter it.
NON VOLATILE WRITE PROTECTION REGISTER (NVWPR)
Address: 231FFDh - Read/Write
Delivery value: 1111 1111 (FFh)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TMDIS PWOK WPBR WPEE WPRS3 WPRS2 WPRS1 WPRS0
Bit 7 = TMDIS: Test mode disable (Read Only).
This bit, if set to 1, allows to bypass all the protections in test and EPB modes. If programmed to 0,
on the contrary, all the protections remain active
also in test mode. The only way to enable the test
modes if this bit is programmed to 0, is to execute
the Set Protection operation with Program Addresses equal to NVPWD1-0 (231FFF-Eh) and
Program Data matching with the content of
NVPWD1-0. This bit is read only: it is automatically
programmed to 0 when NVPWD1-0 are written for
the first time.
0: Test mode disabled
1: Test mode enabled
Bit 6 = PWOK: Password OK (Read Only).
If the TMDIS bit is programmed to 0, when the Set
Protection operation is executed with Program Addresses equal to NVPWD[1:0] and Program Data
matching with NVPWD[1:0] content, the PWOK bit
is automatically programmed to 0. When this bit is
programmed to 0 TMDIS protection is bypassed
and the test and EPB modes are enabled.
0: Password OK
1: Password not OK
Bit 5 = WPBR: TestFlash Write Protection.
This bit, if programmed at 0, disables any write access to the TestFlash, the OTP and the protection
registers. This protection cannot be temporarily
disabled.
0: TestFlash write protection on
1: TestFlash write protection off
Note: it is strongly advised to never program the
WPBR bit in the NVWPR register, as this will prevent any further write access to the protection registers.
Bit 4 = WPEE: E3 TM Write Protection.
This bit, if programmed to 0, disables any write access to the E3 TM address space. This protection
can be temporary disabled by executing the Set
Protection operation and writing 1 into this bit. To
restore the protection, reset the micro or execute
another Set Protection operation on this bit.
0: E3 TM write protection on
1: E3 TM write protection off
Note: a read access to the NVWPR register restores any protection previously enabled.
Bit 3 = WPRS3: FLASH Sectors 5-3 Write Protection.
This bit, if programmed to 0, disables any write access to the Flash sector 3 (and sectors 4 and 5
when available) address space(s). This protection
can be temporary disabled by executing the Set
Protection operation and writing 1 into this bit. To
restore the protection, reset the micro or execute
another Set Protection operation on this bit.
0: FLASH Sectors 5-3 write protection on
1: FLASH Sectors 5-3 write protection off
Note: a read access to the NVWPR register restores any protection previously enabled.
Bit 2:0 = WPRS[2:0]: FLASH Sectors 2-0 Write
Protection.
These bits, if programmed to 0, disable any write
access to the 3 Flash sectors address spaces.
These protections can be temporary disabled by
executing the Set Protection operation and writing
1 into these bits. To restore the protection, reset
the micro or execute another Set Protection operation on this bit.
0: FLASH Sectors 2-0 write protection on
1: FLASH Sectors 2-0 write protection off
Note: a read access to the NVWPR register restores any protection previously enabled.
61/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - SINGLE VOLTAGE FLASH & E3 TM (EMULATED EEPROM)
PROTECTION STRATEGY (Cont’d)
NON VOLATILE PASSWORD (NVPWD1-0)
Address: 231FFF-231FFEh - Write Only
Delivery value: 1111 1111 (FFh)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PWD7 PWD6 PWD5 PWD4 PWD3 PWD2 PWD1 PWD0
Bit 7:0 = PWD[7:0]: Password bits 7:0 (Write Only).
These bits must be programmed with the Non Volatile Password that must be provided with the Set
Protection operation to disable (first write access)
or to reenable (second write access) the test and
EPB modes. The first write access fixes the password value and resets the TMDIS bit of NVWPR
(231FFDh). The second write access, with Program Data matching with NVPWD[1:0] content, resets the PWOK bit of NVWPR.
These two registers can be accessed only in write
mode (a read access returns FFh).
3.5.2 Temporary Unprotection
On user request the memory can be configured so
as to allow the temporary unprotection also of all
access protections bits of NVAPR (write protection
bits of NVWPR are always temporarily unprotectable).
62/426
9
Bit APEX can be temporarily disabled by executing the Set Protection operation and writing 1 into
this bit, but only if this write instruction is executed
from an internal memory (Flash and Test Flash excluded).
Bit APEE can be temporarily disabled by executing the Set Protection operation and writing 1 into
this bit, but only if this write instruction is executed
from the memory itself to unprotect (E3 TM).
Bits APRO and APBR can be temporarily disabled
through a direct write at NVAPR location, by overwriting at 1 these bits, but only if this write instruction is executed from the memory itself to unprotect.
To restore the access protections, reset the micro
or execute another Set Protection operation by
writing 0 to the desired bits.
Note: To restore all the protections previously enabled in the NVAPR or NVWPR register, read the
corresponding register.
When an internal memory (Flash, TestFlash or
E3 TM) is protected in access, also the data access
through a DMA of a peripheral is forbidden (it returns FFh). To read data in DMA mode from a protected memory, first it is necessary to temporarily
unprotect that memory.
The temporary unprotection allows also to update
a protected code.
Refer to the following figures to manage the Test/
EPB, Access and Write protection modes.
ST92F124/F150/F250 - SINGLE VOLTAGE FLASH & E3 TM (EMULATED EEPROM)
Figure 35. Test /EPB Mode Protection
Test/EPB Mode
Unprotected
Good
Password
2nd
Bad Password
Test/EPB Mode
Protected
1st
Bad Password
Good
PassWord
3rd Bad Password
Test/EPB Mode
Unprotected
Test/EPB Mode
Protected
Good
Password
Bad Password
Good
Password
Bad Password
Figure 36. Access Mode Protection
Access Mode
Unprotected
Reset the Access Protection bit
by a Set Protection Operation executed from RAM
Access Mode
Protected
Set the
Access Protection Bit
by an OR operation executed
from the Memory
Access Mode
to unprotect
Temporarily
Unprotected
SW/HW
Reset
NVAPR
Read
Access
Reset the
Access Protection bit
by a Set Protection
Operation
Executed from RAM
63/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - SINGLE VOLTAGE FLASH & E3 TM (EMULATED EEPROM)
Figure 37. WRITE Mode Protection
Write Mode
Unprotected
Reset the Write Protection Bit
by a Set Protection Operation executed from RAM
Write Mode
Protected
Set the
Write Protection Bit
by a Set Protection Operation
executed from RAM
Write Mode
Temporarily
Unprotected
64/426
9
SW/HW
Reset
NVWPR
Read
Access
Reset the Write
Protection Bit by a
Set Protection
Operation exectued
from RAM
ST92F124/F150/F250 - SINGLE VOLTAGE FLASH & E3 TM (EMULATED EEPROM)
3.6 FLASH IN-SYSTEM PROGRAMMING
The Flash memory can be programmed in-system
through a serial interface (SCI0).
Exiting from reset, the ST9 executes the initialization from the TestFlash code (written in TestFlash), where it checks the value of the SOUT0
pin. If it is at 0, this means that the user wishes to
update the Flash code, otherwise normal execution continues. In this second case, the TestFlash
code reads the Reset vector.
If the Flash is virgin (read content is always FFh),
the reset vector contains FFFFh. This will represent the last location of segment 0h, and it is interpreted by the TestFlash code as a flag indicating
that the Flash memory is virgin and needs to be
programmed. If the value 1 is detected on the
SOUT0 pin and the Flash is virgin, a HALT instruction is executed, waiting for a hardware Reset.
3.6.1 Code Update Routine
The TestFlash Code Update routine is called automatically if the SOUT0 pin is held low during power-on.
The Code Update routine performs the following
operations:
■ Enables the SCI0 peripheral in synchronous
mode
■ Transmits a synchronization datum (25h);
■ Waits for an address match (23h) with a timeout
of 10ms (@ fOSC 4 MHz);
■ If the match is not received before the timeout,
the execution returns to the Power-On routine;
■ If the match is received, the SCI0 transmits a
new datum (21h) to tell the external device that
it is ready to receive the data to be loaded in
RAM (that represents the code of the in-system
programming routine);
■ Receives two data representing the number of
bytes to be loaded (max. 4 Kbytes);
■ Receives the specified number of bytes (each
one preceded by the transmission of a Ready to
Receive character: (21h) and writes them in
internal RAM starting from address 200010h.
The first 4 words should be the interrupt vectors
of the 4 possible SCI interrupts, to be used by
the in-system programming routine;
■ Transmits a last datum (21h) as a request for
end of communications;
■ Receives
the
end
of
communication
confirmation datum (any byte other than 25h);
■ Resets all the unused RAM locations to FFh;
■ Calls address 200018h in internal RAM;
■ After completion of the in-system programming
routine, an HALT instruction is executed and an
Hardware Reset is needed.
The Code Update routine initializes the SCI0 peripheral as shown in the following table:
Table 13. SCI0 Registers (page 24) initialization
Register
IVR - R244
ACR - R245
IDPR - R249
CHCR - R250
Value
10h
23h
00h
83h
CCR - R251
E8h
BRGHR - R252
BRGLR - R253
SICR - R254
SOCR - R255
00h
04h
83h
01h
Notes
Vector Table in 0010h
Address Match is 23h
SCI interrupt priority is 0
8 Data Bits
rec. clock: ext RXCLK0
trx clock: int CLKOUT0
Baud Rate Divider is 4
Synchronous Mode
In addition, the Code Update routine remaps the
interrupts in the TestFlash (ISR = 23h), and configures I/O Ports P5.3 (SOUT0) and and P5.4
(CLKOUT0) as Alternate Functions.
Note: Four interrupt routines are used by the code
update routine: SCI Receiver Error Interrupt routine (vector in 0010h), SCI address Match Interrupt
routine (vector in 0012h), SCI Receiver Data
Ready Interrupt routine (vector in 0014h) and SCI
Transmitter Buffer Empty Interrupt routine (vector
in 0016h).
65/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - SINGLE VOLTAGE FLASH & E3 TM (EMULATED EEPROM)
Figure 38. Flash in-system Programming.
Internal RAM (User Code Example)
TestFlash Code
Start
In-system
prog routine
Initialisation
No
Jump to Flash
Main
User
Code
SOUT0
=0?
Address
Match
Interrupt
(from SCI)
Yes
No
Flash
virgin ?
Yes
Erase sectors
Enable Serial
Interface
WFI
Test
Flash
Load 1st table
of data in RAM
through S.I.
Code Update
Routine
Enable DMA
Load in-system
prog routine
in internal RAM
through SCI.
Call in-system
prog routine
Prog 1st table
of data from
RAM in Flash
Load 2nd table
of data in RAM
through SCI
Inc. Address
Last
Address ?
Yes
RET
HALT
66/426
9
No
ST92F124/F150/F250 - REGISTER AND MEMORY MAP
4 REGISTER AND MEMORY MAP
4.1 INTRODUCTION
The ST92F124/F150/F250 register map, memory
map and peripheral options are documented in
this section. Use this reference information to supplement the functional descriptions given elsewhere in this document.
4.2 MEMORY CONFIGURATION
The Program memory space of the ST92F124/
F150/F250 up to 256K bytes of directly addressable on-chip memory, is fully available to the user.
4.2.1 Reset Vector Location
The user power on reset vector must be stored in
the first two physical bytes of memory, 000000h
and 000001h.
4.2.2 Location of Vector for External Watchdog
Refresh
If an external watchdog is used, it must be refreshed during TestFlash execution by a user written routine. This routine has to be located in Flash
memory, the address where the routine starts has
to be written in 000006h (one word) while the seg-
ment where the routine is located has to be written
in 000009h (one byte).
This routine is called at least once every time that
the TestFlash executes an E3 TM write operation. If
the write operation has a long duration, the user
routine is called with a rate fixed by location
000008h with an internal clock frequency of 2
MHz, location 000008h fixes the number of milliseconds to wait between two calls of the user routine.
Table 14. User Routine Parameters
Location
000006h to
000007h
000008h
000009h
Size
Description
2 bytes
User routine address
1 byte
1 byte
ms rate at 2 MHz.
User routine segment
If location 000006h to 000007h is virgin (FFFFh),
the user routine is not called.
67/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - REGISTER AND MEMORY MAP
Figure 39. ST92F150/F250 External Memory Map
3FFFFFh
External
Memory
250000h
24FFFFh
PAGE 93h - 16 Kbytes
24C000h
24BFFFh
Upper Memory (1.8 Mbytes)
(usually external RAM starting
in Segment 24h)
PAGE 92h - 16 Kbytes
SEGMENT 24h
64 Kbytes
248000h
247FFFh
PAGE 91h - 16 Kbytes
244000h
243FFFh
PAGE 90h - 16 Kbytes
240000h
Segments 20h to 23h
(Reserved for
internal
memory)
(256Kbytes)
1FFFFFh
External
Memory
050000h
04FFFFh
PAGE 13h - 16 Kbytes
04C000h
04BFFFh
SEGMENT 4h
64 Kbytes
PAGE 12h - 16 Kbytes
048000h
047FFFh
PAGE 11h - 16 Kbytes
044000h
043FFFh
PAGE 10h - 16 Kbytes
040000h
Segments 0h to 3h
(Reserved for
internal
memory)
(256Kbytes)
68/426
9
Lower Memory (1.8 Mbytes)
(usually external ROM/FLASH
starting in Segment 4h)
ST92F124/F150/F250 - REGISTER AND MEMORY MAP
Figure 40. ST92F124/F150/F250 TESTFLASH and E3 TM Memory Map
23FFFFh
PAGE 8Fh - 16 Kbytes
23C000h
23BFFFh
PAGE 8Eh - 16 Kbytes
SEGMENT 23h
64 Kbytes
238000h
237FFFh
PAGE 8Dh - 16 Kbytes
234000h
233FFFh
PAGE 8Ch - 16 Kbytes
230000h
231FFFh
8 Kbytes
230000h
TESTFLASH - 8 Kbytes
231FFFh
128 bytes
231F80h
FLASH OTP - 128 bytes
231FFFh
4 bytes
231FFCh
FLASH OTP Protection Registers - 4 bytes
22FFFFh
PAGE 8Bh - 16 Kbytes
22C000h
22BFFFh
SEGMENT 22h
64 Kbytes
224003h/221000h
224000h/221003h
FLASH and E3 TM
Control Registers - 4 bytes
mapped in both locations
PAGE 8Ah - 16 Kbytes
228000h
227FFFh
PAGE 89h- 16 Kbytes
224000h
223FFFh
PAGE 88h - 16 Kbytes
220000h
2203FFh
1 Kbyte
220000h
Emulated EEPROM - 1 Kbyte
Not Available
69/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - REGISTER AND MEMORY MAP
Figure 41. ST92F124/F150 Internal Memory Map (64K versions)
20FFFFh
PAGE 83h - 16 Kbytes
20C000h
20BFFFh
PAGE 82h - 16 Kbytes
SEGMENT 20h
64 Kbytes
208000h
207FFFh
PAGE 81h - 16 Kbytes
204000h
203FFFh
PAGE 80h - 16 Kbytes
200000h
6 Kbytes
4 Kbytes
2 Kbytes
2017FFh
200FFFh
2007FFh
200000h
RAM
03FFFFh
PAGE Fh - 16 Kbytes
03C000h
03BFFFh
SEGMENT 3h
64 Kbytes
PAGE Eh - 16 Kbytes
038000h
037FFFh
PAGE Dh- 16 Kbytes
034000h
033FFFh
PAGE Ch - 16 Kbytes
030000h
02FFFFh
PAGE Bh - 16 Kbytes
02C000h
02BFFFh
Reserved Area -192 Kbytes
SEGMENT 2h
64 Kbytes
PAGE Ah - 16 Kbytes
028000h
027FFFh
PAGE 9h - 16 Kbytes
024000h
023FFFh
PAGE 8h- 16 Kbytes
020000h
01FFFFh
PAGE 7h - 16 Kbytes
01C000h
01BFFFh
SEGMENT 1h
64 Kbytes
PAGE 6h - 16 Kbytes
018000h
017FFFh
PAGE 5h - 16 Kbytes
014000h
013FFFh
PAGE 4h - 16 Kbytes
010000h
00FFFFh
PAGE 3h - 16 Kbytes
SECTOR F2
48 Kbytes
00C000h
00BFFFh
SEGMENT 0h
64 Kbytes
PAGE 2h - 16 Kbytes
008000h
007FFFh
PAGE 1h - 16 Kbytes
SECTOR F1
8 Kbytes
004000h
003FFFh
SECTOR F0
8 Kbytes
000000h
PAGE 0h - 16 Kbytes
FLASH - 64 Kbytes
Not Available
70/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - REGISTER AND MEMORY MAP
Figure 42. ST92F124/F150 Internal Memory Map (128K versions)
20FFFFh
PAGE 83h - 16 Kbytes
20C000h
20BFFFh
PAGE 82h - 16 Kbytes
SEGMENT 20h
64 Kbytes
208000h
207FFFh
PAGE 81h - 16 Kbytes
204000h
203FFFh
PAGE 80h - 16 Kbytes
200000h
6 Kbytes
4 Kbytes
2 Kbytes
2017FFh
200FFFh
2007FFh
200000h
RAM
03FFFFh
PAGE Fh - 16 Kbytes
03C000h
03BFFFh
SEGMENT 3h
64 Kbytes
PAGE Eh - 16 Kbytes
038000h
037FFFh
PAGE Dh- 16 Kbytes
034000h
033FFFh
PAGE Ch - 16 Kbytes
Reserved Area- 128 Kbytes
030000h
02FFFFh
PAGE Bh - 16 Kbytes
02C000h
02BFFFh
SEGMENT 2h
64 Kbytes
PAGE Ah - 16 Kbytes
028000h
027FFFh
PAGE 9h - 16 Kbytes
024000h
023FFFh
PAGE 8h- 16 Kbytes
020000h
01FFFFh
PAGE 7h - 16 Kbytes
01C000h
01BFFFh
SECTOR F3 *
64 Kbytes
SEGMENT 1h
64 Kbytes
PAGE 6h - 16 Kbytes
018000h
017FFFh
PAGE 5h - 16 Kbytes
014000h
013FFFh
PAGE 4h - 16 Kbytes
010000h
00FFFFh
PAGE 3h - 16 Kbytes
SECTOR F2
48 Kbytes
00C000h
00BFFFh
SEGMENT 0h
64 Kbytes
PAGE 2h - 16 Kbytes
008000h
007FFFh
PAGE 1h - 16 Kbytes
SECTOR F1
8 Kbytes
004000h
003FFFh
SECTOR F0
8 Kbytes
000000h
PAGE 0h - 16 Kbytes
FLASH - 128 Kbytes
* Available on ST92F150 versions only. Reserved area on ST92F124 version.
Not Available
71/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - REGISTER AND MEMORY MAP
Figure 43. ST92F250 Internal Memory Map (256K version)
20FFFFh
PAGE 83h - 16 Kbytes
20C000h
20BFFFh
PAGE 82h - 16 Kbytes
SEGMENT 20h
64 Kbytes
208000h
207FFFh
PAGE 81h - 16 Kbytes
204000h
203FFFh
PAGE 80h - 16 Kbytes
200000h
201FFFh
8Kbytes
200000h
RAM
03FFFFh
PAGE Fh - 16 Kbytes
03C000h
03BFFFh
SECTOR F5
64 Kbytes
SEGMENT 3h
64 Kbytes
PAGE Eh - 16 Kbytes
038000h
037FFFh
PAGE Dh- 16 Kbytes
034000h
033FFFh
PAGE Ch - 16 Kbytes
030000h
02FFFFh
PAGE Bh - 16 Kbytes
SECTOR F4
64 Kbytes
02C000h
02BFFFh
SEGMENT 2h
64 Kbytes
PAGE Ah - 16 Kbytes
028000h
027FFFh
PAGE 9h - 16 Kbytes
024000h
023FFFh
PAGE 8h- 16 Kbytes
020000h
01FFFFh
PAGE 7h - 16 Kbytes
01C000h
01BFFFh
SECTOR F3
64 Kbytes
SEGMENT 1h
64 Kbytes
PAGE 6h - 16 Kbytes
018000h
017FFFh
PAGE 5h - 16 Kbytes
014000h
013FFFh
PAGE 4h - 16 Kbytes
010000h
00FFFFh
PAGE 3h - 16 Kbytes
SECTOR F2
48 Kbytes
00C000h
00BFFFh
SEGMENT 0h
64 Kbytes
PAGE 2h - 16 Kbytes
008000h
007FFFh
PAGE 1h - 16 Kbytes
SECTOR F1
8 Kbytes
004000h
003FFFh
SECTOR F0
8 Kbytes
000000h
PAGE 0h - 16 Kbytes
FLASH - 256Kbytes
Not Available
72/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - REGISTER AND MEMORY MAP
4.3 ST92F124/F150/F250 REGISTER MAP
Table 16 contains the map of the group F peripheral pages.
The common registers used by each peripheral
are listed in Table 15.
Be very careful to correctly program both:
– The set of registers dedicated to a particular
function or peripheral.
– Registers common to other functions.
– In particular, double-check that any registers
with “undefined” reset values have been correctly initialized.
Warning: Note that in the EIVR and each IVR register, all bits are significant. Take care when defining base vector addresses that entries in the Interrupt Vector table do not overlap.
Table 15. Common Registers
Function or Peripheral
SCI, MFT
ADC
SPI, WDT, STIM
I/O PORTS
EXTERNAL INTERRUPT
RCCU
Common Registers
CICR + NICR + DMA REGISTERS + I/O PORT REGISTERS
CICR + NICR + I/O PORT REGISTERS
CICR + NICR + EXTERNAL INTERRUPT REGISTERS +
I/O PORT REGISTERS
I/O PORT REGISTERS + MODER
INTERRUPT REGISTERS + I/O PORT REGISTERS
INTERRUPT REGISTERS + MODER
73/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - REGISTER AND MEMORY MAP
Table 16. Group F Pages Register Map
Resources available on the ST92F124/F150/F250 devices:
21
22
23
24
26
28
29
36
37
38
39
40
CAN_1*
CAN_1*
CAN_1*
CAN_1*
Res
Port 3
R254 Res.
WCR
R253
R252
Res.
Res.
MFT1
R248
Res.
R247
MFT0
R249
MFT0
WDT
R250
Port 6
Res
Port 2
R251
Res. Res.
MFT1
Port 5
INT
R245
Port 1
R246
R244
Res.
R240
74/426
STIM
Port 4
R241
Port 0
R242
MFT0
Res. Res.
SPI
R243
9
20
CAN_1*
11
EFT1 *
10
EFT0 *
9
SCI-A *
8
SCI-M
7
JBLPD *
3
Port 7
R255
2
I2C_1 *
0
MMU
Page
I2C_0
Reg.
ST92F124/F150/F250 - REGISTER AND MEMORY MAP
:
43
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
57
60
61
62
63
AD10
42
AD10
41
AD10
Page
STANDARD INTERRUPT CHANNELS
Reg.
R255
Port 9*
R254
WUIMU
R253
R252
R251
Res.
CAN_0*
CAN_0*
CAN_0*
CAN_0*
CAN_0*
CAN_0*
R247
CAN_1*
R248
CAN_1*
R249
CAN_0*
Port 8*
R250
R246
R245
Res.
Res.
R243
R242
RCCU
R244
Res
R241
R240
* Available on some devices only
75/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - REGISTER AND MEMORY MAP
Table 17. Detailed Register Map
Page
(Dec)
Block
Core
N/A
I/O
Port
0:5
INT
0
WDT
2
76/426
9
Reg.
No.
Register
Name
Description
Reset
Value
Hex.
Doc.
Page
R230
CICR
Central Interrupt Control Register
87
33
R231
FLAGR
Flag Register
00
34
R232
RP0
Pointer 0 Register
xx
36
R233
RP1
Pointer 1 Register
xx
36
R234
PPR
Page Pointer Register
xx
38
R235
MODER
Mode Register
E0
38
R236
USPHR
User Stack Pointer High Register
xx
40
R237
USPLR
User Stack Pointer Low Register
xx
40
R238
SSPHR
System Stack Pointer High Reg.
xx
40
R239
SSPLR
System Stack Pointer Low Reg.
xx
40
R224
P0DR
Port 0 Data Register
FF
R225
P1DR
Port 1 Data Register
FF
R226
P2DR
Port 2 Data Register
FF
R227
P3DR
Port 3 Data Register
1111 111x
R228
P4DR
Port 4 Data Register
FF
R229
P5DR
Port 5 Data Register
FF
R242
EITR
External Interrupt Trigger Register
00
105
150
R243
EIPR
External Interrupt Pending Reg.
00
106
R244
EIMR
External Interrupt Mask-bit Reg.
00
106
R245
EIPLR
External Interrupt Priority Level Reg.
FF
106
R246
EIVR
External Interrupt Vector Register
x6
162
R247
NICR
Nested Interrupt Control
00
107
R248
WDTHR
Watchdog Timer High Register
FF
161
R249
WDTLR
Watchdog Timer Low Register
FF
161
R250
WDTPR
Watchdog Timer Prescaler Reg.
FF
161
R251
WDTCR
Watchdog Timer Control Register
12
161
162
R252
WCR
Wait Control Register
7F
I/O
R240
P0C0
Port 0 Configuration Register 0
00
Port
R241
P0C1
Port 0 Configuration Register 1
00
0
R242
P0C2
Port 0 Configuration Register 2
00
I/O
R244
P1C0
Port 1 Configuration Register 0
00
Port
R245
P1C1
Port 1 Configuration Register 1
00
1
R246
P1C2
Port 1 Configuration Register 2
00
I/O
R248
P2C0
Port 2 Configuration Register 0
FF
Port
R249
P2C1
Port 2 Configuration Register 1
00
2
R250
P2C2
Port 2 Configuration Register 2
00
I/O
R252
P3C0
Port 3 Configuration Register 0
1111 111x
Port
R253
P3C1
Port 3 Configuration Register 1
0000 000x
3
R254
P3C2
Port 3 Configuration Register 2
0000 000x
150
ST92F124/F150/F250 - REGISTER AND MEMORY MAP
Page
(Dec)
3
Block
Reg.
No.
Register
Name
Description
Reset
Value
Hex.
I/O
R240
P4C0
Port 4 Configuration Register 0
FD
Port
R241
P4C1
Port 4 Configuration Register 1
00
4
R242
P4C2
Port 4 Configuration Register 2
00
I/O
R244
P5C0
Port 5 Configuration Register 0
FF
Port
R245
P5C1
Port 5 Configuration Register 1
00
5
R246
P5C2
Port 5 Configuration Register 2
00
R248
P6C0
Port 6 Configuration Register 0
xx11 1111
R249
P6C1
Port 6 Configuration Register 1
xx00 0000
R250
P6C2
Port 6 Configuration Register 2
xx00 0000
R251
P6DR
Port 6 Data Register
xx11 1111
R252
P7C0
Port 7 Configuration Register 0
FF
R253
P7C1
Port 7 Configuration Register 1
00
R254
P7C2
Port 7 Configuration Register 2
00
R255
P7DR
Port 7 Data Register
FF
I/O
Port
6
I/O
Port
7
7
SPI
Doc.
Page
150
R240
SPDR0
SPI Data Register
00
259
R241
SPCR0
SPI Control Register
00
259
R242
SPSR0
SPI Status Register
00
260
R243
SPPR0
SPI Prescaler Register
00
260
77/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - REGISTER AND MEMORY MAP
Page
(Dec)
Block
8
MFT1
9
MFT0,1
MFT0
10
78/426
9
Reg.
No.
Register
Name
Description
Reset
Value
Hex.
Doc.
Page
R240
REG0HR1
Capture Load Register 0 High
xx
201
R241
REG0LR1
Capture Load Register 0 Low
xx
201
R242
REG1HR1
Capture Load Register 1 High
xx
201
R243
REG1LR1
Capture Load Register 1 Low
xx
201
R244
CMP0HR1
Compare 0 Register High
00
201
R245
CMP0LR1
Compare 0 Register Low
00
201
R246
CMP1HR1
Compare 1 Register High
00
201
R247
CMP1LR1
Compare 1 Register Low
00
201
R248
TCR1
Timer Control Register
00
202
R249
TMR1
Timer Mode Register
00
203
R250
T_ICR1
External Input Control Register
00
204
R251
PRSR1
Prescaler Register
00
204
R252
OACR1
Output A Control Register
00
205
R253
OBCR1
Output B Control Register
00
206
R254
T_FLAGR1
Flags Register
00
206
R255
IDMR1
Interrupt/DMA Mask Register
00
208
R244
DCPR1
DMA Counter Pointer Register
xx
201
R245
DAPR1
DMA Address Pointer Register
xx
201
R246
T_IVR1
Interrupt Vector Register
xx
201
R247
IDCR1
Interrupt/DMA Control Register
C7
201
R248
IOCR
I/O Connection Register
FC
210
R240
DCPR0
DMA Counter Pointer Register
xx
208
R241
DAPR0
DMA Address Pointer Register
xx
209
R242
T_IVR0
Interrupt Vector Register
xx
209
R243
IDCR0
Interrupt/DMA Control Register
C7
210
R240
REG0HR0
Capture Load Register 0 High
xx
201
R241
REG0LR0
Capture Load Register 0 Low
xx
201
R242
REG1HR0
Capture Load Register 1 High
xx
201
R243
REG1LR0
Capture Load Register 1 Low
xx
201
R244
CMP0HR0
Compare 0 Register High
00
201
R245
CMP0LR0
Compare 0 Register Low
00
201
R246
CMP1HR0
Compare 1 Register High
00
201
R247
CMP1LR0
Compare 1 Register Low
00
201
R248
TCR0
Timer Control Register
00
202
R249
TMR0
Timer Mode Register
00
203
R250
T_ICR0
External Input Control Register
00
204
R251
PRSR0
Prescaler Register
00
204
R252
OACR0
Output A Control Register
00
205
R253
OBCR0
Output B Control Register
00
206
R254
T_FLAGR0
Flags Register
00
206
R255
IDMR0
Interrupt/DMA Mask Register
00
208
ST92F124/F150/F250 - REGISTER AND MEMORY MAP
Page
(Dec)
11
20
Block
STIM
I2C_0
MMU
21
EXTMI
Reg.
No.
Register
Name
Description
Reset
Value
Hex.
Doc.
Page
R240
STH
Counter High Byte Register
FF
165
R241
STL
Counter Low Byte Register
FF
165
R242
STP
Standard Timer Prescaler Register
FF
165
R243
STC
Standard Timer Control Register
14
165
R240
I2DCCR
I2C Control Register
00
272
R241
I2CSR1
I2C Status Register 1
00
273
R242
I2CSR2
I2C Status Register 2
00
275
R243
I2CCCR
I2C Clock Control Register
00
276
R244
I2COAR1
I2C Own Address Register 1
00
276
R245
I2COAR2
I2C Own Address Register 2
00
277
R246
I2CDR
R247
I2CADR
I2C
Data Register
I2C General Call Address
2
00
277
A0
277
R248
I2CISR
I C Interrupt Status Register
xx
278
R249
I2CIVR
I2C Interrupt Vector Register
xx
279
R250
I2CRDAP
Receiver DMA Source Addr. Pointer
xx
279
R251
I2CRDC
Receiver DMA Transaction Counter
xx
279
R252
I2CTDAP
Transmitter DMA Source Addr. Pointer
xx
280
R253
I2CTDC
Transmitter DMA Transaction Counter
xx
280
R254
I2CECCR
Extended Clock Control Register
00
280
2
R255
I2CIMR
I C Interrupt Mask Register
x0
281
R240
DPR0
Data Page Register 0
xx
45
R241
DPR1
Data Page Register 1
xx
45
R242
DPR2
Data Page Register 2
xx
45
R243
DPR3
Data Page Register 3
xx
45
R244
CSR
Code Segment Register
00
46
R248
ISR
Interrupt Segment Register
xx
46
R249
DMASR
DMA Segment Register
xx
46
R245
EMR1
External Memory Register 1
80
147
R246
EMR2
External Memory Register 2
1F
148
79/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - REGISTER AND MEMORY MAP
Page
(Dec)
22
23
80/426
9
Block
I2C_1*
JBLPD*
Reg.
No.
Register
Name
Description
Reset
Value
Hex.
Doc.
Page
R240
I2DCCR
I2C Control Register
00
272
R241
I2CSR1
2
I C Status Register 1
00
273
R242
I2CSR2
I2C Status Register 2
00
275
I2
R243
I2CCCR
00
276
R244
I2COAR1
I2C Own Address Register 1
00
276
R245
I2COAR2
I2
00
277
R246
I2CDR
I2C Data Register
00
277
R247
I2CADR
I2C General Call Address
A0
277
C Clock Control Register
C Own Address Register 2
R248
I2CISR
I2C
Interrupt Status Register
xx
278
R249
I2CIVR
I2C Interrupt Vector Register
xx
279
R250
I2CRDAP
Receiver DMA Source Addr. Pointer
xx
279
R251
I2CRDC
Receiver DMA Transaction Counter
xx
279
R252
I2CTDAP
Transmitter DMA Source Addr. Pointer
xx
280
R253
I2CTDC
Transmitter DMA Transaction Counter
xx
280
R254
I2CECCR
Extended Clock Control Register
00
280
R255
I2CIMR
I2C Interrupt Mask Register
x0
281
R240
STATUS
Status Register
40
304
R241
TXDATA
Transmit Data Register
xx
305
R242
RXDATA
Receive Data Register
xx
306
R243
TXOP
Transmit Opcode Register
00
306
R244
CLKSEL
System Frequency Selection Register
00
311
R245
CONTROL
Control Register
40
311
R246
PADDR
Physical Address Register
xx
312
R247
ERROR
Error Register
00
313
R248
IVR
Interrupt Vector Register
xx
315
R249
PRLR
Priority Level Register
10
315
R250
IMR
Interrupt Mask Register
00
315
R251
OPTIONS
Options and Register Group Selection
00
317
R252
CREG0
Current Register 0
xx
319
R253
CREG1
Current Register 1
xx
319
R254
CREG2
Current Register 2
xx
319
R255
CREG3
Current Register 4
xx
319
ST92F124/F150/F250 - REGISTER AND MEMORY MAP
Page
(Dec)
24
26
28
Block
SCI-M
SCI-A*
EFT0*
Reg.
No.
Register
Name
Description
Reset
Value
Hex.
Doc.
Page
R240
RDCPR0
Receiver DMA Transaction Counter Pointer
xx
226
R241
RDAPR0
Receiver DMA Source Address Pointer
xx
226
R242
TDCPR0
Transmitter DMA Transaction Counter Pointer
xx
226
R243
TDAPR0
Transmitter DMA Destination Address Pointer
xx
226
R244
S_IVR0
Interrupt Vector Register
xx
228
R245
ACR0
Address/Data Compare Register
xx
228
R246
IMR0
Interrupt Mask Register
x0
228
R247
S_ISR0
Interrupt Status Register
xx
228
R248
RXBR0
Receive Buffer Register
xx
230
R248
TXBR0
Transmitter Buffer Register
xx
230
R249
IDPR0
Interrupt/DMA Priority Register
xx
231
R250
CHCR0
Character Configuration Register
xx
232
R251
CCR0
Clock Configuration Register
00
233
R252
BRGHR0
Baud Rate Generator High Reg.
xx
234
R253
BRGLR0
Baud Rate Generator Low Register
xx
234
R254
SICR0
Synchronous Input Control
03
234
R255
SOCR0
Synchronous Output Control
01
235
R240
SCISR
SCI Status Register
C0
244
R241
SCIDR
SCI Data Register
xx
247
R242
SCIBRR
SCI Baud Rate Register
xx
247
R243
SCICR1
SCI Control Register 1
xx
245
246
R244
SCICR2
SCI Control Register 2
00
R245
SCIERPR
SCI Extended Receive Prescaler Register
00
248
R246
SCIETPR
SCI Extended Transmit Prescaler Register
00
248
R255
SCICR3
SCI Control Register 3
00
246
R240
IC1HR0
Input Capture 1 High Register
xx
180
R241
IC1LR0
Input Capture 1 Low Register
xx
180
R242
IC2HR0
Input Capture 2 High Register
xx
180
R243
IC2LR0
Input Capture 2 Low Register
xx
180
R244
CHR0
Counter High Register
FF
181
R245
CLR0
Counter Low Register
FC
181
R246
ACHR0
Alternate Counter High Register
FF
181
R247
ACLR0
Alternate Counter Low Register
FC
181
R248
OC1HR0
Output Compare 1 High Register
80
182
R249
OC1LR0
Output Compare 1 Low Register
00
182
R250
OC2HR0
Output Compare 2 High Register
80
182
R251
OC2LR0
Output Compare 2 Low Register
00
182
R252
CR1_0
Control Register 1
00
184
R253
CR2_0
Control Register 2
00
184
R254
SR0
Status Register
00
184
R255
CR3_0
Control Register 3
00
184
81/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - REGISTER AND MEMORY MAP
Page
(Dec)
29
36
82/426
9
Block
EFT1*
Reg.
No.
Register
Name
Description
Reset
Value
Hex.
Doc.
Page
R240
IC1HR1
Input Capture 1 High Register
xx
180
R241
IC1LR1
Input Capture 1 Low Register
xx
180
R242
IC2HR1
Input Capture 2 High Register
xx
180
R243
IC2LR1
Input Capture 2 Low Register
xx
180
R244
CHR1
Counter High Register
FF
181
R245
CLR1
Counter Low Register
FC
181
R246
ACHR1
Alternate Counter High Register
FF
181
R247
ACLR1
Alternate Counter Low Register
FC
181
R248
OC1HR1
Output Compare 1 High Register
80
182
R249
OC1LR1
Output Compare 1 Low Register
00
182
R250
OC2HR1
Output Compare 2 High Register
80
182
R251
OC2LR1
Output Compare 2 Low Register
00
182
R252
CR1_1
Control Register 1
00
184
R253
CR2_1
Control Register 2
00
184
184
R254
SR1
Status Register
00
R255
CR3_1
Control Register 3
00
184
R240
CMCR
CAN Master Control Register
02
342
R241
CMSR
CAN Master Status Register
02
343
R242
CTSR
CAN Transmit Control Register
00
343
R243
CTPR
CAN Transmit Priority Register
00
344
R244
CRFR0
CAN Receive FIFO Register 0
00
345
R245
CRFR1
CAN Receive FIFO Register 1
00
345
CAN1*
R246
CIER
CAN Interrupt Enable Register
00
345
Control/
Status
R247
CESR
CAN Error Status Register
00
346
R248
CEIER
CAN Error Interrupt Enable Register
00
346
R249
TECR
Transmit Error Counter Register
00
347
R250
RECR
Receive Error Counter Register
00
347
R251
CDGR
CAN Diagnosis Register
00
347
R252
CBTR0
CAN Bit Timing Register 0
00
348
R253
CBTR1
CAN Bit Timing Register 1
23
348
R255
CFPSR
Filter page Select Register
00
348
ST92F124/F150/F250 - REGISTER AND MEMORY MAP
Page
(Dec)
Block
CAN1*
37
Receive
FIFO 0
CAN1*
38
Receive
FIFO 1
Reg.
No.
Register
Name
Description
Reset
Value
Hex.
Doc.
Page
R240
MFMI
Mailbox Filter Match Index
00
350
R241
MDLC
Mailbox Data Length Control Register
xx
351
R242
MIDR0
Mailbox Identifier Register 0
xx
350
R243
MIDR1
Mailbox Identifier Register 1
xx
350
R244
MIDR2
Mailbox Identifier Register 2
xx
350
R245
MIDR3
Mailbox Identifier Register 3
xx
350
R246
MDAR0
Mailbox Data Register 0
xx
351
R247
MDAR1
Mailbox Data Register 1
xx
351
R248
MDAR2
Mailbox Data Register 2
xx
351
R249
MDAR3
Mailbox Data Register 3
xx
351
R250
MDAR4
Mailbox Data Register 4
xx
351
R251
MDAR5
Mailbox Data Register 5
xx
351
R252
MDAR6
Mailbox Data Register 6
xx
351
R253
MDAR7
Mailbox Data Register 7
xx
351
351
R254
MTSLR
Mailbox Time Stamp Low Register
xx
R255
MTSHR
Mailbox Time Stamp High Register
xx
351
R240
MFMI
Mailbox Filter Match Index
00
350
R241
MDLC
Mailbox Data Length Control Register
xx
351
R242
MIDR0
Mailbox Identifier Register 0
xx
350
R243
MIDR1
Mailbox Identifier Register 1
xx
350
R244
MIDR2
Mailbox Identifier Register 2
xx
350
R245
MIDR3
Mailbox Identifier Register 3
xx
350
R246
MDAR0
Mailbox Data Register 0
xx
351
R247
MDAR1
Mailbox Data Register 1
xx
351
R248
MDAR2
Mailbox Data Register 2
xx
351
R249
MDAR3
Mailbox Data Register 3
xx
351
R250
MDAR4
Mailbox Data Register 4
xx
351
R251
MDAR5
Mailbox Data Register 5
xx
351
R252
MDAR6
Mailbox Data Register 6
xx
351
R253
MDAR7
Mailbox Data Register 7
xx
351
R254
MTSLR
Mailbox Time Stamp Low Register
xx
351
R255
MTSHR
Mailbox Time Stamp High Register
xx
351
83/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - REGISTER AND MEMORY MAP
Page
(Dec)
Block
CAN1 *
39
Tx
Mailbox 0
CAN1 *
40
Tx
Mailbox 1
84/426
9
Reg.
No.
Register
Name
Description
Reset
Value
Hex.
Doc.
Page
R240
MCSR
Mailbox Control Status Register
00
349
R241
MDLC
Mailbox Data Length Control Register
xx
351
R242
MIDR0
Mailbox Identifier Register 0
xx
350
R243
MIDR1
Mailbox Identifier Register 1
xx
350
R244
MIDR2
Mailbox Identifier Register 2
xx
350
R245
MIDR3
Mailbox Identifier Register 3
xx
350
R246
MDAR0
Mailbox Data Register 0
xx
351
R247
MDAR1
Mailbox Data Register 1
xx
351
R248
MDAR2
Mailbox Data Register 2
xx
351
R249
MDAR3
Mailbox Data Register 3
xx
351
R250
MDAR4
Mailbox Data Register 4
xx
351
R251
MDAR5
Mailbox Data Register 5
xx
351
R252
MDAR6
Mailbox Data Register 6
xx
351
R253
MDAR7
Mailbox Data Register 7
xx
351
R254
MTSLR
Mailbox Time Stamp Low Register
xx
351
R255
MTSHR
Mailbox Time Stamp High Register
xx
351
R240
MCSR
Mailbox Control Status Register
00
349
R241
MDLC
Mailbox Data Length Control Register
xx
351
R242
MIDR0
Mailbox Identifier Register 0
xx
350
R243
MIDR1
Mailbox Identifier Register 1
xx
350
R244
MIDR2
Mailbox Identifier Register 2
xx
350
R245
MIDR3
Mailbox Identifier Register 3
xx
350
R246
MDAR0
Mailbox Data Register 0
xx
351
R247
MDAR1
Mailbox Data Register 1
xx
351
R248
MDAR2
Mailbox Data Register 2
xx
351
R249
MDAR3
Mailbox Data Register 3
xx
351
R250
MDAR4
Mailbox Data Register 4
xx
351
R251
MDAR5
Mailbox Data Register 5
xx
351
R252
MDAR6
Mailbox Data Register 6
xx
351
R253
MDAR7
Mailbox Data Register 7
xx
351
R254
MTSLR
Mailbox Time Stamp Low Register
xx
351
R255
MTSHR
Mailbox Time Stamp High Register
xx
351
ST92F124/F150/F250 - REGISTER AND MEMORY MAP
Page
(Dec)
Block
CAN1 *
41
Tx
Mailbox 2
42
CAN1 *
Filters
I/O
Port
8*
43
I/O
Port
9*
48
Reg.
No.
Register
Name
Description
Reset
Value
Hex.
Doc.
Page
R240
MCSR
Mailbox Control Status Register
00
349
R241
MDLC
Mailbox Data Length Control Register
x0
351
R242
MIDR0
Mailbox Identifier Register 0
xx
350
R243
MIDR1
Mailbox Identifier Register 1
xx
350
R244
MIDR2
Mailbox Identifier Register 2
xx
350
R245
MIDR3
Mailbox Identifier Register 3
xx
350
R246
MDAR0
Mailbox Data Register 0
xx
351
R247
MDAR1
Mailbox Data Register 1
xx
351
R248
MDAR2
Mailbox Data Register 2
xx
351
R249
MDAR3
Mailbox Data Register 3
xx
351
R250
MDAR4
Mailbox Data Register 4
xx
351
R251
MDAR5
Mailbox Data Register 5
xx
351
R252
MDAR6
Mailbox Data Register 6
xx
351
R253
MDAR7
Mailbox Data Register 7
xx
351
R254
MTSLR
Mailbox Time Stamp Low Register
xx
351
R255
MTSHR
Mailbox Time Stamp High Register
xx
351
See “Page Mapping
for CAN 0 / CAN 1”
on page 356
Filter Configuration
Acceptance Filters 7:0
(5 register pages)
R248
P8C0
Port 8 Configuration Register 0
03
R249
P8C1
Port 8 Configuration Register 1
00
R250
P8C2
Port 8 Configuration Register 2
00
R251
P8DR
Port 8 Data Register
FF
R252
P9C0
Port 9 Configuration Register 0
00
R253
P9C1
Port 9 Configuration Register 1
00
R254
P9C2
Port 9 Configuration Register 2
00
150
R255
P9DR
Port 9 Data Register
FF
R240
CMCR
CAN Master Control Register
02
342
R241
CMSR
CAN Master Status Register
02
343
R242
CTSR
CAN Transmit Control Register
00
343
R243
CTPR
CAN Transmit Priority Register
00
344
R244
CRFR0
CAN Receive FIFO Register 0
00
345
R245
CRFR1
CAN Receive FIFO Register 1
00
345
CAN0*
R246
CIER
CAN Interrupt Enable Register
00
345
Control/
Status
R247
CESR
CAN Error Status Register
00
346
R248
CEIER
CAN Error Interrupt Enable Register
00
346
R249
TECR
Transmit Error Counter Register
00
347
R250
RECR
Receive Error Counter Register
00
347
R251
CDGR
CAN Diagnosis Register
00
347
R252
CBTR0
CAN Bit Timing Register 0
00
348
R253
CBTR1
CAN Bit Timing Register 1
23
348
R255
CFPSR
Filter page Select Register
00
348
85/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - REGISTER AND MEMORY MAP
Page
(Dec)
Block
CAN0*
49
Receive
FIFO 0
CAN0*
50
86/426
9
Receive
FIFO 1
Reg.
No.
Register
Name
Description
Reset
Value
Hex.
Doc.
Page
R240
MFMI
Mailbox Filter Match Index
00
350
R241
MDLC
Mailbox Data Length Control Register
xx
351
R242
MIDR0
Mailbox Identifier Register 0
xx
350
R243
MIDR1
Mailbox Identifier Register 1
xx
350
R244
MIDR2
Mailbox Identifier Register 2
xx
350
R245
MIDR3
Mailbox Identifier Register 3
xx
350
R246
MDAR0
Mailbox Data Register 0
xx
351
R247
MDAR1
Mailbox Data Register 1
xx
351
R248
MDAR2
Mailbox Data Register 2
xx
351
R249
MDAR3
Mailbox Data Register 3
xx
351
R250
MDAR4
Mailbox Data Register 4
xx
351
R251
MDAR5
Mailbox Data Register 5
xx
351
R252
MDAR6
Mailbox Data Register 6
xx
351
R253
MDAR7
Mailbox Data Register 7
xx
351
351
R254
MTSLR
Mailbox Time Stamp Low Register
xx
R255
MTSHR
Mailbox Time Stamp High Register
xx
351
R240
MFMI
Mailbox Filter Match Index
00
350
R241
MDLC
Mailbox Data Length Control Register
xx
351
R242
MIDR0
Mailbox Identifier Register 0
xx
350
R243
MIDR1
Mailbox Identifier Register 1
xx
350
R244
MIDR2
Mailbox Identifier Register 2
xx
350
R245
MIDR3
Mailbox Identifier Register 3
xx
350
R246
MDAR0
Mailbox Data Register 0
xx
351
R247
MDAR1
Mailbox Data Register 1
xx
351
R248
MDAR2
Mailbox Data Register 2
xx
351
R249
MDAR3
Mailbox Data Register 3
xx
351
R250
MDAR4
Mailbox Data Register 4
xx
351
R251
MDAR5
Mailbox Data Register 5
xx
351
R252
MDAR6
Mailbox Data Register 6
xx
351
R253
MDAR7
Mailbox Data Register 7
xx
351
R254
MTSLR
Mailbox Time Stamp Low Register
xx
351
R255
MTSHR
Mailbox Time Stamp High Register
xx
351
ST92F124/F150/F250 - REGISTER AND MEMORY MAP
Page
(Dec)
Block
CAN0*
51
Tx
Mailbox 0
CAN0*
52
Tx
Mailbox 1
Reg.
No.
Register
Name
Description
Reset
Value
Hex.
Doc.
Page
R240
MCSR
Mailbox Control Status Register
00
349
R241
MDLC
Mailbox Data Length Control Register
xx
351
R242
MIDR0
Mailbox Identifier Register 0
xx
350
R243
MIDR1
Mailbox Identifier Register 1
xx
350
R244
MIDR2
Mailbox Identifier Register 2
xx
350
R245
MIDR3
Mailbox Identifier Register 3
xx
350
R246
MDAR0
Mailbox Data Register 0
xx
351
R247
MDAR1
Mailbox Data Register 1
xx
351
R248
MDAR2
Mailbox Data Register 2
xx
351
R249
MDAR3
Mailbox Data Register 3
xx
351
R250
MDAR4
Mailbox Data Register 4
xx
351
R251
MDAR5
Mailbox Data Register 5
xx
351
R252
MDAR6
Mailbox Data Register 6
xx
351
R253
MDAR7
Mailbox Data Register 7
xx
351
R254
MTSLR
Mailbox Time Stamp Low Register
xx
351
R255
MTSHR
Mailbox Time Stamp High Register
xx
351
R240
MCSR
Mailbox Control Status Register
00
349
R241
MDLC
Mailbox Data Length Control Register
xx
351
R242
MIDR0
Mailbox Identifier Register 0
xx
350
R243
MIDR1
Mailbox Identifier Register 1
xx
350
R244
MIDR2
Mailbox Identifier Register 2
xx
350
R245
MIDR3
Mailbox Identifier Register 3
xx
350
R246
MDAR0
Mailbox Data Register 0
xx
351
R247
MDAR1
Mailbox Data Register 1
xx
351
R248
MDAR2
Mailbox Data Register 2
xx
351
R249
MDAR3
Mailbox Data Register 3
xx
351
R250
MDAR4
Mailbox Data Register 4
xx
351
R251
MDAR5
Mailbox Data Register 5
xx
351
R252
MDAR6
Mailbox Data Register 6
xx
351
R253
MDAR7
Mailbox Data Register 7
xx
351
R254
MTSLR
Mailbox Time Stamp Low Register
xx
351
R255
MTSHR
Mailbox Time Stamp High Register
xx
351
87/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - REGISTER AND MEMORY MAP
Page
(Dec)
Block
CAN0*
53
Tx
Mailbox 2
54
55
57
60
88/426
9
CAN0*
Filters
RCCU
WUIMU
STD
INT
Reg.
No.
Register
Name
Description
Reset
Value
Hex.
Doc.
Page
R240
MCSR
Mailbox Control Status Register
00
349
R241
MDLC
Mailbox Data Length Control Register
xx
351
R242
MIDR0
Mailbox Identifier Register 0
xx
350
R243
MIDR1
Mailbox Identifier Register 1
xx
350
R244
MIDR2
Mailbox Identifier Register 2
xx
350
R245
MIDR3
Mailbox Identifier Register 3
xx
350
R246
MDAR0
Mailbox Data Register 0
xx
351
R247
MDAR1
Mailbox Data Register 1
xx
351
R248
MDAR2
Mailbox Data Register 2
xx
351
R249
MDAR3
Mailbox Data Register 3
xx
351
R250
MDAR4
Mailbox Data Register 4
xx
351
R251
MDAR5
Mailbox Data Register 5
xx
351
R252
MDAR6
Mailbox Data Register 6
xx
351
R253
MDAR7
Mailbox Data Register 7
xx
351
R254
MTSLR
Mailbox Time Stamp Low Register
xx
351
R255
MTSHR
Mailbox Time Stamp High Register
xx
351
00
133
Filter Configuration
“Page Mapping for
CAN 0 / CAN 1” on
page 356
Acceptance Filters 7:0
R240
CLKCTL
Clock Control Register
R241
VRCTR
Voltage Regulator Control Register
0x
133
134
(5 register pages)
R242
CLK_FLAG
Clock Flag Register
64,48, 28
or 08
R246
PLLCONF
PLL Configuration Register
xx
134
R249
WUCTRL
Wake-Up Control Register
00
117
R250
WUMRH
Wake-Up Mask Register High
00
118
R251
WUMRL
Wake-Up Mask Register Low
00
118
R252
WUTRH
Wake-Up Trigger Register High
00
119
R253
WUTRL
Wake-Up Trigger Register Low
00
119
R254
WUPRH
Wake-Up Pending Register High
00
119
R255
WUPRL
Wake-Up Pending Register Low
00
119
R245
SIMRH
Interrupt Mask Register High (Ch. I to L)
00
108
R246
SIMRL
Interrupt Mask Register Low (Ch. E to H)
00
108
R247
SITRH
Interrupt Trigger Register High (Ch. I to L)
00
108
R248
SITRL
Interrupt Trigger Register Low (Ch. E to H)
00
108
R249
SIPRH
Interrupt Pending Register High (Ch. I to L)
00
108
R250
SIPRL
Interrupt Pending Register Low (Ch. E to H)
00
108
R251
SIVR
Interrupt Vector Register (Ch. E to L)
xE
109
R252
SIPLRH
Interrupt Priority Register High (Ch. I to L)
FF
109
R253
SIPLRL
Interrupt Priority Register Low (Ch. E to H)
FF
109
R254
SFLAGRH
Interrupt Flag Register High (Ch. I to L)
00
110
R255
SIFLAGRL
Interrupt Flag Register Low (Ch. E to H)
00
110
ST92F124/F150/F250 - REGISTER AND MEMORY MAP
Page
(Dec)
Block
61
ADC
62
Reg.
No.
Register
Name
Description
Reset
Value
Hex.
Doc.
Page
R240
D0HR
Channel 0 Data High Register
xx
365
R241
D0LR
Channel 0 Data Low Register
x0
365
R242
D1HR
Channel 1 Data High Register
xx
365
R243
D1LR
Channel 1 Data Low Register
x0
365
R244
D2HR
Channel 2 Data High Register
xx
365
R245
D2LR
Channel 2 Data Low Register
x0
365
R246
D3HR
Channel 3 Data High Register
xx
365
R247
D3LR
Channel 3 Data Low Register
x0
365
R248
D4HR
Channel 4 Data High Register
xx
366
R249
D4LR
Channel 4 Data Low Register
x0
366
R250
D5HR
Channel 5 Data High Register
xx
366
R251
D5LR
Channel 5 Data Low Register
x0
366
R252
D6HR
Channel 6 Data High Register
xx
366
R253
D6LR
Channel 6 Data Low Register
x0
366
R254
D7HR
Channel 7 Data High Register
xx
366
R255
D7LR
Channel 7 Data Low Register
x0
366
R240
D8HR
Channel 8 Data High Register
xx
367
R241
D8LR
Channel 8 Data Low Register
x0
367
R242
D9HR
Channel 9 Data High Register
xx
367
R243
D9LR
Channel 9 Data Low Register
x0
367
R244
D10HR
Channel 10 Data High Register
xx
367
R245
D10LR
Channel 10 Data Low Register
x0
367
R246
D11HR
Channel 11 Data High Register
xx
367
R247
D11LR
Channel 11 Data Low Register
x0
367
R248
D12HR
Channel 12 Data High Register
xx
368
R249
D12LR
Channel 12 Data Low Register
x0
368
R250
D13HR
Channel 13 Data High Register
xx
368
R251
D13LR
Channel 13 Data Low Register
x0
368
R252
D14HR
Channel 14 Data High Register
xx
368
R253
D14LR
Channel 14 Data Low Register
x0
368
R254
D15HR
Channel 15 Data High Register
xx
368
R255
D15LR
Channel 15 Data Low Register
x0
368
89/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - REGISTER AND MEMORY MAP
Page
(Dec)
63
Block
ADC
Reg.
No.
Register
Name
Description
Reset
Value
Hex.
Doc.
Page
R243
CRR
Compare Result Register
0x
369
R244
LTAHR
Channel A Lower Threshold High Register
xx
369
R245
LTALR
Channel A Lower Threshold Low Register
x0
369
R246
LTBHR
Channel B Lower Threshold High Register
xx
369
R247
LTBLR
Channel B Lower Threshold Low Register
x0
370
R248
UTAHR
Channel A Upper Threshold High Register
xx
370
R249
UTALR
Channel A Upper Threshold Low Register
x0
370
R250
UTBHR
Channel B Upper Threshold High Register
xx
370
R251
UTBLR
Channel B Upper Threshold Low Register
x0
370
R252
CLR1
Control Logic Register 1
0F
371
R253
CLR2
Control Logic Register 2
A0
371
R254
AD_ICR
Interrupt Control Register
0F
372
R255
AD_IVR
Interrupt Vector Register
x2
373
Note: xx denotes a byte with an undefined value, however some of the bits may have defined values. Refer to register
description for details.
* Available on some devices only
90/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - INTERRUPTS
5 INTERRUPTS
5.1 INTRODUCTION
The ST9 responds to peripheral and external
events through its interrupt channels. Current program execution can be suspended to allow the
ST9 to execute a specific response routine when
such an event occurs, providing that interrupts
have been enabled, and according to a priority
mechanism. If an event generates a valid interrupt
request, the current program status is saved and
control passes to the appropriate Interrupt Service
Routine.
The ST9 CPU can receive requests from the following sources:
– On-chip peripherals
– External pins
– Top-Level Pseudo-non-maskable interrupt
5.1.1 On-Chip Peripheral Interrupt Sources
5.1.1.1 Dedicated Channels
The following on-chip peripherals have dedicated
interrupt channels with interrupt control registers
located in their peripheral register page.
– A/D Converter
– I 2C
– JPBLD
– MFT
– SCI-M
5.1.1.2 Standard Channels
Other on-chip peripherals have their interrupts
mapped to the INTxx interrupt channel group.
These channels have control registers located in
Pages 0 and 60. These peripherals are:
– CAN
– E3 TM/FLASH
– EFT Timer
– RCCU
– SCI-A
– SPI
– STIM timer
– WDT Timer
– WUIMU
5.1.1.3 External Interrupts
Up to eight external interrupts, with programmable
input trigger edge, are available and are mapped
to the INTxx interrupt channel group in page 0.
5.1.1.4 Top Level Interrupt (TLI)
In addition, a dedicated interrupt channel, set to
the Top-level priority, can be devoted either to the
external NMI pin (where available) to provide a
Non-Maskable Interrupt, or to the Timer/Watchdog. Interrupt service routines are addressed
through a vector table mapped in Memory.
Figure 44. Interrupt Response
n
NORMAL
PROGRAM
FLOW
INTERRUPT
INTERRUPT
SERVICE
ROUTINE
CLEAR
PENDING BIT
IRET
INSTRUCTION
VR001833
5.2 INTERRUPT VECTORING
The ST9 implements an interrupt vectoring structure which allows the on-chip peripheral to identify
the location of the first instruction of the Interrupt
Service Routine automatically.
When an interrupt request is acknowledged, the
peripheral interrupt module provides, through its
Interrupt Vector Register (IVR), a vector to point
into the vector table of locations containing the
start addresses of the Interrupt Service Routines
(defined by the programmer).
Each peripheral has a specific IVR mapped within
its Register File pages (or in register page 0 or 60
if it is mapped to one of the INTxx channels).
The Interrupt Vector table, containing the addresses of the Interrupt Service Routines, is located in
the first 256 locations of Memory pointed to by the
ISR register, thus allowing 8-bit vector addressing.
For a description of the ISR register refer to the
chapter describing the MMU.
The user Power on Reset vector is stored in the
first two physical bytes in memory, 000000h and
000001h.
91/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - INTERRUPTS
The Top Level Interrupt vector is located at addresses 0004h and 0005h in the segment pointed
to by the Interrupt Segment Register (ISR).
If an external watchdog is used, refer to the Register and Memory Map section for details on using
vector locations 0006h to 0009h. Otherwise loctions 0006h to 0007h must contain FFFFh.
With one Interrupt Vector register, it is possible to
address several interrupt service routines; in fact,
peripherals can share the same interrupt vector
register among several interrupt channels. The
most significant bits of the vector are user programmable to define the base vector address within the vector table, the least significant bits are
controlled by the interrupt module, in hardware, to
select the appropriate vector.
Note: The first 256 locations of the memory segment pointed to by ISR can contain program code.
5.2.1 Divide by Zero trap
The Divide by Zero trap vector is located at addresses 0002h and 0003h of each code segment;
it should be noted that for each code segment a
Divide by Zero service routine is required.
Warning. Although the Divide by Zero Trap operates as an interrupt, the FLAG Register is not
pushed onto the system Stack automatically. As a
result it must be regarded as a subroutine, and the
service routine must end with the RET instruction
(not IRET ).
5.2.2 Segment Paging During Interrupt
Routines
The ENCSR bit in the EMR2 register can be used
to select between original ST9 backward compatibility mode and ST9+ interrupt management
mode.
ST9 backward compatibility mode (ENCSR = 0)
92/426
9
If ENCSR is reset, the CPU works in original ST9
compatibility mode. For the duration of the interrupt service routine, ISR is used instead of CSR,
and the interrupt stack frame is identical to that of
the original ST9: only the PC and Flags are
pushed.
This avoids saving the CSR on the stack in the
event of an interrupt, thus ensuring a faster interrupt response time.
It is not possible for an interrupt service routine to
perform inter-segment calls or jumps: these instructions would update the CSR, which, in this
case, is not used (ISR is used instead). The code
segment size for all interrupt service routines is
thus limited to 64K bytes.
ST9+ mode (ENCSR = 1)
If ENCSR is set, ISR is only used to point to the interrupt vector table and to initialize the CSR at the
beginning of the interrupt service routine: the old
CSR is pushed onto the stack together with the PC
and flags, and CSR is then loaded with the contents of ISR.
In this case, iret will also restore CSR from the
stack. This approach allows interrupt service routines to access the entire 4 Mbytes of address
space. The drawback is that the interrupt response
time is slightly increased, because of the need to
also save CSR on the stack.
Full compatibility with the original ST9 is lost in this
case, because the interrupt stack frame is different.
ENCSR Bit
0
1
Mode
ST9 Compatible
ST9+
Pushed/Popped
PC, FLAGR,
PC, FLAGR
Registers
CSR
Max. Code Size
64KB
No limit
for interrupt
service routine Within 1 segment Across segments
ST92F124/F150/F250 - INTERRUPTS
5.3 INTERRUPT PRIORITY LEVELS
The ST9 supports a fully programmable interrupt
priority structure. Nine priority levels are available
to define the channel priority relationships:
– The on-chip peripheral channels and the eight
external interrupt sources can be programmed
within eight priority levels. Each channel has a 3bit field, PRL (Priority Level), that defines its priority level in the range from 0 (highest priority) to
7 (lowest priority).
– The 9th level (Top Level Priority) is reserved for
the Timer/Watchdog or the External Pseudo
Non-Maskable Interrupt. An Interrupt service
routine at this level cannot be interrupted in any
arbitration mode. Its mask can be both maskable
(TLI) or non-maskable (TLNM).
5.4 PRIORITY LEVEL ARBITRATION
The 3 bits of CPL (Current Priority Level) in the
Central Interrupt Control Register contain the priority of the currently running program (CPU priority). CPL is set to 7 (lowest priority) upon reset and
can be modified during program execution either
by software or automatically by hardware according to the selected Arbitration Mode.
During every instruction, an arbitration phase
takes place, during which, for every channel capable of generating an Interrupt, each priority level is
compared to all the other requests (interrupts or
DMA).
If the highest priority request is an interrupt, its
PRL value must be strictly lower (that is, higher priority) than the CPL value stored in the CICR register (R230) in order to be acknowledged. The Top
Level Interrupt overrides every other priority.
5.4.1 Priority Level 7 (Lowest)
Interrupt requests at PRL level 7 cannot be acknowledged, as this PRL value (the lowest possible priority) cannot be strictly lower than the CPL
value. This can be of use in a fully polled interrupt
environment.
5.4.2 Maximum Depth of Nesting
No more than 8 routines can be nested. If an interrupt routine at level N is being serviced, no other
Interrupts located at level N can interrupt it. This
guarantees a maximum number of 8 nested levels
including the Top Level Interrupt request.
5.4.3 Simultaneous Interrupts
If two or more requests occur at the same time and
at the same priority level, an on-chip daisy chain,
specific to every ST9 version, selects the channel
with the highest position in the chain, as shown in
Table 18
Table 18. Daisy Chain Priority
Highest Position INTA0 / Watchdog Timer
INTA1 / Standard Timer
INTB0 / Extended Function Timer 0 *
INTB1 / Extended Function Timer 1 *
INTC0 / E3 TM/Flash
INTC1 / SPI
INTD0 / RCCU
INTD1 / WKUP MGT
Multifunction Timer 0
INTE0/CAN0_RX0
INTE1/CAN0_RX1
INTF0/CAN0_TX
INTF1/CAN0_SCE
INTG0/CAN1_RX0 *
INTG1/CAN1_RX1 *
INTH0/CAN1_TX *
INTH1/CAN1_SCE *
INTI0/SCI-A *
JBLPD *
I2C bus Interface 0
I2C bus Interface 1 *
A/D Converter
Lowest Position Multifunction Timer 1
SCI-M
* available on some devices only
5.4.4 Dynamic Priority Level Modification
The main program and routines can be specifically
prioritized. Since the CPL is represented by 3 bits
in a read/write register, it is possible to dynamically
modify the current priority value during program
execution. This means that a critical section can
have a higher priority with respect to other interrupt requests. Furthermore it is possible to prioritize even the Main Program execution by modifying the CPL during its execution. See Figure 45.
93/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - INTERRUPTS
Figure 45. Example of Dynamic Priority
Level Modification in Nested Mode
INTERRUPT 6 HAS PRIORITY LEVEL 6
Priority Level
CPL is set to 7
4
by MAIN program
ei
INT6
5
MAIN
CPL is set to 5
CPL6 > CPL5:
6
INT6 pending
7
INT 6
CPL=6
MAIN
CPL=7
5.5 ARBITRATION MODES
The ST9 provides two interrupt arbitration modes:
Concurrent mode and Nested mode. Concurrent
mode is the standard interrupt arbitration mode.
Nested mode improves the effective interrupt response time when service routine nesting is required, depending on the request priority levels.
The IAM control bit in the CICR Register selects
Concurrent Arbitration mode or Nested Arbitration
Mode.
5.5.1 Concurrent Mode
This mode is selected when the IAM bit is cleared
(reset condition). The arbitration phase, performed
during every instruction, selects the request with
the highest priority level. The CPL value is not
modified in this mode.
Start of Interrupt Routine
The interrupt cycle performs the following steps:
– All maskable interrupt requests are disabled by
clearing CICR.IEN.
94/426
9
– The PC low byte is pushed onto system stack.
– The PC high byte is pushed onto system stack.
– If ENCSR is set, CSR is pushed onto system
stack.
– The Flag register is pushed onto system stack.
– The PC is loaded with the 16-bit vector stored in
the Vector Table, pointed to by the IVR.
– If ENCSR is set, CSR is loaded with ISR contents; otherwise ISR is used in place of CSR until
iret instruction.
End of Interrupt Routine
The Interrupt Service Routine must be ended with
the iret instruction. The iret instruction executes the following operations:
– The Flag register is popped from system stack.
– If ENCSR is set, CSR is popped from system
stack.
– The PC high byte is popped from system stack.
– The PC low byte is popped from system stack.
– All unmasked Interrupts are enabled by setting
the CICR.IEN bit.
– If ENCSR is reset, CSR is used instead of ISR.
Normal program execution thus resumes at the interrupted instruction. All pending interrupts remain
pending until the next ei instruction (even if it is
executed during the interrupt service routine).
Note: In Concurrent mode, the source priority level
is only useful during the arbitration phase, where it
is compared with all other priority levels and with
the CPL. No trace is kept of its value during the
ISR. If other requests are issued during the interrupt service routine, once the global CICR.IEN is
re-enabled, they will be acknowledged regardless
of the interrupt service routine’s priority. This may
cause undesirable interrupt response sequences.
ST92F124/F150/F250 - INTERRUPTS
ARBITRATION MODES (Cont’d)
Examples
In the following two examples, three interrupt requests with different priority levels (2, 3 & 4) occur
simultaneously during the interrupt 5 service routine.
Example 1
In the first example, (simplest case, Figure 46) the
ei instruction is not used within the interrupt service routines. This means that no new interrupt can
be serviced in the middle of the current one. The
interrupt routines will thus be serviced one after
another, in the order of their priority, until the main
program eventually resumes.
Figure 46. Simple Example of a Sequence of Interrupt Requests with:
- Concurrent mode selected and
- IEN unchanged by the interrupt routines
0
INTERRUPT 2 HAS PRIORITY LEVEL 2
Priority Level of
Interrupt Request
INTERRUPT 3 HAS PRIORITY LEVEL 3
INTERRUPT 4 HAS PRIORITY LEVEL 4
INTERRUPT 5 HAS PRIORITY LEVEL 5
1
2
INT 2
CPL = 7
3
INT 3
CPL = 7
INT 2
INT 3
INT 4
4
5
INT 4
CPL = 7
INT 5
ei
CPL = 7
6
INT 5
7
MAIN
CPL is set to 7
MAIN
CPL = 7
95/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - INTERRUPTS
ARBITRATION MODES (Cont’d)
Example 2
In the second example, (more complex, Figure
47), each interrupt service routine sets Interrupt
Enable with the ei instruction at the beginning of
the routine. Placed here, it minimizes response
time for requests with a higher priority than the one
being serviced.
The level 2 interrupt routine (with the highest priority) will be acknowledged first, then, when the ei
instruction is executed, it will be interrupted by the
level 3 interrupt routine, which itself will be interrupted by the level 4 interrupt routine. When the
level 4 interrupt routine is completed, the level 3 interrupt routine resumes and finally the level 2 interrupt routine. This results in the three interrupt serv-
ice routines being executed in the opposite order
of their priority.
It is therefore recommended to avoid inserting
the ei instruction in the interrupt service routine in Concurrent mode. Use the ei instruction only in Nested mode.
WARNING: If, in Concurrent Mode, interrupts are
nested (by executing ei in an interrupt service
routine), make sure that either ENCSR is set or
CSR=ISR, otherwise the iret of the innermost interrupt will make the CPU use CSR instead of ISR
before the outermost interrupt service routine is
terminated, thus making the outermost routine fail.
Figure 47. Complex Example of a Sequence of Interrupt Requests with:
- Concurrent mode selected
- IEN set to 1 during interrupt service routine execution
0
Priority Level of
Interrupt Request
INTERRUPT 2 HAS PRIORITY LEVEL 2
INTERRUPT 3 HAS PRIORITY LEVEL 3
INTERRUPT 4 HAS PRIORITY LEVEL 4
1
INTERRUPT 5 HAS PRIORITY LEVEL 5
2
3
INT 2
INT 2
CPL = 7
CPL = 7
ei
INT 2
INT 3
INT 4
4
5
INT 5
ei
6
CPL = 7
INT 3
CPL = 7
INT 3
CPL = 7
ei
ei
INT 4
CPL = 7
INT 5
CPL = 7
ei
INT 5
7
MAIN
CPL is set to 7
96/426
9
MAIN
CPL = 7
ST92F124/F150/F250 - INTERRUPTS
ARBITRATION MODES (Cont’d)
5.5.2 Nested Mode
The difference between Nested mode and Concurrent mode, lies in the modification of the Current Priority Level (CPL) during interrupt processing.
The arbitration phase is basically identical to Concurrent mode, however, once the request is acknowledged, the CPL is saved in the Nested Interrupt Control Register (NICR) by setting the NICR
bit corresponding to the CPL value (i.e. if the CPL
is 3, the bit 3 will be set).
The CPL is then loaded with the priority of the request just acknowledged; the next arbitration cycle
is thus performed with reference to the priority of
the interrupt service routine currently being executed.
Start of Interrupt Routine
The interrupt cycle performs the following steps:
– All maskable interrupt requests are disabled by
clearing CICR.IEN.
– CPL is saved in the special NICR stack to hold
the priority level of the suspended routine.
– Priority level of the acknowledged routine is
stored in CPL, so that the next request priority
will be compared with the one of the routine currently being serviced.
– The PC low byte is pushed onto system stack.
– The PC high byte is pushed onto system stack.
– If ENCSR is set, CSR is pushed onto system
stack.
– The Flag register is pushed onto system stack.
– The PC is loaded with the 16-bit vector stored in
the Vector Table, pointed to by the IVR.
– If ENCSR is set, CSR is loaded with ISR contents; otherwise ISR is used in place of CSR until
iret instruction.
Figure 48. Simple Example of a Sequence of Interrupt Requests with:
- Nested mode
- IEN unchanged by the interrupt routines
Priority Level of
Interrupt Request
INTERRUPT 0 HAS PRIORITY LEVEL 0
INTERRUPT 2 HAS PRIORITY LEVEL 2
1
INT0
2
INT 2
CPL=2
3
INTERRUPT 4 HAS PRIORITY LEVEL 4
CPL6 > CPL3:
INT6 pending
INT2
INT3
INT4
5
ei
INT 5
CPL=5
6
INT5
MAIN
CPL is set to 7
CPL2 < CPL4:
Serviced next
INTERRUPT 5 HAS PRIORITY LEVEL 5
INTERRUPT 6 HAS PRIORITY LEVEL 6
INT 2
CPL=2
INT6
INT 3
CPL=3
4
7
INTERRUPT 3 HAS PRIORITY LEVEL 3
INT 0
CPL=0
0
INT2
INT 4
CPL=4
INT 6
CPL=6
MAIN
CPL=7
97/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - INTERRUPTS
ARBITRATION MODES (Cont’d)
End of Interrupt Routine
– If ENCSR is reset, CSR is used instead of ISR,
unless the program returns to another nested
The iret Interrupt Return instruction executes
routine.
the following steps:
The
suspended routine thus resumes at the inter– The Flag register is popped from system stack.
rupted instruction.
– If ENCSR is set, CSR is popped from system
Figure 48 contains a simple example, showing that
stack.
if the ei instruction is not used in the interrupt
– The PC high byte is popped from system stack.
service routines, nested and concurrent modes
are equivalent.
– The PC low byte is popped from system stack.
Figure 49 contains a more complex example
– All unmasked Interrupts are enabled by setting
showing how nested mode allows nested interrupt
the CICR.IEN bit.
processing (enabled inside the interrupt service
– The priority level of the interrupted routine is
routinesi using the ei instruction) according to
popped from the special register (NICR) and
their
priority level.
copied into CPL.
Figure 49. Complex Example of a Sequence of Interrupt Requests with:
- Nested mode
- IEN set to 1 during the interrupt routine execution
Priority Level of
Interrupt Request
0
INTERRUPT 0 HAS PRIORITY LEVEL 0
INTERRUPT 2 HAS PRIORITY LEVEL 2
INT 0
CPL=0
1
INT0
2
INT 2
CPL=2
3
INT2
INT3
INT4
5
INT 5
CPL=5
ei
6
ei
INT5
MAIN
CPL is set to 7
98/426
9
INTERRUPT 4 HAS PRIORITY LEVEL 4
INTERRUPT 5 HAS PRIORITY LEVEL 5
INTERRUPT 6 HAS PRIORITY LEVEL 6
CPL6 > CPL3:
INT6 pending
INT 2
CPL=2
INT 2
CPL=2
INT6
INT 3
CPL=3 INT2
ei
4
7
INTERRUPT 3 HAS PRIORITY LEVEL 3
ei
CPL2 < CPL4:
Serviced just after ei
INT 4
CPL=4
ei
INT 4
CPL=4
INT 5
CPL=5
INT 6
CPL=6
MAIN
CPL=7
ST92F124/F150/F250 - INTERRUPTS
5.6 EXTERNAL INTERRUPTS
The ST9 core contains 8 external interrupt sources
grouped into four pairs.
Figure 51 and Table 20 give an overview of the external interrupts and vectors.
Table 19. External Interrupt Channel Grouping
Table 20. Multiplexed Interrupt Sources
Channel
I/O Port Pin
Channel
Internal Interrupt Source
External
Interrupt
Timer/Watchdog
INT0
INTD1
P8[1:0] P7[7:5]
P6[7,5] P5[7:5, 2:0] P4[7,4]
INTA0
WKUP[0:15]
INTA1
Standard Timer
INT1
INT6
INT5
INT4
INT3
INT2
INT1
INT0
INTD0
INTC1
INTC0
INTB1
INTB0
INTA1
INTA0
P6.1
P6.3
P6.2
P6.3
P6.2
P6.0
P6.0
INTB0
Extended Function Timer 0
INT2
External
Interrupt
Each source has a trigger control bit TEA0,..TED1
(R242,EITR.0,..,7 Page 0) to select triggering on
the rising or falling edge of the external pin. If the
Trigger control bit is set to “1”, the corresponding
pending bit IPA0,..,IPD1 (R243,EIPR.0,..,7 Page
0) is set on the input pin rising edge, if it is cleared,
the pending bit is set on the falling edge of the input pin. Each source can be individually masked
through
the
corresponding
control
bit
IMA0,..,IMD1 (EIMR.7,..,0). See Figure 51.
Figure 50. Priority Level Examples
PL2D PL1D PL2C PL1C PL2B PL1B PL2A PL1A
1
SOURCE PRIORITY
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
EIPLR
SOURCE PRIORITY
INT.D0: 100=4
INT.A0: 010=2
INT.D1: 101=5
INT.A1: 011=3
INT.C0: 000=0
INT.C1: 001=1
INT.B0: 100=4
INT.B1: 101=5
The priority level of the external interrupt sources
can be programmed among the eight priority levels with the control register EIPLR (R245). The priority level of each pair is software defined using
the bits PRL2,PRL1. For each pair, the even channel (A0,B0,C0,D0) of the group has the even priority level and the odd channel (A1,B1,C1,D1) has
the odd (lower) priority level.
Figure 50 shows an example of priority levels.
INTB1
Extended Function Timer 1
INT3
INTC0
E3 TM/Flash
INT4
INTC1
SPI Interrupt
INT5
INTD0
RCCU
INT6
INTD1
Wake-up Management Unit
– The source of INTA0 can be selected between
the external pin INT0 or the Timer/Watchdog peripheral using the IA0S bit in the EIVR register
(R246 Page 0).
– The source of INTA1 can be selected between
the external pin INT1 or the Standard Timer using the INTS bit in the STC register (R232 Page
11).
– The source of INTB0 can be selected between
the external pin INT2 or the on-chip Extended
Function Timer 0 using the EFTIS bit in the CR3
register (R255 Page 28).
– The source of INTB1 can be selected between
external pin INT3 or the on-chip Extended Function Timer 1 using the EFTIS bit in the CR3 register (R255 Page 29).
– The source of INTC0 can be selected between
external pin INT4 or the On-chip E3 TM/Flash
Memory using bit FEIEN in the ECR register (Address 224001h).
– The source of INTC1 can be selected between
external pin INT5 or the on-chip SPI using the
SPIS bit in the SPCR0 register (R241 Page 7).
– The source of INTD0 can be selected between
external pin INT6 or the Reset and Clock Unit
RCCU using the INT_SEL bit in the CLKCTL register (R240 Page 55).
– The source of INTD1 can be selected between
the NMI pin and the WUIMU Wakeup/Interrupt
Lines using the ID1S bit in the WUCRTL register
(R248 Page 9).
Warning: When using external interrupt channels
shared by both external interrupts and peripherals,
special care must be taken to configure control
registers both for peripheral and interrupts.
99/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - INTERRUPTS
EXTERNAL INTERRUPTS (Cont’d)
Figure 51. External Interrupt Control Bits and Vectors
Watchdog/Timer IA0S
End of count
TEA0
INT 0 pin*
“0”
V7 V6 V5 V4 0 0
VECTOR
Priority level
X X 0
“1”
Mask bit IMA0
0 X
INT A0
request
Pending bit IPA0
INTS
TEA1
STIM Timer
INT 1 pin*
“0”
V7 V6 V5 V4 0 0
VECTOR
Priority level
X X 1
“1”
Mask bit IMA1
1 X
INT A1
request
Pending bit IPA1
EFTIS
TEB0
EFT0 Timer
INT 2 pin*
“1”
V7 V6 V5 V4 0 1
VECTOR
Priority level
X X 0
“0”
Mask bit IMB0
0 X
INT B0
request
Pending bit IPB0
EFTIS
TEB1
EFT1 Timer
“1”
INT 3 pin*
“0”
E3 TM/Flash
TEC0
Mask bit IMB1
1 X
INT B1
request
Pending bit IPB1
FEIEN
“1”
INT 4 pin*
V7 V6 V5 V4 0 1
VECTOR
Priority level
X X 1
“0”
V7 V6 V5 V4 1 0
VECTOR
Priority level
X X 0
Mask bit IMC0
0 X
INT C0
request
Pending bit IPC0
SPIS
TEC1
SPI
“1”
INT 5 pin*
“0”
V7 V6 V5 V4 1 0
VECTOR
Priority level
X X 1
Mask bit IMC1
1 X
INT C1
request
Pending bit IPC1
INT_SEL
TED0
RCCU
INT 6 pin
“1”
V7 V6 V5 V4 1 1
VECTOR
Priority level
X X 0
“0”
Mask bit IMD0
0 X
INT D0
request
Pending bit IPD0
ID1S
NMI
Wake-up
Controller
“1”
V7 V6 V5 V4 1 1
VECTOR
Priority level
X X 1
“0”
Mask bit IMD1
Pending bit IPD1
WKUP
(0:15)
* Only four interrupt pins are available. Refer to Table 19 for I/O pin mapping.
100/426
9
1 X
INT D1
request
ST92F124/F150/F250 - INTERRUPTS
5.7 STANDARD INTERRUPTS (CAN AND SCI-A)
The two on-chip CAN peripherals generate 4 interrupt sources each. The SCI-A interrupts are
mapped on a single interrupt channel. The mapping is shown in the following table.
Table 21. Interrupt Channel Assignment
Interrupt Pairs
Interrupt Source
INTE0
CAN0_RX0
INTE1
CAN0_RX1
INTF0
CAN0_TX
INTF1
CAN0_SCE
INTG0
CAN1_RX0
INTG1
CAN1_RX1
INTH0
CAN1_TX
INTH1
CAN1_SCE
INTI0
SCI-A
INTI1
Reserved
5.7.1 Functional Description
The SIPRL and SIPRH registers contain the interrupt pending bits of the interrupt sources. The
pending bits are set by hardware on occurrence of
a rising edge event. The pending bits are reset by
hardware when the interrupt is acknowledged.
The SIMRL and SIMRH registers are used to
mask the interrupt requests coming from the interrupt sources. Resetting the bits of these registers
prevents the interrupt requests being sent to the
ST9 core.
The SITRL and SITRH registers are used to select
the edge sensitivity of the interrupt channel (rising
or falling edge). As the SCI-A and CAN interrupt
events are rising edge events, all bits in the SITRL
register and ITEI0 bit in SITRH register must be
set to 1.
The priority level of the interrupt channels can be
programmed to one of eight priority levels using
the SIPLRL and SIPLRH control registers.
The two MSBs of the priority level are user programmable. For each interrupt group, the even
channels (E0, F0, G0, H0, I0) have an even priority
level (LSB of priority level is zero) and the odd
channels (E1, F1, G1, H1) have an odd priority level (the LSB of priority level is one). See Figure 52.
.
Figure 52. Priority Level Examples
PL2H PL1H PL2G PL1G PL2F PL1F PL2E PL1E
1
SOURCE PRIORITY
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
IPLRL
SOURCE PRIORITY
INT.G0: 100=4
INT.E0: 010=2
INT.G1: 101=5
INT.E1: 011=3
INT.H0: 000=0
INT.H1: 001=1
INT.F0: 100=4
INT.F1: 101=5
All interrupt channels share a single interrupt vector register (SIVR). Bits 1 to 4 of the SIVR register
change according to the interrupt channel which
has the highest priority pending interrupt request.
If more than one interrupt channel has pending interrupt requests with the same priority, then an internal daisy chain decides the interrupt channel
that will be served. INTE0 is first in the internal daisy chain and INTI0 is last.
An overrun flag is associated with each interrupt
channel. If a new interrupt request comes before
the earlier interrupt request is acknowledged then
the corresponding overrun flag is set.
101/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - INTERRUPTS
Figure 53. Standard Interrupt (Channels E to I) Control Bits and Vectors
ITEE0
V7 V6 V5 0 0 0
VECTOR
Priority level
X X 0
Mask bit IME0
0 X
INT E0
request
Pending bit IPE0
ITEE1
V7 V6 V5 0 0 0
VECTOR
Priority level
X X 1
Mask bit IME1
ITRX0
ITRX1
1 X
INT E1
request
Pending bit IPE1
ITEF0
ITTX
V7 V6 V5 0 0 1
VECTOR
Priority level
X X 0
ITSCE
Mask bit IMF0
CAN_0 *
0 X
INT F0
request
Pending bit IPF0
ITEF1
V7 V6 V5 0 0 1
VECTOR
Priority level
X X 1
Mask bit IMF1
1 X
INT F1
request
Pending bit IPF1
ITEG0
V7 V6 V5 0 1 0
VECTOR
Priority level
X X 0
Mask bit IMG0
0 X
INT G0
request
Pending bit IPG0
ITEG1
V7 V6 V5 0 1 0
VECTOR
Priority level
X X 1
Mask bit IMG1
ITRX0
ITRX1
1 X
INT G1
request
Pending bit IPG1
ITEH0
ITTX
V7 V6 V5 0 1 1
VECTOR
Priority level
X X 0
ITSCE
Mask bit IMH0
CAN_1 *
0 X
INT H0
request
Pending bit IPH0
ITEH1
V7 V6 V5 0 1 1
VECTOR
Priority level
X X 1
Mask bit IMH1
1 X
INT H1
request
Pending bit IPH1
ITEI0
SCI-A *
V7 V6 V5 1 0 0
VECTOR
Priority level
X X 0
Mask bit IMI0
* On some devices only
102/426
9
0 X
Pending bit IPI0
INT I0
request
ST92F124/F150/F250 - INTERRUPTS
5.7.2 IMPORTANT NOTE ON STANDARD
INTERRUPTS
Refer to Section 13.1.4 on page 412.
5.8 TOP LEVEL INTERRUPT
The Top Level Interrupt channel can be assigned
either to the external pin NMI or to the Timer/
Watchdog according to the status of the control bit
EIVR.TLIS (R246.2, Page 0). If this bit is high (the
reset condition) the source is the external pin NMI.
If it is low, the source is the Timer/ Watchdog End
Of Count. When the source is the NMI external
pin, the control bit EIVR.TLTEV (R246.3; Page 0)
selects between the rising (if set) or falling (if reset)
edge generating the interrupt request. When the
selected event occurs, the CICR.TLIP bit (R230.6)
is set. Depending on the mask situation, a Top
Level Interrupt request may be generated. Two
kinds of masks are available, a Maskable mask
and a Non-Maskable mask. The first mask is the
CICR.TLI bit (R230.5): it can be set or cleared to
enable or disable respectively the Top Level Interrupt request. If it is enabled, the global Enable Interrupt bit, CICR.IEN (R230.4) must also be enabled in order to allow a Top Level Request.
The second mask NICR.TLNM (R247.7) is a setonly mask. Once set, it enables the Top Level Interrupt request independently of the value of
CICR.IEN and it cannot be cleared by the program. Only the processor RESET cycle can clear
this bit. This does not prevent the user from ignoring some sources due to a change in TLIS.
The Top Level Interrupt Service Routine cannot be
interrupted by any other interrupt or DMA request,
in any arbitration mode, not even by a subsequent
Top Level Interrupt request.
Warning. The interrupt machine cycle of the Top
Level Interrupt does not clear the CICR.IEN bit,
and the corresponding iret does not set it. Furthermore the TLI never modifies the CPL bits and
the NICR register.
5.9 DEDICATED
INTERRUPTS
ON-CHIP
PERIPHERAL
Some of the on-chip peripherals have their own
specific interrupt unit containing one or more interrupt channels, or DMA channels. Please refer to
the specific peripheral chapter for the description
of its interrupt features and control registers.
The on-chip peripheral interrupts are controlled by
the following bits:
– Interrupt Pending bit (IP). Set by hardware
when the Trigger Event occurs. Can be set/
cleared by software to generate/cancel pending
interrupts and give the status for Interrupt polling.
– Interrupt Mask bit (IM). If IM = “0”, no interrupt
request is generated. If IM =“1” an interrupt request is generated whenever IP = “1” and
CICR.IEN = “1”.
– Priority Level (PRL, 3 bits). These bits define
the current priority level, PRL=0: the highest priority, PRL=7: the lowest priority (the interrupt
cannot be acknowledged)
– Interrupt Vector Register (IVR, up to 7 bits).
The IVR points to the vector table which itself
contains the interrupt routine start address.
103/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - INTERRUPTS
Figure 54. Top Level Interrupt Structure
n
WATCHDOG ENABLE
WDGEN
CORE
RESET
TLIP
WATCHDOG TIMER
END OF COUNT
MUX
PENDING
MASK
TOP LEVEL
INTERRUPT
REQUEST
OR
NMI
TLIS
TLTEV
TLNM
TLI
IEN
VA00294
n
5.10 INTERRUPT RESPONSE TIME
The interrupt arbitration protocol functions completely asynchronously from instruction flow and
requires 5 clock cycles. One more CPUCLK cycle
is required when an interrupt is acknowledged.
Requests are sampled every 5 CPUCLK cycles.
If the interrupt request comes from an external pin,
the trigger event must occur a minimum of one
INTCLK cycle before the sampling time.
When an arbitration results in an interrupt request
being generated, the interrupt logic checks if the
current instruction (which could be at any stage of
execution) can be safely aborted; if this is the
case, instruction execution is terminated immediately and the interrupt request is serviced; if not,
the CPU waits until the current instruction is terminated and then services the request. Instruction
execution can normally be aborted provided no
write operation has been performed.
For an interrupt deriving from an external interrupt
channel, the response time between a user event
and the start of the interrupt service routine can
range from a minimum of 26 clock cycles to a maximum of 55 clock cycles (DIV instruction), 53 clock
104/426
9
cycles (DIVWS and MUL instructions) or 49 for
other instructions.
For a non-maskable Top Level interrupt, the response time between a user event and the start of
the interrupt service routine can range from a minimum of 22 clock cycles to a maximum of 51 clock
cycles (DIV instruction), 49 clock cycles (DIVWS
and MUL instructions) or 45 for other instructions.
In order to guarantee edge detection, input signals
must be kept low/high for a minimum of one
INTCLK cycle.
An interrupt machine cycle requires a basic 18 internal clock cycles (CPUCLK), to which must be
added a further 2 clock cycles if the stack is in the
Register File. 2 more clock cycles must further be
added if the CSR is pushed (ENCSR =1).
The interrupt machine cycle duration forms part of
the two examples of interrupt response time previously quoted; it includes the time required to push
values on the stack, as well as interrupt vector
handling.
In Wait for Interrupt mode, a further cycle is required as wake-up delay.
ST92F124/F150/F250 - INTERRUPTS
5.11 INTERRUPT REGISTERS
CENTRAL INTERRUPT CONTROL REGISTER
(CICR)
R230 - Read/Write
Register Group: System
Reset value: 1000 0111 (87h)
7
GCEN TLIP
0
TLI
IEN
IAM
the IEN bit when interrupts are disabled or when
no peripheral can generate interrupts. For example, if the state of IEN is not known in advance,
and its value must be restored from a previous
push of CICR on the stack, use the sequence DI;
POP CICR to make sure that no interrupts are being arbitrated when CICR is modified.
CPL2 CPL1 CPL0
Bit 7 = GCEN: Global Counter Enable.
This bit enables the 16-bit Multifunction Timer peripheral.
0: MFT disabled
1: MFT enabled
Bit 6 = TLIP: Top Level Interrupt Pending.
This bit is set by hardware when Top Level Interrupt (TLI) trigger event occurs. It is cleared by
hardware when a TLI is acknowledged. It can also
be set by software to implement a software TLI.
0: No TLI pending
1: TLI pending
Bit 5 = TLI: Top Level Interrupt.
This bit is set and cleared by software.
0: A Top Level Interrupt is generared when TLIP is
set, only if TLNM=1 in the NICR register (independently of the value of the IEN bit).
1: A Top Level Interrupt request is generated when
IEN=1 and the TLIP bit are set.
Bit 4 = IEN: Interrupt Enable.
This bit is cleared by the interrupt machine cycle
(except for a TLI).
It is set by the iret instruction (except for a return
from TLI).
It is set by the EI instruction.
It is cleared by the DI instruction.
0: Maskable interrupts disabled
1: Maskable Interrupts enabled
Note: The IEN bit can also be changed by software using any instruction that operates on register CICR, however in this case, take care to avoid
spurious interrupts, since IEN cannot be cleared in
the middle of an interrupt arbitration. Only modify
Bit 3 = IAM: Interrupt Arbitration Mode.
This bit is set and cleared by software.
0: Concurrent Mode
1: Nested Mode
Bits 2:0 = CPL[2:0]: Current Priority Level.
These bits define the Current Priority Level.
CPL=0 is the highest priority. CPL=7 is the lowest
priority. These bits may be modified directly by the
interrupt hardware when Nested Interrupt Mode is
used.
EXTERNAL INTERRUPT TRIGGER REGISTER
(EITR)
R242 - Read/Write
Register Page: 0
Reset value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7
0
TED1 TED0 TEC1 TEC0 TEB1 TEB0 TEA1 TEA0
Bit 7 = TED1: INTD1 Trigger Event
Bit 6 = TED0: INTD0 Trigger Event
Bit 5 = TEC1: INTC1 Trigger Event
Bit 4 = TEC0: INTC0 Trigger Event
Bit 3 = TEB1: INTB1 Trigger Event
Bit 2 = TEB0: INTB0 Trigger Event
Bit 1 = TEA1: INTA1 Trigger Event
Bit 0 = TEA0: INTA0 Trigger Event
These bits are set and cleared by software.
0: Select falling edge as interrupt trigger event
1: Select rising edge as interrupt trigger event
105/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - INTERRUPTS
INTERRUPT REGISTERS (Cont’d)
EXTERNAL INTERRUPT PENDING REGISTER
(EIPR)
R243 - Read/Write
Register Page: 0
Reset value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7
IPD1 IPD0
0
IPC1
IPC0 IPB1 IPB0 IPA1 IPA0
Bit 7 = IPD1: INTD1 Interrupt Pending bit
Bit 6 = IPD0: INTD0 Interrupt Pending bit
Bit 5 = IPC1: INTC1 Interrupt Pending bit
Bit 4 = IPC0: INTC0 Interrupt Pending bit
Bit 3 = IPB1: INTB1 Interrupt Pending bit
Bit 2 = IPB0: INTB0 Interrupt Pending bit
Bit 1 = IPA1: INTA1 Interrupt Pending bit
Bit 0 = IPA0: INTA0 Interrupt Pending bit
These bits are set by hardware on occurrence of a
trigger event (as specified in the EITR register)
and are cleared by hardware on interrupt acknowledge. They can also be set by software to implement a software interrupt.
0: No interrupt pending
1: Interrupt pending
EXTERNAL INTERRUPT MASK-BIT REGISTER
(EIMR)
R244 - Read/Write
Register Page: 0
Reset value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7
Bit 3 = IMB1: INTB1 Interrupt Mask
Bit 2 = IMB0: INTB0 Interrupt Mask
Bit 1 = IMA1: INTA1 Interrupt Mask
Bit 0 = IMA0: INTA0 Interrupt Mask
These bits are set and cleared by software.
0: Interrupt masked
1: Interrupt not masked (an interrupt is generated if
the IPxx and IEN bits = 1)
EXTERNAL INTERRUPT PRIORITY
REGISTER (EIPLR)
R245 - Read/Write
Register Page: 0
Reset value: 1111 1111 (FFh)
7
0
PL2D PL1D PL2C PL1C PL2B PL1B PL2A PL1A
Bits 7:6 = PL2D, PL1D: INTD0, D1 Priority Level.
Bis 5:4 = PL2C, PL1C: INTC0, C1 Priority Level.
Bits 3:2 = PL2B, PL1B: INTB0, B1 Priority Level.
Bits 1:0 = PL2A, PL1A: INTA0, A1 Priority Level.
These bits are set and cleared by software.
The priority is a three-bit value. The LSB is fixed by
hardware at 0 for Channels A0, B0, C0 and D0 and
at 1 for Channels A1, B1, C1 and D1.
PL2x
PL1x
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
IMD1 IMD0 IMC1 IMC0 IMB1 IMB0 IMA1 IMA0
Bit 7 = IMD1: INTD1 Interrupt Mask
Bit 6 = IMD0: INTD0 Interrupt Mask
Bit 5 = IMC1: INTC1 Interrupt Mask
Bit 4 = IMC0: INTC0 Interrupt Mask
106/426
9
LEVEL
Hardware
bit
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Priority
0 (Highest)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7 (Lowest)
ST92F124/F150/F250 - INTERRUPTS
INTERRUPT REGISTERS (Cont’d)
EXTERNAL INTERRUPT VECTOR REGISTER
(EIVR)
R246 - Read/Write
Register Page: 0
Reset value: xxxx 0110 (x6h)
7
V7
0
V6
V5
V4
TLTEV TLIS IAOS EWEN
Bits 7:4 = V[7:4]: Most significant nibble of External Interrupt Vector.
These bits are not initialized by reset. For a representation of how the full vector is generated from
V[7:4] and the selected external interrupt channel,
refer to Figure 51.
Bit 3 = TLTEV: Top Level Trigger Event bit.
This bit is set and cleared by software.
0: Select falling edge as NMI trigger event
1: Select rising edge as NMI trigger event
Bit 2 = TLIS: Top Level Input Selection.
This bit is set and cleared by software.
0: Watchdog End of Count is TL interrupt source
(the IA0S bit must be set in this case)
1: NMI is TL interrupt source
Bit 1 = IA0S: Interrupt Channel A0 Selection.
This bit is set and cleared by software.
0: Watchdog End of Count is INTA0 source (the
TLIS bit must be set in this case)
1: External Interrupt pin is INTA0 source
0: WAITN pin disabled
1: WAITN pin enabled (to stretch the external
memory access cycle).
Note: For more details on Wait mode refer to the
section describing the WAITN pin in the External
Memory Chapter.
NESTED INTERRUPT CONTROL (NICR)
R247 - Read/Write
Register Page: 0
Reset value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7
TLNM HL6
0
HL5
HL4
HL3
HL2
HL1
HL0
Bit 7 = TLNM: Top Level Not Maskable.
This bit is set by software and cleared only by a
hardware reset.
0: Top Level Interrupt Maskable. A top level request is generated if the IEN, TLI and TLIP bits
=1
1: Top Level Interrupt Not Maskable. A top level
request is generated if the TLIP bit =1
Bits 6:0 = HL[6:0]: Hold Level x
These bits are set by hardware when, in Nested
Mode, an interrupt service routine at level x is interrupted from a request with higher priority (other
than the Top Level interrupt request). They are
cleared by hardware at the iret execution when
the routine at level x is recovered.
Bit 0 = EWEN: External Wait Enable.
This bit is set and cleared by software.
107/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - INTERRUPTS
INTERRUPT REGISTERS (Cont’d)
INTERRUPT MASK REGISTER HIGH (SIMRH)
R245 - Read/Write
Register Page: 60
Reset value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7
0
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
IMI0
Bits 7:1 = Reserved.
Bit 0 = IMI0 Channel I Mask bit
The IMI0 bit is set and cleared by software to enable or disable interrupts on channel I0 .
0: Interrupt masked
1: An interrupt is generated if the IPI0 bit is set in
the SIPRH register.
INTERRUPT MASK REGISTER LOW (SIMRL)
R246 - Read/Write
Register Page: 60
Reset value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7
IMH1
0
IMH0
IMG1 IMG0
IMF1
IMF0
IME1
IME0
Bits 7:0 = IMxx Channel E to H Mask bits
The IMxx bits are set and cleared by software to
enable or disable on channel xx interrupts.
0: Interrupt masked
1: An interrupt is generated if the corresponding
IPxx bit is set in the SIPRL register.
INTERRUPT TRIGGER EVENT
HIGH (SITRH)
R247 - Read/Write
Register Page: 60
Reset value: 0000 0000 (00h)
REGISTER
9
7
0
ITEH1 ITEH0 ITEG1 ITEG0 ITEF1
ITEF0 ITEE1
ITEE0
Bits 7:0 = ITExx Channel E to H Trigger Event
The ITExx bits are set and cleared by software to
define the polarity of the channel xx trigger event
0: The corresponding pending bit will be set on the
falling edge of the interrupt line
1: The corresponding pending bit will be set on the
rising edge of the interrupt line
Note: The ITExx bits must be set to enable the
CAN interrupts as the CAN interrupt events are rising edge events.
Note: If either a rising or a falling edge occurs on
the interrupt lines during a write access to the
ITER register, the pending bit will not be set.
INTERRUPT PENDING REGISTER
(SIPRH)
R249 - Read/Write
Register Page: 60
Reset value: 0000 0000 (00h)
-
HIGH
0
-
-
-
-
-
-
IPI0
0
-
-
-
-
-
-
ITEI0
Bits 7:1 = Reserved.
Bit 0 = ITEI0 Channel I0 Trigger Event
This bit is set and cleared by software to define the
polarity of the channel I0 trigger event
0: The I0 pending bit will be set on the falling edge
of the interrupt line
108/426
INTERRUPT TRIGGER EVENT REGISTER LOW
(SITRL)
R248 - Read/Write
Register Page: 60
Reset value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7
7
-
1: The I0 pending bit will be set on the rising edge
of the interrupt line
Note: The ITEI0 bit must be set to enable the SCIA interrupt as the SCI-A interrupt event is a rising
edge event.
Bits 7:1 = Reserved.
Bit 0 = IPI0 Channel I0 Pending bit
The IPI0 bit is set by hardware on occurrence of
the trigger event. (as specified in the ITR register)
and is cleared by hardware on interrupt acknowledge.
0 : No interrupt pending
1 : Interrupt pending
ST92F124/F150/F250 - INTERRUPTS
INTERRUPT REGISTERS (Cont’d)
INTERRUPT PENDING REGISTER
(SIPRL)
R250 - Read/Write
Register Page: 60
Reset value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7
IPH1
LOW
0
IPH0
IPG1
IPG0
IPF1
IPF0
IPE1
STANDARD INTERRUPT VECTOR REGISTER
(SIVR)
R251 - Read/Write
Register Page: 60
Reset value: xxx1 1110 (xE)
V7
Interrupt Channel pair
INTE0
IPE0
Bits 7:0 = IPxx Channel E-H Pending bits
The IPxx bits are set by hardware on occurrence
of the trigger event. (as specified in the ITR register) and are cleared by hardware on interrupt acknowledge.
0 : No interrupt pending
1 : Interrupt pending
Note: IPR bits may be set by the user to implement a software interrupt.
7
Bits 4:1 = W[3:0] Arbitration Winner Bits
These bits are set and cleared by hardware depending upon the channel which emerges as a
winner as shown in the following table.
W[3:0]
0000
INTE1
INTF0
0001
0010
INTF1
INTG0
0011
0100
INTG1
INTH0
0101
0110
INTH1
INTI0
0111
1000
At the start of interrupt/DMA arbitration (IC0 = 0)
the W[3:0] bits are latched. They remain stable
through the entire arbitration cycle. Even if a interrupt of higher priority comes after the start of int/
DMA arbitration, the SIVR register is not updated.
This new request will be taken into account in the
next arbitration cycle.
Bit 0 = Reserved, fixed by hardware to 0.
0
V6
V5
W3
W2
W1
W0
0
Bits 7:5 = V[7:5] MSBs of Channnel E to L interrupt vector address
These bits are not initialized by reset. For a representation of how the full vector is generated from
V[7:5], refer to Figure 53.
INTERRUPT PRIORITY
HIGH (SIPLRH)
R252 - Read/Write
Register Page: Page 60
Reset Value : 1111 1111
LEVEL
REGISTER
7
-
0
-
-
-
-
-
PL2I
PL1I
Bits 1:0 = PL2I, PL1I: INTI0, I1 Priority Level.
These bits are set and cleared by software.
The priority is a three-bit value. The LSB is fixed by
hardware at 0 for even channels and at 1 for odd
channels
109/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - INTERRUPTS
INTERRUPT REGISTERS (Cont’d)
INTERRUPT PRIORITY LEVEL REGISTER LOW
(SIPLRL)
R253 - Read/Write
Register Page: Page 60
Reset Value : 1111 1111
7
PL2E
PL1E
0
INTE1
INTF0
PL2E
PL2F
PL1E
PL1F
1
0
INTF1
INTG0
PL2F
PL2G
PL1F
PL1G
1
0
INTG1
INTH0
PL2G
PL2H
PL1G
PL1H
1
0
INTH1
PL2H
PL1H
1
0
PL2H
PL1H
PL2G
PL1G
PL2F
PL1F
PL2E
PL1E
Bits 7:6 = PL2H, PL1H: INTH0,H1 Priority Level.
Bits 5:4 = PL2G, PL1G: INTG0, G1 Priority Level.
Bits 3:2 = PL2F, PL1F: INTF0, F1 Priority Level.
Bits 1:0 = PL2E, PL1E: INTE0, E1 Priority Level.
These bits are set and cleared by software.
The priority is a three-bit value. The LSB is fixed by
hardware at 0 for even channels and at 1 for odd
channels
Table 22. PL Bit Assignment
PL2H
PL1H
0
INTH1
INTG0
PL2H
PL2G
PL1H
PL1G
1
0
INTG1
INTF0
PL2G
PL2F
PL1G
PL1F
1
0
INTF1
INTE0
PL2F
PL2E
PL1F
PL1E
1
0
INTE1
PL2E
PL1E
1
PL1x
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
110/426
7
0
-
-
-
-
-
-
OUFI0
3-bit Priority Level
Table 23. PL bit Meaning
PL2x
Priority Level
INTERRUPT FLAG REGISTER HIGH
(SFLAGRH)
R254 - Read Only
Register Page: 60
Reset Value : 0000 0000
-
Interrupt Channel
Pair
INTH0
9
Interrupt Channel
Pair
INTE0
Hardware bit
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Priority
0 (Highest)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7 (Lowest)
Bit 0 = OUFI0 : Overrun flag for INTI0
This bit is set and cleared by hardware. It indicates
if more than one interrupt event occured on INTI0
before the IPI0 bit in the SIPRH register has been
cleared.
0 : No overrun
1 : Overrun has occurred on INTI0
INTERRUPT FLAG REGISTER LOW
(SFLAGRL)
R255 - Read Only
Register Page: 60
Reset Value : 0000 0000
7
OUFH1
0
OUFH0
OUFG1
OUFG0
OUFF1
OUFF0
OUFE1
OUFE0
Bits 7:0 = OUFxx : Overrun flag for channel xx
These bits are set and cleared by hardware. They
indicate if more than one interrupt event occurs on
the associated channel before the pending bit in
the SIPRL register has been cleared.
0 : No overrun
1 : Overrun has occurred on channel xx
ST92F124/F150/F250 - INTERRUPTS
INTERRUPT REGISTERS (Cont’d)
Table 25. Standard Interrupt Channel Register map (Page 60)
Address
R245
R246
R247
R248
R249
R250
R251
R252
R253
R254
R255
Register
Name
SIMRH
Reset value
SIMRL
Reset value
SITRH
Reset value
SITRL
Reset value
SIPRH
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
IMH1
IMH0
IMG1
IMG0
IMF1
IMF0
IME1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
ITEH1
ITEH0
ITEG1
ITEG0
ITEF1
ITEF0
ITEE1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
IMI0
0
0
IME0
0
ITEI0
0
ITEE0
0
IPI0
Reset value
SIPRL
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
IPH1
IPH0
IPG1
IPG0
IPF1
IPF0
IPE1
0
IPE0
Reset value
SIVR
0
V2
0
V1
0
V0
0
W3
0
W2
0
W1
0
W0
0
0
Reset value
SIPLRH
x
x
x
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
PL2I
0
PL1I
PL2H
PL1H
PL2G
PL1G
PL2F
PL1F
1
PL2E
1
PL1E
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
OUF0
OUF7
OUF6
OUF5
OUF4
OUF3
OUF2
OUF1
0
OUF0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Reset value
SIPLRL
Reset value
SFLAGRH
Reset value
SFLAGRL
Reset value
0
111/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - INTERRUPTS
5.12 WAKE-UP / INTERRUPT LINES MANAGEMENT UNIT (WUIMU)
5.12.1 Introduction
The Wake-up/Interrupt Management Unit extends
the number of external interrupt lines from 8 to 23
(depending on the number of external interrupt
lines mapped on external pins of the device).
The 16 additional external Wake-up/interrupt pins
can be programmed as external interrupt lines or
as wake-up lines, able to exit the microcontroller
from low power mode (STOP mode) (see Figure
55).
5.12.2 Main Features
■ Supports up to 16 additional external wake-up
or interrupt lines
■ Wake-Up lines can be used to wake-up the ST9
from STOP mode.
■ Programmable selection of wake-up or interrupt
■ Programmable wake-up trigger edge polarity
■ All Wake-Up Lines maskable
Note: The number of available pins is device dependent. Refer to the device pinout description.
Figure 55. Wake-Up Lines / Interrupt Management Unit Block Diagram
NMI
WKUP[7:0]
WKUP[15:8]
WUTRH
WUTRL
TRIGGERING LEVEL REGISTERS
WUPRH
WUPRL
PENDING REQUEST REGISTERS
WUMRH
WUMRL
MASK REGISTERS
Not Connected
WUCTRL
1
STOP
ID1S
WKUP-INT
Set
Reset
SW SETTING1)
0
TO CPU
INTD1 - External Interrupt Channel
TO CPU
TO RCCU - Stop Mode Control
Note 1: The reset signal on the Stop bit is stronger than the set signal.
112/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - INTERRUPTS
WAKE-UP / INTERRUPT LINES MANAGEMENT UNIT (Cont’d)
5.12.3 Functional Description
wake-up event does not require an interrupt
response.
5.12.3.1 Interrupt Mode
7. Write the sequence 1,0,1 to the STOP bit of the
To configure the 16 wake-up lines as interrupt
WUCTRL register with three consecutive write
sources, use the following procedure:
operations. This is the STOP bit setting
1. Configure the mask bits of the 16 wake-up lines
sequence.
(WUMRL, WUMRH)
To detect if STOP Mode was entered or not, im2. Configure the triggering edge registers of the
mediately after the STOP bit setting sequence,
wake-up lines (WUTRL, WUTRH)
poll the RCCU EX_STP bit (R242.7, Page 55) and
the STOP bit itself.
3. Set bit 7 of EIMR (R244 Page 0) and EITR
(R242 Page 0) registers of the CPU: so an
interrupt coming from one of the 16 lines can be
5.12.3.3 STOP Mode Entry Conditions
correctly acknowledged
Assuming the ST9 is in Run mode: during the
4. Reset the WKUP-INT bit in the WUCTRL regisSTOP bit setting sequence the following cases
ter to disable Wake-up Mode
may occur:
5. Set the ID1S bit in the WUCTRL register to
Case 1: NMI = 0, wrong STOP bit setting seenable the 16 wake-up lines as external interquence
rupt source lines.
This can happen if an Interrupt/DMA request is acknowledged during the STOP bit setting se5.12.3.2 Wake-up Mode Selection
quence. In this case polling the STOP and
EX_STP bits will give:
To configure the 16 lines as wake-up sources, use
the following procedure:
STOP = 0, EX_STP = 0
1. Configure the mask bits of the 16 wake-up lines
This means that the ST9 did not enter STOP mode
(WUMRL, WUMRH).
due to a bad STOP bit setting sequence: the user
must retry the sequence.
2. Configure the triggering edge registers of the
wake-up lines (WUTRL, WUTRH).
Case 2: NMI = 0, correct STOP bit setting sequence
3. Set, as for Interrupt Mode selection, bit 7 of
EIMR and EITR registers only if an interrupt
In this case the ST9 enters STOP mode. There are
routine is to be executed after a wake-up event.
two ways to exit STOP mode:
Otherwise, if the wake-up event only restarts
1. A wake-up interrupt (not an NMI interrupt) is
the execution of the code from where it was
acknowledged. That implies:
stopped, the INTD1 interrupt channel must be
STOP = 0, EX_STP = 1
masked.
4. Since the RCCU can generate an interrupt
This means that the ST9 entered and exited STOP
request when exiting from STOP mode, take
mode due to an external wake-up line event.
care to mask it even if the wake-up event is
2. A NMI rising edge woke up the ST9. This
only to restart code execution.
implies:
5. Set the WKUP-INT bit in the WUCTRL register
STOP = 1, EX_STP = 1
to select Wake-up Mode
This means that the ST9 entered and exited STOP
6. Set the ID1S bit in the WUCTRL register to
mode due to an NMI (rising edge) event. The user
enable the 16 wake-up lines as external intershould clear the STOP bit via software.
rupt source lines. This is not mandatory if the
113/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - INTERRUPTS
WAKE-UP / INTERRUPT LINES MANAGEMENT UNIT (Cont’d)
Case 3: NMI = 1 (NMI kept high during the 3rd
STOP = 0, EX_STP = 0
write instruction of the sequence), bad STOP
The application can determine why the ST9 did
bit setting sequence
not enter STOP mode by polling the pending
The result is the same as Case 1:
bits of the external lines (at least one must be at
STOP = 0, EX_STP = 0
1).
This means that the ST9 did not enter STOP mode
2. Interrupt requests to CPU are enabled: in this
due to a bad STOP bit setting sequence: the user
case the ST9 will not enter STOP mode and the
must retry the sequence.
interrupt service routine will be executed. The
status of STOP and EX_STP bits will be again:
Case 4: NMI = 1 (NMI kept high during the 3rd
STOP = 0, EX_STP = 0
write instruction of the sequence), correct
STOP bit setting sequence
The interrupt service routine can determine why
In this case:
the ST9 did not enter STOP mode by polling
the pending bits of the external lines (at least
STOP = 1, EX_STP = 0
one must be at 1).
This means that the ST9 did not enter STOP mode
due to NMI being kept high. The user should clear
the STOP bit via software.
If the MCU really exits from STOP Mode, the
RCCU EX_STP bit is still set and must be reset by
Note: If NMI goes to 0 before resetting the STOP
software. Otherwise, if NMI was high or an Interbit, the ST9 will not enter STOP mode.
rupt/DMA request was acknowledged during the
Case 5: A rising edge on the NMI pin occurs
STOP bit setting sequence, the RCCU EX_STP bit
during the STOP bit setting sequence.
is reset. This means that the MCU has filtered the
STOP Mode entry request.
The NMI interrupt will be acknowledged and the
ST9 will not enter STOP mode. This implies:
The WKUP-INT bit can be used by an interrupt
routine to detect and to distinguish events coming
STOP = 0, EX_STP = 0
from Interrupt Mode or from Wake-up Mode, allowThis means that the ST9 did not enter STOP mode
ing the code to execute different procedures.
due to an NMI interrupt serviced during the STOP
To exit STOP mode, it is sufficient that one of the
bit setting sequence. At the end of NMI routine, the
16 wake-up lines (not masked) generates an
user must re-enter the sequence: if NMI is still high
event: the clock restarts after the delay needed for
at the end of the sequence, the ST9 can not enter
the oscillator to restart.
STOP mode (See “NMI Pin Management” on
page 115.).
The same effect is obtained when a rising edge is
detected on the NMI pin, which works as a 17th
Case 6: A wake-up event on the external wakewake-up line.
up lines occurs during the STOP bit setting sequence
Note: After exiting from STOP Mode, the software
can successfully reset the pending bits (edge senThere are two possible cases:
sitive), even though the corresponding wake-up
1. Interrupt requests to the CPU are disabled: in
line is still active (high or low, depending on the
this case the ST9 will not enter STOP mode, no
Trigger Event register programming); the user
interrupt service routine will be executed and
must poll the external pin status to detect and disthe program execution continues from the
tinguish a short event from a long one (for example
instruction following the STOP bit setting
keyboard input with keystrokes of varying length).
sequence. The status of STOP and EX_STP
bits will be again:
114/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - INTERRUPTS
WAKE-UP / INTERRUPT LINES MANAGEMENT UNIT (Cont’d)
5.12.3.4 NMI Pin Management
– If the ST9 is in Run mode and a rising edge occurs on the NMI pin: the NMI service routine is
On the CPU side, if TLTEV=1 (Top Level Trigger
executed and then the ST9 restarts the execuEvent, bit 3 of register R246, page 0) then a rising
tion of the main program. Now, suppose that
edge on the NMI pin will set the TLIP bit (Top Level
the user wants to enter STOP mode with NMI
Interrupt Pending bit, R230.6). At this point an instill at 1. The ST9 will not enter STOP mode
terrupt request to the CPU is given either if TLand it will not execute an NMI routine beNM=1 (Top Level Not Maskable bit, R247.7 - once
cause there were no transitions on the exterset it can only be cleared by RESET) or if TLI=1
nal NMI line.
and IEN=1 (bits R230.5, R230.4).
–
If
the ST9 is in run mode and a rising edge on
Assuming that the application uses a non-maskaNMI
pin occurs during the STOP bit setting seble Top Level Interrupt (TLNM=1): in this case,
quence:
the NMI interrupt will be acknowledged
whenever a rising edge occurs on the NMI pin, the
and the ST9 will not enter STOP mode. At the
related service routine will be executed. To service
end of the NMI routine, the user must re-enter
further Top Level Interrupt Requests, it is necesthe sequence: if NMI is still high at the end of the
sary to generate a new rising edge on the external
sequence, the ST9 can not enter STOP mode
NMI pin.
(see previous case).
The following summarizes some typical cases:
– If the ST9 is in run mode and the NMI pin is high:
– If the ST9 is in STOP mode and a rising edge on
if NMI is forced low just before the third write inthe NMI pin occurs, the ST9 will exit STOP
struction of the STOP bit setting sequence then
mode and the NMI service routine will be exethe ST9 will enter STOP mode.
cuted.
115/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - INTERRUPTS
WAKE-UP / INTERRUPT LINES MANAGEMENT UNIT (Cont’d)
5.12.4 Programming Considerations
9. Poll the wake-up pending bits to determine
which wake-up line caused the exit from STOP
The following paragraphs give some guidelines for
mode.
designing an application program.
10.Clear
the wake-up pending bit that was set.
5.12.4.1 Procedure for Entering/Exiting STOP
mode
5.12.4.2 Simultaneous Setting of Pending Bits
1. Program the polarity of the trigger event of
It is possible that several simultaneous events set
external wake-up lines by writing registers
different pending bits. In order to accept subseWUTRH and WUTRL.
quent events on external wake-up/interrupt lines, it
is necessary to clear at least one pending bit: this
2. Check that at least one mask bit (registers
operation allows a rising edge to be generated on
WUMRH, WUMRL) is equal to 1 (so at least
the INTD1 line (if there is at least one more pendone external wake-up line is not masked).
ing bit set and not masked) and so to set EIPR.7
3. Reset at least the unmasked pending bits: this
bit again. A further interrupt on channel INTD1 will
allows a rising edge to be generated on the
be serviced depending on the status of bit EIMR.7.
INTD1 channel when the trigger event occurs
Two possible situations may arise:
(an interrupt on channel INTD1 is recognized
1. The user chooses to reset all pending bits: no
when a rising edge occurs).
further interrupt requests will be generated on
4. Set the ID1S bit in the WUCTRL register and
channel INTD1. In this case the user has to:
set the WKUP-INT bit.
– Reset EIMR.7 bit (to avoid generating a spuri5. To generate an interrupt on channel INTD1, bits
ous interrupt request during the next reset opEITR.1 (R242.7, Page 0) and EIMR.1 (R244.7,
eration on the WUPRH register)
Page 0) must be set and bit EIPR.7 must be
–
Reset WUPRH register using a read-modifyreset. Bits 7 and 6 of register R245, Page 0
write instruction (AND, BRES, BAND)
must be written with the desired priority level for
–
Clear the EIPR.7 bit
interrupt channel INTD1.
– Reset the WUPRL register using a read-mod6. Reset the STOP bit in register WUCTRL and
ify-write instruction (AND, BRES, BAND)
the EX_STP bit in the CLK_FLAG register
(R242.7, Page 55). Refer to the RCCU chapter.
2. The user chooses to keep at least one pending
bit active: at least one additional interrupt
7. To enter STOP mode, write the sequence 1, 0,
request will be generated on the INTD1 chan1 to the STOP bit in the WUCTRL register with
nel. In this case the user has to reset the
three consecutive write operations.
desired pending bits with a read-modify-write
8. The code to be executed just after the STOP
instruction (AND, BRES, BAND). This operation
sequence must check the status of the STOP
will generate a rising edge on the INTD1 chanand RCCU EX_STP bits to determine if the ST9
nel and the EIPR.7 bit will be set again. An
entered STOP mode or not (See “Wake-up
interrupt on the INTD1 channel will be serviced
Mode Selection” on page 113. for details). If the
depending on the status of EIMR.7 bit.
ST9 did not enter in STOP mode it is necessary
to reloop the procedure from the beginning, otherwise the procedure continues from next point.
116/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - INTERRUPTS
WAKE-UP / INTERRUPT LINES MANAGEMENT UNIT (Cont’d)
5.12.5 Register Description
low, the ST9 will enter STOP mode independently
of the status of the STOP bit.
WAKE-UP CONTROL REGISTER (WUCTRL)
WARNINGS:
R249 - Read/Write
Register Page: 57
– Writing the sequence 1,0,1 to the STOP bit will
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
enter STOP mode only if no other register write
7
0
instructions are executed during the sequence. If
Interrupt or DMA requests (which always perform
STOP ID1S WKUP-INT
register write operations) are acknowledged during the sequence, the ST9 will not enter STOP
mode: the user must re-enter the sequence to
Bit 2 = STOP: Stop bit.
set the STOP bit.
To enter STOP Mode, write the sequence 1,0,1 to
– Whenever a STOP request is issued to the MCU,
this bit with three consecutive write operations.
a few clock cycles are needed to enter STOP
When a correct sequence is recognized, the
mode (see RCCU chapter for further details).
STOP bit is set and the RCCU puts the MCU in
Hence the execution of the instruction following
STOP Mode. The software sequence succeeds
the STOP bit setting sequence might start before
only if the following conditions are true:
entering STOP mode: if such instruction per– The NMI pin is kept low,
forms a register write operation, the ST9 will not
enter in STOP mode. In order to avoid to execute
– The WKUP-INT bit is 1,
register write instructions after a correct STOP
– All unmasked pending bits are reset
bit setting sequence and before entering the
– At least one mask bit is equal to 1 (at least one
STOP mode, it is mandatory to execute 3 NOP
external wake-up line is not masked).
instructions after the STOP bit setting sequence.
Refer to Section 13.1.2 on page 408.
Otherwise the MCU cannot enter STOP mode, the
program code continues executing and the STOP
bit remains cleared.
Bit 1 = ID1S: Interrupt Channel INTD1 Source.
The bit is reset by hardware if, while the MCU is in
This bit is set and cleared by software.
STOP mode, a wake-up interrupt comes from any
It enables the 16 wake-up lines as external interof the unmasked wake-up lines. The bit is kept
rupt sources. This bit must be set to 1 to enable
high if, during STOP mode, a rising edge on NMI
the wake-up lines.
pin wakes up the ST9. In this case the user should
WARNING: To avoid spurious interrupt requests
reset it by software. The STOP bit is at 1 in the four
on
the INTD1 channel due to changing the interfollowing cases (See “Wake-up Mode Selection”
rupt
source, use this procedure to modify the ID1S
on page 113. for details):
bit:
– After the first write instruction of the sequence (a
1. Mask the INTD1 interrupt channel (bit 7 of reg1 is written to the STOP bit)
ister EIMR - R244, Page 0 - reset to 0).
– At the end of a successful sequence (i.e. after
2. Set the ID1S bit.
the third write instruction of the sequence)
3. Clear the IPD1 interrupt pending bit (bit 7 of
– The ST9 entered and exited STOP mode due to
register EIPR - R243, Page 0)
a rising edge on the NMI pin. In this case the
4. Remove the mask on INTD1 (bit EIMR.7=1).
EX_STP bit in the CLK_FLAG is at 1 (see
RCCU chapter).
– The ST9 did not enter STOP mode due to the
Bit 0 = WKUP-INT: Wakeup Interrupt.
NMI pin being kept high. In this case RCCU bit
This bit is set and cleared by software.
EX_STP is at 0
0: The 16 external wakeup lines can be used to
generate interrupt requests
Note: The STOP request generated by the
1: The 16 external wake-up lines to work as wakeWUIMU (that allows the ST9 to enter STOP mode)
up sources for exiting from STOP mode
is ORed with the external STOP pin (active low).
This means that if the external STOP pin is forced
117/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - INTERRUPTS
WAKE-UP / INTERRUPT LINES MANAGEMENT UNIT (Cont’d)
WAKE-UP MASK REGISTER HIGH (WUMRH)
WAKE-UP MASK REGISTER LOW (WUMRL)
R250 - Read/Write
R251 - Read/Write
Register Page: 57
Register Page: 57
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7
WUM15 WUM14 WUM13 WUM12 WUM11 WUM10 WUM9
0
7
WUM8
WUM7
Bit 7:0 = WUM[15:8]: Wake-Up Mask bits.
If WUMx is set, an interrupt on channel INTD1
and/or a wake-up event (depending on ID1S and
WKUP-INT bits) are generated if the corresponding WUPx pending bit is set. More precisely, if
WUMx=1 and WUPx=1 then:
– If ID1S=1 and WKUP-INT=1 then an interrupt on
channel INTD1 and a wake-up event are generated.
– If ID1S=1 and WKUP-INT=0 only an interrupt on
channel INTD1 is generated.
If WUMx is reset, no wake-up events can be generated.
118/426
9
0
WUM6
WUM5
WUM4
WUM3
WUM2
WUM1
WUM0
Bit 7:0 = WUM[7:0]: Wake-Up Mask bits.
If WUMx is set, an interrupt on channel INTD1
and/or a wake-up event (depending on ID1S and
WKUP-INT bits) are generated if the corresponding WUPx pending bit is set. More precisely, if
WUMx=1 and WUPx=1 then:
– If ID1S=1 and WKUP-INT=1 then an interrupt on
channel INTD1 and a wake-up event are generated.
– If ID1S=1 and WKUP-INT=0 only an interrupt on
channel INTD1 is generated.
If WUMx is reset, no wake-up events can be generated.
ST92F124/F150/F250 - INTERRUPTS
WAKE-UP / INTERRUPT LINES MANAGEMENT UNIT (Cont’d)
WAKE-UP
TRIGGER
REGISTER
HIGH
WAKE-UP PENDING REGISTER HIGH
(WUTRH)
(WUPRH)
R252 - Read/Write
R254 - Read/Write
Register Page: 57
Register Page: 57
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7
0
WUT15 WUT14 WUT13 WUT12 WUT11 WUT10 WUT9
WUT8
Bit 7:0 = WUT[15:8]: Wake-Up Trigger Polarity
Bits
These bits are set and cleared by software.
0: The corresponding WUPx pending bit will be set
on the falling edge of the input wake-up line .
1: The corresponding WUPx pending bit will be set
on the rising edge of the input wake-up line.
WAKE-UP TRIGGER REGISTER LOW (WUTRL)
R253 - Read/Write
Register Page: 57
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7
WUT7
0
WUT6
WUT5
WUT4
WUT3
WUT2
WUT1
WUT0
7
WUP15 WUP14 WUP13 WUP12 WUP11 WUP10 WUP9
WARNING
1. As the external wake-up lines are edge triggered, no glitches must be generated on these
lines.
2. If either a rising or a falling edge on the external
wake-up lines occurs while writing the
WUTRLH or WUTRL registers, the pending bit
will not be set.
WUP8
Bit 7:0 = WUP[15:8]: Wake-Up Pending Bits
These bits are set by hardware on occurrence of
the trigger event on the corresponding wake-up
line. They must be cleared by software. They can
be set by software to implement a software interrupt.
0: No Wake-up Trigger event occurred
1: Wake-up Trigger event occured
WAKE-UP PENDING REGISTER LOW (WUPRL)
R255 - Read/Write
Register Page: 57
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7
WUP7
Bit 7:0 = WUT[7:0]: Wake-Up Trigger Polarity Bits
These bits are set and cleared by software.
0: The corresponding WUPx pending bit will be set
on the falling edge of the input wake-up line.
1: The corresponding WUPx pending bit will be set
on the rising edge of the input wake-up line.
0
0
WUP6
WUP5
WUP4
WUP3
WUP2
WUP1
WUP0
Bit 7:0 = WUP[7:0]: Wake-Up Pending Bits
These bits are set by hardware on occurrence of
the trigger event on the corresponding wake-up
line. They must be cleared by software. They can
be set by software to implement a software interrupt.
0: No Wake-up Trigger event occurred
1: Wake-up Trigger event occured
Note: To avoid losing a trigger event while clearing the pending bits, it is recommended to use
read-modify-write instructions (AND, BRES,
BAND) to clear them.
5.12.6 Important Note On WUIMU
Refer to Section 13.1.2 on page 408.
119/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - ON-CHIP DIRECT MEMORY ACCESS (DMA)
6 ON-CHIP DIRECT MEMORY ACCESS (DMA)
6.1 INTRODUCTION
6.2 DMA PRIORITY LEVELS
The ST9 includes on-chip Direct Memory Access
(DMA) in order to provide high-speed data transfer
between peripherals and memory or Register File.
Multi-channel DMA is fully supported by peripherals having their own controller and DMA channel(s). Each DMA channel transfers data to or
from contiguous locations in the Register File, or in
Memory. The maximum number of bytes that can
be transferred per transaction by each DMA channel is 222 with the Register File, or 65536 with
Memory.
The DMA controller in the Peripheral uses an indirect addressing mechanism to DMA Pointers and
Counter Registers stored in the Register File. This
is the reason why the maximum number of transactions for the Register File is 222, since two Registers are allocated for the Pointer and Counter.
Register pairs are used for memory pointers and
counters in order to offer the full 65536 byte and
count capability.
The 8 priority levels used for interrupts are also
used to prioritize the DMA requests, which are arbitrated in the same arbitration phase as interrupt
requests. If the event occurrence requires a DMA
transaction, this will take place at the end of the
current instruction execution. When an interrupt
and a DMA request occur simultaneously, on the
same priority level, the DMA request is serviced
before the interrupt.
An interrupt priority request must be strictly higher
than the CPL value in order to be acknowledged,
whereas, for a DMA transaction request, it must be
equal to or higher than the CPL value in order to
be executed. Thus only DMA transaction requests
can be acknowledged when the CPL=0.
DMA requests do not modify the CPL value, since
the DMA transaction is not interruptable.
Figure 56. DMA Data Transfer
REGISTER FILE
REGISTER FILE
OR
MEMORY
DF
REGISTER FILE
GROUP F
PERIPHERAL
PAGED
REGISTERS
COUNTER
PERIPHERAL
ADDRESS
DATA
0
COUNTER VALUE
TRANSFERRED
DATA
START ADDRESS
VR001834
120/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - ON-CHIP DIRECT MEMORY ACCESS (DMA)
6.3 DMA TRANSACTIONS
The purpose of an on-chip DMA channel is to
transfer a block of data between a peripheral and
the Register File, or Memory. Each DMA transfer
consists of three operations:
– A load from/to the peripheral data register to/
from a location of Register File (or Memory) addressed through the DMA Address Register (or
Register pair)
– A post-increment of the DMA Address Register
(or Register pair)
– A post-decrement of the DMA transaction counter, which contains the number of transactions
that have still to be performed.
If the DMA transaction is carried out between the
peripheral and the Register File (Figure 57), one
register is required to hold the DMA Address, and
one to hold the DMA transaction counter. These
two registers must be located in the Register File:
the DMA Address Register in the even address
register, and the DMA Transaction Counter in the
next register (odd address). They are pointed to by
the DMA Transaction Counter Pointer Register
(DCPR), located in the peripheral’s paged registers. In order to select a DMA transaction with the
Register File, the control bit DCPR.RM (bit 0 of
DCPR) must be set.
If the transaction is made between the peripheral
and Memory, a register pair (16 bits) is required
for the DMA Address and the DMA Transaction
Counter (Figure 58). Thus, two register pairs must
be located in the Register File.
The DMA Transaction Counter is pointed to by the
DMA Transaction Counter Pointer Register
(DCPR), the DMA Address is pointed to by the
DMA Address Pointer Register (DAPR),both
DCPR and DAPR are located in the paged registers of the peripheral.
Figure 57. DMA Between Register File and Peripheral
IDCR
IVR
DAPR
DCPR
PAGED
REGISTERS
DATA
F0h
EFh
DMA TRANSACTION
PERIPHERAL
PAGED REGISTERS
DMA
TABLE
END OF BLOCK
INTERRUPT
SERVICE ROUTINE
FFh
000100h
SYSTEM
ISR ADDRESS
REGISTERS
E0h
DFh
VECTOR
TABLE
000000h
MEMORY
DATA
ALREADY
TRANSFERRED
DMA
COUNTER
DMA
ADDRESS
REGISTER FILE
121/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - ON-CHIP DIRECT MEMORY ACCESS (DMA)
DMA TRANSACTIONS (Cont’d)
When selecting the DMA transaction with memory,
bit DCPR.RM (bit 0 of DCPR) must be cleared.
To select between using the ISR or the DMASR register to extend the address, (see Memory Management Unit chapter), the control bit DAPR.PS (bit 0
of DAPR) must be cleared or set respectively.
The DMA transaction Counter must be initialized
with the number of transactions to perform and will
be decremented after each transaction. The DMA
Address must be initialized with the starting address of the DMA table and is increased after each
transaction. These two registers must be located
between addresses 00h and DFh of the Register
File.
Once a DMA channel is initialized, a transfer can
start. The direction of the transfer is automatically
defined by the type of peripheral and programming
mode.
Once the DMA table is completed (the transaction
counter reaches 0 value), an Interrupt request to
the CPU is generated.
When the Interrupt Pending (IDCR.IP) bit is set by
a hardware event (or by software), and the DMA
Mask bit (IDCR.DM) is set, a DMA request is generated. If the Priority Level of the DMA source is
higher than, or equal to, the Current Priority Level
(CPL), the DMA transfer is executed at the end of
the current instruction. DMA transfers read/write
data from/to the location pointed to by the DMA
Address Register, the DMA Address register is incremented and the Transaction Counter Register
is decremented. When the contents of the Transaction Counter are decremented to zero, the DMA
Mask bit (DM) is cleared and an interrupt request
is generated, according to the Interrupt Mask bit
(End of Block interrupt). This End-of-Block interrupt request is taken into account, depending on
the PRL value.
WARNING. DMA requests are not acknowledged
if the top level interrupt service is in progress.
Figure 58. DMA Between Memory and Peripheral
IDCR
IVR
DAPR
DCPR
DMA TRANSACTION
FFh
PAGED
REGISTERS
DATA
PERIPHERAL
PAGED REGISTERS
F0h
EFh
DMA
TABLE
SYSTEM
REGISTERS
DATA
ALREADY
TRANSFERRED
DMA
TRANSACTION
COUNTER
END OF BLOCK
INTERRUPT
SERVICE ROUTINE
E0h
DFh
000100h
DMA
ADDRESS
ISR ADDRESS
000000h
REGISTER FILE
n
122/426
9
MEMORY
VECTOR
TABLE
ST92F124/F150/F250 - ON-CHIP DIRECT MEMORY ACCESS (DMA)
DMA TRANSACTIONS (Cont’d)
6.4 DMA CYCLE TIME
The interrupt and DMA arbitration protocol functions completely asynchronously from instruction
flow.
Requests are sampled every 5 CPUCLK cycles.
DMA transactions are executed if their priority allows it.
A DMA transfer with the Register file requires 8
CPUCLK cycles.
A DMA transfer with memory requires 16 CPUCLK
cycles, plus any required wait states.
6.5 SWAP MODE
An extra feature which may be found on the DMA
channels of some peripherals (e.g. the MultiFunction Timer) is the Swap mode. This feature allows
transfer from two DMA tables alternatively. All the
DMA descriptors in the Register File are thus doubled. Two DMA transaction counters and two DMA
address pointers allow the definition of two fully independent tables (they only have to belong to the
same space, Register File or Memory). The DMA
transaction is programmed to start on one of the
two tables (say table 0) and, at the end of the
block, the DMA controller automatically swaps to
the other table (table 1) by pointing to the other
DMA descriptors. In this case, the DMA mask (DM
bit) control bit is not cleared, but the End Of Block
interrupt request is generated to allow the optional
updating of the first data table (table 0).
Until the swap mode is disabled, the DMA controller will continue to swap between DMA Table 0
and DMA Table 1.
n
123/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - ON-CHIP DIRECT MEMORY ACCESS (DMA)
6.6 DMA REGISTERS
As each peripheral DMA channel has its own specific control registers, the following register list
should be considered as a general example. The
names and register bit allocations shown here
may be different from those found in the peripheral
chapters.
DMA COUNTER POINTER REGISTER (DCPR)
Read/Write
Address set by Peripheral
Reset value: undefined
7
C7
0
C6
C5
C4
C3
C2
C1
RM
Bit 7:1 = C[7:1]: DMA Transaction Counter Pointer.
Software should write the pointer to the DMA
Transaction Counter in these bits.
Bit 0 = RM: Register File/Memory Selector.
This bit is set and cleared by software.
0: DMA transactions are with memory (see also
DAPR.DP)
1: DMA transactions are with the Register File
GENERIC EXTERNAL PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT AND DMA CONTROL (IDCR)
Read/Write
Address set by Peripheral
Reset value: undefined
7
0
IP
DM
IM
PRL2 PRL1 PRL0
Bit 5 = IP: Interrupt Pending.
This bit is set by hardware when the Trigger Event
occurs. It is cleared by hardware when the request
is acknowledged. It can be set/cleared by software
in order to generate/cancel a pending request.
0: No interrupt pending
1: Interrupt pending
Bit 4 = DM: DMA Request Mask.
This bit is set and cleared by software. It is also
cleared when the transaction counter reaches
zero (unless SWAP mode is active).
0: No DMA request is generated when IP is set.
1: DMA request is generated when IP is set
124/426
9
Bit 3 = IM: End of block Interrupt Mask.
This bit is set and cleared by software.
0: No End of block interrupt request is generated
when IP is set
1: End of Block interrupt is generated when IP is
set. DMA requests depend on the DM bit value
as shown in the table below.
DM IM Meaning
A DMA request generated without End of Block
1
0
interrupt when IP=1
A DMA request generated with End of Block in1
1
terrupt when IP=1
No End of block interrupt or DMA request is
0
0
generated when IP=1
An End of block Interrupt is generated without
0
1
associated DMA request (not used)
Bit 2:0 = PRL[2:0]: Source Priority Level.
These bits are set and cleared by software. Refer
to Section 6.2 DMA PRIORITY LEVELS for a description of priority levels.
PRL2
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
PRL1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
PRL0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Source Priority Level
0 Highest
1
2
3
4
5
6
7 Lowest
DMA ADDRESS POINTER REGISTER (DAPR)
Read/Write
Address set by Peripheral
Reset value: undefined
7
A7
0
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
PS
Bit 7:1 = A[7:1]: DMA Address Register(s) Pointer
Software should write the pointer to the DMA Address Register(s) in these bits.
Bit 0 = PS: Memory Segment Pointer Selector:
This bit is set and cleared by software. It is only
meaningful if DCPR.RM=0.
0: The ISR register is used to extend the address
of data transferred by DMA (see MMU chapter).
1: The DMASR register is used to extend the address of data transferred by DMA (see MMU
chapter).
ST92F124/F150/F250 - RESET AND CLOCK CONTROL UNIT (RCCU)
7 RESET AND CLOCK CONTROL UNIT (RCCU)
7.1 INTRODUCTION
The Reset and Clock Control Unit (RCCU) comprises two distinct sections:
– the Clock Control Unit, which generates and
manages the internal clock signals.
– the Reset/Stop Manager, which detects and
flags Hardware, Software and Watchdog generated resets.
On ST9 devices where the external Stop pin and/
or the Wake-Up Interrupt Manager Unit are available, this circuit also detects and manages the Stop
mode during which all oscillators are frozen in order to achieve the lowest possible power consumption (refer to the Reset/Stop mode and
Wake-Up Interrupt Manager Unit description).
7.2 CLOCK CONTROL UNIT
the PLL multiplier circuit. The resulting signal,
CLOCK2, is the reference input clock to the programmable Phase Locked Loop frequency multiplier, which is capable of multiplying the clock frequency by a factor of 6, 8, 10 or 14; the multiplied
clock is then divided by a programmable divider,
by a factor of 1 to 7. By these means, the ST9 can
operate with cheaper, medium frequency (3-5
MHz) crystals, while still providing a high frequency internal clock for maximum system performance; the range of available multiplication and division factors allow a great number of operating
clock frequencies to be derived from a single crystal frequency.
For low power operation, especially in Wait for Interrupt mode, the Clock Multiplier unit may be
turned off, whereupon the output clock signal may
be programmed as CLOCK2 divided by 16. For
further power reduction, a low frequency external
clock connected to the CK_AF pin may be selected, whereupon the crystal controlled main oscillator may be turned off.
The internal system clock, INTCLK, is routed to all
on-chip peripherals, as well as to the programmable Clock Prescaler Unit which generates the clock
for the CPU core (CPUCLK). (See Figure 59)
The Clock Prescaler is programmable and can
slow the CPU clock by a factor of up to 8, allowing
the programmer to reduce CPU processing speed,
and thus power consumption, while maintaining a
high speed clock to the peripherals. This is particularly useful when little actual processing is being
done by the CPU and the peripherals are doing
most of the work.
The Clock Control Unit generates the internal
clocks for the CPU core (CPUCLK) and for the onchip peripherals (INTCLK). The Clock Control Unit
may be driven by the on-chip oscillator (provided
an external crystal circuit is connected to the OSCIN and OSCOUT pins), or by an external pulse
generator, connected to OSCOUT (see Figure 66
and Figure 68). When significant power reduction
is required, a low frequency external clock may be
selected. To do this, this clock source must be
connected to the CK_AF pin.
7.2.1 Clock Control Unit Overview
As shown in Figure 59 a programmable divider
can divide the CLOCK1 input clock signal by two.
In practice, the divide-by-two is virtually always
used in order to ensure a 50% duty cycle signal to
Figure 59. Clock Control Unit Simplified Block Diagram
1/16
PLL
Crystal
oscillator
CK_AF
source
1/2
CLOCK1
CLOCK2
Clock Multiplier
/Divider Unit
CPU Clock
Prescaler
CPUCLK
to
CPU Core
INTCLK
to
Peripherals
CK_AF
125/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - RESET AND CLOCK CONTROL UNIT (RCCU)
Figure 60. ST92F124/F150/F250 Clock Distribution Diagram
1...64
Baud Rate
Prescaler
3-bit Prescaler
1...8
Baud Rate
Generator
1/N
SCK
Master
N=2,4,16,32
1...8
1/2
ADC
LOGIC
3-bit Prescaler
8-bit Prescaler
1...256
8-bit Prescaler
1,3,4,13
EXTCLKx
(Max INTCLK/4)
EFTx
8-bit Prescaler
Baud Rate
Generator
1/N
1/3
N = 2...(216-1)
TxINA/TxINB
(Max INTCLK/3)
16-bit Down
Counter
8-bit Prescaler
1...256
WDG
1/4
JBLPD
WDIN
N=4,6,8...258
STD
P6.5
FAST
8-bit Prescaler
16-bit Down
Counter
1...256
STIM
1/4
Fscl ≤100 kHz
Fscl > 100 kHz
Fscl ≤ 400 kHz
N=6,9,12...387
1/N
1...8
CPUCLK
1/16
CLOCK2/8
1/N
I2C
3-bit Prescaler
P4.1
P6.0
SCI-M
1...64
6-bit Prescaler
16-bit Up/Down
Counter
1...256
SCI-A
J1850 Kernel
16-bit Up
Counter
1/N
1...128
3-bit Prescaler
SPI
N=2,4,8
MFTx
CAN
3-bit Prescaler
2-bit Prescaler
SCK
Slave
(Max INTCLK/2)
1/2
CPU
1/8
CK_128
INTCLK
CKAF_SEL
1/4
XT_DIV16
0
0
1
EMBEDDED MEMORY
1
1/16
CSU_CKSEL
MX(1:0)
DIV2
RAM
EPROM
0
CLOCK1
1/2
CK_AF
P7.0
126/426
9
1
CLOCK2
PLL
x
6/8/10/14
0
1/ N
DX(2:0)
RCCU
1
FLASH
E3 TM
ST92F124/F150/F250 - RESET AND CLOCK CONTROL UNIT (RCCU)
7.3 CLOCK MANAGEMENT
The various programmable features and operating modes of the CCU are handled by four registers:
– MODER (Mode Register)
– CLK_FLAG (Clock Flag Register)
This is a System Register (R235, Group E).
This is a Paged Register (R242, Page 55).
The input clock divide-by-two and the CPU clock
prescaler factors are handled by this register.
This register contains various status flags, as
well as control bits for clock selection.
– CLKCTL (Clock Control Register)
This is a Paged Register (R240, Page 55).
– PLLCONF (PLL Configuration Register)
This is a Paged Register (R246, Page 55).
The low power modes, the RCCU interrupts and
the interpretation of the HALT instruction are
handled by this register.
PLL management is programmed in this register.
Figure 61. Clock Control Unit Programming
XTSTOP
DIV2
CSU_CKSEL
CKAF_SEL
(CLK_FLAG)
(MODER)
(CLK_FLAG)
(CLKCTL)
1/16
CK_128
1/4
0
0
Crystal
oscillator
CK_AF
source
1/2
1
CLOCK2
0
PLL
x
6/8/10/14
1/N
MX[1:0]
DX[2:0]
1
1
CLOCK1
0
INTCLK
1
to
Peripherals
and
CPU Clock Prescaler
CK_AF
(PLLCONF)
XT_DIV16
CKAF_ST
(CLK_FLAG)
Wait for Interrupt and Low Power Modes:
LPOWFI (CLKCTL) selects Low Power operation automatically on entering WFI mode.
WFI_CKSEL (CLKCTL) selects the CK_AF clock automatically, if present, on entering WFI mode.
XTSTOP (CLK_FLAG) automatically stops the crystal oscillator when the CK_AF clock is present and selected.
127/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - RESET AND CLOCK CONTROL UNIT (RCCU)
CLOCK MANAGEMENT (Cont’d)
7.3.1 PLL Clock Multiplier Programming
The CLOCK1 signal generated by the oscillator
drives a programmable divide-by-two circuit. If the
DIV2 control bit in MODER is set (Reset Condition), CLOCK2, is equal to CLOCK1 divided by
two; if DIV2 is reset, CLOCK2 is identical to
CLOCK1. Since the input clock to the Clock Multiplier circuit requires a 50% duty cycle for correct
PLL operation, the divide by two circuit should be
enabled when a crystal oscillator is used, or when
the external clock generator does not provide a
50% duty cycle. In practice, the divide-by-two is
virtually always used in order to ensure a 50% duty
cycle signal to the PLL multiplier circuit.
When the PLL is active, it multiplies CLOCK2 by 6,
8, 10 or 14, depending on the status of the MX[0:1]
bits in PLLCONF. The multiplied clock is then divided by a factor in the range 1 to 7, determined by
the status of the DX[0:2] bits; when these bits are
programmed to 111, the PLL is switched off.
Following a RESET phase, programming bits
DX0-2 to a value different from 111 will turn the
PLL on. After allowing a stabilization period for the
PLL, setting the CSU_CKSEL bit in the
CLK_FLAG Register selects the multiplier clock.
The RCCU contains a frequency comparator between CLOCK2 and the PLL clock output that verifies if the PLL reaches the programmed frequency
and has stabilized (locked status). When this condition occurs, the LOCK bit in the CLK_FLAG register is set to 1 by hardware and this value is maintained as long as the PLL is locked. The LOCK bit
is set back to 0 if for some reason (change of MX
bit value, stop and restart of PLL or CLOCK2,
etc.), the PLL loses the programmed frequency in
which it was locked.
The PLL selection as system clock is further conditioned by the status of the Voltage Regulator:
when it is not providing a stabilized supply voltage,
the PLL cannot be selected.
The maximum frequency allowed for INTCLK is
24 MHz. Care is required, when programming the
PLL multiplier and divider factors, not to exceed
the maximum permissible operating frequency for
INTCLK, according to supply voltage, as reported
in Electrical Characteristics section.
128/426
9
The ST9 being a static machine, there is no lower
limit for INTCLK. However, some peripherals have
their own minimum internal clock frequency limit
below which the functionality is not guaranteed.
7.3.2 PLL Free Running Mode
The PLL is able to provide a 50-kHz clock, usable
to slow program execution. This mode is
controlled by the FREEN and DX[2:0] bits in the
PLLCONF register: when the PLL is off and the
FREEN bit is set to 1 (i.e. when the FREEN and
DX[2:0] bits are set to 1), the PLL provides this
clock. The selection of this clock is also managed
by the CSU_CKSEL bit but is not conditioned by
the LOCK bit. To avoid unpredictable behaviour of
the PLL clock, Free Running mode must be set
and reset by the user only when the PLL clock is
not the system clock, i.e. when the CSU_CKSEL
bit is reset.
In addition, when the PLL provides the internal
clock, if the clock signal disappears (for instance
due to a broken or disconnected resonator...), a
safety clock signal is automatically provided, allowing the ST9 to perform some rescue operations.
Typ. Safety clock frequency = 800 kHz / Div,
where Div depends on the DX[0..2] bits of the PLLCONF register (R246, page55).
Table 26. Free Running Clock Frequency
DX2
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
DX1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
DX0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
DIV
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
1
1
1
16
1
1
1
-
CK (Typ.)
400 kHz
200 kHz
133 kHz
100 kHz
80 kHz
67 kHz
57 kHz
50 kHz
(CSU_CKSEL=0;
FREEN=1)
CLOCK2
(CSU_CKSEL=0;
FREEN=0)
ST92F124/F150/F250 - RESET AND CLOCK CONTROL UNIT (RCCU)
CLOCK MANAGEMENT (Cont’d)
7.3.3 CPU Clock Prescaling
The system clock, INTCLK, which may be the output of the PLL clock multiplier, CLOCK2, CLOCK2/
16 or CK_AF, drives a programmable prescaler
which generates the basic time base, CPUCLK,
for the instruction executer of the ST9 CPU core.
This allows the user to slow down program execution during non processor intensive routines, thus
reducing power dissipation.
The internal peripherals are not affected by the
CPUCLK prescaler and continue to operate at the
full INTCLK frequency. This is particularly useful
when little processing is being done and the peripherals are doing most of the work.
The prescaler divides the input clock by the value
programmed in the control bits PRS2,1,0 in the
MODER register. If the prescaler value is zero, no
prescaling takes place, thus CPUCLK has the
same period and phase as INTCLK. If the value is
different from 0, the prescaling is equal to the value plus one, ranging thus from two (PRS[2:0] = 1)
to eight (PRS[2:0] = 7).
The clock generated is shown in Figure 62, and it
will be noted that the prescaling of the clock does
not preserve the 50% duty cycle, since the high
level is stretched to replace the missing cycles.
This is analogous to the introduction of wait cycles
for access to external memory. When External
Memory Wait or Bus Request events occur, CPUCLK is stretched at the high level for the whole period required by the function
Figure 62. CPU Clock Prescaling
n
INTCLK
PRS VALUE
000
001
010
011
CPUCLK
100
101
110
111
VA00260
7.3.4 Peripheral Clock
The system clock, INTCLK, which may be the output of the PLL clock multiplier, CLOCK2, CLOCK2/
16 or CK_AF, is also routed to all ST9 on-chip peripherals and acts as the central timebase for all
timing functions.
7.3.5 Low Power Modes
The user can select an automatic slowdown of
clock frequency during Wait for Interrupt operation, thus idling in low power mode while waiting
for an interrupt. In WFI operation the clock to the
CPU core is stopped, thus suspending program
execution, while the clock to the peripherals may
be programmed as described in the following paragraphs. Two examples of Low Power operation in
WFI are illustrated in Figure 63 and Figure 64.
Providing that low power operation during Wait for
Interrupt is enabled (by setting the LPOWFI bit in
the CLKCTL Register), as soon as the CPU executes the WFI instruction, the PLL is turned off and
the system clock will be forced to CLOCK2 divided
by 16, or to the external low frequency clock,
CK_AF, if this has been selected by setting
WFI_CKSEL, and providing CKAF_ST is set, thus
indicating that the external clock is selected and
actually present on the CK_AF pin.
If the external clock source is used, the crystal oscillator may be stopped by setting the XTSTOP bit,
providing that the CK_AF clock is present and selected, indicated by CKAF_ST being set. In this
case, the crystal oscillator will be stopped automatically on entering WFI if the WFI_CKSEL bit
has been set.
It should be noted that selecting a non-existent
CK_AF clock source is impossible, since such a
selection requires that the auxiliary clock source
be actually present and selected. In no event can
a non-existent clock source be selected inadvertently.
It is up to the user program to switch back to a faster clock on the occurrence of an interrupt, taking
care to respect the oscillator and PLL stabilization
delays, as appropriate.
It should be noted that any of the low power modes
may also be selected explicitly by the user program even when not in Wait for Interrupt mode, by
setting the appropriate bits.
If the FREEN bit is set, the PLL is not stopped during Low Power WFI, increasing power consumption.
129/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - RESET AND CLOCK CONTROL UNIT (RCCU)
CLOCK MANAGEMENT (Cont’d)
7.3.6 Interrupt Generation
System clock selection modifies the CLKCTL and
CLK_FLAG registers.
The clock control unit generates an external interrupt request (INTD0) in the following conditions:
– when CK_AF and CLOCK2/16 are selected or
deselected as system clock source,
– when the system clock restarts after a hardware
stop (when the STOP MODE feature is available on the specific device).
– when the PLL loses the programmed frequency
in which it was locked, and when it re-locks
This interrupt can be masked by resetting the
INT_SEL bit in the CLKCTL register. Note that this
is the only case in the ST9 where an interrupt is
generated with a high to low transition.
Table 27. Summary of Operating Modes using main Crystal Controlled Oscillator
MODE
PLL x BY 14
PLL x BY 10
PLL x BY 8
PLL x BY 6
SLOW 1
SLOW 2
SLOW3
WFI
LOW POWER WFI 1
LOW POWER WFI 2
RESET
EXAMPLE
XTAL=4.4
MHz
130/426
9
INTCLK
CPUCLK DIV2 PRS0-2
CSU_CKSEL MX0-1 DX2-0 LPOWFI
XTAL/2
x (14/D)
XTAL/2
x (10/D)
XTAL/2
x (8/D)
XTAL/2
x (6/D)
WFI_CK
XT_DIV16
SEL
INTCLK/
1
N-1
1
10
D-1
X
N
INTCLK/
1
N-1
1
00
D-1
X
N
INTCLK/
1
N-1
1
11
D-1
X
N
INTCLK/
1
N-1
1
01
D-1
X
N
INTCLK/
XTAL/2
1
N-1
X
X
111
X
N
INTCLK/
XTAL/32
1
N-1
X
X
X
X
N
CK_AF CK_AF/N X
N-1
X
X
X
X
If LPOWFI=0, no changes occur on INTCLK, but CPUCLK is stopped anyway.
X
1
X
1
X
1
X
1
X
1
X
0
X
X
XTAL/32
STOP
1
X
X
X
X
1
0
X
CK_AF
STOP
1
X
X
X
X
1
1
X
XTAL/2
INTCLK
1
0
0
00
111
0
0
1
2.2*10/2
= 11MHz
11MHz
1
0
1
00
001
X
1
ST92F124/F150/F250 - RESET AND CLOCK CONTROL UNIT (RCCU)
Figure 63. Example of Low Power mode programming in WFI using CK_AF external clock
INTCLK FREQUENCY
PROGRAM FLOW
FXtal = 4 MHz
Begin
Reset State
MX[1:0] ← 00
PLL multiply factor
set to 10
DX[2:0] ← 000
Divider factor set
to 1, and PLL turned ON
WAIT
2 MHz
Wait for the PLL to lock
T1*
CSU_CKSEL ← 1
PLL is system clock source
WFI_CKSEL ← 1
CK_AF clock selected
in WFI state
XTSTOP ← 1
Preselect Xtal stopped
when CK_AF selected
LPOWFI ← 1
Low Power Mode enabled
in WFI state
20 MHz
User’s Program
WFI instruction
Interrupt
WFI status
Interrupt Routine
XTSTOP ← 0
WAIT
CKAF_SEL ← 0
Wait For Interrupt
activated
CK_AF selected and Xtal stopped
automatically
No code is executed until
an interrupt is requested
Interrupt serviced
while CK_AF is
the System Clock
and the Xtal restarts
FCK_AF
Wait for the Xtal to stabilise
The System Clock
switches to Xtal
WAIT
Wait for the PLL to lock
CSU_CKSEL ← 1
PLL is System Clock source
T2**
2 MHz
User’s Program
Execution of user program
resumes at full speed
20 MHz
* T1 = PLL lock-in time
** T2 = Quartz oscillator start-up time
131/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - RESET AND CLOCK CONTROL UNIT (RCCU)
Figure 64. Example of Low Power mode programming in WFI using CLOCK2/16
INTCLK FREQUENCY
PROGRAM FLOW
FXtal = 4 MHz
Begin
Reset State
MX[1:0] ← 01
PLL multiply factor
set to 6
DX[2:0] ← 000
Divider factor set
to 1, and PLL turned ON
WAIT
Wait for the PLL to lock
CSU_CKSEL ← 1
PLL is system clock source
LPOWFI ← 1
Low Power Mode enabled
in WFI state
2 MHz
T1*
User’s Program
WFI instruction
WFI status
12 MHz
Wait For Interrupt
activated
CLOCK2/16 selected and PLL
stopped automatically
No code is executed until
an interrupt is requested
Interrupt
125 KHz
Interrupt Routine
WAIT
Interrupt serviced
PLL switched on
CLOCK2 selected
Wait for the PLL to lock
T1*
CSU_CKSEL ← 1
2 MHz
PLL is system clock source
User’s Program
Execution of user program
resumes at full speed
12 MHz
* T1 = PLL lock-in time
132/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - RESET AND CLOCK CONTROL UNIT (RCCU)
7.4 CLOCK CONTROL REGISTERS
MODE REGISTER (MODER)
R235 - Read/Write
System Register
Reset Value: 1110 0000 (E0h)
7
-
0
-
DIV2
PRS2
PRS1
PRS0
-
-
*Note: This register contains bits which relate to
other functions; these are described in the chapter
dealing with Device Architecture. Only those bits
relating to Clock functions are described here.
Bit 5 = DIV2: Crystal Oscillator Clock Divided by 2.
This bit controls the divide by 2 circuit which operates on CLOCK1.
0: No division of CLOCK1
1: CLOCK1 is internally divided by 2
Bits 4:2 = PRS[2:0]: Clock Prescaling.
These bits define the prescaler value used to prescale CPUCLK from INTCLK. When these three
bits are reset, the CPUCLK is not prescaled, and is
equal to INTCLK; in all other cases, the internal
clock is prescaled by the value of these three bits
plus one.
CLOCK CONTROL REGISTER (CLKCTL)
R240 - Read/Write
Register Page: 55
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7
INT_S
EL
0
-
-
-
SRESEN
CKAF_S WFI_CKS LPOW
EL
EL
FI
Bit 7 = INT_SEL: Interrupt Selection.
0: The external interrupt channel input signal is selected (Reset state)
1: Select the internal RCCU interrupt as the source
of the interrupt request
Bits 6:4 = Reserved for test purposes
Must be kept reset for normal operation.
Bit 3 = SRESEN: Software Reset Enable.
0: The HALT instruction turns off the quartz, the
PLL and the CCU
1: A Reset is generated when HALT is executed
Bit 2 = CKAF_SEL: Alternate Function Clock Select.
0: CK_AF clock not selected
1: Select CK_AF clock
Note: To check if the selection has actually occurred, check that CKAF_ST is set. If no clock is
present on the CK_AF pin, the selection will not
occur.
Bit 1 = WFI_CKSEL: WFI Clock Select.
This bit selects the clock used in Low power WFI
mode if LPOWFI = 1.
0: INTCLK during WFI is CLOCK2/16
1: INTCLK during WFI is CK_AF, providing it is
present. In effect this bit sets CKAF_SEL in WFI
mode
WARNING: When the CK_AF is selected as Low
Power WFI clock but the crystal is not turned off
(R242.4 = 0), after exiting from the WFI, CK_AF
will be still selected as system clock. In this case,
reset the R240.2 bit to switch back to the crystal
oscillator clock.
Bit 0 = LPOWFI: Low Power mode during Wait For
Interrupt.
0: Low Power mode during WFI disabled. When
WFI is executed, the CPUCLK is stopped and
INTCLK is unchanged
1: The ST9 enters Low Power mode when the WFI
instruction is executed. The clock during this
state depends on WFI_CKSEL
VOLTAGE REGULATOR CONTROL REGISTER
(VRCTR)
R241 - Read/Write
Register Page: 55
Reset Value: 0000 0x00 (0xh)
7
0
0
0
0
0
VROFF
_REG
-
0
0
Bit 7-4 = Reserved, must be kept at 0.
Bit 3 = VROFF_REG: Voltage Regulator OFF
state. This bit is set and cleared by software.
0: Main Voltage Regulator (VR) on
1: Main VR off. In this state the Main Regulator has
zero power consumption, and the PLL is automatically deselected.
This bit must be set for the RTC mode.
Bit 2 = Reserved.
Bit 1-0 = Reserved, must be kept at 0.
133/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - RESET AND CLOCK CONTROL UNIT (RCCU)
CLOCK CONTROL REGISTERS (Cont’d)
CLOCK FLAG REGISTER (CLK_FLAG)
R242 -Read/Write
Register Page: 55
Reset Value: 0110 1000 after a Flash LVD Reset
Reset Value: 0100 1000 after a Watchdog Reset
Reset Value: 0010 1000 after a Software Reset
Reset Value: 0000 1000 after an External Reset
7
EX_
STP
0
WDG
RES
SOFT
RES
XTSTOP
XT_
DIV16
CSU_
CKAF_ LO
CKST
CK
SEL
WARNING: If you select the CK_AF as system
clock and turn off the oscillator (bits R240.2 and
R242.4 at 1), in order to switch back to the crystal
clock by resetting the R240.2 bit, you must first
wait for the oscillator to restart correctly.
Bit 7 = EX_STP: External Stop flag.
This bit is set by hardware/software and cleared by
software.
0: No External Stop condition occurred
1: External Stop condition occurred
Note: This bit is set after the end of the instruction
being executed when the microcontroller enters
stop mode. So, if this instruction is a reading of the
CLK_FLAG register, this bit will still be read as 0.
Next reading will give 1 as result.
Bit 6 = WDGRES: Watchdog reset flag.
This bit is read only.
0: No Watchdog reset occurred
1: Watchdog reset occurred
Bit 5 = SOFTRES: Software Reset Flag.
This bit is read only.
0: No software reset occurred
1: Software reset occurred (HALT instruction)
If both SOFTRES and WDGRES are set to 1, the
last reset event generator was a Flash LVD reset.
Table 28. Reset Flags
WDGRES
0
0
1
1
SOFTRES
0
1
0
1
External Reset
Software Reset
Watchdog Reset
LVD Reset
Bit 4 = XTSTOP: External Stop Enable.
0: External stop disabled
1: The Xtal oscillator will be stopped as soon as
the CK_AF clock is present and selected,
whether this is done explicitly by the user pro-
134/426
9
gram, or as a result of WFI, if WFI_CKSEL has
previously been set to select the CK_AF clock
during WFI.
Note: When the program writes ‘1’ to the XTSTOP
bit, it will still be read as 0 as long as the CKAF_ST
bit is reset (CKAF_ST=0). In this case, take care of
this behaviour, because a subsequent AND with
‘1’ or a OR with ‘0’ to the XSTOP bit before setting
the CKAF_ST bit will prevent the oscillator from
being stopped.
Bit 3 = XT_DIV16: CLOCK/16 Selection.
This bit is set and cleared by software. An interrupt
is generated when the bit is toggled.
0: CLOCK2/16 is selected and the PLL is off
1: The input is CLOCK2 (or the PLL output depending on the value of CSU_CKSEL)
Bit 2 = CKAF_ST: (Read Only)
If set, indicates that the alternate function clock
has been selected. If no clock signal is present on
the CK_AF pin, the selection will not occur. If reset, the PLL clock, CLOCK2 or CLOCK2/16 is selected (depending on bit 0).
Bit 1= LOCK: PLL locked-in
This bit is read only.
0: The PLL is turned off or not locked and cannot
be selected as system clock source.
1: The PLL is locked
Bit 0 = CSU_CKSEL: CSU Clock Select.
This bit is set and cleared by software. It is also
cleared by hardware when:
– bits DX[2:0] (PLLCONF) are set to 111;
– the quartz is stopped (by hardware or software);
– WFI is executed while the LPOWFI bit is set;
– the XT_DIV16 bit (CLK_FLAG) is forced to ’0’;
– STOP mode is entered.
This prevents the PLL, when not yet locked, from
providing an irregular clock. Furthermore, a ‘0’
stored in this bit speeds up the PLL’s locking.
0: CLOCK2 provides the system clock
1: The PLL Multiplier provides the system clock if
the LOCK bit is set to 1
If the FREEN bit is set, this bit selects this clock independently by the LOCK bit.
NOTE: Setting the CKAF_SEL bit overrides any
other clock selection. Resetting the XT_DIV16 bit
overrides the CSU_CKSEL selection (see Figure
61).
ST92F124/F150/F250 - RESET AND CLOCK CONTROL UNIT (RCCU)
CLOCK CONTROL REGISTERS (Cont’d)
PLL CONFIGURATION REGISTER (PLLCONF)
R246 - Read/Write
Register Page: 55
Reset Value: 0x00 x111
7
FREEN
0
0
MX1
MX0
0
DX2
DX1
Table 29. PLL Multiplication Factors
MX1
1
0
1
0
MX0
0
0
1
1
CLOCK2 x
14
10
8
6
DX0
Table 30. PLL Divider Factors
Bit 7 = FREEN: PLL Free Running Mode Enable
0: PLL Free Running Mode disabled
1: PLL Free Running Mode enabled
When this bit is set, even if the DX[2:0] bits are all
set to 1, the PLL is not stopped but provides a slow
frequency back-up clock, selectable by the
CSU_CKSEL bit of the CLK_FLAG register (without needing to have the LOCK bit equal to ‘1’).
Bits 5:4 = MX[1:0]: PLL Multiplication Factor.
Refer to Table 29 for multiplier settings.
WARNING: After these bits are modified, take
care that the PLL lock-in time has elapsed before
setting the CSU_CKSEL bit in the CLK_FLAG register.
DX2
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
DX1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
DX0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
CK
PLL CLOCK/1
PLL CLOCK/2
PLL CLOCK/3
PLL CLOCK/4
PLL CLOCK/5
PLL CLOCK/6
PLL CLOCK/7
CLOCK2
(PLL OFF, Reset State)
Bits 2:0 = DX[2:0]: PLL output clock divider factor.
Refer to Table 30 for divider settings.
135/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - RESET AND CLOCK CONTROL UNIT (RCCU)
Figure 65. RCCU General Timing
User program execution
PLL switched on by user
Boot ROM execution
20µs
< 4µs
PLL selected by user
Reset phase
External
Reset
Filtered
External
Reset
CLOCK2
PLL Multiplier
clock
Internal
Reset
INTCLK
tBRE
20479 x CLOCK1
PLL Lock-in
time
Exit from RESET
136/426
9
VR02113B
ST92F124/F150/F250 - RESET AND CLOCK CONTROL UNIT (RCCU)
7.5 CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR
The on-chip components for the crystal oscillator
are an inverting circuit, polarised at the trip point.
The inverter is built around an n-channel transistor, loaded with a current source and polarised
through a feedback resistor.
The current source is tailored to obtain a pseudo
sinusoidal signal at OSCOUT and OSCIN, reducing the electromagnetic emission. The inverter
stage is followed by a matching inverter, which is
followed in turn by a schmitt-triggered buffer.
In HALT mode, set by means of the HALT instruction, in STOP mode, and under control of the XTSTOP bit, the oscillator is disabled. The current
sources are switched off, reducing the power dissipation. The internal clock, CLOCK1, is forced to
a high level.
To exit the HALT condition and restart the oscillator, an external RESET pulse is required, having a
a minimum duration of TSTUP (see Figure 70 and
Section 11 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS).
It should be noted that, if the Watchdog function is
enabled, a HALT instruction will not disable the oscillator. This to avoid stopping the Watchdog if a
HALT code is executed in error. When this occurs,
the CPU will be reset when the Watchdog times
out or when an external reset is applied.
Table 31. Maximum RS values
C1=C2
Freq.
5 MHz
4 MHz
3 MHz
33pF
22pF
80
120
220
130
200
370
Legend:
C1, C2: Maximum Total Capacitances on pins OSCIN and
OSCOUT (the value includes the external capacitance
tied to the pin plus the parasitic capacitance of the board
and of the device)
Note: The tables are relative to the fundamental quartz
crystal only (not ceramic resonator).
Figure 67. Internal Oscillator Schematic
VDD
ILOAD
CLOCK1
RPOL
OSCIN
Figure 66. Crystal Oscillator
OSCOUT
CRYSTAL CLOCK
ST9
OSCIN
Figure 68. External Clock
OSCOUT
EXTERNAL CLOCK
Rd*
OSCIN
C1
ST9
C2
INPUT
CLOCK
*Rd can be inserted to reduce the drive level,
when using low drive crystals.
h
i l
di
t l
OSCOUT
VR02116B
137/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - RESET AND CLOCK CONTROL UNIT (RCCU)
CERAMIC RESONATORS
Murata Electronics CERALOCK resonators have been tested with the ST92F150 at 3, 3.68, 4 and 5 MHz.
These recommended resonators have built-in capacitors (see Table 32).
The test circuit is shown in Figure 69.
Figure 69. Test Circuit
VDD
OSCIN
ST92F150
OSCOUT
VSS
Rd
CERALOCK
C1
C2
Table 32 shows the recommended conditions at different frequencies.
Table 32. Obtained Results
Freq.
(MHz)
5
4
3
3.68
Parts Number
C1 (pF)
C2 (pF)
Rd (Ohm)
CSTCR5M00G55A-R0
CSTCC5M00G56A-R0
CSTCR4M00G55A-R0
CSTCC4M00G56A-R0
CSTCC3M00G56A-R0
CSTCC3M68G56A-R0
39
47
39
47
47
47
39
47
39
47
47
47
0
0
0
0
0
0
Advantages of using ceramic resonators:
CSTCR and CSTCC types have built-in loading
capacitors.
Smallest loading capacitor resonators are recommended for standard applications.
Highest loading capacitor resonators are recommended for automotive applications with CAN and
tight frequency tolerance.
Test conditions:
The evaluation conditions are 4.5 to 5.5 V for the
supply voltage and -40° to 105° C for the temperature range.
Caution:
These circuit conditions are for design reference
only.
Recommended C1, C2 value depends on the circuit board used.
138/426
9
For tight frequency tolerance applications, please
contact the nearest Murata office for more detailled PCB evaluation regarding layout.
Note 1:
Attention must be paid to leakage currents around
the OSCIN pin. Leakage paths from VDD could alter the DC polarization of the inverter stage and introduce a mismatch with the second stage, and
possibly stop the clock signal. It is recommended
to surround the oscillator components by a ground
ring on the printed circuit board and if necessary to
apply a coating film to avoid humidity problems.
Note 2:
Attention must be paid to the capacitive loading of
OSCOUT. OSCOUT must not be used to drive external circuits.
ST92F124/F150/F250 - RESET AND CLOCK CONTROL UNIT (RCCU)
7.6 RESET/STOP MANAGER
The Reset/Stop Manager resets the MCU when
one of the three following events occurs:
– A Hardware reset, initiated by a low level on the
Reset pin.
– A Software reset, initiated by a HALT instruction
(when enabled with the SRESEN bit of the
CLKCTL register).
– A Watchdog end of count condition.
The event which caused the last Reset is flagged
in the CLK_FLAG register, by setting either the
SOFTRES or the WDGRES bit or both; a hardware initiated reset will leave both these bits reset.
The hardware reset overrides all other conditions
and forces the ST9 to the reset state. During Reset, the internal registers are set to their reset values (when these reset values are defined, otherwise the register content will remain unchanged),
and the I/O pins are set to Bidirectional Weak-PullUp or High impedance input. See Section 7.3.
Reset is asynchronous: as soon as the reset pin is
driven low, a Reset cycle is initiated.
Figure 70. Oscillator Start-up Sequence and Reset Timing
VDD MAX
VDD MIN
OSCIN
OSCOUT
TSTUP
INTCLK
RESET
PIN
VR02085A
139/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - RESET AND CLOCK CONTROL UNIT (RCCU)
RESET/STOP MANAGER (Cont’d)
The on-chip Timer/Watchdog generates a reset
condition if the Watchdog mode is enabled
(WCR.WDGEN cleared, R252 page 0), and if the
programmed period elapses without the specific
code (AAh, 55h) written to the appropriate register.
The input pin RESET is not driven low by the onchip reset generated by the Timer/Watchdog.
When the Reset pin goes high again, 20479 oscillator clock cycles (CLOCK1) are counted before exiting the Reset state (+ one possible CLOCK1 period, depending on the delay between the rising
edge of the Reset pin and the first rising edge of
CLOCK1). Subsequently a short Boot routine is executed from the device internal Boot memory, and
control then passes to the user program.
The Boot routine sets the device characteristics
and loads the correct values in the Memory Management Unit’s pointer registers, so that these
point to the physical memory areas as mapped in
the specific device. The precise duration of this
short Boot routine varies from device to device,
depending on the Boot memory contents.
At the end of the Boot routine the Program Counter will be set to the location specified in the Reset
Vector located in the lowest two bytes of memory.
7.6.1 Reset Pin Timing
To improve the noise immunity of the device, the
Reset pin has a Schmitt trigger input circuit with
hysteresis. In addition, a filter will prevent an unwanted reset in case of a single glitch of less than
50 ns on the Reset pin. The device is certain to reset if a negative pulse of more than 20µs is applied. When the reset pin goes high again, a delay
of up to 4µs will elapse before the RCCU detects
this rising front. From this event on, a defined
number of CLOCK1 cycles (refer to tRSPH) is
counted before exiting the Reset state (+ one possible CLOCK1 period depending on the delay between the positive edge the RCCU detects and the
first rising edge of CLOCK1).
If the ST9 is a ROMLESS version, without on-chip
program memory, the memory interface ports are
set to external memory mode (i.e Alternate Function) and the memory accesses are made to external Program memory with wait cycles insertion.
If the Voltage Regulator is present in the device,
please ensure the reset pin is released only when
the internal voltage supply is stabilized at 3.3V.
Figure 71. Recommended Signal to be Applied
on Reset Pin
VRESETN
VDD
VIHRS
VILRS
20µs
Minimum
Figure 72. Reset Pin Input Structure
PIN
ESD PROTECTION
CIRCUITRY
140/426
9
SCHMITT TRIGGER and LOW
PASS FILTER
TO GENERATE RESET SIGNAL
ST92F124/F150/F250 - EXTERNAL MEMORY INTERFACE (EXTMI)
8 EXTERNAL MEMORY INTERFACE (EXTMI)
8.1 INTRODUCTION
The ST9 External Memory Interface uses two registers (EMR1 and EMR2) to configure external
memory accesses. Some interface signals are
also affected by WCR - R252 Page 0.
If the two registers EMR1 and EMR2 are set to the
proper values, the ST9+ memory access cycle is
similar to that of the original ST9, with the only exception that it is composed of just two system
clock phases, named T1 and T2.
During phase T1, the memory address is output on
the AS falling edge and is valid on the rising edge
of AS. Port1 and Port 9 maintain the address stable until the following T1 phase.
Figure 73. Page 21 Registers
During phase T2, two forms of behavior are possible. If the memory access is a Read cycle, Port 0
pins are released in high-impedance until the next
T1 phase and the data signals are sampled by the
ST9 on the rising edge of DS. If the memory access is a Write cycle, on the falling edge of DS,
Port 0 outputs data to be written in the external
memory. Those data signals are valid on the rising
edge of DS and are maintained stable until the
next address is output.
Note that DS is pulled low at the beginning of
phase T2 only during an external memory access.
Page 21
FFh
R255
FEh
R254
FDh
R253
FCh
R252
FBh
R251
FAh
R250
F9h
F8h
DMASR
ISR
F7h
Relocation of P0-3 and DPR0-3 Registers
R249
R248
MMU
R247
F6h
EMR2
R246
F5h
EMR1
R245
F4h
CSR
R244
F3h
DPR3
R243
F2h
DPR2
R242
F1h
DPR1
R241
F0h
DPR0
R240
EXT.MEM
MMU
SSPL
SSPH
USPL
USPH
MODER
PPR
RP1
RP0
FLAGR
CICR
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
DMASR
ISR
EMR2
EMR1
CSR
DPR3
DPR2
DPR1
DPR0
Bit DPRREM=0
SSPL
SSPH
USPL
USPH
MODER
PPR
RP1
RP0
FLAGR
CICR
P5
P4
DPR3
DPR2
DPR1
DPR0
DMASR
ISR
EMR2
EMR1
CSR
P3
P2
P1
P0
Bit DPRREM=1
141/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - EXTERNAL MEMORY INTERFACE (EXTMI)
8.2 EXTERNAL MEMORY SIGNALS
The access to external memory is made using the
AS, DS, RW, Port 0, Port1, Port9, DS2 and WAIT
signals described below.
Refer to Figure 76.
8.2.1 AS: Address Strobe
AS (Output, Active low, Tristate) is active during
the System Clock high-level phase of each T1
memory cycle: an AS rising edge indicates that
Memory Address and Read/Write Memory control
signals are valid.
AS is released in high-impedance during the bus
acknowledge cycle or under the processor control
by setting the HIMP bit (MODER.0, R235).
Under Reset, AS is held high with an internal weak
pull-up.
The behavior of this signal is also affected by the
MC, ASAF, ETO, LAS[1:0] and UAS[1:0] bits in the
EMR1 or EMR2 registers. Refer to the Register
description.
8.2.2 DS: Data Strobe
DS (Output, Active low, Tristate) is active during the
internal clock high-level phase of each T2 memory
cycle. During an external memory read cycle, the
data on Port 0 must be valid before the DS rising
edge. During an external memory write cycle, the
data on Port 0 are output on the falling edge of DS
and they are valid on the rising edge of DS. When
the internal memory is accessed DS is kept high
during the whole memory cycle.
DS is released in high-impedance during bus acknowledge cycle or under processor control by setting the HIMP bit (MODER.0, R235).
Under Reset status, DS is held high with an internal
weak pull-up.
The behavior of this signal is also affected by the
LDS[2:0], UDS[2:0], DS2EN and MC bits in the
142/426
9
EMR1 or WCR register. Refer to the Register description.
8.2.3 RW: Read/Write
RW (Output, Active low, Tristate) identifies the
type of memory cycle: RW=”1” identifies a memory
read cycle, RW=”0” identifies a memory write cycle. It is defined at the beginning of each memory
cycle and it remains stable until the following
memory cycle.
RW is released in high-impedance during bus acknowledge cycle or under processor control by
setting the HIMP bit (MODER).
Under Reset status, RW is held high with an internal weak pull-up.
The behavior of this signal is affected by the MC
and ETO bits in the EMR1 register. Refer to the
Register description.
8.2.4 DS2: Data Strobe 2
This additional Data Strobe pin (Alternate Function
Output, Active low, Tristate) allows two different
external memories to be connected to the ST9, the
upper memory block (A21=1 typically RAM) and
the lower memory block (A21=0 typically ROM)
without any external logic. The selection between
the upper and lower memory blocks depends on
the A21 address pin value.
The upper memory block is controlled by the DS
pin while the lower memory block is controlled by
the DS2 pin. When the internal memory is addressed, DS2 is kept high during the whole memory cycle. DS2 is enabled via software as the Alternate Function output of the associated I/O port bit.
DS2 is released in high-impedance during bus acknowledge cycle or under processor control by
setting the HIMP bit (MODER.0, r235).
The behavior of this signal is also affected by the
DS2EN bit in the EMR1 register. Refer to the Register description.
ST92F124/F150/F250 - EXTERNAL MEMORY INTERFACE (EXTMI)
EXTERNAL MEMORY SIGNALS (Cont’d)
8.2.5 PORT 0
If Port 0 is used as a bit programmable parallel I/O
port, it has the same features as a regular port.
When set as an Alternate Function, it is used as
the External Memory interface: it outputs the multiplexed Address (8 LSB: A[7:0]) / Data bus D[7:0].
8.2.6 PORT 1
If Port 1 is used as a bit programmable parallel I/O
port, it has the same features as a regular port.
When set as an Alternate Function, it is used as
the external memory interface to provide the address bits A[15:8].
Figure 74. Application Example (MC=0)
8.2.7 PORT 9 [7:2]
If Port 9 is available and used as a bit programmable I/O port, it has the same features as a regular
port. If the MMU is available on the device and
Port 9 is set as an Alternate Function, Port 9[7:2] is
used as the external memory interface to provide
the 6 MSB of the address (A[21:16]).
Note: For the ST92F250 device, since A[18:17]
share the same pins as SDA1 and SCL1 of I²C_1,
these address bits are not available when the
I²C_1 is in use (when I2CCR.PE bit is set).
RW
W
DS
P0
RAM
2 Mbytes
G
Q[7:0]
D[7:0]
A[7:0]
ST9
AS
D[7:0]
Q[7:0]
LE
A[20:0]
OE
E
LATCH
P9[6:2], P1
P9.7
ROM
A[20:8]
DS
Q[7:0]
A21
A[20:0]
2 Mbytes
E
Figure 75. Application Example (MC=1)
WEN
W
OEN
P0
RAM
2 Mbytes
G
Q[7:0]
D[7:0]
A[7:0]
ST9
ALE
D[7:0]
Q[7:0]
LE
A[20:0]
OE
E
LATCH
P9[6:2], P1
P9.7
ROM
A[20:8]
DS
Q[7:0]
A21
A[20:0]
2 Mbytes
E
143/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - EXTERNAL MEMORY INTERFACE (EXTMI)
EXTERNAL MEMORY SIGNALS (Cont’d)
Figure 76. External memory Read/Write with a programmable wait
NO WAIT CYCLE
T1
T2
SYSTEM
CLOCK
1 DS WAIT CYCLE
1 AS WAIT CYCLE
T1
T2
TWA
TWD
AS STRETCH
DS STRETCH
AS (MC=0)
ALWAYS
TAVQV
ALE (MC=1)
(AS pin)
P1, P9
ADDRESS
ADDRESS
DS (MC=0)
ADDRESS
DATA IN
DATA IN
ADDRESS
READ
P0
RW (MC=0)
OEN (MC=1)
(DS pin)
WEN (MC=1)
(RW pin)
ADDRESS
DATA OUT
DATA
ADDRESS
TAVWH
RW (MC=0)
OEN (MC=1)
(DS pin)
WEN (MC=1)
(RW pin)
144/426
9
TAVWL
WRITE
P0
ST92F124/F150/F250 - EXTERNAL MEMORY INTERFACE (EXTMI)
EXTERNAL MEMORY SIGNALS (Cont’d)
Figure 77. Effects of DS2EN on the behavior of DS and DS2
n
T1
NO WAIT CYCLE
T2
T1
SYSTEM
CLOCK
1 DS WAIT CYCLE
T2
DS STRETCH
AS (MC=0)
ALE (MC=1)
DS2EN=0 OR (DS2EN=1 AND UPPER MEMORY ADDRESSED):
DS
(MC=0)
DS2
(MC=0)
OEN
(MC=1, READ)
OEN
(MC=1, WRITE)
OEN2
(MC=1)
DS2EN=1 AND LOWER MEMORY ADDRESSED:
DS
(MC=0)
DS2
(MC=0)
OEN
(MC=1)
OEN2
(MC=1, READ)
OEN2
(MC=1, WRITE)
145/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - EXTERNAL MEMORY INTERFACE (EXTMI)
EXTERNAL MEMORY SIGNALS (Cont’d)
8.2.8 WAIT: External Memory Wait
cle, WAIT is sampled again to continue or finish
the memory cycle stretching. Note that if WAIT is
WAIT (Alternate Function Input, Active low) indisampled active during phase T1 then AS is
cates to the ST9 that the external memory requires
stretched, while if WAIT is sampled active during
more time to complete the memory access cycle. If
phase T2 then DS is stretched. WAIT is enabled
bit EWEN (EIVR) is set, the WAIT signal is samvia software as the Alternate Function input of the
pled with the rising edge of the processor internal
associated I/O port bit (refer to specific ST9 verclock during phase T1 or T2 of every memory cysion to identify the specific port and pin). Refer to
cle. If the signal was sampled active, one more inFigure 78.
ternal clock cycle is added to the memory cycle.
On the rising edge of the added internal clock cyFigure 78. External memory Read/Write sequence with external wait request (WAIT pin)
T1
T2
T1
T2
T1
T2
WAIT
P1, P9
ADDRESS
ALWAYS
SYSTEM
CLOCK
ADDRESS
ADDRESS
AS (MC=0)
ALE (MC=1)
DS (MC=0)
ADD.
D.IN
ADD.
D.OUT
ADDRESS
D.IN
ADD.
D.IN
READ
P0
RW (MC=0)
OEN (MC=1)
WEN (MC=1)
RW (MC=0)
OEN (MC=1)
WEN (MC=1)
146/426
9
ADDRESS
D.OUT
ADD.
DATA OUT
WRITE
P0
ST92F124/F150/F250 - EXTERNAL MEMORY INTERFACE (EXTMI)
8.3 REGISTER DESCRIPTION
EXTERNAL MEMORY REGISTER 1 (EMR1)
R245 - Read/Write
Register Page: 21
Reset value: 1000 0000 (80h)
7
X
If the upper memory block is addressed, DS2 is
forced to “1” during the whole memory cycle.
Refer to Figure 77
0
MC
DS2EN
ASAF
0
ETO
BSZ
X
Bit 7 = Reserved.
Bit 6 = MC: Mode Control.
0: AS, DS and RW pins have the standard ST9 format.
1: AS pin becomes ALE, Address Load Enable.
This signal indicates to the external address
latch that a valid address is put on AD[7:0].
When ALE is high, the multiplexed address/data
bus AD[7:0] carries the LSBs of the memory address, which must be latched on the falling edge
of this signal.
DS becomes OEN, Output ENable: When this
signal is low, the external memory should put
the data on the multiplexed address/data bus
AD[7:0]. The data is sampled by the microcontroller on the rising edge of the OEN signal.
RW pin becomes WEN, Write ENable: when this
signal is low, the multiplexed address/data bus
AD[7:0] carries the data to be written in the external memory. The external memory should
sample the data on the rising edge of the WEN
signal.
Bit 5 = DS2EN: Data Strobe 2 enable.
0: The DS pin is active for any external memory
access (lower and upper memory block).
The DS2 pin remains high.
1: If the lower memory block is addressed, the
DS2 pin outputs the standard DS signal, while
the DS pin stays high during the whole memory
cycle.
Bit 4 = ASAF: Address Strobe as Alternate Function.
Depending on the device, AS can be either a dedicated pin or a port Alternate Function. This bit is
used only in the second case.
0: AS Alternate function disabled.
1: AS Alternate Function enabled.
Bit 3 = Reserved, must be kept cleared.
Bit 2 = ETO: External toggle.
0: The external memory interface pins (AS, DS,
DS2, RW, Port0, Port1, Port9) toggle only if an
access to external memory is performed.
1: When the internal memory protection is disabled, the above pins (except DS which never
toggles during internal memory accesses) toggle during both internal and external memory
accesses.
Bit 1 = BSZ: Bus size.
0: All outputs use the standard low-noise output
buffers.
1: P4[7:6], P6[5:4] use high-drive output buffers
Bit 0 = Reserved.
Caution: External memory must be correctly addressed before and after a write operation on the
EMR1 register. For example, if code is fetched
from external memory using the standard ST9 external memory interface configuration (MC=0),
setting the MC bit will cause the device to behave
unpredictably.
147/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - EXTERNAL MEMORY INTERFACE (EXTMI)
EXTERNAL MEMORY INTERFACE REGISTERS (Cont’d)
EXTERNAL MEMORY REGISTER 2 (EMR2)
the contents of ISR. In this case, iret will also reR246 - Read/Write
store CSR from the stack. This approach allows
Register Page: 21
interrupt service routines to access the entire
Reset value: 0001 1111 (1Fh)
4Mbytes of address space; the drawback is that
the interrupt response time is slightly increased,
7
0
because of the need to also save CSR on the
ENCSR DPRREM MEMSEL LAS1 LAS0 UAS1 UAS0
stack. Full compatibility with the original ST9 is
lost in this case, because the interrupt stack
frame is different; this difference, however,
should not affect the vast majority of programs.
Bit 7 = Reserved.
Bit 6 = ENCSR: Enable Code Segment Register.
This bit affects the ST9 CPU behavior whenever
an interrupt request is issued.
0: The CPU works in original ST9 compatibility
mode concerning stack frame during interrupts.
For the duration of the interrupt service routine,
ISR is used instead of CSR, and the interrupt
stack frame is identical to that of the original
ST9: only the PC and Flags are pushed. This
avoids saving the CSR on the stack in the event
of an interrupt, thus ensuring a faster interrupt
response time. The drawback is that it is not
possible for an interrupt service routine to perform inter-segment calls or jumps: these instructions would update the CSR, which, in this case,
is not used (ISR is used instead). The code segment size for all interrupt service routines is thus
limited to 64K bytes.
1: If ENCSR is set, ISR is only used to point to the
interrupt vector table and to initialize the CSR at
the beginning of the interrupt service routine: the
old CSR is pushed onto the stack together with
the PC and flags, and CSR is then loaded with
148/426
9
Bit 5 = DPRREM: Data Page Registers remapping
0: The locations of the four MMU (Memory Management Unit) Data Page Registers (DPR0,
DPR1, DPR2 and DPR3) are in page 21.
1: The four MMU Data Page Registers are
swapped with that of the Data Registers of ports
0-3.
Refer to Figure 73
Bit 4 = MEMSEL: Memory Selection.
Warning: Must be kept at 1.
Bit 3:2 = LAS[1:0]: Lower memory address strobe
stretch.
These two bits contain the number of wait cycles
(from 0 to 3) to add to the System Clock to stretch
AS during external lower memory block accesses
(A21=”0”). The reset value is 3.
ST92F124/F150/F250 - EXTERNAL MEMORY INTERFACE (EXTMI)
EXTERNAL MEMORY INTERFACE REGISTERS (Cont’d)
Bit 1:0 = UAS[1:0]: Upper memory address strobe
stretch.
These two bits contain the number of wait cycles
(from 0 to 3) to add to the System Clock to stretch
AS during external upper memory block accesses
(A21=1). The reset value is 3.
Caution: The EMR2 register cannot be written
during an interrupt service routine.
WAIT CONTROL REGISTER (WCR)
R252 - Read/Write
Register Page: 0
Reset Value: 0111 1111 (7Fh)
7
0
0
WDGEN UDS2
UDS1
UDS0
LDS2
LDS1 LDS0
Bit 7 = Reserved, forced by hardware to 0.
Bit 6 = WDGEN: Watchdog Enable.
For a description of this bit, refer to the Timer/
Watchdog chapter.
Caution: Clearing this bit has the effect of setting
the Timer/Watchdog to Watchdog mode. Unless
this is desired, it must be set to “1”.
Bit 5:3 = UDS[2:0]: Upper memory data strobe
stretch.
These bits contain the number of INTCLK cycles
to be added automatically to DS for external upper
memory block accesses. UDS = 0 adds no additional wait cycles. UDS = 7 adds the maximum 7
INTCLK cycles (reset condition).
Bit 2:0 = LDS[2:0]: Lower memory data strobe
stretch.
These bits contain the number of INTCLK cycles
to be added automatically to DS for external lower
memory block accesses. LDS = 0 adds no additional wait cycles, LDS = 7 adds the maximum 7
INTCLK cycles (reset condition).
Note 1: The number of clock cycles added refers
to INTCLK and NOT to CPUCLK.
Note 2: The distinction between the Upper memory block and the Lower memory block allows different wait cycles between the first 2 Mbytes and the
second 2 Mbytes, and allows 2 different data
strobe signals to be used to access 2 different
memories.
Typically, the RAM will be located above address
0x200000 and the ROM below address
0x1FFFFF, with different access times (see Figure
74).
Caution: The reset value of the Wait Control Register gives the maximum number of Wait cycles for
external memory. To get optimum performance
from the ST9, the user should write the UDS[2:0]
and LDS[2:0] bits to 0, if the external addressed
memories are fast enough.
149/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - I/O PORTS
9 I/O PORTS
9.1 INTRODUCTION
9.2 SPECIFIC PORT CONFIGURATIONS
ST9 devices feature flexible individually programmable multifunctional input/output lines. Refer to
the Pin Description Chapter for specific pin allocations. These lines, which are logically grouped as
8-bit ports, can be individually programmed to provide digital input/output and analog input, or to
connect input/output signals to the on-chip peripherals as alternate pin functions. All ports can be individually configured as an input, bi-directional,
output or alternate function. In addition, pull-ups
can be turned off for open-drain operation, and
weak pull-ups can be turned on in their place, to
avoid the need for off-chip resistive pull-ups. Ports
configured as open drain must never have voltage
on the port pin exceeding VDD (refer to the Electrical Characteristics section). Depending on the
specific port, input buffers are software selectable
to be TTL or CMOS compatible, however on Schmitt trigger ports, no selection is possible.
Refer to the Pin Description chapter for a list of the
specific port styles and reset values.
9.3 PORT CONTROL REGISTERS
Each port is associated with a Data register
(PxDR) and three Control registers (PxC0, PxC1,
PxC2). These define the port configuration and allow dynamic configuration changes during program execution. Port Data and Control registers
are mapped into the Register File as shown in Figure 79. Port Data and Control registers are treated
just like any other general purpose register. There
are no special instructions for port manipulation:
any instruction that can address a register, can address the ports. Data can be directly accessed in
the port register, without passing through other
memory or “accumulator” locations.
Figure 79. I/O Register Map
GROUP E
System
Registers
E5h
E4h
E3h
E2h
E1h
E0h
150/426
9
P5DR
P4DR
P3DR
P2DR
P1DR
P0DR
R229
R228
R227
R226
R225
R224
FFh
FEh
FDh
FCh
FBh
FAh
F9h
F8h
F7h
F6h
F5h
F4h
F3h
F2h
F1h
F0h
GROUP F
PAGE 2
Reserved
P3C2
P3C1
P3C0
Reserved
P2C2
P2C1
P2C0
Reserved
P1C2
P1C1
P1C0
Reserved
P0C2
P0C1
P0C0
GROUP F
PAGE 3
P7DR
P7C2
P7C1
P7C0
P6DR
P6C2
P6C1
P6C0
Reserved
P5C2
P5C1
P5C0
Reserved
P4C2
P4C1
P4C0
GROUP F
PAGE 43
P9DR
P9C2
P9C1
P9C0
P8DR
P8C2
P8C1
P8C0
Reserved
R255
R254
R253
R252
R251
R250
R249
R248
R247
R246
R245
R244
R243
R242
R241
R240
ST92F124/F150/F250 - I/O PORTS
PORT CONTROL REGISTERS (Cont’d)
During Reset, ports with weak pull-ups are set in
bidirectional/weak pull-up mode and the output
Data Register is set to FFh. This condition is also
held after Reset, except for Ports 0 and 1 in ROMless devices, and can be redefined under software
control.
Bidirectional ports without weak pull-ups are set in
high impedance during reset. To ensure proper
levels during reset, these ports must be externally
connected to either VDD or VSS through external
pull-up or pull-down resistors.
Other reset conditions may apply in specific ST9
devices.
9.4 INPUT/OUTPUT BIT CONFIGURATION
By programming the control bits PxC0.n and
PxC1.n (see Figure 80) it is possible to configure
bit Px.n as Input, Output, Bidirectional or Alternate
Function Output, where X is the number of the I/O
port, and n the bit within the port (n = 0 to 7).
When programmed as input, it is possible to select
the input level as TTL or CMOS compatible by programming the relevant PxC2.n control bit.
This option is not available on Schmitt trigger ports.
The output buffer can be programmed as pushpull or open-drain.
A weak pull-up configuration can be used to avoid
external pull-ups when programmed as bidirectional (except where the weak pull-up option has
been permanently disabled in the pin hardware assignment).
Each pin of an I/O port may assume software programmable Alternate Functions (refer to the device Pin Description and to Section 9.5 ALTERNATE FUNCTION ARCHITECTURE). To output
signals from the ST9 peripherals, the port must be
configured as AF OUT. On ST9 devices with A/D
Converter(s), configure the ports used for analog
inputs as AF IN.
The basic structure of the bit Px.n of a general purpose port Px is shown in Figure 81.
Independently of the chosen configuration, when
the user addresses the port as the destination register of an instruction, the port is written to and the
data is transferred from the internal Data Bus to
the Output Master Latches. When the port is addressed as the source register of an instruction,
the port is read and the data (stored in the Input
Latch) is transferred to the internal Data Bus.
When Px.n is programmed as an Input:
(See Figure 82).
– The Output Buffer is forced tristate.
– The data present on the I/O pin is sampled into
the Input Latch at the beginning of each instruction execution.
– The data stored in the Output Master Latch is
copied into the Output Slave Latch at the end of
the execution of each instruction. Thus, if bit Px.n
is reconfigured as an Output or Bidirectional, the
data stored in the Output Slave Latch will be reflected on the I/O pin.
151/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - I/O PORTS
INPUT/OUTPUT BIT CONFIGURATION (Cont’d)
Figure 80. Control Bits
Bit 7
Bit n
Bit 0
PxC2
PxC27
PxC2n
PxC20
PxC1
PxC17
PxC1n
PxC10
PxC0
PxC07
PxC0n
PxC00
n
Table 33. Port Bit Configuration Table (n = 0, 1... 7; X = port number)
General Purpose I/O Pins
PXC2n
PXC1n
PXC0n
A/D Pins
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
PXn Configuration
BID
BID
OUT
OUT
IN
IN
AF OUT
AF OUT
AF IN
PXn Output Type
WP OD
OD
PP
OD
HI-Z
HI-Z
PP
OD
HI-Z(1)
TTL
TTL
TTL
TTL
CMOS
TTL
TTL
TTL
PXn Input Type
(or Schmitt
(or Schmitt
(or Schmitt
(or Schmitt
(or Schmitt
(or Schmitt
(or Schmitt
(or Schmitt
Trigger)
Trigger)
Trigger)
Trigger)
Trigger)
Trigger)
Trigger)
Trigger)
(1)
For A/D Converter inputs.
Legend:
X
=
n
=
AF
=
BID =
CMOS=
HI-Z =
IN
=
OD =
OUT =
PP
=
TTL =
WP =
152/426
9
Port
Bit
Alternate Function
Bidirectional
CMOS Standard Input Levels
High Impedance
Input
Open Drain
Output
Push-Pull
TTL Standard Input Levels
Weak Pull-up
Analog
Input
ST92F124/F150/F250 - I/O PORTS
INPUT/OUTPUT BIT CONFIGURATION (Cont’d)
Figure 81. Basic Structure of an I/O Port Pin
I/O PIN
PUSH-PULL
TRISTATE
OPEN DRAIN
WEAK PULL-UP
TTL / CMOS
(or Schmitt Trigger)
TO PERIPHERAL
INPUTS AND
INTERRUPTS
OUTPUT SLAVE LATCH
FROM
PERIPHERAL
OUTPUT
ALTERNATE
FUNCTION
INPUT
BIDIRECTIONAL
ALTERNATE
FUNCTION
OUTPUT
INPUT
OUTPUT
BIDIRECTIONAL
OUTPUT MASTER LATCH
INPUT LATCH
INTERNAL DATA BUS
Figure 82. Input Configuration
Figure 83. Output Configuration
I/O PIN
I/O PIN
OPEN DRAIN
PUSH-PULL
TTL / CMOS
(or Schmitt Trigger)
TRISTATE
TO PERIPHERAL
INPUTS AND
INTERRUPTS
OUTPUT SLAVE LATCH
OUTPUT MASTER LATCH
TO PERIPHERAL
INPUTS AND
INTERRUPTS
OUTPUT SLAVE LATCH
INPUT LATCH
OUTPUT MASTER LATCH
INTERNAL DATA BUS
n
n
TTL
(or Schmitt Trigger)
INPUT LATCH
INTERNAL DATA BUS
n
153/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - I/O PORTS
INPUT/OUTPUT BIT CONFIGURATION (Cont’d)
When Px.n is programmed as an Output:
(Figure 83)
– The Output Buffer is turned on in an Open-drain
or Push-pull configuration.
– The data stored in the Output Master Latch is
copied both into the Input Latch and into the Output Slave Latch, driving the I/O pin, at the end of
the execution of the instruction.
When Px.n is programmed as Bidirectional:
(Figure 84)
– The Output Buffer is turned on in an Open-Drain
or Weak Pull-up configuration (except when disabled in hardware).
– The data present on the I/O pin is sampled into
the Input Latch at the beginning of the execution
of the instruction.
– The data stored in the Output Master Latch is
copied into the Output Slave Latch, driving the I/
O pin, at the end of the execution of the instruction.
WARNING: Due to the fact that in bidirectional
mode the external pin is read instead of the output
latch, particular care must be taken with arithmetic/logic and Boolean instructions performed on a
bidirectional port pin.
These instructions use a read-modify-write sequence, and the result written in the port register
depends on the logical level present on the external pin.
This may bring unwanted modifications to the port
output register content.
For example:
Port register content, 0Fh
external port value, 03h
(Bits 3 and 2 are externally forced to 0)
A bset instruction on bit 7 will return:
Port register content, 83h
external port value, 83h
(Bits 3 and 2 have been cleared).
To avoid this situation, it is suggested that all operations on a port, using at least one bit in bidirectional mode, are performed on a copy of the port
register, then transferring the result with a load instruction to the I/O port.
When Px.n is programmed as a digital Alternate Function Output:
(Figure 85)
– The Output Buffer is turned on in an Open-Drain
or Push-Pull configuration.
154/426
9
– The data present on the I/O pin is sampled into
the Input Latch at the beginning of the execution
of the instruction.
– The signal from an on-chip function is allowed to
load the Output Slave Latch driving the I/O pin.
Signal timing is under control of the alternate
function. If no alternate function is connected to
Px.n, the I/O pin is driven to a high level when in
Push-Pull configuration, and to a high impedance state when in open drain configuration.
Figure 84. Bidirectional Configuration
I/O PIN
WEAK PULL-UP
OPEN DRAIN
TTL
(or Schmitt Trigger)
TO PERIPHERAL
INPUTS AND
INTERRUPTS
OUTPUT SLAVE LATCH
OUTPUT MASTER LATCH
INPUT LATCH
INTERNAL DATA BUS
n
n
Figure 85. Alternate Function Configuration
I/O PIN
OPEN DRAIN
PUSH-PULL
TTL
(or Schmitt Trigger)
TO PERIPHERAL
INPUTS AND
INTERRUPTS
OUTPUT SLAVE LATCH
FROM
PERIPHERAL
OUTPUT
INPUT LATCH
INTERNAL DATA BUS
n
n
n
n
n
n
ST92F124/F150/F250 - I/O PORTS
9.5 ALTERNATE FUNCTION ARCHITECTURE
Each I/O pin may be connected to three different
types of internal signal:
– Data bus Input/Output
– Alternate Function Input
– Alternate Function Output
9.5.1 Pin Declared as I/O
A pin declared as I/O, is connected to the I/O buffer. This pin may be an Input, an Output, or a bidirectional I/O, depending on the value stored in
(PxC2, PxC1 and PxC0).
9.5.2 Pin Declared as an Alternate Function
Input
A single pin may be directly connected to several
Alternate Function inputs. In this case, the user
must select the required input mode (with the
PxC2, PxC1, PxC0 bits) and enable the selected
Alternate Function in the Control Register of the
peripheral. No specific port configuration is required to enable an Alternate Function input, since
the input buffer is directly connected to each alternate function module on the shared pin. As more
than one module can use the same input, it is up to
the user software to enable the required module
as necessary. Parallel I/Os remain operational
even when using an Alternate Function input. The
exception to this is when an I/O port bit is permanently assigned by hardware as an A/D bit. In this
case , after software programming of the bit in AFOD-TTL, the Alternate function output is forced to
logic level 1. The analog voltage level on the corresponding pin is directly input to the A/D (See Figure 86).
9.5.3 Pin Declared as an Alternate Function
Output
The user must select the AF OUT configuration
using the PxC2, PxC1, PxC0 bits. Several Alternate Function outputs may drive a common pin. In
such case, the Alternate Function output signals
are logically ANDed before driving the common
pin. The user must therefore enable the required
Alternate Function Output by software.
WARNING: When a pin is connected both to an alternate function output and to an alternate function
input, it should be noted that the output signal will
always be present on the alternate function input.
9.6 I/O STATUS AFTER WFI, HALT AND RESET
The status of the I/O ports during the Wait For Interrupt, Halt and Reset operational modes is
shown in the following table. The External Memory
Interface ports are shown separately. If only the internal memory is being used and the ports are acting as I/O, the status is the same as shown for the
other I/O ports.
Mode
WFI
Figure 86. A/D Input Configuration
I/O PIN
TOWARDS
ADC CONVERTER
TRISTATE
HALT
Ext. Mem - I/O Ports
P1, P2, P6,
P0
P9[7:2] *
High Impedance or next
address
(depending
Next
on the last
Address
memory operation performed on
Port)
High ImpedNext
ance
Address
GND
RESET
Alternate function pushpull (ROMless device)
INPUT
BUFFER
OUTPUT SLAVE LATCH
I/O Ports
Not Affected (clock
outputs running)
Not Affected (clock
outputs stopped)
Bidirectional Weak
Pull-up (High impedance when disabled in
hardware).
* Depending on device
OUTPUT MASTER LATCH
INPUT LATCH
INTERNAL DATA BUS
155/426
9
TIMER/WATCHDOG (WDT)
10 ON-CHIP PERIPHERALS
10.1 TIMER/WATCHDOG (WDT)
Important Note: This chapter is a generic description of the WDT peripheral. However depending
on the ST9 device, some or all of WDT interface
signals described may not be connected to external pins. For the list of WDT pins present on the
ST9 device, refer to the device pinout description
in the first section of the data sheet.
10.1.1 Introduction
The Timer/Watchdog (WDT) peripheral consists of
a programmable 16-bit timer and an 8-bit prescaler. It can be used, for example, to:
– Generate periodic interrupts
– Measure input signal pulse widths
– Request an interrupt after a set number of events
– Generate an output signal waveform
– Act as a Watchdog timer to monitor system integrity
The main WDT registers are:
– Control register for the input, output and interrupt
logic blocks (WDTCR)
– 16-bit counter register pair (WDTHR, WDTLR)
– Prescaler register (WDTPR)
The hardware interface consists of up to five signals:
– WDIN External clock input
– WDOUT Square wave or PWM signal output
– INT0 External interrupt input
– NMI Non-Maskable Interrupt input
– HW0SW1 Hardware/Software Watchdog enable.
Figure 87. Timer/Watchdog Block Diagram
INEN INMD1 INMD2
WDIN
INPUT
&
CLOCK CONTROL LOGIC
MUX
WDT
CLOCK
WDTPR
8-BIT PRESCALER
WDTRH, WDTRL
16-BIT
DOWNCOUNTER
END OF
COUNT
INTCLK/4
OUTMD
WROUT
OUTEN
OUTPUT CONTROL LOGIC
NMI
INT0
WDOUT
HW0SW1
MUX
WDGEN
INTERRUPT
IAOS
TLIS
CONTROL LOGIC
RESET
TOP LEVEL INTERRUPT REQUEST
INTA0 REQUEST
156/426
9
TIMER/WATCHDOG (WDT)
TIMER/WATCHDOG (Cont’d)
10.1.2 Functional Description
10.1.2.1 External Signals
The HW0SW1 pin can be used to permanently enable Watchdog mode. Refer to Section 10.1.3.1 on
page 158.
The WDIN Input pin can be used in one of four
modes:
– Event Counter Mode
– Gated External Input Mode
– Triggerable Input Mode
– Retriggerable Input Mode
The WDOUT output pin can be used to generate a
square wave or a Pulse Width Modulated signal.
An interrupt, generated when the WDT is running
as the 16-bit Timer/Counter, can be used as a Top
Level Interrupt or as an interrupt source connected
to channel A0 of the external interrupt structure
(replacing the INT0 interrupt input).
The counter can be driven either by an external
clock, or internally by INTCLK divided by 4.
10.1.2.2 Initialisation
The prescaler (WDTPR) and counter (WDTRL,
WDTRH) registers must be loaded with initial values before starting the Timer/Counter. If this is not
done, counting will start with reset values.
10.1.2.3 Start/Stop
The ST_SP bit enables downcounting. When this
bit is set, the Timer will start at the beginning of the
following instruction. Resetting this bit stops the
counter.
If the counter is stopped and restarted, counting
will resume from the last value unless a new constant has been entered in the Timer registers
(WDTRL, WDTRH).
A new constant can be written in the WDTRH,
WDTRL, WDTPR registers while the counter is
running. The new value of the WDTRH, WDTRL
registers will be loaded at the next End of Count
(EOC) condition while the new value of the
WDTPR register will be effective immediately.
End of Count is when the counter is 0.
When Watchdog mode is enabled the state of the
ST_SP bit is irrelevant.
10.1.2.4 Single/Continuous Mode
The S_C bit allows selection of single or continuous mode.This Mode bit can be written with the
Timer stopped or running. It is possible to toggle
the S_C bit and start the counter with the same instruction.
Single Mode
On reaching the End Of Count condition, the Timer
stops, reloads the constant, and resets the Start/
Stop bit. Software can check the current status by
reading this bit. To restart the Timer, set the Start/
Stop bit.
Note: If the Timer constant has been modified during the stop period, it is reloaded at start time.
Continuous Mode
On reaching the End Of Count condition, the counter automatically reloads the constant and restarts.
It is stopped only if the Start/Stop bit is reset.
10.1.2.5 Input Section
If the Timer/Counter input is enabled (INEN bit) it
can count pulses input on the WDIN pin. Otherwise it counts the internal clock/4.
For instance, when INTCLK = 24MHz, the End Of
Count rate is:
2.79 seconds for Maximum Count
(Timer Const. = FFFFh, Prescaler Const. = FFh)
166 ns for Minimum Count
(Timer Const. = 0000h, Prescaler Const. = 00h)
The Input pin can be used in one of four modes:
– Event Counter Mode
– Gated External Input Mode
– Triggerable Input Mode
– Retriggerable Input Mode
The mode is configurable in the WDTCR.
10.1.2.6 Event Counter Mode
In this mode the Timer is driven by the external
clock applied to the input pin, thus operating as an
event counter. The event is defined as a high to
low transition of the input signal. Spacing between
trailing edges should be at least 8 INTCLK periods
(or 333ns with INTCLK = 24MHz).
Counting starts at the next input event after the
ST_SP bit is set and stops when the ST_SP bit is
reset.
157/426
9
TIMER/WATCHDOG (WDT)
TIMER/WATCHDOG (Cont’d)
10.1.2.7 Gated Input Mode
This mode can be used for pulse width measurement. The Timer is clocked by INTCLK/4, and is
started and stopped by means of the input pin and
the ST_SP bit. When the input pin is high, the Timer counts. When it is low, counting stops. The
maximum input pin frequency is equivalent to
INTCLK/8.
10.1.2.8 Triggerable Input Mode
The Timer (clocked internally by INTCLK/4) is
started by the following sequence:
– setting the Start-Stop bit, followed by
– a High to Low transition on the input pin.
To stop the Timer, reset the ST_SP bit.
10.1.2.9 Retriggerable Input Mode
In this mode, the Timer (clocked internally by
INTCLK/4) is started by setting the ST_SP bit. A
High to Low transition on the input pin causes
counting to restart from the initial value. When the
Timer is stopped (ST_SP bit reset), a High to Low
transition of the input pin has no effect.
10.1.2.10 Timer/Counter Output Modes
Output modes are selected by means of the OUTEN (Output Enable) and OUTMD (Output Mode)
bits of the WDTCR register.
No Output Mode
(OUTEN = “0”)
The output is disabled and the corresponding pin
is set high, in order to allow other alternate functions to use the I/O pin.
Square Wave Output Mode
(OUTEN = “1”, OUTMD = “0”)
The Timer outputs a signal with a frequency equal
to half the End of Count repetition rate on the WDOUT pin. With an INTCLK frequency of 20MHz,
this allows a square wave signal to be generated
whose period can range from 400ns to 6.7 seconds.
Pulse Width Modulated Output Mode
(OUTEN = “1”, OUTMD = “1”)
The state of the WROUT bit is transferred to the
output pin (WDOUT) at the End of Count, and is
held until the next End of Count condition. The
user can thus generate PWM signals by modifying
the status of the WROUT pin between End of
Count events, based on software counters decremented by the Timer Watchdog interrupt.
158/426
9
10.1.3 Watchdog Timer Operation
This mode is used to detect the occurrence of a
software fault, usually generated by external interference or by unforeseen logical conditions, which
causes the application program to abandon its
normal sequence of operation. The Watchdog,
when enabled, resets the MCU, unless the program executes the correct write sequence before
expiry of the programmed time period. The application program must be designed so as to correctly write to the WDTLR Watchdog register at regular intervals during all phases of normal operation.
10.1.3.1
Hardware
Watchdog/Software
Watchdog
The HW0SW1 pin (when available) selects Hardware Watchdog or Software Watchdog.
If HW0SW1 is held low:
– The Watchdog is enabled by hardware immediately after an external reset. (Note: Software reset or Watchdog reset have no effect on the
Watchdog enable status).
– The initial counter value (FFFFh) cannot be modified, however software can change the prescaler
value on the fly.
– The WDGEN bit has no effect. (Note: it is not
forced low).
If HW0SW1 is held high, or is not present:
– The Watchdog can be enabled by resetting the
WDGEN bit.
10.1.3.2 Starting the Watchdog
In Watchdog mode the Timer is clocked by
INTCLK/4.
If the Watchdog is software enabled, the time base
must be written in the timer registers before entering Watchdog mode by resetting the WDGEN bit.
Once reset, this bit cannot be changed by software.
If the Watchdog is hardware enabled, the time
base is fixed by the reset value of the registers.
Resetting WDGEN causes the counter to start, regardless of the value of the Start-Stop bit.
In Watchdog mode, only the Prescaler Constant
may be modified.
If the End of Count condition is reached a System
Reset is generated.
TIMER/WATCHDOG (WDT)
TIMER/WATCHDOG (Cont’d)
10.1.3.3 Preventing Watchdog System Reset
In order to prevent a system reset, the sequence
AAh, 55h must be written to WDTLR (Watchdog
Timer Low Register). Once 55h has been written,
the Timer reloads the constant and counting restarts from the preset value.
To reload the counter, the two writing operations
must be performed sequentially without inserting
other instructions that modify the value of the
WDTLR register between the writing operations.
The maximum allowed time between two reloads
of the counter depends on the Watchdog timeout
period.
10.1.3.4 Non-Stop Operation
In Watchdog Mode, a Halt instruction is regarded
as illegal. Execution of the Halt instruction stops
further execution by the CPU and interrupt acknowledgment, but does not stop INTCLK, CPUCLK or the Watchdog Timer, which will cause a
System Reset when the End of Count condition is
reached. Furthermore, ST_SP, S_C and the Input
Mode selection bits are ignored. Hence, regardless of their status, the counter always runs in
Continuous Mode, driven by the internal clock.
The Output mode should not be enabled, since in
this context it is meaningless.
Figure 88. Watchdog Timer Mode
COUNT
VALUE
TIMER START COUNTING
RESET
WRITE WDTRH,WDTRL
WDGEN=0
WRITE AAh,55h
INTO WDTRL
PRODUCE
COUNT RELOAD
SOFTWARE FAIL
(E.G. INFINITE LOOP)
OR PERIPHERAL FAIL
VA00220
159/426
9
TIMER/WATCHDOG (WDT)
TIMER/WATCHDOG (Cont’d)
10.1.4 WDT Interrupts
The Timer/Watchdog issues an interrupt request
at every End of Count, when this feature is enabled.
A pair of control bits, IA0S (EIVR.1, Interrupt A0 selection bit) and TLIS (EIVR.2, Top Level Input Selection bit) allow the selection of 2 interrupt sources
(Timer/Watchdog End of Count, or External Pin)
handled in two different ways, as a Top Level Non
Maskable Interrupt (Software Reset), or as a
source for channel A0 of the external interrupt logic.
A block diagram of the interrupt logic is given in
Figure 89.
Note: Software traps can be generated by setting
the appropriate interrupt pending bit.
Table 34 below, shows all the possible configurations of interrupt/reset sources which relate to the
Timer/Watchdog.
A reset caused by the watchdog will set bit 6,
WDGRES of R242 - Page 55 (Clock Flag Register). See section CLOCK CONTROL REGISTERS.
Figure 89. Interrupt Sources
TIMER WATCHDOG
RESET
WDGEN (WCR.6)
0
MUX
INT0
INTA0 REQUEST
1
IA0S (EIVR.1)
0
TOP LEVEL
INTERRUPT REQUEST
MUX
NMI
1
TLIS (EIVR.2)
VA00293
Table 34. Interrupt Configuration
Control Bits
Enabled Sources
Operating Mode
WDGEN
IA0S
TLIS
Reset
INTA0
Top Level
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
WDG/Ext Reset
WDG/Ext Reset
WDG/Ext Reset
WDG/Ext Reset
SW TRAP
SW TRAP
Ext Pin
Ext Pin
SW TRAP
Ext Pin
SW TRAP
Ext Pin
Watchdog
Watchdog
Watchdog
Watchdog
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Ext Reset
Ext Reset
Ext Reset
Ext Reset
Timer
Timer
Ext Pin
Ext Pin
Timer
Ext Pin
Timer
Ext Pin
Timer
Timer
Timer
Timer
Legend:
WDG = Watchdog function
SW TRAP = Software Trap
Note: If IA0S and TLIS = 0 (enabling the Watchdog EOC as interrupt source for both Top Level and INTA0
interrupts), only the INTA0 interrupt is taken into account.
160/426
9
TIMER/WATCHDOG (WDT)
TIMER/WATCHDOG (Cont’d)
10.1.5 Register Description
The Timer/Watchdog is associated with 4 registers
mapped into Group F, Page 0 of the Register File.
WDTHR: Timer/Watchdog High Register
WDTLR: Timer/Watchdog Low Register
WDTPR: Timer/Watchdog Prescaler Register
WDTCR: Timer/Watchdog Control Register
Three additional control bits are mapped in the following registers on Page 0:
Watchdog Mode Enable, (WCR.6)
Top Level Interrupt Selection, (EIVR.2)
Interrupt A0 Channel Selection, (EIVR.1)
Note: The registers containing these bits also contain other functions. Only the bits relevant to the
operation of the Timer/Watchdog are shown here.
Counter Register
This 16-bit register (WDTLR, WDTHR) is used to
load the 16-bit counter value. The registers can be
read or written “on the fly”.
TIMER/WATCHDOG HIGH REGISTER (WDTHR)
R248 - Read/Write
Register Page: 0
Reset value: 1111 1111 (FFh)
7
R15
0
R14
R13
R12
R11
R10
R9
R8
Bits 7:0 = R[15:8] Counter Most Significant Bits.
TIMER/WATCHDOG LOW REGISTER (WDTLR)
R249 - Read/Write
Register Page: 0
Reset value: 1111 1111b (FFh)
7
R7
TIMER/WATCHDOG PRESCALER REGISTER
(WDTPR)
R250 - Read/Write
Register Page: 0
Reset value: 1111 1111 (FFh)
7
0
PR7
PR6
PR5
PR4
PR3
PR2
PR1
PR0
Bits 7:0 = PR[7:0] Prescaler value.
A programmable value from 1 (00h) to 256 (FFh).
Warning: In order to prevent incorrect operation of
the Timer/Watchdog, the prescaler (WDTPR) and
counter (WDTRL, WDTRH) registers must be initialised before starting the Timer/Watchdog. If this
is not done, counting will start with the reset (un-initialised) values.
WATCHDOG TIMER CONTROL REGISTER
(WDTCR)
R251- Read/Write
Register Page: 0
Reset value: 0001 0010 (12h)
7
0
ST_SP
S_C
INMD1
INMD2
INEN
OUTMD
WROUT
OUTEN
Bit 7 = ST_SP: Start/Stop Bit.
This bit is set and cleared by software.
0: Stop counting
1: Start counting (see Warning above)
Bit 6 = S_C: Single/Continuous.
This bit is set and cleared by software.
0: Continuous Mode
1: Single Mode
0
R6
R5
R4
R3
R2
R1
R0
Bits 7:0 = R[7:0] Counter Least Significant Bits.
Bits 5:4 = INMD[1:2]: Input mode selection bits.
These bits select the input mode:
INMD1
INMD2
INPUT MODE
0
0
Event Counter
0
1
Gated Input (Reset value)
1
0
Triggerable Input
1
1
Retriggerable Input
161/426
9
TIMER/WATCHDOG (WDT)
TIMER/WATCHDOG (Cont’d)
Bit 3 = INEN: Input Enable.
This bit is set and cleared by software.
0: Disable input section
1: Enable input section
by the user program. At System Reset, the Watchdog mode is disabled.
Note: This bit is ignored if the Hardware Watchdog
option is enabled by pin HW0SW1 (if available).
Bit 2 = OUTMD: Output Mode.
This bit is set and cleared by software.
0: The output is toggled at every End of Count
1: The value of the WROUT bit is transferred to the
output pin on every End Of Count if OUTEN=1.
Bit 1 = WROUT: Write Out.
The status of this bit is transferred to the Output
pin when OUTMD is set; it is user definable to allow PWM output (on Reset WROUT is set).
WAIT CONTROL REGISTER (WCR)
R252 - Read/Write
Register Page: 0
Reset value: 0111 1111 (7Fh)
7
0
WDGEN
x
x
x
x
x
x
Bit 6 = WDGEN: Watchdog Enable (active low).
Resetting this bit via software enters the Watchdog mode. Once reset, it cannot be set any more
162/426
9
7
x
0
x
x
x
x
TLIS
IA0S
x
Bit 2 = TLIS: Top Level Input Selection.
This bit is set and cleared by software.
0: Watchdog End of Count is TL interrupt source
1: NMI is TL interrupt source
Bit 0 = OUTEN: Output Enable bit.
This bit is set and cleared by software.
0: Disable output
1: Enable output
x
EXTERNAL INTERRUPT VECTOR REGISTER
(EIVR)
R246 - Read/Write
Register Page: 0
Reset value: xxxx 0110 (x6h)
Bit 1 = IA0S: Interrupt Channel A0 Selection.
This bit is set and cleared by software.
0: Watchdog End of Count is INTA0 source
1: External Interrupt pin is INTA0 source
Warning: To avoid spurious interrupt requests,
the IA0S bit should be accessed only when the interrupt logic is disabled (i.e. after the DI instruction). It is also necessary to clear any possible interrupt pending requests on channel A0 before enabling this interrupt channel. A delay instruction
(e.g. a NOP instruction) must be inserted between
the reset of the interrupt pending bit and the IA0S
write instruction.
Other bits are described in the Interrupt section.
STANDARD TIMER (STIM)
10.2 STANDARD TIMER (STIM)
10.2.1 Introduction
The Standard Timer includes a programmable 16bit down counter and an associated 8-bit prescaler
with Single and Continuous counting modes capability. The Standard Timer uses an output
(STOUT) pin. This pin may be independent pin or
connected as Alternate Function of an I/O port bit.
STOUT can be used to generate a Square Wave
or Pulse Width Modulated signal.
The Standard Timer is composed of a 16-bit down
counter with an 8-bit prescaler. The input clock to
the prescaler can be driven either by an internal
clock equal to INTCLK divided by 4, or by
CLOCK2/1024 derived directly from the external
oscillator, thus providing a stable time reference
independent from the PLL programming (refer to
Figure 90).
The Standard Timer End Of Count condition is
able to generate an interrupt which is connected to
one of the external interrupt channels.
The End of Count condition is defined as the
Counter Underflow, whenever 00h is reached.
Figure 90. Standard Timer Block Diagram
n
INEN INMD1 INMD2
INPUT
&
CLOCK CONTROL LOGIC
INTCLK/4
STP
8-BIT PRESCALER
MUX
STANDARD TIMER
CLOCK
STH,STL
16-BIT
DOWNCOUNTER
END OF
COUNT
CLOCK2/ 1024
OUTMD1 OUTMD2
STOUT
OUTPUT CONTROL LOGIC
EXTERNAL
INTERRUPT
INTERRUPT
INTS
CONTROL LOGIC
INTERRUPT REQUEST
163/426
9
STANDARD TIMER (STIM)
STANDARD TIMER (Cont’d)
10.2.2 Functional Description
10.2.2.1 Timer/Counter control
Start-stop Count. The ST-SP bit (STC.7) is used
in order to start and stop counting. An instruction
which sets this bit will cause the Standard Timer to
start counting at the beginning of the next instruction. Resetting this bit will stop the counter.
If the counter is stopped and restarted, counting
will resume from the value held at the stop condition, unless a new constant has been entered in
the Standard Timer registers during the stop period. In this case, the new constant will be loaded as
soon as counting is restarted.
A new constant can be written in STH, STL, STP
registers while the counter is running. The new
value of the STH and STL registers will be loaded
at the next End of Count condition, while the new
value of the STP register will be loaded immediately.
WARNING: In order to prevent incorrect counting of
the Standard Timer, the prescaler (STP) and counter
(STL, STH) registers must be initialised before the
starting of the timer. If this is not done, counting will
start with the reset values (STH=FFh, STL=FFh,
STP=FFh).
Single/Continuous Mode.
The S-C bit (STC.6) selects between the Single or
Continuous mode.
SINGLE MODE: at the End of Count, the Standard
Timer stops, reloads the constant and resets the
Start/Stop bit (the user programmer can inspect
the timer current status by reading this bit). Setting
the Start/Stop bit will restart the counter.
CONTINUOUS MODE: At the End of the Count, the
counter automatically reloads the constant and restarts. It is only stopped by resetting the Start/Stop bit.
The S-C bit can be written either with the timer
stopped or running. It is possible to toggle the S-C
bit and start the Standard Timer with the same instruction.
10.2.2.2 Time Base Generator
The INEN bit in the STC register selects the clock
source (refer to RCCU section).
When the INEN bit is reset, INTCLK/4 is selected
as clock input.
When the INEN bit is set, CLOCK2/1024 is selected as clock input. In this case, INMD1 and INMD2
bits in the STC register must always be kept at 0 to
select the event counter mode. This mode allows
the Standard Timer to generate a stable time base
independent from PLL programming.
164/426
9
10.2.2.3 Standard Timer Output Modes
OUTPUT modes are selected using 2 bits of the
STC register: OUTMD1 and OUTMD2.
No Output Mode (OUTMD1 = “0”, OUTMD2 = “0”)
The output is disabled and the corresponding pin
is set high, in order to allow other alternate functions to use the I/O pin.
Square Wave Output Mode (OUTMD1 = “0”,
OUTMD2 = “1”)
The Standard Timer toggles the state of the
STOUT pin on every End Of Count condition. With
INTCLK = 24MHz, this allows generation of a
square wave with a period ranging from 333ns
(STP = STH = STL = 00h) to 5.59 seconds (STP =
STH = STL = FFh).
PWM Output Mode (OUTMD1 = “1”)
The value of the OUTMD2 bit is transferred to the
STOUT output pin at the End Of Count. This allows the user to generate PWM signals, by modifying the status of OUTMD2 between End of Count
events, based on software counters decremented
on the Standard Timer interrupt.
10.2.3 Interrupt Selection
The Standard Timer may generate an interrupt request at every End of Count.
Bit 2 of the STC register (INTS) selects the interrupt source between the Standard Timer interrupt
and the external interrupt pin. Thus the Standard
Timer Interrupt uses the interrupt channel and
takes the priority and vector of the external interrupt channel.
If INTS is set to “1”, the Standard Timer interrupt is
disabled; otherwise, an interrupt request is generated at every End of Count.
Note: When enabling or disabling the Standard
Timer Interrupt (writing INTS in the STC register)
an edge may be generated on the interrupt channel, causing an unwanted interrupt.
To avoid this spurious interrupt request, the INTS
bit should be accessed only when the interrupt logic is disabled (i.e. after the DI instruction). It is also
necessary to clear any possible interrupt pending
requests on the corresponding external interrupt
channel before enabling it. A delay instruction (i.e.
a NOP instruction) must be inserted between the
reset of the interrupt pending bit and the INTS
write instruction.
STANDARD TIMER (STIM)
STANDARD TIMER (Cont’d)
10.2.4 Register Description
COUNTER HIGH BYTE REGISTER (STH)
R240 - Read/Write
Register Page: 11
Reset value: 1111 1111 (FFh)
7
0
STANDARD TIMER CONTROL
(STC)
R243 - Read/Write
Register Page: 11
Reset value: 0001 0100 (14h)
REGISTER
7
ST.15
ST.14 ST.13 ST.12 ST.11 ST.10
ST.9
0
ST.8
ST-SP S-C INMD1 INMD2 INEN INTS OUTMD1 OUTMD2
Bits 7:0 = ST.[15:8]: Counter High-Byte.
Bit 7 = ST-SP: Start-Stop Bit.
This bit is set and cleared by software.
0: Stop counting
1: Start counting
COUNTER LOW BYTE REGISTER (STL)
R241 - Read/Write
Register Page: 11
Reset value: 1111 1111 (FFh)
7
ST.7
0
ST.6
ST.5
ST.4
ST.3
ST.2
ST.1
ST.0
Bit 6 = S-C: Single-Continuous Mode Select.
This bit is set and cleared by software.
0: Continuous Mode
1: Single Mode
Bits 7:0 = ST.[7:0]: Counter Low Byte.
Writing to the STH and STL registers allows the
user to enter the standard timer constant from 1
(0000h) to 65536 (FFFFh). Reading these registers provides the counter's current value. Thus it is
possible to read the counter on-the-fly.
Bits 5:4 = INMD[1:2]
Bit 3 = INEN
These 3 bits select the clock source.
STANDARD TIMER PRESCALER REGISTER
(STP)
R242 - Read/Write
Register Page: 11
Reset value: 1111 1111 (FFh)
Bit 2 = INTS: Interrupt Selection.
0: Standard Timer interrupt enabled
1: Standard Timer interrupt is disabled and the external interrupt pin is enabled.
7
0
STP.7 STP.6 STP.5 STP.4 STP.3 STP.2 STP.1 STP.0
Bits 7:0 = STP.[7:0]: Prescaler.
The Prescaler value for the Standard Timer is programmed into this register. When reading the STP
register, the returned value corresponds to the
programmed data instead of the current data.
00h: No prescaler
01h: Divide by 2
FFh: Divide by 256
INMD1 INMD2 INEN
0
0
1
X
X
0
Clock input
CLOCK2/1024
INTCLK/4
Bits 1:0 = OUTMD[1:2]: Output Mode Selection.
These bits select the output functions as described
in Section 10.2.2.3.
OUTMD1
0
0
1
OUTMD2
0
1
x
Mode
No output mode
Square wave output mode
PWM output mode
165/426
9
EXTENDED FUNCTION TIMER (EFT)
10.3 EXTENDED FUNCTION TIMER (EFT)
10.3.1 Introduction
The timer consists of a 16-bit free-running counter
driven by a programmable prescaler.
It may be used for a variety of purposes, including
pulse length measurement of up to two input signals (input capture) or generation of up to two output waveforms (output compare and PWM).
Pulse lengths and waveform periods can be modulated from a few microseconds to several milliseconds using the timer prescaler and the INTCLK
prescaler.
10.3.2 Main Features
■ Programmable prescaler: INTCLK divided by 2,
4 or 8.
■ Overflow status flag and maskable interrupts
■ External clock input (must be at least 4 times
slower than the INTCLK clock speed) with the
choice of active edge
■ Output compare functions with
– 2 dedicated 16-bit registers
– 2 dedicated programmable signals
– 2 dedicated status flags
– Maskable interrupt generation
■ Input capture functions with
– 2 dedicated 16-bit registers
– 2 dedicated active edge selection signals
– 2 dedicated status flags
– Maskable interrupt generation
■ Pulse width modulation mode (PWM)
■ One pulse mode
■ 5 alternate functions on I/O ports
■ Global Timer interrupt (EFTI).
The Block Diagram is shown in Figure 91.
166/426
9
Table 35. EFT Pin Naming conventions
Function
Input Capture 1 - ICAP1
Input Capture 2 - ICAP2
Output Compare 1 - OCMP1
Output Compare 2 - OCMP2
EFT0
ICAPA0
ICAPB0
OCMPA0
OCMPB0
EFT1
ICAPA1
ICAPB1
OCMPA1
OCMPB1
10.3.3 Functional Description
10.3.3.1 Counter
The principal block of the Programmable Timer is
a 16-bit free running counter and its associated
16-bit registers:
Counter Registers
– Counter High Register (CHR) is the most significant byte (MSB).
– Counter Low Register (CLR) is the least significant byte (LSB).
Alternate Counter Registers
– Alternate Counter High Register (ACHR) is the
most significant byte (MSB).
– Alternate Counter Low Register (ACLR) is the
least significant byte (LSB).
These two read-only 16-bit registers contain the
same value but with the difference that reading the
ACLR register does not clear the TOF bit (overflow
flag), (see note page 168).
Writing in the CLR register or ACLR register resets
the free running counter to the FFFCh value.
The timer clock depends on the clock control bits
of the CR2 register, as illustrated in Table 36. The
value in the counter register repeats every
131.072, 262.144 or 524.288 INTCLK cycles depending on the CC[1:0] bits.
EXTENDED FUNCTION TIMER (EFT)
EXTENDED FUNCTION TIMER (Cont’d)
Figure 91. Timer Block Diagram
ST9 INTERNAL BUS
INTCLK
MCU-PERIPHERAL INTERFACE
8 low
low
8
8
8
low
8
high
8
low
8
high
8
high
EXEDG
8
low
8-bit
buffer
high
8 high
16
16 BIT
FREE RUNNING
COUNTER
1/2
1/4
1/8
OUTPUT
COMPARE
REGISTER
2
OUTPUT
COMPARE
REGISTER
1
INPUT
CAPTURE
REGISTER
INPUT
CAPTURE
REGISTER
1
2
COUNTER
ALTERNATE
REGISTER
CC1 CC0
16
16
16
TIMER INTERNAL BUS
16
OVERFLOW
DETECT
CIRCUIT
EXTCLK
16
OUTPUT COMPARE
CIRCUIT
6
ICF1 OCF1 TOF ICF2 OCF2
0
0
EDGE DETECT
CIRCUIT1
ICAP1
EDGE DETECT
CIRCUIT2
ICAP2
LATCH1
OCMP1
LATCH2
OCMP2
0
SR
ICIE OCIE TOIE FOLV2 FOLV1 OLVL2 IEDG1 OLVL1
OC1E OC2E OPM PWM
CR1
CC0 IEDG2 EXEDG
CC1
CR2
OCF2
OCF1
1
0
IC1IE OC1IE IC2IE OC2IE
0
-
-
EFTIS
CR3
ICF1
1
-
ICF2
INTx External interrupt pin
0
1
EFTI Interrupt
Request
167/426
9
EXTENDED FUNCTION TIMER (EFT)
EXTENDED FUNCTION TIMER (Cont’d)
16-bit read sequence: (from either the Counter
Register or the Alternate Counter Register).
Beginning of the sequence
At t0
Read MSB
LSB is buffered
Other
instructions
Returns the buffered
At t0 +Dt Read LSB
LSB value at t0
Sequence completed
The user must read the MSB first, then the LSB
value is buffered automatically.
This buffered value remains unchanged until the
16-bit read sequence is completed, even if the
user reads the MSB several times.
After a complete reading sequence, if only the
CLR register or ACLR register are read, they return the LSB of the count value at the time of the
read.
An overflow occurs when the counter rolls over
from FFFFh to 0000h then:
– The TOF bit of the SR register is set.
– A timer interrupt is generated if:
– TOIE bit of the CR1 register is set
– EFTIS bit of the CR3 register is set.
If one of these conditions is false, the interrupt remains pending to be issued as soon as they are
both true.
168/426
9
Clearing the overflow interrupt request is done by:
1. Reading the SR register while the TOF bit is
set.
2. An access (read or write) to the CLR register.
Notes: The TOF bit is not cleared by accesses to
ACLR register. This feature allows simultaneous
use of the overflow function and reads of the free
running counter at random times (for example, to
measure elapsed time) without the risk of clearing
the TOF bit erroneously.
The timer is not affected by WAIT mode.
In HALT mode, the counter stops counting until the
mode is exited. Counting then resumes from the
reset count (MCU awakened by a Reset).
10.3.3.2 External Clock
The external clock (where available) is selected if
CC0=1 and CC1=1 in CR2 register.
The status of the EXEDG bit determines the type
of level transition on the external clock pin EXTCLK that will trigger the free running counter.
The counter is synchronised with the falling edge
of INTCLK.
At least four falling edges of the INTCLK must occur between two consecutive active edges of the
external clock; thus the external clock frequency
must be less than a quarter of the INTCLK frequency.
EXTENDED FUNCTION TIMER (EFT)
EXTENDED FUNCTION TIMER (Cont’d)
Figure 92. Counter Timing Diagram, INTCLK divided by 2
INTCLK
INTERNAL RESET
TIMER CLOCK
FFFD FFFE FFFF 0000
COUNTER REGISTER
0001
0002
0003
OVERFLOW FLAG TOF
Figure 93. Counter Timing Diagram, INTCLK divided by 4
INTCLK
INTERNAL RESET
TIMER CLOCK
COUNTER REGISTER
FFFC
FFFD
0000
0001
OVERFLOW FLAG TOF
Figure 94. Counter Timing Diagram, INTCLK divided by 8
INTCLK
INTERNAL RESET
TIMER CLOCK
COUNTER REGISTER
FFFC
FFFD
0000
OVERFLOW FLAG TOF
169/426
9
EXTENDED FUNCTION TIMER (EFT)
EXTENDED FUNCTION TIMER (Cont’d)
10.3.3.3 Input Capture
In this section, the index, i, may be 1 or 2.
The two input capture 16-bit registers (IC1R and
IC2R) are used to latch the value of the free running counter after a transition detected by the
ICAPi pin (see figure 5).
ICiR
MS Byte
LS Byte
ICiHR
ICiLR
ICi Rregister is a read-only register.
The active transition is software programmable
through the IEDGi bit of the Control Register (CRi).
Timing resolution is one count of the free running
counter: (INTCLK/CC[1:0]).
Procedure
To use the input capture function select the following in the CR2 register:
– Select the timer clock (CC[1:0] (see Table 36).
– Select the edge of the active transition on the
ICAP2 pin with the IEDG2 bit, if ICAP2 is active.
And select the following in the CR1/CR3 register:
– To enable both ICAP1 & ICAP2 interrupts, set
the ICIE bit in the CR1 register (in this case, the
IC1IE & IC2IE enable bits are not significant).
To enable only one ICAP interrupt, reset the ICIE
bit and set the IC1IE (or IC2IE) bit.
Note: If ICIE is reset and both IC1IE & IC2IE are
set, both interrupts are enabled.
In all cases, set the EFTIS bit to enable timer interrupts globally
170/426
9
– Select the edge of the active transition on the
ICAP1 pin with the IEDG1 bit if ICAP1 is active.
When an input capture occurs:
– ICFi bit is set.
– The ICiR register contains the value of the free
running counter on the active transition on the
ICAPi pin (see Figure 96).
– A timer interrupt is generated under the following
two conditions :
1. If the ICIE bit (for both ICAP1 & ICAP2) and
the EFTIS bit are set.
Note: If the ICIE bit is set, the status of the
IC1IE/IC2IE bits in the CR3 register is not significant.
2. If the ICIE bit is reset and the IC1IE and /or
IC2IE bits are set and the EFTIS bit is set.
Otherwise, the interrupt remains pending until
the related enable bits are set.
Clearing the Input Capture interrupt request is
done by:
1. An access (read or write) to the SR register
while the ICFi bit is set.
2. An access (read or write) to the ICiLR register.
Note: After reading the ICiHR register, transfer of
input capture data is inhibited until the ICiLR register is also read.
The ICiR register always contains the free running
counter value which corresponds to the most recent input capture.
EXTENDED FUNCTION TIMER (EFT)
EXTENDED FUNCTION TIMER (Cont’d)
Figure 95. Input Capture Block Diagram
ICAP1
ICAP2
(Control Register 1) CR1
EDGE DETECT
CIRCUIT2
EDGE DETECT
CIRCUIT1
ICIE
IEDG1
(Status Register) SR
ICF1
IC1R
IC2R
ICF2
0
0
0
(Control Register 2) CR2
16-BIT
16-BIT FREE RUNNING
CC1
CC0
IEDG2
COUNTER
Figure 96. Input Capture Timing Diagram
TIMER CLOCK
COUNTER REGISTER
FF01
FF02
FF03
ICAPi PIN
ICAPi FLAG
ICAPi REGISTER
FF03
Note: Active edge is rising edge.
171/426
9
EXTENDED FUNCTION TIMER (EFT)
EXTENDED FUNCTION TIMER (Cont’d)
10.3.3.4 Output Compare
In this section, the index, i, may be 1 or 2.
This function can be used to control an output
waveform or indicating when a period of time has
elapsed.
When a match is found between the Output Compare register and the free running counter, the output compare function:
– Assigns pins with a programmable value if the
OCiE bit is set
– Sets a flag in the status register
– Generates an interrupt if enabled
Two 16-bit registers Output Compare Register 1
(OC1R) and Output Compare Register 2 (OC2R)
contain the value to be compared to the free running counter each timer clock cycle.
OCiR
MS Byte
LS Byte
OCiHR
OCiLR
These registers are readable and writable and are
not affected by the timer hardware. A reset event
changes the OCiR value to 8000h.
Timing resolution is one count of the free running
counter: (INTCLK/CC[1:0]).
Procedure
To use the output compare function, select the following in the CR2 register:
– Set the OCiE bit if an output is needed, the OCMPi pin is then dedicated to the output compare
function.
– Select the timer clock (CC[1:0] see Table 36).
Select the following in the CR1/CR3 register:
– Select the OLVLi bit to be applied to the OCMP
pins after the match occurs.
– To enable both OCMP1 & OCMP2 interrupts, set
the OCIE bit in the CR1 register (in this case, the
OC1IE & OC2IE enable bits are not significant).
To enable only one OCMP interrupt, reset the
OCIE bit and set the OC1IE (or OC2IE) bit.
Note: If OCIE is reset and both OC1IE & OC2IE
are set, both interrupts are enabled.
In all cases, set the EFTIS bit to enable timer interrupts globally.
When a match is found:
– The OCFi bit is set.
– The OCMPi pin takes the OLVLi bit value (the
OCMPi pin latch is forced low during reset and
stays low until a valid compare changes it to the
OLVLi level).
172/426
9
– A timer interrupt is generated under the following
two conditions :
1. If the OCIE bit (for both OCMP1 & OCMP2)
and the EFTIS bit are set.
Note: If the OCIE bit is set, the status of the
OC1IE/OC2IE bits in the CR3 register is not
significant.
2. If the OCIE bit is reset and the OC1IE and /or
OC2IE bits are set and the EFTIS bit is set.
Otherwise, the interrupt remains pending until
the related enable bits are set.
Clearing the output compare interrupt request is
done by:
– An access (read or write) to the SR register while
the OCFi bit is set.
– An access (read or write) to the OCiLR register.
Note: After a write access to the OCiHR register,
the output compare function is inhibited until the
OCiLR register is also written.
If the OCiE bit is not set, the OCMPi pin is a general I/O port and the OLVLi bit will not appear
when match is found but an interrupt could be generated if the OCIE bit is set.
The value in the 16-bit OCiR register and the
OLVLi bit should be changed after each successful comparison in order to control an output waveform or establish a new elapsed timeout.
The OCiR register value required for a specific timing application can be calculated using the following formula:
∆ OCiR =
∆t * INTCLK
(CC1.CC0)
Where:
∆t
= Desired output compare period (in
seconds)
INTCLK = Internal clock frequency
CC[1:0] = Timer clock prescaler
The following procedure is recommended to prevent the OCFi bit from being set between the time
it is read and the write to the OCiR register:
– Write to the OCiHR register (further compares
are inhibited).
– Read the SR register (first step of the clearance
of the OCFi bit, which may be already set).
– Write to the OCiLR register (enables the output
compare function and clears the OCFi bit).
EXTENDED FUNCTION TIMER (EFT)
EXTENDED FUNCTION TIMER (Cont’d)
Figure 97. Output Compare Block Diagram
16 BIT FREE RUNNING
COUNTER
OC1E OC2E
CC1
CC0
(Control Register 2) CR2
16-bit
(Control Register 1) CR1
OUTPUT COMPARE
CIRCUIT
16-bit
OC1R
OCIE
OLVL2
OLVL1
Latch
1
OCMP1
Latch
2
OCMP2
16-bit
OC2R
OCF1
OCF2
0
0
0
(Status Register) SR
Figure 98. Output Compare Timing Diagram, Internal Clock Divided by 2
INTCLK
TIMER CLOCK
COUNTER
OUTPUT COMPARE REGISTER
FFFC FFFD FFFD FFFE FFFF 0000
CPU writes FFFF
FFFF
COMPARE REGISTER LATCH
OCFi AND OCMPi PIN (OLVLi=1)
173/426
9
EXTENDED FUNCTION TIMER (EFT)
EXTENDED FUNCTION TIMER (Cont’d)
10.3.3.5 Forced Compare Mode
In this section i may represent 1 or 2.
The following bits of the CR1 register are used:
FOLV2 FOLV1 OLVL2
OLVL1
When the FOLV1 bit is set, the OLVL1 bit is copied
to the OCMP1 pin if PWM and OPM are both
cleared.
When the FOLV2 bit is set, the OLVL2 bit is copied
to the OCMP2 pin.
The OLVLi bit has to be toggled in order to toggle
the OCMPi pin when it is enabled (OCiE bit=1).
Notes:
– The OCFi bit is not set when FOLVi is set, and
thus no interrupt request is generated.
– The OCFi bit can be set if OCiR = Counter and
an interrupt can be generated if enabled. This
can be avoided by writing in the OCiHR register.
The output compare function is inhibited till
OCiLR is also written.
– The Input Capture function works in Forced compare mode. To disable it, read the ICiHR register.
Input capture will be inhibited till ICiLR is read.
10.3.3.6 One Pulse Mode
One Pulse mode enables the generation of a
pulse when an external event occurs. This mode is
selected via the OPM bit in the CR2 register.
The one pulse mode uses the Input Capture1
function and the Output Compare1 function.
Procedure
To use one pulse mode, select the following in the
the CR1 register:
– Using the OLVL1 bit, select the level to be applied to the OCMP1 pin after the pulse.
– Using the OLVL2 bit, select the level to be applied to the OCMP1 pin during the pulse.
– Select the edge of the active transition on the
ICAP1 pin with the IEDG1 bit.
And select the following in the CR2 register:
– Set the OC1E bit, the OCMP1 pin is then dedicated to the Output Compare 1 function.
– Set the OPM bit.
– Select the timer clock CC[1:0] (see Table 36).
174/426
9
Load the OC1R register with the value corresponding to the length of the pulse (see the formula in Section 10.3.3.7).
One pulse mode cycle
When
event occurs
on ICAP1
Counter is
initialized
to FFFCh
OCMP1 = OLVL2
When
Counter
= OC1R
OCMP1 = OLVL1
Then, on a valid event on the ICAP1 pin, the counter is initialized to FFFCh and OLVL2 bit is loaded
on the OCMP1 pin. When the value of the counter
is equal to the value of the contents of the OC1R
register, the OLVL1 bit is output on the OCMP1
pin, (See Figure 99).
Notes:
– The OCF1 bit cannot be set by hardware in one
pulse mode but the OCF2 bit can generate an
Output Compare interrupt.
– The ICF1 bit is set when an active edge occurs
and can generate an interrupt if the ICIE bit is set
or ICIE is reset and IC1IE is set. The IC1R register will have the value FFFCh.
– When the Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) and
One Pulse Mode (OPM) bits are both set, the
PWM mode is the only active one.
– When One Pulse Mode (OPM) and Forced Compare 1 mode (FOLV1) bits are set then OPM is
the active mode
– Forced Compare 2 mode works in OPM
– Input Capture 2 function works in OPM
– When OC1R = FFFCh in OPM, then a pulse of
width FFFCh is generated
– If IC1HR register is read in OPM before an active
edge of ICAP1, then OPM is inhibited till IC1LR
is also read.
EXTENDED FUNCTION TIMER (EFT)
EXTENDED FUNCTION TIMER (Cont’d)
– If an event occurs on ICAP1 again before the
Counter reaches the OC1R value, then the
Counter will be reset again and the pulse generated might be longer than expected as in Figure
99.
– If a write operation is performed on CLR or ACLR
register before the Counter reaches the OC1R
value, then the Counter will be reset again and
the pulse generated might be longer than expected.
Figure 99. One Pulse Mode Timing
COUNTER
....
FFFC FFFD FFFE
2ED0 2ED1 2ED2
FFFC FFFD
2ED3
ICAP1
OLVL2
OCMP1
OLVL1
OLVL2
compare1
Note: IEDG1=1, OC1R=2ED0h, OLVL1=0, OLVL2=1
COUNTER
....
FFFC FFFD FFFE
0010
2ED0 2ED1 2ED2
FFFC
FFFC FFFD
2ED3
ICAP1
OCMP1
OLVL2
OLVL2
OLVL1
compare1
Note: IEDG1=1, OC1R=2ED0h, OLVL1=0, OLVL2=1
175/426
9
EXTENDED FUNCTION TIMER (EFT)
EXTENDED FUNCTION TIMER (Cont’d)
10.3.3.7 Pulse Width Modulation Mode
Pulse Width Modulation mode enables the generation of a signal with a frequency and pulse length
determined by the value of the OC1R and OC2R
registers.
The pulse width modulation mode uses the complete Output Compare 1 function plus the OC2R
register.
Procedure
To use pulse width modulation mode select the following in the CR1 register:
– Using the OLVL1 bit, select the level to be applied to the OCMP1 pin after a successful comparison with OC1R register.
– Using the OLVL2 bit, select the level to be applied to the OCMP1 pin after a successful comparison with OC2R register.
And select the following in the CR2 register:
– Set OC1E bit: the OCMP1 pin is then dedicated
to the output compare 1 function.
– Set the PWM bit.
– Select the timer clock CC[1:0] bits (see Table
36).
Load the OC2R register with the value corresponding to the period of the signal.
Load the OC1R register with the value corresponding to the length of the pulse if (OLVL1=0
and OLVL2=1).
If OLVL1=1 and OLVL2=0 the length of the pulse
is the difference between the OC2R and OC1R
registers.
The OCiR register value required for a specific timing application can be calculated using the following formula:
OCiR Value =
t * INTCLK - 5
CC[1:0]
Where:
– t = Desired output compare period (seconds)
– INTCLK = Internal clock frequency
– CC1-CC0 = Timer clock prescaler
The Output Compare 2 event causes the counter
to be initialized to FFFCh (See Figure 100).
176/426
9
Pulse Width Modulation cycle
When
Counter
= OC1R
When
Counter
= OC2R
OCMP1 = OLVL1
OCMP1 = OLVL2
Counter is reset
to FFFCh
Notes:
– After a write instruction to the OCiHR register,
the output compare function is inhibited until the
OCiLR register is also written.
– The OCF1 bit cannot be set by hardware in PWM
mode, but the OCF2 bit is set every time the
counter matches the OC2R register.
– The Input Capture function is available in PWM
mode.
– When Counter = OC2R, then the OCF2 bit will be
set. This can generate an interrupt if OCIE is set
or OCIE is reset and OC2IE is set. This interrupt
is useful in applications where the pulse-width or
period needs to be changed interactively.
– When the Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) and
One Pulse Mode (OPM) bits are both set, the
PWM mode is the only active mode.
– The value loaded in register OC2R must always
be greater than the value in register OC1R in order to produce meaningful waveforms. Note that
0000h is considerred to be greater than FFFCh
or FFFDh or FFFEh or FFFFh.
– When OC1R >OC2R, no waveform will be generated.
– When OC2R = OC1R, a square waveform will
be generated as in Figure 100
– When OC2R is loaded with FFFC (the counter
reset value) then no waveform will be generated
& the counter will remain stuck at FFFC.
– When OC1R is loaded with FFFC (the counter
reset value) then the waveform will be generated
as in Figure 100
– When FOLV1 bit is set and PWM bit is set, then
PWM mode is the active one. But if FOLV2 bit is
set then the OLVL2 bit will appear on OCMP2
(when OC2E bit = 1).
EXTENDED FUNCTION TIMER (EFT)
EXTENDED FUNCTION TIMER (Cont’d)
– When a write is performed on the CLR or ACLR
register in PWM mode, then the Counter will be
reset and the pulse-width/period of the waveform
generated may not be be as desired
Figure 100. Pulse Width Modulation Mode Timing
COUNTER
34E2
FFFC FFFD FFFE
2ED0 2ED1 2ED2
OLVL2
OCMP1
compare2
34E2
OLVL1
compare1
FFFC
OLVL2
compare2
OC1R = 2ED0h, OC2R = 34E2, OLVL1 = 0, OLVL2 = 1
COUNTER
0010
FFFC
000F 0010
OLVL1
OCMP1
0010
FFFC
OLVL2
FFFC
OLVL1
OC1R = OC2R = 0010h, OLVL1 = 1, OLVL2 = 0
COUNTER
OCMP1
0003 0004 FFFC
OLVL1
0003
0004
FFFC
OLVL1
OLVL2
OLVL2
OC1R = FFFCh, OC2R = 0004h, OLVL1 = 1, OLVL2 = 0
177/426
9
EXTENDED FUNCTION TIMER (EFT)
EXTENDED FUNCTION TIMER (Cont’d)
10.3.4 Interrupt Management
The interrupts of the Extended Function Timer are
mapped on one of the eight External Interrupt
Channels of the microcontroller (refer to the “Interrupts” chapter).
The three interrupt sources are mapped on the
same interrupt channel. To use them, the EFTIS
bit must be set)
Each External Interrupt Channel has:
– A trigger control bit in the EITR register (R242 Page 0),
– A pending bit in the EIPR register (R243 - Page
0),
– A mask bit in the EIMR register (R244 - Page 0).
Program the interrupt priority level using the EIPLR register (R245 - Page 0). For a description of
these registers refer to the “Interrupts” and “DMA”
chapters.
Using the external interrupt channel for all EFT
interrupts
To use the interrupt features, perform the following
sequence:
– Set the priority level of the interrupt channel used
(EIPLR register)
– Select the interrupt trigger edge as rising edge
(set the corresponding bit in the EITR register)
– Set the EFTIS bit of the CR3 register to select
the peripheral interrupt sources
178/426
9
– Set the OCIE (or OC1IE/OC2IE bits) and/or ICIE
(or IC1IE/IC2IE bits and/or TOIE bit(s) in the CR1
register to enable interrupts
– In the EIPR register, reset the pending bit of the
interrupt channel used by the peripheral interrupts to avoid any spurious interrupt requests being performed when the mask bit is set
– Set the mask bits of the interrupt channels used
to enable the MCU to acknowledge the interrupt
requests of the peripheral.
– Clear all EFT interrupt flags by reading the Status, Input Capture Low, Output Compare Low
and Counter Low Registers.
Caution:
1. It is mandatory to clear all EFT interrupt flags
simultaneously at least once before exiting an
EFT timer interrupt routine (the SR register
must = 00h at some point during the interrupt
routine), otherwise no interrupts can be issued
on that channel anymore.
Refer to the following assembly code for an
interrupt sequence example.
2. Since a loop statement is needed inside the IT
routine, the user must avoid situations where
an interrupt event period is narrower than the
duration of the interrupt treatment. Otherwise
nested interrupt mode must be used to serve
higher priority requests.
EXTENDED FUNCTION TIMER (EFT)
EXTENDED FUNCTION TIMER (Cont’d)
Note: A single access (read/write) to the SR regisregisters must be accessed if the corresponding
ter at the beginning of the interrupt routine is the
flag is set. It is not necessary to access the SR
first step needed to clear all the EFT interrupt
register between these instructions, but it can
flags. In a second step, the lower bytes of the data
done.
; INTERRUPT ROUTINE EXAMPLE
push R234
; Save current page
spp #28
; Set EFT page
L6:
cp R254,#0
; while E0_SR is not cleared
jxz L7
tm R254,#128
; Check Input Capture 1 flag
jxz L2
; else go to next test
ld r1,R241
; Dummy read to clear IC1LR
; Insert your code here
L2:
tm R254,#16
; Check Input Capture 2 flag
jxz L3
; else go to next test
ld r1,R243
; Dummy read to clear IC2LR
; Insert your code here
L3:
tm R254,#64
; Check Input Compare 1 flag
jxz L4
; else go to next test
ld r1,R249
; Dummy read to clear OC1LR
; Insert your code here
L4:
tm R254,#8
; Check Input Compare 2 flag
jxz L5
; else go to next test
ld r1,R251
; Dummy read to clear OC1LR
; Insert your code here
L5:
tm R254,#32
; Check Input Overflow flag
jxz L6
; else go to next test
ld r1,R245
; Dummy read to clear Overflow flag
; Insert your code here
jx L6
L7:
pop R234
; Restore current page
iret
179/426
9
EXTENDED FUNCTION TIMER (EFT)
EXTENDED FUNCTION TIMER (Cont’d)
10.3.5 Register Description
Each Timer is associated with three control and
one status registers, and with six pairs of data registers (16-bit values) relating to the two input captures, the two output compares, the counter and
the alternate counter.
Notes:
1. In the register description on the following pages, register and page numbers are given using the
example of Timer 0. On devices with more than
one timer, refer to the device register map for the
adresses and page numbers.
2. To work correctly with register pairs, it is strongly recommended to use single byte instructions.
Do not use word instructions to access any of the
16-bit registers.
INPUT CAPTURE 1 HIGH REGISTER (IC1HR)
R240 - Read Only
Register Page: 28
Reset Value: Undefined
This is an 8-bit read only register that contains the
high part of the counter value (transferred by the
input capture 1 event).
7
0
MSB
LSB
180/426
9
INPUT CAPTURE 1 LOW REGISTER (IC1LR)
R241 - Read Only
Register Page: 28
Reset Value: Undefined
This is an 8-bit read only register that contains the
low part of the counter value (transferred by the input capture 1 event).
7
0
MSB
LSB
INPUT CAPTURE 2 HIGH REGISTER (IC2HR)
R242 - Read Only
Register Page: 28
Reset Value: Undefined
This is an 8-bit read only register that contains the
high part of the counter value (transferred by the
Input Capture 2 event).
7
0
MSB
LSB
INPUT CAPTURE 2 LOW REGISTER (IC2LR)
R243 - Read Only
Register Page: 28
Reset Value: Undefined
This is an 8-bit read only register that contains the
low part of the counter value (transferred by the Input Capture 2 event).
7
0
MSB
LSB
EXTENDED FUNCTION TIMER (EFT)
EXTENDED FUNCTION TIMER (Cont’d)
COUNTER HIGH REGISTER (CHR)
R244 - Read Only
Register Page: 28
Reset Value: 1111 1111 (FFh)
This is an 8-bit register that contains the high part
of the counter value.
7
0
MSB
LSB
COUNTER LOW REGISTER (CLR)
R245 - Read/Write
Register Page: 28
Reset Value: 1111 1100 (FCh)
This is an 8-bit register that contains the low part of
the counter value. A write to this register resets the
counter. An access to this register after accessing
the SR register clears the TOF bit.
7
0
MSB
LSB
ALTERNATE COUNTER HIGH REGISTER
(ACHR)
R246 - Read Only
Register Page: 28
Reset Value: 1111 1111 (FFh)
This is an 8-bit register that contains the high part
of the counter value.
7
0
MSB
LSB
ALTERNATE COUNTER LOW REGISTER
(ACLR)
R247 - Read/Write
Register Page: 28
Reset Value: 1111 1100 (FCh)
This is an 8-bit register that contains the low part of
the counter value. A write to this register resets the
counter. An access to this register after an access
to SR register does not clear the TOF bit in the SR
register.
7
0
MSB
LSB
181/426
9
EXTENDED FUNCTION TIMER (EFT)
EXTENDED FUNCTION TIMER (Cont’d)
OUTPUT COMPARE 1 HIGH REGISTER
(OC1HR)
R248 - Read/Write
Register Page: 28
Reset Value: 1000 0000 (80h)
This is an 8-bit register that contains the high part
of the value to be compared to the CHR register.
OUTPUT COMPARE 2 HIGH REGISTER
(OC2HR)
R250 - Read/Write
Register Page: 28
Reset Value: 1000 0000 (80h)
This is an 8-bit register that contains the high part
of the value to be compared to the CHR register.
7
0
7
0
MSB
LSB
MSB
LSB
OUTPUT COMPARE 1 LOW REGISTER
(OC1LR)
R249 - Read/Write
Register Page: 28
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
This is an 8-bit register that contains the low part of
the value to be compared to the CLR register.
OUTPUT COMPARE 2 LOW REGISTER
(OC2LR)
R251 - Read/Write
Register Page: 28
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
This is an 8-bit register that contains the low part of
the value to be compared to the CLR register.
7
0
7
0
MSB
LSB
MSB
LSB
182/426
9
EXTENDED FUNCTION TIMER (EFT)
EXTENDED FUNCTION TIMER (Cont’d)
CONTROL REGISTER 1 (CR1)
R252 - Read/Write
Register Page: 28
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7
Bit 4 = FOLV2 Forced Output Compare 2.
0: No effect.
1: Forces the OLVL2 bit to be copied to the
OCMP2 pin.
0
ICIE OCIE TOIE FOLV2 FOLV1 OLVL2 IEDG1 OLVL1
Bit 3 = FOLV1 Forced Output Compare 1.
0: No effect.
1: Forces OLVL1 to be copied to the OCMP1 pin.
Bit 7 = ICIE Input Capture Interrupt Enable.
0: Interrupt enabling depends on the IC1IE and
IC2IE bits in the CR3 register.
1: An interrupt is generated whenever the ICF1 or
ICF2 bit in the SR register is set. The IC1IE and
IC2IE bits in the CR3 register do not have any
effect in this case.
Bit 2 = OLVL2 Output Level 2.
This bit is copied to the OCMP2 pin whenever a
successful comparison occurs with the OC2R register and OC2E is set in the CR2 register. This value is copied to the OCMP1 pin in One Pulse Mode
and Pulse Width Modulation mode.
Bit 6 = OCIE Output Compare Interrupt Enable.
0: Interrupt generation depends on the OC1IE and
OC2IE bits in the CR3 register.
1: An interrupt is generated whenever the OCF1 or
OCF2 bit in the SR register is set. The OC1IE
and OC2IE bits in the CR3 rgister do not have
any effect in this case.
Bit 5 = TOIE Timer Overflow Interrupt Enable.
0: Interrupt is inhibited.
1: A timer interrupt is enabled whenever the TOF
bit of the SR register is set.
Bit 1 = IEDG1 Input Edge 1.
This bit determines which type of level transition
on the ICAP1 pin will trigger the capture.
0: A falling edge triggers the capture.
1: A rising edge triggers the capture.
Bit 0 = OLVL1 Output Level 1.
The OLVL1 bit is copied to the OCMP1 pin whenever a successful comparison occurs with the
OC1R register and the OC1E bit is set in the CR2
register.
183/426
9
EXTENDED FUNCTION TIMER (EFT)
EXTENDED FUNCTION TIMER (Cont’d)
CONTROL REGISTER 2 (CR2)
R253 - Read/Write
Register Page: 28
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7
0
Bit 4 = PWM Pulse Width Modulation.
0: PWM mode is not active.
1: PWM mode is active, the OCMP1 pin outputs a
programmable cyclic signal; the length of the
pulse depends on the value of OC1R register;
the period depends on the value of OC2R register.
OC1E OC2E OPM PWM CC1 CC0 IEDG2 EXEDG
Bit 7 = OC1E Output Compare 1 Enable.
0: Output Compare 1 function is enabled, but the
OCMP1 pin is a general I/O.
1: Output Compare 1 function is enabled, the
OCMP1 pin is dedicated to the Output Compare
1 capability of the timer.
Bit 6 = OC2E Output Compare 2 Enable.
0: Output Compare 2 function is enabled, but the
OCMP2 pin is a general I/O.
1: Output Compare 2 function is enabled, the
OCMP2 pin is dedicated to the Output Compare
2 capability of the timer.
Bit 5 = OPM One Pulse Mode.
0: One Pulse Mode is not active.
1: One Pulse Mode is active, the ICAP1 pin can be
used to trigger one pulse on the OCMP1 pin; the
active transition is given by the IEDG1 bit. The
length of the generated pulse depends on the
contents of the OC1R register.
184/426
9
Bits 3:2 = CC[1:0] Clock Control.
The value of the timer clock depends on these bits:
Table 36. Clock Control Bits
CC1
CC0
Timer Clock
0
0
0
1
1
0
INTCLK / 4
INTCLK / 2
INTCLK / 8
1
1
External Clock
Bit 1 = IEDG2 Input Edge 2.
This bit determines which type of level transition
on the ICAP2 pin will trigger the capture.
0: A falling edge triggers the capture.
1: A rising edge triggers the capture.
Bit 0 = EXEDG External Clock Edge.
This bit determines which type of level transition
on the external clock pin EXTCLK will trigger the
free running counter.
0: A falling edge triggers the free running counter.
1: A rising edge triggers the free running counter.
EXTENDED FUNCTION TIMER (EFT)
EXTENDED FUNCTION TIMER (Cont’d)
STATUS REGISTER (SR)
R254 - Read Only
Register Page: 28
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
The three least significant bits are not used.
7
ICF1
CONTROL REGISTER 3 (CR3)
R255 - Read/Write
Register Page: 28
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7
0
0
OCF1
TOF
ICF2
OCF2
0
0
0
Bit 7 = ICF1 Input Capture Flag 1.
0: No input capture (reset value).
1: An input capture has occurred. To clear this bit,
first read the SR register, then read or write the
low byte of the IC1R (IC1LR) register.
Bit 6 = OCF1 Output Compare Flag 1.
0: No match (reset value).
1: The content of the free running counter has
matched the content of the OC1R register. To
clear this bit, first read the SR register, then read
or write the low byte of the OC1R (OC1LR) register.
Bit 5 = TOF Timer Overflow.
0: No timer overflow (reset value).
1: The free running counter rolled over from FFFFh
to 0000h. To clear this bit, first read the SR register, then read or write the low byte of the CR
(CLR) register.
Note: Reading or writing the ACLR register does
not clear TOF.
Bit 4 = ICF2 Input Capture Flag 2.
0: No input capture (reset value).
1: An input capture has occurred. To clear this bit,
first read the SR register, then read or write the
low byte of the IC2R (IC2LR) register.
Bit 3 = OCF2 Output Compare Flag 2.
0: No match (reset value).
1: The content of the free running counter has
matched the content of the OC2R register. To
clear this bit, first read the SR register, then read
or write the low byte of the OC2R (OC2LR) register.
IC1IE OC1IE IC2IE OC2IE
0
0
0
EFTIS
Bit 7 = IC1IE Input Capture1 interrupt enable
This bit is not significant if the ICIE bit in the CR1
register is set.
0: ICAP1 interrupt disabled
1: ICAP1 interrupt enabled
Bit 6 = OC1IE output compare 1 interrupt enable
This bit is not significant if the OCIE bit in the CR1
register is set.
0: OCMP1 interrupt disabled
1: OCMP1 interrupt enabled
Bit 5 = IC2IE input capture 2 interrupt enable
This bit is not significant if the ICIE bit in the CR1
register is set.
0: ICAP2 interrupt disabled
1: ICAP2 interrupt enabled
Bit 4= OC2IE output compare 2 interrupt enable
This bit is not significant if the OCIE bit in the CR1
register is set.
0: OCMP2 interrupt disabled
1: OCMP2 interrupt enabled
Bits 3:1 = Reserved, must be kept cleared.
Bit 0 = EFTIS Global Timer Interrupt Selection.
0: Select External interrupt.
1: Select Global Timer Interrupt.
Bit 2:0 = Reserved, forced by hardware to 0.
185/426
9
EXTENDED FUNCTION TIMER (EFT)
EXTENDED FUNCTION TIMER (Cont’d)
Table 37. Extended Function Timer Register Map
Address
(Dec.)
R240
R241
R242
R243
R244
R245
R246
R247
R248
R249
R250
R251
R252
R253
R254
R255
186/426
9
Register
Name
IC1HR
Reset Value
IC1LR
Reset Value
IC2HR
Reset Value
IC2LR
Reset Value
CHR
Reset Value
CLR
Reset Value
ACHR
Reset Value
ACLR
Reset Value
OC1HR
Reset Value
OC1LR
Reset Value
OC2HR
Reset Value
OC2LR
Reset Value
CR1
Reset Value
CR2
Reset Value
SR
Reset Value
CR3
Reset Value
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
MSB
x
LSB
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
MSB
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
LSB
MSB
1
0
LSB
MSB
0
1
LSB
MSB
1
0
LSB
MSB
1
1
LSB
MSB
1
x
LSB
MSB
1
x
LSB
MSB
1
x
LSB
MSB
x
x
LSB
MSB
x
0
0
LSB
MSB
0
LSB
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
OC1E
OC2E
OPM
PWM
CC1
CC0
IEDG2
EXEDG
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
ICIE
OCIE
TOIE
FOLV2
FOLV1
OLVL2
IEDG1
OLVL1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
ICF1
OCF1
TOF
ICF2
OCF2
-
-
-
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
IC1IE
OC1IE
IC2IE
OC2IE
-
-
-
EFTIS
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (MFT)
10.4 MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (MFT)
10.4.1 Introduction
The Multifunction Timer (MFT) peripheral offers
powerful timing capabilities and features 12 operating modes, including automatic PWM generation
and frequency measurement.
The MFT comprises a 16-bit Up/Down counter
driven by an 8-bit programmable prescaler. The input clock may be INTCLK/3 or an external source.
The timer features two 16-bit Comparison Registers, and two 16-bit Capture/Load/Reload Registers. Two input pins and two alternate function output pins are available.
Several functional configurations are possible, for
instance:
– 2 input captures on separate external lines, and
2 independent output compare functions with the
counter in free-running mode, or 1 output compare at a fixed repetition rate.
– 1 input capture, 1 counter reload and 2 independent output compares.
– 2 alternate autoreloads and 2 independent output compares.
– 2 alternate captures on the same external line
and 2 independent output compares at a fixed
repetition rate.
When two MFTs are present in an ST9 device, a
combined operating mode is available.
An internal On-Chip Event signal can be used on
some devices to control other on-chip peripherals.
The two external inputs may be individually programmed to detect any of the following:
– rising edges
– falling edges
– both rising and falling edges
Figure 101. MFT Simplified Block Diagram
187/426
9
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (MFT)
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (Cont’d)
The configuration of each input is programmed in
the Input Control Register.
Each of the two output pins can be driven from any
of three possible sources:
– Compare Register 0 logic
– Compare Register 1 logic
– Overflow/Underflow logic
Each of these three sources can cause one of the
following four actions, independently, on each of
the two outputs:
– Nop, Set, Reset, Toggle
In addition, an additional On-Chip Event signal can
be generated by two of the three sources mentioned above, i.e. Over/Underflow event and Compare 0 event. This signal can be used internally to
Figure 102. Detailed Block Diagram
188/426
9
synchronise another on-chip peripheral. Five
maskable interrupt sources referring to an End Of
Count condition, 2 input captures and 2 output
compares, can generate 3 different interrupt requests (with hardware fixed priority), pointing to 3
interrupt routine vectors.
Two independent DMA channels are available for
rapid data transfer operations. Each DMA request
(associated with a capture on the REG0R register,
or with a compare on the CMP0R register) has priority over an interrupt request generated by the
same source.
A SWAP mode is also available to allow high
speed continuous transfers (see Interrupt and
DMA chapter).
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (MFT)
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (Cont’d)
10.4.2 Functional Description
The MFT operating modes are selected by programming the Timer Control Register (TCR) and
the Timer Mode Register (TMR).
10.4.2.1 Trigger Events
A trigger event may be generated by software (by
setting either the CP0 or the CP1 bits in the
T_FLAGR register) or by an external source which
may be programmed to respond to the rising edge,
the falling edge or both by programming bits A0A1 and B0-B1 in the T_ICR register. This trigger
event can be used to perform a capture or a load,
depending on the Timer mode (configured using
the bits in Table 41).
An event on the TxINA input or setting the CP0 bit
triggers a capture to, or a load from the REG0R
register (except in Bicapture mode, see Section
10.4.2.11).
An event on the TxINB input or setting the CP1 bit
triggers a capture to, or a load from the REG1R
register.
In addition, in the special case of "Load from
REG0R and monitor on REG1R", it is possible to
use the TxINB input as a trigger for REG0R."
10.4.2.2 One Shot Mode
When the counter generates an overflow (in upcount mode), or an underflow (in down-count
mode), that is to say when an End Of Count condition is reached, the counter stops and no counter
reload occurs. The counter may only be restarted
by an external trigger on TxINA or B or a by software trigger on CP0 only. One Shot Mode is entered by setting the CO bit in TMR.
10.4.2.3 Continuous Mode
Whenever the counter reaches an End Of Count
condition, the counting sequence is automatically
restarted and the counter is reloaded from REG0R
(or from REG1R, when selected in Biload Mode).
Continuous Mode is entered by resetting the C0 bit
in TMR.
10.4.2.4 Triggered And Retriggered Modes
A triggered event may be generated by software
(by setting either the CP0 or the CP1 bit in the
T_FLAGR register), or by an external source
which may be programmed to respond to the rising
edge, the falling edge or both, by programming
bits A0-A1 and B0-B1 in T_ICR.
In One Shot and Triggered Mode, every trigger
event arriving before an End Of Count, is masked.
In One Shot and Retriggered Mode, every trigger
received while the counter is running, automatically reloads the counter from REG0R. Triggered/Retriggered Mode is set by the REN bit in TMR.
The TxINA input refers to REG0R and the TxINB
input refers to REG1R.
WARNING. If the Triggered Mode is selected
when the counter is in Continuous Mode, every
trigger is disabled, it is not therefore possible to
synchronise the counting cycle by hardware or
software.
10.4.2.5 Gated Mode
In this mode, counting takes place only when the
external gate input is at a logic low level. The selection of TxINA or TxINB as the gate input is
made by programming the IN0-IN3 bits in T_ICR.
10.4.2.6 Capture Mode
The REG0R and REG1R registers may be independently set in Capture Mode by setting RM0 or
RM1 in TMR, so that a capture of the current count
value can be performed either on REG0R or on
REG1R, initiated by software (by setting CP0 or
CP1 in the T_FLAGR register) or by an event on
the external input pins.
WARNING. Care should be taken when two software captures are to be performed on the same
register. In this case, at least one instruction must
be present between the first CP0/CP1 bit set and
the subsequent CP0/CP1 bit reset instructions.
10.4.2.7 Up/Down Mode
The counter can count up or down depending on
the state of the UDC bit (Up/Down Count) in TCR,
or on the configuration of the external input pins,
which have priority over UDC (see Input pin assignment in T_ICR). The UDCS bit returns the
counter up/down current status (see also the Up/
Down Autodiscrimination mode in the Input Pin
Assignment Section).
189/426
9
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (MFT)
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (Cont’d)
10.4.2.8 Free Running Mode
The timer counts continuously (in Up or Down
mode) and the counter value simply overflows or
underflows through FFFFh or zero; there is no End
Of Count condition as such, and no reloading
takes place. This mode is automatically selected
either in Bi-capture mode or by setting register
REG0R for a Capture function (Continuous mode
must also be set). In Autoclear mode, free running
operation can be selected, with the possibility of
choosing a maximum count value less than 216
before overflow or underflow (see Autoclear
mode).
10.4.2.9 Monitor Mode
When the RM1 bit in TMR is reset, and the timer is
not in Bi-value mode, REG1R acts as a monitor,
duplicating the current up or down counter contents, thus allowing the counter to be read “on the
fly”.
10.4.2.10 Autoclear Mode
A clear command forces the counter either to
0000h or to FFFFh, depending on whether upcounting or downcounting is selected. The counter
reset may be obtained either directly, through the
CCL bit in TCR, or by entering the Autoclear
Mode, through the CCP0 and CCMP0 bits in TCR.
Every capture performed on REG0R (if CCP0 is
set), or every successful compare performed by
CMP0R (if CCMP0 is set), clears the counter and
reloads the prescaler.
190/426
9
The Clear On Capture mode allows direct measurement of delta time between successive captures on REG0R, while the Clear On Compare
mode allows free running with the possibility of
choosing a maximum count value before overflow
or underflow which is less than 216 (see Free Running Mode).
10.4.2.11 Bi-value Mode
Depending on the value of the RM0 bit in TMR, the
Bi-load Mode (RM0 reset) or the Bi-capture Mode
(RM0 set) can be selected as illustrated in Figure
38 below:
Table 38. Bi-value Modes
RM0
0
1
TMR bits
RM1
X
X
BM
1
1
Timer
Operating Modes
Bi-Load mode
Bi-Capture Mode
A) Biload Mode
The Bi-load Mode is entered by selecting the Bivalue Mode (BM set in TMR) and programming
REG0R as a reload register (RM0 reset in TMR).
At any End Of Count, counter reloading is performed alternately from REG0R and REG1R, (a
low level for BM bit always sets REG0R as the current register, so that, after a Low to High transition
of BM bit, the first reload is always from REG0R).
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (MFT)
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (Cont’d)
Every software or external trigger event on
REG0R performs a reload from REG0R resetting
the Biload cycle. In One Shot mode (reload initiated by software or by an external trigger), reloading
is always from REG0R.
B) Bicapture Mode
The Bicapture Mode is entered by selecting the Bivalue Mode (the BM bit in TMR is set) and by programming REG0R as a capture register (the RM0
bit in TMR is set).
Interrupt generation can be configured as an AND
or OR function of the two Capture events. This is
configured by the A0 bit in the T_FLAGR register.
Every capture event, software simulated (by setting the CP0 flag) or coming directly from the TxINA input line, captures the current counter value
alternately into REG0R and REG1R. When the
BM bit is reset, REG0R is the current register, so
that the first capture, after resetting the BM bit, is
always into REG0R.
10.4.2.12 Parallel Mode
When two MFTs are present on an ST9 device,
the parallel mode is entered when the ECK bit in
the TMR register of Timer 1 is set. The Timer 1
prescaler input is internally connected to the Timer
0 prescaler output. Timer 0 prescaler input is connected to the system clock line.
By loading the Prescaler Register of Timer 1 with
the value 00h the two timers (Timer 0 and Timer 1)
are driven by the same frequency in parallel mode.
In this mode the clock frequency may be divided
by a factor in the range from 1 to 216.
10.4.2.13 Autodiscriminator Mode
The phase difference sign of two overlapping pulses (respectively on TxINB and TxINA) generates a
one step up/down count, so that the up/down control and the counter clock are both external. The
setting of the UDC bit in the TCR register has no
effect in this configuration.
Figure 103. Parallel Mode Description
INTCLK/3
PRESCALER 0
MFT0
COUNTER
PRESCALER 1
MFT1
COUNTER
Note: MFT 1 is not available on all devices. Refer to
the device block diagram and register map.
191/426
9
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (MFT)
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (Cont’d)
10.4.3 Input Pin Assignment
The two external inputs (TxINA and TxINB) of the
timer can be individually configured to catch a particular external event (i.e. rising edge, falling edge,
or both rising and falling edges) by programming
the two relevant bits (A0, A1 and B0, B1) for each
input in the external Input Control Register
(T_ICR).
The 16 different functional modes of the two external inputs can be selected by programming bits
IN0 - IN3 of the T_ICR, as illustrated in Figure 39
Table 39. Input Pin Function
I C Reg.
IN3-IN0 bits
0000
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
1000
1001
1010
1011
1100
1101
1110
1111
TxINA Input
Function
not used
not used
Gate
Gate
not used
Trigger
Gate
Trigger
Clock Up
Up/Down
Trigger Up
Up/Down
Autodiscr.
Trigger
Ext. Clock
Trigger
TxINB Input
Function
not used
Trigger
not used
Trigger
Ext. Clock
not used
Ext. Clock
Trigger
Clock Down
Ext. Clock
Trigger Down
not used
Autodiscr.
Ext. Clock
Trigger
Gate
Some choices relating to the external input pin assignment are defined in conjunction with the RM0
and RM1 bits in TMR.
For input pin assignment codes which use the input pins as Trigger Inputs (except for code 1010,
Trigger Up:Trigger Down), the following conditions
apply:
192/426
9
– a trigger signal on the TxINA input pin performs
an U/D counter load if RM0 is reset, or an external capture if RM0 is set.
– a trigger signal on the TxINB input pin always
performs an external capture on REG1R. The
TxINB input pin is disabled when the Bivalue
Mode is set.
Note: For proper operation of the External Input
pins, the following must be observed:
– the minimum external clock/trigger pulse width
must not be less than the system clock (INTCLK)
period if the input pin is programmed as rising or
falling edge sensitive.
– the minimum external clock/trigger pulse width
must not be less than the prescaler clock period
(INTCLK/3) if the input pin is programmed as rising and falling edge sensitive (valid also in Auto
discrimination mode).
– the minimum delay between two clock/trigger
pulse active edges must be greater than the
prescaler clock period (INTCLK/3), while the
minimum delay between two consecutive clock/
trigger pulses must be greater than the system
clock (INTCLK) period.
– the minimum gate pulse width must be at least
twice the prescaler clock period (INTCLK/3).
– in Autodiscrimination mode, the minimum delay
between the input pin A pulse edge and the edge
of the input pin B pulse, must be at least equal to
the system clock (INTCLK) period.
– if a number, N, of external pulses must be counted using a Compare Register in External Clock
mode, then the Compare Register must be loaded with the value [X +/- (N-1)], where X is the
starting counter value and the sign is chosen depending on whether Up or Down count mode is
selected.
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (MFT)
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (Cont’d)
10.4.3.1 TxINA = I/O - TxINB = I/O
Input pins A and B are not used by the Timer. The
counter clock is internally generated and the up/
down selection may be made only by software via
the UDC (Software Up/Down) bit in the TCR register.
10.4.3.2 TxINA = I/O - TxINB = Trigger
The signal applied to input pin B acts as a trigger
signal on REG1R register. The prescaler clock is
internally generated and the up/down selection
may be made only by software via the UDC (Software Up/Down) bit in the TCR register.
10.4.3.3 TxINA = Gate - TxINB = I/O
The signal applied to input pin A acts as a gate signal for the internal clock (i.e. the counter runs only
when the gate signal is at a low level). The counter
clock is internally generated and the up/down control may be made only by software via the UDC
(Software Up/Down) bit in the TCR register.
10.4.3.4 TxINA = Gate - TxINB = Trigger
Both input pins A and B are connected to the timer,
with the resulting effect of combining the actions
relating to the previously described configurations.
10.4.3.5 TxINA = I/O - TxINB = Ext. Clock
The signal applied to input pin B is used as the external clock for the prescaler. The up/down selection may be made only by software via the UDC
(Software Up/Down) bit in the TCR register.
10.4.3.6 TxINA = Trigger - TxINB = I/O
The signal applied to input pin A acts as a trigger
for REG0R, initiating the action for which the reg-
ister was programmed (i.e. a reload or capture).
The prescaler clock is internally generated and the
up/down selection may be made only by software
via the UDC (Software Up/Down) bit in the TCR
register.
(*) The timer is in One shot mode and REGOR in
Reload mode
10.4.3.7 TxINA = Gate - TxINB = Ext. Clock
The signal applied to input pin B, gated by the signal applied to input pin A, acts as external clock for
the prescaler. The up/down control may be made
only by software action through the UDC bit in the
TCR register.
10.4.3.8 TxINA = Trigger - TxINB = Trigger
The signal applied to input pin A (or B) acts as trigger signal for REG0R (or REG1R), initiating the
action for which the register has been programmed. The counter clock is internally generated and the up/down selection may be made only
by software via the UDC (Software Up/Down) bit in
the TCR register.
193/426
9
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (MFT)
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (Cont’d)
10.4.3.9 TxINA = Clock Up - TxINB = Clock
Down
The edge received on input pin A (or B) performs a
one step up (or down) count, so that the counter
clock and the up/down control are external. Setting
the UDC bit in the TCR register has no effect in
this configuration, and input pin B has priority on
input pin A.
10.4.3.10 TxINA = Up/Down - TxINB = Ext Clock
An High (or Low) level applied to input pin A sets
the counter in the up (or down) count mode, while
the signal applied to input pin B is used as clock for
the prescaler. Setting the UDC bit in the TCR register has no effect in this configuration.
194/426
9
10.4.3.11 TxINA = Trigger Up - TxINB = Trigger
Down
Up/down control is performed through both input
pins A and B. A edge on input pin A sets the up
count mode, while a edge on input pin B (which
has priority on input pin A) sets the down count
mode. The counter clock is internally generated,
and setting the UDC bit in the TCR register has no
effect in this configuration.
10.4.3.12 TxINA = Up/Down - TxINB = I/O
An High (or Low) level of the signal applied on input pin A sets the counter in the up (or down) count
mode. The counter clock is internally generated.
Setting the UDC bit in the TCR register has no effect in this configuration.
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (MFT)
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (Cont’d)
10.4.3.13 Autodiscrimination Mode
The phase between two pulses (respectively on input pin B and input pin A) generates a one step up
(or down) count, so that the up/down control and
the counter clock are both external. Thus, if the rising edge of TxINB arrives when TxINA is at a low
level, the timer is incremented (no action if the rising edge of TxINB arrives when TxINA is at a high
level). If the falling edge of TxINB arrives when
TxINA is at a low level, the timer is decremented
(no action if the falling edge of TxINB arrives when
TxINA is at a high level).
Setting the UDC bit in the TCR register has no effect in this configuration.
10.4.3.14 TxINA = Trigger - TxINB = Ext. Clock
The signal applied to input pin A acts as a trigger
signal on REG0R, initiating the action for which the
register was programmed (i.e. a reload or cap-
ture), while the signal applied to input pin B is used
as the clock for the prescaler.
(*) The timer is in One shot mode and REG0R in
reload mode
10.4.3.15 TxINA = Ext. Clock - TxINB = Trigger
The signal applied to input pin B acts as a trigger,
performing a capture on REG1R, while the signal
applied to input pin A is used as the clock for the
prescaler.
10.4.3.16 TxINA = Trigger - TxINB = Gate
The signal applied to input pin A acts as a trigger
signal on REG0R, initiating the action for which the
register was programmed (i.e. a reload or capture), while the signal applied to input pin B acts as
a gate signal for the internal clock (i.e. the counter
runs only when the gate signal is at a low level).
195/426
9
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (MFT)
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (Cont’d)
10.4.4 Output Pin Assignment
Two external outputs are available when programmed as Alternate Function Outputs of the I/O
pins.
Two registers Output A Control Register (OACR)
and Output B Control Register (OBCR) define the
driver for the outputs and the actions to be performed.
Each of the two output pins can be driven from any
of the three possible sources:
– Compare Register 0 event logic
– Compare Register 1 event logic
– Overflow/Underflow event logic.
Each of these three sources can cause one of the
following four actions on any of the two outputs:
– Nop
– Set
– Reset
– Toggle
Furthermore an On Chip Event signal can be driven by two of the three sources: the Over/Underflow event and Compare 0 event by programming
the CEV bit of the OACR register and the OEV bit
of OBCR register respectively. This signal can be
used internally to synchronise another on-chip peripheral.
Output Waveforms
Depending on the programming of OACR and OBCR, the following example waveforms can be generated on TxOUTA and TxOUTB pins.
For a configuration where TxOUTA is driven by the
Over/Underflow (OUF) and the Compare 0 event
(CM0), and TxOUTB is driven by the Over/Underflow and Compare 1 event (CM1):
196/426
9
OACR is programmed with TxOUTA preset to “0”,
OUF sets TxOUTA, CM0 resets TxOUTA and
CM1 does not affect the output.
OBCR is programmed with TxOUTB preset to “0”,
OUF sets TxOUTB, CM1 resets TxOUTB while
CM0 does not affect the output.
OACR = [101100X0]
OBCR = [111000X0]
T0OUTA
OUF COMP0 OUF COMP0
COMP1
COMP1
T0OUTB
OUF
OUF
For a configuration where TxOUTA is driven by the
Over/Underflow, by Compare 0 and by Compare
1; TxOUTB is driven by both Compare 0 and Compare 1. OACR is programmed with TxOUTA preset to “0”. OUF toggles Output 0, as do CM0 and
CM1. OBCR is programmed with TxOUTB preset
to “1”. OUF does not affect the output; CM0 resets
TxOUTB and CM1 sets it.
OACR = [010101X0]
OBCR = [100011X1]
COMP1 COMP1
T0OUTA
OUF
OUF
COMP0
COMP0
COMP1 COMP1
T0OUTB
COMP0
COMP0
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (MFT)
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (Cont’d)
For a configuration where TxOUTA is driven by the
Over/Underflow and by Compare 0, and TxOUTB
is driven by the Over/Underflow and by Compare
1. OACR is programmed with TxOUTA preset to
“0”. OUF sets TxOUTA while CM0 resets it, and
CM1 has no effect. OBCR is programmed with TxOUTB preset to “1”. OUF toggles TxOUTB, CM1
sets it and CM0 has no effect.
Output Waveform Samples In Biload Mode
TxOUTA is programmed to monitor the two time
intervals, t1 and t2, of the Biload Mode, while TxOUTB is independent of the Over/Underflow and
is driven by the different values of Compare 0 and
Compare 1. OACR is programmed with TxOUTA
preset to “0”. OUF toggles the output and CM0 and
CM1 do not affect TxOUTA. OBCR is programmed
with TxOUTB preset to “0”. OUF has no effect,
while CM1 resets TxOUTB and CM0 sets it.
Depending on the CM1/CM0 values, three different sample waveforms have been drawn based on
the above mentioned configuration of OBCR. In
the last case, with a different programmed value of
OBCR, only Compare 0 drives TxOUTB, toggling
the output.
For a configuration where TxOUTA is driven by the
Over/Underflow and by Compare 0, and TxOUTB
is driven by Compare 0 and 1. OACR is programmed with TxOUTA preset to “0”. OUF sets
TxOUTA, CM0 resets it and CM1 has no effect.
OBCR is programmed with TxOUTB preset to “0”.
OUF has no effect, CM0 sets TxOUTB and CM1
toggles it.
OACR = [101100X0]
OBCR = [000111X0]
T0OUTA
OUF COMP0 OUF COMP0
COMP1
COMP1
T0OUTB
COMP0
COMP0
Note (*) Depending on the CMP1R/CMP0R values
197/426
9
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (MFT)
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (Cont’d)
10.4.5 Interrupt and DMA
10.4.5.1 Timer Interrupt
The timer has 5 different Interrupt sources, belonging to 3 independent groups, which are assigned to the following Interrupt vectors:
Table 40. Timer Interrupt Structure
Interrupt Source
COMP 0
COMP 1
CAPT 0
CAPT 1
Overflow/Underflow
Vector Address
xxxx x110
xxxx x100
xxxx x000
The three least significant bits of the vector pointer
address represent the relative priority assigned to
each group, where 000 represents the highest priority level. These relative priorities are fixed by
hardware, according to the source which generates the interrupt request. The 5 most significant
bits represent the general priority and are programmed by the user in the Interrupt Vector Register (T_IVR).
Each source can be masked by a dedicated bit in
the Interrupt/DMA Mask Register (IDMR) of each
timer, as well as by a global mask enable bit (IDMR.7) which masks all interrupts.
If an interrupt request (CM0 or CP0) is present before the corresponding pending bit is reset, an
overrun condition occurs. This condition is flagged
in two dedicated overrun bits, relating to the
Comp0 and Capt0 sources, in the Timer Flag Register (T_FLAGR).
10.4.5.2 Timer DMA
Two Independent DMA channels, associated with
Comp0 and Capt0 respectively, allow DMA transfers from Register File or Memory to the Comp0
Register, and from the Capt0 Register to Register
File or Memory). If DMA is enabled, the Capt0 and
Comp0 interrupts are generated by the corresponding DMA End of Block event. Their priority is
set by hardware as follows:
– Compare 0 Destination — Lower Priority
– Capture 0 Source — Higher Priority
The two DMA request sources are independently
maskable by the CP0D and CM0D DMA Mask bits
in the IDMR register.
198/426
9
The two DMA End of Block interrupts are independently enabled by the CP0I and CM0I Interrupt
mask bits in the IDMR register.
10.4.5.3 DMA Pointers
The 6 programmable most significant bits of the
DMA Counter Pointer Register (DCPR) and of the
DMA Address Pointer Register (DAPR) are common to both channels (Comp0 and Capt0). The
Comp0 and Capt0 Address Pointers are mapped
as a pair in the Register File, as are the Comp0
and Capt0 DMA Counter pair.
In order to specify either the Capt0 or the Comp0
pointers, according to the channel being serviced,
the Timer resets address bit 1 for CAPT0 and sets
it for COMP0, when the D0 bit in the DCPR register is equal to zero (Word address in Register
File). In this case (transfers between peripheral
registers and memory), the pointers are split into
two groups of adjacent Address and Counter pairs
respectively.
For peripheral register to register transfers (selected by programming “1” into bit 0 of the DCPR register), only one pair of pointers is required, and the
pointers are mapped into one group of adjacent
positions.
The DMA Address Pointer Register (DAPR) is not
used in this case, but must be considered reserved.
Figure 104. Pointer Mapping for Transfers
between Registers and Memory
Register File
Address
Pointers
Comp0 16 bit
Addr Pointer
Capt0 16 bit
Addr Pointer
DMA
Counters
Comp0 DMA
16 bit Counter
Capt0 DMA
16 bit Counter
YYYYYY11(l)
YYYYYY10(h)
YYYYYY01(l)
YYYYYY00(h)
XXXXXX11(l)
XXXXXX10(h)
XXXXXX01(l)
XXXXXX00(h)
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (MFT)
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (Cont’d)
Figure 105. Pointer Mapping for Register to
Register Transfers
Register File
8 bit Counter
XXXXXX11
8 bit Addr Pointer
XXXXXX10
8 bit Counter
XXXXXX01
8 bit Addr Pointer
XXXXXX00
Compare 0
Capture 0
10.4.5.4 DMA Transaction Priorities
Each Timer DMA transaction is a 16-bit operation,
therefore two bytes must be transferred sequentially, by means of two DMA transfers. In order to
speed up each word transfer, the second byte
transfer is executed by automatically forcing the
peripheral priority to the highest level (000), regardless of the previously set level. It is then restored to its original value after executing the
transfer. Thus, once a request is being serviced,
its hardware priority is kept at the highest level regardless of the other Timer internal sources, i.e.
once a Comp0 request is being serviced, it maintains a higher priority, even if a Capt0 request occurs between the two byte transfers.
10.4.5.5 DMA Swap Mode
After a complete data table transfer, the transaction counter is reset and an End Of Block (EOB)
condition occurs, the block transfer is completed.
The End Of Block Interrupt routine must at this
point reload both address and counter pointers of
the channel referred to by the End Of Block interrupt source, if the application requires a continuous high speed data flow. This procedure causes
speed limitations because of the time required for
the reload routine.
The SWAP feature overcomes this drawback, allowing high speed continuous transfers. Bit 2 of
the DMA Counter Pointer Register (DCPR) and of
the DMA Address Pointer Register (DAPR), toggles after every End Of Block condition, alternately
providing odd and even address (D2-D7) for the
pair of pointers, thus pointing to an updated pair,
after a block has been completely transferred. This
allows the User to update or read the first block
and to update the pointer values while the second
is being transferred. These two toggle bits are software writable and readable, mapped in DCPR bit 2
for the CM0 channel, and in DAPR bit 2 for the
CP0 channel (though a DMA event on a channel,
in Swap mode, modifies a field in DAPR and
DCPR common to both channels, the DAPR/
DCPR content used in the transfer is always the bit
related to the correct channel).
SWAP mode can be enabled by the SWEN bit in
the IDCR Register.
WARNING: Enabling SWAP mode affects both
channels (CM0 and CP0).
199/426
9
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (MFT)
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (Cont’d)
10.4.5.6 DMA End Of Block Interrupt Routine
An interrupt request is generated after each block
transfer (EOB) and its priority is the same as that
assigned in the usual interrupt request, for the two
channels. As a consequence, they will be serviced
only when no DMA request occurs, and will be
subject to a possible OUF Interrupt request, which
has higher priority.
The following is a typical EOB procedure (with
swap mode enabled):
– Test Toggle bit and Jump.
– Reload Pointers (odd or even depending on toggle bit status).
– Reset EOB bit: this bit must be reset only after
the old pair of pointers has been restored, so
that, if a new EOB condition occurs, the next pair
of pointers is ready for swapping.
– Verify the software protection condition (see
Section 10.4.5.7).
– Read the corresponding Overrun bit: this confirms that no DMA request has been lost in the
meantime.
– Reset the corresponding pending bit.
– Reenable DMA with the corresponding DMA
mask bit (must always be done after resetting
the pending bit)
200/426
9
– Return.
WARNING: The EOB bits are read/write only for
test purposes. Writing a logical “1” by software
(when the SWEN bit is set) will cause a spurious
interrupt request. These bits are normally only reset by software.
10.4.5.7 DMA Software Protection
A second EOB condition may occur before the first
EOB routine is completed, this would cause a not
yet updated pointer pair to be addressed, with consequent overwriting of memory. To prevent these
errors, a protection mechanism is provided, such
that the attempted setting of the EOB bit before it
has been reset by software will cause the DMA
mask on that channel to be reset (DMA disabled),
thus blocking any further DMA operation. As
shown above, this mask bit should always be
checked in each EOB routine, to ensure that all
DMA transfers are properly served.
10.4.6 Register Description
Note: In the register description on the following
pages, register and page numbers are given using
the example of Timer 0. On devices with more
than one timer, refer to the device register map for
the adresses and page numbers.
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (MFT)
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (Cont’d)
CAPTURE LOAD 0 HIGH REGISTER (REG0HR)
R240 - Read/Write
Register Page: 10
Reset value: undefined
7
R15
R14
R13
R12
R11
R10
R9
0
7
R8
R15
This register is used to capture values from the
Up/Down counter or load preset values (MSB).
CAPTURE LOAD 0 LOW REGISTER (REG0LR)
R241 - Read/Write
Register Page: 10
Reset value: undefined
7
COMPARE 0 HIGH REGISTER (CMP0HR)
R244 - Read/Write
Register Page: 10
Reset value: 0000 0000 (00h)
0
0
R14
R13
R12
R11
R10
R9
R8
This register is used to store the MSB of the 16-bit
value to be compared to the Up/Down counter
content.
COMPARE 0 LOW REGISTER (CMP0LR)
R245 - Read/Write
Register Page: 10
Reset value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7
R7
R6
R5
R4
R3
R2
R1
R7
This register is used to capture values from the
Up/Down counter or load preset values (LSB).
CAPTURE LOAD 1 HIGH REGISTER (REG1HR)
R242 - Read/Write
Register Page: 10
Reset value: undefined
7
R15
0
R14
R13
R12
R11
R10
R9
R8
This register is used to capture values from the
Up/Down counter or load preset values (MSB).
CAPTURE LOAD 1 LOW REGISTER (REG1LR)
R243 - Read/Write
Register Page: 10
Reset value: undefined
7
R7
0
R6
R5
R4
R3
R2
R1
0
R0
R0
R6
R5
R4
R3
R2
R1
This register is used to store the LSB of the 16-bit
value to be compared to the Up/Down counter
content.
COMPARE 1 HIGH REGISTER (CMP1HR)
R246 - Read/Write
Register Page: 10
Reset value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7
R15
0
R14
R13
R12
R11
R10
R9
R8
This register is used to store the MSB of the 16-bit
value to be compared to the Up/Down counter
content.
COMPARE 1 LOW REGISTER (CMP1LR)
R247 - Read/Write
Register Page: 10
Reset value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7
This register is used to capture values from the
Up/Down counter or load preset values (LSB).
R0
R7
0
R6
R5
R4
R3
R2
R1
R0
This register is used to store the LSB of the 16-bit
value to be compared to the Up/Down counter
content.
201/426
9
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (MFT)
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (Cont’d)
TIMER CONTROL REGISTER (TCR)
R248 - Read/Write
Register Page: 10
Reset value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7
0
CEN CCP0 CCMP0 CCL UDC UDCS OF0 CS
Bit 7 = CEN: Counter enable.
This bit is ANDed with the Global Counter Enable
bit (GCEN) in the CICR register (R230). The
GCEN bit is set after the Reset cycle.
0: Stop the counter and prescaler
1: Start the counter and prescaler (without reload).
Note: Even if CEN=0, capture and loading will
take place on a trigger event.
Bit 6 = CCP0: Clear on capture.
0: No effect
1: Clear the counter and reload the prescaler on a
REG0R or REG1R capture event
Bit 5 = CCMP0: Clear on Compare.
0: No effect
1: Clear the counter and reload the prescaler on a
CMP0R compare event
Bit 4 = CCL: Counter clear.
This bit is reset by hardware after being set by
software (this bit always returns “0” when read).
0: No effect
1: Clear the counter without generating an interrupt request
202/426
9
Bit 3 = UDC: Up/Down software selection.
If the direction of the counter is not fixed by hardware (TxINA and/or TxINB pins, see par. 10.3) it
can be controlled by software using the UDC bit.
0: Down counting
1: Up counting
Bit 2 = UDCS: Up/Down count status.
This bit is read only and indicates the direction of
the counter.
0: Down counting
1: Up counting
Bit 1 = OF0: OVF/UNF state.
This bit is read only.
0: No overflow or underflow occurred
1: Overflow or underflow occurred during a Capture on Register 0
Bit 0 = CS Counter Status.
This bit is read only and indicates the status of the
counter.
0: Counter halted
1: Counter running
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (MFT)
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (Cont’d)
TIMER MODE REGISTER (TMR)
R249 - Read/Write
Register Page: 10
Reset value: 0000 0000 (00h)
Bit 3 = RM0: REG0R mode.
This bit works together with the BM and RM1 bits
to select the timer operating mode. Refer to Table
41.
7
OE1
0
OE0
BM
RM1
RM0
ECK
REN
C0
Bit 7 = OE1: Output 1 enable.
0: Disable the Output 1 (TxOUTB pin) and force it
high.
1: Enable the Output 1 (TxOUTB pin)
The relevant I/O bit must also be set to Alternate
Function
Bit 6 = OE0: Output 0 enable.
0: Disable the Output 0 (TxOUTA pin) and force it
high
1: Enable the Output 0 (TxOUTA pin).
The relevant I/O bit must also be set to Alternate
Function
Bit 5 = BM: Bivalue mode.
This bit works together with the RM1 and RM0 bits
to select the timer operating mode (see Table 41).
0: Disable bivalue mode
1: Enable bivalue mode
Bit 4 = RM1: REG1R mode.
This bit works together with the BM and RM0 bits
to select the timer operating mode. Refer to Table
41.
Note: This bit has no effect when the Bivalue
Mode is enabled (BM=1).
Table 41. Timer Operating Modes
TMR Bits
Timer Operating Modes
BM RM1 RM0
1
x
0
Biload mode
1
x
1
Bicapture mode
Load from REG0R and Monitor on
0
0
0
REG1R
Load from REG0R and Capture on
0
1
0
REG1R
Capture on REG0R and Monitor on
0
0
1
REG1R
0
1
1
Capture on REG0R and REG1R
Bit 2 = ECK Timer clock control.
0: The prescaler clock source is selected depending on the IN0 - IN3 bits in the T_ICR register
1: Enter Parallel mode (for Timer 1 and Timer 3
only, no effect for Timer 0 and 2). See Section
10.4.2.12.
Bit 1 = REN: Retrigger mode.
0: Enable retriggerable mode
1: Disable retriggerable mode
Bit 0 = CO: Continous/One shot mode.
0: Continuous mode (with autoreload on End of
Count condition)
1: One shot mode
203/426
9
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (MFT)
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (Cont’d)
EXTERNAL INPUT CONTROL
(T_ICR)
R250 - Read/Write
Register Page: 10
Reset value: 0000 0000 (00h)
REGISTER
7
B0
0
0
1
1
0
IN3
IN2
IN1
IN0
A0
A1
B0
TxINA
Pin Function
not used
not used
Gate
Gate
not used
Trigger
Gate
Trigger
Clock Up
Up/Down
Trigger Up
Up/Down
Autodiscr.
Trigger
Ext. Clock
Trigger
IN[3:0] bits
0000
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
1000
1001
1010
1011
1100
1101
1110
1111
TxINB Input
Pin Function
not used
Trigger
not used
Trigger
Ext. Clock
not used
Ext. Clock
Trigger
Clock Down
Ext. Clock
Trigger Down
not used
Autodiscr.
Ext. Clock
Trigger
Gate
Bits 3:2 = A[0:1]: TxINA Pin event.
These bits are set and cleared by software.
A0
0
0
1
1
204/426
A1
0
1
0
1
TxINA Pin Event
No operation
Falling edge sensitive
Rising edge sensitive
Rising and falling edges
B1
0
1
0
1
TxINB Pin Event
No operation
Falling edge sensitive
Rising edge sensitive
Rising and falling edges
B1
Bits 7:4 = IN[3:0]: Input pin function.
These bits are set and cleared by software.
9
Bits 1:0 = B[0:1]: TxINB Pin event.
These bits are set and cleared by software.
PRESCALER REGISTER (PRSR)
R251 - Read/Write
Register Page: 10
Reset value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7
P7
0
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
This register holds the preset value for the 8-bit
prescaler. The PRSR content may be modified at
any time, but it will be loaded into the prescaler at
the following prescaler underflow, or as a consequence of a counter reload (either by software or
upon external request).
Following a RESET condition, the prescaler is automatically loaded with 00h, so that the prescaler
divides by 1 and the maximum counter clock is
generated (Crystal oscillator clock frequency divided by 6 when MODER.5 = DIV2 bit is set).
The binary value programmed in the PRSR register is equal to the divider value minus one. For example, loading PRSR with 24 causes the prescaler to divide by 25.
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (MFT)
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (Cont’d)
OUTPUT A CONTROL REGISTER (OACR)
R252 - Read/Write
Register Page: 10
Reset value: 0000 0000
7
0
C0E0 C0E1 C1E0 C1E1 OUE0 OUE1 CEV 0P
Bits 7:6 = C0E[0:1]: COMP0 action bits.
These bits are set and cleared by software. They
configure the action to be performed on the TxOUTA pin when a successful compare of the
CMP0R register occurs. Refer to Table 42 for the
list of actions that can be configured.
Bits 5:4 = C1E[0:1]: COMP1 action bits.
These bits are set and cleared by software. They
configure the action to be performed on the TxOUTA pin when a successful compare of the
CMP1R register occurs. Refer to Table 42 for the
list of actions that can be configured.
Bits 3:2 = OUE[0:1]: OVF/UNF action bits.
These bits are set and cleared by software. They
configure the action to be performed on the TxOUTA pin when an Overflow or Underflow of the
U/D counter occurs. Refer to Table 42 for the list of
actions that can be configured.
Table 42. Output A Action Bits
xxE0
xxE1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Action on TxOUTA pin when an xx
event occurs
Set
Toggle
Reset
NOP
Notes:
– xx stands for C0, C1 or OU.
– Whenever more than one event occurs simultaneously, Action bit 0 will be the result of ANDing
Action bit 0 of all simultaneous events and Action
bit 1 will be the result of ANDing Action bit 1 of all
simultaneous events.
Bit 1 = CEV: On-Chip event on CMP0R.
This bit is set and cleared by software.
0: No action
1: A successful compare on CMP0R activates the
on-chip event signal (a single pulse is generated)
Bit 0 = OP: TxOUTA preset value.
This bit is set and cleared by software and by hardware. The value of this bit is the preset value of the
TxOUTA pin. Reading this bit returns the current
state of the TxOUTA pin (useful when it is selected
in toggle mode).
205/426
9
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (MFT)
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (Cont’d)
OUTPUT B CONTROL REGISTER (OBCR)
R253 - Read/Write
Register Page: 10
Reset value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7
0
C0E0 C0E1 C1E0 C1E1 OUE0 OUE1 OEV 0P
Bits 7:6 = C0E[0:1]: COMP0 Action Bits.
These bits are set and cleared by software. They
configure the type of action to be performed on the
TxOUTB output pin when successful compare of
the CMP0R register occurs. Refer to Table 43 for
the list of actions that can be configured.
Bits 5:4 = C0E[0:1]: COMP1 Action Bits.
These bits are set and cleared by software. They
configure the type of action to be performed on the
TxOUTB output pin when a successful compare of
the CMP1R register occurs. Refer to Table 43 for
the list of actions that can be configured.
Bits 3:2 = OUE[0:1]: OVF/UNF Action Bits.
These bits are set and cleared by software.They
configure the type of action to be performed on the
TxOUTB output pin when an Overflow or Underflow on the U/D counter occurs. Refer to Table 43
for the list of actions that can be configured.
206/426
9
Table 43. Output B Action Bits
xxE0
xxE1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Action on the TxOUTB pin when an
xx event occurs
Set
Toggle
Reset
NOP
Notes:
– xx stands for C0, C1 or OU.
– Whenever more than one event occurs simultaneously, Action Bit 0 will be the result of ANDing
Action Bit 0 of all simultaneous events and Action
Bit 1 will be the result of ANDing Action Bit 1 of
all simultaneous events.
Bit 1 = OEV: On-Chip event on OVF/UNF.
This bit is set and cleared by software.
0: No action
1: An underflow/overflow activates the on-chip
event signal (a single pulse is generated)
Bit 0 = OP: TxOUTB preset value.
This bit is set and cleared by software and by hardware. The value of this bit is the preset value of the
TxOUTB pin. Reading this bit returns the current
state of the TxOUTB pin (useful when it is selected
in toggle mode).
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (MFT)
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (Cont’d)
FLAG REGISTER (T_FLAGR)
R254 - Read/Write
Register Page: 10
Reset value: 0000 0000 (00h)
GTIEN and CM1I bits in the IDMR register are set.
The CM1 bit is cleared by software.
0: No Compare 1 event
1: Compare 1 event occurred
7
CP0 CP1 CM0 CM1 OUF
0
OCP0
OCM0
A0
Bit 7 = CP0: Capture 0 flag.
This bit is set by hardware after a capture on
REG0R register. An interrupt is generated depending on the value of the GTIEN, CP0I bits in
the IDMR register and the A0 bit in the T_FLAGR
register. The CP0 bit must be cleared by software.
Setting by software acts as a software load/capture to/from the REG0R register.
0: No Capture 0 event
1: Capture 0 event occurred
Bit 6 = CP1: Capture 1 flag.
This bit is set by hardware after a capture on
REG1R register. An interrupt is generated depending on the value of the GTIEN, CP0I bits in
the IDMR register and the A0 bit in the T_FLAGR
register. The CP1 bit must be cleared by software.
Setting by software acts as a capture event on the
REG1R register, except when in Bicapture mode.
0: No Capture 1 event
1: Capture 1 event occurred
Bit 5 = CM0: Compare 0 flag.
This bit is set by hardware after a successful compare on the CMP0R register. An interrupt is generated if the GTIEN and CM0I bits in the IDMR register are set. The CM0 bit is cleared by software.
0: No Compare 0 event
1: Compare 0 event occurred
Bit 4 = CM1: Compare 1 flag.
This bit is set after a successful compare on
CMP1R register. An interrupt is generated if the
Bit 3 = OUF: Overflow/Underflow.
This bit is set by hardware after a counter Over/
Underflow condition. An interrupt is generated if
GTIEN and OUI=1 in the IDMR register. The OUF
bit is cleared by software.
0: No counter overflow/underflow
1: Counter overflow/underflow
Bit 2 = OCP0: Overrun on Capture 0.
This bit is set by hardware when more than one
INT/DMA requests occur before the CP0 flag is
cleared by software or whenever a capture is simulated by setting the CP0 flag by software. The
OCP0 flag is cleared by software.
0: No capture 0 overrun
1: Capture 0 overrun
Bit 1 = OCM0: Overrun on compare 0.
This bit is set by hardware when more than one
INT/DMA requests occur before the CM0 flag is
cleared by software.The OCM0 flag is cleared by
software.
0: No compare 0 overrun
1: Compare 0 overrun
Bit 0 = A0: Capture interrupt function.
This bit is set and cleared by software.
0: Configure the capture interrupt as an OR function of REG0R/REG1R captures
1: Configure the capture interrupt as an AND function of REG0R/REG1R captures
Note: When A0 is set, both CP0I and CP1I in the
IDMR register must be set to enable both capture
interrupts.
207/426
9
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (MFT)
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (Cont’d)
INTERRUPT/DMA MASK REGISTER (IDMR)
R255 - Read/Write
Register Page: 10
Reset value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7
0
GTIEN CP0D CP0I CP1I CM0D CM0I CM1I OUI
Bit 7 = GTIEN: Global timer interrupt enable.
This bit is set and cleared by software.
0: Disable all Timer interrupts
1: Enable all timer Timer Interrupts from enabled
sources
Bit 6 = CP0D: Capture 0 DMA mask.
This bit is set by software to enable a Capt0 DMA
transfer and cleared by hardware at the end of the
block transfer.
0: Disable capture on REG0R DMA
1: Enable capture on REG0R DMA
Bit 5 = CP0I: Capture 0 interrupt mask.
0: Disable capture on REG0R interrupt
1: Enable capture on REG0R interrupt (or Capt0
DMA End of Block interrupt if CP0D=1)
Bit 4 = CP1I: Capture 1 interrupt mask.
This bit is set and cleared by software.
0: Disable capture on REG1R interrupt
1: Enable capture on REG1R interrupt
Bit 3 = CM0D: Compare 0 DMA mask.
This bit is set by software to enable a Comp0 DMA
transfer and cleared by hardware at the end of the
block transfer.
0: Disable compare on CMP0R DMA
1: Enable compare on CMP0R DMA
Bit 2 = CM0I: Compare 0 Interrupt mask.
This bit is set and cleared by software.
0: Disable compare on CMP0R interrupt
1: Enable compare on CMP0R interrupt (or
Comp0 DMA End of Block interrupt if CM0D=1)
208/426
9
Bit 1 = CM1I: Compare 1 Interrupt mask.
This bit is set and cleared by software.
0: Disable compare on CMP1R interrupt
1: Enable compare on CMP1R interrupt
Bit 0 = OUI:
Overflow/Underflow interrupt mask.
This bit is set and cleared by software.
0: Disable Overflow/Underflow interrupt
1: Enable Overflow/Underflow interrupt
DMA COUNTER POINTER REGISTER (DCPR)
R240 - Read/Write
Register Page: 9
Reset value: undefined
7
DCP7 DCP6 DCP5 DCP4 DCP3 DCP2
0
DMA REG/
SRCE MEM
Bits 7:2 = DCP[7:2]: MSBs of DMA counter register address.
These are the most significant bits of the DMA
counter register address programmable by software. The DCP2 bit may also be toggled by hardware if the Timer DMA section for the Compare 0
channel is configured in Swap mode.
Bit 1 = DMA-SRCE: DMA source selection.
This bit is set and cleared by hardware.
0: DMA source is a Capture on REG0R register
1: DMA destination is a Compare on CMP0R register
Bit 0 = REG/MEM: DMA area selection.
This bit is set and cleared by software. It selects
the source and destination of the DMA area
0: DMA from/to memory
1: DMA from/to Register File
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (MFT)
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (Cont’d)
DMA ADDRESS POINTER REGISTER (DAPR)
R241 - Read/Write
Register Page: 9
Reset value: undefined
7
0
DMA PRG
DAP7 DAP6 DAP5 DAP4 DAP3 DAP2
SRCE /DAT
Bits 7:2 = DAP[7:2]: MSB of DMA address register location.
These are the most significant bits of the DMA address register location programmable by software.
The DAP2 bit may also be toggled by hardware if
the Timer DMA section for the Compare 0 channel
is configured in Swap mode.
Note: During a DMA transfer with the Register
File, the DAPR is not used; however, in Swap
mode, DAP2 is used to point to the correct table.
Bit 1 = DMA-SRCE: DMA source selection.
This bit is fixed by hardware.
0: DMA source is a Capture on REG0R register
1: DMA destination is a Compare on the CMP0R
register
Bit 0 = PRG/DAT: DMA memory selection.
This bit is set and cleared by software. It is only
meaningful if DCPR.REG/MEM=0.
0: The ISR register is used to extend the address
of data transferred by DMA (see MMU chapter).
1: The DMASR register is used to extend the address of data transferred by DMA (see MMU
chapter).
REG/MEM PRG/DAT
DMA Source/Destination
0
ISR register used to address
0
memory
DMASR register used to address
0
1
memory
Register file
1
0
Register file
1
1
INTERRUPT VECTOR REGISTER (T_IVR)
R242 - Read/Write
Register Page: 9
Reset value: xxxx xxx0
7
V4
0
V3
V2
V1
V0
W1
W0
0
This register is used as a vector, pointing to the
16-bit interrupt vectors in memory which contain
the starting addresses of the three interrupt subroutines managed by each timer.
Only one Interrupt Vector Register is available for
each timer, and it is able to manage three interrupt
groups, because the 3 least significant bits are
fixed by hardware depending on the group which
generated the interrupt request.
In order to determine which request generated the
interrupt within a group, the T_FLAGR register can
be used to check the relevant interrupt source.
Bits 7:3 = V[4:0]: MSB of the vector address.
These bits are user programmable and contain the
five most significant bits of the Timer interrupt vector addresses in memory. In any case, an 8-bit address can be used to indicate the Timer interrupt
vector locations, because they are within the first
256 memory locations (see Interrupt and DMA
chapters).
Bits 2:1 = W[1:0]: Vector address bits.
These bits are equivalent to bit 1 and bit 2 of the
Timer interrupt vector addresses in memory. They
are fixed by hardware, depending on the group of
sources which generated the interrupt request as
follows:.
W1
0
0
1
1
W0
0
1
0
1
Interrupt Source
Overflow/Underflow even interrupt
Not available
Capture event interrupt
Compare event interrupt
Bit 0 = This bit is forced by hardware to 0.
209/426
9
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (MFT)
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER (Cont’d)
INTERRUPT/DMA CONTROL REGISTER
(IDCR)
R243 - Read/Write
Register Page: 9
Reset value: 1100 0111 (C7h)
7
CPE CME DCTS
Bit 3 = SWEN: Swap function enable.
This bit is set and cleared by software.
0: Disable Swap mode
1: Enable Swap mode for both DMA channels.
0
DCTD SWEN PL2 PL1 PL0
Bit 7 = CPE: Capture 0 EOB.
This bit is set by hardware when the End Of Block
condition is reached during a Capture 0 DMA operation with the Swap mode enabled. When Swap
mode is disabled (SWEN bit = “0”), the CPE bit is
forced to 1 by hardware.
0: No end of block condition
1: Capture 0 End of block
Bits 2:0 = PL[2:0]: Interrupt/DMA priority level.
With these three bits it is possible to select the Interrupt and DMA priority level of each timer, as one
of eight levels (see Interrupt/DMA chapter).
I/O CONNECTION REGISTER (IOCR)
R248 - Read/Write
Register Page: 9
Reset value: 1111 1100 (FCh)
7
Bit 6 = CME: Compare 0 EOB.
This bit is set by hardware when the End Of Block
condition is reached during a Compare 0 DMA operation with the Swap mode enabled. When the
Swap mode is disabled (SWEN bit = “0”), the CME
bit is forced to 1 by hardware.
0: No end of block condition
1: Compare 0 End of block
Bit 5 = DCTS: DMA capture transfer source.
This bit is set and cleared by software. It selects
the source of the DMA operation related to the
channel associated with the Capture 0.
Note: The I/O port source is available only on specific devices.
0: REG0R register
1: I/O port.
Bit 4 = DCTD: DMA compare transfer destination.
This bit is set and cleared by software. It selects
the destination of the DMA operation related to the
channel associated with Compare 0.
Note: The I/O port destination is available only on
specific devices.
0: CMP0R register
1: I/O port
210/426
9
0
SC1
SC0
Bits 7:2 = not used.
Bit 1 = SC1: Select connection odd.
This bit is set and cleared by software. It selects if
the TxOUTA and TxINA pins for Timer 1 and Timer
3 are connected on-chip or not.
0: T1OUTA / T1INA and T3OUTA/ T3INA unconnected
1: T1OUTA connected internally to T1INA and
T3OUTA connected internally to T3INA
Bit 0 = SC0: Select connection even.
This bit is set and cleared by software. It selects if
the TxOUTA and TxINA pins for Timer 0 and Timer
2 are connected on-chip or not.
0: T0OUTA / T0INA and T2OUTA/ T2INA unconnected
1: T0OUTA connected internally to T0INA and
T2OUTA connected internally to T2INA
Note: Timer 1 and 2 are available only on some
devices. Refer to the device block diagram and
register map.
MULTIPROTOCOL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI-M)
10.5 MULTIPROTOCOL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI-M)
10.5.1 Introduction
The Multiprotocol Serial Communications Interface (SCI-M) offers full-duplex serial data exchange with a wide range of external equipment.
The SCI-M offers four operating modes: Asynchronous, Asynchronous with synchronous clock, Serial expansion and Synchronous.
10.5.2 Main Features
■ Full duplex synchronous and asynchronous
operation.
■ Transmit, receive, line status, and device
address interrupt generation.
■ Integral Baud Rate Generator capable of
dividing the input clock by any value from 2 to
216-1 (16 bit word) and generating the internal
16X data sampling clock for asynchronous
operation or the 1X clock for synchronous
operation.
■ Fully programmable serial interface:
– 5, 6, 7, or 8 bit word length.
– Even, odd, or no parity generation and detection.
– 0, 1, 1.5, 2, 2.5, 3 stop bit generation.
– Complete status reporting capabilities.
– Line break generation and detection.
■
■
■
■
Programmable address indication bit (wake-up
bit) and user invisible compare logic to support
multiple microcomputer networking. Optional
character search function.
Internal diagnostic capabilities:
– Local loopback for communications link fault
isolation.
– Auto-echo for communications link fault isolation.
Separate interrupt/DMA channels for transmit
and receive.
In addition, a Synchronous mode supports:
– High speed communication
– Possibility of hardware synchronization (RTS/
DCD signals).
– Programmable polarity and stand-by level for
data SIN/SOUT.
– Programmable active edge and stand-by level
for clocks CLKOUT/RXCL.
– Programmable active levels of RTS/DCD signals.
– Full Loop-Back and Auto-Echo modes for DATA, CLOCKs and CONTROLs.
Figure 106. SCI-M Block Diagram
ST9 CORE BUS
DMA
CONTROLLER
TRANSMIT
BUFFER
REGISTER
TRANSMIT
SHIFT
REGISTER
DMA
CONTROLLER
ADDRESS
COMPARE
REGISTER
RECEIVER
BUFFER
REGISTER
Frame Control
and STATUS
RECEIVER
SHIFT
REGISTER
CLOCK and
BAUD RATE
GENERATOR
ALTERNATE
FUNCTION
SOUT RTS SDS TXCLK/CLKOUT RXCLK
DCD
SIN
VA00169A
211/426
9
MULTIPROTOCOL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI-M)
MULTIPROTOCOL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
10.5.3 Functional Description
Asynchronous mode, Asynchronous mode with
synchronous clock and Serial expansion mode
The SCI-M has four operating modes:
output data with the same serial frame format. The
– Asynchronous mode
differences lie in the data sampling clock rates
(1X, 16X) and in the protocol used.
– Asynchronous mode with synchronous clock
– Serial expansion mode
– Synchronous mode
Figure 107. SCI -M Functional Schematic
RX buffer
register
XBRG
RXclk
RX shift
register
Baud rate
generator
1
Divider by 16
LBEN
0
CD
XRX
INPEN (*)
Sin
OUTPL (*)
1
Divider by 16
stand by
polarity
OCKPL (*)
0
CD
OCLK
TX buffer
register
DCDEN (*)
AEN (*)
TX shift
register
stand by
polarity
polarity
LBEN (*)
polarity
INPL (*)
INTCLK
Sout
AEN
OUTSB (*)
Enveloper
OCKSB (*)
OCLK
Polarity
Polarity
XTCLK
AEN (*)
RTSEN (*)
VR02054
TXclk / CLKout
DCD
RTS
The control signals marked with (*) are active only in synchronous mode (SMEN=1)
Note: Some pins may not be available on some devices. Refer to the device Pinout Description.
212/426
9
MULTIPROTOCOL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI-M)
MULTIPROTOCOL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
10.5.4 SCI-M Operating Modes
10.5.4.2
Asynchronous
Mode
with
Synchronous Clock
10.5.4.1 Asynchronous Mode
In this mode, data and clock are synchronous,
In this mode, data and clock can be asynchronous
each data bit is sampled once per clock period.
(the transmitter and receiver can use their own
clocks to sample received data), each data bit is
For transmit operation, a general purpose I/O port
sampled 16 times per clock period.
pin can be programmed to output the CLKOUT
signal from the baud rate generator. If the SCI is
The baud rate clock should be set to the ÷16 Mode
provided with an external transmission clock
and the frequency of the input clock (from an exsource, there will be a skew equivalent to two
ternal source or from the internal baud-rate generINTCLK periods between clock and data.
ator output) is set to suit.
Data will be transmitted on the falling edge of the
transmit clock. Received data will be latched into
the SCI on the rising edge of the receive clock.
Figure 108. Sampling Times in Asynchronous Format
SDIN
rcvck
0
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
rxd
rxclk
VR001409
LEGEND:
Serial Data Input line
SIN:
rcvck: Internal X16 Receiver Clock
Internal Serial Data Input Line
rxd:
Internal Receiver Shift Register Sampling Clock
rxclk:
213/426
9
MULTIPROTOCOL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI-M)
MULTIPROTOCOL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
10.5.4.3 Serial Expansion Mode
the Clock Configuration Register. Whenever the
SCI is to receive data in synchronous mode, the
This mode is used to communicate with an exterclock waveform must be supplied externally via
nal synchronous peripheral.
the RXCLK pin and be synchronous with the data.
The transmitter only provides the clock waveform
For correct receiver operation, the XRX bit of the
during the period that data is being transmitted on
Clock Configuration Register must be set.
the CLKOUT pin (the Data Envelope). Data is
Two external signals, Request-To-Send and Datalatched on the rising edge of this clock.
Carrier-Detect (RTS/DCD), can be enabled to synWhenever the SCI is to receive data in serial port
chronise the data exchange between two serial
expansion mode, the clock must be supplied exunits. The RTS output becomes active just before
ternally, and be synchronous with the transmitted
the first active edge of CLKOUT and indicates to
data. The SCI latches the incoming data on the risthe target device that the MCU is about to send a
ing edge of the received clock, which is input on
synchronous frame; it returns to its stand-by state
the RXCLK pin.
following the last active edge of CLKOUT (MSB
transmitted).
10.5.4.4 Synchronous Mode
The DCD input can be considered as a gate that
This mode is used to access an external synchrofilters RXCLK and informs the MCU that a transnous peripheral, dummy start/stop bits are not inmitting device is transmitting a data frame. Polarity
cluded in the data frame. Polarity, stand-by level
of RTS/DCD is individually programmable, as for
and active edges of I/O signals are fully and sepaclocks and data.
rately programmable for both inputs and outputs.
The data word is programmable from 5 to 8 bits, as
It's necessary to set the SMEN bit of the Synchrofor the other modes; parity, address/9th, stop bits
nous Input Control Register (SICR) to enable this
and break cannot be inserted into the transmitted
mode and all the related extra features (otherwise
frame. Programming of the related bits of the SCI
disabled).
control registers is irrelevant in Synchronous
The transmitter will provide the clock waveform
Mode: all the corresponding interrupt requests
only during the period when the data is being
must, in any case, be masked in order to avoid intransmitted via the CLKOUT pin, which can be encorrect operation during data reception.
abled by setting both the XTCLK and OCLK bits of
214/426
9
MULTIPROTOCOL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI-M)
MULTIPROTOCOL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
Figure 109. SCI -M Operating Modes
I/O
16
PARITY
STOP BIT
DATA
START BIT
16
16
CLOCK
I/O
DATA
PARITY
STOP BIT
START BIT
CLOCK
VA00271
VA00272
Asynchronous Mode
I/O
START BIT
(Dummy)
Asynchronous Mode
with Synchronous Clock
DATA
STOP BIT
(Dummy)
CLOCK
stand-by
DATA
stand-by
stand-by
CLOCK
stand-by
stand-by
RTS/DCD
stand-by
VA0273A
Serial Expansion Mode
VR02051
Synchronous Mode
Note: In all operating modes, the Least Significant Bit is transmitted/received first.
215/426
9
MULTIPROTOCOL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI-M)
MULTIPROTOCOL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
10.5.5 Serial Frame Format
Characters sent or received by the SCI can have
both Serial Expansion and Asynchronous modes
some or all of the features in the following format,
to indicate that the data is an address (bit set).
depending on the operating mode:
The ADDRESS/9TH bit is useful when several miSTART: the START bit indicates the beginning of
crocontrollers are exchanging data on the same
a data frame in Asynchronous modes. The START
serial bus. Individual microcontrollers can stay idle
condition is detected as a high to low transition.
on the serial bus, waiting for a transmitted adA dummy START bit is generated in Serial Expandress. When a microcontroller recognizes its own
sion mode. The START bit is not generated in
address, it can begin Data Reception, likewise, on
Synchronous mode.
the transmit side, the microcontroller can transmit
another address to begin communication with a
DATA: the DATA word length is programmable
different microcontroller.
from 5 to 8 bits, for both Synchronous and Asynchronous modes. LSB are transmitted first.
The ADDRESS/9TH bit can be used as an additional data bit or to mark control words (9th bit).
PARITY: The Parity Bit (not available in Serial Expansion mode and Synchronous mode) is optionSTOP: Indicates the end of a data frame in Asynal, and can be used with any word length. It is used
chronous modes. A dummy STOP bit is generated
for error checking and is set so as to make the total
in Serial Expansion mode. The STOP bit can be
number of high bits in DATA plus PARITY odd or
programmed to be 1, 1.5, 2, 2.5 or 3 bits long, deeven, depending on the number of “1”s in the
pending on the mode. It returns the SCI to the quiDATA field.
escent marking state (i.e., a constant high-state
condition) which lasts until a new start bit indicates
ADDRESS/9TH: The Address/9th Bit is optional
an incoming word. The STOP bit is not generated
and may be added to any word format. It is used in
in Synchronous mode.
Figure 110. SCI Character Formats
# bits
START(2)
DATA(1)
PARITY(3)
ADDRESS(2)
STOP(2)
1
5, 6, 7, 8
0, 1
0, 1
1, 1.5, 2, 2.5,
1, 2, 3
NONE
ODD
EVEN
ON
OFF
states
(1)
LSB First
Not available in Synchronous mode
(3) Not available in Serial Expansion mode
and Synchronous mode
(2)
216/426
9
16X
1X
MULTIPROTOCOL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI-M)
MULTIPROTOCOL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
10.5.5.1 Data transfer
Data to be transmitted by the SCI is first loaded by
The character match Address Interrupt mode may
the program into the Transmitter Buffer Register.
be used as a powerful character search mode,
The SCI will transfer the data into the Transmitter
generating an interrupt on reception of a predeterShift Register when the Shift Register becomes
mined character e.g. Carriage Return or End of
available (empty). The Transmitter Shift Register
Block codes (Character Match Interrupt). This is
converts the parallel data into serial format for
the only Address Interrupt Mode available in Syntransmission via the SCI Alternate Function outchronous mode.
put, Serial Data Out. On completion of the transfer,
The Line Break condition is fully supported for both
the transmitter buffer register interrupt pending bit
transmission and reception. Line Break is sent by
will be updated. If the selected word length is less
setting the SB bit (IDPR). This causes the transthan 8 bits, the unused most significant bits do not
mitter output to be held low (after all buffered data
need to be defined.
has been transmitted) for a minimum of one comIncoming serial data from the Serial Data Input pin
plete word length and until the SB bit is Reset.
is converted into parallel format by the Receiver
Break cannot be inserted into the transmitted
Shift Register. At the end of the input data frame,
frame for the Synchronous mode.
the valid data portion of the received word is transTesting of the communications channel may be
ferred from the Receiver Shift Register into the Reperformed using the built-in facilities of the SCI peceiver Buffer Register. All Receiver interrupt conripheral. Auto-Echo mode and Loop-Back mode
ditions are updated at the time of transfer. If the
may be used individually or together. In Asynchroselected character format is less than 8 bits, the
nous, Asynchronous with Synchronous Clock and
unused most significant bits will be set.
Serial Expansion modes they are available only on
The Frame Control and Status block creates and
SIN/SOUT pins through the programming of AEN/
checks the character configuration (Data length
LBEN bits in CCR. In Synchronous mode (SMEN
and number of Stop bits), as well as the source of
set) the above configurations are available on SIN/
the transmitter/receiver clock.
SOUT, RXCLK/CLKOUT and DCD/RTS pins by
programming the AEN/LBEN bits and independThe internal Baud Rate Generator contains a proently of the programmed polarity. In the Synchrogrammable divide by “N” counter which can be
nous mode case, when AEN is set, the transmitter
used to generate the clocks for the transmitter
outputs (data, clock and control) are disconnected
and/or receiver. The baud rate generator can use
from the I/O pins, which are driven directly by the
INTCLK or the Receiver clock input via RXCLK.
receiver input pins (Auto-Echo mode: SOUT=SIN,
The Address bit/D9 is optional and may be added
CLKOUT=RXCLK and RTS=DCD, even if they act
to any word in Asynchronous and Serial Expanon the internal receiver with the programmed posion modes. It is commonly used in network or malarity/edge). When LBEN is set, the receiver inputs
chine control applications. When enabled (AB set),
(data, clock and controls) are disconnected and
an address or ninth data bit can be added to a
the transmitter outputs are looped-back into the retransmitted word by setting the Set Address bit
ceiver section (Loop-Back mode: SIN=SOUT, RX(SA). This is then appended to the next word enCLK=CLKOUT, DCD=RTS. The output pins are
tered into the (empty) Transmitter Buffer Register
locked to their programmed stand-by level and the
and then cleared by hardware. On character input,
status of the INPL, XCKPL, DCDPL, OUTPL,
a set Address Bit can indicate that the data preOCKPL and RTSPL bits in the SICR register are irceding the bit is an address which may be comrelevant). Refer to Figure 111, Figure 112, and
pared in hardware with the value in the Address
Figure 113 for these different configurations.
Compare Register (ACR) to generate an Address
Table 44. Address Interrupt Modes
Match interrupt when equal.
The Address bit and Address Comparison Register can also be combined to generate four different
types of Address Interrupt to suit different protocols, based on the status of the Address Mode Enable bit (AMEN) and the Address Mode bit (AM) in
the CHCR register.
If 9th Data Bit is set (1)
If Character Match
If Character Match and 9th Data Bit is set(1)
If Character Match Immediately Follows BREAK (1)
(1) Not
available in Synchronous mode
217/426
9
MULTIPROTOCOL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI-M)
MULTIPROTOCOL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
Figure 111. Auto Echo Configuration
DCD
TRANSMITTER
SOUT
TRANSMITTER
RTS
RXCLK
RECEIVER
SOUT
RECEIVER
SIN
SIN
CLKOUT
VR00210A
VR000210
All modes except Synchronous
Synchronous mode (SMEN=1)
Figure 112. Loop Back Configuration
DCD
TRANSMITTER
LOGICAL 1
SOUT
RTS
stand-by
value
TRANSMITTER
clock
RXCLK
RECEIVER
SIN
CLKOUT
stand-by
value
SOUT
data
RECEIVER
SIN
stand-by
value
VR00211A
VR000211
All modes except Synchronous
Synchronous mode (SMEN=1)
Figure 113. Auto Echo and Loop-Back Configuration
DCD
TRANSMITTER
SOUT
TRANSMITTER
RTS
clock
RECEIVER
SIN
RXCLK
SOUT
data
RECEIVER
SIN
CLKOUT
VR000212
All modes except Synchronous
218/426
9
VR00212A
Synchronous mode (SMEN=1)
MULTIPROTOCOL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI-M)
MULTIPROTOCOL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
10.5.6 Clocks And Serial Transmission Rates
The output of the Baud Rate generator has a precise 50% duty cycle. The Baud Rate generator can
The communication bit rate of the SCI transmitter
use INTCLK for the input clock source. In this
and receiver sections can be provided from the incase, INTCLK (and therefore the MCU Xtal)
ternal Baud Rate Generator or from external
should be chosen to provide a suitable frequency
sources. The bit rate clock is divided by 16 in
for division by the Baud Rate Generator to give the
Asynchronous mode (CD in CCR reset), or undirequired transmit and receive bit rates. Suitable
vided in the 3 other modes (CD set).
INTCLK frequencies and the respective divider
With INTCLK running at 24MHz and no external
values for standard Baud rates are shown in Table
Clock provided, a maximum bit rate of 3MBaud
45.
and 750KBaud is available in undivided and divide
10.5.7 SCI -M Initialization Procedure
by-16-mode respectively.
Writing to either of the two Baud Rate Generator
With INTCLK running at 24MHz and an external
Registers immediately disables and resets the SCI
Clock provided through the RXCLK/TXCLK lines,
baud rate generator, as well as the transmitter and
a maximum bit rate of 3MBaud and 375KBaud is
receiver circuitry.
available in undivided and divided by 16 mode reAfter writing to the second Baud Rate Generator
spectively (see Figure 115).
Register, the transmitter and receiver circuits are
External Clock Sources. The External Clock inenabled. The Baud Rate Generator will load the
put pin TXCLK may be programmed by the XTCLK
new value and start counting.
and OCLK bits in the CCR register as: the transmit
To initialize the SCI, the user should first initialize
clock input, Baud Rate Generator output (allowing
the most significant byte of the Baud Rate Generan external divider circuit to provide the receive
ator Register; this will reset all SCI circuitry. The
clock for split rate transmit and receive), or as
user should then initialize all other SCI registers
CLKOUT output in Synchronous and Serial Ex(SICR/SOCR included) for the desired operating
pansion modes. The RXCLK Receive clock input
mode and then, to enable the SCI, he should iniis enabled by the XRX bit, this input should be set
tialize the least significant byte Baud Rate Generin accordance with the setting of the CD bit.
ator Register.
Baud Rate Generator. The internal Baud Rate
'On-the-Fly' modifications of the control registers'
Generator consists of a 16-bit programmable dicontent during transmitter/receiver operations, alvide by “N” counter which can be used to generate
though possible, can corrupt data and produce unthe transmitter and/or receiver clocks. The minidesirable spikes on the I/O lines (data, clock and
mum baud rate divisor is 2 and the maximum divicontrol). Furthermore, modifying the control regissor is 216-1. After initialising the baud rate generator, the divisor value is immediately loaded into the
ters' content without reinitialising the SCI circuitry
counter. This prevents potentially long random
(during stand-by cycles, waiting to transmit or recounts on the initial load.
ceive data) must be kept carefully under control by
The Baud Rate generator frequency is equal to the
software to avoid spurious data being transmitted
Input Clock frequency divided by the Divisor value.
or received.
WARNING: Programming the baud rate divider to
Note: For synchronous receive operation, the data
0 or 1 will stop the divider.
and receive clock must not exhibit significant skew
between clock and data. The received data and
clock are internally synchronized to INTCLK.
Figure 114. SCI-M Baud Rate Generator Initialization Sequence
MOST SIGNIFICANT
BYTE INITIALIZATION
SELECT SCI
WORKING MODE
LEAST SIGNIFICANT
BYTE INITIALIZATION
219/426
9
MULTIPROTOCOL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI-M)
MULTIPROTOCOL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
Table 45. SCI-M Baud Rate Generator Divider Values Example 1
INTCLK: 19660.800 KHz
Baud
Rate
Clock
Factor
Desired Freq
(kHz)
Divisor
Dec
Hex
Actual
Baud
Rate
Actual Freq
(kHz)
Deviation
50.00
16 X
0.80000
24576
6000
50.00
0.80000
0.0000%
75.00
16 X
1.20000
16384
4000
75.00
1.20000
0.0000%
110.00
16 X
1.76000
11170
2BA2
110.01
1.76014
-0.00081%
300.00
16 X
4.80000
4096
1000
300.00
4.80000
0.0000%
600.00
16 X
9.60000
2048
800
600.00
9.60000
0.0000%
1200.00
16 X
19.20000
1024
400
1200.00
19.20000
0.0000%
2400.00
16 X
38.40000
512
200
2400.00
38.40000
0.0000%
4800.00
16 X
76.80000
256
100
4800.00
76.80000
0.0000%
9600.00
16 X
153.60000
128
80
9600.00
153.60000
0.0000%
19200.00
16 X
307.20000
64
40
19200.00
307.20000
0.0000%
38400.00
16 X
614.40000
32
20
38400.00
614.40000
0.0000%
76800.00
16 X
1228.80000
16
10
76800.00
1228.80000
0.0000%
Table 46. SCI-M Baud Rate Generator Divider Values Example 2
INTCLK: 24576 KHz
Baud
Rate
Desired Freq
(kHz)
Divisor
Dec
Hex
Actual
Baud
Rate
Actual Freq
(kHz)
Deviation
50.00
16 X
0.80000
30720
7800
50.00
0.80000
0.0000%
75.00
16 X
1.20000
20480
5000
75.00
1.20000
0.0000%
110.00
16 X
1.76000
13963
383B
110.01
1.76014
-0.00046%
300.00
16 X
4.80000
5120
1400
300.00
4.80000
0.0000%
600.00
16 X
9.60000
2560
A00
600.00
9.60000
0.0000%
1200.00
16 X
19.20000
1280
500
1200.00
19.20000
0.0000%
2400.00
16 X
38.40000
640
280
2400.00
38.40000
0.0000%
4800.00
16 X
76.80000
320
140
4800.00
76.80000
0.0000%
9600.00
16 X
153.60000
160
A0
9600.00
153.60000
0.0000%
19200.00
16 X
307.20000
80
50
19200.00
307.20000
0.0000%
38400.00
16 X
614.40000
40
28
38400.00
614.40000
0.0000%
76800.00
16 X
1228.80000
20
14
76800.00
1228.80000
0.0000%
220/426
9
Clock
Factor
MULTIPROTOCOL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI-M)
MULTIPROTOCOL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
10.5.8 Input Signals
SIN: Serial Data Input. This pin is the serial data
only the data portion of the frame and its stand-by
input to the SCI receiver shift register.
state is high: data is valid on the rising edge of the
clock. Even in Synchronous mode CLKOUT will
TXCLK: External Transmitter Clock Input. This
only clock the data portion of the frame, but the
pin is the external input clock driving the SCI transstand-by level and active edge polarity are promitter. The TXCLK frequency must be greater than
grammable by the user.
or equal to 16 times the transmitter data rate (depending whether the X16 or the X1 clock have
When Synchronous mode is disabled (SMEN in
been selected). A 50% duty cycle is required for
SICR is reset), the state of the XTCLK and OCLK
this input and must have a period of at least twice
bits in CCR determine the source of CLKOUT; '11'
INTCLK. The use of the TXCLK pin is optional.
enables the Serial Expansion Mode.
RXCLK: External Receiver Clock Input. This inWhen the Synchronous mode is enabled (SMEN
put is the clock to the SCI receiver when using an
in SICR is set), the state of the XTCLK and OCLK
external clock source connected to the baud rate
bits in CCR determine the source of CLKOUT; '00'
generator. INTCLK is normally the clock source. A
disables it for PLM applications.
50% duty cycle is required for this input and must
RTS: Request To Send. This output Alternate
have a period of at least twice INTCLK. Use of RXFunction is only enabled in Synchronous mode; it
CLK is optional.
becomes active when the Least Significant Bit of
DCD: Data Carrier Detect. This input is enabled
the data frame is sent to the Serial Output Pin
only in Synchronous mode; it works as a gate for
(SOUT) and indicates to the target device that the
the RXCLK clock and informs the MCU that an
MCU is about to send a synchronous frame; it reemitting device is transmitting a synchronous
turns to its stand-by value just after the last active
frame. The active level can be programmed as 1
edge of CLKOUT (MSB transmitted). The active
or 0 and must be provided at least one INTCLK pelevel can be programmed high or low.
riod before the first active edge of the input clock.
SDS: Synchronous Data Strobe. This output Al10.5.9 Output Signals
ternate function is only enabled in Synchronous
mode; it becomes active high when the Least SigSOUT: Serial Data Output. This Alternate Funcnificant Bit is sent to the Serial Output Pins
tion output signal is the serial data output for the
(SOUT) and indicates to the target device that the
SCI transmitter in all operating modes.
MCU is about to send the first bit for each synchroCLKOUT: Clock Output. The alternate Function
nous frame. It is active high on the first bit and it is
of this pin outputs either the data clock from the
low for all the rest of the frame. The active level
transmitter in Serial Expansion or Synchronous
can not be programmed.
modes, or the clock output from the Baud Rate
Generator. In Serial expansion mode it will clock
Figure 115. Receiver and Transmitter Clock Frequencies
External RXCLK
Receiver Clock Frequency
Internal Receiver Clock
External TXCLK
Transmitter Clock Frequency
Internal Transmitter Clock
Min
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Max
INTCLK/8
INTCLK/4
INTCLK/8
INTCLK/2
INTCLK/8
INTCLK/4
INTCLK/8
INTCLK/2
Conditions
1x mode
16x mode
1x mode
16x mode
1x mode
16x mode
1x mode
16x mode
Note: The internal receiver and transmitter clocks
are the ones applied to the Tx and Rx shift registers (see Figure 106).
221/426
9
MULTIPROTOCOL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI-M)
MULTIPROTOCOL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
10.5.10 Interrupts and DMA
trigger. These bits should be reset by the programmer during the Interrupt Service routine.
10.5.10.1 Interrupts
The four major levels of interrupt are encoded in
The SCI can generate interrupts as a result of sevhardware to provide two bits of the interrupt vector
eral conditions. Receiver interrupts include data
register, allowing the position of the block of pointpending, receive errors (overrun, framing and parer vectors to be resolved to an 8 byte block size.
ity), as well as address or break pending. Transmitter interrupts are software selectable for either
The SCI interrupts have an internal priority strucTransmit Buffer Register Empty (BSN set) or for
ture in order to resolve simultaneous events. Refer
Transmit Shift Register Empty (BSN reset) condialso to Section 10.5.4 SCI-M Operating Modes for
tions.
more details relating to Synchronous mode.
Typical usage of the Interrupts generated by the
Table 47. SCI Interrupt Internal Priority
SCI peripheral are illustrated in Figure 116.
Receive DMA Request
Highest Priority
The SCI peripheral is able to generate interrupt reTransmit DMA Request
quests as a result of a number of events, several
of which share the same interrupt vector. It is
Receive Interrupt
therefore necessary to poll S_ISR, the Interrupt
Transmit Interrupt
Lowest Priority
Status Register, in order to determine the active
222/426
9
MULTIPROTOCOL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI-M)
MULTIPROTOCOL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
Table 48. SCI-M Interrupt Vectors
Interrupt Source
Vector Address
Transmitter Buffer or Shift Register Empty
Transmit DMA end of Block
xxx x110
Received Data Pending
Receive DMA end of Block
xxxx x100
Break Detector
Address Word Match
xxxx x010
Receiver Error
xxxx x000
Figure 116. SCI-M Interrupts: Example of Typical Usage
ADDRESS AFTER BREAK CONDITION
DATA
BREAK
ADDRESS
MATCH
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
INTERRUPT
DATA
INTERRUPT
BREAK
INTERRUPT
ADDRESS
INTERRUPT
BREAK
DATA
INTERRUPT
ADDRESS
NO MATCH
DATA
BREAK
INTERRUPT
ADDRESS WORD MARKED BY D9=1
DATA
ADDRESS
MATCH
DATA
ADDRESS
INTERRUPT
DATA
DATA
ADDRESS
NO MATCH
DATA
DATA
INTERRUPT
DATA
DATA
INTERRUPT
INTERRUPT
CHARACTER SEARCH MODE
DATA
DATA
DATA
INTERRUPT
MATCH
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
CHAR MATCH
INTERRUPT DATA
INTERRUPT DATA
DATA
INTERRUPT
INTERRUPT
INTERRUPT
D9 ACTING AS DATA CONTROL WITH SEPARATE INTERRUPT
DATA
DATA
DATA
INTERRUPT
D9=1
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
D9=1
DATA
INTERRUPT DATA
INTERRUPT DATA
INTERRUPT
INTERRUPT
INTERRUPT
VA00270
223/426
9
MULTIPROTOCOL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI-M)
MULTIPROTOCOL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
10.5.10.2 DMA
The transfer of the last byte of a DMA data block
will be followed by a DMA End Of Block transmit or
Two DMA channels are associated with the SCI,
receive interrupt, setting the TXEOB or RXEOB
for transmit and for receive. These follow the regbit.
ister scheme as described in the DMA chapter.
A typical Transmission End Of Block interrupt rouDMA Reception
tine will perform the following actions:
To perform a DMA transfer in reception mode:
1. Restore the DMA counter register (TDCPR).
1. Initialize the DMA counter (RDCPR) and DMA
2. Restore the DMA address register (TDAPR).
address (RDAPR) registers
3. Clear the Transmitter Shift Register Empty bit
2. Enable DMA by setting the RXD bit in the IDPR
TXSEM in the S_ISR register to avoid spurious
register.
interrupts.
3. DMA transfer is started when data is received
4. Clear the Transmitter End Of Block (TXEOB)
by the SCI.
pending bit in the IMR register.
5. Set the TXD bit in the IDPR register to enable
DMA Transmission
DMA.
To perform a DMA transfer in transmission mode:
6. Load the Transmitter Buffer Register (TXBR)
with the next byte to transmit.
1. Initialize the DMA counter (TDCPR) and DMA
address (TDAPR) registers.
The above procedure handles the case where a
further DMA transfer is to be performed.
2. Enable DMA by setting the TXD bit in the IDPR
register.
3. DMA transfer is started by writing a byte in the
Error Interrupt Handling
Transmitter Buffer register (TXBR).
If an error interrupt occurs while DMA is enabled in
If this byte is the first data byte to be transmitted,
reception mode, DMA transfer is stopped.
the DMA counter and address registers must be
To resume DMA transfer, the error interrupt haninitialized to begin DMA transmission at the secdling routine must clear the corresponding error
ond byte. Alternatively, DMA transfer can be startflag. In the case of an Overrun error, the routine
ed by writing a dummy byte in the TXBR register.
must also read the RXBR register.
DMA Interrupts
When DMA is active, the Received Data Pending
Character Search Mode with DMA
and the Transmitter Shift Register Empty interrupt
sources are replaced by the DMA End Of Block reIn Character Search Mode with DMA, when a
ceive and transmit interrupt sources.
character match occurs, this character is not transferred. DMA continues with the next received charNote: To handle DMA transfer correctly in transacter. To avoid an Overrun error occurring, the
mission, the BSN bit in the IMR register must be
Character Match interrupt service routine must
cleared. This selects the Transmitter Shift Register
read the RXBR register.
Empty event as the DMA interrupt source.
224/426
9
MULTIPROTOCOL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI-M)
MULTIPROTOCOL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
10.5.11 Register Description
The SCI-M registers are located in the following
pages in the ST9:
SCI-M number 0: page 24 (18h)
SCI-M number 1: page 25 (19h) (when present)
The SCI is controlled by the following registers:
Address
R240 (F0h)
Register
Receiver DMA Transaction Counter Pointer Register
R241 (F1h)
Receiver DMA Source Address Pointer Register
R242 (F2h)
Transmitter DMA Transaction Counter Pointer Register
R243 (F3h)
Transmitter DMA Destination Address Pointer Register
R244 (F4h)
Interrupt Vector Register
R245 (F5h)
Address Compare Register
R246 (F6h)
Interrupt Mask Register
R247 (F7h)
Interrupt Status Register
R248 (F8h)
Receive Buffer Register same Address as Transmitter Buffer Register (Read Only)
R248 (F8h)
Transmitter Buffer Register same Address as Receive Buffer Register (Write only)
R249 (F9h)
Interrupt/DMA Priority Register
R250 (FAh)
Character Configuration Register
R251 (FBh)
Clock Configuration Register
R252 (FCh)
Baud Rate Generator High Register
R253 (FDh)
Baud Rate Generator Low Register
R254 (FEh)
Synchronous Input Control Register
R255 (FFh)
Synchronous Output Control Register
225/426
9
MULTIPROTOCOL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI-M)
MULTIPROTOCOL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
RECEIVER DMA COUNTER POINTER (RDCPR)
TRANSMITTER DMA COUNTER POINTER
(TDCPR)
R240 - Read/Write
R242 - Read/Write
Reset value: undefined
Reset value: undefined
7
0
7
RC7
RC6
RC5
RC4
RC3
RC2
RC1
TC7
Bit 7:1 = RC[7:1]: Receiver DMA Counter Pointer.
These bits contain the address of the receiver
DMA transaction counter in the Register File.
Bit 0 = RR/M: Receiver Register File/Memory Selector.
0: Select Memory space as destination.
1: Select the Register File as destination.
RECEIVER DMA ADDRESS POINTER (RDAPR)
R241 - Read/Write
Reset value: undefined
7
RA7
0
RA6
RA5
RA4
RA3
RA2
RA1
0
RR/M
TC6
TC5
TC4
TC3
TC2
TC1
Bit 7:1 = TC[7:1]: Transmitter DMA Counter Pointer.
These bits contain the address of the transmitter
DMA transaction counter in the Register File.
Bit 0 = TR/M: Transmitter Register File/Memory
Selector.
0: Select Memory space as source.
1: Select the Register File as source.
TRANSMITTER DMA ADDRESS POINTER
(TDAPR)
R243 - Read/Write
Reset value: undefined
RPS
7
Bit 7:1 = RA[7:1]: Receiver DMA Address Pointer.
These bits contain the address of the pointer (in
the Register File) of the receiver DMA data source.
Bit 0 = RPS: Receiver DMA Memory Pointer Selector.
This bit is only significant if memory has been selected for DMA transfers (RR/M = 0 in the RDCPR
register).
0: Select ISR register for receiver DMA transfers
address extension.
1: Select DMASR register for receiver DMA transfers address extension.
226/426
9
TR/M
TA7
0
TA6
TA5
TA4
TA3
TA2
TA1
TPS
Bit 7:1 = TA[7:1]: Transmitter DMA Address Pointer.
These bits contain the address of the pointer (in
the Register File) of the transmitter DMA data
source.
Bit 0 = TPS: Transmitter DMA Memory Pointer Selector.
This bit is only significant if memory has been selected for DMA transfers (TR/M = 0 in the TDCPR
register).
0: Select ISR register for transmitter DMA transfers
address extension.
1: Select DMASR register for transmitter DMA
transfers address extension.
MULTIPROTOCOL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI-M)
MULTIPROTOCOL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
INTERRUPT VECTOR REGISTER (S_IVR)
ADDRESS/DATA COMPARE REGISTER (ACR)
R244 - Read/Write
R245 - Read/Write
Reset value: undefined
Reset value: undefined
7
V7
V6
V5
V4
V3
EV2
EV1
0
7
0
AC7
Bit 7:3 = V[7:3]: SCI Interrupt Vector Base Address.
User programmable interrupt vector bits for transmitter and receiver.
Bit 2:1 = EV[2:1]: Encoded Interrupt Source.
Both bits EV2 and EV1 are read only and set by
hardware according to the interrupt source.
EV2 EV1
0
AC6
AC5
AC4
AC3
AC2
AC1
AC0
Bit 7:0 = AC[7:0]: Address/Compare Character.
With either 9th bit address mode, address after
break mode, or character search, the received address will be compared to the value stored in this
register. When a valid address matches this register content, the Receiver Address Pending bit
(RXAP in the S_ISR register) is set. After the
RXAP bit is set in an addressed mode, all received
data words will be transferred to the Receiver Buffer Register.
Interrupt source
0
0
Receiver Error (Overrun, Framing, Parity)
0
1
Break Detect or Address Match
1
0
Received Data Pending/Receiver DMA
End of Block
1
1
Transmitter buffer or shift register empty
transmitter DMA End of Block
Bit 0 = D0: This bit is forced by hardware to 0.
227/426
9
MULTIPROTOCOL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI-M)
MULTIPROTOCOL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
INTERRUPT MASK REGISTER (IMR)
Bit 4 = RXE: Receiver Error Mask.
0: Disable Receiver error interrupts (OE, PE, and
R246 - Read/Write
FE pending bits in the S_ISR register).
Reset value: 0xx00000
1: Enable Receiver error interrupts.
7
BSN
0
RXEOB TXEOB
RXE
RXA
RXB
RXDI
TXDI
Bit 7 = BSN: Buffer or shift register empty interrupt.
This bit selects the source of the transmitter register empty interrupt.
0: Select a Shift Register Empty as source of a
Transmitter Register Empty interrupt.
1: Select a Buffer Register Empty as source of a
Transmitter Register Empty interrupt.
Bit 6 = RXEOB: Received End of Block.
This bit is set by hardware only and must be reset
by software. RXEOB is set after a receiver DMA
cycle to mark the end of a data block.
0: Clear the interrupt request.
1: Mark the end of a received block of data.
Bit 5 = TXEOB: Transmitter End of Block.
This bit is set by hardware only and must be reset
by software. TXEOB is set after a transmitter DMA
cycle to mark the end of a data block.
0: Clear the interrupt request.
1: Mark the end of a transmitted block of data.
228/426
9
Bit 3 = RXA: Receiver Address Mask.
0: Disable Receiver Address interrupt (RXAP
pending bit in the S_ISR register).
1: Enable Receiver Address interrupt.
Bit 2 = RXB: Receiver Break Mask.
0: Disable Receiver Break interrupt (RXBP pending bit in the S_ISR register).
1: Enable Receiver Break interrupt.
Bit 1 = RXDI: Receiver Data Interrupt Mask.
0: Disable Receiver Data Pending and Receiver
End of Block interrupts (RXDP and RXEOB
pending bits in the S_ISR register).
1: Enable Receiver Data Pending and Receiver
End of Block interrupts.
Note: RXDI has no effect on DMA transfers.
Bit 0 = TXDI: Transmitter Data Interrupt Mask.
0: Disable Transmitter Buffer Register Empty,
Transmitter Shift Register Empty, or Transmitter
End of Block interrupts (TXBEM, TXSEM, and
TXEOB bits in the S_ISR register).
1: Enable Transmitter Buffer Register Empty,
Transmitter Shift Register Empty, or Transmitter
End of Block interrupts.
Note: TXDI has no effect on DMA transfers.
MULTIPROTOCOL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI-M)
MULTIPROTOCOL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
INTERRUPT STATUS REGISTER (S_ISR)
Note: The source of this interrupt is given by the
couple of bits (AMEN, AM) as detailed in the IDPR
R247 - Read/Write
register description.
Reset value: undefined
7
OE
0
FE
PE
RXAP RXBP RXDP TXBEM
TXSEM
Bit 7 = OE: Overrun Error Pending.
This bit is set by hardware if the data in the Receiver Buffer Register was not read by the CPU before
the next character was transferred into the Receiver Buffer Register (the previous data is lost).
0: No Overrun Error.
1: Overrun Error occurred.
Bit 6 = FE: Framing Error Pending bit.
This bit is set by hardware if the received data
word did not have a valid stop bit.
0: No Framing Error.
1: Framing Error occurred.
Note: In the case where a framing error occurs
when the SCI is programmed in address mode
and is monitoring an address, the interrupt is asserted and the corrupted data element is transferred to the Receiver Buffer Register.
Bit 5 = PE: Parity Error Pending.
This bit is set by hardware if the received word did
not have the correct even or odd parity bit.
0: No Parity Error.
1: Parity Error occurred.
Bit 4 = RXAP: Receiver Address Pending.
RXAP is set by hardware after an interrupt acknowledged in the address mode.
0: No interrupt in address mode.
1: Interrupt in address mode occurred.
Bit 3 = RXBP: Receiver Break Pending bit.
This bit is set by hardware if the received data input is held low for the full word transmission time
(start bit, data bits, parity bit, stop bit).
0: No break received.
1: Break event occurred.
Bit 2 = RXDP: Receiver Data Pending bit.
This bit is set by hardware when data is loaded
into the Receiver Buffer Register.
0: No data received.
1: Data received in Receiver Buffer Register.
Bit 1 = TXBEM: Transmitter Buffer Register Empty.
This bit is set by hardware if the Buffer Register is
empty.
0: No Buffer Register Empty event.
1: Buffer Register Empty.
Bit 0 = TXSEM: Transmitter Shift Register Empty.
This bit is set by hardware if the Shift Register has
completed the transmission of the available data.
0: No Shift Register Empty event.
1: Shift Register Empty.
Note: The Interrupt Status Register bits can be reset but cannot be set by the user. The interrupt
source must be cleared by resetting the related bit
when executing the interrupt service routine (naturally the other pending bits should not be reset).
229/426
9
MULTIPROTOCOL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI-M)
MULTIPROTOCOL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
RECEIVER BUFFER REGISTER (RXBR)
TRANSMITTER BUFFER REGISTER (TXBR)
R248 - Read only
R248 - Write only
Reset value: undefined
Reset value: undefined
7
RD7
RD6
RD5
RD4
RD3
RD2
RD1
0
7
RD0
TD7
0
TD6
TD5
TD4
TD3
TD2
TD1
TD0
Bit 7:0 = RD[7:0]: Received Data.
This register stores the data portion of the received word. The data will be transferred from the
Receiver Shift Register into the Receiver Buffer
Register at the end of the word. All receiver interrupt conditions will be updated at the time of transfer. If the selected character format is less than 8
bits, unused most significant bits will forced to “1”.
Bit 7:0 = TD[7:0]: Transmit Data.
The ST9 core will load the data for transmission
into this register. The SCI will transfer the data
from the buffer into the Shift Register when available. At the transfer, the Transmitter Buffer Register
interrupt is updated. If the selected word format is
less than 8 bits, the unused most significant bits
are not significant.
Note: RXBR and TXBR are two physically different registers located at the same address.
Note: TXBR and RXBR are two physically different registers located at the same address.
230/426
9
MULTIPROTOCOL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI-M)
MULTIPROTOCOL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
INTERRUPT/DMA PRIORITY REGISTER (IDPR)
mat. If software does not reset SB before the minimum break length has finished, the break condiR249 - Read/Write
tion will continue until software resets SB. The SCI
Reset value: undefined
terminates the break condition with a high level on
the transmitter data output for one transmission
7
0
clock period.
AMEN
SB
SA
RXD
TXD
PRL2
PRL1
PRL0
Bit 7 = AMEN: Address Mode Enable.
This bit, together with the AM bit (in the CHCR register), decodes the desired addressing/9th data
bit/character match operation.
In Address mode the SCI monitors the input serial
data until its address is detected
AMEN
AM
0
0
Address interrupt if 9th data bit = 1
0
1
Address interrupt if character match
1
0
Address interrupt if character match
and 9th data bit =1
1
1
Address interrupt if character match
with word immediately following Break
Note: Upon reception of address, the RXAP bit (in
the Interrupt Status Register) is set and an interrupt cycle can begin. The address character will
not be transferred into the Receiver Buffer Register but all data following the matched SCI address
and preceding the next address word will be transferred to the Receiver Buffer Register and the
proper interrupts updated. If the address does not
match, all data following this unmatched address
will not be transferred to the Receiver Buffer Register.
In any of the cases the RXAP bit must be reset by
software before the next word is transferred into
the Buffer Register.
When AMEN is reset and AM is set, a useful character search function is performed. This allows the
SCI to generate an interrupt whenever a specific
character is encountered (e.g. Carriage Return).
Bit 6 = SB: Set Break.
0: Stop the break transmission after minimum
break length.
1: Transmit a break following the transmission of all
data in the Transmitter Shift Register and the
Buffer Register.
Note: The break will be a low level on the transmitter data output for at least one complete word for-
Bit 5 = SA: Set Address.
If an address/9th data bit mode is selected, SA value will be loaded for transmission into the Shift
Register. This bit is cleared by hardware after its
load.
0: Indicate it is not an address word.
1: Indicate an address word.
Note: Proper procedure would be, when the
Transmitter Buffer Register is empty, to load the
value of SA and then load the data into the Transmitter Buffer Register.
Bit 4 = RXD: Receiver DMA Mask.
This bit is reset by hardware when the transaction
counter value decrements to zero. At that time a
receiver End of Block interrupt can occur.
0: Disable Receiver DMA request (the RXDP bit in
the S_ISR register can request an interrupt).
1: Enable Receiver DMA request (the RXDP bit in
the S_ISR register can request a DMA transfer).
Bit 3 = TXD: Transmitter DMA Mask.
This bit is reset by hardware when the transaction
counter value decrements to zero. At that time a
transmitter End Of Block interrupt can occur.
0: Disable Transmitter DMA request (TXBEM or
TXSEM bits in S_ISR can request an interrupt).
1: Enable Transmitter DMA request (TXBEM or
TXSEM bits in S_ISR can request a DMA transfer).
Bit 2:0 = PRL[2:0]: SCI Interrupt/DMA Priority bits.
The priority for the SCI is encoded with
(PRL2,PRL1,PRL0). Priority level 0 is the highest,
while level 7 represents no priority.
When the user has defined a priority level for the
SCI, priorities within the SCI are hardware defined.
These SCI internal priorities are:
Receiver DMA request
Transmitter DMA request
Receiver interrupt
Transmitter interrupt
highest priority
lowest priority
231/426
9
MULTIPROTOCOL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI-M)
MULTIPROTOCOL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
CHARACTER CONFIGURATION REGISTER
(CHCR)
Bit 4 = AB: Address/9th Bit.
R250 - Read/Write
0: No Address/9th bit.
1: Address/9th bit included in the character format
Reset value: undefined
between the parity bit and the first stop bit. This
7
0
bit can be used to address the SCI or as a ninth
data bit.
AM
EP
PEN
AB
SB1
SB0
WL1
WL0
Bit 3:2 = SB[1:0]: Number of Stop Bits..
Bit 7 = AM: Address Mode.
This bit, together with the AMEN bit (in the IDPR
register), decodes the desired addressing/9th data
bit/character match operation. Please refer to the
table in the IDPR register description.
Bit 6 = EP: Even Parity.
0: Select odd parity (when parity is enabled).
1: Select even parity (when parity is enabled).
SB1
SB0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Number of stop bits
in 16X mode
in 1X mode
1
1
1.5
2
2
2
2.5
3
Bit 1:0 = WL[1:0]: Number of Data Bits
Bit 5 = PEN: Parity Enable.
0: No parity bit.
1: Parity bit generated (transmit data) or checked
(received data).
Note: If the address/9th bit is enabled, the parity
bit will precede the address/9th bit (the 9th bit is
never included in the parity calculation).
232/426
9
WL1
0
0
1
1
WL0
0
1
0
1
Data Length
5 bits
6 bits
7 bits
8 bits
MULTIPROTOCOL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI-M)
MULTIPROTOCOL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
CLOCK CONFIGURATION REGISTER (CCR)
0: Select 16X clock mode for both receiver and
transmitter.
R251 - Read/Write
1: Select 1X clock mode for both receiver and
Reset value: 0000 0000 (00h)
transmitter.
7
XTCLK
0
OCLK
XRX
XBRG
CD AEN
LBEN
STPEN
Bit 7 = XTCLK
This bit, together with the OCLK bit, selects the
source for the transmitter clock. The following table shows the coding of XTCLK and OCLK.
Bit 6 = OCLK
This bit, together with the XTCLK bit, selects the
source for the transmitter clock. The following table shows the coding of XTCLK and OCLK.
XTCLK
OCLK
0
0
Pin is used as a general I/O
0
1
Pin = TXCLK (used as an input)
1
0
Pin = CLKOUT (outputs the Baud
Rate Generator clock)
1
1
Pin = CLKOUT (outputs the Serial
expansion and synchronous
mode clock)
Note: In 1X clock mode, the transmitter will transmit data at one data bit per clock period. In 16X
mode each data bit period will be 16 clock periods
long.
Bit 2 = AEN: Auto Echo Enable.
0: No auto echo mode.
1: Put the SCI in auto echo mode.
Note: Auto Echo mode has the following effect:
the SCI transmitter is disconnected from the dataout pin SOUT, which is driven directly by the receiver data-in pin, SIN. The receiver remains connected to SIN and is operational, unless loopback
mode is also selected.
Pin Function
Bit 5 = XRX: External Receiver Clock Source.
0: External receiver clock source not used.
1: Select the external receiver clock source.
Note: The external receiver clock frequency must
be 16 times the data rate, or equal to the data rate,
depending on the status of the CD bit.
Bit 4 = XBRG: Baud Rate Generator Clock
Source.
0: Select INTCLK for the baud rate generator.
1: Select the external receiver clock for the baud
rate generator.
Bit 1 = LBEN: Loopback Enable.
0: No loopback mode.
1: Put the SCI in loopback mode.
Note: In this mode, the transmitter output is set to
a high level, the receiver input is disconnected,
and the output of the Transmitter Shift Register is
looped back into the Receiver Shift Register input.
All interrupt sources (transmitter and receiver) are
operational.
Bit 0 = STPEN: Stick Parity Enable.
0: The transmitter and the receiver will follow the
parity of even parity bit EP in the CHCR register.
1: The transmitter and the receiver will use the opposite parity type selected by the even parity bit
EP in the CHCR register.
EP
SPEN
0 (odd)
1 (even)
0 (odd)
1 (even)
0
0
1
1
Parity (Transmitter &
Receiver)
Odd
Even
Even
Odd
Bit 3 = CD: Clock Divisor.
The status of CD will determine the SCI configuration (synchronous/asynchronous).
233/426
9
MULTIPROTOCOL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI-M)
MULTIPROTOCOL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
BAUD RATE GENERATOR HIGH REGISTER
Bit 6 = INPL: SIN Input Polarity.
(BRGHR)
0: Polarity not inverted.
1: Polarity inverted.
R252 - Read/Write
Note: INPL only affects received data. In AutoReset value: undefined
Echo mode SOUT = SIN even if INPL is set. In
Loop-Back mode the state of the INPL bit is irrele15
8
vant.
BG15
BG14
BG13
BG12
BG11
BG10
BG9
BG8
BAUD RATE GENERATOR LOW REGISTER
(BRGLR)
R253 - Read/Write
Reset value: undefined
7
BG7
0
BG6
BG5
BG4
BG3
BG2
BG1
BG0
Bit 15:0 = Baud Rate Generator MSB and LSB.
The Baud Rate generator is a programmable divide by “N” counter which can be used to generate
the clocks for the transmitter and/or receiver. This
counter divides the clock input by the value in the
Baud Rate Generator Register. The minimum
baud rate divisor is 2 and the maximum divisor is
216-1. After initialization of the baud rate generator, the divisor value is immediately loaded into the
counter. This prevents potentially long random
counts on the initial load. If set to 0 or 1, the Baud
Rate Generator is stopped.
SYNCHRONOUS INPUT CONTROL (SICR)
R254 - Read/Write
Reset value: 0000 0011 (03h)
7
SMEN
Bit 5 = XCKPL: Receiver Clock Polarity.
0: RXCLK is active on the rising edge.
1: RXCLK is active on the falling edge.
Note: XCKPL only affects the receiver clock. In
Auto-Echo mode CLKOUT = RXCLK independently of the XCKPL status. In Loop-Back the state
of the XCKPL bit is irrelevant.
0
INPL XCKPL DCDEN DCDPL INPEN
X
Bit 4 = DCDEN: DCD Input Enable.
0: Disable hardware synchronization.
1: Enable hardware synchronization.
Note: When DCDEN is set, RXCLK drives the receiver section only during the active level of the
DCD input (DCD works as a gate on RXCLK, informing the MCU that a transmitting device is
sending a synchronous frame to it).
Bit 3 = DCDPL: DCD Input Polarity.
0: The DCD input is active when LOW.
1: The DCD input is active when HIGH.
Note: DCDPL only affects the gating activity of the
receiver clock. In Auto-Echo mode RTS = DCD independently of DCDPL. In Loop-Back mode, the
state of DCDPL is irrelevant.
Bit 2 = INPEN: All Input Disable.
0: Enable SIN/RXCLK/DCD inputs.
1: Disable SIN/RXCLK/DCD inputs.
X
Bit 1:0 = “Don't Care”
Bit 7 = SMEN: Synchronous Mode Enable.
0: Disable all features relating to Synchronous
mode (the contents of SICR and SOCR are ignored).
1: Select Synchronous mode with its programmed
I/O configuration.
234/426
9
MULTIPROTOCOL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI-M)
MULTIPROTOCOL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
SYNCHRONOUS OUTPUT CONTROL (SOCR)
Bit 3 = RTSEN: RTS and SDS Output Enable.
0: Disable the RTS and SDS hardware synchroniR255 - Read/Write
sation.
Reset value: 0000 0001 (01h)
1: Enable the RTS and SDS hardware synchronisation.
7
0
Notes:
– When RTSEN is set, the RTS output becomes
OUTP OUTS OCKP OCKS RTSE RTS OUT
X
active just before the first active edge of CLKL
B
L
B
N
PL
DIS
OUT and indicates to target device that the MCU
is about to send a synchronous frame; it returns
to its stand-by value just after the last active edge
Bit 7 = OUTPL: SOUT Output Polarity.
of CLKOUT (MSB transmitted).
0: Polarity not inverted.
1: Polarity inverted.
– When RTSEN is set, the SDS output becomes
active high and indicates to the target device that
Note: OUTPL only affects the data sent by the
the MCU is about to send the first bit of a syntransmitter section. In Auto-Echo mode SOUT =
chronous frame on the Serial Output Pin
SIN even if OUTPL=1. In Loop-Back mode, the
(SOUT); it returns to low level as soon as the
state of OUTPL is irrelevant.
second bit is sent on the Serial Output Pin
(SOUT). In this way a positive pulse is generated
Bit 6 = OUTSB: SOUT Output Stand-By Level.
each time that the first bit of a synchronous frame
is present on the Serial Output Pin (SOUT).
0: SOUT stand-by level is HIGH.
1: SOUT stand-by level is LOW.
Bit 5 = OCKPL: Transmitter Clock Polarity.
0: CLKOUT is active on the rising edge.
1: CLKOUT is active on the falling edge.
Note: OCKPL only affects the transmitter clock. In
Auto-Echo mode CLKOUT = RXCLK independently of the state of OCKPL. In Loop-Back mode
the state of OCKPL is irrelevant.
Bit 4 = OCKSB: Transmitter Clock Stand-By Level.
0: The CLKOUT stand-by level is HIGH.
1: The CLKOUT stand-by level is LOW.
Bit 2 = RTSPL: RTS Output Polarity.
0: The RTS output is active when LOW.
1: The RTS output is active when HIGH.
Note: RTSPL only affects the RTS activity on the
output pin. In Auto-Echo mode RTS = DCD independently from the RTSPL value. In Loop-Back
mode RTSPL value is 'Don't Care'.
Bit 1 = OUTDIS: Disable all outputs.
This feature is available on specific devices only
(see device pin-out description).
When OUTDIS=1, all output pins (if configured in
Alternate Function mode) will be put in High Impedance for networking.
0: SOUT/CLKOUT/enabled
1: SOUT/CLKOUT/RTS put in high impedance
Bit 0 = “Don't Care”
235/426
9
ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI-A)
10.6 ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI-A)
10.6.1 Introduction
The Asynchronous Serial Communications Interface (SCI-A) offers a flexible means of full-duplex
data exchange with external equipment requiring
an industry standard NRZ asynchronous serial
data format. The SCI-A offers a very wide range of
baud rates using two baud rate generator systems.
10.6.2 Main Features
■ Full duplex, asynchronous communications
■ NRZ standard format (Mark/Space)
■ Dual baud rate generator systems
■ Independently
programmable transmit and
receive baud rates up to 700K baud.
■ Programmable data word length (8 or 9 bits)
■ Receive buffer full, Transmit buffer empty and
End of Transmission flags
■ Two receiver wake-up modes:
– Address bit (MSB)
– Idle line
■ Muting
function
for
multiprocessor
configurations
■ Separate enable bits for Transmitter and
Receiver
■ Three error detection flags:
– Overrun error
– Noise error
– Frame error
■ Five interrupt sources with flags:
– Transmit data register empty
– Transmission complete
– Receive data register full
– Idle line received
– Overrun error detected
■ Parity control:
– Transmits parity bit
– Checks parity of received data byte
■ Reduced power consumption mode
■ LIN Master: 13-bit LIN Synch Break generation
capability
236/426
9
10.6.3 General Description
The interface is externally connected to another
device by two pins (see Figure 118):
– TDO: Transmit Data Output. When the transmitter is disabled, the output pin is in high impedance. When the transmitter is enabled and
nothing is to be transmitted, the TDO pin is at
high level.
– RDI: Receive Data Input is the serial data input. Oversampling techniques are used for
data recovery by discriminating between valid
incoming data and noise.
Through these pins, serial data is transmitted and
received as frames comprising:
– An Idle Line prior to transmission or reception
– A start bit
– A data word (8 or 9 bits) least significant bit
first
– A Stop bit indicating that the frame is complete.
This interface uses two types of baud rate generators:
– A conventional type for commonly-used baud
rates,
– An extended type with a prescaler offering a
very wide range of baud rates even with nonstandard oscillator frequencies.
ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI-A)
ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
Figure 117. SCI-A Block Diagram
Write
Read
(DATA REGISTER) SCIDR
Received Data Register (RDR)
Transmit Data Register (TDR)
TDO
Received Shift Register
Transmit Shift Register
RDI
SCICR1
R8
TRANSMIT
WAKE
UP
CONTROL
UNIT
T8
SCID
M
WAKE PCE PS
PIE
RECEIVER
CLOCK
RECEIVER
CONTROL
SCISR
SCICR2
TIE TCIE RIE
ILIE
TE
RE RWU SBK
TDRE TC RDRF IDLE OR
NF
FE
PE
SCI
INTERRUPT
Extended Prescaler
Block Diagram
(cf.Figure 119)
CONTROL
TRANSMITTER
CLOCK
TRANSMITTER RATE
CONTROL
fCPU
/PR
/16
SCIBRR
SCP1 SCP0 SCT2 SCT1 SCT0 SCR2 SCR1SCR0
SCICR3
-
LINE
-
-
-
-
-
-
RECEIVER RATE
CONTROL
CONVENTIONAL BAUD RATE GENERATOR
237/426
9
ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI-A)
ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
10.6.4 Functional Description
10.6.4.1 Serial Data Format
The block diagram of the Serial Control Interface,
Word length may be selected as being either 8 or 9
is shown in Figure 117. It contains 6 dedicated
bits by programming the M bit in the SCICR1 regregisters:
ister (see Figure 117).
– Two control registers (SCICR1 & SCICR2)
The TDO pin is in low state during the start bit.
– A status register (SCISR)
The TDO pin is in high state during the stop bit.
– A baud rate register (SCIBRR)
An Idle character is interpreted as an entire frame
of “1”s followed by the start bit of the next frame
– An extended prescaler receiver register (SCIERwhich contains data.
PR)
A Break character is interpreted on receiving “0”s
– An extended prescaler transmitter register (SCIfor some multiple of the frame period. At the end of
ETPR)
the last break frame the transmitter inserts an exRefer to the register descriptions in Section 10.6.5
tra “1” bit to acknowledge the start bit.
for the definitions of each bit.
Transmission and reception are driven by their
own baud rate generator.
Figure 118. Word Length Programming
9-bit Word length (M bit is set)
Possible
Parity
Bit
Data Frame
Start
Bit
Bit0
Bit2
Bit1
Bit3
Bit4
Bit5
Bit6
Start
Bit
Break Frame
Extra
’1’
Possible
Parity
Bit
Data Frame
238/426
9
Bit0
Bit8
Next
Stop Start
Bit
Bit
Idle Frame
8-bit Word length (M bit is reset)
Start
Bit
Bit7
Next Data Frame
Bit1
Bit2
Bit3
Bit4
Bit5
Bit6
Bit7
Start
Bit
Next Data Frame
Stop
Bit
Next
Start
Bit
Idle Frame
Start
Bit
Break Frame
Extra Start
Bit
’1’
ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI-A)
ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
10.6.4.2 Transmitter
When no transmission is taking place, a write instruction to the SCIDR register places the data diThe transmitter can send data words of either 8 or
rectly in the shift register, the data transmission
9 bits depending on the M bit status. When the M
starts, and the TDRE bit is immediately set.
bit is set, word length is 9 bits and the 9th bit (the
MSB) has to be stored in the T8 bit in the SCICR1
When a frame transmission is complete (after the
register.
stop bit or after the break frame) the TC bit is set
and an interrupt is generated if the TCIE is set and
Character Transmission
the IMI0 bit is set in the SIMRH register.
During an SCI transmission, data shifts out least
Clearing the TC bit is performed by the following
significant bit first on the TDO pin. In this mode,
software sequence:
the SCIDR register consists of a buffer (TDR) be1. An access to the SCISR register
tween the internal bus and the transmit shift regis2. A write to the SCIDR register
ter (see Figure 117).
Note: The TDRE and TC bits are cleared by the
Procedure
same software sequence.
– Select the M bit to define the word length.
LIN Transmission
– Select the desired baud rate using the SCIBRR
The same procedure has to be applied with the foland the SCIETPR registers.
lowing differences:
– Set the TE bit to send an idle frame as first trans– Clear the M bit to configure 8-bit word length
mission.
– Set the LINE bit to enter LIN Master mode. In this
– Access the SCISR register and write the data to
case, setting the SBK bit will send 13 low bits.
send in the SCIDR register (this sequence clears
the TDRE bit). Repeat this sequence for each
Break Characters
data to be transmitted.
Setting the SBK bit loads the shift register with a
Clearing the TDRE bit is always performed by the
break character. The break frame length depends
following software sequence:
on the M bit (see Figure 118).
1. An access to the SCISR register
As long as the SBK bit is set, the SCI sends break
2. A write to the SCIDR register
frames to the TDO pin. After clearing this bit by
The TDRE bit is set by hardware and it indicates:
software, the SCI inserts a logic 1 bit at the end of
the last break frame to guarantee the recognition
– The TDR register is empty.
of the start bit of the next frame.
– The data transfer is beginning.
Idle Characters
– The next data can be written in the SCIDR regisSetting the TE bit drives the SCI to send an idle
ter without overwriting the previous data.
frame before the first data frame.
This flag generates an interrupt if the TIE bit is set
Clearing and then setting the TE bit during a transin the SCICR2 register and the IMI0 bit is set in the
mission sends an idle frame after the current word.
SIMRH register.
Note: Resetting and setting the TE bit causes the
When a transmission is taking place, a write indata in the TDR register to be lost. Therefore the
struction to the SCIDR register stores the data in
best time to toggle the TE bit is when the TDRE bit
the TDR register and which is copied in the shift
is set, i.e. before writing the next byte in the
register at the end of the current transmission.
SCIDR.
239/426
9
ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI-A)
ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
10.6.4.3 Receiver
Overrun Error
The SCI can receive data words of either 8 or 9
An overrun error occurs when a character is rebits. When the M bit is set, word length is 9 bits
ceived when RDRF has not been reset. Data can
and the MSB is stored in the R8 bit in the SCICR1
not be transferred from the shift register to the
register.
TDR register as long as the RDRF bit is not
cleared.
Character Reception
When a overrun error occurs:
During a SCI reception, data shifts in least significant bit first through the RDI pin. In this mode, the
– The OR bit is set.
SCIDR register consists or a buffer (RDR) be– The RDR content will not be lost.
tween the internal bus and the received shift regis– The shift register will be overwritten.
ter (see Figure 117).
– An interrupt is generated if the RIE bit is set and
Procedure
the IMI0 bit is set in the SIMRH register.
– Select the M bit to define the word length.
The OR bit is reset by an access to the SCISR reg– Select the desired baud rate using the SCIBRR
ister followed by a SCIDR register read operation.
and the SCIERPR registers.
Noise Error
– Set the RE bit, this enables the receiver which
Oversampling techniques are used for data recovbegins searching for a start bit.
ery by discriminating between valid incoming data
When a character is received:
and noise.
– The RDRF bit is set. It indicates that the content
When noise is detected in a frame:
of the shift register is transferred to the RDR.
– The NF is set at the rising edge of the RDRF bit.
– An interrupt is generated if the RIE bit is set and
– Data is transferred from the Shift register to the
the IMI0 bit is set in the SIMRH register.
SCIDR register.
– The error flags can be set if a frame error, noise
– No interrupt is generated. However this bit rises
or an overrun error has been detected during reat the same time as the RDRF bit which itself
ception.
generates an interrupt.
Clearing the RDRF bit is performed by the following
The NF bit is reset by a SCISR register read opersoftware sequence done by:
ation followed by a SCIDR register read operation.
1. An access to the SCISR register
Framing Error
2. A read to the SCIDR register.
A framing error is detected when:
The RDRF bit must be cleared before the end of the
– The stop bit is not recognized on reception at the
reception of the next character to avoid an overrun
expected time, following either a de-synchronierror.
zation or excessive noise.
Break Character
– A break is received.
When a break character is received, the SCI hanWhen the framing error is detected:
dles it as a framing error.
– the FE bit is set by hardware
Idle Character
– Data is transferred from the Shift register to the
When a idle frame is detected, there is the same
SCIDR register.
procedure as a data received character plus an
iterrupt if the ILIE bit is set and the IMI0 bit is set in
– No interrupt is generated. However this bit rises
the SIMRH register.
at the same time as the RDRF bit which itself
generates an interrupt.
The FE bit is reset by a SCISR register read operation followed by a SCIDR register read operation.
240/426
9
ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI-A)
ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
Figure 119. SCI Baud Rate and Extended Prescaler Block Diagram
TRANSMITTER
CLOCK
EXTENDED PRESCALER TRANSMITTER RATE CONTROL
SCIETPR
EXTENDED TRANSMITTER PRESCALER REGISTER
SCIERPR
EXTENDED RECEIVER PRESCALER REGISTER
RECEIVER
CLOCK
EXTENDED PRESCALER RECEIVER RATE CONTROL
EXTENDED PRESCALER
fCPU
TRANSMITTER RATE
CONTROL
/16
/PR
SCIBRR
SCP1 SCP0 SCT2 SCT1 SCT0 SCR2 SCR1SCR0
RECEIVER RATE
CONTROL
CONVENTIONAL BAUD RATE GENERATOR
241/426
9
ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI-A)
ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
10.6.4.4 Conventional Baud Rate Generation
10.6.4.6 Receiver Muting and Wake-up Feature
The baud rate for the receiver and transmitter (Rx
In multiprocessor configurations it is often desiraand Tx) are set independently and calculated as
ble that only the intended message recipient
follows:
should actively receive the full message contents,
thus reducing redundant SCI service overhead for
fCPU
fCPU
all non addressed receivers.
Rx =
Tx =
The non addressed devices may be placed in
(16*PR)*RR
(16*PR)*TR
sleep mode by means of the muting function.
with:
Setting the RWU bit by software puts the SCI in
PR = 1, 3, 4 or 13 (see SCP[1:0] bits)
sleep mode:
TR = 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64,128
All the reception status bits can not be set.
(see SCT[2:0] bits)
All the receive interrupt are inhibited.
RR = 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64,128
A muted receiver may be awakened by one of the
following two ways:
(see SCR[2:0] bits)
– by Idle Line detection if the WAKE bit is reset,
All this bits are in the SCIBRR register.
– by Address Mark detection if the WAKE bit is set.
Example: If fCPU is 24 MHz and if PR=13 and
TR=RR=2, the transmit and receive baud rates are
Receiver wakes-up by Idle Line detection when
57700 baud.
the Receive line has recognised an Idle Frame.
Then the RWU bit is reset by hardware but the
Note: The baud rate registers MUST NOT be
IDLE bit is not set.
changed while the transmitter or the receiver is enabled.
Receiver wakes-up by Address Mark detection
when it received a “1” as the most significant bit of
10.6.4.5 Extended Baud Rate Generation
a word, thus indicating that the message is an adThe extended prescaler option gives a very fine
dress. The reception of this particular word wakes
tuning on the baud rate, using a 255 value prescalup the receiver, resets the RWU bit and sets the
er, whereas the conventional Baud Rate GeneraRDRF bit, which allows the receiver to receive this
tor retains industry standard software compatibiliword normally and to use it as an address word.
ty.
The extended Baud Rate Generator block diagram
is described in the Figure 119.
The output clock rate sent to the transmitter or to
the receiver will be the output from the 16 divider
divided by a factor ranging from 1 to 255 set in the
SCIERPR or the SCIETPR register.
Note: The extended prescaler is activated by setting the SCIETPR or SCIERPR register to a value
other than zero. The baud rates are calculated as
follows:
fCPU
fCPU
Rx =
Tx =
16*ERPR*(PR*TR)
16*ETPR*(PR*TR)
with:
ETPR = 1,..,255 (see SCIETPR register)
ERPR = 1,.. 255 (see SCIERPR register)
242/426
9
M Bit
0
0
1
1
PCE Bit
0
1
0
1
SCI Frame
| SB | 8 bit data | STB |
| SB | 7-bit data | PB | STB |
| SB | 9-bit data | STB |
| SB | 8-bit data PB | STB |
SB : Start Bit
STB : Stop Bit
PB : Parity Bit
Note: In case of wake up by an address mark, the
MSB bit of the data is taken into account and not
the parity bit
ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI-A)
ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
10.6.4.7 Parity definition
Transmission mode: If the PCE bit is set then the
MSB bit of the data written in the data register is
Even parity: The parity bit is calculated to obtain
not transmitted but is changed by the parity bit.
an even number of “1s” inside the frame made of
Reception mode: If the PCE bit is set then the inthe 7 or 8 LSB bits (depending on whether M is
terface checks if the received data byte has an
equal to 0 or 1) and the parity bit.
even number of “1s” if even parity is selected
Ex: data=00110101; 4 bits set => parity bit will be
(PS=0) or an odd number of “1s” if odd parity is se0 if even parity is selected (PS bit = 0).
lected (PS=1). If the parity check fails, the PE flag
Odd parity: The parity bit is calculated to obtain
is set in the SCISR register and an interrupt is genan odd number of “1s” inside the frame made of
erated if PCIE is set in the SCICR1 register.
the 7 or 8 LSB bits (depending on whether M is
equal to 0 or 1) and the parity bit.
Ex: data=00110101; 4 bits set => parity bit will be
1 if odd parity is selected (PS bit = 1).
243/426
9
ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI-A)
ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
10.6.5 Register Description
the SCISR register followed by a read to the
SCIDR register).
STATUS REGISTER (SCISR)
0: No Idle Line is detected
R240 - Read Only
1: Idle Line is detected
Register Page: 26
Note: The IDLE bit will not be set again until the
Reset Value: 1100 0000 (C0h)
RDRF bit has been set itself (i.e. a new idle line occurs). This bit is not set by an idle line when the re7
0
ceiver wakes up from wake-up mode.
TDRE
TC
RDRF
IDLE
OR
NF
FE
PE
Bit 7 = TDRE Transmit data register empty.
This bit is set by hardware when the content of the
TDR register has been transferred into the shift
register. An interrupt is generated if the TIE =1 in
the SCICR2 register. It is cleared by a software sequence (an access to the SCISR register followed
by a write to the SCIDR register).
0: Data is not transferred to the shift register
1: Data is transferred to the shift register
Note: data will not be transferred to the shift register as long as the TDRE bit is not reset.
Bit 6 = TC Transmission complete.
This bit is set by hardware when transmission of a
frame containing Data, a Preamble or a Break is
complete. An interrupt is generated if TCIE=1 in
the SCICR2 register. It is cleared by a software sequence (an access to the SCISR register followed
by a write to the SCIDR register).
0: Transmission is not complete
1: Transmission is complete
Bit 5 = RDRF Received data ready flag.
This bit is set by hardware when the content of the
RDR register has been transferred into the SCIDR
register. An interrupt is generated if RIE=1 in the
SCICR2 register. It is cleared by hardware when
RE=0 or by a software sequence (an access to the
SCISR register followed by a read to the SCIDR
register).
0: Data is not received
1: Received data is ready to be read
Bit 4 = IDLE Idle line detect.
This bit is set by hardware when a Idle Line is detected. An interrupt is generated if the ILIE=1 in
the SCICR2 register. It is cleared by hardware
when RE=0 by a software sequence (an access to
244/426
9
Bit 3 = OR Overrun error.
This bit is set by hardware when the word currently
being received in the shift register is ready to be
transferred into the RDR register while RDRF=1.
An interrupt is generated if RIE=1 in the SCICR2
register. It is cleared by hardware when RE=0 by a
software sequence (an access to the SCISR register followed by a read to the SCIDR register).
0: No Overrun error
1: Overrun error is detected
Note: When this bit is set RDR register content will
not be lost but the shift register will be overwritten.
Bit 2 = NF Noise flag.
This bit is set by hardware when noise is detected
on a received frame. It is cleared by hardware
when RE=0 by a software sequence (an access to
the SCISR register followed by a read to the
SCIDR register).
0: No noise is detected
1: Noise is detected
Note: This bit does not generate interrupt as it appears at the same time as the RDRF bit which itself generates an interrupt.
Bit 1 = FE Framing error.
This bit is set by hardware when a de-synchronization, excessive noise or a break character is detected. It is cleared by hardware when RE=0 by a
software sequence (an access to the SCISR register followed by a read to the SCIDR register).
0: No Framing error is detected
1: Framing error or break character is detected
Note: This bit does not generate interrupt as it appears at the same time as the RDRF bit which itself generates an interrupt. If the word currently
being transferred causes both frame error and
overrun error, it will be transferred and only the OR
bit will be set.
ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI-A)
ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
Bit 0 = PE Parity error.
Note: The M bit must not be modified during a data
This bit is set by hardware when a parity error octransfer (both transmission and reception).
curs in receiver mode. It is cleared by a software
sequence (a read to the status register followed by
Bit 3 = WAKE Wake-Up method.
an access to the SCIDR data register). An interThis bit determines the SCI Wake-Up method, it is
rupt is generated if PIE=1 in the SCICR1 register.
set or cleared by software.
0: No parity error
0: Idle Line
1: Parity error
1: Address Mark
CONTROL REGISTER 1 (SCICR1)
R243 - Read/Write
Register Page: 26
Reset Value: x000 0000 (x0h)
7
R8
0
T8
SCID
M
WAKE
PCE
PS
PIE
Bit 7 = R8 Receive data bit 8.
This bit is used to store the 9th bit of the received
word when M=1.
Bit 6 = T8 Transmit data bit 8.
This bit is used to store the 9th bit of the transmitted word when M=1.
Bit 5 = SCID Disabled for low power consumption
When this bit is set the SCI prescalers and outputs
are stopped and the end of the current byte transfer in order to reduce power consumption.This bit
is set and cleared by software.
0: SCI enabled
1: SCI prescaler and outputs disabled
Bit 4 = M Word length.
This bit determines the word length. It is set or
cleared by software.
0: 1 Start bit, 8 Data bits, 1 Stop bit
1: 1 Start bit, 9 Data bits, 1 Stop bit
Bit 2 = PCE Parity control enable.
This bit selects the hardware parity control (generation and detection). When the parity control is enabled, the computed parity is inserted at the MSB
position (9th bit if M=1; 8th bit if M=0) and parity is
checked on receive data. This bit is set and
cleared by software. Once it is set, PCE is active
after the current byte (in reception and in transmission).
0: Parity control disabled
1: Parity control enabled
Bit 1 = PS Parity selection.
This bit selects the odd or even parity when the
parity generation/detection is enabled (PCE bit
set). It is set and cleared by software. The parity
will be selected after the current byte.
0: Even parity
1: Odd parity
Bit 0 = PIE Parity interrupt enable.
This bit enables the interrupt capability of the hardware parity control when a parity error is detected
(PE bit set). It is set and cleared by software.
0: Parity error interrupt disabled
1: Parity error interrupt enabled
Note: The ITEI0 bit in the SITRH register (See Interrupts Chapter) must be set to enable the SCI-A
interrupt as the SCI-A interrupt is a rising edge
event.
245/426
9
ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI-A)
ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
CONTROL REGISTER 2 (SCICR2)
Bit 1 = RWU Receiver wake-up.
This bit determines if the SCI is in mute mode or
R244 - Read/Write
not. It is set and cleared by software and can be
Register Page: 26
cleared by hardware when a wake-up sequence is
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
recognized.
0: Receiver in active mode
7
0
1: Receiver in mute mode
TIE
TCIE
RIE
ILIE
TE
RE
RWU
SBK
Bit 7 = TIE Transmitter interrupt enable.
This bit is set and cleared by software.
0: Interrupt is inhibited
1: An SCI interrupt is generated whenever
TDRE=1 in the SCISR register
Bit 6 = TCIE Transmission complete interrupt enable
This bit is set and cleared by software.
0: Interrupt is inhibited
1: An SCI interrupt is generated whenever TC=1 in
the SCISR register
Bit 5 = RIE Receiver interrupt enable.
This bit is set and cleared by software.
0: Interrupt is inhibited
1: An SCI interrupt is generated whenever OR=1
or RDRF=1 in the SCISR register
Bit 0 = SBK Send break.
This bit set is used to send break characters. It is
set and cleared by software.
0: No break character is transmitted
1: Break characters are transmitted
Notes:
– If the SBK bit is set to “1” and then to “0”, the
transmitter will send a BREAK word at the end of
the current word.
– The ITEI0 bit in the SITRH register (See Interrupts Chapter) must be set to enable the SCI-A
interrupt as the SCI-A interrupt is a rising edge
event.
CONTROL REGISTER 3 (SCICR3)
R255 - Read/Write
Register Page: 26
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7
Bit 4 = ILIE Idle line interrupt enable.
This bit is set and cleared by software.
0: Interrupt is inhibited
1: An SCI interrupt is generated whenever IDLE=1
in the SCISR register.
Bit 3 = TE Transmitter enable.
This bit enables the transmitter. It is set and
cleared by software.
0: Transmitter is disabled, the TDO pin is in high
impedance
1: Transmitter is enabled
Note: during transmission, a “0” pulse on the TE
bit (“0” followed by “1”) sends a preamble after the
current word.
Bit 2 = RE Receiver enable.
This bit enables the receiver. It is set and cleared
by software.
0: Receiver is disabled, it resets the RDRF, IDLE,
OR, NF and FE bits of the SCISR register
1: Receiver is enabled and begins searching for a
start bit
0
-
LINE
-
9
-
-
-
-
Bit 7 = Reserved
Bit 6 = LINE LIN mode Enable.
This bit is set and cleared by software.
0: LIN master mode disabled
1: LIN master mode enabled
LIN master mode enables the capability to send
LIN Synch Breaks (13 low bits) using the SBK bit
in the SCICR2 register. In transmission, the LIN
Synch Break low phase duration is shown as below:
LINE
M
Number of low bits sent
during a LIN Synch Break
0
0
10
0
1
11
1
0
13
1
1
14
Bits 5:0 = Reserved
246/426
-
ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI-A)
ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
DATA REGISTER (SCIDR)
Bits 5:3 = SCT[2:0] SCI Transmitter rate divisor
These 3 bits, in conjunction with the SCP1 & SCP0
R241 - Read/Write
bits define the total division applied to the bus
Register Page: 26
clock to yield the transmit rate clock in conventionReset Value: Undefined
al Baud Rate Generator mode.
Contains the Received or Transmitted data charTR Dividing Factor
SCT2
SCT1
SCT0
acter, depending on whether it is read from or written to.
1
0
0
0
7
0
DR7
DR6
DR5
DR4
DR3
DR2
DR1
DR0
The Data register performs a double function (read
and write) since it is composed of two registers,
one for transmission (TDR) and one for reception
(RDR).
The TDR register provides the parallel interface
between the internal bus and the output shift register (see Figure 117).
The RDR register provides the parallel interface
between the input shift register and the internal
bus (see Figure 117).
7
0
SCP0
SCT2
SCT1
SCT0
SCR2
SCR1 SCR0
Bits 7:6= SCP[1:0] First SCI Prescaler
These 2 prescaling bits allow several standard
clock division ranges:
PR Prescaling factor
SCP1
0
0
1
4
0
1
0
8
0
1
1
16
1
0
0
32
1
0
1
64
1
1
0
128
1
1
1
Note: This TR factor is used only when the ETPR
fine tuning factor is equal to 00h; otherwise, TR is
replaced by the (TR*ETPR) dividing factor.
Bits 2:0 = SCR[2:0] SCI Receiver rate divisor.
These 3 bits, in conjunction with the SCP1 & SCP0
bits define the total division applied to the bus
clock to yield the receive rate clock in conventional
Baud Rate Generator mode.
BAUD RATE REGISTER (SCIBRR)
R242 - Read/Write
Register Page: 26
Reset Value: 00xx xxxx (xxh)
SCP1
2
RR Dividing Factor
SCR2
SCR1
SCR0
1
0
0
0
2
0
0
1
4
0
1
0
8
0
1
1
16
1
0
0
32
1
0
1
SCP0
64
1
1
0
128
1
1
1
1
0
0
3
0
1
4
1
0
13
1
1
Note: This RR factor is used only when the ERPR
fine tuning factor is equal to 00h; otherwise, RR is
replaced by the (RR*ERPR) dividing factor.
247/426
9
ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI-A)
ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
EXTENDED RECEIVE PRESCALER DIVISION
EXTENDED TRANSMIT PRESCALER DIVISION
REGISTER (SCIERPR)
REGISTER (SCIETPR)
R245 - Read/Write
R246 - Read/Write
Register Page: 26
Register Page: 26
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
Reset Value:0000 0000 (00h)
Allows setting of the Extended Prescaler rate diviAllows setting of the External Prescaler rate division factor for the receive circuit.
sion factor for the transmit circuit.
7
0
7
0
ERPR7 ERPR6 ERPR5 ERPR4 ERPR3 ERPR2 ERPR1 ERPR0
ETPR7 ETPR6 ETPR5 ETPR4 ETPR3 ETPR2 ETPR1 ETPR0
Bits 7:1 = ERPR[7:0] 8-bit Extended Receive
Prescaler Register.
The extended Baud Rate Generator is activated
when a value different from 00h is stored in this
register. Therefore the clock frequency issued
from the 16 divider (see Figure 119) is divided by
the binary factor set in the SCIERPR register (in
the range 1 to 255).
The extended Baud Rate Generator is not used after a reset.
Bits 7:1 = ETPR[7:0] 8-bit Extended Transmit
Prescaler Register.
The extended Baud Rate Generator is activated
when a value different from 00h is stored in this
register. Therefore the clock frequency issued
from the 16 divider (see Figure 119) is divided by
the binary factor set in the SCIETPR register (in
the range 1 to 255).
The extended Baud Rate Generator is not used after a reset.
10.6.6 Important Notes on SCI-A
Refer to Section 13.1.4 on page 412 and Section
13.1.5 on page 412.
248/426
9
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (SPI)
10.7 SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (SPI)
10.7.1 Introduction
The Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) allows fullduplex, synchronous, serial communication with
external devices. An SPI system may consist of a
master and one or more slaves or a system in
which devices may be either masters or slaves.
The SPI is normally used for communication between the microcontroller and external peripherals
or another Microcontroller.
Refer to the Pin Description chapter for the devicespecific pin-out.
– MOSI: Master Out Slave In pin
– SCK: Serial Clock pin
– SS: Slave select pin
To use any of these alternate functions (input or
output), the corresponding I/O port must be programmed as alternate function output.
A basic example of interconnections between a
single master and a single slave is illustrated on
Figure 120.
The MOSI pins are connected together as are
MISO pins. In this way data is transferred serially
between master and slave.
When the master device transmits data to a slave
device via MOSI pin, the slave device responds by
sending data to the master device via the MISO
pin. This implies full duplex transmission with both
data out and data in synchronized with the same
clock signal (which is provided by the master device via the SCK pin).
Thus, the byte transmitted is replaced by the byte
received and eliminates the need for separate
transmit-empty and receiver-full bits. A status flag
is used to indicate that the I/O operation is complete.
Various data/clock timing relationships may be
chosen (see Figure 123) but master and slave
must be programmed with the same timing mode.
10.7.2 Main Features
■ Full duplex, three-wire synchronous transfers
■ Master or slave operation
■ Maximum slave mode frequency = INTCLK/2.
■ Programmable prescalers for a wide range of
baud rates
■ Programmable clock polarity and phase
■ End of transfer interrupt flag
■ Write collision flag protection
■ Master mode fault protection capability.
10.7.3 General Description
The SPI is connected to external devices through
4 alternate function pins:
– MISO: Master In Slave Out pin
Figure 120. Serial Peripheral Interface Master/Slave
SLAVE
MASTER
MSBit
LSBit
8-BIT SHIFT REGISTER
SPI
CLOCK
GENERATOR
MSBit
MISO
MISO
MOSI
MOSI
SCK
SS
LSBit
8-BIT SHIFT REGISTER
SCK
+5V
SS
249/426
9
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (SPI)
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont’d)
Figure 121. Serial Peripheral Interface Block Diagram
Internal Bus
Read
SPDR
1
Read Buffer
IT
request
0
MOSI
MISO
Ext. INT
SPSR
8-Bit Shift Register
SPIF WCOL - MODF
-
-
-
-
Write
SPI
STATE
CONTROL
SCK
SS
SPCR
SPIE SPOE SPIS MSTR CPOL CPHA SPR1 SPR0
MASTER
CONTROL
SERIAL
CLOCK
GENERATOR
SPPR
DIV2
ST9 PERIPHERAL
CLOCK (INTCLK)
250/426
9
1/2
0
1
PRESCALER
/1 .. /8
PRS2 PRS1 PRS0
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (SPI)
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont’d)
10.7.4 Functional Description
Figure 121 shows the serial peripheral interface
(SPI) block diagram.
This interface contains 4 dedicated registers:
– A Control Register (SPCR)
– A Prescaler Register (SPPR)
– A Status Register (SPSR)
– A Data Register (SPDR)
Refer to the SPCR, SPPR, SPSR and SPDR registers in Section 10.7.6for the bit definitions.
10.7.4.1 Master Configuration
In a master configuration, the serial clock is generated on the SCK pin.
Procedure
– Define the serial clock baud rate by setting/resetting the DIV2 bit of SPPR register, by writing a prescaler value in the SPPR register and
programming the SPR0 & SPR1 bits in the
SPCR register.
– Select the CPOL and CPHA bits to define one
of the four relationships between the data
transfer and the serial clock (see Figure 123).
– The SS pin must be connected to a high level
signal during the complete byte transmit sequence.
– The MSTR and SPOE bits must be set (they
remain set only if the SS pin is connected to a
high level signal).
In this configuration the MOSI pin is a data output
and the MISO pin is a data input.
Transmit Sequence
The transmit sequence begins when a byte is written the SPDR register.
The data byte is parallel loaded into the 8-bit shift
register (from the internal bus) during a write cycle
and then shifted out serially to the MOSI pin most
significant bit first.
When data transfer is complete:
– The SPIF bit is set by hardware
– An interrupt is generated if the SPIS and SPIE
bits are set.
During the last clock cycle the SPIF bit is set, a
copy of the data byte received in the shift register
is moved to a buffer. When the SPDR register is
read, the SPI peripheral returns this buffered value.
Clearing the SPIF bit is performed by the following
software sequence:
1. An access to the SPSR register while the SPIF
bit is set
2. A read of the SPDR register.
Note: While the SPIF bit is set, all writes to the
SPDR register are inhibited until the SPSR register is read.
251/426
9
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (SPI)
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont’d)
10.7.4.2 Slave Configuration
In slave configuration, the serial clock is received
on the SCK pin from the master device.
The value of the SPPR register and SPR0 & SPR1
bits in the SPCR is not used for the data transfer.
Procedure
– For correct data transfer, the slave device
must be in the same timing mode as the master device (CPOL and CPHA bits). See Figure
123.
– The SS pin must be connected to a low level
signal during the complete byte transmit sequence.
– Clear the MSTR bit and set the SPOE bit to
assign the pins to alternate function.
In this configuration the MOSI pin is a data input
and the MISO pin is a data output.
Transmit Sequence
The data byte is parallel loaded into the 8-bit shift
register (from the internal bus) during a write cycle
and then shifted out serially to the MISO pin most
significant bit first.
The transmit sequence begins when the slave device receives the clock signal and the most significant bit of the data on its MOSI pin.
252/426
9
When data transfer is complete:
– The SPIF bit is set by hardware
– An interrupt is generated if the SPIS and SPIE
bits are set.
During the last clock cycle the SPIF bit is set, a
copy of the data byte received in the shift register
is moved to a buffer. When the SPDR register is
read, the SPI peripheral returns this buffered value.
Clearing the SPIF bit is performed by the following
software sequence:
1. An access to the SPSR register while the SPIF
bit is set.
2. A read of the SPDR register.
Notes: While the SPIF bit is set, all writes to the
SPDR register are inhibited until the SPSR register is read.
The SPIF bit can be cleared during a second
transmission; however, it must be cleared before
the second SPIF bit in order to prevent an overrun
condition (see Section 10.7.4.6).
Depending on the CPHA bit, the SS pin has to be
set to write to the SPDR register between each
data byte transfer to avoid a write collision (see
Section 10.7.4.4).
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (SPI)
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont’d)
10.7.4.3 Data Transfer Format
During an SPI transfer, data is simultaneously
transmitted (shifted out serially) and received
(shifted in serially). The serial clock is used to synchronize the data transfer during a sequence of
eight clock pulses.
The SS pin allows individual selection of a slave
device; the other slave devices that are not selected do not interfere with the SPI transfer.
Clock Phase and Clock Polarity
Four possible timing relationships may be chosen
by software, using the CPOL and CPHA bits.
The CPOL (clock polarity) bit controls the steady
state value of the clock when no data is being
transferred. This bit affects both master and slave
modes.
The combination between the CPOL and CPHA
(clock phase) bits selects the data capture clock
edge.
Figure 123 shows an SPI transfer with the four
combinations of the CPHA and CPOL bits. The diagram may be interpreted as a master or slave
timing diagram where the SCK pin, the MISO pin,
the MOSI pin are directly connected between the
master and the slave device.
The SS pin is the slave device select input and can
be driven by the master device.
The master device applies data to its MOSI pinclock edge before the capture clock edge.
CPHA Bit is Set
The second edge on the SCK pin (falling edge if
the CPOL bit is reset, rising edge if the CPOL bit is
set) is the MSBit capture strobe. Data is latched on
the occurrence of the first clock transition.
No write collision should occur even if the SS pin
stays low during a transfer of several bytes (see
Figure 122).
CPHA Bit is Reset
The first edge on the SCK pin (falling edge if CPOL
bit is set, rising edge if CPOL bit is reset) is the
MSBit capture strobe. Data is latched on the occurrence of the second clock transition.
This pin must be toggled high and low between
each byte transmitted (see Figure 122).
To protect the transmission from a write collision a
low value on the SS pin of a slave device freezes
the data in its SPDR register and does not allow it
to be altered. Therefore the SS pin must be high to
write a new data byte in the SPDR without producing a write collision.
Figure 122. CPHA / SS Timing Diagram
MOSI/MISO
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Master SS
Slave SS
(CPHA=0)
Slave SS
(CPHA=1)
253/426
9
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (SPI)
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont’d)
Figure 123. Data Clock Timing Diagram
CPHA =1
SCK
(CPOL = 1)
SCK
(CPOL = 0)
MISO
(from master)
MOSI
(from slave)
MSBit
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit3
Bit 2
Bit 1
LSBit
MSBit
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit3
Bit 2
Bit 1
LSBit
SS
(to slave)
CAPTURE STROBE
CPHA =0
SCK
(CPOL = 1)
SCK
(CPOL = 0)
MSBit
MISO
(from master)
MOSI
(from slave)
MSBit
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit3
Bit 2
Bit 1
LSBit
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit3
Bit 2
Bit 1
LSBit
SS
(to slave)
CAPTURE STROBE
Note: This figure should not be used as a replacement for parametric information.
Refer to the SPI Timing table in the Electrical Characteristics Section.
254/426
9
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (SPI)
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont’d)
10.7.4.4 Write Collision Error
A write collision occurs when the software tries to
write to the SPDR register while a data transfer is
taking place with an external device. When this
happens, the transfer continues uninterrupted and
the software write will be unsuccessful.
Write collisions can occur both in master and slave
mode.
Note: a "read collision" will never occur since the
received data byte is placed in a buffer in which
access is always synchronous with the MCU operation.
In Slave mode
When the CPHA bit is set:
The slave device will receive a clock (SCK) edge
prior to the latch of the first data transfer. This first
clock edge will freeze the data in the slave device
SPDR register and output the MSBit on to the external MISO pin of the slave device.
The SS pin low state enables the slave device but
the output of the MSBit onto the MISO pin does
not take place until the first data transfer clock
edge.
When the CPHA bit is reset:
Data is latched on the occurrence of the first clock
transition. The slave device does not have any
way of knowing when that transition will occur;
therefore, the slave device collision occurs when
software attempts to write the SPDR register after
its SS pin has been pulled low.
For this reason, the SS pin must be high, between
each data byte transfer, to allow the CPU to write
in the SPDR register without generating a write
collision.
In Master mode
Collision in the master device is defined as a write
of the SPDR register while the internal serial clock
(SCK) is in the process of transfer.
The SS pin signal must be always high on the
master device.
WCOL Bit
The WCOL bit in the SPSR register is set if a write
collision occurs.
No SPI interrupt is generated when the WCOL bit
is set (the WCOL bit is a status flag only).
Clearing the WCOL bit is done through a software
sequence (see Figure 124).
Figure 124. Clearing the WCOL bit (Write Collision Flag) Software Sequence
Clearing sequence after SPIF = 1 (end of a data byte transfer)
1st Step
Read SPSR
THEN
2nd Step
Read SPDR
SPIF =0
WCOL=0
Clearing sequence before SPIF = 1 (during a data byte transfer)
1st Step
Read SPSR
THEN
nd
2
Step
Read SPDR
WCOL=0
Note: Writing in SPDR register
instead of reading in it do not reset WCOL bit
255/426
9
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (SPI)
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont’d)
10.7.4.5 Master Mode Fault
Master mode fault occurs when the master device
has its SS pin pulled low, then the MODF bit is set.
Master mode fault affects the SPI peripheral in the
following ways:
– The MODF bit is set and an SPI interrupt is
generated if the SPIE bit is set.
– The SPOE bit is reset. This blocks all output
from the device and disables the SPI peripheral.
– The MSTR bit is reset, thus forcing the device
into slave mode.
Clearing the MODF bit is done through a software
sequence:
1. A read access to the SPSR register while the
MODF bit is set.
2. A write to the SPCR register.
Notes: To avoid any multiple slave conflicts in the
case of a system comprising several MCUs, the
SS pin must be pulled high during the clearing sequence of the MODF bit. The SPOE and MSTR
256/426
9
bits may be restored to their original state during or
after this clearing sequence.
Hardware does not allow the user to set the SPOE
and MSTR bits while the MODF bit is set except in
the MODF bit clearing sequence.
In a slave device the MODF bit can not be set, but
in a multi master configuration the device can be in
slave mode with this MODF bit set.
The MODF bit indicates that there might have
been a multi-master conflict for system control and
allows a proper exit from system operation to a reset or default system state using an interrupt routine.
10.7.4.6 Overrun Condition
An overrun condition occurs, when the master device has sent several data bytes and the slave device has not cleared the SPIF bit issuing from the
previous data byte transmitted.
In this case, the receiver buffer contains the byte
sent after the SPIF bit was last cleared. A read to
the SPDR register returns this byte. All other bytes
are lost.
This condition is not detected by the SPI peripheral.
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (SPI)
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont’d)
10.7.4.7 Single Master and Multimaster Configurations
There are two types of SPI systems:
For more security, the slave device may respond
to the master with the received data byte. Then the
– Single Master System
master will receive the previous byte back from the
– Multimaster System
slave device if all MISO and MOSI pins are connected and the slave has not written its SPDR register.
Single Master System
Other transmission security methods can use
A typical single master system may be configured,
ports for handshake lines or data bytes with comusing an MCU as the master and four MCUs as
mand fields.
slaves (see Figure 125).
Multi-Master System
The master device selects the individual slave deA multi-master system may also be configured by
vices by using four pins of a parallel port to control
the user. Transfer of master control could be imthe four SS pins of the slave devices.
plemented using a handshake method through the
The SS pins are pulled high during reset since the
I/O ports or by an exchange of code messages
master device ports will be forced to be inputs at
through the serial peripheral interface system.
that time, thus disabling the slave devices.
The multi-master system is principally handled by
the MSTR bit in the SPCR register and the MODF
Note: To prevent a bus conflict on the MISO line
bit in the SPSR register.
the master allows only one slave device during a
transmission.
Figure 125. Single Master Configuration
SS
SCK
SS
SS
SCK
Slave
MCU
Slave
MCU
MOSI MISO
MOSI MISO
SS
SCK
Slave
MCU
SCK
Slave
MCU
MOSI MISO
MOSI MISO
SCK
Master
MCU
5V
Ports
MOSI MISO
SS
257/426
9
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (SPI)
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont’d)
10.7.5 Interrupt Management
The interrupt of the Serial Peripheral Interface is
mapped on one of the eight External Interrupt
Channels of the microcontroller (refer to the “Interrupts” chapter).
Each External Interrupt Channel has:
– A trigger control bit in the EITR register (R242 Page 0),
– A pending bit in the EIPR register (R243 Page0),
– A mask bit in the EIMR register (R244 - Page 0).
Program the interrupt priority level using the EIPLR register (R245 - Page 0). For a description of
these registers refer to the “Interrupts” and “DMA”
chapters.
To use the interrupt feature, perform the following
sequence:
– Set the priority level of the interrupt channel used
for the SPI (EIPRL register)
– Select the interrupt trigger edge as rising edge
(set the corresponding bit in the EITR register)
– Set the SPIS bit of the SPCR register to select
the peripheral interrupt source
– Set the SPIE bit of the SPCR register to enable
the peripheral to perform interrupt requests
– In the EIPR register, reset the pending bit of the
interrupt channel used by the SPI interrupt to
avoid any spurious interrupt requests being performed when the mask bit is set
– Set the mask bit of the interrupt channel used to
enable the MCU to acknowledge the interrupt requests of the peripheral.
258/426
9
Note: In the interrupt routine, reset the related
pending bit to avoid the interrupt request that was
just acknowledged being proposed again.
Then, after resetting the pending bit and before
the IRET instruction, check if the SPIF and MODF
interrupt flags in the SPSR register) are reset; otherwise jump to the beginning of the routine. If, on
return from an interrupt routine, the pending bit is
reset while one of the interrupt flags is set, no interrupt is performed on that channel until the flags
are set. A new interrupt request is performed only
when a flag is set with the other not set.
10.7.5.1 Register Map
Depending on the device, one or two Serial Peripheral interfaces can be present. The previous
table summarizes the position of the registers of
the two peripherals in the register map of the microcontroller.
SPI0
SPI1
Address
Page
Name
R240 (F0h)
7
DR0
R241 (F1h)
7
CR0
R242 (F2h)
7
SR0
R243 (F3h)
7
PR0
R248 (F8h)
7
DR1
R249 (F9h)
7
CR1
R250 (FAh)
7
SR1
R251 (FBh)
7
PR1
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (SPI)
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont’d)
10.7.6 Register Description
DATA REGISTER (SPDR)
R240 - Read/Write
Register Page: 7
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7
D7
Note: To use the MISO, MOSI and SCK alternate
functions (input or output), the corresponding I/O
port must be programmed as alternate function
output.
0
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
The SPDR register is used to transmit and receive
data on the serial bus. In the master device only a
write to this register will initiate transmission/reception of another byte.
Notes: During the last clock cycle the SPIF bit is
set, a copy of the received data byte in the shift
register is moved to a buffer. When the user reads
the serial peripheral data register, the buffer is actually being read.
Warning: A write to the SPDR register places data
directly into the shift register for transmission.
A read to the SPDR register returns the value located in the buffer and not the content of the shift
register (see Figure 121).
CONTROL REGISTER (SPCR)
R241 - Read/Write
Register Page: 7
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7
SPIE
0
SPOE SPIS MSTR
CPOL
CPHA
SPR1
SPR0
Bit 7 = SPIE Serial peripheral interrupt enable.
This bit is set and cleared by software.
0: Interrupt is inhibited
1: An SPI interrupt is generated whenever either
SPIF or MODF are set in the SPSR register
while the other flag is 0.
Bit 5 = SPIS Interrupt Selection.
This bit is set and cleared by software.
0: Interrupt source is external interrupt
1: Interrupt source is SPI
Bit 4 = MSTR Master.
This bit is set and cleared by software. It is also
cleared by hardware when, in master mode, SS=0
(see Section 10.7.4.5 Master Mode Fault).
0: Slave mode is selected
1: Master mode is selected, the function of the
SCK pin changes from an input to an output and
the functions of the MISO and MOSI pins are reversed.
Bit 3 = CPOL Clock polarity.
This bit is set and cleared by software. This bit determines the steady state of the serial Clock. The
CPOL bit affects both the master and slave
modes.
0: The steady state is a low value at the SCK pin.
1: The steady state is a high value at the SCK pin.
Bit 2 = CPHA Clock phase.
This bit is set and cleared by software.
0: The first clock transition is the first data capture
edge.
1: The second clock transition is the first capture
edge.
Bit 1:0 = SPR[1:0] Serial peripheral rate.
These bits are set and cleared by software. They
select one of four baud rates to be used as the serial clock when the device is a master.
These 2 bits have no effect in slave mode.
Table 49. Serial Peripheral Baud Rate
Bit 6 = SPOE Serial peripheral output enable.
This bit is set and cleared by software. It is also
cleared by hardware when, in master mode, SS=0
(see Section 10.7.4.5 Master Mode Fault).
0: SPI alternate functions disabled (MISO, MOSI
and SCK can only work as input)
1: SPI alternate functions enabled (MISO, MOSI
and SCK can work as input or output depending
on the value of MSTR)
INTCLK Clock Divide
2
4
16
32
SPR1
0
0
1
1
SPR0
0
1
0
1
259/426
9
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (SPI)
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont’d)
STATUS REGISTER (SPSR)
R242 - Read Only
Register Page: 7
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7
SPIF
1: A fault in master mode has been detected
Bits 3:0 = Unused.
0
WCOL
-
MODF
-
-
-
-
Bit 7 = SPIF Serial Peripheral data transfer flag.
This bit is set by hardware when a transfer has
been completed. An interrupt is generated if
SPIE=1 in the SPCR register. It is cleared by a software sequence (an access to the SPSR register
followed by a read or write to the SPDR register).
0: Data transfer is in progress or has been approved by a clearing sequence.
1: Data transfer between the device and an external device has been completed.
Note: While the SPIF bit is set, all writes to the
SPDR register are inhibited.
PRESCALER REGISTER (SPPR)
R243 - Read/Write
Register Page: 7
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7
0
0
0
0
DIV2
0
PRS2
PRS1
PRS0
Bits 7:5 = Reserved, forced by hardware to 0.
Bit 4 = DIV2 Divider enable.
This bit is set and cleared by software.
0: Divider by 2 enabled.
1: Divider by 2 disabled.
Bit 3 = Reserved. forced by hardware to 0.
Bit 6 = WCOL Write Collision status.
This bit is set by hardware when a write to the
SPDR register is done during a transmit sequence. It is cleared by a software sequence (see
Figure 124).
0: No write collision occurred
1: A write collision has been detected
Bit 5 = Unused.
Bits 2:0 = PRS[2:0] Prescaler Value.
These bits are set and cleared by software. The
baud rate generator is driven by
INTCLK/(n1*n2*n3) where n1= PRS[2:0]+1, n2 is
the value defined by the SPR[1:0] bits (refer to Table 49 and Table 50), n3 = 1 if DIV2=1 and n3= 2 if
DIV2=0. Refer to Figure 121.
These bits have no effect in slave mode.
Table 50. Prescaler Baud Rate
Bit 4 = MODF Mode Fault flag.
This bit is set by hardware when the SS pin is
pulled low in master mode (see Section 10.7.4.5
Master Mode Fault). An SPI interrupt can be generated if SPIE=1 in the SPCR register. This bit is
cleared by a software sequence (An access to the
SPSR register while MODF=1 followed by a write
to the SPCR register).
0: No master mode fault detected
260/426
9
Prescaler
Division Factor
PRS2
PRS1
PRS0
1 (no division)
0
0
0
2
0
0
1
1
1
1
...
8
I2C BUS INTERFACE
10.8 I2C BUS INTERFACE
10.8.1 Introduction
The I2C bus Interface serves as an interface between the microcontroller and the serial I2C bus. It
provides both multimaster and slave functions with
both 7-bit and 10-bit address modes; it controls all
I2C bus-specific sequencing, protocol, arbitration,
timing and supports both standard (100KHz) and
fast I2C modes (400KHz).
Using DMA, data can be transferred with minimum
use of CPU time.
The peripheral uses two external lines to perform
the protocols: SDA, SCL.
10.8.2 Main Features
2
■ Parallel-bus/I C protocol converter
■ Multi-master capability
■ 7-bit/10-bit Addressing
2
2
■ Standard I C mode/Fast I C mode
■ Transmitter/Receiver flag
■ End-of-byte transmission flag
■ Transfer problem detection
■ Interrupt generation on error conditions
■ Interrupt generation on transfer request and on
data received
Interrupt Features:
■ Interrupt generation on error condition, on
transmission request and on data received
■ Interrupt address vector for each interrupt
source
■ Pending bit and mask bit for each interrupt
source
■ Programmable interrupt priority respects the
other peripherals of the microcontroller
■ Interrupt address vector programmable
DMA Features:
DMA both in transmission and in reception with
enabling bits
■ DMA from/toward both Register File and
Memory
■ End Of Block interrupt sources with the related
pending bits
■
I2C Master Features:
■ Start bit detection flag
■ Clock generation
2
■ I C bus busy flag
■ Arbitration Lost flag
■ End of byte transmission flag
■ Transmitter/Receiver flag
■ Stop/Start generation
I2C Slave Features:
■ Stop bit detection
2
■ I C bus busy flag
■ Detection of misplaced start or stop condition
2
■ Programmable I C Address detection (both 7bit and 10-bit mode)
■ General Call address programmable
■ Transfer problem detection
■ End of byte transmission flag
■ Transmitter/Receiver flag.
261/426
9
I2C BUS INTERFACE
I2C BUS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
Figure 126. I2C Interface Block Diagram
DATA BUS
DATA REGISTER
DATA SHIFT REGISTER
DATA
SDA
CONTROL
COMPARATOR
OWN ADDRESS REGISTER 1
OWN ADDRESS REGISTER 2
GENERAL CALL ADDRESS
CLOCK CONTROL REGISTER
CLOCK
SCL
STATUS REGISTER 1
STATUS REGISTER 2
CONTROL
CONTROL REGISTER
LOGIC AND INTERRUPT/DMA REGISTERS
DMA
CONTROL SIGNALS
INTERRUPT
VR02119A
10.8.3 Functional Description
Refer to the I2CCR, I2CSR1 and I2CSR2 registers
in Section 10.8.7. for the bit definitions.
The I2C interface works as an I/O interface
between the ST9 microcontroller and the I2C bus
protocol. In addition to receiving and transmitting
data, the interface converts data from serial to
parallel format and vice versa using an interrupt or
polled handshake.
It operates in Multimaster/slave I2C mode. The selection of the operating mode is made by software.
The I2C interface is connected to the I2C bus by a
data pin (SDA) and a clock pin (SCL) which must
be configured as open drain when the I2C cell is
enabled by programming the I/O port bits and the
PE bit in the I2CCR register. In this case, the value
of the external pull-up resistance used depends on
the application.
When the I2C cell is disabled, the SDA and SCL
ports revert to being standard I/O port pins.
262/426
9
The I2C interface has sixteen internal registers.
Six of them are used for initialization:
– Own Address Registers I2COAR1, I2COAR2
– General Call Address Register I2CADR
– Clock Control Registers I2CCCR, I2CECCR
– Control register I2CCR
The following four registers are used during data
transmission/reception:
– Data Register I2CDR
– Control Register I2CCR
– Status Register 1 I2CSR1
– Status Register 2 I2CSR2
I2C BUS INTERFACE
I2C BUS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
The following seven registers are used to handle
the interrupt and the DMA features:
– Interrupt Status Register I2CISR
– Interrupt Mask Register I2CIMR
– Interrupt Vector Register I2CIVR
– Receiver DMA Address Pointer Register
I2CRDAP
– Receiver DMA Transaction Counter Register
I2CRDC
– Transmitter DMA Address Pointer Register
I2CTDAP
– Transmitter DMA transaction Counter Register
I2CTDC
The interface can decode both addresses:
– Software programmable 7-bit General Call
address
– I2C address stored by software in the I2COAR1
register in 7-bit address mode or stored in
I2COAR1 and I2COAR2 registers in 10-bit address mode.
After a reset, the interface is disabled.
bit is set) the General Call address (stored in
I2CADR register). It never recognizes the Start
Byte (address byte 01h) whatever its own address
is.
Data and addresses are transferred in 8 bits, MSB
first. The first byte(s) following the start condition
contain the address (one byte in 7-bit mode, two
bytes in 10-bit mode). The address is always
transmitted in master mode.
A 9th clock pulse follows the 8 clock cycles of a
byte transfer, during which the receiver must send
an acknowledge bit to the transmitter.
Acknowledge is enabled and disabled by software.
Refer to Figure 127.
IMPORTANT:
1. To guarantee correct operation, before enabling
the peripheral (while I2CCR.PE=0), configure bit7
and bit6 of the I2COAR2 register according to the
internal clock INTCLK (for example 11xxxxxxb in
the range 14 - 30 MHz).
2. Bit7 of the I2CCR register must be cleared.
10.8.3.1 Mode Selection
In I2C mode, the interface can operate in the four
following modes:
– Master transmitter/receiver
– Slave transmitter/receiver
By default, it operates in slave mode.
This interface automatically switches from slave to
master after a start condition is generated on the
bus and from master to slave in case of arbitration
loss or stop condition generation.
In Master mode, it initiates a data transfer and
generates the clock signal. A serial data transfer
always begins with a start condition and ends with
a stop condition. Both start and stop conditions are
generated in master mode by software.
In Slave mode, it is able to recognize its own address (7 or 10-bit), as stored in the I2COAR1 and
I2COAR2 registers and (when the I2CCR.ENGC
263/426
9
I2C BUS INTERFACE
I2C BUS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
Figure 127. I2C BUS Protocol
SDA
ACK
MSB
SCL
1
2
START
CONDITION
8
9
STOP
CONDITION
VR02119B
Any transfer can be done using either the I2C
registers directly or via the DMA.
If the transfer is to be done directly by accessing
the I2CDR, the interface waits (by holding the SCL
line low) for software to write in the Data Register
before transmission of a data byte, or to read the
Data Register after a data byte is received.
If the transfer is to be done via DMA, the interface
sends a request for a DMA transfer. Then it waits
for the DMA to complete. The transfer between the
interface and the I2C bus will begin on the next
rising edge of the SCL clock.
The SCL frequency (Fscl) generated in master
mode is controlled by a programmable clock divider. The speed of the I2C interface may be selected
between Standard (0-100KHz) and Fast (100400KHz) I2C modes.
10.8.4 I2C State Machine
To enable the interface in I2C mode the I2CCR.PE
bit must be set twice as the first write only activates the interface (only the PE bit is set); and the
bit7 of I2CCR register must be cleared.
The I2C interface always operates in slave mode
(the M/SL bit is cleared) except when it initiates a
transmission or a receipt sequencing (master
mode).
264/426
9
The multimaster function is enabled with an automatic switch from master mode to slave mode
when the interface loses the arbitration of the I2C
bus.
10.8.4.1 I2C Slave Mode
As soon as a start condition is detected, the
address word is received from the SDA line and
sent to the shift register; then it is compared with
the address of the interface or the General Call
address (if selected by software).
Note: In 10-bit addressing mode, the comparison
includes the header sequence (11110xx0) and the
two most significant bits of the address.
■ Header (10-bit mode) or Address (both 10-bit
and 7-bit modes) not matched: the state
machine is reset and waits for another Start
condition.
■ Header matched (10-bit mode only): the
interface generates an acknowledge pulse if the
ACK bit of the control register (I2CCR) is set.
■ Address matched: the I2CSR1.ADSL bit is set
and an acknowledge bit is sent to the master if
the I2CCR.ACK bit is set. An interrupt request
occurs if the I2CCR.ITE bit is set. Then the SCL
line is held low until the microcontroller reads
the I2CSR1 register (see Figure 128 Transfer
sequencing EV1).
I2C BUS INTERFACE
I2C BUS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
Next, depending on the data direction bit (least
significant bit of the address byte), and after the
generation of an acknowledge, the slave must go
in sending or receiving mode.
In 10-bit mode, after receiving the address sequence the slave is always in receive mode. It will
enter transmit mode on receiving a repeated Start
condition followed by the header sequence with
matching address bits and the least significant bit
set (11110xx1).
Slave Receiver
Following the address reception and after I2CSR1
register has been read, the slave receives bytes
from the SDA line into the Shift Register and sends
them to the I2CDR register. After each byte it
generates an acknowledge bit if the I2CCR.ACK
bit is set.
When the acknowledge bit is sent, the
I2CSR1.BTF flag is set and an interrupt is generated if the I2CCR.ITE bit is set (see Figure 128
Transfer sequencing EV2).
Then the interface waits for a read of the I2CSR1
register followed by a read of the I2CDR register,
or waits for the DMA to complete.
Slave Transmitter
Following the address reception and after I2CSR1
register has been read, the slave sends bytes from
the I2CDR register to the SDA line via the internal
shift register.
When the acknowledge bit is received, the
I2CCR.BTF flag is set and an interrupt is
generated if the I2CCR.ITE bit is set (see Figure
128 Transfer sequencing EV3).
The slave waits for a read of the I2CSR1 register
followed by a write in the I2CDR register or waits
for the DMA to complete, both holding the SCL
line low (except on EV3-1).
Error Cases
– BERR: Detection of a Stop or a Start condition
during a byte transfer.
The I2CSR2.BERR flag is set and an interrupt is
generated if I2CCR.ITE bit is set.
If it is a stop then the state machine is reset.
If it is a start then the state machine is reset and
it waits for the new slave address on the bus.
– AF: Detection of a no-acknowledge bit.
The I2CSR2.AF flag is set and an interrupt is
generated if the I2CCR.ITE bit is set.
Note: In both cases, SCL line is not stretched low;
however, the SDA line, due to possible «0» bits
transmitted last, can remain low. It is then necessary to release both lines by software.
Other Events
– ADSL: Detection of a Start condition after an acknowledge time-slot.
The state machine is reset and starts a new process. The I2CSR1.ADSL flag bit is set and an interrupt is generated if the I2CCR.ITE bit is set.
The SCL line is stretched low.
– STOPF: Detection of a Stop condition after an
acknowledge time-slot.
The state machine is reset. Then the
I2CSR2.STOPF flag is set and an interrupt is
generated if the I2CCR.ITE bit is set.
How to release the SDA / SCL lines
Check that the I2CSR1.BUSY bit is reset. Set and
subsequently clear the I2CCR.STOP bit while the
I2CSR1.BTF bit is set; then the SDA/SCL lines are
released immediately after the transfer of the current byte.
This will also reset the state machine; any subsequent STOP bit (EV4) will not be detected.
10.8.4.2 I2C Master Mode
To switch from default Slave mode to Master
mode a Start condition generation is needed.
Setting the I2CCR.START bit while the
I2CSR1.BUSY bit is cleared causes the interface
to generate a Start condition.
Once the Start condition is generated, the peripheral is in master mode (I2CSR1.M/SL=1) and
I2CSR1.SB (Start bit) flag is set and an interrupt is
generated if the I2CCR.ITE bit is set (see Figure
128 Transfer sequencing EV5 event).
The interface waits for a read of the I2CSR1 register followed by a write in the I2CDR register with
the Slave address, holding the SCL line low.
265/426
9
I2C BUS INTERFACE
I2C BUS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
Then the slave address is sent to the SDA line.
In 7-bit addressing mode, one address byte is
sent.
In 10-bit addressing mode, sending the first byte
including the header sequence causes the
I2CSR1.EVF and I2CSR1.ADD10 bits to be set by
hardware with interrupt generation if the
I2CCR.ITE bit is set.
Then the master waits for a read of the I2CSR1
register followed by a write in the I2CDR register,
holding the SCL line low (see Figure 128 Transfer sequencing EV9). Then the second address
byte is sent by the interface.
After each address byte, an acknowledge clock
pulse is sent to the SCL line if the I2CSR1.EVF
and
– I2CSR1.ADD10 bit (if first header)
– I2CSR2.ADDTX bit (if address or second header)
are set, and an interrupt is generated if the
I2CCR.ITE bit is set.
The peripheral waits for a read of the I2CSR1 register followed by a write into the Control Register
(I2CCR) by holding the SCL line low (see Figure
128 Transfer sequencing EV6 event).
If there was no acknowledge (I2CSR2.AF=1), the
master must stop or restart the communication
(set the I2CCR.START or I2CCR.STOP bits).
If there was an acknowledge, the state machine
enters a sending or receiving process according to
the data direction bit (least significant bit of the address), the I2CSR1.BTF flag is set and an interrupt
is generated if I2CCR.ITE bit is set (see Transfer
sequencing EV7, EV8 events).
If the master loses the arbitration of the bus there
is no acknowledge, the I2CSR2.AF flag is set and
the master must set the START or STOP bit in the
control register (I2CCR).The I2CSR2.ARLO flag is
set, the I2CSR1.M/SL flag is cleared and the process is reset. An interrupt is generated if I2CCR.ITE
is set.
Master Transmitter:
The master waits for the microcontroller to write in
the Data Register (I2CDR) or it waits for the DMA
to complete both holding the SCL line low (see
Transfer sequencing EV8).
Then the byte is received into the shift register and
sent to the SDA line. When the acknowledge bit is
received, the I2CSR1.BTF flag is set and an
interrupt is generated if the I2CCR.ITE bit is set or
the DMA is requested.
266/426
9
Note: In 10-bit addressing mode, to switch the
master to Receiver mode, software must generate
a repeated Start condition and resend the header
sequence with the least significant bit set
(11110xx1).
Master Receiver:
The master receives a byte from the SDA line into
the shift register and sends it to the I2CDR register. It generates an acknowledge bit if the
I2CCR.ACK bit is set and an interrupt if the
I2CCR.ITE bit is set or a DMA is requested (see
Transfer sequencing EV7 event).
Then it waits for the microcontroller to read the
Data Register (I2CDR) or waits for the DMA to
complete both holding SCL line low.
Error Cases
■ BERR: Detection of a Stop or a Start condition
during a byte transfer.
The I2CSR2.BERR flag is set and an interrupt is
generated if I2CCR.ITE is set.
■ AF: Detection of a no acknowledge bit
The I2CSR2.AF flag is set and an interrupt is
generated if I2CCR.ITE is set.
■ ARLO: Arbitration Lost
The I2CSR2.ARLO flag is set, the I2CSR1.M/SL
flag is cleared and the process is reset. An
interrupt is generated if the I2CCR.ITE bit is set.
Note: In all cases, to resume communications, set
the I2CCR.START or I2CCR.STOP bits.
Events generated by the I2C interface
■ STOP condition
When the I2CCR.STOP bit is set, a Stop
condition is generated after the transfer of the
current byte, the I2CSR1.M/SL flag is cleared
and the state machine is reset. No interrupt is
generated in master mode at the detection of
the stop condition.
■ START condition
When the I2CCR.START bit is set, a start
condition is generated as soon as the I2C bus is
free. The I2CSR1.SB flag is set and an interrupt
is generated if the I2CCR.ITE bit is set.
I2C BUS INTERFACE
I2C BUS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
Figure 128. Transfer Sequencing
7-bit Slave receiver:
S Address
A
Data1
A
Data2
EV1
A
EV2
.....
EV2
DataN
A
P
EV2
EV4
7-bit Slave transmitter:
S Address
A
Data1
A
EV1 EV3
Data2
A
EV3
EV3
.....
DataN
NA
P
EV3-1
EV4
7-bit Master receiver:
S
Address
A
EV5
Data1
A
EV6
Data2
A
EV7
EV7
DataN
.....
NA
P
EV7
7-bit Master transmitter:
S
Address
A
EV5
Data1
A
EV6 EV8
Data2
A
EV8
EV8
DataN
.....
A
P
EV8
10-bit Slave receiver:
S Header
A
Address
A
Data1
A
EV1
EV2
.....
DataN
A
P
EV2
EV4
10-bit Slave transmitter:
Sr Header A
Data1
A
.... DataN
EV3 .
EV1 EV3
A
P
EV3-1
EV4
10-bit Master transmitter
S
Header
EV5
A
Address
EV9
A
Data1
A
EV6 EV8
EV8
DataN
.....
A
P
EV8
10-bit Master receiver:
Sr
Header
EV5
A
Data1
EV6
A
EV7
.....
DataN
A
P
EV7
Legend:
S=Start, Sr = Repeated Start, P=Stop, A=Acknowledge, NA=Non-acknowledge,
EVx=Event (with interrupt if ITE=1)
EV1: EVF=1, ADSL=1, cleared by reading SR1 register.
EV2: EVF=1, BTF=1, cleared by reading SR1 register followed by reading DR register or when DMA
is complete.
EV3: EVF=1, BTF=1, cleared by reading SR1 register followed by writing DR register or when DMA
is complete.
EV3-1: EVF=1, AF=1, BTF=1; AF is cleared by reading SR1 register, BTF is cleared by releasing the
lines (STOP=1, STOP=0) or writing DR register (for example DR=FFh). Note: If lines are released by
STOP=1, STOP=0 the subsequent EV4 is not seen.
EV4: EVF=1, STOPF=1, cleared by reading SR2 register.
267/426
9
I2C BUS INTERFACE
EV5: EVF=1, SB=1, cleared by reading SR1 register followed by writing DR register.
EV6: EVF=1, ADDTX=1, cleared by reading SR1 register followed by writing CR register
(for example PE=1).
EV7: EVF=1, BTF=1, cleared by reading SR1 register followed by reading DR register or when DMA
is complete.
EV8: EVF=1, BTF=1, cleared by reading SR1 register followed by writing DR register or when DMA
is complete.
EV9: EVF=1, ADD10=1, cleared by reading SR1 register followed by writing DR register.
Figure 129. Event Flags and Interrupt Generation
ADSL
SB
AF
STOPF
ARLO
BERR
ADD10
ADDTX
IERRM
IERRP
ERROR
INTERRUPT
REQUEST
ITE
IRXM
BTF=1 & TRA=0
IRXP
ITE
DATA RECEIVED
or
END OF BLOCK
INTERRUPT
REQUEST
REOBP
Receiving DMA
End Of Block
ITXM
BTF=1 & TRA=1
ITXP
ITE
TEOBP
Transmitting DMA
End Of Block
I2CSR1.EVF
268/426
9
READY TO TRANSMIT
or
END OF BLOCK
INTERRUPT
REQUEST
I2C BUS INTERFACE
I2C BUS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
10.8.5 Interrupt Features
The I2Cbus interface has three interrupt sources
related to “Error Condition”, “Peripheral Ready to
Transmit” and “Data Received”.
The peripheral uses the ST9+ interrupt internal
protocol without requiring the use of the external
interrupt channel. Dedicated registers of the peripheral should be loaded with appropriate values
to set the interrupt vector (see the description of
the I2CIVR register), the interrupt mask bits (see
the description of the I2CIMR register) and the interrupt priority and pending bits (see the description of the I2CISR register).
The peripheral also has a global interrupt enable
(the I2CCR.ITE bit) that must be set to enable the
interrupt features. Moreover there is a global interrupt flag (I2CSR1.EVF bit) which is set when one
of the interrupt events occurs (except the End Of
Block interrupts - see the DMA Features section).
The “Data Received” interrupt source occurs after
the acknowledge of a received data byte is performed. It is generated when the I2CSR1.BTF flag
is set and the I2CSR1.TRA flag is zero.
If the DMA feature is enabled in receiver mode,
this interrupt is not generated and the same interrupt vector is used to send a Receiving End Of
Block interrupt (See the DMA feature section).
The “Peripheral Ready To Transmit” interrupt
source occurs as soon as a data byte can be
transmitted by the peripheral. It is generated when
the I2CSR1.BTF and the I2CSR1.TRA flags are
set.
If the DMA feature is enabled in transmitter mode,
this interrupt is not generated and the same interrupt vector is used to send a Transmitting End Of
Block interrupt (See the DMA feature section).
The “Error condition” interrupt source occurs when
one of the following condition occurs:
– Address matched in Slave mode while
I2CCR.ACK=1
(I2CSR1.ADSL and I2CSR1.EVF flags = 1)
– Start condition generated
(I2CSR1.SB and I2CSR1.EVF flags = 1)
– No acknowledge received after byte transmission
(I2CSR2.AF and I2CSR1.EVF flags = 1)
– Stop detected in Slave mode
(I2CSR2.STOPF and I2CSR1.EVF flags = 1)
– Arbitration lost in Master mode
(I2CSR2.ARLO and I2CSR1.EVF flags = 1)
– Bus error, Start or Stop condition detected
during data transfer
(I2CSR2.BERR and I2CSR1.EVF flags = 1)
– Master has sent the header byte
(I2CSR1.ADD10 and I2CSR1.EVF flags = 1)
– Address byte successfully transmitted in
Master mode.
(I2CSR1.EVF = 1 and I2CSR2.ADDTX=1)
Each interrupt source has a dedicated interrupt
address pointer vector stored in the I2CIVR register. The five more significant bits of the vector address are programmable by the customer, whereas the three less significant bits are set by hardware depending on the interrupt source:
– 010: error condition detected
– 100: data received
– 110: peripheral ready to transmit
The priority with respect to the other peripherals is
programmable by setting the PRL[2:0] bits in the
I2CISR register. The lowest interrupt priority is obtained by setting all the bits (this priority level is
never acknowledged by the CPU and is equivalent
to disabling the interrupts of the peripheral); the
highest interrupt priority is programmed by resetting all the bits. See the Interrupt and DMA chapters for more details.
The internal priority of the interrupt sources of the
peripheral is fixed by hardware with the following
order: “Error Condition” (highest priority), “Data
Received”, “Peripheral Ready to Transmit”.
Note: The DMA has the highest priority over the
interrupts; moreover the “Transmitting End Of
Block” interrupt has the same priority as the “Peripheral Ready to Transmit” interrupt and the “Receiving End Of Block” interrupt has the same priority as the “Data received” interrupt.
Each of these three interrupt sources has a pending bit (IERRP, IRXP, ITXP) in the I2CISR register
that is set by hardware when the corresponding interrupt event occurs. An interrupt request is performed only if the corresponding mask bit is set
(IERRM, IRXM, ITXM) in the I2CIMR register and
the peripheral has a proper priority level.
The pending bit has to be reset by software.
269/426
9
I2C BUS INTERFACE
I2C BUS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
Note: Until the pending bit is reset (while the corresponding mask bit is set), the peripheral processes an interrupt request. So, if at the end of an
interrupt routine the pending bit is not reset, another interrupt request is performed.
Note: Before the end of the transmission and reception interrupt routines, the I2CSR1.BTF flag bit
should be checked, to acknowledge any interrupt
requests that occurred during the interrupt routine
and to avoid masking subsequent interrupt requests.
Note: The “Error” event interrupt pending bit
(I2CISR.IERRP) is forced high when the error
event flags are set (ADD10, ADSL and SB flags of
the I2CSR1 register; SCLF, ADDTX, AF, STOPF,
ARLO and BERR flags of the I2CSR2 register).
Moreover the Transmitting End Of Block interrupt
has the same priority as the “Peripheral Ready to
Transmit” interrupt and the Receiving End Of
Block interrupt has the same priority as the “Data
received” interrupt.
10.8.6 DMA Features
The peripheral can use the ST9+ on-chip Direct
Memory Access (DMA) channels to provide highspeed data transaction between the peripheral
and contiguous locations of Register File, and
Memory. The transactions can occur from and toward the peripheral. The maximum number of
transactions that each DMA channel can perform
is 222 if the register file is selected or 65536 if
memory is selected. The control of the DMA features is performed using registers placed in the peripheral register page (I2CISR, I2CIMR,
I2CRDAP, I2CRDC, I2CTDAP, I2CTDC).
Each DMA transfer consists of three operations:
– A load from/to the peripheral data register
(I2CDR) to/from a location of Register File/Mem-
270/426
9
ory addressed through the DMA Address Register (or Register pair)
– A post-increment of the DMA Address Register
(or Register pair)
– A post-decrement of the DMA transaction counter, which contains the number of transactions
that have still to be performed.
The priority level of the DMA features of the I2C
interface with respect to the other peripherals and
the CPU is the same as programmed in the
I2CISR register for the interrupt sources. In the internal priority level order of the peripheral, the “Error” interrupt sources have higher priority, followed
by DMA, “Data received” and “Receiving End Of
Block” interrupts, “Peripheral Ready to Transmit”
and “Transmitting End Of Block”.
Refer to the Interrupt and DMA chapters for details
on the priority levels.
The DMA features are enabled by setting the corresponding enabling bits (RXDM, TXDM) in the
I2CIMR register. It is possible to select also the direction of the DMA transactions.
Once the DMA transfer is completed (the transaction counter reaches 0 value), an interrupt request
to the CPU is generated. This kind of interrupt is
called “End Of Block”. The peripheral sends two
different “End Of Block” interrupts depending on
the direction of the DMA (Receiving End Of Block Transmitting End Of Block). These interrupt
sources have dedicated interrupt pending bits in
the I2CIMR register (REOBP, TEOBP) and they
are mapped on the same interrupt vectors as respectively “Data Received” and “Peripheral Ready
to Transmit” interrupt sources. The same correspondence exists about the internal priority between interrupts.
Note: The I2CCR.ITE bit has no effect on the End
Of Block interrupts.
Moreover, the I2CSR1.EVF flag is not set by the
End Of Block interrupts.
I2C BUS INTERFACE
I2C BUS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
10.8.6.1 DMA between Peripheral and Register
File
If the DMA transaction is made between the peripheral and the Register File, one register is
required to hold the DMA Address and one to hold
the DMA transaction counter.
These two registers must be located in the Register File:
– the DMA Address Register in the even addressed register,
– the DMA Transaction Counter in the following
register (odd address).
They are pointed to by the DMA Transaction
Counter Pointer Register (I2CRDC register in receiving, I2CTDC register in transmitting) located in
the peripheral register page.
In order to select the DMA transaction with the
Register File, the control bit I2CRDC.RF/MEM in
receiving mode or I2CTDC.RF/MEM in transmitting mode must be set.
The transaction Counter Register must be initialized with the number of DMA transfers to perform
and will be decremented after each transaction.
The DMA Address Register must be initialized with
the starting address of the DMA table in the Register File, and it is increased after each transaction.
These two registers must be located between addresses 00h and DFh of the Register File.
When the DMA occurs between Peripheral and
Register File, the I2CTDAP register (in transmission) and the I2CRDAP one (in reception) are not
used.
10.8.6.2 DMA between Peripheral and Memory
Space
If the DMA transaction is made between the peripheral and Memory, a register pair is required to
hold the DMA Address and another register pair to
hold the DMA Transaction counter. These two
pairs of registers must be located in the Register
File. The DMA Address pair is pointed to by the
DMA Address Pointer Register (I2CRDAP register
in reception, I2CTDAP register in transmission) located in the peripheral register page; the DMA
Transaction Counter pair is pointed to by the DMA
Transaction Counter Pointer Register (I2CRDC
register in reception, I2CTDC register in transmission) located in the peripheral register page.
In order to select the DMA transaction with the
Memory Space, the control bit I2CRDC.RF/MEM
in receiving mode or I2CTDC.RF/MEM in transmitting mode must be reset.
The Transaction Counter registers pair must be initialized with the number of DMA transfers to perform and will be decremented after each transaction. The DMA Address register pair must be initialized with the starting address of the DMA table
in the Memory Space, and it is increased after
each transaction. These two register pairs must be
located between addresses 00h and DFh of the
Register File.
10.8.6.3 DMA in Master Receive
To correctly manage the reception of the last byte
when the DMA in Master Receive mode is used,
the following sequence of operations must be performed:
1. The number of data bytes to be received must
be set to the effective number of bytes minus
one byte.
2. When the Receiving End Of Block condition
occurs, the I2CCR.STOP bit must be set and
the I2CCR.ACK bit must be reset.
The last byte of the reception sequence can be received either using interrupts/polling or using
DMA. If the user wants to receive the last byte using DMA, the number of bytes to be received must
be set to 1, and the DMA in reception must be reenabled (IMR.RXDM bit set) to receive the last
byte. Moreover the Receiving End Of Block interrupt service routine must be designed to recognize
and manage the two different End Of Block situations (after the first sequence of data bytes and after the last data byte).
271/426
9
I2C BUS INTERFACE
I2C BUS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
10.8.7 Register Description
IMPORTANT:
1. To guarantee correct operation, before enabling
the peripheral (while I2CCR.PE=0), configure bit7
and bit6 of the I2COAR2 register according to the
internal clock INTCLK (for example 11xxxxxxb in
the range 14 - 30 MHz).
2. Bit7 of the I2CCR register must be cleared.
I2C CONTROL REGISTER (I2CCR)
R240 - Read / Write
Register Page: 20 (I2C_0) or 22 (I2C_1)
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7
0
0
0
PE
ENGC
START ACK STOP ITE
Bit 7:6 = Reserved
Must be cleared
Bit 5 = PE Peripheral Enable.
This bit is set and cleared by software.
0: Peripheral disabled (reset value)
1: Master/Slave capability
Notes:
– When I2CCR.PE=0, all the bits of the I2CCR
register and the I2CSR1-I2CSR2 registers except the STOP bit are reset. All outputs will be released while I2CCR.PE=0
– When I2CCR.PE=1, the corresponding I/O pins
are selected by hardware as alternate functions
(open drain).
– To enable the I2C interface, write the I2CCR register TWICE with I2CCR.PE=1 as the first write
only activates the interface (only I2CCR.PE is
set).
– When PE=1, the FREQ[2:0] and EN10BIT bits in
the I2COAR2 and I2CADR registers cannot be
written. The value of these bits can be changed
only when PE=0.
Bit 4 = ENGC General Call address enable.
Setting this bit the peripheral works as a slave and
the value stored in the I2CADR register is recognized as device address.
This bit is set and cleared by software. It is also
cleared by hardware when the interface is disabled (I2CCR.PE=0).
0: The address stored in the I2CADR register is
ignored (reset value)
272/426
9
1: The General Call address stored in the I2CADR
register will be acknowledged
Note: The correct value (usually 00h) must be
written in the I2CADR register before enabling the
General Call feature.
Bit 3 = START Generation of a Start condition.
This bit is set and cleared by software. It is also
cleared by hardware when the interface is disabled (I2CCR.PE=0) or when the Start condition is
sent (with interrupt generation if ITE=1).
– In master mode:
0: No start generation
1: Repeated start generation
– In slave mode:
0: No start generation (reset value)
1: Start generation when the bus is free
Bit 2 = ACK Acknowledge enable.
This bit is set and cleared by software. It is also
cleared by hardware when the interface is disabled (I2CCR.PE=0).
0: No acknowledge returned (reset value)
1: Acknowledge returned after an address byte or
a data byte is received
Bit 1 = STOP Generation of a Stop condition.
This bit is set and cleared by software. It is also
cleared by hardware in master mode. It is not
cleared when the interface is disabled
(I2CCR.PE=0). In slave mode, this bit must be set
only when I2CSR1.BTF=1.
– In master mode:
0: No stop generation
1: Stop generation after the current byte transfer
or after the current Start condition is sent. The
STOP bit is cleared by hardware when the Stop
condition is sent.
– In slave mode:
0: No stop generation (reset value)
1: Release SCL and SDA lines after the current
byte transfer (I2CSR1.BTF=1). In this mode the
STOP bit has to be cleared by software.
I2C BUS INTERFACE
I2C BUS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
Bit 0 = ITE Interrupt Enable.
The ITE bit enables the generation of interrupts.
This bit is set and cleared by software and cleared
by hardware when the interface is disabled
(I2CCR.PE=0).
0: Interrupts disabled (reset value)
1: Interrupts enabled after any of the following conditions:
– Byte received or to be transmitted
(I2CSR1.BTF and I2CSR1.EVF flags = 1)
– Address matched in Slave mode while
I2CCR.ACK=1
(I2CSR1.ADSL and I2CSR1.EVF flags = 1)
– Start condition generated
(I2CSR1.SB and I2CSR1.EVF flags = 1)
– No acknowledge received after byte transmission
(I2CSR2.AF and I2CSR1.EVF flags = 1)
– Stop detected in Slave mode
(I2CSR2.STOPF and I2CSR1.EVF flags = 1)
– Arbitration lost in Master mode
(I2CSR2.ARLO and I2CSR1.EVF flags = 1)
– Bus error, Start or Stop condition detected
during data transfer
(I2CSR2.BERR and I2CSR1.EVF flags = 1)
– Master has sent header byte
(I2CSR1.ADD10 and I2CSR1.EVF flags = 1)
– Address byte successfully transmitted in Master mode.
(I2CSR1.EVF = 1 and I2CSR2.ADDTX = 1)
SCL is held low when the ADDTX flag of the
I2CSR2 register or the ADD10, SB, BTF or ADSL
flags of I2CSR1 register are set (See Figure 128)
or when the DMA is not complete.
The transfer is suspended in all cases except
when the BTF bit is set and the DMA is enabled. In
this case the event routine must suspend the DMA
transfer if it is required.
I2C STATUS REGISTER 1 (I2CSR1)
R241 - Read Only
Register Page: 20 (I2C_0) or 22 (I2C_1)
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7
EVF
0
ADD10
TRA
BUSY
BTF
ADSL
M/SL
SB
Note: Some bits of this register are reset by a read
operation of the register. Care must be taken when
using instructions that work on single bit. Some of
them perform a read of all the bits of the register
before modifying or testing the wanted bit. So other bits of the register could be affected by the operation.
In the same way, the test/compare operations perform a read operation.
Moreover, if some interrupt events occur while the
register is read, the corresponding flags are set,
and correctly read, but if the read operation resets
the flags, no interrupt request occurs.
Bit 7 = EVF Event Flag.
This bit is set by hardware as soon as an event (
listed below or described in Figure 128) occurs. It
is cleared by software when all event conditions
that set the flag are cleared. It is also cleared by
hardware when the interface is disabled
(I2CCR.PE=0).
0: No event
1: One of the following events has occurred:
– Byte received or to be transmitted
(I2CSR1.BTF and I2CSR1.EVF flags = 1)
– Address matched in Slave mode while
I2CCR.ACK=1
(I2CSR1.ADSL and I2CSR1.EVF flags = 1)
– Start condition generated
(I2CSR1.SB and I2CSR1.EVF flags = 1)
– No acknowledge received after byte transmission
(I2CSR2.AF and I2CSR1.EVF flags = 1)
– Stop detected in Slave mode
(I2CSR2.STOPF and I2CSR1.EVF flags = 1)
– Arbitration lost in Master mode
(I2CSR2.ARLO and I2CSR1.EVF flags = 1)
– Bus error, Start or Stop condition detected
during data transfer
(I2CSR2.BERR and I2CSR1.EVF flags = 1)
– Master has sent header byte
(I2CSR1.ADD10 and I2CSR1.EVF flags = 1)
273/426
9
I2C BUS INTERFACE
I2C BUS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
– Address byte successfully transmitted in Master mode.
(I2CSR1.EVF = 1 and I2CSR2.ADDTX=1)
Bit 6 = ADD10 10-bit addressing in Master mode.
This bit is set when the master has sent the first
byte in 10-bit address mode. An interrupt is generated if ITE=1.
It is cleared by software reading I2CSR1 register
followed by a write in the I2CDR register of the
second address byte. It is also cleared by hardware when peripheral is disabled (I2CCR.PE=0)
or when the STOPF bit is set.
0: No ADD10 event occurred.
1: Master has sent first address byte (header).
Bit 5 = TRA Transmitter/ Receiver.
When BTF flag of this register is set and also
TRA=1, then a data byte has to be transmitted. It is
cleared automatically when BTF is cleared. It is
also cleared by hardware after the STOPF flag of
I2CSR2 register is set, loss of bus arbitration
(ARLO flag of I2CSR2 register is set) or when the
interface is disabled (I2CCR.PE=0).
0: A data byte is received (if I2CSR1.BTF=1)
1: A data byte can be transmitted (if
I2CSR1.BTF=1)
Bit 4 = BUSY Bus Busy.
It indicates a communication in progress on the
bus. The detection of the communications is always active (even if the peripheral is disabled).
This bit is set by hardware on detection of a Start
condition and cleared by hardware on detection of
a Stop condition. This information is still updated
when the interface is disabled (I2CCR.PE=0).
0: No communication on the bus
1: Communication ongoing on the bus
Bit 3 = BTF Byte Transfer Finished.
This bit is set by hardware as soon as a byte is correctly received or before the transmission of a data
byte with interrupt generation if ITE=1. It is cleared
by software reading I2CSR1 register followed by a
read or write of I2CDR register or when DMA is
complete. It is also cleared by hardware when the
interface is disabled (I2CCR.PE=0).
274/426
9
– Following a byte transmission, this bit is set after
reception of the acknowledge clock pulse. BTF is
cleared by reading I2CSR1 register followed by
writing the next byte in I2CDR register or when
DMA is complete.
– Following a byte reception, this bit is set after
transmission of the acknowledge clock pulse if
ACK=1. BTF is cleared by reading I2CSR1 register followed by reading the byte from I2CDR
register or when DMA is complete.
The SCL line is held low while I2CSR1.BTF=1.
0: Byte transfer not done
1: Byte transfer succeeded
Bit 2 = ADSL Address matched (Slave mode).
This bit is set by hardware if the received slave address matches the I2COAR1/I2COAR2 register
content or a General Call address. An interrupt is
generated if ITE=1. It is cleared by software
reading I2CSR1 register or by hardware when the
interface is disabled (I2CCR.PE=0). The SCL line
is held low while ADSL=1.
0: Address mismatched or not received
1: Received address matched
Bit 1 = M/SL Master/Slave.
This bit is set by hardware as soon as the interface
is in Master mode (Start condition generated on
the lines after the I2CCR.START bit is set). It is
cleared by hardware after detecting a Stop condition on the bus or a loss of arbitration (ARLO=1). It
is also cleared when the interface is disabled
(I2CCR.PE=0).
0: Slave mode
1: Master mode
Bit 0 = SB Start Bit (Master mode).
This bit is set by hardware as soon as the Start
condition is generated (following a write of
START=1 if the bus is free). An interrupt is generated if ITE=1. It is cleared by software reading
I2CSR1 register followed by writing the address
byte in I2CDR register. It is also cleared by hardware
when
the
interface
is
disabled
(I2CCR.PE=0).
The SCL line is held low while SB=1.
0: No Start condition
1: Start condition generated
I2C BUS INTERFACE
I2C BUS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
I2C STATUS REGISTER 2 (I2CSR2)
R242 - Read Only
Register Page: 20 (I2C_0) or 22 (I2C_1)
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7
0
0
0
ADDTX
AF
STOPF ARLO BERR GCAL
Note: Some bits of this register are reset by a read
operation of the register. Care must be taken when
using instructions that work on single bit. Some of
them perform a read of all the bits of the register
before modifying or testing the wanted bit. So other bits of the register could be affected by the operation.
In the same way, the test/compare operations perform a read operation.
Moreover, if some interrupt events occur while the
register is read, the corresponding flags are set,
and correctly read, but if the read operation resets
the flags, no interrupt request occurs.
Bits 7:6 = Reserved. Forced to 0 by hardware.
Bit 5 = ADDTX Address or 2nd header transmitted
in Master mode.
This bit is set by hardware when the peripheral,
enabled in Master mode, has received the acknowledge relative to:
– Address byte in 7-bit mode
– Address or 2nd header byte in 10-bit mode.
0: No address or 2nd header byte transmitted
1: Address or 2nd header byte transmitted.
Bit 4 = AF Acknowledge Failure.
This bit is set by hardware when no acknowledge
is returned. An interrupt is generated if ITE=1.
It is cleared by software reading I2CSR2 register
after the falling edge of the acknowledge SCL
pulse, or by hardware when the interface is disabled (I2CCR.PE=0).
The SCL line is not held low while AF=1.
0: No acknowledge failure detected
1: A data or address byte was not acknowledged
Bit 3 = STOPF Stop Detection (Slave mode).
This bit is set by hardware when a Stop condition
is detected on the bus after an acknowledge. An
interrupt is generated if ITE=1.
It is cleared by software reading I2CSR2 register
or by hardware when the interface is disabled
(I2CCR.PE=0).
The SCL line is not held low while STOPF=1.
0: No Stop condition detected
1: Stop condition detected (while slave receiver)
Bit 2 = ARLO Arbitration Lost.
This bit is set by hardware when the interface (in
master mode) loses the arbitration of the bus to
another master. An interrupt is generated if ITE=1.
It is cleared by software reading I2CSR2 register
or by hardware when the interface is disabled
(I2CCR.PE=0).
After an ARLO event the interface switches back
automatically to Slave mode (M/SL=0).
The SCL line is not held low while ARLO=1.
0: No arbitration lost detected
1: Arbitration lost detected
Bit 1 = BERR Bus Error.
This bit is set by hardware when the interface detects a Start or Stop condition during a byte transfer. An interrupt is generated if ITE=1.
It is cleared by software reading I2CSR2 register
or by hardware when the interface is disabled
(I2CCR.PE=0).
The SCL line is not held low while BERR=1.
Note: If a misplaced start condition is detected,
also the ARLO flag is set; moreover, if a misplaced
stop condition is placed on the acknowledge SCL
pulse, also the AF flag is set.
0: No Start or Stop condition detected during byte
transfer
1: Start or Stop condition detected during byte
transfer
Bit 0 = GCAL General Call address matched.
This bit is set by hardware after an address
matches with the value stored in the I2CADR register while ENGC=1. In the I2CADR the General
Call address must be placed before enabling the
peripheral.
It is cleared by hardware after the detection of a
Stop condition, or when the peripheral is disabled
(I2CCR.PE=0).
0: No match
1: General Call address matched.
275/426
9
I2C BUS INTERFACE
I2C BUS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
I2C CLOCK CONTROL REGISTER
(I2CCCR)
R243 - Read / Write
Register Page: 20 (I2C_0) or 22 (I2C_1)
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7
FM/SM
I2C OWN ADDRESS REGISTER 1
(I2COAR1)
R244 - Read / Write
Register Page: 20 (I2C_0) or 22 (I2C_1)
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
0
CC6
CC5
CC4 CC3
7
0
CC2 CC1 CC0
ADD7 ADD6 ADD5 ADD4 ADD3 ADD2 ADD1 ADD0
I2C
Bit 7 = FM/SM Fast/Standard
mode.
This bit is used to select between fast and standard mode. See the description of the following bits.
It is set and cleared by software. It is not cleared
when the peripheral is disabled (I2CCR.PE=0)
Bits 6:0 = CC[6:0] 9-bit divider programming
Implementation of a programmable clock divider.
These bits and the CC[8:7] bits of the I2CECCR
register select the speed of the bus (FSCL) depending on the I2C mode.
They are not cleared when the interface is disabled (I2CCR.PE=0).
Refer to the Electrical Characteristics section for
the table of values (Table 70 on page 398).
Note: The programmed frequency is available
with no load on SCL and SDA pins.
276/426
9
7-bit Addressing Mode
Bits 7:1 = ADD[7:1] Interface address.
These bits define the I2C bus address of the interface.
They are not cleared when the interface is disabled (I2CCR.PE=0).
Bit 0 = ADD0 Address direction bit.
This bit is don’t care; the interface acknowledges
either 0 or 1.
It is not cleared when the interface is disabled
(I2CCR.PE=0).
Note: Address 01h is always ignored.
10-bit Addressing Mode
Bits 7:0 = ADD[7:0] Interface address.
These are the least significant bits of the I2Cbus
address of the interface.
They are not cleared when the interface is disabled (I2CCR.PE=0).
I2C BUS INTERFACE
I2C BUS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
I2C OWN ADDRESS REGISTER 2 (I2COAR2)
R245 - Read / Write
Register Page: 20 (I2C_0) or 22 (I2C_1)
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7
Bit 0 = Reserved.
0
FREQ1 FREQ0 EN10BIT FREQ2
0
ADD9
ADD8
0
Bits 7:6,4 = FREQ[2:0] Frequency bits.
IMPORTANT: To guarantee correct operation,
set these bits before enabling the interface
(while I2CCR.PE=0).
These bits can be set only when the interface is
disabled (I2CCR.PE=0). To configure the interface
to I2C specified delays, select the value corresponding to the microcontroller internal frequency
INTCLK.
INTCLK
Range
(MHz)
2.5 - 6
6- 10
10- 14
14 - 24
are not cleared when the interface is disabled
(I2CCR.PE=0).
FREQ2
FREQ1
FREQ0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Note: If an incorrect value, with respect to the
MCU internal frequency, is written in these bits,
the timings of the peripheral will not meet the I2C
bus standard requirements.
Note: The FREQ[2:0] = 100, 101, 110, 111 configurations must not be used.
Bit 5 = EN10BIT Enable 10-bit I2Cbus mode.
When this bit is set, the 10-bit I2Cbus mode is enabled.
This bit can be written only when the peripheral is
disabled (I2CCR.PE=0).
0: 7-bit mode selected
1: 10-bit mode selected
Bits 4:3 = Reserved.
Bits 2:1 = ADD[9:8] Interface address.
These are the most significant bits of the I2Cbus
address of the interface (10-bit mode only). They
I2C DATA REGISTER (I2CDR)
R246 - Read / Write
Register Page: 20 (I2C_0) or 22 (I2C_1)
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7
DR7
0
DR6
DR5
DR4
DR3
DR2
DR1
DR0
Bits 7:0 = DR[7:0] I2C Data.
– In transmitter mode:
I2CDR contains the next byte of data to be transmitted. The byte transmission begins after the
microcontroller has written in I2CDR or on the
next rising edge of the clock if DMA is complete.
– In receiver mode:
I2CDR contains the last byte of data received.
The next byte receipt begins after the I2CDR
read by the microcontroller or on the next rising
edge of the clock if DMA is complete.
GENERAL CALL ADDRESS (I2CADR)
R247 - Read / Write
Register Page: 20 (I2C_0) or 22 (I2C_1)
Reset Value: 1010 0000 (A0h)
7
0
ADR7 ADR6 ADR5 ADR4 ADR3 ADR2 ADR1 ADR0
Bits 7:0 = ADR[7:0] Interface address.
These bits define the I2Cbus General Call address
of the interface. It must be written with the correct
value depending on the use of the peripheral.If the
peripheral is used in I2C bus mode, the 00h value
must be loaded as General Call address.
The customer could load the register with other
values.
The bits can be written only when the peripheral is
disabled (I2CCR.PE=0)
The ADR0 bit is don’t care; the interface acknowledges either 0 or 1.
Note: Address 01h is always ignored.
277/426
9
I2C BUS INTERFACE
I2C BUS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
INTERRUPT STATUS REGISTER (I2CISR)
R248 - Read / Write
Register Page: 20 (I2C_0) or 22 (I2C_1)
Reset Value: 1xxx xxxx (xxh)
7
1
0
PRL2 PRL1 PRL0
0
IERRP IRXP ITXP
Bit 7 = Reserved.
Must be kept at 1
Bits 6:4 = PRL[2:0] Interrupt/DMA Priority Bits.
The priority is encoded with these three bits. The
value of “0” has the highest priority, the value “7”
has no priority. After the setting of this priority level, the priorities between the different Interrupt/
DMA sources is hardware defined according with
the following scheme:
– Error condition Interrupt (If DMASTOP=1) (Highest priority)
– Receiver DMA request
– Transmitter DMA request
– Error Condition Interrupt (If DMASTOP=0
– Data Received/Receiver End Of Block
– Peripheral Ready To Transmit/Transmitter End
Of Block (Lowest priority)
Bit 3 = Reserved.
Must be cleared.
Bit 2 = IERRP Error Condition pending bit
0: No error
1: Error event detected (if ITE=1)
278/426
9
Note: The Interrupt pending bits can be reset by
writing a “0” but is not possible to write a “1”. It is
mandatory to clear the interrupt source by writing a
“0” in the pending bit when executing the interrupt
service routine. When serving an interrupt routine,
the user should reset ONLY the pending bit related
to the served interrupt routine (and not reset the
other pending bits).
To detect the specific error condition that occurred, the flag bits of the I2CSR1 and I2CSR2
register should be checked.
Note: The IERRP pending bit is forced high whenthe error event flags are set (ADSL and SB flags in
the I2CSR1 register, SCLF, ADDTX, AF, STOPF,
ARLO and BERR flags in the I2CSR2 register). If
at least one flag is set, the application code should
not reset the IERRP bit.
Bit 1 = IRXP Data Received pending bit
0: No data received
1: data received (if ITE=1).
Bit 0 = ITXP Peripheral Ready To Transmit pending bit
0: Peripheral not ready to transmit
1: Peripheral ready to transmit a data byte (if
ITE=1).
I2C BUS INTERFACE
I2C BUS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
INTERRUPT VECTOR REGISTER (I2CIVR)
R249 - Read / Write
Register Page: 20 (I2C_0) or 22 (I2C_1)
Reset Value: Undefined
7
V7
0
V6
V5
V4
V3
EV2
EV1
0
Bits 7:3 = V[7:3] Interrupt Vector Base Address.
User programmable interrupt vector bits. These
are the five more significant bits of the interrupt
vector base address. They must be set before enabling the interrupt features.
Bits 2:1 = EV[2:1] Encoded Interrupt Source.
These Read-Only bits are set by hardware according to the interrupt source:
– 01: error condition detected
– 10: data received
– 11: peripheral ready to transmit
(DMA between peripheral and Register file), this
register has no meaning.
See Section 10.8.6.1 for more details on the use
of this register.
Bit 0 = RPS Receiver DMA Memory Pointer Selector.
If memory has been selected for DMA transfer
(I2CRDC.RF/MEM = 0) then:
0: Select ISR register for Receiver DMA transfer
address extension.
1: Select DMASR register for Receiver DMA transfer address extension.
RECEIVER DMA TRANSACTION COUNTER
REGISTER (I2CRDC)
R251 - Read / Write
Register Page: 20 (I2C_0) or 22 (I2C_1)
Reset Value: Undefined
7
0
RC7 RC6 RC5 RC4 RC3 RC2 RC1 RF/MEM
Bit 0 = Reserved.
Forced by hardware to 0.
RECEIVER DMA SOURCE ADDRESS POINTER
REGISTER (I2CRDAP)
R250 - Read / Write
Register Page: 20 (I2C_0) or 22 (I2C_1)
Reset Value: Undefined
7
RA7 RA6 RA5 RA4 RA3 RA2 RA1
0
RPS
Bits 7:1 = RA[7:1] Receiver DMA Address Pointer.
I2CRDAP contains the address of the pointer (in
the Register File) of the Receiver DMA data
source when the DMA is selected between the
peripheral and the Memory Space. Otherwise,
Bits 7:1 = RC[7:1] Receiver DMA Counter Pointer.
I2CRDC contains the address of the pointer (in the
Register File) of the DMA receiver transaction
counter when the DMA between Peripheral and
Memory Space is selected. Otherwise (DMA between Peripheral and Register File), this register
points to a pair of registers that are used as DMA
Address register and DMA Transaction Counter.
See Section 10.8.6.1 and Section 10.8.6.2 for
more details on the use of this register.
Bit 0 = RF/MEM Receiver Register File/ Memory
Selector.
0: DMA towards Memory
1: DMA towards Register file
279/426
9
I2C BUS INTERFACE
I2C BUS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
TRANSMITTER DMA SOURCE ADDRESS
POINTER REGISTER (I2CTDAP)
R252 - Read / Write
Register Page: 20 (I2C_0) or 22 (I2C_1)
Reset Value: Undefined
7
TA7
0
TA6
TA5
TA4
TA3
TA2
TA1
TPS
Bits 7:1= TA[7:1] Transmit DMA Address Pointer.
I2CTDAP contains the address of the pointer (in
the Register File) of the Transmitter DMA data
source when the DMA between the peripheral and
the Memory Space is selected. Otherwise (DMA
between the peripheral and Register file), this register has no meaning.
See Section 10.8.6.2 for more details on the use
of this register.
Bit 0 = TPS Transmitter DMA Memory Pointer Selector.
If memory has been selected for DMA transfer
(I2CTDC.RF/MEM = 0) then:
0: Select ISR register for transmitter DMA transfer
address extension.
1: Select DMASR register for transmitter DMA
transfer address extension.
TRANSMITTER DMA TRANSACTION COUNTER REGISTER (I2CTDC)
R253 - Read / Write
Register Page: 20 (I2C_0) or 22 (I2C_1)
Reset Value: Undefined
7
0
TC7 TC6 TC5 TC4 TC3 TC2 TC1 RF/MEM
Bits 7:1 = TC[7:1] Transmit DMA Counter Pointer.
I2CTDC contains the address of the pointer (in the
Register File) of the DMA transmitter transaction
counter when the DMA between Peripheral and
Memory Space is selected. Otherwise, if the DMA
between Peripheral and Register File is selected,
this register points to a pair of registers that are
used as DMA Address register and DMA Transaction Counter.
See Section 10.8.6.1 and Section 10.8.6.2 for
more details on the use of this register.
Bit 0 = RF/MEM Transmitter Register File/ Memory Selector.
0: DMA from Memory
1: DMA from Register file
EXTENDED CLOCK CONTROL REGISTER
(I2CECCR)
R254 - Read / Write
Register Page: 20 (I2C_0) or 22 (I2C_1)
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
CC8 CC7
Bits 7:2 = Reserved. Must always be cleared.
Bits 1:0 = CC[8:7] 9-bit divider programming
Implementation of a programmable clock divider.
These bits and the CC[6:0] bits of the I2CCCR register select the speed of the bus (FSCL).
For a description of the use of these bits, see the
I2CCCR register.
They are not cleared when the interface is disabled (I2CCCR.PE=0).
280/426
9
I2C BUS INTERFACE
I2C BUS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
INTERRUPT MASK REGISTER (I2CIMR)
R255 - Read / Write
Register Page: 20 (I2C_0) or 22 (I2C_1)
Reset Value: 00xx 0000 (x0h)
7
RXDM TXDM REOBP TEOBP
interrupt request.
Note: TEOBP can only be written to “0”.
0: End of block not reached
1: End of data block in DMA transmitter detected.
0
0
Bit 3 = Reserved. This bit must be cleared.
IERRM IRXM ITXM
Bit 7 = RXDM Receiver DMA Mask.
0: DMA reception disable.
1: DMA reception enable
RXDM is reset by hardware when the transaction
counter value decrements to zero, that is when a
Receiver End Of Block interrupt is issued.
Bit 6 = TXDM Transmitter DMA Mask.
0: DMA transmission disable.
1: DMA transmission enable.
TXDM is reset by hardware when the transaction
counter value decrements to zero, that is when a
Transmitter End Of Block interrupt is issued.
Bit 5 = REOBP Receiver DMA End Of Block Flag.
REOBP should be reset by software in order to
avoid undesired interrupt routines, especially in initialization routine (after reset) and after entering
the End Of Block interrupt routine.Writing “0” in
this bit will cancel the interrupt request
Note: REOBP can only be written to “0”.
0: End of block not reached.
1: End of data block in DMA receiver detected
Bit 2 = IERRM Error Condition interrupt mask bit.
This bit enables/ disables the Error interrupt.
0: Error interrupt disabled.
1: Error Interrupt enabled.
Bit 1 = IRXM Data Received interrupt mask bit.
This bit enables/ disables the Data Received and
Receive DMA End of Block interrupts.
0: Interrupts disabled
1: Interrupts enabled
Note: This bit has no effect on DMA transfer
Bit 0 = ITXM Peripheral Ready To Transmit interrupt mask bit.
This bit enables/ disables the Peripheral Ready To
Transmit and Transmit DMA End of Block interrupts.
0: Interrupts disabled
1: Interrupts enabled
Note: This bit has no effect on DMA transfer.
Bit 4 = TEOBP Transmitter DMA End Of Block TEOBP should be reset by software in order to avoid
undesired interrupt routines, especially in initialization routine (after reset) and after entering the End
Of Block interrupt routine.Writing “0” will cancel the
281/426
9
I2C BUS INTERFACE
I2C BUS INTERFACE (Cont’d)
Table 51. I2C BUS Register Map and Reset Values
Address
(Hex.)
F0h
F1h
F2h
F3h
F4h
F5h
F6h
F7h
F8h
F9h
FAh
FBh
FCh
FDh
FEh
FFh
Register
Name
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
I2CCR
-
-
PE
ENGC
START
ACK
STOP
ITE
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
I2CSR1
EVF
ADD10
TRA
BUSY
BTF
ADSL
M/SL
SB
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
I2CSR2
-
0
ADDTX
AF
STOPF
ARLO
BERR
GCAL
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
I2CCCR
FM/SM
CC6
CC5
CC4
CC3
CC2
CC1
CC0
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
I2COAR1
ADD7
ADD6
ADD5
ADD4
ADD3
ADD2
ADD1
ADD0
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
I2COAR2
FREQ1
FREQ0
EN10BIT
FREQ2
0
ADD9
ADD8
0
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
I2CDR
DR7
DR6
DR5
DR4
DR3
DR2
DR1
DR0
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
I2CADR
ADR7
ADR6
ADR5
ADR4
ADR3
ADR2
ADR1
ADR0
Reset Value
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
I2CISR
DMASTOP
PRL2
PRL1
PRL0
IERRP
IRXP
ITXP
Reset Value
1
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
I2CIVR
V7
V6
V5
V4
V3
EV2
EV1
0
Reset Value
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
0
I2CRDAP
RA7
RA6
RA5
RA4
RA3
RA2
RA1
RPS
Reset Value
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
I2CRDC
RC7
RC6
RC5
RC4
RC3
RC2
RC1
RF/MEM
Reset Value
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
I2CTDAP
TA7
TA6
TA5
TA4
TA3
TA2
TA1
TPS
Reset Value
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
I2CTDC
TC7
TC6
TC5
TC4
TC3
TC2
TC1
RF/MEM
Reset Value
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
0
0
0
0
0
0
CC8
CC7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
I2CIMR
RXDM
TXDM
REOBP
TEOBP
IERRM
IRXM
ITXM
Reset Value
0
0
X
X
0
0
0
I2CECCR
10.8.8 IMPORTANT NOTES ON I2C
Please refer to Section 13.1.3 on page 410
282/426
9
0
J1850 Byte Level Protocol Decoder (JBLPD)
10.9 J1850 Byte Level Protocol Decoder (JBLPD)
10.9.1 Introduction
The JBLPD is used to exchange data between the
ST9 microcontroller and an external J1850 transceiver I.C.
The JBLPD transmits a string of variable pulse
width (VPW) symbols to the transceiver. It also receives VPW encoded symbols from the transceiver, decodes them and places the data in a register.
In-frame responses of type 0, 1, 2 and 3 are supported and the appropriate normalization bit is
generated automatically. The JBLPD filters out
any incoming messages which it does not care to
receive. It also includes a programmable external
loop delay.
The JBLPD uses two signals to communicate with
the transceiver:
– VPWI (input)
– VPWO (output)
10.9.2 Main Features
■ SAE J1850 compatible
■ Digital filter
■ In-Frame Responses of type 0, 1, 2, 3 supported
with automatic normalization bit
■ Programmable External Loop Delay
■ Diagnostic 4x time mode
■ Diagnostic Local Loopback mode
■ Wide range of MCU internal frequencies
allowed
■ Low
power consumption mode (JBLPD
suspended)
■ Very low power consumption mode (JBLPD
disabled)
■ Don’t care message filter
■ Selectable VPWI input polarity
■ Selectable Normalization Bit symbol form
■ 6 maskable interrupts
■ DMA transmission and reception with End Of
Block interrupts
283/426
9
J1850 Byte Level Protocol Decoder (JBLPD)
J1850 BYTE LEVEL PROTOCOL DECODER (Cont’d)
Figure 130. JBLPD Byte Level Protocol Decoder Block Diagram
RXDATA
VPW
DIGITAL
DECODER
FILTER
VPWI pin
ERROR
ARBITRATION
CHECKER
CONTROL
I.D. Filter
FREG[0:31]
VPWI_LOOP
STATUS
JBLPD
STATE
MACHINE
CRC
GENERATOR
OPTIONS
LOOPBACK
LOGIC
TXOP
CLOCK
PRESCALER
Prescaled Clock
(Encoder/Decoder
Clock)
VPWO_LOOP
CLKSEL
CRC BYTE
CRC\ BYTE
MUX
PADDR
TXDATA
Interrupt & DMA Logic and Registers
284/426
9
VPW
ENCODER
VPWO pin
J1850 Byte Level Protocol Decoder (JBLPD)
J1850 BYTE LEVEL PROTOCOL DECODER (Cont’d)
10.9.3 Functional Description
In the case of the reception of an invalid bit, the
JBLPD peripheral will set the IBD bit in the ER10.9.3.1 J1850 protocol symbols
ROR register. The JBLPD peripheral shall termiJ1850 symbols are defined as a duration (in micronate any transmissions in progress, and disable
seconds or clock cycles) and a state which can be
receive transfers and RDRF flags until the VPW
either an active state (logic high level on VPWO)
decoder recognizes a valid EOF symbol from the
or a passive state (logic low level on VPWO).
bus.
An idle J1850 bus is in a passive state.
The JBLPD’s state machine handles all the Tv
Any symbol begins by changing the state of the
l.D.s in accordance with the SAE J1850 specificaVPW line. The line is in this state for a specific dution.
ration depending on the symbol being transmitted.
Note: Depending on the value of a control bit, the
Durations, and hence symbols, are measured as
polarity of the VPWI input can be the same as the
time between successive state transitions. Each
J1850 bus or inverted with respect to it.
symbol has only one level transition of a specific
duration.
Symbols for logic zero and one data bits can be eiTable 52. J1850 Symbol definitions
ther a high or a low level, but all other symbols are
defined at only one level.
Symbol
Definition
Each symbol is placed directly next to another.
Passive for Tv1 or AcData Bit Zero
Therefore, every level transition means that anothtive for Tv2
er symbol has begun.
Passive for Tv2 or AcData Bit One
tive for Tv1
Data bits of a logic zero are either a short duration
if in a passive state or a long duration if in an active
Start of Frame (SOF)
Active for Tv3
state. Data bits of a logic one are either a long duEnd of Data (EOD)
Passive for Tv3
ration if in a passive state or a short duration if in
End of Frame (EOF)
Passive for Tv4
an active state. This ensures that data logic zeros
predominate during bus arbitration.
Inter Frame Separation (IFS)
Passive for Tv6
An eight bit data byte transmission will always
IDLE Bus Condition (IDLE)
Passive for > Tv6
have eight transitions. For all data byte and CRC
Normalization Bit (NB)
Active for Tv1 or Tv2
byte transfers, the first bit is a passive state and
Break (BRK)
Active for Tv5
the last bit is an active state.
For the duration of the VPW, symbols are expressed in terms of Tv’s (or VPW mode timing valTable 53. J1850 VPW Mode Timing Value (Tv)
ues). J1850 symbols and Tv values are described
definitions (in clock cycles)
in the SAE J1850 specification, in Table 52 and in
Table 53.
Pulse Width
Minimum
Nominal
Maximum
An ignored Tv I.D. occurs for level transitions
or Tv I.D.
Duration
Duration
Duration
which occur in less than the minimum time reIgnored
0
N/A
<=7
quired for an invalid bit detect. The VPW encoder
Invalid Bit
>7
N/A
<=34
does not recognize these characters as they are
filtered out by the digital filter. The VPW decoder
Tv1
>34
64
<=96
does not resynchronize its counter with either
Tv2
>96
128
<=163
edge of “ignored” pulses. Therefore, the counter
Tv3
>163
200
<=239
which times symbols continues to time from the
Tv4
>239
280
N/A
last transition which occurred after a valid symbol
(including the invalid bit symbol) was recognized.
Tv5
>239
300
N/A
A symbol recognized as an invalid bit will resynTv6
>280
300
N/A
chronize the VPW decoder to the invalid bit edges.
285/426
9
J1850 Byte Level Protocol Decoder (JBLPD)
J1850 BYTE LEVEL PROTOCOL DECODER (Cont’d)
10.9.3.2 Transmitting Messages
chronize off the decoder output to time the VPWO
symbol time.
This section describes the general procedures
used by the JBLPD to successfully transmit J1850
A detailed description of the JBLPD opcodes can
frames of data out the VPWO pin. The first five
be find in the description of the OP[2:0] bits in the
sub-sections describe the procedures used for
TXOP register.
transmitting the specific transmit data types. The
last section goes into the details of the transmitted
Message Byte String Transmission (Type 0
symbol timing, synchronizing of symbols received
IFR)
from the external J1850 bus, and how data bit arbitration works.
Message byte transmitting is the outputting of data
bytes on the VPWO pin that occurs subsequent to
The important concept to note for transmitting data
a received bus idle condition. All message byte
is: the activity sent over the VPWO line should be
strings start with a SOF symbol transmission, then
timed with respect to the levels and transitions
one or more data bytes are transmitted. A CRC
seen on the filtered VPWI line.
byte is then transmitted followed by an EOD symThe J1850 bus is a multiplexed bus, and the
bol (see Figure 131) to complete the transmission.
VPWO & VPWI pins interface to this bus through a
If transmission is queued while another frame is
transceiver I.C. Therefore, the propagation delay
being received, then the JBLPD will time an Interthrough the transceiver I.C. and external bus filterFrame Separation (IFS) time (Tv6) before coming must be taken into account when looking for
mencing with the SOF character.
transmitted edges to appear back at the receiver.
The user program will decide at some point that it
The external propagation delay for an edge sent
wants to initiate a message byte string. The user
out on the VPWO line, to be detected on the VPWI
program writes the TXDATA register with the first
line is denoted as Tp-ext and is programmable bemessage data byte to be transmitted. Next, the
tween 0 and 31 µs nominal via the JDLY[4:0] bits
TXOP register is written with the MSG opcode if
in CONTROL register.
more than one data byte is contained within the
The transmitter VPW encoder sets the proper level
message, or with MSG+CRC opcode if one data
to be sent out the VPWO line. It then waits for the
byte is to be transmitted. The action of writing the
corresponding level transition to be reflected back
TXOP register causes the TRDY bit to be cleared
at the VPW decoder input.
signifying that the TXDATA register is full and a
Taking into account the external loop delay (Tp-ext)
corresponding opcode has been queued. The
and the digital filter delay, the encoder will time its
JBLPD must wait for an EOF nominal time period
output to remain at this level so that the received
at which time data is transferred from the TXDATA
symbol is at the correct nominal symbol time (refer
register to the transmit shift register. The TRDY bit
to “Transmit Opcode Queuing” section). If arbitrais again set since the TXDATA register is empty.
tion is lost at any time during bit 0 or bit 1 transmisThe JBLPD should also begin transmission if ansion, then the VPWO line goes passive. At the end
other device begins transmitting early. As long as
of the symbol time on VPWO, the encoder changan EOF minimum time period elapses, the JBLPD
es the state of VPWO if any more information is to
should begin timing and asserting the SOF symbol
be transmitted. It then times the new state change
with the intention of arbitrating for the bus during
from the receiver decoder output.
the transmission of the first data byte. If a transmit
Note that depending on the symbol (especially the
is requested during an incoming SOF symbol, the
SOF, NB0, NB1 symbols) the decoder output may
JBLPD should be able to synchronize itself to the
actually change to the desired state before the
incoming SOF up to a time of Tv1 max. (96 µs) into
transmit is attempted. It is important to still synthe SOF symbol before declaring that it was too
late to arbitrate for this frame.
286/426
9
J1850 Byte Level Protocol Decoder (JBLPD)
J1850 BYTE LEVEL PROTOCOL DECODER (Cont’d)
If the J1850 bus was IDLE at the time the first data
register except during DMA transfers (see Section
byte and opcode are written, the transmitter will
10.9.6.4 DMA Management in Transmission
immediately transfer data from the TXDATA regisMode).
ter to the transmit shift register. The TRDY bit will
once again be set signifying the readiness to acTransmitting a Type 1 IFR
cept a new data byte. The second data byte can
then be written followed by the respective opcode.
The user program will decide to transmit an IFR
In the case of the last data byte, the TXOP register
type 1 byte in response to a message which is curshould be written with the MSG+CRC opcode. The
rently being received (See Figure 132). It does so
transmitter will transmit the internally generated
by writing the IFR1 opcode to the TXOP register.
CRC after the last bit of the data byte. Once the
Transmitting IFR data type 1 requires only a single
TRDY bit is set signifying the acceptance of the
write of the TXOP register with the IFR1 opcode
last data byte, the first byte of the next message
set. The MLC[3:0] bits should be set to the proper
can be queued by writing the TXDATA register fol“byte-received-count-required-before-IFR’ing” vallowed by a TXOP register write. The block will wait
ue. If no error conditions (IBD, IFD, TRA, RBRK or
until the current data and the CRC data byte are
CRCE) exist to prevent transmission, the JBLPD
sent out and a new IFS has expired before transperipheral will then transmit out the contents of the
mitting the new data. This is the case even if IFR
PADDR register at the next EOD nominal time pedata reception takes place in the interim.
riod or at a time greater than the EOD minimum
time period if a falling edge is detected on filtered
Lost arbitration any time during the transfer of type
J1850 bus line signifying another transmitter is be0 data will be honoured by immediately relinquishginning early. The NB1 symbol precedes the PADing control to the higher priority message. The TLA
DR register value and is followed with an EOF debit in the STATUS register is set accordingly and
limiter. The TRDY flag is cleared on the write of the
an interrupt will be generated assuming the
TXOP register. The TRDY bit is set once the NB1
TLA_M bit in the IMR register is set. It is responsibegins transmitting.
bility of the user program to re-send the message
beginning with the first byte if desired. This may be
Although the JBLPD should never lose arbitration
done at any time by rewriting only the TXOP regisfor data in the IFR portion of a type 1 frame, higher
ter if the TXDATA contents have not changed.
priority messages are always honoured under the
rules of arbitration. If arbitration is lost then the
Any transmitted data and CRC bytes during the
VPWO line is set to the passive state. The TLA bit
transmit frame will also be received and transin the STATUS register is set accordingly and an
ferred to the RXDATA register if the corresponding
interrupt will be generated if enabled. The IFR1 is
message filter bit is set in the FREG[0:31] regisnot retried. It is lost if the JBLPD peripheral loses
ters. If the corresponding bit is not set in
arbitration. Also, the data that made it out on the
FREG[0:31], then the transmitted data is also not
bus will be received in the RXDATA register if not
transferred to RXDATA. Also, the RDRF will not
put into sleep mode. Note that for the transmitter to
get set during frame and receive events such as
synchronize to the incoming signals of a frame, an
RDOF & EODM.
IFR should be queued before an EODM is reNOTE: The correct procedure for transmitting is to
ceived for the present frame.
write first the TXDATA register and then the TXOP
287/426
9
J1850 Byte Level Protocol Decoder (JBLPD)
J1850 BYTE LEVEL PROTOCOL DECODER (Cont’d)
Transmitting a Type 2 IFR
is currently being received (See Figure 134). It
does so by writing the IFR3 or IFR3+CRC opcode
The user program will decide to transmit an IFR
to the TXOP register. Transmitting IFR data type 3
type 2 byte in response to a message which is curis similar to transmitting a message, in that the TXrently being received (See Figure 133). It does so
DATA register is written with the first data byte folby writing the IFR2 opcode to the TXOP register.
lowed
by a TXOP register write. For a single data
Transmitting IFR data type 2 requires only a single
byte IFR3 transmission, the TXOP register would
write of the TXOP register with the IFR2 opcode
be written with IFR3+CRC opcode set. The
set. The MLC[3:0] bits can also be set to check for
MLC[3:0] bits can also be set to a proper value to
message length errors. If no error conditions (IBD,
check for message length errors before enabling
IFD, TRA, RBRK or CRCE) exist to prevent transthe IFR transmit.
mission, the JBLPD will transmit out the contents
of the PADDR register at the next EOD nominal
If no error conditions (IBD, IFD, TRA, RBRK or
time period or after an EOD minimum time period if
CRCE) exist to prevent transmission, the JBLPD
a rising edge is detected on the filtered VPWI line
will wait for an EOD nominal time period on the filsignifying another transmitter beginning early. The
tered VPWI line (or for at least an EOD minimum
NB1 symbol precedes the PADDR register value
time followed by a rising edge signifying another
and is followed with an EOF delimiter. The TRDY
transmitter beginning early) at which time data is
flag will be cleared on the write of the TXOP registransferred from the TXDATA register to the transter. The TRDY bit is set once the NB1 begins
mit shift register. The TRDY bit is set since the TXtransmitting.
DATA register is empty. A NB0 symbol is output
on the VPWO line followed by the data byte and
Lost arbitration for this case is a normal occurpossibly the CRC byte if a IFR3+CRC opcode was
rence since type 2 IFR data is made up of single
set. Once the first IFR3 byte has been successfully
bytes from multiple responders. If arbitration is lost
transmitted, successive IFR3 bytes are sent with
the VPWO line is released and the JBLPD waits
TXDATA/TXOP write sequences where the
until the byte on the VPWI line is completed. Note
MLC[3:O] bits are don’t cares. The final byte in the
that the IFR that did make it out on the bus will be
IFR3 string must be transmitted with the
received in the RXDATA register if it is not put into
IFR3+CRC opcode to trigger the JBLPD to apsleep mode. Then, the JBLPD re-attempts to send
pend the CRC byte to the string. The user program
its physical address immediately after the end of
may queue up the next message opcode sethe last byte. The TLA bit is not set if arbitration is
quence once the TRDY bit has been set.
lost and the user program does not need to requeue data or an opcode. The JBLPD will re-atAlthough arbitration should never be lost for data
tempt to send its PADDR register contents until it
in the IFR portion of a type 3 frame, higher priority
successfully does so or the 12-byte frame maximessages are always honoured under the rules of
mum is reached if NFL=0. If NFL=1, then re-atarbitration. If arbitration is lost then the block
tempts to send an lFR2 are executed until canshould relinquish the bus by taking the VPWO line
celled by the CANCEL opcode or a JBLPD disato the passive state. In this case the TLA bit in the
ble. Note that for the transmitter to synchronize to
STATUS register is set, and an interrupt will be
the incoming signals of a frame, an IFR should be
generated if enabled. Note also, that the IFR data
queued before an EODM is received for the
that did make it out on the bus will be received in
present frame.
the RXDATA register if not in sleep mode. Note
that for the transmitter to synchronize to the incoming signals of a frame, an IFR should be
Transmitting a Type 3 lFR Data String
queued before an EODM is received for the current frame.
The user program will decide to transmit an IFR
type 3 byte string in response to a message which
288/426
9
J1850 Byte Level Protocol Decoder (JBLPD)
J1850 BYTE LEVEL PROTOCOL DECODER (Cont’d)
Figure 131. J1850 String Transmission Type 0
Frame
Message
SOF
I.D.
Byte
Data byte(s) (if any)
CRC EOF
Figure 132. J1850 String Transmission Type 1
Frame
IFR
to be sent
Message Rx’d from Another Node
SOF
I.D.
Byte
Data byte(s) (if any)
CRC
EOD NB1
IFR
Byte
EOF
Figure 133. J1850 String Transmission Type 2
Frame
IFR
to be sent
Message Rx’d from Another Node
SOF
I.D.
Byte
Data byte(s) (if any)
CRC
EOD
NB1
IFR
Byte
... ...
IFR
Byte EOF
Figure 134. J1850 String Transmission Type 3
Frame
IFR
to be sent
Message Rx’d from Another Node
SOF
I.D.
Byte
Data byte(s) (if any)
CRC
CRC
EOD NB0 IFR Data Byte(s) Byte EOF
289/426
9
J1850 Byte Level Protocol Decoder (JBLPD)
J1850 BYTE LEVEL PROTOCOL DECODER (Cont’d)
Transmit Opcode Queuing
JBLPD has a receiver pin which tells the transmitter about bus activity. Due to characteristics of the
The JBLPD has the capability of queuing opcode
J1850 bus and the eight-clock digital filter, the sigtransmits written to the TXOP register until J1850
nals presented to the VPW symbol decoder are
bus conditions are in a correct state for the transdelayed a certain amount of time behind the actual
mit to occur. For example, a MSGx opcode can be
J1850 bus. Also, due to wave shaping and other
queued when the JBLPD is presently receiving a
signal conditioning of the transceiver I.C. the acframe (or transmitting a MSG+CRC opcode) or an
tions of the VPWO pin on the transmitter take time
IFRx opcode can be queued when currently reto appear on the bus itself. The total external
ceiving or transmitting the message portion of a
J1850 bus delays are defined in the SAE J1850
frame.
standard as nominally 16 µs. The nominal 16 µs
Queuing a MSG or MSG+CRC opcode for the next
loop delay will actually vary between different
frame can occur while another frame is in
transceiver I.C’s. The JBLPD peripheral thus inprogress. A MSGx opcode is written to the TXOP
cludes a programmability of the external loop deregister when the present frame is past the point
lay in the bit positions JDLY[4:0]. This assures
where arbitration for control of the bus for this
only nominal transmit symbols are placed on the
frame can occur. The JBLPD will wait for a nomibus by the JBLPD.
nal IFS symbol (or EOFmin if another node begins
The method of transmitting for the JBLPD includes
early) to appear on the VPWI line before cominteraction between the transmitter and the receivmencing to transmit this queued opcode. The
er. The transmitter starts a symbol by placing the
TRDY bit for the queued opcode will remain clear
proper level (active or passive) on its VPWO pin.
until the EOFmin is detected on the VPWI line
The transmitter then waits for the corresponding
where it will then get set. Queued MSGx transmits
pin transition (inverted, of course) at the VPW defor the next frame do not get cancelled for TLA,
coder input. Note that the level may actually apIBD, IFD or CRCE errors that occur in the present
pear at the input before the transmitter places the
frame. An RBRK error will cancel a queued opvalue on the VPWO pin. Timing of the remainder
code for the next frame.
of the symbol starts when the transition is detectQueuing an IFRx opcode for the present frame
ed. Refer to Figure 136, Case 1. The symbol timecan occur at any time after the detection of the beout value is defined as:
ginning of an SOF character from the VPWI line.
SymbolTimeout = NominalSymbolTime - ExternalLoopThe queued IFR will wait for a nominal EOD symDelay - 8 µs
bol (or EODmin if another node begins early) before commencing to transmit the IFR. A queued
NominalSymbolTime = Tv Symbol time
ExternalLoopDelay = defined via JDLY[4:0]
IFR transmit will be cancelled on IBD, lFD, CRCE,
8 µs = Digital Filter
RBRK errors as well as on a correct message
Bit-by-bit arbitration must be used to settle the
length check error or frame length limit violation if
conflicts that occur when multiple nodes attempt to
these checks are enabled.
transmit frames simultaneously. Arbitration is applied to each data bit symbol transmitted starting
Transmit Bus Timing, Arbitration, and Synafter the SOF or NBx symbol and continuing until
chronization
the EOD symbol. During simultaneous transmissions of active and passive states on the bus, the
The external J1850 bus on the other side of the
resultant state on the bus is the active state. If the
transceiver I.C. is a single wire multiplex bus with
JBLPD detects a received symbol from the bus
multiple nodes transmitting a number of different
that is different from the symbol being transmitted,
types of message frames. Each node can transmit
then the JBLPD will discontinue its transmit operaat any time and synchronization and arbitration is
tion prior to the start of the next bit. Once arbitraused to determine who wins control of the transtion has been lost, the VPWO pin must go passive
mit. It is the obligation of the JBLPD transmitter
within one period of the prescaled clock of the pesection to synchronize off of symbols on the bus,
ripheral. Figure 135 shows 3 nodes attempting to
and to place only nominal symbol times onto the
arbitrate for the bus with Node B eventually winbus within the accuracy of the peripheral (+/- 1 µs).
ning with the highest priority data.
To transmit proper symbols the JBLPD must know
what is going on out on the bus. Fortunately, the
290/426
9
J1850 Byte Level Protocol Decoder (JBLPD)
J1850 BYTE LEVEL PROTOCOL DECODER (Cont’d)
Figure 135. J1850 Arbitration Example
Transmitting
Node A
Active
Passive
SOF
Transmitting
Node B
Active
Passive
SOF
Transmitting
Node C
Active
Passive
SOF
Signal
on Bus
Active
Passive
SOF
0
0
1 1 0
0 0 1
0
0
1 1 0
0 0
0
0
0
1 1 0 1
0
0
1 1 0
0 0
0
Figure 136. J1850 Received Symbol Timing
178 µs
VPWO
Case 1
VPWI
VPW Decoder
178 µs
VPWO
TX2
Case 2
VPWI
VPW Decoder
178 µs
VPWO
TX2
Case 3
VPWI
VPW Decoder
0
-6
14
8
22
200 214
192 208 222
291/426
9
J1850 Byte Level Protocol Decoder (JBLPD)
J1850 BYTE LEVEL PROTOCOL DECODER (Cont’d)
Use of symbol and bit synchronization is an inte10.9.3.3 Receiving Messages
gral part of the J1850 bus scheme. Therefore, tight
Data is received from the external analog transcoupling of the encoder and decoder functions is
ceiver on the VPWI pin. VPWI data is immediately
required to maintain synchronization during transpassed through a digital filter that ignores all pulsmits. Transmitted symbols and bits are initiated by
es that are less than 7µs. Pulses greater than or
the encoder and are timed through the decoder to
equal to 7µs and less than 34µs are flagged as
realize synchronization. Figure 136 exemplifies
invalid bits (IBD) in the ERROR register.
synchronization with 3 examples for an SOF symOnce data passes through the filter, all delimiters
bol and JDLY[4:0] = 01110b.
are stripped from the data stream and data bits are
Case 1 shows a single transmitter arbitrating for
shifted into the receive shift register by the decodthe bus. The VPWO pin is asserted, and 14µs later
er logic. The first byte received after a valid SOF
the bus transitions to an active state. The 14µs decharacter is compared with the flags contained in
lay is due to the nominal delay through the exterFREG[0:31]. If the compare indicates that this
nal transceiver chip. The signal is echoed back to
message should be received, then the receive
the transceiver through the VPWI pin, and proshift register contents are moved to the receive
ceeds through the digital filter. The digital filter has
data register (RXDATA) for the user program to
a loop delay of 8 clock cycles with the signal finally
access. The Receive Data Register Full bit
presented to the decoder 22 µs after the VPWO
(RDRF) is set to indicate that a complete byte has
pin was asserted. The decoder waits 178 µs bebeen received. For each byte that is to be received
fore issuing a signal to the encoder signifying the
in a frame, once an entire byte has been received,
end of the symbol. The VPWO pin is de-asserted
the receive shift register contents are moved to the
producing the nominal SOF bit timing (22 µs +
receive data register (RXDATA). All data bits re178µs = 200 µs).
ceived, including CRC bits, are transferred to the
Case 2 shows a condition where 2 transmitters atRXDATA register. The Receive Data Register Full
tempt to arbitrate for the bus at nearly the same
bit (RDRF) is set to indicate that a complete byte
time with a second transmitter, TX2, beginning
has been received.
slightly earlier than the VPWO pin. Since the
If the first byte after a valid SOF indicates non-reJBLPD always times symbols from its receiver
ception of this frame, then the current byte in the
perspective, 178µs after the decoder sees the risreceive shift register is inhibited from being transing edge it issues a signal to the encoder to signify
ferred to the RXDATA register and the RDRF flag
the end of the SOF. Nominal SOF timings are
remains clear (see the “Received Message Filtermaintained and the JBLPD re-synchronizes to
ing” section). Also, no flags associated with receivTX2.
ing a message (RDOF, CRCE, IFD, IBD) are set.
Case 3 again shows an example of 2 transmitters
A CRC check is kept on all bytes that are transattempting to arbitrate for the bus at nearly the
ferred to the RXDATA register during message
same time with the VPWO pin starting earlier than
byte reception (succeeding an SOF symbol) and
TX2. In this case TX2 is required to re-synchronize
IFR3 reception (succeeding an NB0 symbol). The
to VPWO.
CRC is initialized on receipt of the first byte that
All 3 examples exemplify how bus timings are drivfollows an SOF symbol or an NB0 symbol. The
en from the receiver perspective. Once the receivCRC check concludes on receipt of an EODM
er detects an active bus, the transmitter symbol
symbol. The CRC error bit (CRCE), therefore, gets
timings are timed minus the transceiver and digital
set after the EODM symbol has been recognized.
filter delays (i.e. SOF = 200 µs - 14µs - 8µs =
Refer to the “SAE Recommended Practice 178µs). This synchronization and timing off of the
J1850” manual for more information on CRCs.
VPWI pin occurs for every symbol while transmitting. This ensures true arbitration during data byte
transmissions.
292/426
9
J1850 Byte Level Protocol Decoder (JBLPD)
J1850 BYTE LEVEL PROTOCOL DECODER (Cont’d)
Received Message Filtering
user program. All receiver flags and interrupts
function normally.
The FREG[0:31] registers can be considered an
array of 256 bits (the FREG[0].0 bit is bit 0 of the
Note that a break symbol received during a filtered
array and the FREG[31].7 bit is bit 255). The I.D.
out message will still be received. Note also that
byte of a message frame is used as a pointer to
the filter comparison occurs after reception of the
the array (See Figure 137).
first byte. So, any receive errors that occur before
the message filter comparison (i.e. IBD, IFD) will
Upon the start of a frame, the first data byte rebe active at least until the filter comparison.
ceived after the SOF symbol determines the I.D. of
the message frame. This I.D. byte addresses the
I.D. byte flags stored in registers FREG[0:31]. This
Transmitted Message Filtering
operation is accomplished before the transfer of
When transmitting a message, the corresponding
the I.D. byte into the RXDATA register and before
FREG[0:31] I.D. filter bit may be set or cleared. If
the RDRF bit is set.
set, then the JBLPD will receive all data informaIf the corresponding bit in the message filter array,
tion transferred during the frame, unless sleep
FREG[0:31], is set to zero (0), then the I.D. byte is
mode is invoked. Everything the JBLPD transmits
not transferred to the RXDATA register and the
will be reflected in the RXDATA register.
RDRF bit is not set. Also, the remainder of the
Because the JBLPD has invalid bit detect (IBD),
message frame is ignored until reception of an
invalid frame detect (IFD), transmitter lost arbitraEOFmin symbol. A received EOFmin symbol tertion (TRA), and Cyclic Redundancy Check Error
minates the operation of the message filter and
(CRCE) it is not necessary for the transmitter to lisenables the receiver for the next message. None
ten to the bytes that it is transmitting. The user
of the flags related to the receiver, other than
may wish to filter out the transmitted messages
IDLE, are set. The EODM flag does not get set
from the receiver. This can reduce interrupt burduring a filtered frame. No error flags other than
den. When a transmitted I.D. byte is filtered by the
RBRK can get set.
receiver section of the block, then RDRF, RDOF,
If the corresponding bit in the message filter array,
EODM flags are inhibited and no RXDATA transFREG[0:31], is set to a one (1), then the I.D. byte
fers occur. The other flags associated normally
is transferred to the RXDATA register and the
with receiving - RBRK, CRCE, IFD, and IBD - are
RDRF is set. Also, the remainder of the message
not inhibited, and they can be used to ascertain
is received unless sleep mode is invoked by the
the condition of the message transmit.
Figure 137. I.D. Byte and Message Filter Array use
Bit 0 = FREG[0].0
Bit 1 = FREG[0].1
Bit 2 = FREG[0].2
Bit 3 = FREG[0].3
Bit 4 = FREG[0].4
I.D. byte
value = n
Bit n-1
Bit n
Bit n+1
Bit 254 = FREG[31].6
Bit 255 = FREG[31].7
293/426
9
J1850 Byte Level Protocol Decoder (JBLPD)
J1850 BYTE LEVEL PROTOCOL DECODER (Cont’d)
10.9.3.4 Sleep Mode
ing the TRDY, TLA, TTO, TDUF, TRA, IBD, IFD,
and CRCE bits to be set if required. This mode alSleep mode allows the user program to ignore the
lows the user to not have to listen while talking.
remainder of a message. Normally, the user program can recognise if the message is of interest
from the header bytes at the beginning of the mes10.9.3.5 Normalization Bit symbol selection
sage. If the user program is not interested in the
The form of the NB0/NB1 symbol changes demessage it simply writes the SLP bit in the PRLR
pending on the industry standard followed. A bit
register. This causes all additional data on the bus
(NBSYMS) in the OPTIONS register selects the
to be ignored until an EOF minimum occurs. No
symbol timings used. Refer to Table 54.
additional flags (but not the EOFM flag) and, therefore, interrupts are generated for the remainder of
the message. The single exception to this is a re10.9.3.6 VPWI input line management
ceived break symbol while in sleep mode. Break
The JBLPD is able to work with J1850 transceiver
symbols always take precedence and will set the
chips that have both inverted and not inverted RX
RBRK bit in the ERROR register and generate an
signal. A dedicated bit (INPOL) of the OPTIONS
interrupt if the ERR_M bit in IMR is set. Sleep
register must be programmed with the correct valmode and the SLP bit gets cleared on reception of
ue depending on the polarity of the VPWI input
an EOF or Break symbol.
with respect to the J1850 bus line. Refer to the INWrites to the SLP bit will be ignored if:
POL bit description for more details.
1) A valid EOFM symbol was the last valid symbol
detected,
10.9.3.7 Loopback mode
AND
The JBLPD is able to work in loopback mode. This
2) The J1850 bus line (after the filter) is passive.
mode, enabled setting the LOOPB bit of the OPTherefore, sleep mode can only be invoked after
TIONS register, internally connects the output sigthe SOF symbol and subsequent data has been
nal (VPWO) of the JBLPD to the input (VPWI)
received, but before a valid EOF is detected. If
without polarity inversion. The external VPWO pin
sleep mode is invoked within this time window,
of the MCU is forced in its passive state and the
then any queued IFR transmit is aborted. If a MSG
external VPWI pin is ignored (Refer to Figure 138).
type is queued and sleep mode is invoked, then
Note: When the LOOPB bit is set or reset, edges
the MSG type will remain queued and an attempt
could be detected by the J1850 decoder on the into transmit will occur after the EOF period has
ternal VPWI line. These edges could be managed
elapsed as usual.
by the JBLPD as J1850 protocol errors. It is sugIf SLP mode is invoked while the JBLPD is currentgested to enable/disable LOOPB when the JBLPD
ly transmitting, then the JBLPD effectively inhibits
is
suspended
(CONTROL.JE=0,
CONthe RDRF, RDT, EODM, & RDOF flags from being
TROL.JDIS=0) or when the JBLPD is disabled
set, and disallows RXDATA transfers. But, it other(CONTROL.JDIS=1).
wise functions normally as a transmitter, still allowTable 54. Normalization Bit configurations
Symbol
NBSYMS=0
NBSYMS=1
IFR with CRC
NB0
active Tv2 (active long)
active Tv1 (active short)
IFR without CRC
NB1
active Tv1 (active short)
active Tv2 (active long)
294/426
9
J1850 Byte Level Protocol Decoder (JBLPD)
J1850 BYTE LEVEL PROTOCOL DECODER (Cont’d)
Figure 138. Local Loopback structure
MCU
JBLPD peripheral
Passive state
MCU VPWO
pin
VPWO from the
peripheral logic
VPWI toward the
J1850 decoder
MCU VPWI
pin
Polarity
manager
OPTIONS.INPOL
OPTIONS.LOOPB
10.9.3.8 Peripheral clock management
To work correctly, the encoder and decoder sections of the peripheral need an internal clock at
1MHz. This clock is used to evaluate the protocol
symbols timings in transmission and in reception.
The prescaled clock is obtained by dividing the
MCU internal clock frequency. The CLKSEL register allows the selection of the right prescaling factor. The six least significant bits of the register
(FREQ[5:0]) must be programmed with a value using the following formula:
MCU Internal Freq. = 1MHz * (FREQ[5:0] + 1).
Note: If the MCU internal clock frequency is lower
than 1MHz, the JBLPD is not able to work correctly. If a frequency lower than 1MHz is used, the
user program must disable the JBLPD.
Note: When the MCU internal clock frequency or
the clock prescaler factor are changed, the JBLPD
could lose synchronization with the J1850 bus.
295/426
9
J1850 Byte Level Protocol Decoder (JBLPD)
J1850 BYTE LEVEL PROTOCOL DECODER (Cont’d)
10.9.4 Peripheral Functional Modes
tion when the JBLPD is not used, even if the decoder is able to follow the bus traffic. So, at any
The JBLPD can be programmed in 3 modes, detime the JBLPD is enabled, it is immediately synpending on the value of the JE and JDIS bits in the
chronized with the J1850 bus.
CONTROL register, as shown in Table 55.
Note: While the JBLPD is suspended, the STATable 55. JBLPD functional modes
TUS register, the ERROR register and the SLP bit
of the PRLR register are forced into their reset valJE
JDIS mode
ue.
0
1
JBLPD Disabled
0
0
JBLPD Suspended
1
0
JBLPD Enabled
Depending on the mode selected, the JBLPD is
able or unable to transmit or receive messages.
Moreover the power consumption of the peripheral
is affected.
Note: The configuration with both JE and JDIS set
is forbidden.
10.9.4.1 JBLPD Enabled
When the JBLPD is enabled (CONTROL.JE=1), it
is able to transmit and receive messages. Every
feature is available and every register can be written.
10.9.4.2 JBLPD Suspended (Low Power Mode)
When the JBLPD is suspended (CONTROL.JE=0
and CONTROL.JDIS=0), all the logic of the
JBLPD is stopped except the decoder logic.
This feature allows a reduction of power consump-
296/426
9
10.9.4.3 JBLPD Disabled (Very Low Power
Mode)
Setting the JDIS bit in the CONTROL register, the
JBLPD is stopped until the bit is reset by software.
Also the J1850 decoder is stopped, so the JBLPD
is no longer synchronized with the bus. When the
bit is reset, the JBLPD will wait for a new idle state
on the J1850 bus. This mode can be used to minimize power consumption when the JBLPD is not
used.
Note: While the JDIS bit is set, the STATUS register, the ERROR register, the IMR register and the
SLP, TEOBP and REOBP bits of the PRLR register are forced to their reset value.
Note: In order that the JDIS bit is able to reset the
IMR register and the TEOBP and REOBP bits, the
JDIS bit must be left at 1 at least for 6 MCU clock
cycles (3 NOPs).
Note: The JE bit of CONTROL register cannot be
set with the same instruction that reset the JDIS
bit. It can be set only after the JDIS bit is reset.
J1850 Byte Level Protocol Decoder (JBLPD)
J1850 BYTE LEVEL PROTOCOL DECODER (Cont’d)
10.9.5 Interrupt Features
– The RDRF interrupt is generated when a complete data byte has been received and placed in
The JBLPD has six interrupt sources that it hanthe RXDATA register (see also the RDRF bit
dles using the internal interrupts protocol. Other
description of the STATUS register).
two interrupt sources (REOB and TEOB) are related to the DMA feature (See Section 10.9.6 DMA
– The REOB (Receive End Of Block) interrupt is
Features).
generated when receiving using DMA and the
No external interrupt channel is used by the
last byte of a sequence of data is read from the
JBLPD.
JBLPD.
The dedicated registers of the JBLPD should be
– The TRDY interrupt is generated by two condiloaded with appropriate values to set the interrupt
tions: when the TXOP register is ready to acvector (see the description of the IVR register), the
cept a new opcode for transmission; when the
interrupt mask bits (see the description of the IMR
transmit state machine accepts the opcode for
register) and the interrupt pending bits (see the detransmission (a more detailed description of this
scription of the STATUS and PRLR registers).
condition is given in the TRDY bit description of
the STATUS register).
The interrupt sources are as follows:
–
The
TEOB (Transmit End Of Block) interrupt is
– The ERROR interrupt is generated when the ERgenerated
when transmitting using DMA and
ROR bit of the STATUS register is set. This bit
the
last
byte
of a sequence of data is written to
is set when the following events occur: Transthe JBLPD.
mitter Timeout, Transmitter Data Underflow,
Receiver Data Overflow, Transmit Request
Aborted, Received Break Symbol, Cyclic Re10.9.5.1 Interrupt Management
dundancy Check Error, Invalid Frame Detect,
To use the interrupt features the user has to follow
Invalid Bit Detect (a more detailed description of
these steps:
these events is given in the description of the
ERROR register).
– Set the correct priority level of the JBLPD
– The TLA interrupt is generated when the trans– Set the correct interrupt vector
mitter loses the arbitration (a more detailed de– Reset the Pending bits
scription of this condition is given in the TLA bit
– Enable the required interrupt source
description of the STATUS register).
Note: It is strongly recommended to reset the
– The EODM interrupt is generated when the
pending bits before un-masking the related interJBLPD detects a passive level on the VPWI line
rupt sources to avoid spurious interrupt requests.
longer than the minimum time accepted by the
standard for the End Of Data symbol (a more
The priority with respect the other ST9 peripherals
detailed description of this condition is given in
is programmable by the user setting the three
the EODM bit description of the STATUS regismost significant bits of the Interrupt Priority Level
ter).
register (PRLR). The lowest interrupt priority is obtained by setting all the bits (this priority level is
– The EOFM interrupt is generated when the
never acknowledged by the CPU and is equivalent
JBLPD detects a passive level on the VPWI line
to disabling the interrupts of the JBLPD); the highlonger than the minimum time accepted by the
est interrupt priority is programmed resetting the
standard for the End Of Frame symbol (a more
bits. See the Interrupt and DMA chapters of the
detailed description of this condition is given in
datasheet for more details.
the EOFM bit description of the STATUS regisWhen the JBLPD interrupt priority is set, the priorter).
ity between the internal interrupt sources is fixed
by hardware as shown in Table 56.
297/426
9
J1850 Byte Level Protocol Decoder (JBLPD)
J1850 BYTE LEVEL PROTOCOL DECODER (Cont’d)
Note: After an MCU reset, the DMA requests of
Each interrupt source has a pending bit in the
the JBLPD have a higher priority than the interrupt
STATUS register, except the DMA interrupt sourcrequests.
es that have the interrupt pending bits located in
If the DMASUSP bit of the OPTIONS register is
the PRLR register.
set, while the ERROR and TLA flags are set, no
These bits are set by hardware when the correDMA transfer will be performed, allowing the responding interrupt event occurs. An interrupt relavent interrupt routines to manage each condition
quest is performed only if the related mask bits are
and, if necessary, disable the DMA transfer (Refer
set in the IMR register and the JBLPD has priority.
to Section 10.9.6 DMA Features).
The pending bits have to be reset by the user software. Note that until the pending bits are set (while
Table 56. JBLPD internal priority levels
the corresponding mask bits are set), the JBLPD
processes interrupt requests. So, if at the end of
Priority Level
Interrupt Source
an interrupt routine the related pending bit is not
Higher
ERROR, TLA
reset, another interrupt request is performed.
To reset the pending bits, different actions have to
EODM, EOFM
be done, depending on each bit: see the descripRDRF, REOB
tion of the STATUS and PRLR registers.
Lower
TRDY, TEOB
The user can program the most significant bits of
the interrupt vectors by writing the V[7:3] bits of the
IVR register. Starting from the value stored by the
user, the JBLPD sets the three least significant
bits of the IVR register to produce four interrupt
vectors that are associated with interrupt sources
as shown in Table 57.
Table 57. JBLPD interrupt vectors
Interrupt Vector
Interrupt Source
V[7:3] 000b
ERROR, TLA
V[7:3] 010b
EODM, EOFM
V[7:3] 100b
RDRF, REOB
V[7:3] 110b
TRDY, TEOB
298/426
9
J1850 Byte Level Protocol Decoder (JBLPD)
J1850 BYTE LEVEL PROTOCOL DECODER (Cont’d)
10.9.6 DMA Features
(odd address). They are pointed to by the DMA
Transaction Counter Pointer Register (RDCPR
The JBLPD can use the ST9 on-chip Direct Memregister in receiving, TDCPR register in transmitory Access (DMA) channels to provide high-speed
ting) located in the JBLPD register page.
data transactions between the JBLPD and contiguous locations of Register File and Memory. The
To select DMA transactions with the Register File,
transactions can occur from and toward the
the control bits RDCPR.RF/MEM in receiving
JBLPD. The maximum number of transactions that
mode or TDCPR.RF/MEM in transmitting mode
each DMA channel can perform is 222 with Regismust be set.
ter File or 65536 with Memory. Control of the DMA
The transaction Counter Register must be initialfeatures is performed using registers located in the
ized with the number of DMA transfers to perform
JBLPD register page (IVR, PRLR, IMR, RDAPR,
and it will be decremented after each transaction.
RDCPR, TDAPR, TDCPR).
The DMA Address Register must be initialized with
The priority level of the DMA features of the
the starting address of the DMA table in the RegisJBLPD with respect to the other ST9 peripherals
ter File, and it is incremented after each transacand the CPU is the same as programmed in the
tion. These two registers must be located between
PRLR register for the interrupt sources. In the inaddresses 00h and DFh of the Register File.
ternal priority level order of the JBLPD, depending
When the DMA occurs between JBLPD and Regon the value of the DMASUSP bit in the OPTIONS
ister File, the TDAPR register (in transmission)
register, the DMA may or may not have a higher
and the RDAPR register (in reception) are not
priority than the interrupt sources.
used.
Refer to the Interrupt and DMA chapters of the datasheet for details on priority levels.
10.9.6.2 DMA between JBLPD and Memory
The DMA features are enabled by setting the apSpace
propriate enabling bits (RXD_M, TXD_M) in the
IMR register. It is also possible to select the direcIf the DMA transaction is made between the
tion of the DMA transactions.
JBLPD and Memory, a register pair is required to
hold the DMA Address and another register pair to
Once the DMA table is completed (the transaction
hold the DMA Transaction counter. These two
counter reaches 0 value), an interrupt request to
pairs of registers must be located in the Register
the CPU is generated if the related mask bit is set
File. The DMA Address pair is pointed to by the
(RDRF_M bit in reception, TRDY_M bit in transDMA Address Pointer Registers (RDAPR register
mission). This kind of interrupt is called “End Of
in reception, TDAPR register in transmission) loBlock”. The peripheral sends two different “End Of
cated in the JBLPD register page; the DMA TransBlock” interrupts depending on the direction of the
action Counter pair is pointed to by the DMA
DMA (Receiving End Of Block (REOB) - TransmitTransaction Counter Pointer Registers (RDCPR
ting End Of Block (TEOB)). These interrupt sourcregister in reception, TDCPR register in transmises have dedicated interrupt pending bits in the
sion) located in the JBLPD register page.
PRLR register (REOBP, TEOBP) and they are
mapped to the same interrupt vectors: “Receive
To select DMA transactions with Memory Space,
Data Register Full (RDRF)” and “Transmit Ready
the control bits RDCPR.RF/MEM in receiving
(TRDY)” respectively. The same correspondence
mode or TDCPR.RF/MEM in transmitting mode
exists for the internal priority between interrupts
must be reset.
and interrupt vectors.
The Transaction Counter register pair must be initialized with the number of DMA transfers to perform and it will be decremented after each transac10.9.6.1 DMA between JBLPD and Register File
tion. The DMA Address register pair must be iniIf the DMA transaction is made between the
tialized with the starting address of the DMA table
JBLPD and the Register File, one register is rein Memory Space, and it is incremented after each
quired to hold the DMA Address and one to hold
transaction. These two register pairs must be lothe DMA transaction counter. These two registers
cated between addresses 00h and DFh of the
must be located in the Register File: the DMA AdRegister File.
dress Register in an even addressed register, the
DMA Transaction Counter in the following register
299/426
9
J1850 Byte Level Protocol Decoder (JBLPD)
J1850 BYTE LEVEL PROTOCOL DECODER (Cont’d)
10.9.6.3 DMA Management in Reception Mode
through the DMA Address Register (or Register
pair);
The DMA in reception is performed when the
RDRF bit of the STATUS register is set (by hard– A post-increment of the DMA Address Register
ware). The RDRF bit is reset as soon as the DMA
(or Register pair);
cycle is finished.
– A post-decrement of the DMA transaction counTo enable the DMA feature, the RXD_M bit of the
ter, which contains the number of transactions
IMR register must be set (by software).
that have still to be performed.
Each DMA request performs the transfer of a sinNote: When the REOBP pending bit is set (at the
gle byte from the RXDATA register of the peripherend of the last DMA transfer), the reception DMA
al toward Register File or Memory Space (Figure
enable bit (RXD_M) is automatically reset by hard139).
ware. However, the DMA can be disabled by softEach DMA transfer consists of three operations
ware resetting the RXD_M bit.
that are performed with minimum use of CPU time:
Note: The DMA request acknowledge could de– A load from the JBLPD data register (RXDATA)
pend on the priority level stored in the PRLR registo a location of Register File/Memory addressed
ter.
Figure 139. DMA in Reception Mode
Register File
or
Memory space
Previous data
Data received
RXDATA
JBLPD peripheral
300/426
9
Current
Address
Pointer
J1850 Byte Level Protocol Decoder (JBLPD)
J1850 BYTE LEVEL PROTOCOL DECODER (Cont’d)
10.9.6.4 DMA Management in Transmission
Register pair); it is the next location in the TXMode
DATA transfer cycle;
DMA in transmission is performed when the TRDY
– A post-increment of the DMA Address Register
bit of the STATUS register is set (by hardware).
(or Register pair);
The TRDY bit is reset as soon as the DMA cycle is
– A post-decrement of the DMA transaction counfinished.
ter, which contains the number of transactions
To enable the DMA feature, the TXD_M bit in the
that have still to be performed.
IMR register must be set (by software).
Note: When the TEOBP pending bit is set (at the
Compared to reception, in transmission each DMA
end of the last DMA transfer), the transmission
request performs the transfer of either a single
DMA enable bit (TXD_M) is automatically reset by
byte or a couple of bytes depending on the value
hardware. However, the DMA can be disabled by
of the Transmit Opcode bits (TXOP.OP[2:0]) writsoftware resetting the TXD_M bit.
ten during the DMA transfer.
Note: When using DMA, the TXOP byte is written
The table of values managed by the DMA must be
before the TXDATA register. This order is accepta sequence of opcode bytes (that will be written in
ed by the JBLPD only when the DMA in transmisthe TXOP register by the DMA) each one followed
sion is enabled.
by a data byte (that will be written in the TXDATA
register by the DMA) if the opcode needs it (see
Note: The DMA request acknowledge could deFigure 140).
pend on the priority level stored in the PRLR register. In the same way, some time can occur beEach DMA cycle consists of the following transfers
tween the transfer of the first byte and the transfer
for a total of three/six operations that are perof the second one if another interrupt or DMA reformed with minimum use of CPU time:
quest with higher priority occurs.
– A load to the JBLPD Transmit Opcode register
(TXOP) from a location of Register File/Memory
addressed through the DMA Address Register
10.9.6.5 DMA Suspend mode
(or Register pair);
In the JBLPD it is possible to suspend or not to
– A post-increment of the DMA Address Register
suspend the DMA transfer while some J1850 pro(or Register pair);
tocol events occur. The selection between the two
modes is done by programming the DMASUSP bit
– A post-decrement of the DMA transaction counof the OPTIONS register.
ter, which contains the number of transactions
If the DMASUSP bit is set (DMA suspended
that have still to be performed;
mode), while the ERROR or TLA flag is set, the
and if the Transmit Opcode placed in TXOP reDMA transfers are suspended, to allow the user
quires a datum:
program to handle the event condition.
– A load to the peripheral data register (TXDATA)
If the DMASUSP bit is reset (DMA not suspended
from a location of Register File/Memory admode), the previous flags have no effect on the
dressed through the DMA Address Register (or
DMA transfers.
301/426
9
J1850 Byte Level Protocol Decoder (JBLPD)
J1850 BYTE LEVEL PROTOCOL DECODER (Cont’d)
Figure 140. DMA in Transmission Mode
Register File
or
Memory space
Previous Opcode sent
(data not required)
Previous Opcode sent
(data required)
Previous Data sent
1st byte
Data sent
TXOP
2nd byte
TXDATA
JBLPD peripheral
302/426
9
Opcode sent
(data required)
Opcode
(data not required)
Opcode
(data required)
Data
J1850 Byte Level Protocol Decoder (JBLPD)
J1850 BYTE LEVEL PROTOCOL DECODER (Cont’d)
10.9.7 Register Description
The JBLPD peripheral uses 48 registers that are
register (OPTIONS) are used to select the current
mapped in a single page of the ST9 register file.
sub-page. See Section 10.9.7.2 Stacked Registers section for a detailed description of these regTwelve registers are mapped from R240 (F0h) to
isters.
R251 (FBh): these registers are usually used to
control the JBLPD. See Section 10.9.7.1 UnThe ST9 Register File page used is 23 (17h).
Stacked Registers for a detailed description of
these registers.
NOTE: Bits marked as “Reserved” should be left at
Thirty-six registers are mapped from R252 (FCh)
their reset value to guarantee software compatibilto R255 (FFh). This is obtained by creating 9 subity with future versions of the JBLPD.
pages, each containing 4 registers, mapped in the
same register addresses; 4 bits (RSEL[3:0]) of a
Figure 141. JBLPD Register Map
R240 (F0h)
R241 (F1h)
R242 (F2h)
R243 (F3h)
R244 (F4h)
R245 (F5h)
R246 (F6h)
R247 (F7h)
R248 (F8h)
R249 (F9h)
R250 (FAh)
R251 (FBh)
STATUS
TXDATA
RXDATA
TXOP
CLKSEL
CONTROL
PADDR
ERROR
IVR
PRLR
IMR
OPTIONS
R252 (FCh)
R253 (FDh)
R254 (FEh)
R255 (FFh)
CREG0
CREG1
CREG2
CREG3
RDAPR
RDCPR
TDAPR
TDCPR
FREG28
FREG24FREG29
FREG20FREG25FREG30
FREG16FREG21FREG26FREG31
FREG12FREG17FREG22FREG27
FREG8 FREG13FREG18FREG23
FREG4 FREG9 FREG14FREG19
FREG0 FREG5 FREG10FREG15
FREG1 FREG6 FREG11
FREG2 FREG7
FREG3
303/426
9
J1850 Byte Level Protocol Decoder (JBLPD)
J1850 BYTE LEVEL PROTOCOL DECODER (Cont’d)
10.9.7.1 Un-Stacked Registers
next frame will not be cancelled for these errors,
so TRDY would not get set.
STATUS REGISTER (STATUS)
R240 - Read/Write
– An RBRK error condition cancels all transmits for
Register Page: 23
this frame or any successive frames, so the
Reset Value: 0100 0000 (40h)
TRDY bit will always be immediately set on an
RBRK condition.
7
0
TRDY is set on reset or while CONTROL.JE is reERR TRDY RDRF TLA
RDT EODM EOFM IDLE
set, or while the CONTROL.JDIS bit is set.
If the TRDY_M bit of the IMR register is set, when
this bit is set an interrupt request occurs.
The bits of this register indicate the status of the
0: TXOP register not ready to receive a new opJBLPD peripheral.
code
This register is forced to its reset value after the
1: TXOP register ready to receive a new opcode
MCU reset and while the CONTROL.JDIS bit is
set. While the CONTROL.JE bit is reset, all bits except IDLE are forced to their reset values.
Bit 5 = RDRF Receive Data Register Full Flag.
RDRF is set when a complete data byte has been
received and transferred from the serial shift regisBit 7 = ERR Error Flag.
ter to the RXDATA register.
The ERR bit indicates that one or more bits in the
RDRF is cleared when the RXDATA register is
ERROR register have been set. As long as any bit
read (by software or by DMA). RDRF is also
in the ERROR register remains set, the ERR bit recleared on reset or while CONTROL.JE is reset, or
mains set. When all the bits in the ERROR register
while CONTROL.JDIS bit is set.
are cleared, then the ERR bit is reset by hardware.
If the RDRF_M bit of the IMR register is set, when
The ERR bit is also cleared on reset or while the
this bit is set an interrupt request occurs.
CONTROL.JE bit is reset, or while the CON0: RXDATA register doesn’t contain a new data
TROL.JDIS bit is set.
1: RXDATA register contains a new data
If the ERR_M bit of the IMR register is set, when
this bit is set an interrupt request occurs.
0: No error
Bit 4 = TLA Transmitter Lost Arbitration.
1: One or more errors have occurred
The TLA bit gets set when the transmitter loses arbitration while transmitting messages or type 1
and 3 IFRs. Lost arbitration for a type 2 IFR does
Bit 6 = TRDY Transmit Ready Flag.
not set the TLA bit. (Type 2 messages require reThe TRDY bit indicates that the TXOP register is
tries of the physical address if the arbitration is lost
ready to accept another opcode for transmission.
until the frame length is reached (if NFL=0)). The
The TRDY bit is set when the TXOP register is
TLA bit gets set when, while transmitting a MSG,
empty and it is cleared whenever the TXOP regisMSG+CRC, IFR1, IFR3, or IFR3+CRC, the decodter is written (by software or by DMA). TRDY will
ed VPWI data bit symbol received does not match
be set again when the transmit state machine acthe VPWO data bit symbol that the JBLPD is atcepts the opcode for transmission.
tempting to send out. If arbitration is lost, the
When attempting to transmit a data byte without
VPWO line is switched to its passive state and
using DMA, two writes are required: first a write to
nothing further is transmitted until an end-of-data
TXDATA, then a write to the TXOP.
(EOD) symbol is detected on the VPWI line. Also,
– If a byte is written into the TXOP which results in
any queued transmit opcode scheduled for transTRA getting set, then the TRDY bit will immedimission during this frame is cancelled (but the
ately be set.
TRA bit is not set).
The TLA bit can be cleared by software writing a
– If a TLA occurs and the opcode for which TRDY
logic “zero” in the TLA position. TLA is also cleared
is low is scheduled for this frame, then TRDY
on reset or while CONTROL.JE is reset, or while
will go high, if the opcode is scheduled for the
CONTROL.JDIS bit is set.
next frame, then TRDY will stay low.
If the TLA_M bit of the IMR register is set, when
– If an IBD, IFD or CRCE error condition occurs,
this bit is set an interrupt request occurs.
then TRDY will be set and any queued transmit
0: The JBLPD doesn’t lose arbitration
opcode scheduled to transmit in the present
1: The JBLPD loses arbitration
frame will be cancelled by the JBLPD peripheral. A MSGx opcode scheduled to be sent in the
304/426
9
J1850 Byte Level Protocol Decoder (JBLPD)
J1850 BYTE LEVEL PROTOCOL DECODER (Cont’d)
Bit 3 = RDT Receive Data Type.
The RDT bit indicates the type of data which is in
Bit 0 = IDLE Idle Bus Flag
the RXDATA register: message byte or IFR byte.
IDLE is set when the JBLPD decoded VPWI pin
Any byte received after an SOF but before an
recognized an IFS symbol. That is, an idle bus is
EODM is considered a message byte type. Any
when the bus has been in a passive state for longbyte received after an SOF, EODM and NBx is an
er that the Tv6 symbol time. The IDLE flag will reIFR type.
main set as long as the decoded VPWI pin is pasRDT gets set or cleared at the same time that
sive. IDLE is cleared when the decoded VPWI pin
RDRF gets set.
transitions to an active state.
RDT is cleared on reset or while CONTROL.JE is
Note that if the VPWI pin remains in a passive
reset, or while CONTROL.JDIS bit is set.
state after JE is set, then the IDLE bit may go high
0: Last RXDATA byte was a message type byte
sometime before a Tv6 symbol is timed on VPWI
1: Last RXDATA byte was a IRF type byte
(since VPWI timers may be active when JE is
clear).
IDLE is cleared on reset or while the CONBit 2 = EODM End of Data Minimum Flag.
TROL.JDIS bit is set.
The EODM flag is set when the JBLPD decoded
0: J1850 bus not in idle state
VPWI pin has been in a passive state for longer
1: J1850 bus in idle state
that the minimum Tv3 symbol time unless the
EODM is inhibited by a sleep, filter or CRCE, IBD,
IFD or RBRK error condition during a frame.
JBLPD TRANSMIT DATA REGISTER (TXDATA)
EODM bit does not get set when in the sleep mode
R241- Read/Write
or when a message is filtered.
Register Page: 23
The EODM bit can be cleared by software writing a
Reset Value: xxxx xxxx (xxh)
logic “zero” in the EODM position. EODM is
7
0
cleared on reset, while CONTROL.JE is reset or
while CONTROL.JDIS bit is set.
TXD7 TXD6 TXD5 TXD4 TXD3 TXD2 TXD1 TXD0
If the EODM_M bit of the IMR register is set, when
this bit is set an interrupt request occurs.
0: No EOD symbol detected
The TXDATA register is an eight bits read/write
1: EOD symbol detected
register in which the data to be transmitted must
Note: The EODM bit is not an error flag. It means
be placed. A write to TXDATA merely enters a
that the minimum time related to the passive Tv3
byte into the register. To initiate an attempt to
symbol is passed.
transmit the data, the TXOP register must also be
written. When the TXOP write occurs, the TRDY
flag is cleared. While the TRDY bit is clear, the
Bit 1 = EOFM End of Frame Minimum Flag.
data is still in the TXDATA register, so writes to the
The EOFM flag is set when the JBLPD decoded
TXDATA register with TRDY clear will overwrite
VPWI pin has been in a passive state for longer
existing TXDATA. When the TXDATA is transthat the minimum Tv4 symbol time. EOFM will still
ferred to the shift register, the TRDY bit is set
get set at the end of filtered frames or frames
again.
where sleep mode was invoked. Consequently,
Reads of the TXDATA register will always return
multiple EOFM flags may be encountered bethe last byte written.
tween frames of interest.
TXDATA contents are undefined after a reset.
The EOFM bit can be cleared by software writing a
Note: The correct sequence to transmit is to write
logic “zero” in the EOFM position. EOFM is
first the TXDATA register (if datum is needed) and
cleared on reset, while CONTROL.JE is reset or
then the TXOP one.
while CONTROL.JDIS bit is set.
Only using the DMA, the correct sequence of writIf the EOFM_M bit of the IMR register is set, when
ing operations is first the TXOP register and then
this bit is set an interrupt request occurs.
the TXDATA one (if needed).
0: No EOF symbol detected
1: EOF symbol detected
Note: The EOFM bit is not an error flag. It means
that the minimum time related to the passive Tv4
symbol is passed.
305/426
9
J1850 Byte Level Protocol Decoder (JBLPD)
J1850 BYTE LEVEL PROTOCOL DECODER (Cont’d)
JBLPD RECEIVE DATA REGISTER (RXDATA)
a byte. A write to the TXOP triggers the state maR242- Read only
chine to initialize an attempt to serially transmit a
Register Page: 23
byte out on the VPWO pin. An opcode which trigReset Value: xxxx xxxx (xxh)
gers a message byte or IFR type 3 to be sent will
transfer the TXDATA register contents to the
7
0
transmit serial shift register. An opcode which triggers a message byte or IFR type 3 to be sent with
RXD7 RXD6 RXD5 RXD4 RXD3 RXD2 RXD1 RXD0
a CRC appended will transfer the TXDATA register contents to the transmit serial shift register and
subsequently the computed CRC byte. An opcode
The RXDATA register is an 8-bit read only register
which triggers an IFR type 1 or 2 to be sent will
in which the data received from VPWI is stored.
transfer the PADDR register contents to the transVPWI data is transferred from the input VPW demit serial shift register. If a TXOP opcode is written
coder to a serial shift register unless it is inhibited
which is invalid for the bus conditions at the time
by sleep mode, filter mode or an error condition
(e.g. 12 byte frame or IFR3ing an IFR2), then no
(IBD, IFD, CRCE, RBRK) during a frame. When
transmit attempt is tried and the TRA bit in the ERthe shift register is full, this data is transferred to
ROR register is set.
the RXDATA register, and the RDRF flag gets set.
Transmission of a string of data bytes requires
All received data bytes are transferred to RXDATA
multiple TXDATA/TXOP write sequences. Each
including CRC bytes. A read of the RXDATA regwrite combination should be accomplished while
ister will clear the RDRF flag.
the TRDY flag is set. However, writes to the TXOP
Note that care must be taken when reading RXDAwhen TRDY is not set will be accepted by the state
TA subsequent to an RDRF flag. Multiple reads of
machine, but it may override the previous data and
RXDATA after an RDRF should only be attempted
opcode.
if the user can be sure that another RDRF will not
Under normal message transmission conditions
occur by the time the read takes place.
the MSG opcode is written. If the last data byte of
RXDATA content is undefined after a reset.
a string is to be sent, then the MSG+CRC opcode
will be written. An IFRx opcode is written if a reJBLPD TRANSMIT OPCODE REGISTER
sponse byte or bytes to a received message (i.e.
(TXOP)
bytes received in RXDATA with RDT=0) is wanted
R243 - Read/Write
to transmit. The Message Length Count bits
Register Page: 23
(MLC[3:0]) may be used to require that the IFR be
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
enabled only if the correct number of message
bytes has been received.
7
0
NOTE: The correct sequence to transmit is to write
MLC3 MLC2 MLC1 MLC0
OP2
OP1
OP0
first the TXDATA register and then the TXOP one.
Only using the DMA, the correct sequence of writing operations is first the TXOP register and then
TXOP is an 8-bit read/write register which contains
the TXDATA one (if needed).
the instructions required by the JBLPD to transmit
306/426
9
J1850 Byte Level Protocol Decoder (JBLPD)
J1850 BYTE LEVEL PROTOCOL DECODER (Cont’d)
Bit 7:4 = MLC[3:0] Message Length Count.
MSG, Message Byte Opcode.
Message Length Count bits 3 to 0 are written when
The Message byte opcode is set when the user
the program writes one of the IFR opcodes. Upon
program wants to initiate or continue transmitting
detection of the EOD symbol which delineates the
the body of a message out the VPWO pin.
body of a frame from the IFR portion of the frame,
The body of a message is the string of data bytes
the received byte counter is compared against the
following an SOF symbol, but before the first EOD
count contained in MLC[3:0]. If they match, then
symbol in a frame. If the J1850 bus is in an idle
the IFR will be transmitted. If they do not match,
condition when the opcode is written, an SOF
then the TRA bit in the ERROR register is set and
symbol is transmitted out the VPWO pin immedino transmit attempt occurs.
ately before it transmits the data contained in TXDATA. If the JBLPD is not in idle and the J1850
– While NFL=0, an MCL[3:0] decimal value betransmitter has not been locked out by loss of arbitween 1 and 11 is considered valid. MCL[3:0]
tration, then the TXDATA byte is transferred to the
values of 12, 13, 14, 15 are considered invalid
serial output shift register for transmission immediand will set the Transmit Request Aborted
ately on completion of any previously transmitted
(TRA) bit in the ERROR register.
data. The final byte of a message string is not
– While NFL=1, an MCL[3:0] value between 1 and
transmitted using the MSG opcode (use the
15 is considered valid.
MSG+CRC opcode).
– For NFL=1 or 0, MCL[3:0] bits are don’t care durSpecial Conditions for MSG Transmit:
ing a MSG or MSG+CRC opcode write.
– 1) A MSG cannot be queued on top of an execut– If writing an IFR opcode and MCL[3:0]=0000,
ing IFR3 opcode. If so, then TRA is set, and
then the message length count check is ignored
TDUF will get set because the transmit state
(i.e. MLC=Count is disabled), and the IFR is enmachine will be expecting more data, then the
abled only on a correct CRC and a valid EOD
inverted CRC is appended to this frame. Also,
symbol assuming no other error conditions
no message byte will be sent on the next frame.
(IFD, IBD, RBRK) appear.
– 2) If NFL = 0 and an MSG queued without CRC
on Received Byte Count for this frame=10 will
trigger the TRA to get set, and TDUF will get set
Bit 3 = Reserved.
because the state machine will be expecting
more data and the transmit machine will send
Bit 2:0 = OP[2:0] Transmit Opcode Select Bits.
the inverted CRC after the byte which is presThe bits OP[2:0] form the code that the transmitter
ently transmitting. Also, no message byte will be
uses to perform a transmit sequence. The codes
sent on the next frame.
are listed in Table 58.
Caution should be taken when TRA gets set in
Table 58. Opcode definitions
these cases because the TDUF error sequence
may engage before the user program has a
OP[2:0]
Transmit opcode
Abbreviation
chance to rewrite the TXOP register with the corNo operation or
rect opcode. If a TDUF error occurs, a subsequent
000
CANCEL
Cancel
MSG write to the TXOP register will be used as the
first byte of the next frame.
001
Send Break Symbol
SBRK
010
Message Byte
MSG
011
Message Byte then append CRC
100
In-Frame Response Type
1
IFR1
101
In-Frame Response Type
2
IFR2
110
In-Frame Response Type
3
IFR3
111
IFR Type 3 then append
CRC
IFR3+CRC
MSG+CRC
307/426
9
J1850 Byte Level Protocol Decoder (JBLPD)
J1850 BYTE LEVEL PROTOCOL DECODER (Cont’d)
MSG+CRC, Message byte then append CRC opchance to rewrite the TXOP register with the corcode.
rect opcode. If a TDUF error occurs, a subsequent
The ‘Message byte with CRC’ opcode is set when
MSG+CRC write to the TXOP register will be used
the user program wants to transmit a single byte
as the first byte of the next frame.
message followed by a CRC byte, or transmit the
IFR1, In-Frame Response Type 1 opcode.
final byte of a message string followed by a CRC
The In-frame Response Type 1 (IFR 1) opcode is
byte.
written if the user program wants to transmit a
A single byte message is basically an SOF symbol
physical address byte (contained in the PADDR
followed by a single data byte retrieved from TXregister) in response to a message that is currently
DATA register followed by the computed CRC
being received.
byte followed by an EOD symbol. If the J1850 bus
The user program decides to set up an IFR1 upon
is in idle condition when the opcode is written, an
receiving a certain portion of the data byte string of
SOF symbol is immediately transmitted out the
an incoming message. No write of the TXDATA
VPWO pin. It then transmits the byte contained in
register is required. The IFR1 gets its data byte
the TXDATA register, then the computed CRC
from the PADDR register.
byte is transmitted. VPWO is then set to a passive
The JBLPD block will enable the transmission of
state. If the J1850 bus is not idle and the J1850
the IFR1 on these conditions:
transmitter has not been locked out by loss of arbi– 1) The CRC check is valid (otherwise the CRCE
tration, then the TXDATA byte is transferred to the
is set)
serial output shift register for transmission immediately on completion of any previously transmitted
– 2) The received message length is valid if enadata. After completion of the TXDATA byte the
bled (otherwise the TRA is set)
computed CRC byte is transferred out the VPWO
– 3) A valid EOD minimum symbol is received (othpin and then the VPWO pin is set passive to time
erwise the IFD may eventually get set due to
an EOD symbol.
byte synchronization errors)
Special Conditions for MSG+CRC Transmit:
– 4) If NFL = 0 & Received Byte Count for this
– 1) A MSG+CRC opcode cannot be queued on
frame <=11 (otherwise TRA is set)
top of an executing IFR3 opcode. If so, then
– 5) If not presently executing an MSG, IFR3, opTRA is set, and TDUF will get set because the
code (otherwise TRA is set, and TDUF will get
transmit state machine will be expecting more
set because the transmit state machine will be
data, then the inverted CRC is appended to this
expecting more data, so the inverted CRC will
frame. Also, no message byte will be sent on
be appended to this frame)
the next frame.
– 6) If not presently executing an IFR1, IFR2, or
– 2) If NFL=0, a MSG+CRC can only be queued if
IFR3+CRC opcode otherwise TRA is set (but no
Received Byte Count for this frame <=10 otherTDUF)
wise the TRA will get set, and TDUF will get set
because the state machine will be expecting
– 7) If not presently receiving an IFR portion of a
more data, so the transmit machine will send
frame, otherwise TRA is set.
the inverted CRC after the byte which is presThe IFR1 byte is then attempted according to the
ently transmitting. Also, no message byte will be
procedure described in section “Transmitting a
sent on the next frame.
type 1 IFR”. Note that if an IFR1 opcode is written,
Caution should be taken when TRA gets set in
a queued MSG or MSG+CRC is overridden by the
these cases because the TDUF error sequence
IFR1.
may engage before the user program has a
308/426
9
J1850 Byte Level Protocol Decoder (JBLPD)
J1850 BYTE LEVEL PROTOCOL DECODER (Cont’d)
IFR2, In-Frame Response Type 2 opcode.
ceived.
The In-frame Response Type 2 (IFR2) opcode is
The IFR3 uses the contents of the TXDATA regisset if the user program wants to transmit a physical
ter for data. The user program decides to set up an
address byte (contained in the PADDR register) in
IFR3 upon receiving a certain portion of the data
response to a message that is currently being rebyte string of an incoming message. A previous
ceived.
write of the TXDATA register should have ocThe user program decides to set up an IFR2 upon
curred.
receiving a certain portion of the data byte string of
The JBLPD block will enable the transmission of
an incoming message. No write of the TXDATA
the first byte of an IFR3 string on these conditions:
register is required. The IFR gets its data byte from
– 1) The CRC check is valid (otherwise the CRCE
the PADDR register.
is set)
The JBLPD block will enable the transmission of
– 2) The received message length is valid if enathe IFR2 on these conditions:
bled (otherwise the TRA is set)
– 1) The CRC check is valid (otherwise the CRCE
– 3) A valid EOD minimum symbol is received (othis set)
erwise the IFD may eventually get set due to
– 2) The received message length is valid if enabyte synchronization errors)
bled (otherwise the TRA is set)
– 4) If NFL = 0 & Received Byte Count for this
– 3) A valid EOD minimum symbol is received (othframe <=9 (otherwise TRA is set and inverted
erwise the IFD may eventually get set due to
CRC is transmitted due to TDUF)
byte synchronization errors)
– 5) If not presently executing an MSG opcode
– 4) If NFL = 0 & Received Byte Count for this
(otherwise TRA is set, and TDUF will get set beframe <=11 (otherwise TRA is set)
cause the transmit state machine will be expect– 5) If not presently executing an MSG, IFR3, oping more data and the inverted CRC will be
code (otherwise TRA is set, and TDUF will get
appended to this frame)
set because the transmit state machine will be
– 6) If not presently executing an IFR1, IFR2, or
expecting more data, so the inverted CRC will
IFR3+CRC opcode, otherwise TRA is set (but
be appended to this frame)
no TDUF)
– 6) If not presently executing an IFR1, IFR2, or
– 7) If not presently receiving an IFR portion of a
IFR3+CRC opcodes, otherwise TRA is set (but
frame, otherwise TRA is set.
no TDUF)
The IFR3 byte string is then attempted according
– 7) If not presently receiving an IFR portion of a
to the procedure described in section “Transmitframe, otherwise TRA is set.
ting a type 3 IFR”. Note that if an IFR3 opcode is
The IFR byte is then attempted according to the
written, a queued MSG or MSG+CRC is overridprocedure described in section “Transmitting a
den by the IFR3.
type 2 IFR”. Note that if an IFR opcode is written, a
The next byte(s) in the IFR3 data string shall also
queued MSG or MSG+CRC is overridden by the
be written with the IFR3 opcode except for the last
IFR2.
byte in the string which shall be written with the
IFR3, In-Frame Response Type 3 opcode.
IFR3+CRC opcode. Each IFR3 data byte transThe In-Frame Response Type 3 (IFR3) opcode is
mission is accomplished with a TXDATA/TXOP
set if the user program wants to initiate to transmit
write sequence. The succeeding IFR3 transmit reor continue to transmit a string of data bytes in requests will be enabled on conditions 4 and 5 listed
sponse to a message that is currently being reabove.
309/426
9
J1850 Byte Level Protocol Decoder (JBLPD)
J1850 BYTE LEVEL PROTOCOL DECODER (Cont’d)
IFR3+CRC, In-Frame Response Type 3 then apThe IFR3 byte is attempted according to the propend CRC opcode.
cedure described in section “Transmitting a type 3
The In-frame Response Type 3 then append CRC
IFR”. The CRC byte is transmitted out on compleopcode (IFR3+CRC) is set if the user program
tion of the transmit of the IFR3 byte.
wants to either initiate to transmit a single data
If this opcode sets up the last byte in an IFR3 data
byte IFR3 followed by a CRC, or transmit the last
string, then the TXDATA register contents shall be
data byte of an IFR3 string followed by the CRC
transmitted out immediately upon completion of
byte in response to a message that is currently bethe previous IFR3 data byte followed by the transing received.
mit of the CRC byte. In this case the IFR3+CRC is
The IFR3+CRC opcode transmits the contents of
enabled on conditions 4 and 5 listed above. Note
the TXDATA register followed by the computed
that if an IFR3+CRC opcode is written, a queued
CRC byte. The user program decides to set up an
MSG or MSG+CRC is overridden by the
IFR3 upon receiving a certain portion of the data
IFR3+CRC.
byte string of an incoming message. A previous
SBRK, Send Break Symbol.
write of the TXDATA register should have ocThe SBRK opcode is written to transmit a nominal
curred.
break (BRK) symbol out the VPWO pin. A Break
The J1850 block will enable the transmission of
symbol can be initiated at any time. Once the
the first byte of an IFR3 string on these conditions:
SBRK opcode is written a BRK symbol of the nominal Tv5 duration will be transmitted out the VPWO
– 1) The CRC check is valid (otherwise the CRCE
pin immediately. To terminate the transmission of
is set)
an in-progress break symbol the JE bit should be
– 2) The received message length is valid if enaset to a logic zero. An SBRK command is nonbled (otherwise the TRA is set)
maskable, it will override any present transmit operation, and it does not wait for the present trans– 3) A valid EOD minimum symbol is received (othmit to complete. Note that in the 4X mode a SBRK
erwise the IFD may eventually get set due to
will send a break character for the nominal Tv5
byte synchronization errors)
time times four (4 x Tv5) so that all nodes on the
– 4) If NFL = 0 & Received Byte Count for this
bus will recognize the break. A CANCEL opcode
frame <=10 (otherwise TRA is set and inverted
does not override a SBRK command.
CRC is transmitted)
CANCEL, No Operation or Cancel Pending Trans– 5) If not presently executing an MSG opcode
mit.
(otherwise TRA is set, and TDUF will get set beThe Cancel opcode is used by the user program to
cause the transmit state machine will be expecttell the J1850 transmitter that a previously queued
ing more data and the inverted CRC will be
opcode should not be transmitted. The Cancel opappended to this frame)
code will set the TRDY bit. If the JBLPD peripheral
– 6) If not presently executing an IFR1, IFR2 or
is presently not transmitting, the Cancel command
IFR3+CRC opcodes, otherwise TRA is set (but
effectively cancels a pending MSGx or IFRx opno TDUF)
code if one was queued, or it does nothing if no
opcode was queued. If the JBLPD peripheral is
– 7) If not presently receiving an IFR portion of a
presently transmitting, then a queued MSGx or
frame, otherwise TRA is set.
IFRx opcode is aborted and the TDUF circuit may
take affect.
310/426
9
J1850 Byte Level Protocol Decoder (JBLPD)
J1850 BYTE LEVEL PROTOCOL DECODER (Cont’d)
JBLPD SYSTEM FREQUENCY SELECTION
rect value must be written in the register. So an inREGISTER (CLKSEL)
ternal frequency less than 1MHz is not allowed.
R244- Read/Write
Note: If the MCU internal clock frequency is lower
Register Page: 23
than 1MHz, the peripheral is not able to work corReset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
rectly. If a frequency lower than 1MHz is used, the
7
0
user program must disable the peripheral.
Note: When the clock prescaler factor or the MCU
4X - FREQ5 FREQ4 FREQ3 FREQ2 FREQ1 FREQ0
internal frequency is changed, the peripheral could
lose the synchronization with the J1850 bus.
Bit 7 = 4X Diagnostic Four Times Mode.
This bit is set when the J1850 clock rate is chosen
JBLPD CONTROL REGISTER (CONTROL)
four times faster than the standard requests, to
R245- Read/Write
force the BREAK symbol (nominally 300 µs long)
Register Page: 23
and the Transmitter Timeout Time (nominally 1
Reset Value: 0100 0000 (40h)
ms) at their nominal durations.
7
0
When the user want to use a 4 times faster J1850
clock rate, the new prescaler factor should be
JE
JDIS
NFL JDLY4 JDLY3 JDLY2 JDLY1 JDLY0
stored in the FREQ[5:0] bits and the 4X bit must be
set with the same instruction. In the same way, to
exit from the mode, FREQ[5:0] and 4X bits must
The CONTROL register is an eight bit read/write
be placed at the previous value with the same inregister which contains JBLPD control information.
struction.
Reads of this register return the last written data.
0: Diagnostic Four Times Mode disabled
1: Diagnostic Four Times Mode enabled
Bit 7 = JE JBLPD Enable.
Note: Setting this bit, the prescaler factor is not auThe JBLPD block enable bit (JE) enables and distomatically divided by four. The user must adapt
ables the transmitter and receiver to the VPWO
the value stored in FREQ[5:0] bits by software.
and VPWI pins respectively. When the JBLPD peNote: The customer should take care using this
ripheral is disabled the VPWO pin is in its passive
mode when the MCU internal frequency is less
state and information coming in the VPWI pin is igthan 4MHz.
nored. When the JBLPD block is enabled, the
transmitter and receiver function normally. Note
that queued transmits are aborted when JE is
Bit 6 = Reserved.
cleared. JE is cleared on reset, by software and
setting the JDIS bit.
0: The peripheral is disabled
Bit 5:0 = FREQ[5:0] Internal Frequency Selectors.
1: The peripheral is enabled
These 6 bits must be programmed depending on
the internal frequency of the device. The formula
Note: It is not possible to reset the JDIS bit and to
that must be used is the following one:
set the JE bit with the same instruction. The corMCU Int. Freq.= 1MHz * (FREQ[5:0] + 1).
rect sequence is to first reset the JDIS bit and then
set the JE bit with another instruction.
Note: To obtain a correct operation of the peripheral, the internal frequency of the MCU (INTCLK)
must be an integer multiple of 1MHz and the cor-
311/426
9
J1850 Byte Level Protocol Decoder (JBLPD)
J1850 BYTE LEVEL PROTOCOL DECODER (Cont’d)
Bit 6 = JDIS Peripheral clock frozen.
Bit 4:0 = JDLY[4:0] JBLPD Transceiver External
When this bit is set by software, the peripheral is
Loop Delay Selector.
stopped and the bus is not decoded anymore. A
These five bits are used to select the nominal exreset of the bit restarts the internal state machines
ternal loop time delay which normally occurs when
as after a MCU reset. The JDIS bit is set on MCU
the peripheral is connected and transmitting in a
reset.
J1850 bus system. The external loop delay is de0: The peripheral clock is running
fined as the time between when the VPWO is set
1: The peripheral clock is stopped
to a certain level to when the VPWI recognizes the
corresponding (inverted) edge on its input. Refer
Note: When the JDIS bit is set, the STATUS regto “Transmit Opcode Queuing” section and the
ister, the ERROR register, the IMR register and
SAE-J1850 standard for information on how the
the TEOBP and REOBP bits of the PRLR register
external loop delay is used in timing transmitted
are forced into their reset value.
symbols.
Note: It is not possible to reset the JDIS bit and to
The allowed values are integer values between 0
set the JE bit with the same instruction. The corµs and 31 µs.
rect sequence is to first reset the JDIS bit and then
set the JE bit with another instruction.
JBLPD PHYSICAL ADDRESS REGISTER
(PADDR)
Bit 5 = NFL No Frame Length Check
R246- Read/Write
The NFL bit is used to enable/disable the J1850
Register Page: 23
requirement of 12 bytes maximum per frame limit.
Reset Value: xxxx xxxx (xxh)
The SAE J1850 standard states that a maximum
7
0
of 12 bytes (including CRCs and IFRs) can be on
the J1850 between a start of frame symbol (SOF)
ADR7 ADR6 ADR5 ADR4 ADR3 ADR2 ADR1 ADR0
and an end of frame symbol (EOF). If this condition is violated, then the JBLPD peripheral gets an
Invalid Frame Detect (IFD) and the sleep mode
The PADDR is an eight bit read/write register
ensues until a valid EOFM is detected. If the valid
which contains the physical address of the JBLPD
frame check is disabled (NFL=1), then no limits
peripheral. During initialization the user program
are imposed on the number of data bytes which
will write the PADDR register with its physical adcan be sent or received on the bus between an
dress. The Physical Address is used during inSOF and an EOF. The default upon reset is for the
frame response types 1 and 2 to acknowledge the
frame checking to be enabled.
receipt of a message. The JBLPD peripheral will
The NFL bit is cleared on reset
transmit the contents of the PADDR register for
0: Twelve bytes frame length check enabled
type 1 or 2 IFRs as defined by the TXOP register.
1: Twelve bytes frame length check disabled
This register is undefined on reset.
312/426
9
J1850 Byte Level Protocol Decoder (JBLPD)
J1850 BYTE LEVEL PROTOCOL DECODER (Cont’d)
JBLPD ERROR REGISTER (ERROR)
is set, then the TTO will timeout at 4000 prescaled
R247- Read only
clock cycles. When the TTO flag is set then the diRegister Page: 23
agnostic circuit will disable the VPWO signal, and
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
disable the JBLPD peripheral. The user program
must then clear the JE bit to remove the TTO error.
7
0
It can then retry the block by setting the JE bit
again.
TTO TDUF RDOF TRA RBRK CRCE IFD
IBD
The TTO bit can be used to determine if the external J1850 bus is shorted low. Since the transmitter
looks for proper edges returned at the VPWI pin
ERROR is an eight bit read only register indicating
for its timing, a lack of edges seen at VPWI when
error conditions that may arise on the VPWO and
trying to transmit (assuming the RBRK does not
VPWI pins. A read of the ERROR register clears
get set) would indicate a constant low condition.
all bits (except for TTO and possibly the RBRK bit)
The user program can take appropriate actions to
which were set at the time of the read. The register
test the J1850 bus circuit when a TTO occurs.
is cleared after the MCU reset, while the CONNote that a transmit attempt must occur to detect a
TROL.JE bit is reset, or while the CONTROL.JDIS
bus shorted low condition.
bit is set.
The TTO bit is cleared while the CONTROL.JE bit
All error conditions that can be read in the ERROR
is reset or while the CONTROL.JDIS bit is set.
register need to have redundant ERROR indicator
TTO is cleared on reset.
flags because:
0: VPWO line at 1 for less than 1 ms
– With JE set, the TDUF, RDOF, TRA, CRCE, IFD,
1: VPWO line at 1 for longer than 1 ms
& IBD bits in the ERROR register can only be
cleared by reading the register.
Bit 6 = TDUF Transmitter Data Underflow.
– The TTO bit can only be cleared by clearing the
The TDUF will be set to a logic one if the transmitJE bit.
ter expects more information to be transmitted, but
– The RBRK bit can only be cleared by reading the
a TXOP write has not occurred in time (by the end
ERROR register after the break condition has
of transmission of the last bit).
disappeared.
The transmitter knows to expect more information
from the user program when transmitting messagError condition indicator flags associated with the
es or type 3 IFRs only. If an opcode is written to
error condition are cleared when the error condiTXOP that does not include appending a CRC
tion ends. Since error conditions may alter the acbyte, then the JBLPD peripheral assumes more
tions of the transmitter and receiver, the error condata is to be written. When the JBLPD peripheral
dition indicators must remain set throughout the
has shifted out the data byte it must have the next
error condition. All error conditions, including the
data byte in time to place it directly next to it. If the
RBRK condition, are events that get set during a
user program does not place new data in the TXparticular clock cycle of the prescaled clock of the
DATA register and write the TXOP register with a
peripheral. The IFD, IBD, RBRK, and CRCE error
proper opcode, then the CRC byte which is being
conditions are then cleared when a valid EOF
kept tabulated by the transmitter is logically invertsymbol is detected from the VPWI pin. The TRA
ed and transmitted out the VPWO pin. This will enerror condition is a singular event that sets the corsure that listeners will detect this message as an
responding ERROR register bit, but this error itself
error. In this case the TDUF bit is set to a logic
causes no other actions.
one.
TDUF is cleared by reading the ERROR register
Bit 7 = TTO Transmitter Timeout Flag
with TDUF set. TDUF is also cleared on reset,
The TTO bit is set when the VPWO pin has been in
while the CONTROL.JE bit is reset or while the
a logic one (or active) state for longer than 1 ms.
CONTROL.JDIS bit is set.
This flag is the output of a diagnostic circuit based
0: No transmitter data underflow condition ocon the prescaled system clock input. If the 4X bit is
curred
not set, the TTO will trip if the VPWO is constantly
1: Transmitter data underflow condition occurred
active for 1000 prescaled clock cycles. If the 4X bit
313/426
9
J1850 Byte Level Protocol Decoder (JBLPD)
J1850 BYTE LEVEL PROTOCOL DECODER (Cont’d)
Bit 5 = RDOF Receiver Data Overflow
The RDOF gets set to a logic one if the data in the
0: No valid Break symbol received
RXDATA register has not been read and new data
1: Valid Break symbol received
is ready to be transferred to the RXDATA register.
The old RXDATA information is lost since it is
Bit 2 = CRCE Cyclic Redundancy Check Error
overwritten with new data.
The receiver section always keeps a running tab of
RDOF is cleared by reading the ERROR register
the CRC of all data bytes received from the VPWl
with RDOF set, while the CONTROL.JE bit is reset
since the last EOD symbol. The CRC check is peror while the CONTROL.JDIS bit is set, or on reset.
formed when a valid EOD symbol is received both
0: No receiver data overflow condition occurred
after a message string (subsequent to an SOF
1: Receiver data overflow condition occurred
symbol) and after an IFR3 string (subsequent to
an NB0 symbol). If the received CRC check fails,
then the CRCE bit is set to a logic one. CRC errors
Bit 4 = TRA Transmit Request Aborted
are inhibited if the JBLPD peripheral is in the
The TRA gets set to a logic one if a transmit op“sleep or filter and NOT presently transmitting”
code is aborted by the JBLPD state machine.
mode. A CRC error occurs once for a frame. AfterMany conditions may cause a TRA. They are exwards, the receiver is disabled until an EOFM
plained in the transmit opcode section. If the TRA
symbol is received and queued transmits for the
bit gets set after a TXOP write, then a transmit is
present frame are cancelled (but the TRA bit is not
not attempted, and the TRDY bit is not cleared.
set). CRCE is cleared when ERROR is read. It is
If a TRA error condition occurs, then the requested
also cleared while the CONTROL.JE bit is reset or
transmit is aborted, and the JBLPD peripheral
while the CONTROL.JDIS bit is set, or on reset.
takes appropriate measures as described under
0: No CRC error detected
the TXOP register section.
1: CRC error detected
TRA is cleared on reset, while the CONTROL.JE
bit is reset or while the CONTROL.JDIS bit is set.
0: No transmission request aborted
Bit 1 = IFD Invalid Frame Detect
1: Transmission request aborted
The IFD bit gets set when the following conditions
are detected from the filtered VPWI pin:
Bit 3 = RBRK Received Break Symbol Flag
– An SOF symbol is received after an EOD miniThe RBRK gets set to a logic one if a valid break
mum, but before an EOF minimum.
(BRK) symbol is detected from the filtered VPWI
– An SOF symbol is received when expecting data
pin. A Break received from the J1850 bus will canbits.
cel queued transmits of all types. The RBRK bit re–
If
NFL = 0 and a message frame greater than 12
mains set as long as the break character is detectbytes
(i.e. 12 bytes plus one bit) has been reed from the VPWI. Reads of the ERROR register
ceived
in one frame.
will not clear the RBRK bit as long as a break character is being received. Once the break character
– An EOD minimum time has elapsed when data
is gone, a final read of the ERROR register clears
bits are expected.
this bit.
– A logic 0 or 1 symbol is received (active for Tv1
An RBRK error occurs once for a frame if it is reor Tv2) when an SOF was expected.
ceived during a frame. Afterwards, the receiver is
– The second EODM symbol received in a frame
disabled from receiving information (other than the
is NOT followed directly by an EOFM symbol.
break) until an EOFM symbol is received.
RBRK bit is cleared on reset, while the CONIFD errors are inhibited if the JBLPD peripheral is
TROL.JE bit is reset or while the CONTROL.JDIS
in the “sleep or filter and NOT presently transmitbit is set.
ting” mode. An IFD error occurs once for a frame.
The RBRK bit can be used to detect J1850 bus
Afterwards, the receiver is disabled until an EOFM
shorted high conditions. If RBRK is read as a logic
symbol is received, and queued transmits for the
high multiple times before an EOFM occurs, then a
present frame are cancelled (but the TRA bit is not
possible bus shorted high condition exists. The
set). IFD is cleared when ERROR is read. It is also
user program can take appropriate measures to
cleared while the CONTROL.JE bit is reset or
test the bus if this condition occurs. Note that this
while the CONTROL.JDIS bit is set or on reset.
bit does not necessarily clear when ERROR is
0: No invalid frame detected
read.
1: Invalid frame detected
314/426
9
J1850 Byte Level Protocol Decoder (JBLPD)
J1850 BYTE LEVEL PROTOCOL DECODER (Cont’d)
Bit 0 = IBD Invalid Bit Detect.
Bit 0 = Reserved.
The IBD bit gets set whenever the receiver detects
that the filtered VPWI pin was not fixed in a state
JBLPD PRIORITY LEVEL REGISTER (PRLR)
long enough to reach the minimum valid symbol
R249- Read/Write
time of Tv1 (or 35 µs). Any timing event less than
Register Page: 23
35 µs (and, of course, > 7 µs since the VPWI digitReset Value: 0001 0000 (10h)
al filter will not allow pulses less than this through
its filter) is considered as noise and sets the IBD
7
0
accordingly. At this point the JBLPD peripheral will
PRL2 PRL1 PRL0 SLP
REOBP TEOBP
cease transmitting and receiving any information
until a valid EOF symbol is received.
IBD errors are inhibited if the JBLPD peripheral is
Bit 7:5 = PRL[2:0] Priority level bits
in the “sleep or filter and NOT presently transmitThe priority with respect to the other peripherals
ting” mode. An IBD error occurs once for a frame.
and the CPU is encoded with these three bits. The
Afterwards, the receiver is disabled until an EOFM
value of “0” has the highest priority, the value “7”
symbol is received, and queued transmits for the
has no priority. After the setting of this priority levpresent frame are cancelled (but the TRA bit is not
el, the priorities between the different Interrupt
set).
sources and DMA of the JBLPD peripheral is hardIBD is cleared when ERROR is read. Note that if
ware defined (refer to the “Status register” bits dean invalid bit is detected during a bus idle condiscription, the “Interrupts Management” and the
tion, the IBD flag gets set and a new EOFmin must
section about the explanation of the meaning of
be seen after the invalid bit before commencing to
the interrupt sources).
receive again. IBD is also cleared while the CONDepending on the value of the OPTROL.JE bit is reset or while the CONTROL.JDIS
TIONS.DMASUSP bit, the DMA transfers can or
bit is set and on reset.
cannot be suspended by an ERROR or TLA event.
0: No invalid bit detected
Refer to the description of DMASUSP bit.
1: Invalid bit detected
JBLPD INTERRUPT VECTOR REGISTER (IVR)
R248- Read/Write (except bits 2:1)
Register Page: 23
Reset Value: xxxx xxx0 (xxh)
7
Table 60. Internal Interrupt and DMA Priorities
without DMA suspend mode
Priority Level
Higher Priority
Event Sources
TX-DMA
RX-DMA
0
ERROR, TLA
V7
V6
V5
V4
V3
EV2
EV1
-
EODM, EOFM
RDRF, REOB
Bit 7:3 = V[7:3] Interrupt Vector Base Address.
User programmable interrupt vector bits.
Bit 2:1 = EV[2:1] Encoded Interrupt Source (Read
Only).
EV2 and EV1 are set by hardware according to the
interrupt source, given in Table 59 (refer to the
Status register bits description about the explanation of the meaning of the interrupt sources)
Lower Priority
TRDY, TEOB
Table 61. Internal Interrupt and DMA Priorities
with DMA suspend mode
Priority Level
Event Sources
Higher Priority
ERROR, TLA
TX-DMA
Table 59. Interrupt Sources
RX-DMA
EV2
EV1
Interrupt Sources
EODM, EOFM
0
0
ERROR, TLA
RDRF, REOB
0
1
EODM, EOFM
1
0
RDRF, REOB
1
1
TRDY, TEOB
Lower Priority
TRDY, TEOB
315/426
9
J1850 Byte Level Protocol Decoder (JBLPD)
J1850 BYTE LEVEL PROTOCOL DECODER (Cont’d)
Bit 4 = SLP Receiver Sleep Mode.
the end of a block of data. An interrupt request is
The SLP bit is written to one when the user properformed if the TRDY_M bit of the IMR register is
gram does not want to receive any data from the
set. TEOBP should be reset by software in order to
JBLPD VPWI pin until an EOFM symbol occurs.
avoid undesired interrupt routines, especially in inThis mode is usually set when a message is reitialisation routine (after reset) and after entering
ceived that the user does not require - including
the End Of Block interrupt routine.
messages that the JBLPD is transmitting.
Writing “0” in this bit will cancel the interrupt reIf the JBLPD is not transmitting and is in Sleep
quest.
mode, no data is transferred to the RXDATA regisThis bit is reset when the CONTROL.JDIS bit is
ter, the RDRF flag does not get set, and errors asset at least for 6 MCU clock cycles (3 NOPs).
sociated with received data (RDOF, CRCE, IFD,
Note: When the TEOBP flag is set, the TXD_M bit
IBD) do not get set. Also, the EODM flag will not
is reset by hardware.
get set.
Note: TEOBP can only be written to “0”.
If the JBLPD peripheral is transmitting and is in
sleep mode, no data is transferred to the RXDATA
register, the RDRF flag does not get set and the
JBLPD INTERRUPT MASK REGISTER (IMR)
RDOF error flag is inhibited. The CRCE, IFD, and
R250 - Read/Write
IBD flags, however, will NOT be inhibited while
Register Page: 23
transmitting in sleep mode.
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
The SLP bit cannot be written to zero by the user
7
0
program. The SLP bit is set on reset or TTO getting set, and it will stay set upon JE getting set until
ERR_ TRDY_ RDRF_ TLA_ RXD_ EODM_ EOFM_ TXD_
an EOFM symbol is received.
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
The SLP gets cleared on reception of an EOF or a
Break symbol. SLP is set while CONTROL.JE is
reset and while CONTROL.JDIS is set.
To enable an interrupt source to produce an inter0: The JBLPD is not in Sleep Mode
rupt request, the related mask bit must be set.
1: The JBLPD is in Sleep Mode
When these bits are reset, the related Interrupt
Pending bit can not generate an interrupt.
Note: This register is forced to its reset value if the
Bit 3:2 = Reserved.
CONTROL.JDIS bit is set at least for 6 clock cycles (3 NOPs). If the JDIS bit is set for a shorter
time, the bits could be reset or not reset.
Bit 1 = REOP Receiver DMA End Of Block Pending.
This bit is set after a receiver DMA cycle to mark
Bit 7 = ERR_M Error Interrupt Mask bit.
the end of a block of data. An interrupt request is
This bit enables the “error” interrupt source to genperformed if the RDRF_M bit of the IMR register is
erate an interrupt request.
set. REOBP should be reset by software in order
This bit is reset if the CONTROL.JDIS bit is set at
to avoid undesired interrupt routines, especially in
least for 6 clock cycles (3 NOPs).
initialisation routine (after reset) and after entering
0: Error interrupt source masked
the End Of Block interrupt routine.
1: Error interrupt source un-masked
Writing “0” in this bit will cancel the interrupt request.
This bit is reset when the CONTROL.JDIS bit is
Bit 6 = TRDY_M Transmit Ready Interrupt Mask
set at least for 6 MCU clock cycles (3 NOPs).
bit.
Note: When the REOBP flag is set, the RXD_M bit
This bit enables the “transmit ready” interrupt
is reset by hardware.
source to generate an interrupt request.
This bit is reset if the CONTROL.JDIS bit is set at
Note: REOBP can only be written to “0”.
least for 6 clock cycles (3 NOPs).
0: TRDY interrupt source masked
1: TRDY interrupt source un-masked
Bit 0 = TEOP Transmitter DMA End Of Block
Pending.
This bit is set after a transmitter DMA cycle to mark
316/426
9
J1850 Byte Level Protocol Decoder (JBLPD)
J1850 BYTE LEVEL PROTOCOL DECODER (Cont’d)
Bit 5 = RDRF_M Receive Data Register Full Interrupt Mask bit.
Bit 0 = TXD_M Transmitter DMA Mask bit.
This bit enables the “receive data register full” inIf this bit is “0” no transmitter DMA request will be
terrupt source to generate an interrupt request.
generated, and the TRDY bit, in the Status RegisThis bit is reset if the CONTROL.JDIS bit is set at
ter (STATUS), can request an interrupt. If TXD_M
least for 6 clock cycles (3 NOPs).
bit is set to “1” then the TRDY bit can request a
0: RDRF interrupt source masked
DMA transfer. TXD_M is reset by hardware when
1: RDRF interrupt source un-masked
the transaction counter value decrements to zero,
that is when a Transmitter End Of Block condition
Bit 4 = TLA_M Transmitter Lost Arbitration Interoccurs (TEOBP flag set).
rupt Mask bit.
This bit is reset if the CONTROL.JDIS bit is set at
This bit enables the “transmitter lost arbitration” inleast for 6 clock cycles (3 NOPs).
terrupt source to generate an interrupt request.
0: Transmitter DMA disabled
This bit is reset if the CONTROL.JDIS bit is set at
1: Transmitter DMA enabled
least for 6 clock cycles (3 NOPs).
0: TLA interrupt source masked
1: TLA interrupt source un-masked
JBLPD OPTIONS AND REGISTER GROUPS
SELECTION REGISTER (OPTIONS)
R251- Read/Write
Bit 3 = RXD_M Receiver DMA Mask bit.
Register Page: 23
If this bit is “0” no receiver DMA request will be
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
generated, and the RDRF bit, in the Status Regis7
0
ter (STATUS), can request an interrupt. If RXD_M
bit is set to “1” then the RDRF bit can request a
INPOL NBSYMS DMASUSP LOOPB RSEL3 RSEL2 RSEL1 RSEL0
DMA transfer. RXD_M is reset by hardware when
the transaction counter value decrements to zero,
that is when a Receiver End Of Block condition ocBit 7 = INPOL VPWI Input Polarity Selector.
curs (REOBP flag set).
This bit allows the selection of the polarity of the
This bit is reset if the CONTROL.JDIS bit is set at
RX signal coming from the transceivers. Dependleast for 6 clock cycles (3 NOPs).
ing on the specific transceiver, the RX signal is in0: Receiver DMA disabled
verted or not inverted respect the VPWO and the
1: Receiver DMA enabled
J1850 bus line.
0: VPWI input is inverted by the transceiver with
Bit 2 = EODM_M End of Data Minimum Interrupt
respect to the J1850 line.
Mask bit.
1: VPWI input is not inverted by the transceiver
This bit enables the “end of data minimum” interwith respect to the J1850 line.
rupt source to generate an interrupt request.
This bit is reset if the CONTROL.JDIS bit is set at
Bit 6 = NBSYMS NB Symbol Form Selector.
least for 6 clock cycles (3 NOPs).
This bit allows the selection of the form of the Nor0: EODM interrupt source mask
malization Bits (NB0/NB1).
1: EODM interrupt source un-masked
0: NB0 active long symbol (Tv2), NB1 active short
symbol (Tv1)
Bit 1 = EOFM_M End of Frame Minimum Interrupt
1: NB0 active short symbol (Tv1), NB1 active long
Mask bit.
symbol (Tv2)
This bit enables the “end of frame minimum” interrupt source to generate an interrupt request.
This bit is reset if the CONTROL.JDIS bit is set at
least for 6 clock cycles (3 NOPs).
0: EOFM interrupt source masked
1: EOFM interrupt source un-masked
317/426
9
J1850 Byte Level Protocol Decoder (JBLPD)
J1850 BYTE LEVEL PROTOCOL DECODER (Cont’d)
Bit 5 = DMASUSP DMA Suspended Selector.
Note: When the LOOPB bit is set, also the INPOL
If this bit is “0”, JBLPD DMA has higher priority
bit must be set to obtain the correct management
with respect to the Interrupts of the peripheral.
of the polarity.
DMA is performed even if an interrupt request is
already scheduled or if the relative interrupt rouBit 3:0 = RSEL[3:0] Registers Group Selection
tine is in execution.
bits.
If the bit is “1”, while the ERROR or TLA flag of the
These four bits are used to select one of the 9
STATUS register are set, the DMA transfers are
groups of registers, each one composed of four
suspended. As soon as the flags are reset, the
registers that are stacked at the addresses from
DMA transfers can be performed.
R252 (FCh) to R255 (FFh) of this register page
0: DMA not suspended
(23). Unless the wanted registers group is already
1: DMA suspended
selected, to address a specific registers group,
Note: This bit has effect only on the priorities of
these bits must be correctly written.
the JBLPD peripheral.
This feature allows that 36 registers (4 DMA registers - RDADR, RDCPR, TDAPR, TDCPR - and 32
Message Filtering Registers - FREG[0:31]) are
Bit 4 = LOOPB Local Loopback Selector.
mapped using only 4 registers (here called Current
This bit allows the Local Loopback mode. When
Registers - CREG[3:0]).
this mode is enabled (LOOPB=1), the VPWO output of the peripheral is sent to the VPWI input withSince
the
Message
Filtering
Registers
out inversions whereas the VPWO output line of
(FREG[0:31]) are seldom read or written, it is sugthe MCU is placed in the passive state. Moreover
gested to always reset the RSEL[3:0] bits after acthe VPWI input of the MCU is ignored by the pecessing the FREG[0:31] registers. In this way the
ripheral. (Refer to Figure 138).
DMA registers are the current registers.
0: Local Loopback disabled
1: Local Loopback enabled
318/426
9
J1850 Byte Level Protocol Decoder (JBLPD)
J1850 BYTE LEVEL PROTOCOL DECODER (Cont’d)
JBLPD CURRENT REGISTER 0 (CREG0)
JBLPD CURRENT REGISTER 2 (CREG2)
R252- Read/Write
R254- Read/Write
Register Page: 23
Register Page: 23
Reset Value: xxxx xxxx (xxh)
Reset Value: xxxx xxxx (xxh)
7
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
0
7
b0
b7
0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
Depending on the RSEL[3:0] value of the OPTIONS register, this register is one of the following
stacked registers: RDAPR, FREG0, FREG4,
FREG8, FREG12, FREG16, FREG20, FREG24,
FREG28.
Depending on the RSEL[3:0] value of the OPTIONS register, this register is one of the following
stacked registers: TDAPR, FREG2, FREG6,
FREG10, FREG14, FREG18, FREG22, FREG26,
FREG30.
JBLPD CURRENT REGISTER 1 (CREG1)
R253 - Read/Write
Register Page: 23
Reset Value: xxxx xxxx (xxh)
JBLPD CURRENT REGISTER 3 (CREG3)
R255- Read/Write
Register Page: 23
Reset Value: xxxx xxxx (xxh)
7
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
0
7
b0
b7
Depending on the RSEL[3:0] value of the OPTIONS register, this register is one of the following
stacked registers: RDCPR, FREG1, FREG5,
FREG9, FREG13, FREG17, FREG21, FREG25,
FREG29.
0
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
Depending on the RSEL[3:0] value of the OPTIONS register, this register is one of the following
stacked registers: TDCPR, FREG3, FREG7,
FREG11, FREG15, FREG19, FREG23, FREG27,
FREG31.
Table 62. Stacked registers map
RSEL[3:0]
Current
Registers
0000b
1000b
1001b
1010b
1011b
1100b
1101b
1110b
1111b
CREG0
RDAPR
FREG0
FREG4
FREG8
FREG12
FREG16
FREG20
FREG24
FREG28
CREG1
RDCPR
FREG1
FREG5
FREG9
FREG13
FREG17
FREG21
FREG25
FREG29
CREG2
TDAPR
FREG2
FREG6
FREG10
FREG14
FREG18
FREG22
FREG26
FREG30
CREG3
TDCPR
FREG3
FREG7
FREG11
FREG15
FREG19
FREG23
FREG27
FREG31
319/426
9
J1850 Byte Level Protocol Decoder (JBLPD)
J1850 BYTE LEVEL PROTOCOL DECODER (Cont’d)
10.9.7.2 Stacked Registers
Register File) of the DMA receiver transaction
counter when the DMA between Peripheral and
See the description of the OPTIONS register to
Memory Space is selected. Otherwise, if the DMA
obtain more information on the map of the regisbetween Peripheral and Register File is selected,
ters of this section.
this register points to a pair of registers that are
used as DMA Address register and DMA Transaction Counter.
JBLPD RECEIVER DMA ADDRESS POINTER
See Section 10.9.6.1and Section 10.9.6.2 for
REGISTER (RDAPR)
more details on the use of this register.
R252 - RSEL[3:0]=0000b
Register Page: 23
Reset Value: xxxx xxxx (xxh)
Bit 0 = RF/MEM Receiver Register File/Memory
7
0
Selector.
If this bit is set to “1”, then the Register File will be
RA7
RA6
RA5
RA4
RA3
RA2
RA1
PS
selected as Destination, otherwise the Memory
space will be used.
0: Receiver DMA with Memory space
To select this register, the RSEL[3:0] bits of the
1: Receiver DMA with Register File
OPTIONS register must be reset
Bit 7:1 = RA[7:1] Receiver DMA Address Pointer.
RDAPR contains the address of the pointer (in the
Register File) of the Receiver DMA data source
when the DMA between the peripheral and the
Memory Space is selected. Otherwise, when the
DMA between the peripheral and Register File is
selected, this register has no meaning.
See Section 10.9.6.2 for more details on the use of
this register.
Bit 0 = PS Memory Segment Pointer Selector.
This bit is set and cleared by software. It is only
meaningful if RDCPR.RF/MEM = 1.
0: The ISR register is used to extend the address
of data received by DMA (see MMU chapter)
1: The DMASR register is used to extend the address of data received by DMA (see MMU chapter)
JBLPD RECEIVER DMA TRANSACTION
COUNTER REGISTER (RDCPR)
R253 - RSEL[3:0]=0000b
Register Page: 23
Reset Value: xxxx xxxx (xxh)
7
RC7
0
RC6
RC5
RC4
RC3
RC2
RC1
RF/MEM
To select this register, the RSEL[3:0] bits of the
OPTIONS register must be reset
Bit 7:1 = RC[7:1] Receiver DMA Counter Pointer.
RDCPR contains the address of the pointer (in the
320/426
9
JBLPD TRANSMITTER DMA ADDRESS POINTER REGISTER (TDAPR)
R254 - RSEL[3:0]=0000b
Register Page: 23
Reset Value: xxxx xxxx (xxh)
7
TA7
0
TA6
TA5
TA4
TA3
TA2
TA1
PS
To select this register, the RSEL[3:0] bits of the
OPTIONS register must be reset
Bit 7:1 = TA[7:1] Transmitter DMA Address Pointer.
TDAPR contains the address of the pointer (in the
Register File) of the Transmitter DMA data source
when the DMA between the Memory Space and
the peripheral is selected. Otherwise, when the
DMA between Register File and the peripheral is
selected, this register has no meaning.
See Section 10.9.6.2 for more details on the use of
this register.
Bit 0 = PS Memory Segment Pointer Selector.
This bit is set and cleared by software. It is only
meaningful if TDCPR.RF/MEM = 1.
0: The ISR register is used to extend the address
of data transmitted by DMA (see MMU chapter)
1: The DMASR register is used to extend the address of data transmitted by DMA (see MMU
chapter)
J1850 Byte Level Protocol Decoder (JBLPD)
J1850 BYTE LEVEL PROTOCOL DECODER (Cont’d)
JBLPD TRANSMITTER DMA TRANSACTION
JBLPD MESSAGE FILTERING REGISTERS
COUNTER REGISTER (TDCPR)
(FREG[0:31])
R255 - RSEL[3:0]=0000b
R252/R253/R254/R255 - RSEL[3]=1
Register Page: 23
Register Page: 23
Reset Value: xxxx xxxx (xxh)
Reset Value: xxxx xxxx (xxh)
7
TC7
0
TC6
TC5
TC4
TC3
TC2
TC1
RF/MEM
Register
7
FREG0 F_07 F_06 F_05
0
F_04 F_03 F_02 F_01 F_00
FREG1 F_0F F_0E F_0D F_0C F_0B F_0A F_09 F_08
To select this register, the RSEL[3:0] bits of the
OPTIONS register must be reset
Bit 7:1 = TC[7:1] Transmitter DMA Counter Pointer.
RDCPR contains the address of the pointer (in the
Register File) of the DMA transmitter transaction
counter when the DMA between Memory Space
and peripheral is selected. Otherwise, if the DMA
between Register File and peripheral is selected,
this register points to a pair of registers that are
used as DMA Address register and DMA Transaction Counter.
See Section 10.9.6.1and Section 10.9.6.2 for
more details on the use of this register.
FREG2 F_17 F_16 F_15
FREG3 F_1F F_1E F_1D F_1C F_1B F_1A F_19 F_18
FREG4 F_27 F_26 F_25
F_24 F_23 F_22 F_21 F_20
FREG5 F_2F F_2E F_2D F_2C F_2B F_2A F_29 F_28
FREG6 F_37 F_36 F_35
F_34 F_33 F_32 F_31 F_30
FREG7 F_3F F_3E F_3D F_3C F_3B F_3A F_39 F_38
FREG8 F_47 F_46 F_45
F_44 F_43 F_42 F_41 F_40
FREG9 F_4F F_4E F_4D F_4C F_4B F_4A F_49 F_48
FREG10 F_57 F_56 F_55
F_54 F_53 F_52 F_51 F_50
FREG11 F_5F F_5E F_5D F_5C F_5B F_5A F_59 F_58
FREG12 F_67 F_66 F_65
F_64 F_63 F_62 F_61 F_60
FREG13 F_6F F_6E F_6D F_6C F_6B F_6A F_69 F_68
FREG14 F_77 F_76 F_75
Bit 0 = RF/MEM Transmitter Register File/Memory
Selector.
If this bit is set to “1”, then the Register File will be
selected as Destination, otherwise the Memory
space will be used.
0: Transmitter DMA with Memory space
1: Transmitter DMA with Register File
F_14 F_13 F_12 F_11 F_10
F_74 F_73 F_72 F_71 F_70
FREG15 F_7F F_7E F_7D F_7C F_7B F_7A F_79 F_78
FREG16 F_87 F_86 F_85
F_84 F_83 F_82 F_81 F_80
FREG17 F_8F F_8E F_8D F_8C F_8B F_8A F_89 F_88
FREG18 F_97 F_96 F_95
F_94 F_93 F_92 F_91 F_90
FREG19 F_9F F_9E F_9D F_9C F_9B F_9A F_99 F_98
FREG20 F_A7 F_A6 F_A5 F_A4 F_A3 F_A2 F_A1 F_A0
FREG21 F_AF F_AE F_AD F_AC F_AB F_AA F_A9 F_A8
FREG22 F_B7 F_B6 F_B5 F_B4 F_B3 F_B2 F_B1 F_B0
FREG23 F_BF F_BE F_BD F_BC F_BB F_BA F_B9 F_B8
FREG24 F_C7 F_C6 F_C5 F_C4 F_C3 F_C2 F_C1 F_C0
FREG25 F_CF F_CE F_CD F_CC F_CB F_CA F_C9 F_C8
FREG26 F_D7 F_D6 F_D5 F_D4 F_D3 F_D2 F_D1 F_D0
FREG27 F_DF F_DE F_DD F_DC F_DB F_DA F_D9 F_D8
FREG28 F_E7 F_E6 F_E5 F_E4 F_E3 F_E2 F_E1 F_E0
FREG29 F_EF F_EE F_ED F_EC F_EB F_EA F_E9 F_E8
FREG30 F_F7 F_F6 F_F5 F_F4 F_F3 F_F2 F_F1 F_F0
FREG31 F_FF F_FE F_FD F_FC F_FB F_FA F_F9 F_F8
321/426
9
J1850 Byte Level Protocol Decoder (JBLPD)
J1850 BYTE LEVEL PROTOCOL DECODER (Cont’d)
These registers are structured in eight groups of
register and the RDRF flag is set. Also, every other
four registers. The user can gain access to these
data byte received in this frame is transferred to
registers programming the RSEL[2:0] bits of the
the RXDATA register unless the JBLPD peripheral
OPTIONS register while the RSEL[3] bit of the
is put into sleep mode setting the SLP bit.
same register must be placed at 1. In this way the
If the bit of the array correspondent to the I.D. byte
user can select the group where the registers that
is clear, then the transfer of this byte as well as any
he/she wants to use are placed. See the descripbyte for the balance of this frame is inhibited, and
tion of OPTIONS register for the correspondence
the RDRF bit remains cleared.
between registers and the values of RSEL[2:0] bits
The bit 0 of the FREG[0] register (FREG[0].0 (See Table 62).
marked as F_00 in the previous table) correFrom the functional point of view, the FREG[0]sponds to the I.D. byte equal to 00h while the bit 7
FREG[31] registers can be seen as an array of
of the FREG[31] register (FREG[31].7 - marked as
256 bits involved in the J1850 received message
F_FF in the previous table) corresponds to the I.D.
filtering system.
byte equal to FFh.
The first byte received in a frame (following a valid
Note: The FREG registers are undefined upon rereceived SOF character) is an Identifier (I.D.) byte.
set. Because of this, it is strongly recommended
It is used by the JBLPD peripheral as the address
that the contents of these registers has to be deof the 256 bits array.
fined before JE is set for the first time after reset.
If the bit of the array correspondent to the I.D. byte
Otherwise, unpredictable results may occur.
is set, then the byte is transferred to the RXDATA
322/426
9
J1850 Byte Level Protocol Decoder (JBLPD)
J1850 BYTE LEVEL PROTOCOL DECODER (Cont’d)
Register
Address
7
0
STATUS
reset value
F0h
ERR
0
TRDY
1
RDRF
0
TLA
0
RDT
0
EODM
0
EOFM
0
IDLE
0
TXDATA
reset value
F1h
TXD7
x
TXD6
x
TXD5
x
TXD4
x
TXD3
x
TXD2
x
TXD1
x
TXD0
x
RXDATA
reset value
F2h
RXD7
x
RXD6
x
RXD5
x
RXD4
x
RXD3
x
RXD2
x
RXD1
x
RXD0
x
TXOP
reset value
F3h
MLC3
0
MLC2
0
MLC1
0
MLC0
0
0
OP2
0
OP1
0
OP0
0
CLKSEL
reset value
F4h
4X
0
0
FREQ5
0
FREQ4
0
FREQ3
0
FREQ2
0
FREQ1
0
FREQ0
0
CONTROL
reset value
F5h
JE
0
JDIS
1
NFL
0
JDLY4
0
JDLY3
0
JDLY2
0
JDLY1
0
JDLY0
0
PADDR
reset value
F6h
ADR7
x
ADR6
x
ADR5
x
ADR4
x
ADR3
x
ADR2
x
ADR1
x
ADR0
x
ERROR
reset value
F7h
TTO
0
TDUF
0
RDOF
0
TRA
0
RBRK
0
CRCE
0
IFD
0
IBD
0
IVR
reset value
F8h
V7
x
V6
x
V5
x
V4
x
V3
x
EV2
x
EV1
x
0
PRLR
reset value
F9h
PRL2
0
PRL1
0
PRL0
0
SLP
1
0
0
REOBP
0
TEOBP
0
IMR
reset value
FAh
ERR_M
0
TRDY_M
0
RDRF_M
0
TLA_M
0
RXD_M
0
EODM_M
0
EOFM_M
0
TXD_M
0
OPTIONS
reset value
FBh
INPOL
0
NBSYMS
0
DMASUSP
0
LOOPB
0
RSEL3
0
RSEL2
0
RSEL1
0
RSEL0
0
CREG0
reset value
FCh
b7
x
b6
x
b5
x
b4
x
b3
x
b2
x
b1
x
b0
x
CREG1
reset value
FDh
b7
x
b6
x
b5
x
b4
x
b3
x
b2
x
b1
x
b0
x
CREG2
reset value
FEh
b7
x
b6
x
b5
x
b4
x
b3
x
b2
x
b1
x
b0
x
CREG3
reset value
FFh
b7
x
b6
x
b5
x
b4
x
b3
x
b2
x
b1
x
b0
x
323/426
9
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (bxCAN)
10.10 CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (bxCAN)
10.10.1 Introduction
This peripheral Basic Extended CAN, named bxCAN, interfaces the CAN network. It supports the
CAN protocol version 2.0A and B. It has been designed to manage a high number of incoming messages efficiently with a minimum CPU load. It also
meets the priority requirements for transmit messages.
For safety-critical applications, the CAN controller
provides all hardware functions for supporting the
CAN Time Triggered Communication option.
10.10.2 Main Features
■ Supports CAN protocol version 2.0 A, B Active
■ Bit rates up to 1Mbit/s
■ Supports the Time Triggered Communication
option
Transmission
■ Three transmit mailboxes
■ Configurable transmit priority
■ Time Stamp on SOF transmission
Reception
■ Two receive FIFOs with three stages
■ Eight scalable filter banks
■ Identifier list feature
■ Configurable FIFO overrun
■ Time Stamp on SOF reception
Time Triggered Communication Option
■ Disable automatic retransmission mode
16-bit free running timer
■ Configurable timer resolution
■ Time Stamp sent in last two data bytes
Management
■ Maskable interrupts
■ Software-efficient mailbox mapping at a unique
address space
10.10.3 General Description
In today’s CAN applications, the number of nodes
in a network is increasing and often several networks are linked together via gateways. Typically
the number of messages in the system (and thus
to be handled by each node) has significantly increased. In addition to the application messages,
Network Management and Diagnostic messages
have been introduced.
– An enhanced filtering mechanism is required to
handle each type of message.
Furthermore, application tasks require more CPU
time, therefore real-time constraints caused by
message reception have to be reduced.
– A receive FIFO scheme allows the CPU to be
dedicated to application tasks for a long time period without losing messages.
The standard HLP (Higher Layer Protocol) based
on standard CAN drivers requires an efficient interface to the CAN controller.
– All mailboxes and registers are organized in 16byte pages mapped at the same address and selected via a page select register.
■
ST9 MCU
Application
CAN
Controller
CAN
Rx
CAN
Tx
CAN
Transceiver
CAN
High
CAN Bus
324/426
9
CAN
Low
CAN node n
CAN node 2
CAN node 1
Figure 142. CAN Network Topology
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (bxCAN)
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (Cont’d)
CAN 2.0B Active Core
The bxCAN module handles the transmission and
the reception of CAN messages fully autonomously. Standard identifiers (11-bit) and extended identifiers (29-bit) are fully supported by hardware.
Control, Status and Configuration Registers
The application uses these registers to:
– Configure CAN parameters, e.g.baud rate
– Request transmissions
– Handle receptions
– Manage interrupts
– Get diagnostic information
Tx Mailboxes
Three transmit mailboxes are provided to the software for setting up messages. The transmission
Scheduler decides which mailbox has to be transmitted first.
Acceptance Filters
The bxCAN provides eight scalable/configurable
identifier filter banks for selecting the incoming
messages the software needs and discarding the
others.
Receive FIFO
Two receive FIFOs are used by hardware to store
the incoming messages. Three complete messages can be stored in each FIFO. The FIFOs are
managed completely by hardware.
Figure 143. CAN Block Diagram
Tx Mailboxes
Master Control
Receive FIFO 0
Mailbox 2
Master Status
Receive FIFO 1
2
Mailbox 0
2
1
Mailbox 0
1
Transmit Control
Control/Status/Configuration
Transmit Status
Mailbox 1
Transmit Priority
Receive FIFO
Mailbox 0
Interrupt Enable
Page Select
Acceptance Filters
Error Status
Error Int. Enable
Tx Error Counter
Transmission
Scheduler
Filter
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Rx Error Counter
Diagnostic
Bit Timing
CAN 2.0B Active Core
Filter Mode
Filter Config.
325/426
9
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (bxCAN)
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (Cont’d)
Figure 144. bxCAN Operating Modes
RESET
SLEEP
SLAK= 1
INAK = 0
SLE
EE
SLEEP
SL
NORMAL
EP
P
SL
EE
P
RQ
* IN
SLAK= 0
INAK = 0
10.10.4 Operating Modes
bxCAN has three main operating modes: initialization, normal and sleep. After a hardware reset,
bxCAN is in sleep mode to reduce power consumption and an internal pull-up is active on RX1.
The software requests bxCAN to enter initialization or sleep mode by setting the INRQ or SLEEP
bits in the CMCR register. Once the mode has
been entered, bxCAN confirms it by setting the
INAK or SLAK bits in the CMSR register and the
internal pull-up is disabled. When neither INAK nor
SLAK are set, bxCAN is in normal mode. Before
entering normal mode bxCAN always has to synchronize on the CAN bus. To synchronize, bxCAN waits until the CAN bus is idle, this means 11
consecutive recessive bits have been monitored
on CANRX.
10.10.4.1 Initialization Mode
The software initialization can be done while the
hardware is in Initialization mode. To enter this
mode the software sets the INRQ bit in the CMCR
register and waits until the hardware has confirmed the request by setting the INAK bit in the
CMSR register.
To leave Initialization mode, the software clears
the INQR bit. bxCAN has left Initialization mode
once the INAK bit has been cleared by hardware.
While in Initialization Mode, all message transfers
to and from the CAN bus are stopped and the sta-
326/426
9
SYNC
SLAK= X
INAK = X
INR
INR
INRQ
Q
Q
INITIALIZATION
SLAK= 0
INAK = 1
tus of the CAN bus output CANTX is recessive
(high).
Entering Initialization Mode does not change any
of the configuration registers.
To initialize the CAN Controller, software has to
set up the Bit Timing registers and the filters. If a
filter bank is not used, it is recommended to leave
it non active (leave the corresponding FACT bit
cleared).
10.10.4.2 Normal Mode
Once the initialization has been done, the software
must request the hardware to enter Normal mode,
to synchronize on the CAN bus and start reception
and transmission. Entering Normal mode is done
by clearing the INRQ bit in the CMCR register and
waiting until the hardware has confirmed the request by clearing the INAK bit in the CMSR register. Afterwards, the bxCAN synchronizes with the
data transfer on the CAN bus by waiting for the occurrence of a sequence of 11 consecutive recessive bits (≡ Bus Idle) before it can take part in bus
activities and start message transfer.
The initialization of the filter values is independent
from Initialization Mode but must be done while the
filter is not active (corresponding FACTx bit
cleared). The filter scale and mode configuration
must be configured before entering Normal Mode.
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (bxCAN)
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (Cont’d)
10.10.4.3 Low Power Mode (Sleep)
To reduce power consumption, bxCAN has a low
power mode called sleep mode. This mode is entered on software request by setting the SLEEP bit
in the CMCR register. In this mode, the bxCAN
clock is stopped. Consequently, software can still
access the bxCAN registers and mailboxes but the
bxCAN will not update the status bits.
Example: If software requests entry to initialization mode by setting the INRQ bit while bxCAN is
in sleep mode, it will not be acknowledged by the
hardware, INAK stays cleared.
bxCAN can be woken up (exit sleep mode) either
by software clearing the SLEEP bit or on detection
of CAN bus activity.
On CAN bus activity detection, hardware automatically performs the wake-up sequence by clearing
the SLEEP bit if the AWUM bit in the CMCR register is set. If the AWUM bit is cleared, software has
to clear the SLEEP bit when a wake-up interrupt
occurs, in order to exit from sleep mode.
Note: If the wake-up interrupt is enabled (WKUIE
bit set in CIER register) a wake-up interrupt will be
generated on detection of CAN bus activity, even if
the bxCAN automatically performs the wake-up
sequence.
After the SLEEP bit has been cleared, sleep mode
is exited once bxCAN has synchronized with the
CAN bus, refer to Figure 144.bxCAN Operating
Modes. The sleep mode is exited once the SLAK
bit has been cleared by hardware.
10.10.4.4 Test Mode
Test mode can be selected by the SILM and LBKM
bits in the CDGR register. These bits must be configured while bxCAN is in Initialization mode. Once
test mode has been selected, the INRQ bit in the
CMCR register must be reset to enter Normal
mode.
10.10.4.5 Silent Mode
The bxCAN can be put in Silent mode by setting
the SILM bit in the CDGR register.
In Silent mode, the bxCAN is able to receive valid
data frames and valid remote frames, but it sends
only recessive bits on the CAN bus and it cannot
start a transmission. If the bxCAN has to send a
dominant bit (ACK bit, overload flag, active error
flag), the bit is rerouted internally so that the CAN
Core monitors this dominant bit, although the CAN
bus may remain in recessive state. Silent mode
can be used to analyze the traffic on a CAN bus
without affecting it by the transmission of dominant
bits (Acknowledge Bits, Error Frames).
Figure 145. bxCAN in Silent Mode
bxCAN
Tx
Rx
=1
CANTX CANRX
10.10.4.6 Loop Back Mode
The bxCAN can be set in Loop Back Mode by setting the LBKM bit in the CDGR register. In Loop
Back Mode, the bxCAN treats its own transmitted
messages as received messages and stores them
(if they pass acceptance filtering) in a Receive
mailbox. bxCAN in Loop Back Mode
bxCAN
Tx
Rx
CANTX CANRX
This mode is provided for self-test functions. To be
independent of external events, the CAN Core ignores acknowledge errors (no dominant bit sampled in the acknowledge slot of a data / remote
frame) in Loop Back Mode. In this mode, the bxCAN performs an internal feedback from its Tx
output to its Rx input. The actual value of the CANRX input pin is disregarded by the bxCAN. The
transmitted messages can be monitored on the
CANTX pin.
327/426
9
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (bxCAN)
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (Cont’d)
10.10.4.7 Loop Back combined with Silent
Mode
It is also possible to combine Loop Back mode and
Silent mode by setting the LBKM and SILM bits in
the CDGR register. This mode can be used for a
“Hot Selftest”, meaning the bxCAN can be tested
like in Loop Back mode but without affecting a running CAN system connected to the CANTX and
CANRX pins. In this mode, the CANRX pin is disconnected from the bxCAN and the CANTX pin is
held recessive.
Figure 146. bxCAN in Combined Mode
bxCAN
Tx
Rx
=1
CANTX CANRX
10.10.5 Functional Description
10.10.5.1 Transmission Handling
In order to transmit a message, the application
must select one empty transmit mailbox, set up
the identifier, the data length code (DLC) and the
data before requesting the transmission by setting
the corresponding TXRQ bit in the MCSR register.
Once the mailbox has left empty state, the software no longer has write access to the mailbox
registers. Immediately after the TXRQ bit has
been set, the mailbox enters pending state and
waits to become the highest priority mailbox, see
Transmit Priority. As soon as the mailbox has the
highest priority it will be scheduled for transmission. The transmission of the message of the
scheduled mailbox will start (enter transmit state)
when the CAN bus becomes idle. Once the mailbox has been successfully transmitted, it will become empty again. The hardware indicates a successful transmission by setting the RQCP and
TXOK bits in the MCSR and CTSR registers.
If the transmission fails, the cause is indicated by
the ALST bit in the MCSR register in case of an Ar-
328/426
9
bitration Lost, and/or the TERR bit, in case of
transmission error detection.
Transmit Priority
By Identifier:
When more than one transmit mailbox is pending,
the transmission order is given by the identifier of
the message stored in the mailbox. The message
with the lowest identifier value has the highest priority according to the arbitration of the CAN protocol. If the identifier values are equal, the lower
mailbox number will be scheduled first.
By Transmit Request Order:
The transmit mailboxes can be configured as a
transmit FIFO by setting the TXFP bit in the CMCR
register. In this mode the priority order is given by
the transmit request order.
This mode is very useful for segmented transmission.
Abort
A transmission request can be aborted by the user
setting the ABRQ bit in the MCSR register. In
pending or scheduled state, the mailbox is aborted immediately. An abort request while the mailbox is in transmit state can have two results. If the
mailbox is transmitted successfully the mailbox
becomes empty with the TXOK bit set in the
MCSR and CTSR registers. If the transmission
fails, the mailbox becomes scheduled, the transmission is aborted and becomes empty with
TXOK cleared. In all cases the mailbox will become empty again at least at the end of the current transmission.
Non-Automatic Retransmission Mode
This mode has been implemented in order to fulfil
the requirement of the Time Triggered Communication option of the CAN standard. To configure
the hardware in this mode the NART bit in the
CMCR register must be set.
In this mode, each transmission is started only
once. If the first attempt fails, due to an arbitration
loss or an error, the hardware will not automatically restart the message transmission.
At the end of the first transmission attempt, the
hardware considers the request as completed and
sets the RQCP bit in the MCSR register. The result
of the transmission is indicated in the MCSR register by the TXOK, ALST and TERR bits.
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (bxCAN)
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (Cont’d)
Figure 147. Transmit Mailbox States
EMPTY
RQCP=X
TXOK=X
TME = 1
TXRQ=1
PENDING
ABRQ=1
RQCP=0
TXOK=0
TME = 0
EMPTY
Mailbox does not
have highest priority
ABRQ=1
RQCP=1
TXOK=0
TME = 1
CAN Bus = IDLE
Transmit failed * NART
TRANSMIT
RQCP=0
TXOK=0
TME = 0
EMPTY
RQCP=1
TXOK=1
TME = 1
Mailbox has
highest priority
SCHEDULED
RQCP=0
TXOK=0
TME = 0
Transmit failed * NART
Transmit succeeded
329/426
9
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (bxCAN)
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (Cont’d)
10.10.5.2 Time Triggered Communication
Mode
In this mode, the internal counter of the CAN hardware is activated and used to generate the Time
Stamp value stored in the MTSRH and MTSRL
registers. The internal counter is captured on the
sample point of the Start Of Frame bit in both reception and transmission.
10.10.5.3 Reception Handling
For the reception of CAN messages, three
mailboxes organized as a FIFO are provided. In
order to save CPU load, simplify the software and
guarantee data consistency, the FIFO is managed
330/426
9
completely by hardware. The application accesses
the messages stored in the FIFO through the FIFO
output mailbox.
Valid Message
A received message is considered as valid when it
has been received correctly according to the CAN
protocol (no error until the last but one bit of the
EOF field) and It passed through the identifier filtering successfully, see Section 10.10.5.4 Identifier Filtering.
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (bxCAN)
Figure 148. Receive FIFO states
EMPTY
FMP=0x00
FOVR=0
Valid Message
Received
Release
Mailbox
PENDING_1
FMP=0x01
FOVR=0
Release
Mailbox
RFOM=1
Valid Message
Received
PENDING_2
FMP=0x10
FOVR=0
Release
Mailbox
RFOM=1
Valid Message
Received
PENDING_3
FMP=0x11
FOVR=0
Valid Message
Received
Release
Mailbox
RFOM=1
OVERRUN
FMP=0x11
FOVR=1
Valid Message
Received
331/426
9
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (bxCAN)
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (Cont’d)
FIFO Management
Starting from the empty state, the first valid message received is stored in the FIFO which becomes pending_1. The hardware signals the
event setting the FMP[1:0] bits in the CRFR register to the value 01b. The message is available in
the FIFO output mailbox. The software reads out
the mailbox content and releases it by setting the
RFOM bit in the CRFR register. The FIFO becomes empty again. If a new valid message has
been received in the meantime, the FIFO stays in
pending_1 state and the new message is available in the output mailbox.
If the application does not release the mailbox, the
next valid message will be stored in the FIFO
which enters pending_2 state (FMP[1:0] = 10b).
The storage process is repeated for the next valid
message putting the FIFO into pending_3 state
(FMP[1:0] = 11b). At this point, the software must
release the output mailbox by setting the RFOM
bit, so that a mailbox is free to store the next valid
message. Otherwise the next valid message received will cause a loss of message.
Refer also to Section 10.10.5.5 Message Storage
Overrun
Once the FIFO is in pending_3 state (i.e. the three
mailboxes are full) the next valid message reception will lead to an overrun and a message will be
lost. The hardware signals the overrun condition
by setting the FOVR bit in the CRFR register.
Which message is lost depends on the configuration of the FIFO:
– If the FIFO lock function is disabled (RFLM bit in
the CMCR register cleared) the last message
stored in the FIFO will be overwritten by the new
incoming message. In this case the latest messages will be always available to the application.
– If the FIFO lock function is enabled (RFLM bit in
the CMCR register set) the most recent message
will be discarded and the software will have the
three oldest messages in the FIFO available.
Reception Related Interrupts
Once a message has been stored in the FIFO, the
FMP[1:0] bits are updated and an interrupt request
is generated if the FMPIE bit in the CIER register is
set.
When the FIFO becomes full (i.e. a third message
is stored) the FULL bit in the CRFR register is set
and an interrupt is generated if the FFIE bit in the
CIER register is set.
332/426
9
On overrun condition, the FOVR bit is set and an
interrupt is generated if the FOVIE bit in the CIER
register is set.
10.10.5.4 Identifier Filtering
In the CAN protocol the identifier of a message is
not associated with the address of a node but related to the content of the message. Consequently
a transmitter broadcasts its message to all receivers. On message reception a receiver node decides - depending on the identifier value - whether
the software needs the message or not. If the message is needed, it is copied into the RAM. If not,
the message must be discarded without intervention by the software.
To fulfil this requirement, the bxCAN Controller
provides eight configurable and scalable filterbanks (0-7) to the application, in order to receive
only the messages the software needs. This hardware filtering saves CPU resources which would
be otherwise needed to perform filtering by software. Each filter bank consists of eight 8-bit registers, CFxR[0:7].
Scalable Width
To optimize and adapt the filters to the application
needs, each filter bank can be scaled independently. Depending on the filter scale a filter bank
provides:
– One 32-bit filter for the STDID[10:0], IDE, EXTID[17:0] and RTR bits.
– Two 16-bit filters for the STDID[10:0], RTR and
IDE bits.
– Four 8-bit filters for the STDID[10:3] bits. The
other bits are considered as don’t care.
– One 16-bit filter and two 8-bit filters for filtering
the same set of bits as the 16 and 8-bit filters described above.
Refer to Figure 149.
Furthermore, the filters can be configured in mask
mode or in identifier list mode.
Mask mode
In mask mode the identifier registers are associated with mask registers specifying which bits of the
identifier are handled as “must match” or as “don’t
care”.
Identifier List mode
In identifier list mode, the mask registers are
used as identifier registers. Thus instead of defining an identifier and a mask, two identifiers are
specified, doubling the number of single identifiers. All bits of the incoming identifier must match
the bits specified in the filter registers.
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (bxCAN)
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (Cont’d)
Figure 149. Filter Bank Scale Configuration - Register Organisation
Filter Bank Scale Config. Bits1
Filter Bank Scale Configuration
One 32-Bit Filter
Identifier
Mask/Ident.
Bit Mapping
CFxR0
CFxR4
STID10:3
FSCx = 3
CFxR2
CFxR6
CFxR1
CFxR5
STID2:0 RTR IDE EXID17:15
EXID14:7
CFxR3
CFxR7
EXID6:0
Two 16-Bit Filters
Identifier
Mask/Ident.
CFxR0
CFxR2
CFxR1
CFxR3
Identifier
Mask/Ident.
Bit Mapping
CFxR4
CFxR6
CFxR5
CFxR7
FSCx = 2
STID10:3
STID2:0 RTR IDE EXID17:15
One 16-Bit / Two 8-Bit Filters
Identifier
Mask/Ident.
CFxR0
CFxR2
Identifier
Mask/Ident.
CFxR4
CFxR5
Identifier
Mask/Ident.
CFxR6
CFxR7
CFxR1
CFxR3
FSCx = 1
Four 8-Bit Filters
Identifier
Mask/Ident.
CFxR0
CFxR1
Identifier
Mask/Ident.
CFxR2
CFxR3
Identifier
Mask/Ident.
CFxR4
CFxR5
Identifier
Mask/Ident.
Bit Mapping
CFxR6
CFxR7
STID10:3
FSCx = 0
x = filter bank number
1
These bits are located in the CFCR register
333/426
9
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (bxCAN)
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (Cont’d)
Filter Bank Scale and Mode Configuration
The filter banks are configured by means of the
corresponding CFCRx register. To configure a filter bank it must be deactivated by clearing the
FACT bit in the CFCR register. The filter scale is
configured by means of the FSC[1:0] bits in the
corresponding CFCR register, refer to Figure 149.
The identifier list or identifier mask mode for the
corresponding Mask/Identifier registers is configured by means of the FMCLx and FMCHx bits in
the CFMR register. The FMCLx bit defines the
mode for the two least significant bytes, and the
FMCHx bit the mode for the two most significant
bytes of filter bank x. Examples:
– If filter bank 1 is configured as two 16-bit filters,
then the FMCL1 bit defines the mode of the
CF1R2 and CF1R3 registers and the FMCH1 bit
defines the mode of the CF1R6 and CF1R7 registers.
– If filter bank 2 is configured as four 8-bit filters,
then the FMCL2 bit defines the mode of the
CF2R1 and CF2R3 registers and the FMCH2 bit
defines the mode of the CF2R5 and CF2R7 registers.
Note: In 32-bit configuration, the FMCLx and FMCHx bits must have the same value to ensure that
the four Mask/Identifier registers are in the same
mode.
To filter a group of identifiers, configure the Mask/
Identifier registers in mask mode.
To select single identifiers, configure the Mask/
Identifier registers in identifier list mode.
Filters not used by the application should be left
deactivated.
Filter Match Index
Once a message has been received in the FIFO it
is available to the application. Typically application
data are copied into RAM locations. To copy the
334/426
9
data to the right location the application has to
identify the data by means of the identifier. To
avoid this and to ease the access to the RAM locations, the CAN controller provides a Filter Match
Index.
This index is stored in the mailbox together with
the message according to the filter priority rules.
Thus each received message has its associated
filter match index.
The Filter Match index can be used in two ways:
– Compare the Filter Match index with a list of expected values.
– Use the Filter Match Index as an index on an array to access the data destination location.
For non-masked filters, the software no longer has
to compare the identifier.
If the filter is masked the software reduces the
comparison to the masked bits only.
Filter Priority Rules
Depending on the filter combination it may occur
that an identifier passes successfully through several filters. In this case the filter match value stored
in the receive mailbox is chosen according to the
following rules:
– A filter in identifier list mode prevails on an filter
in mask mode.
– A filter with full identifier coverage prevails over
filters covering part of the identifier, e.g. 16-bit filters prevail over 8-bit filters.
– Filters configured in the same mode and with
identical coverage are prioritized by filter number
and register number. The lower the number the
higher the priority.
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (bxCAN)
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (Cont’d)
Figure 150. Filtering Mechanism - example
Message Received
Identifier
Data
Ctrl
Identifier & Mask
Identifier List
Receive FIFO
Identifier
Identifier
Identifier
0
1
2
Identifier
n
Identifier
Mask
n+1
n+m
Identifier
Mask
No Match
Found
Message Discarded
Identifier #2 Match
Message
Stored
n: number of single identifiers to receive
m: number of identifier groups to receive
n and m values depend on the configuration of the filters
The example above shows the filtering principle of
the bxCAN. On reception of a message, the identifier is compared first with the filters configured in
identifier list mode. If there is a match, the message is stored in the associated FIFO and the index of the matching filter is stored in the Filter
Match Index. As shown in the example, the identifier matches with Identifier #2 thus the message
content and MFMI 2 is stored in the FIFO.
If there is no match, the incoming identifier is then
compared with the filters configured in mask
mode.
If the identifier does not match any of the identifiers configured in the filters, the message is discarded by hardware without disturbing the software.
335/426
9
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (bxCAN)
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (Cont’d)
10.10.5.5 Message Storage
The interface between the software and the hardware for the CAN messages is implemented by
means of mailboxes. A mailbox contains all information related to a message; identifier, data, control, status and time stamp information.
Transmit Mailbox
The software sets up the message to be transmitted in an empty transmit mailbox. The status of the
transmission is indicated by hardware in the
MCSR register.
Transmit Mailbox Mapping
Offset to Transmit
Mailbox base address (bytes)
0
9
MCSR
1
MDLC
2
MIDR0
3
MIDR1
4
MIDR2
5
MIDR3
6
MDAR0
7
336/426
Register Name
MDAR1
8
MDAR2
9
MDAR3
10
MDAR4
11
MDAR5
12
MDAR6
13
MDAR7
14
MTSR0
15
MTSR1
Receive Mailbox
When a message has been received, it is available
to the software in the FIFO output mailbox. Once
the software has handled the message (e.g. read
it) the software must release the FIFO output mailbox by means of the RFOM bit in the CRFR register to make the next incoming message available.
The filter match index is stored in the MFMI register. The 16-bit time stamp value is stored in the
MTSR[0:1] registers.
Receive Mailbox Mapping
Offset to Receive
Mailbox base address (bytes)
Register Name
0
MFMI
1
MDLC
2
MIDR0
3
MIDR1
4
MIDR2
5
MIDR3
6
MDAR0
7
MDAR1
8
MDAR2
9
MDAR3
10
MDAR4
11
MDAR5
12
MDAR6
13
MDAR7
14
MTSR0
15
MTSR1
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (bxCAN)
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (Cont’d)
Figure 151. . CAN Error State Diagram
When TEC or REC > 127
ERROR ACTIVE
ERROR PASSIVE
When TEC and REC < 128,
When 128 * 11 recessive bits occur:
When TEC > 255
BUS OFF
10.10.5.6 Error Management
The error management as described in the CAN
protocol is handled entirely by hardware using a
Transmit Error Counter (TECR register) and a Receive Error Counter (RECR register), which get incremented or decremented according to the error
condition. For detailed information about TEC and
REC management, please refer to the CAN standard.
Both of them may be read by software to determine the stability of the network. Furthermore, the
CAN hardware provides detailed information on
the current error status in CESR register. By
means of CEIER register and ERRIE bit in CIER
register, the software can configure the interrupt
generation on error detection in a very flexible
way.
Bus-Off Recovery
The Bus-Off state is reached when TECR is greater then 255, this state is indicated by BOFF bit in
CESR register. In Bus-Off state, the bxCAN is no
longer able to transmit and receive messages.
Depending on the ABOM bit in the CMCR register
bxCAN will recover from Bus-Off (become error
active again) either automatically or on software
request. But in both cases the bxCAN has to wait
at least for the recovery sequence specified in the
CAN standard (128 x 11 consecutive recessive
bits monitored on CANRX).
If ABOM is set, the bxCAN will start the recovering
sequence automatically after it has entered BusOff state.
If ABOM is cleared, the software must initiate the
recovering sequence by requesting bxCAN to enter and to leave initialization mode.
Note: In initialization mode, bxCAN does not monitor the CANRX signal, therefore it cannot complete the recovery sequence. To recover, bxCAN
must be in normal mode.
337/426
9
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (bxCAN)
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (Cont’d)
10.10.5.7 Bit Timing
The bit timing logic monitors the serial bus-line and
performs sampling and adjustment of the sample
point by synchronizing on the start-bit edge and resynchronizing on the following edges.
Its operation may be explained simply by splitting
nominal bit time into three segments as follows:
– Synchronization segment (SYNC_SEG): a bit
change is expected to occur within this time segment. It has a fixed length of one time quantum
(1 x tCAN).
– Bit segment 1 (BS1): defines the location of the
sample point. It includes the PROP_SEG and
PHASE_SEG1 of the CAN standard. Its duration
is programmable between 1 and 16 time quanta
but may be automatically lengthened to compensate for positive phase drifts due to differences in
the frequency of the various nodes of the network.
– Bit segment 2 (BS2): defines the location of the
transmit point. It represents the PHASE_SEG2
of the CAN standard. Its duration is programmable between 1 and 8 time quanta but may also be
automatically shortened to compensate for negative phase drifts.
The resynchronization jump width (RJW) defines
an upper bound to the amount of lengthening or
shortening of the bit segments. It is programmable
between 1 and 4 time quanta.
A valid edge is defined as the first transition in a bit
time from dominant to recessive bus level provided the controller itself does not send a recessive
bit.
If a valid edge is detected in BS1 instead of
SYNC_SEG, BS1 is extended by up to RJW so
that the sample point is delayed.
Conversely, if a valid edge is detected in BS2 instead of SYNC_SEG, BS2 is shortened by up to
RJW so that the transmit point is moved earlier.
As a safeguard against programming errors, the
configuration of the Bit Timing Register (BTR) is
only possible while the device is in STANDBY
mode.
Note: for a detailed description of the CAN bit timing and resynchronization mechanism, please refer to the ISO 11898 standard.
Figure 152. Bit Timing
NOMINAL BIT TIME
SYNC_SEG
BIT SEGMENT 1 (BS1)
1 x tCAN
BIT SEGMENT 2 (BS2)
tBS1
tBS2
SAMPLE POINT
1
B audRate = ------------------------------------------------
NominalBitTime
NominalBitTime = 1 × t CAN + t BS1 + t BS2
with:
tBS1 = tCAN x (TS1[3:0] + 1) ,
tBS2 = tCAN x (TS2[2:0] + 1),
tCAN = tCPU x BRP,
tCPU = time period of the CPU clock,
BRP = BRP[5:0] + 1 = Baud Rate Prescaler
BRP[5:0] is defined in the CBTR0 Register,
TS1[3:0] and TS2[2:0] are defined in the CBTR1 Register.
338/426
9
TRANSMIT POINT
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (bxCAN)
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (Cont’d)
Figure 153. CAN Frames
Inter-Frame Space
or Overload Frame
Data Frame (Standard identifier)
Inter-Frame Space
44 + 8 * N
Arbitration Field Control Field Data Field
CRC Field
6
16
12
ID
8*N
Ack Field
2
CRC
EOF
ACK
SOF
RTR
IDE
r0
DLC
Inter-Frame Space
Inter-Frame Space
or Overload Frame
Data Frame (Extended Identifier)
64 + 8 * N
Std Arbitr. Field
Ext Arbitr. Field
12
Ctrl Field
Data Field
6
20
ID
8*N
ACK
Remote Frame
44
CRC Field
Arbitration Field Control Field
Inter-Frame Space
or Overload Frame
Inter-Frame Space
6
ID
16
Error Flag Flag Echo Error Delimiter
6
≤6
End Of Frame
7
ACK
RTR
IDE
r0
Inter-Frame Space
or Overload Frame
Error Frame
Ack Field
2
CRC
DLC
SOF
Data Frame or
Remote Frame
EOF
RTR
r1
r0
SRR
IDE
SOF
CRC Field Ack Field
2
16
7
CRC
DLC
12
7
8
Notes:
• 0 <= N <= 8
• SOF = Start Of Frame
• ID = Identifier
• RTR = Remote Transmission Request
Any Frame
Inter-Frame Space
Suspend
Intermission Transmission Bus Idle
3
8
Data Frame or
Remote Frame
• IDE = Identifier Extension Bit
• r0 = Reserved Bit
• DLC = Data Length Code
• CRC = Cyclic Redundancy Code
• Error flag: 6 dominant bits if node is error
active else 6 recessive bits.
End Of Frame or
Error Delimiter or
Overload Delimiter
Overload Frame
Inter-Frame Space
or Error Frame
Overload Flag Overload Delimiter
6
8
• Suspend transmission: applies to error
passive nodes only.
• EOF = End of Frame
• ACK = Acknowledge bit
339/426
9
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (bxCAN)
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (Cont’d)
10.10.6 Interrupts
Four interrupt vectors are dedicated to bxCAN.
Each interrupt source can be independently ena-
bled or disabled by means of the CAN Interrupt
Enable Register (CIER) and CAN Error Interrupt
Enable register (CEIER).
Figure 154. Event flags and Interrupt Generation
MCSR
CIER
TXMB 0
TXMB 1
TXMB 2
RQCP
RQCP
RQCP
TMEIE
&
FMPIE
&
+
CRFR0
FMP
FFIE
&
FOVIE
&
FMPIE
&
FULL
CRFR1
FMP
FFIE
&
FOVIE
&
FULL
EWGIE
&
EPVIE
&
CESR
EWGF
EPVF
BOFIE
BOFF
LECIE
LECIEF
CMSR
+
FIFO 1
INTERRUPT
FOVR
9
FIFO 0
INTERRUPT
FOVR
340/426
TRANSMIT
INTERRUPT
ERRIE
+
&
&
STATUS CHANGE
&
ERROR
INTERRUPT
+
WKUIE
WKUI
+
&
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (bxCAN)
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (Cont’d)
– The transmit interrupt can be generated by the
following events:
– Transmit mailbox 0 becomes empty, RQCP0
bit in the CTSR register set.
– Transmit mailbox 1 becomes empty, RQCP1
bit in the CTSR register set.
– Transmit mailbox 2 becomes empty, RQCP2
bit in the CTSR register set.
– The FIFO 0 interrupt can be generated by the
following events:
– Reception of a new message, FMP bits in the
CRFR0 register incremented.
– FIFO0 full condition, FULL bit in the CRFR0
register set.
– FIFO0 overrun condition, FOVR bit in the
CRFR0 register set.
– The FIFO 1 interrupt can be generated by the
following events:
– Reception of a new message, FMP bits in the
CRFR1 register incremented.
– FIFO1 full condition, FULL bit in the CRFR1
register set.
– FIFO1 overrun condition, FOVR bit in the
CRFR1 register set.
– The error and status change interrupt can be
generated by the following events:
– Error condition, for more details on error conditions please refer to the CAN Error Status
register (CESR).
– Wake-up condition, SOF monitored on the
CAN Rx signal.
10.10.7 Register Access Protection
Erroneous access to certain configuration registers can cause the hardware to temporarily disturb
the whole CAN network. Therefore the following
registers can be modified by software only while
the hardware is in initialization mode:
CBTR0, CBTR1, CFCR0, CFCR1, CFMR and
CDGR registers.
Although the transmission of incorrect data will not
cause problems at the CAN network level, it can
severely disturb the application. A transmit mailbox can be only modified by software while it is in
empty state, refer to Figure 147.Transmit Mailbox
States
The filters must be deactivated before their value
can be modified by software. The modification of
the filter configuration (scale or mode) can be
done by software only in initialization mode.
341/426
9
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (bxCAN)
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (Cont’d)
10.10.8 Register Description
10.10.8.1 Control and Status Registers
CAN MASTER CONTROL REGISTER (CMCR)
Reset Value: 0000 0010 (02h)
7
TTCM ABOM AWUM NART RFLM
0
TXFP SLEEP INRQ
Bit 7 = TTCM Time Triggered Communication
Mode
- Read/Set/Clear
0: Time Triggered Communication mode disabled.
1: Time Triggered Communication mode enabled
Note: For more information on Time Triggered
Communication mode, please refer to Section
10.10.5.2 Time Triggered Communication Mode.
Bit 6 = ABOM Automatic Bus-Off Management
- Read/Set/Clear
This bit controls the behaviour of the CAN hardware on leaving the Bus-Off state.
0: The Bus-Off state is left on software request,
once 128 x 11 recessive bits have been monitored and the software has first set and cleared
the INRQ bit of the CMCR register.
1: The Bus-Off state is left automatically by hardware once 128 x 11 recessive bits have been
monitored.
For detailed information on the Bus-Off state
please refer to Section 10.10.5.6 Error Management.
Bit 5 = AWUM Automatic Wake-Up Mode
- Read/Set/Clear
This bit controls the behaviour of the CAN hardware on message reception during sleep mode.
0: The sleep mode is left on software request by
clearing the SLEEP bit of the CMCR register.
1: The sleep mode is left automatically by hardware on CAN message detection. The SLEEP
bit of the CMCR register and the SLAK bit of the
CMSR register are cleared by hardware.
Bit 4 = NART No Automatic Retransmission
- Read/Set/Clear
0: The CAN hardware will automatically retransmit
the message until it has been successfully
transmitted according to the CAN standard.
342/426
9
1: A message will be transmitted only once, independently of the transmission result (successful,
error or arbitration lost).
Bit 3 = RFLM Receive FIFO Locked Mode
- Read/Set/Clear
0: Receive FIFO not locked on overrun. Once a receive FIFO is full the next incoming message
will overwrite the previous one.
1: Receive FIFO locked against overrun. Once a
receive FIFO is full the next incoming message
will be discarded.
Bit 2 = TXFP Transmit FIFO Priority
- Read/Set/Clear
This bit controls the transmission order when several mailboxes are pending at the same time.
0: Priority driven by the identifier of the message
1: Priority driven by the request order (chronologically)
Bit 1 = SLEEP Sleep Mode Request
- Read/Set/Clear
This bit is set by software to request the CAN hardware to enter the sleep mode. Sleep mode will be
entered as soon as the current CAN activity (transmission or reception of a CAN frame) has been
completed.
This bit is cleared by software to exit sleep mode.
This bit is cleared by hardware when the AWUM
bit is set and a SOF bit is detected on the CAN Rx
signal.
Bit 0 = INRQ Initialization Request
- Read/Set/Clear
The software clears this bit to switch the hardware
into normal mode. Once 11 consecutive recessive
bits have been monitored on the Rx signal the
CAN hardware is synchronized and ready for
transmission and reception. Hardware signals this
event by clearing the INAK bit if the CMSR register.
Software sets this bit to request the CAN hardware
to enter initialization mode. Once software has set
the INRQ bit, the CAN hardware waits until the
current CAN activity (transmission or reception) is
completed before entering the initialization mode.
Hardware signals this event by setting the INAK bit
in the CMSR register.
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (bxCAN)
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (Cont’d)
CAN MASTER STATUS REGISTER (CMSR)
Reset Value: 0000 0010 (02h)
7
cleared. Please refer to the AWUM bit of the
CMCR register description for detailed information
for clearing SLEEP bit.
0
Bit 5 = REC Receive
- Read
The CAN hardware is currently receiver.
Bit 0 = INAK Initialization Acknowledge
- Read
This bit is set by hardware and indicates to the
software that the CAN hardware is now in initialization mode. This bit acknowledges the initialization request from the software (set INRQ bit in
CMCR register).
This bit is cleared by hardware when the CAN
hardware has left the initialization mode and is
now synchronized on the CAN bus. To be synchronized the hardware has to monitor a sequence of 11 consecutive recessive bits on the
CAN RX signal.
Bit 4 = TRAN Transmit
- Read
The CAN hardware is currently transmitter.
CAN TRANSMIT STATUS REGISTER (CTSR)
Read / Write
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
0
0
REC
TRAN
WKUI
ERRI
SLAK
INAK
Note: To clear a bit of this register the software
must write this bit with a one.
Bit 7:4 = Reserved. Forced to 0 by hardware.
7
0
Bit 3 = WKUI Wake-Up Interrupt
- Read/Clear
This bit is set by hardware to signal that a SOF bit
has been detected while the CAN hardware was in
sleep mode. Setting this bit generates a status
change interrupt if the WKUIE bit in the CIER register is set.
This bit is cleared by software.
Note: To clear a bit of this register the software
must write this bit with a one.
Bit 2 = ERRI Error Interrupt
- Read/Clear
This bit is set by hardware when a bit of the CESR
has been set on error detection and the corresponding interrupt in the CEIER is enabled. Setting this bit generates a status change interrupt if
the ERRIE bit in the CIER register is set.
This bit is cleared by software.
Bit 6 = TXOK2 Transmission OK for mailbox 2
- Read
This bit is set by hardware when the transmission
request on mailbox 2 has been completed successfully. Please refer to Figure 147.
This bit is cleared by hardware when mailbox 2 is
requested for transmission or when the software
clears the RQCP2 bit.
Bit 1 = SLAK Sleep Acknowledge
- Read
This bit is set by hardware and indicates to the
software that the CAN hardware is now in sleep
mode. This bit acknowledges the sleep mode request from the software (set SLEEP bit in CMCR
register).
This bit is cleared by hardware when the CAN
hardware has left sleep mode. Sleep mode is left
when the SLEEP bit in the CMCR register is
Bit 5 = TXOK1 Transmission OK for mailbox 1
- Read
This bit is set by hardware when the transmission
request on mailbox 1 has been completed successfully. Please refer to Figure 147.
This bit is cleared by hardware when mailbox 1 is
requested for transmission or when the software
clears the RQCP1 bit.
0
TXOK2 TXOK1 TXOK0
0
RQCP2 RQCP1 RQCP0
Bit 7 = Reserved. Forced to 0 by hardware.
343/426
9
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (bxCAN)
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (Cont’d)
Bit 4 = TXOK0 Transmission OK for mailbox 0
- Read
This bit is set by hardware when the transmission
request on mailbox 0 has been completed successfully. Please refer to Figure 147.
This bit is cleared by hardware when mailbox 0 is
requested for transmission or when the software
clears the RQCP0 bit.
Bit 3 = Reserved. Forced to 0 by hardware.
Bit 2 = RQCP2 Request Completed for Mailbox 2
- Read/Clear
This bit is set by hardware to signal that the last request for mailbox 2 has been completed. The request could be a transmit or an abort request.
This bit is cleared by software.
Bit 1 = RQCP1 Request Completed for Mailbox 1
- Read/Clear
This bit is set by hardware to signal that the last request for mailbox 1 has been completed. The request could be a transmit or an abort request.
This bit is cleared by software.
Bit 0 = RQCP0 Request Completed for Mailbox 0
- Read/Clear
This bit is set by hardware to signal that the last request for mailbox 0 has been completed. The request could be a transmit or an abort request.
This bit is cleared by software.
CAN TRANSMIT PRIORITY REGISTER (CTPR)
All bits of this register are read only.
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7
LOW2
0
LOW1
LOW0
TME2
TME1
TME0
CODE1 CODE0
Bit 7 = LOW2 Lowest Priority Flag for Mailbox 2
- Read
This bit is set by hardware when more than one
mailbox are pending for transmission and mailbox
2 has the lowest priority.
344/426
9
Bit 6 = LOW1 Lowest Priority Flag for Mailbox 1
- Read
This bit is set by hardware when more than one
mailbox are pending for transmission and mailbox
1 has the lowest priority.
Bit 5 = LOW0 Lowest Priority Flag for Mailbox 0
- Read
This bit is set by hardware when more than one
mailbox are pending for transmission and mailbox
0 has the lowest priority.
Note: These bits are set to zero when only one
mailbox is pending.
Bit 4 = TME2 Transmit Mailbox 2 Empty
- Read
This bit is set by hardware when no transmit request is pending for mailbox 2.
Bit 3 = TME1 Transmit Mailbox 1 Empty
- Read
This bit is set by hardware when no transmit request is pending for mailbox 1.
Bit 2 = TME0 Transmit Mailbox 0 Empty
- Read
This bit is set by hardware when no transmit request is pending for mailbox 0.
Bit 1:0 = CODE[1:0] Mailbox Code
- Read
In case at least one transmit mailbox is free, the
code value is equal to the number of the next
transmit mailbox free.
In case all transmit mailboxes are pending, the
code value is equal to the number of the transmit
mailbox with the lowest priority.
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (bxCAN)
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (Cont’d)
CAN RECEIVE FIFO REGISTERS (CRFRx)
Read / Write
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7
0
0
0
RFOM FOVR
FULL
0
FMP1
FMP0
Note: To clear a bit in this register, software must
write a “1” to the bit.
Bit 7:6 = Reserved. Forced to 0 by hardware.
Bit 5 = RFOM Release FIFO Output Mailbox
- Read/Set
Set by software to release the output mailbox of
the FIFO. The output mailbox can only be released
when at least one message is pending in the FIFO.
Setting this bit when the FIFO is empty has no effect. If at least two messages are pending in the
FIFO, the software has to release the output mailbox to access the next message.
Cleared by hardware when the output mailbox has
been released.
Bit 4 = FOVR FIFO Overrun
- Read/Clear
This bit is set by hardware when a new message
has been received and passed the filter while the
FIFO was full.
This bit is cleared by software.
Bit 3 = FULL FIFO Full
- Read/Clear
Set by hardware when three messages are stored
in the FIFO.
This bit is cleared by software.
CAN INTERRUPT ENABLE REGISTER (CIER)
All bits of this register are set and cleared by software.
Read / Write
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7
WKUIE
0
FOVIE1
FFIE1
FMPIE1 FOVIE0
FFIE0
FMPIE0
TMEIE
Bit 7 = WKUIE Wake-Up Interrupt Enable
0: No interrupt when WKUI is set.
1: Interrupt generated when WKUI bit is set.
Bit 6 = FOVIE1 FIFO Overrun Interrupt Enable
0: No interrupt when FOVR is set.
1: Interrupt generation when FOVR is set.
Bit 5 = FFIE1 FIFO Full Interrupt Enable
0: No interrupt when FULL bit is set.
1: Interrupt generated when FULL bit is set.
Bit 4 = FMPIE1 FIFO Message Pending Interrupt
Enable
0: No interrupt on FMP[1:0] bits transition from 00b
to 01b.
1: Interrupt generated on FMP[1:0] bits transition
from 00b to 01b.
Bit 3 = FOVIE0 FIFO Overrun Interrupt Enable
0: No interrupt when FOVR bit is set.
1: Interrupt generated when FOVR bit is set.
Bit 2 = FFIE0 FIFO Full Interrupt Enable
0: No interrupt when FULL bit is set.
1: Interrupt generated when FULL bit is set.
Bit 2 = Reserved. Forced to 0 by hardware.
Bit 1:0 = FMP[1:0] FIFO Message Pending
- Read
These bits indicate how many messages are
pending in the receive FIFO.
FMP is increased each time the hardware stores a
new message in to the FIFO. FMP is decreased
each time the software releases the output mailbox by setting the RFOM bit.
Bit 1 = FMPIE0 FIFO Message Pending Interrupt
Enable
0: No interrupt on FMP[1:0] bits transition from 00b
to 01b.
1: Interrupt generated on FMP[1:0] bits transition
from 00b to 01b.
Bit 0 = TMEIE Transmit Mailbox Empty Interrupt
Enable
0: No interrupt when RQCPx bit is set.
1: Interrupt generated when RQCPx bit is set.
Note: refer to Standard Interrupts Section.
345/426
9
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (bxCAN)
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (Cont’d)
CAN ERROR STATUS REGISTER (CESR)
Read / Write
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7
0
0
LEC2
LEC1
LEC0
0
BOFF
EPVF EWGF
Bit 7 = Reserved. Forced to 0 by hardware.
Bit 6:4 = LEC[2:0] Last Error Code
- Read/Set/Clear
This field holds a code which indicates the type of
the last error detected on the CAN bus. If a message has been transferred (reception or transmission) without error, this field will be cleared to ‘0’.
The code 7 is unused and may be written by the
CPU to check for update
Table 63. LEC Error Types
Code
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Error Type
No Error
Stuff Error
Form Error
Acknowledgment Error
Bit recessive Error
Bit dominant Error
CRC Error
Set by software
Bit 1 = EWGF Error Warning Flag
- Read
This bit is set by hardware when the warning limit
has been reached. Receive Error Counter or
Transmit Error Counter greater than 96.
CAN ERROR INTERRUPT ENABLE REGISTER
(CEIER)
All bits of this register are set and clear by software.
Read/Write
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7
ERRIE
0
0
0
LECIE
0
BOFIE EPVIE EWGIE
Bit 7 = ERRIE Error Interrupt Enable
0: No interrupt will be generated when an error
condition is pending in the CESR.
1: An interrupt will be generated when an error
condition is pending in the CESR.
Bit 6:5 = Reserved. Forced to 0 by hardware.
Bit 4 = LECIE Last Error Code Interrupt Enable
0: ERRI bit will not be set when the error code in
LEC[2:0] is set by hardware on error detection.
1: ERRI bit will be set when the error code in
LEC[2:0] is set by hardware on error detection.
Bit 3 = Reserved. Forced to 0 by hardware.
Bit 3 = Reserved. Forced to 0 by hardware.
Bit 2 = BOFF Bus-Off Flag
- Read
This bit is set by hardware when it enters the busoff state. The bus-off state is entered on TECR
overrun, TEC greater than 255, refer to Section
10.10.5.6 on page 337.
Bit 1 = EPVF Error Passive Flag
- Read
This bit is set by hardware when the Error Passive
limit has been reached (Receive Error Counter or
Transmit Error Counter greater than 127).
Bit 2 = BOFIE Bus-Off Interrupt Enable
0: ERRI bit will not be set when BOFF is set.
1: ERRI bit will be set when BOFF is set.
Bit 1 = EPVIE Error Passive Interrupt Enable
0: ERRI bit will not be set when EPVF is set.
1: ERRI bit will be set when EPVF is set.
Bit 0 = EWGIE Error Warning Interrupt Enable
0: ERRI bit will not be set when EWGF is set.
1: ERRI bit will be set when EWGF is set.
Note: refer to Standard Interrupts Section.
346/426
9
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (bxCAN)
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (Cont’d)
TRANSMIT ERROR COUNTER REG. (TECR)
Read Only
Reset Value: 00h
7
0
CAN DIAGNOSIS REGISTER (CDGR)
All bits of this register are set and clear by software.
Read / Write
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7
TEC7
TEC6
TEC5
TEC4
TEC3
TEC2
TEC1
0
TEC[7:0] is the least significant byte of the 9-bit
Transmit Error Counter implementing part of the
fault confinement mechanism of the CAN protocol.
RECEIVE ERROR COUNTER REG. (RECR)
Page: 00h — Read Only
Reset Value: 00h
7
REC7
0
TEC0
0
0
0
RX
SAMP
SILM
LBKM
Bit 3 = RX CAN Rx Signal
- Read
Monitors the actual value of the CAN_RX Pin.
Bit 2 = SAMP Last Sample Point
- Read
The value of the last sample point.
0
REC6
REC5
REC4
REC3
REC2
REC1
REC0
REC[7:0] is the Receive Error Counter implementing part of the fault confinement mechanism of the
CAN protocol. In case of an error during reception,
this counter is incremented by 1 or by 8 depending
on the error condition as defined by the CAN standard. After every successful reception the counter is
decremented by 1 or reset to 120 if its value was
higher than 128. When the counter value exceeds
127, the CAN controller enters the error passive
state.
Bit 1 = SILM Silent Mode
- Read/Set/Clear
0: Normal operation
1: Silent Mode
Bit 0 = LBKM Loop Back Mode
- Read/Set/Clear
0: Loop Back Mode disabled
1: Loop Back Mode enabled
347/426
9
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (bxCAN)
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (Cont’d)
CAN BIT TIMING REGISTER 0 (CBTR0)
This register can only be accessed by the software
when the CAN hardware is in configuration mode.
Read / Write
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7
0
CAN FILTER PAGE SELECT REGISTER
(CFPSR)
All bits of this register are set and cleared by software.
Read / Write
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7
SJW1
SJW0
BRP5
BRP4
BRP3
BRP2
BRP1
0
Bit 7:6 SJW[1:0] Resynchronization Jump Width
These bits define the maximum number of time
quanta the CAN hardware is allowed to lengthen
or shorten a bit to perform the resynchronization.
Bit 5:0 BRP[5:0] Baud Rate Prescaler
These bits define the length of a time quantum.
tq = (BRP+1)/fsys
For more information on bit timing, please refer to
Section 10.10.5.7 Bit Timing.
CAN BIT TIMING REGISTER 1 (CBTR1)
Read / Write
Reset Value: 0001 0011 (23h)
7
0
0
TS22
TS21
TS20
TS13
TS12
TS11
TS10
Bit 7 = Reserved. Forced to 0 by hardware.
Bit 6:4 TS2[2:0] Time Segment 2
These bits define the number of time quanta in
Time Segment 2.
tBS2 = tCAN x (TS2[2:0] + 1),
Bit 3:0 TS1[3:0] Time Segment 1
These bits define the number of time quanta in
Time Segment 1
tBS1 = tCAN x (TS1[3:0] + 1)
.For more information on bit timing, please refer to
Section 10.10.5.7 Bit Timing.
348/426
9
0
BRP0
0
0
0
0
FPS2
FPS1
FPS0
Bit 7:3 = Reserved. Forced to 0 by hardware.
Bit 2:0 = FPS[2:0] Filter Page Select
- Read/Write
This register contains the filter page number available in page 54.
Table 64. Filter Page Selection
FPS[2:0]
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Filter Page Selected in Page 54
Acceptance Filter 0:1
Acceptance Filter 2:3
Acceptance Filter 4:5
Acceptance Filter 6:7
Filter Configuration
Filter Configuration
Filter Configuration
Filter Configuration
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (bxCAN)
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (Cont’d)
10.10.8.2 Mailbox Registers
This chapter describes the registers of the transmit
and receive mailboxes. Refer to Section 10.10.5.5
Message Storage for detailed register mapping.
Transmit and receive mailboxes have the same
registers except:
– MCSR register in a transmit mailbox is replaced
by MFMI register in a receive mailbox.
– A receive mailbox is always write protected.
– A transmit mailbox is write enable only while
empty, corresponding TME bit in the CTPR register set.
MAILBOX CONTROL STATUS REGISTER
(MCSR)
Read / Write
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7
0
0
0
TERR
ALST
Bit 3 = TXOK Transmission OK
- Read/Clear
The hardware updates this bit after each transmission attempt.
0: The previous transmission failed
1: The previous transmission was successful
Note: This bit has the same value as the corresponding TXOKx bit in the CTSR register.
Bit 2 = RQCP Request Completed
- Read/Clear
Set by hardware when the last request (transmit or
abort) has been performed.
Cleared by software writing a “1” or by hardware
on transmission request.
Note: This bit has the same value as the corresponding RQCPx bit of the CTSR register.
Clearing this bit clears all the status bits (TXOK, ALST and TERR) in the MCSR register and
the RQCP and TXOK bits in the CTSR register.
TXOK RQCP ABRQ TXRQ
Bit 7:6 = Reserved. Forced to 0 by hardware.
Bit 5 = TERR Transmission Error
- Read/Clear
This bit is updated by hardware after each transmission attempt.
0: The previous transmission was successful
1: The previous transmission failed due to an error
Bit 4 = ALST Arbitration Lost
- Read/Clear
This bit is updated by hardware after each transmission attempt.
0: The previous transmission was successful
1: The previous transmission failed due to an arbitration lost
Bit 1 = ABRQ Abort Request for Mailbox
- Read/Set
Set by software to abort the transmission request
for the corresponding mailbox.
Cleared by hardware when the mailbox becomes
empty.
Setting this bit has no effect when the mailbox is
not pending for transmission.
Bit 0 = TXRQ Transmit Mailbox Request
- Read/Set
Set by software to request the transmission for the
corresponding mailbox.
Cleared by hardware when the mailbox becomes
empty.
Note: This register is implemented only in transmit
mailboxes. In receive mailboxes, the MFMI register is mapped at this location.
349/426
9
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (bxCAN)
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (Cont’d)
MAILBOX FILTER MATCH INDEX (MFMI)
This register is read only.
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7
MIDR1
7
STID5
FMI7
0
0
FMI6
FMI5
FMI4
FMI3
FMI2
FMI1
STID4
STID3
STID2
STID1
STID0
EXID17 EXID16
FMI0
Bit 7:0 = FMI[7:0] Filter Match Index
This register contains the index of the filter the
message stored in the mailbox passed through.
For more details on identifier filtering please refer
to Section 10.10.5.4 - Filter Match Index paragraph.
Note: This register is implemented only in receive
mailboxes. In transmit mailboxes, the MCSR register is mapped at this location.
Bit 7:2 = STID[5:0] Standard Identifier
6 least significant bits of the standard part of the
identifier.
Bit 1:0 = EXID[17:16] Extended Identifier
2 most significant bits of the extended part of the
identifier.
MIDR2
MAILBOX IDENTIFIER REGISTERS
(MIDR[3:0])
Read / Write
Reset Value: xxxx xxxx (xxh)
MIDR0
7
EXID15 EXID14 EXID13 EXID12 EXID11 EXID10
7
0
0
IDE
RTR
STID10
STID9
STID8
STID7
STID6
Bit 7 = Reserved. Forced to 0 by hardware.
Bit 5 = RTR Remote Transmission Request
0: Data frame
1: Remote frame
Bit 4:0 = STID[10:6] Standard Identifier
5 most significant bits of the standard part of the
identifier.
9
EXID9
EXID8
Bit 7:0 = EXID[15:8] Extended Identifier
Bit 15 to 8 of the extended part of the identifier.
MIDR3
7
EXID7
Bit 6 = IDE Extended Identifier
This bit defines the identifier type of message in
the mailbox.
0: Standard identifier.
1: Extended identifier.
350/426
0
0
EXID6
EXID5
EXID4
EXID3
EXID2
EXID1
EXID0
Bit 7:1 = EXID[6:0] Extended Identifier
6 least significant bits of the extended part of the
identifier.
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (bxCAN)
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (Cont’d)
MAILBOX DATA LENGTH CONTROL REGISTER (MDLC)
All bits of this register is write protected when the
mailbox is not in empty state.
Read / Write
Reset Value: xxxx xxxx (xxh)
7
TGT
0
0
0
0
DLC3
DLC2
DLC1
DLC0
Bit 7 = TGT Transmit Global Time
This bit is active only when the hardware is in the
Time Trigger Communication mode, TTCM bit of
the CCR register is set.
0: MTSRH and MTSRL registers are not sent.
1: MTSRH and MTSRL registers are sent in the
last two data bytes of the message.
MAILBOX TIME STAMP LOW REGISTER
(MTSLR)
Read / Write
Reset Value: xxxx xxxx (xxh)
7
TIME7
0
TIME6
TIME5
TIME4
TIME3
TIME2
TIME1
TIME0
Bit 7:0 = TIME[7:0] Message Time Stamp Low
This fields contains the low byte of the 16-bit timer
value captured at the SOF detection.
MAILBOX TIME STAMP HIGH REGISTER
(MTSHR)
Read / Write
Reset Value: xxxx xxxx (xxh)
7
0
6:4 = Reserved. Forced to 0 by hardware.
TIME15 TIME14 TIME13 TIME12 TIME11 TIME10
Bit 3:0 = DLC[3:0] Data Length Code
This field defines the number of data bytes a data
frame contains or a remote frame request.
TIME9
TIME8
Bit 7:0 = TIME[15:8] Message Time Stamp High
This field contains the high byte of the 16-bit timer
value captured at the SOF detection.
MAILBOX DATA REGISTERS (MDAR[7:0])
All bits of this register are write protected when the
mailbox is not in empty state.
Read / Write
Reset Value: xxxx xxxx (xxh)
7
DATA7
0
DATA6
DATA5
DATA4
DATA3
DATA2
DATA1
DATA0
Bit 7:0 = DATA[7:0] Data
A data byte of the message. A message can contain from 0 to 8 data bytes.
351/426
9
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (bxCAN)
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (Cont’d)
10.10.8.3 CAN Filter Registers
CAN FILTER CONFIGURATION REG.0 (CFCR0)
All bits of this register are set and cleared by software.
Read / Write
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7
CAN FILTER CONFIGURATION REG.1 (CFCR1)
All bits of this register are set and cleared by software.
Read / Write
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7
0
0
FFA3 FSC31 FSC30 FACT3 FFA2 FSC21 FSC20 FACT2
FFA1 FSC11 FSC10 FACT1 FFA0 FSC01 FSC00 FACT0
Note: To modify the FFAx and FSCx bits, the bxCAN must be in INIT mode.
Bit 7 = FFA1 Filter FIFO Assignment for Filter 1
The message passing through this filter will be
stored in the specified FIFO.
0: Filter assigned to FIFO 0
1: Filter assigned to FIFO 1
Bit 6:5 = FSC1[1:0] Filter Scale Configuration
These bits define the scale configuration of Filter
1.
Bit 4 = FACT1 Filter Active
The software sets this bit to activate Filter 1. To
modify the Filter 1 registers (CF1R[7:0]), the
FACT1 bit must be cleared.
0: Filter 1 is not active
1: Filter 1 is active
Bit 3 = FFA0 Filter FIFO Assignment for Filter 0
The message passing through this filter will be
stored in the specified FIFO.
0: Filter assigned to FIFO 0
1: Filter assigned to FIFO 1
Bit 2:1 = FSC0[1:0] Filter Scale Configuration
These bits define the scale configuration of Filter
0.
Bit 0 = FACT0 Filter Active
The software sets this bit to activate Filter 0. To
modify the Filter 0 registers (CF0R[0:7]), the
FACT0 bit must be cleared.
0: Filter 0 is not active
1: Filter 0 is active
352/426
9
Bit 7 = FFA3 Filter FIFO Assignment for Filter 3
The message passing through this filter will be
stored in the specified FIFO.
0: Filter assigned to FIFO 0
1: Filter assigned to FIFO 1
Bit 6:5 = FSC3[1:0] Filter Scale Configuration
These bits define the scale configuration of Filter
3.
Bit 4 = FACT3 Filter Active
The software sets this bit to activate filter 3. To
modify the Filter 3 registers (CF3R[0:7]) the
FACT3 bit must be cleared.
0: Filter 3 is not active
1: Filter 3 is active
Bit 3 = FFA2 Filter FIFO Assignment for Filter 2
The message passing through this filter will be
stored in the specified FIFO.
0: Filter assigned to FIFO 0
1: Filter assigned to FIFO 1
Bit 2:1 = FSC2[1:0] Filter Scale Configuration
These bits define the scale configuration of Filter
2.
Bit 0 = FACT2 Filter Active
The software sets this bit to activate Filter 2. To
modify the Filter 2 registers (CF2R[0:7]), the
FACT2 bit must be cleared.
0: Filter 2 is not active
1: Filter 2 is active
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (bxCAN)
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (Cont’d)
CAN FILTER CONFIGURATION REG.2 (CFCR2)
All bits of this register are set and cleared by software.
Read / Write
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7
0
CAN FILTER CONFIGURATION REG.3 (CFCR3)
All bits of this register are set and cleared by software.
Read / Write
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7
0
FFA5 FSC51 FSC50 FACT5 FFA4 FSC41 FSC40 FACT4
FFA7 FSC71 FSC70 FACT7 FFA6 FSC61 FSC60 FACT6
Note: To modify FFAx and FSCx bits bxCAN must
be in INIT mode.
Bit 7 = FFA5 Filter FIFO Assignment for Filter 5
The message passing through this filter will be
stored in the specified FIFO.
0: Filter assigned to FIFO 0
1: Filter assigned to FIFO 1
Bit 6:5 = FSC5[1:0] Filter Scale Configuration
These bits define the scale configuration of Filter
5.
Bit 4 = FACT5 Filter Active
The software sets this bit to activate Filter 5. To
modify the filter 5 registers (CF5R[7:0]), the
FACT5 bit must be cleared.
0: Filter 5 is not active
1: Filter 5 is active
Bit 3 = FFA4 Filter FIFO Assignment for Filter 4
The message passing through this filter will be
stored in the specified FIFO.
0: Filter assigned to FIFO 0
1: Filter assigned to FIFO 1
Bit 2:1 = FSC4[1:0] Filter Scale Configuration
These bits define the scale configuration of Filter
4.
Bit 0 = FACT4 Filter Active
The software sets this bit to activate filter 4. To
modify the Filter 4 registers (CF4R[7:0]), the
FACT4 bit must be cleared).
0: Filter 4 is not active
1: Filter 4 is active
Bit 7 = FFA7 Filter FIFO Assignment for Filter 7
The message passing through this filter will be
stored in the specified FIFO.
0: Filter assigned to FIFO 0
1: Filter assigned to FIFO 1
Bit 6:5 = FSC7[1:0] Filter Scale Configuration
These bits define the scale configuration of Filter
7.
Bit 4 = FACT7 Filter Active
The software sets this bit to activate Filter 7. To
modify the Filter 7 registers (CF7R[7:0]), the
FACT7 bit must be cleared.
0: Filter 7 is not active.
1: Filter 7 is active.
Bit 3 = FFA6 Filter FIFO Assignment for Filter 6
This bit allows the software to define whether the
message passing through this filter will be assigned to the receive FIFO0 or FIFO1.
0: Filter assigned to FIFO 0
1: Filter assigned to FIFO 1
Bit 2:1 = FSC6[1:0] Filter Scale Configuration
These bits define the scale configuration of Filter
6.
Bit 0 = FACT6 Filter Active
The software sets this bit to activate Filter 6. To
modify the Filter 6 registers (CF6R[7:0]), the
FACT6 bit must be cleared.
0: Filter 6 is not active
1: Filter 6 is active
353/426
9
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (bxCAN)
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (Cont’d)
CAN FILTER MODE REG.1 (CFMR1)
All bits of this register are set and cleared by software.
Read / Write
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7
FMH7
0
FML7
FMH6
FML6
FMH5
FML5
FMH4
FML4
Note: Please refer to Figure 149.Filter Bank Scale
Configuration - Register Organisation
Bit 7 = FMH7 Filter Mode High
Mode of the high registers of Filter 7.
0: High registers are in mask mode.
1: High registers are in identifier list mode.
Bit 6 = FML7 Filter Mode Low
Mode of the low registers of Filter 7.
0: Low registers are in mask mode
1: Low registers are in identifier list mode
Bit 5 = FMH6 Filter Mode High
Mode of the high registers of Filter 6.
0: High registers are in mask mode
1: High registers are in identifier list mode
Bit 4 = FML6 Filter Mode Low
Mode of the low registers of Filter 6.
0: Low registers are in mask mode
1: Low registers are in identifier list mode
Bit 3 = FMH5 Filter Mode High
Mode of the high registers of filter 5.
0: High registers are in mask mode
1: High registers are in identifier list mode
Bit 2 = FML5 Filter Mode Low
Mode of the low registers of Filter 5.
0: Low registers are in mask mode
1: Low registers are in identifier list mode.
354/426
9
Bit 1 = FMH4 Filter Mode High
Mode of the high registers of filter 4.
0: High registers are in mask mode.
1: High registers are in identifier list mode.
Bit 0 = FML4 Filter Mode Low
Mode of the low registers of filter 4.
0: Low registers are in mask mode.
1: Low registers are in identifier list mode.
CAN FILTER MODE REG.0 (CFMR0)
All bits of this register are set and cleared by software.
Read / Write
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)
7
FMH3
0
FML3
FMH2
FML2
FMH1
FML1
FMH0
Bit 7 = FMH3 Filter Mode High
Mode of the high registers of Filter 3.
0: High registers are in mask mode
1: High registers are in identifier list mode
Bit 6 = FML3 Filter Mode Low
Mode of the low registers of Filter 3.
0: Low registers are in mask mode
1: Low registers are in identifier list mode
Bit 5 = FMH2 Filter Mode High
Mode of the high registers of Filter 2.
0: High registers are in mask mode
1: High registers are in identifier list mode
Bit 4 = FML2 Filter Mode Low
Mode of the low registers of Filter 2.
0: Low registers are in mask mode
1: Low registers are in identifier list mode
Bit 3 = FMH1 Filter Mode High
Mode of the high registers of Filter 1.
0: High registers are in mask mode
1: High registers are in identifier list mode
FML0
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (bxCAN)
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (Cont’d)
Bit 2 = FML1 Filter Mode Low
Mode of the low registers of filter 1.
0: Low registers are in mask mode
1: Low registers are in identifier list mode
FILTER x REGISTER[7:0] (CFxR[7:0])
Read / Write
Reset Value: xxxx xxxx (xxh)
7
Bit 1 = FMH0 Filter Mode High
Mode of the high registers of filter 0.
0: High registers are in mask mode
1: High registers are in identifier list mode
Bit 0 = FML0 Filter Mode Low
Mode of the low registers of filter 0.
0: Low registers are in mask mode
1: Low registers are in identifier list mode
FB7
0
FB6
FB5
FB4
FB3
FB2
FB1
FB0
In all configurations:
Bit 7:0 = FB[7:0] Filter Bits
Identifier
Each bit of the register specifies the level of the
corresponding bit of the expected identifier.
0: Dominant bit is expected
1: Recessive bit is expected
Mask
Each bit of the register specifies whether the bit of
the associated identifier register must match with
the corresponding bit of the expected identifier or
not.
0: Don’t care, the bit is not used for the comparison
1: Must match, the bit of the incoming identifier
must have the same level has specified in the
corresponding identifier register of the filter.
Note: Each filter x is composed of 8 registers,
CFxR[7:0]. Depending on the scale and mode
configuration of the filter the function of each register can differ. For the filter mapping, functions
description and mask registers association, refer
to Section 10.10.5.4Identifier Filtering.
A Mask/Identifier register in mask mode has the
same bit mapping as in identifier list mode.
Note: To modify these registers, the corresponding FACT bit in the CFCR register must be
cleared.
355/426
9
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (bxCAN)
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (Cont’d)
10.10.8.4 Page Mapping for CAN 0 / CAN 1
PAGE 48 / 36
PAGE 49 / 37
PAGE 50 / 38
240
CMCR
MFMI
MFMI
MCSR
MCSR
241
CMSR
MDLC
MDLC
MDLC
MDLC
242
CTSR
MIDR0
MIDR0
MIDR0
MIDR0
243
CTPR
MIDR1
MIDR1
MIDR1
MIDR1
244
CRFR0
MIDR2
MIDR2
MIDR2
MIDR2
245
CRFR1
MIDR3
MIDR3
MIDR3
MIDR3
246
CIER
MDAR0
MDAR0
MDAR0
MDAR0
247
CESR
MDAR1
MDAR1
MDAR1
MDAR1
248
CEIER
MDAR2
MDAR2
MDAR2
MDAR2
249
TEC
MDAR3
MDAR3
MDAR3
MDAR3
250
REC
MDAR4
MDAR4
MDAR4
MDAR4
251
CDGR
MDAR5
MDAR5
MDAR5
MDAR5
252
CBTR0
MDAR6
MDAR6
MDAR6
MDAR6
253
CBTR1
MDAR7
MDAR7
MDAR7
MDAR7
254
Reserved
MTSLR
MTSLR
MTSLR
MTSLR
255
CFPSR
MTSHR
MTSHR
MTSHR
MTSHR
Control/Status
Receive FIFO 0
Receive FIFO 1
Tx Mailbox 0
Tx Mailbox 1
PAGE 53 / 41
PAGE 54/4 42/4
PAGE 54/0 42/0
PAGE 54/1 42/1
PAGE 54/2 42/2
240
MCSR
CFMR0
CF0R0
CF2R0
CF4R0
241
MDLC
CFMR1
CF0R1
CF2R1
CF4R1
242
MIDR0
CFCR0
CF0R2
CF2R2
CF4R2
243
MIDR1
CFCR1
CF0R3
CF2R3
CF4R3
244
MIDR2
CFCR2
CF0R4
CF2R4
CF4R4
245
MIDR3
CFCR3
CF0R5
CF2R5
CF4R5
246
MDAR0
Reserved
CF0R6
CF2R6
CF4R6
247
MDAR1
Reserved
CF0R7
CF2R7
CF4R7
248
MDAR2
Reserved
CF1R0
CF3R0
CF5R0
249
MDAR3
Reserved
CF1R1
CF3R1
CF5R1
250
MDAR4
Reserved
CF1R2
CF3R2
CF5R2
251
MDAR5
Reserved
CF1R3
CF3R3
CF5R3
252
MDAR6
Reserved
CF1R4
CF3R4
CF5R4
253
MDAR7
Reserved
CF1R5
CF3R5
CF5R5
254
MTSLR
Reserved
CF1R6
CF3R6
CF5R6
255
MTSHR
Reserved
CF1R7
CF3R7
CF5R7
Tx Mailbox 2
Filter Configuration
Acceptance Filter 0:1
Acceptance Filter 2:3
Acceptance Filter 4:5
356/426
9
PAGE 51 / 39
PAGE 52 / 40
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (bxCAN)
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (Cont’d)
Page Mapping for CAN0 /CAN1 (Cont’d)
PAGE 54/3 42/3
240
CF6R0
241
CF6R1
242
CF6R2
243
CF6R3
244
CF6R4
245
CF6R5
246
CF6R6
247
CF6R7
248
CF7R0
249
CF7R1
250
CF7R2
251
CF7R3
252
CF7R4
253
CF7R5
254
CF7R6
255
CF7R7
Acceptance Filter 6:7
357/426
9
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (bxCAN)
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (Cont’d)
Table 65. bxCAN Control & Status Page - Register Map and Reset Values
Address
(Hex.)
F0h
F1h
F2h
F3h
F4h
F5h
F6h
F7h
F8h
F9h
FAh
FBh
FCh
FDh
FEh
FFh
358/426
9
Register
Name
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CMCR
TTCM
ABOM
AWUM
NART
RFLM
TXFP
SLEEP
INRQ
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
REC
TRAN
WKUI
ERRI
SLAK
INAK
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
CMSR
Reset Value
TXOK2
TXOK1
TXOK0
RQCP2
RQCP1
RQCP0
Reset Value
CTSR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
CTPR
LOW2
LOW1
LOW0
TME2
TME1
TME0
CODE1
CODE0
Reset Value
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
RFOM
FOVR
FULL
FMP1
FMP0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
RFOM
FOVR
FULL
FMP1
FMP0
CRFR0
Reset Value
CRFR1
0
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
CIER
WKUIE
FOVIE1
FFIE1
FMPIE1
FOVIE0
FFIE0
FMPIE0
TMEIE
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
LEC2
LEC1
LEC0
0
0
0
CESR
Reset Value
0
CEIER
ERRIE
Reset Value
0
0
0
BOFF
EPVF
EWGF
0
0
0
0
LECIE
BOFIE
EPVIE
EWGIE
0
0
0
0
0
TECR
TEC7
TEC6
TEC5
TEC4
TEC3
TEC2
TEC1
TEC0
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
RECR
REC7
REC6
REC5
REC4
REC3
REC2
REC1
REC0
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
RX
SAMP
SILM
LBKM
CDGR
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
CBTR0
SJW1
SJW0
BRP5
BRP4
BRP3
BRP2
BRP1
BRP0
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
TS22
TS21
TS20
TS13
TS12
TS11
TS10
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
FPS2
FPS1
FPS0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
CBTR1
Reset Value
Reserved
CFPSR
Reset Value
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (bxCAN)
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (Cont’d)
Table 66. bxCAN Mailbox Pages - Register Map and Reset Values
Address
(Hex.)
Register
Name
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
F0h
MFMI
FMI7
FMI6
FMI5
FMI4
FMI3
FMI2
FMI1
FMI0
Receive
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
TERR
ALST
TXOK
RQCP
ABRQ
TXRQ
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
DLC3
DLC2
DLC1
DLC0
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
IDE
RTR
STID10
STID9
STID8
STID7
STID6
F0h
MCSR
Transmit
Reset Value
0
MDLC
TGT
Reset Value
x
F1h
F2h
F3h
F4h
F5h
F6h:FDh
FEh
FFh
MIDR0
Reset Value
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
MIDR1
STID5
STID4
STID3
STID2
STID1
STID0
EXID17
EXID16
Reset Value
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
MIDR2
EXID15
EXID14
EXID13
EXID12
EXID11
EXID10
EXID9
EXID8
Reset Value
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
MIDR3
EXID7
EXID6
EXID5
EXID4
EXID3
EXID2
EXID1
EXID0
Reset Value
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
MDAR[0:7]
MDAR7
MDAR6
MDAR5
MDAR4
MDAR3
MDAR2
MDAR1
MDAR0
Reset Value
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
MTSLR
TIME7
TIME6
TIME5
TIME4
TIME3
TIME2
TIME1
TIME0
Reset Value
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
MTSHR
TIME15
TIME14
TIME13
TIME12
TIME11
TIME10
TIME9
TIME8
Reset Value
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Table 67. bxCAN Filter Configuration Page - Register Map and Reset Values
Address
(Hex.)
F0h
F1h
F2h
F3h
F4h
F5h
Register
Name
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CFMR0
FMH3
FML3
FMH2
FML2
FMH1
FML1
FMH0
FML0
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
CFMR1
FMH7
FML7
FMH6
FML6
FMH5
FML5
FMH4
FML4
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
CFCR0
FFA1
FSC11
FSC10
FACT1
FFA0
FSC01
FSC00
FACT0
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
CFCR1
FFA3
FSC31
FSC30
FACT3
FFA2
FSC21
FSC20
FACT2
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
CFCR2
FFA5
FSC51
FSC50
FACT5
FFA4
FSC41
FSC40
FACT4
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
CFCR3
FFA7
FSC71
FSC70
FACT7
FFA6
FSC61
FSC60
FACT6
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
359/426
9
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (bxCAN)
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (Cont’d)
10.10.9 IMPORTANT NOTES ON CAN
Refer to Section 13.1.4 on page 412 and Section
13.1.6 on page 413.
360/426
9
10-BIT ANALOG TO DIGITAL CONVERTER (ADC)
10.11 10-BIT ANALOG TO DIGITAL CONVERTER (ADC)
10.11.1 Main Characteristics
■ 10-bit Resolution
■ Monotonicity: Guaranteed
■ No missing codes: Guaranteed
■ 3-bit INTCLK/2 Frequency Prescaler
■ Internal/External Trigger availability
■ Continuous/Single Modes
■ Autoscan Mode
■ Power Down Mode
■ 16 10-bit data registers (two per channel)
■ Two analog watchdogs selectable on adjacent
channels
The conversion time depends on the INTCLK frequency and the prescaler factor stored in the
PR[2:0] bits of the CLR2 register (R253-page 63)).
AVDD and AVSS are the high and low level reference voltage pins. Up to 16 multiplexed Analog Inputs are available depending on the specific device type. With the AUTOSCAN feature, a group of
signals can be converted sequentially by simply
programming the starting address of the first analog channel to be converted.
There are two Analog Watchdogs used for the
continuous hardware monitoring of two consecutive input channels selectable by means of the
CC[3:0] bits in the CLR1 register (R252-page 63).
An Interrupt request is generated whenever the
converted value of either of these two analog inputs exceeds the upper or lower programmed
threshold values.
10.11.2 Introduction
The Analog to Digital Converter (ADC) consists of
an input multiplex channel selector feeding a successive approximation converter.
Figure 155. ADC Block Diagram
INT. VECTOR POINTER
INT. CONTROL REGISTER
INTERRUPT UNIT
COMPARE LOGIC
INTERNAL
TRIGGER
(from MFT0)
EXTERNAL
TRIGGER
(EXTRG)
CONTROL
LOGIC
DATA REGISTER H/L15
DATA REGISTER H/L14
DATA REGISTER H/L13
DATA REGISTER H/L12
DATA REGISTER H/L11
DATA REGISTER H/L10
DATA REGISTER H/L 9
DATA REGISTER H/L 8
DATA REGISTER H/L 7
DATA REGISTER H/L 6
DATA REGISTER H/L 5
DATA REGISTER H/L 4
DATA REGISTER H/L 3
DATA REGISTER H/L 2
DATA REGISTER H/L 1
DATA REGISTER H/L 0
COMPARE RESULT REGISTER
THRESHOLD H/L REGISTER BU
THRESHOLD H/L REGISTER BL
THRESHOLD H/L REGISTER AH
THRESHOLD H/L REGISTER AL
CONVERSION
RESULT
SUCCESSIVE
APPROXIMATION
ANALOG TO DIGITAL
10 bit
CONVERTER
ANALOG
MUX
CKAD
AIN 15
AIN 14
AIN 13
AIN 12
AIN 11
AIN 10
AIN 9
AIN 8
AIN 7
AIN 6
AIN 5
AIN 4
AIN 3
AIN 2
AIN 1
AIN 0
CK PRESCALER
ANALOG
SECTION
CONTROL REG.2
(CLR2)
CONTROL REG.1
(CLR1)
DIVIDER by 2
AUTOSCAN LOGIC
INTCLK
361/426
9
10-BIT ANALOG TO DIGITAL CONVERTER (ADC)
ANALOG TO DIGITAL CONVERTER (Cont’d)
Single and continuous conversion modes are
available. These two modes may be triggered by
an external signal or, internally, by the Multifunction Timer MFT0.
A Power-Down programmable bit allows the ADC
to be set in low-power idle mode.
The reference voltage AVDD can be switched off
when the ADC is in power down mode.
The ADC Interrupt Unit provides two maskable
channels (Analog Watchdog and End of Conversion) with hardware fixed priority, and up to 7 programmable priority levels.
Conversion Time
The maximum CKAD frequency allowable for the
analog part is 4 MHz. This is provided by a programmable prescaler that divides the ST9 system
clock (INTCLK) and a divider by 2. The user must
program the PR[2:0] bits in Control Logic Register
2 (CLR2, R253 - Page 63) to select the right prescaler dividing factor to obtain the correct clock frequency for the analog part. Table 69 shows the
possible prescaling values and the related sampling and conversion times. Generally, the formulas for the sampling and conversion times are:
TSample = (TINTCLK x 2) x (PR[2:0] x 8)
TConv = (TINTCLK x 2) x (PR[2:0] x 28)
The user may need to increase the conversion
time if a resistor is added to the input pin, for instance, as an overvoltage protection. In this case,
the ADC needs a longer sampling time to work
correctly.
CAUTION: ADC INPUT PIN CONFIGURATION
The input Analog channel is selected by using the
I/O pin Alternate Function setting (PxC2, PxC1,
PxC0 = 1,1,1) as described in the I/O ports section. The I/O configuration of the port connected to
the ADC converter is modified in order to prevent
the analog voltage present on the I/O pin from
causing high power dissipation across the input
buffer. Analog channels should be maintained in
Alternate Function configuration for this reason.
10.11.3 Functional Description
10.11.3.1 Operating Modes
Two operating modes are available: Continuous
Mode and Single Mode. To enter one of these
modes it is necessary to program the CONT bit of
the Control Logic Register2 (CLR2, R253page63). The Continuous Mode is selected when
CONT is set, while Single Mode is selected when
CONT is reset.
362/426
9
Both modes operate in AUTOSCAN configuration,
allowing sequential conversion of the input channels. The number of analog inputs to be converted
may be set by software, by setting the number of
the first channel to be converted into Control Register 1 (SC[3:0] bits). As each conversion is completed, the channel number is automatically incremented, up to channel 15. For example, if SC[3:0]
are set to 0011, the conversion will proceed from
channel 3 to channel 15, whereas, if SC[3:0] are
set to 1111, only channel 15 will be converted.
When the ST bit of Control Logic Register 2 is set,
either by software or by hardware (by an internal
or external synchronisation trigger signal), the analog inputs are sequentially converted (from the
first selected channel up to channel 15) and the results are stored in the relevant pair of Data Registers.
In Single Mode (CONT = “0”), the ST bit is reset
by hardware following conversion of channel 15;
an End of Conversion (ECV) interrupt request is issued and the ADC waits for a new start event.
In Continuous Mode (CONT = “1”), a continuous
conversion flow is initiated by the start event.
When conversion of channel 15 is complete,
conversion of channel 's' is initiated (where 's' is
specified by the setting of the SC[3:0] bits); this will
continue until the ST bit is reset by software. In all
cases, an ECV interrupt is issued each time
channel 15 conversion ends.
When channel 'i' is converted ('s' <'i' <15), the related pair of Data Registers is reloaded with the
new conversion result and the previous value is
lost. The End of Conversion (ECV) interrupt service routine can be used to save the current values
before a new conversion sequence (so as to create signal sample tables in the Register File or in
Memory).
10.11.3.2 Triggering and Synchronisation
In both modes, conversion may be triggered by internal or external conditions; externally this may
be tied to EXTRG, as an Alternate Function input
on an I/O port pin, and internally, it may be tied to
INTRG, generated by a Multifunction Timer peripheral. Both external and internal events can be
separately masked by programming the EXTG/
INTG bits of the Control Logic Register (CLR). The
events are internally ORed, thus avoiding potential
hardware conflicts. However, the correct procedure is to enable only one alternate synchronisation condition at any time.
10-BIT ANALOG TO DIGITAL CONVERTER (ADC)
ANALOG TO DIGITAL CONVERTER (Cont’d)
The effect of either of these synchronisation
modes is to set the ST bit by hardware. This bit is
reset, in Single Mode only, at the end of each
group of conversions. In Continuous Mode, all trigger pulses after the first are ignored.
The synchronisation sources must be at a logic
low level for at least the duration of two INTCLK
cycles and, in Single Mode, the period between
trigger pulses must be greater than the total time
required for a group of conversions. If a trigger occurs when the ST bit is still set, i.e. when a conversion is still in progress, it will be ignored.
Note: The external trigger will set the CLR2.ST bit
even if the CLR2.POW is reset.
10.11.3.3 Analog Watchdog
Two internal Analog Watchdogs are available for
highly flexible automatic threshold monitoring of
external analog signal levels. Depending on the
value of the CC[3:0] bits in Control Logic Register1
these two watchdog are mapped onto 2 of the 16
available adjacent channels, allowing the user to
set the channel to be monitored. Refer to Table 68
to see the possible choices for this feature.
Analog watchdog channels (named as A and B)
monitor an acceptable voltage level window for the
converted analog inputs. The external voltages
applied to inputs A and B are considered normal
while they remain below their respective Upper
thresholds, and above or at their respective Lower
thresholds.
When the external signal voltage level is greater
than, or equal to, the upper programmed voltage
limit, or when it is less than the lower programmed
voltage limit, a maskable interrupt request is generated and the Compare Results Register is updated in order to flag the threshold (Upper or Lower) and channel (A or B) responsible for the interFigure 157. ADC Trigger Source
rupt. The four threshold voltages are user programmable in dedicated registers pairs (R244 to
R251, page 63). Only the 4 MSBs of the Compare
Results Register are used as flags, each of the
four MSBs being associated with a threshold condition.
Following a reset, these flags are reset. During
normal ADC operation, the CRR bits are set, in order to flag an out of range condition and are automatically reset by hardware after a software reset
of the Analog Watchdog Request flag in the ICR
Register.
10.11.3.4 Power Down Mode
Before enabling an ADC conversion, the POW bit
of the Control Logic Register must be set; this
must be done at least 10 µs before the first conversion start, in order to correctly bias the analog section of the converter circuitry.
When the ADC is not required, the POW bit may
be reset in order to reduce the total power consumption. This is the reset configuration, and this
state is also selected automatically when the ST9
is placed in Halt Mode (following the execution of
the halt instruction).
Figure 156. Analog Watchdog Function
Analog Voltage
Upper Threshold
Normal Area
(Window Guarded)
Lower Threshold
Ext. Trigger Enable
ADC Trigger
EXTRG
Int. Trigger Enable
On-Chip Event
MFT0
Start group of conversions
Continuous or Single mode
Software Trigger
363/426
9
10-BIT ANALOG TO DIGITAL CONVERTER (ADC)
ANALOG TO DIGITAL CONVERTER (Cont’d)
Figure 158. Application Example: Analog Watchdog used in Motor Speed Control
10.11.4 Interrupts
The ADC provides two interrupt sources:
– End of Conversion
– Analog Watchdog Request
The ADC Interrupt Vector Register (IVR, R255
Page 63) provides hardware generated flags
which indicate the interrupt source, thus allowing
the automatic selection of the correct interrupt
service routine.
Analog
Watchdog Request
End of
Conv.
Request
7
X
0
X
X
X
X
X
0
7
X
0
0
X
X
X
X
X
1
0
Lower
Word
Address
Upper
Word
Address
The ADC Interrupt vector should be programmed
by the user to point to the first memory location in
364/426
9
the Interrupt Vector table containing the base address of the four byte area of the interrupt vector
table in which the address of the ADC interrupt
service routines are stored.
The Analog Watchdog Interrupt Pending bit (AWD,
ICR.6) is automatically set by hardware whenever
any of the two guarded analog inputs go out of
range. The Compare Result Register (CRR) tracks
the analog inputs which exceed their programmed
thresholds.
When two requests occur simultaneously, the Analog Watchdog Request has priority over the End
of Conversion request, which is held pending.
The Analog Watchdog Request requires the user
to poll the Compare Result Register (CRR) to determine which of the four thresholds has been exceeded. The threshold status bits are set to flag an
out of range condition, and are automatically reset
by hardware after a software reset of the Analog
Watchdog Request flag in the ICR Register. The
interrupt pending flags, ECV and AWD, should be
reset by the user within the interrupt service routine. Setting either of these two bits by software
will cause an interrupt request to be generated.
10-BIT ANALOG TO DIGITAL CONVERTER (ADC)
10.11.5 Register Description
DATA REGISTERS (DiHR/DiLR)
The conversion results for the 16 available channels are loaded into the 32 Data Registers (two for
each channel) following conversion of the corresponding analog input.
CHANNEL 0 DATA HIGH REGISTER (D0HR)
R240 - Read/Write
Register Page: 61
Reset Value: undefined
7
D0.9
CHANNEL 2 DATA HIGH REGISTER (D2HR)
R244 - Read/Write
Register Page: 61
Reset Value: undefined
7
D2.9
0
D2.8
D2.7
D2.6
D2.5
D2.4
D2.3
D2.2
Bits 7:0 = D2.[9:2]: Channel 2 9:2 bit Data
0
D0.8
D0.7
D0.6
D0.5
D0.4
D0.3
D0.2
Bits 7:0 = D0.[9:2]: Channel 0 9:2 bit Data
CHANNEL 2 DATA LOW REGISTER (D2LR)
R245 - Read/Write
Register Page: 61
Reset Value: xx00 0000
7
CHANNEL 0 DATA LOW REGISTER (D0LR)
R241 - Read/Write
Register Page: 61
Reset Value: xx00 0000
7
D2.1
0
D2.0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bits 7:0 = D2.[1:0]: Channel 2 1:0 bit Data
0
Bits 5:0 = Reserved, forced by hardware to 0.
D0.1
D0.0
0
0
0
0
0
0
CHANNEL 3 DATA HIGH REGISTER (D3HR)
R246 - Read/Write
Register Page: 61
Reset Value: undefined
Bits 7:6 = D0.[1:0]: Channel 0 1:0 bit Data
Bits 5:0 = Reserved, forced by hardware to 0.
7
CHANNEL 1 DATA HIGH REGISTER (D1HR)
R242 - Read/Write
Register Page: 61
Reset Value: undefined
7
D1.9
D3.9
0
D3.8
D3.7
D3.6
D3.5
D3.4
D3.3
D3.2
Bits 7:0 = D3.[9:2]: Channel 3 9:2 bit Data
0
D1.8
D1.7
D1.6
D1.5
D1.4
D1.3
D1.2
Bits 7:0 = D1.[9:2]: Channel 1 9:2 bit Data
CHANNEL 3 DATA LOW REGISTER (D3LR)
R247 - Read/Write
Register Page: 61
Reset Value: xx00 0000
7
CHANNEL 1 DATA LOW REGISTER (D1LR)
R243 - Read/Write
Register Page: 61
Reset Value: xx00 0000
7
D3.1
0
D3.0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bits 7:0 = D3.[1:0]: Channel 3 1:0 bit Data
0
Bits 5:0 = Reserved, forced by hardware to 0.
D1.1
D1.0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bits 7:0 = D1.[1:0]: Channel 1 1:0 bit Data
Bits 5:0 = Reserved, forced by hardware to 0.
365/426
9
10-BIT ANALOG TO DIGITAL CONVERTER (ADC)
REGISTER DESCRIPTION (Cont’d)
CHANNEL 4 DATA HIGH REGISTER (D4HR)
R248 - Read/Write
Register Page: 61
Reset Value: undefined
7
D4.9
D4.8
D4.7
D4.6
D4.5
D4.4
D4.3
CHANNEL 6 DATA HIGH REGISTER (D6HR)
R252 - Read/Write
Register Page: 61
Reset Value: undefined
0
7
D4.2
D6.9
0
D6.8
D6.7
D6.6
D6.5
D6.4
D6.3
D6.2
Bits 7:0 = D4.[9:2]: Channel 4 9:2 bit Data
Bits 7:0 = D6.[9:2]: Channel 6 9:2 bit Data
CHANNEL 4 DATA LOW REGISTER (D4LR)
R249 - Read/Write
Register Page: 61
Reset Value: xx00 0000
CHANNEL 6 DATA LOW REGISTER (D6LR)
R253 - Read/Write
Register Page: 61
Reset Value: xx00 0000
7
D4.1
D4.0
0
0
0
0
0
0
7
0
D6.1
0
D6.0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bits 7:6 = D4.[1:0]: Channel 4 1:0 bit Data
Bits 7:0 = D6.[1:0]: Channel 6 1:0 bit Data
Bits 5:0 = Reserved, forced by hardware to 0.
Bits 5:0 = Reserved, forced by hardware to 0.
CHANNEL 5 DATA HIGH REGISTER (D5HR)
R250 - Read/Write
Register Page: 61
Reset Value: undefined
CHANNEL 7 DATA HIGH REGISTER (D7HR)
R254 - Read/Write
Register Page: 61
Reset Value: undefined
7
D5.9
D5.8
D5.7
D5.6
D5.5
D5.4
D5.3
0
7
D5.2
D7.9
0
D7.8
D7.7
D7.6
D7.5
D7.4
D7.3
D7.2
Bits 7:0 = D5.[9:2]: Channel 5 9:2 bit Data
Bits 7:0 = D7.[9:2]: Channel 7 9:2 bit Data
CHANNEL 5 DATA LOW REGISTER (D5LR)
R251 - Read/Write
Register Page: 61
Reset Value: xx00 0000
CHANNEL 7 DATA LOW REGISTER (D7LR)
R255- Read/Write
Register Page: 61
Reset Value: xx00 0000
7
D5.1
D5.0
0
0
0
0
0
0
7
0
D7.1
0
D7.0
0
0
0
0
0
Bits 7:0 = D1.[1:0]: Channel 5 1:0 bit Data
Bits 7:0 = D7.[1:0]: Channel 7 1:0 bit Data
Bits 5:0 = Reserved, forced by hardware to 0.
Bits 5:0 = Reserved, forced by hardware to 0.
366/426
9
0
10-BIT ANALOG TO DIGITAL CONVERTER (ADC)
REGISTER DESCRIPTION (Cont’d)
CHANNEL 8 DATA HIGH REGISTER (D8HR)
R240 - Read/Write
Register Page: 62
Reset Value: undefined
7
D8.9
0
D8.8
D8.7
D8.6
D8.5
D8.4
D8.3
D8.2
CHANNEL 10 DATA HIGH REGISTER (D10HR)
R244 - Read/Write
Register Page: 62
Reset Value: undefined
7
0
D10.9 D10.8 D10.7 D10.6 D10.5 D10.4 D10.3 D10.2
Bits 7:0 = D8.[9:2]: Channel 8 9:2 bit Data
Bits 7:0 = D10.[9:2]: Channel 10 9:2 bit Data
CHANNEL 8 DATA LOW REGISTER (D8LR)
R241 - Read/Write
Register Page: 62
Reset Value: xx00 0000
CHANNEL 10 DATA LOW REGISTER (D10LR)
R245 - Read/Write
Register Page: 62
Reset Value: xx00 0000
7
D8.1
0
D8.0
0
0
0
0
0
0
7
D10.1 D10.0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bits 7:6 = D8.[1:0]: Channel 8 1:0 bit Data
Bits 7:0 = D10.[1:0]: Channel 10 1:0 bit Data
Bits 5:0 = Reserved, forced by hardware to 0.
Bits 5:0 = Reserved, forced by hardware to 0.
CHANNEL 9 DATA HIGH REGISTER (D9HR)
R242 - Read/Write
Register Page: 62
Reset Value: undefined
CHANNEL 11 DATA HIGH REGISTER (D11HR)
R246 - Read/Write
Register Page: 62
Reset Value: undefined
7
D9.9
0
D9.8
D9.7
D9.6
D9.5
D9.4
D9.3
D9.2
7
0
D11.9 D11.8 D11.7 D11.6 D11.5 D11.4 D11.3 D11.2
Bits 7:0 = D9.[9:2]: Channel 9 9:2 bit Data
Bits 7:0 = D11.[9:2]: Channel 11 9:2 bit Data
CHANNEL 9 DATA LOW REGISTER (D9LR)
R243 - Read/Write
Register Page: 62
Reset Value: xx00 0000
CHANNEL 11 DATA LOW REGISTER (D11LR)
R247 - Read/Write
Register Page: 62
Reset Value: xx00 0000
7
D9.1
0
D9.0
0
0
0
0
0
0
7
D11.1 D11.0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bits 7:0 = D9.[1:0]: Channel 9 1:0 bit Data
Bits 7:0 = D11.[1:0]: Channel 11 1:0 bit Data
Bits 5:0 = Reserved, forced by hardware to 0.
Bits 5:0 = Reserved, forced by hardware to 0.
367/426
9
10-BIT ANALOG TO DIGITAL CONVERTER (ADC)
REGISTER DESCRIPTION (Cont’d)
CHANNEL 12 DATA HIGH REGISTER (D12HR)
R248 - Read/Write
Register Page: 62
Reset Value: undefined
7
0
CHANNEL 14 DATA HIGH REGISTER (D14HR)
R252 - Read/Write
Register Page: 62
Reset Value: undefined
7
0
D12.9 D12.8 D12.7 D12.6 D12.5 D12.4 D12.3 D12.2
D14.9 D14.8 D14.7 D14.6 D14.5 D14.4 D14.3 D14.2
Bits 7:0 = D12.[9:2]: Channel 12 9:2 bit Data
Bits 7:0 = D14.[9:2]: Channel 14 9:2 bit Data
CHANNEL 12 DATA LOW REGISTER (D12LR)
R249 - Read/Write
Register Page: 62
Reset Value: xx00 0000
CHANNEL 14 DATA LOW REGISTER (D14LR)
R253 - Read/Write
Register Page: 62
Reset Value: xx00 0000
7
D12.1 D12.0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
7
D14.1 D14.0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bits 7:6 = D12.[1:0]: Channel 12 1:0 bit Data
Bits 7:0 = D14.[1:0]: Channel 14 1:0 bit Data
Bits 5:0 = Reserved, forced by hardware to 0.
Bits 5:0 = Reserved, forced by hardware to 0.
CHANNEL 13 DATA HIGH REGISTER (D13HR)
R250 - Read/Write
Register Page: 62
Reset Value: undefined
CHANNEL 15 DATA HIGH REGISTER (D15HR)
R254 - Read/Write
Register Page: 62
Reset Value: undefined
7
0
7
0
D13.9 D13.8 D13.7 D13.6 D13.5 D13.4 D13.3 D13.2
D15.9 D15.8 D15.7 D15.6 D15.5 D15.4 D15.3 D15.2
Bits 7:0 = D13.[9:2]: Channel 13 9:2 bit Data
Bits 7:0 = D15.[9:2]: Channel 15 9:2 bit Data
CHANNEL 13 DATA LOW REGISTER (D13LR)
R251 - Read/Write
Register Page: 62
Reset Value: xx00 0000
CHANNEL 15 DATA LOW REGISTER (D15LR)
R255- Read/Write
Register Page: 62
Reset Value: xx00 0000
7
D13.1 D13.0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
7
D15.1 D15.0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bits 7:0 = D13.[1:0]: Channel 13 1:0 bit Data
Bits 7:0 = D15.[1:0]: Channel 15 1:0 bit Data
Bits 5:0 = Reserved, forced by hardware to 0.
Bits 5:0 = Reserved, forced by hardware to 0.
Note: If only 8-bit accuracy is required, each Data
High Register can be used to get the conversion
result, ignoring the corresponding DxLR register
content.
368/426
9
10-BIT ANALOG TO DIGITAL CONVERTER (ADC)
REGISTER DESCRIPTION (Cont’d)
COMPARE RESULT REGISTER (CRR)
R243 - Read/Write
Register Page: 63
Reset Value: 0000 xxxx (0xh)
Two adjacent channels (identified as A and B) can
be selected through CLR1 register programming
(bits CC[3:0]); a level window for the converted analog input can be defined on these channels.
7
CBU
CHANNEL A LOWER THRESHOLD HIGH
REGISTER (LTAHR)
R244 - Read
Register Page: 63
Reset Value: undefined
7
0
LTA.9 LTA.8 LTA.7 LTA.6 LTA.5 LTA.4 LTA.3 LTA.2
0
CAU
CBL
CAL
x
x
x
x
Bits 7 = CBU: Compare Register Ch. B Upper
Threshold
Set when converted data on channel B is greater
than the threshold value set in UTBHR/UTBLR
registers.
Bits 6 = CAU: Compare Register Ch. A Upper
Threshold
Set when converted data on channel A is greater
than the threshold value set in UTAHR/UTALR
registers.
Bits 5 = CBL: Compare Register Ch. B Lower
Threshold
Set when converted data on channel B is less than
the threshold value set in LTBHR/LTBLR registers.
Bits 4 = CAL: Compare Register Ch. A Lower
Threshold
Set when converted data on channel A is less than
the threshold value set in LTAHR/LTALR registers.
Bits 3:0 = Don’t care
Bits 7:0 = LTA.[9:2]: Channel A [9:2] bit Lower
Threshold
CHANNEL A LOWER THRESHOLD LOW
REGISTER (LTALR)
R245 - Read/Write
Register Page: 63
Reset Value: xx00 0000
7
LTA.1 LTA.0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bits 7:6 = LTA.[1:0]: Channel A [1:0] bit Lower
Threshold
Bits 5:0 = Reserved, forced by hardware to 0.
CHANNEL B LOWER THRESHOLD HIGH REGISTER (LTBHR)
R246 - Read/Write
Register Page: 63
Reset Value: undefined
7
0
LTB.7 LTB.7 LTB.5 LTB.4 LTB.3 LTB.2 LTB.1 LTB.0
Bits 7:0 = LTB.[9:2]: Channel B [9:2] bit Lower
Threshold
LOWER THRESHOLD REGISTERS (LTiHR/
LTiLR)
The two pairs of Lower Threshold High/Low registers are used to store the user programmable lower threshold 10-bit values, to be compared with the
current conversion results, thus setting the lower
window limit.
369/426
9
10-BIT ANALOG TO DIGITAL CONVERTER (ADC)
REGISTER DESCRIPTION (Cont’d)
CHANNEL B LOWER THRESHOLD LOW
REGISTER (LTBLR)
R247 - Read/Write
Register Page: 63
Reset Value: xx00 0000
7
LTB.1 LTB.0
CHANNEL A UPPER THRESHOLD LOW
REGISTER (UTALR)
R249 - Read/Write
Register Page: 63
Reset Value: xx00 0000
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
7
UTA.1 UTA.0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bits 7:6 = LTB.[1:0]: Channel B [1:0] bit Lower
Threshold
Bits 7:6 = UTA.[1:0]: Channel A [1:0] bit Upper
Threshold
Bits 5:0 = Reserved, forced by hardware to 0.
Bits 5:0 = Reserved, forced by hardware to 0.
UPPER THRESHOLD REGISTERS (UTiHR/
UTiLR)
The two pairs of Upper Threshold High/Low Registers are used to store the user programmable upper threshold 10-bit values, to be compared with
the current conversion results, thus setting the upper window limit.
CHANNEL B UPPER THRESHOLD HIGH REGISTER (UTBHR)
R250 - Read/Write
Register Page: 63
Reset Value: undefined
7
0
UTB.9 UTB.8 UTB.7 UTB.6 UTB.5 UTB.4 UTB.3 UTB.2
CHANNEL A UPPER THRESHOLD HIGH REGISTER (UTAR)
R248 - Read/Write
Register Page: 63
Reset Value: undefined
7
0
UTA.9 UTA.8 UTA.7 UTA.6 UTA.5 UTA.4 UTA.3 UTA.2
Bits 7:0 = UTA.[9:2]: Channel 6 [9:2] bit Upper
Threshold value
Bits 7:0 = UTB.[9:2]: Channel B [9:2] bit Upper
Threshold
CHANNEL B UPPER THRESHOLD LOW
REGISTER (UTBLR)
R251 - Read/Write
Register Page: 63
Reset Value: xx00 0000
7
UTB.1 UTB.0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bits 7:6 = UTB.[1:0]: Channel B [1:0] bit Lower
Threshold
Bits 5:0 = Reserved, forced by hardware to 0.
370/426
9
10-BIT ANALOG TO DIGITAL CONVERTER (ADC)
REGISTER DESCRIPTION (Cont’d)
CONTROL LOGIC REGISTER 1 (CLR1)
R252 - Read/Write
Register Page: 63
Reset Value: 0000 1111 (0Fh)
Table 68. Compare Channels definition
7
CC[3:0]
Channel A
Channel B
0100
0101
0110
0111
1000
1001
1010
1011
1100
1101
1110
1111
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
0
SC3
SC2
SC1
SC0
CC3
CC2
CC1
CC0
Bits 7:4 = SC[3:0]: Start Conversion Channel
These four bits define the starting analog input
channel (Autoscan Mode). The first channel addressed by SC[3:0] is converted, then the channel
number is incremented for the successive conversion, until channel 15 (1111) is converted. When
SC3, SC2, SC1 and SC0 are all set, only channel
15 will be converted.
Bits 3:0 = CC[3:0]: Compare Channels
The programmed value corresponds to the first of
the two adjacent channels (A) on which it is possible to define a level window for the converted analog input (see Table 68).
Note: If a write access to this register occurs, the
conversion is re-started from the SC[3:0] channel.
Table 68. Compare Channels definition
CC[3:0]
Channel A
Channel B
0000
0001
0010
0011
15
0
1
2
0
1
2
3
CONTROL LOGIC REGISTER 2 (CLR2)
R253 - Read/Write
Register Page: 63
Reset Value: 1010 0000 (A0h)
7
PR2
0
PR1
PR0 EXTG INTG POW CONT
ST
Bits 7:5 = PR[2:0]: INTCLK Frequency Prescaler
These bits determine the ratio between the ADC
clock and the system clock (INTCLK) according to
Table 69.
Table 69. Prescaler programming
TA/D clock/
PR[2:0]
TINTCLK
000
001
010
011
100
101
110
111
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
fADC
(MHz)
TSample TConv
(µs)
(µs)
@TINTCLK= 8MHz
4.00
2.00
1.33
1.00
0.80
0.66
0.57
0.50
2
7
4
14
6
21
8
28
Not Allowed
Not Allowed
Not Allowed
Not Allowed
fADC
(MHz)
TSample TConv
(µs)
(µs)
@TINTCLK= 20MHz
10.00
5.00
3.33
2.50
2.00
1.66
1.43
1.25
Not Allowed
Not Allowed
2.4
8.4
3.2
11.2
4
14
4.8
16.8
5.6
19.6
6.4
22.4
fADC
(MHz)
TSample TConv
(µs)
(µs)
@TINTCLK=24MHz
12.00
6.00
4.00
3.00
2.40
2.00
1.71
1.50
Not Allowed
Not Allowed
2
7
2.66
9.33
3.33 11.66
4
14
4.66 16.33
5.33 18.66
371/426
9
10-BIT ANALOG TO DIGITAL CONVERTER (ADC)
REGISTER DESCRIPTION (Cont’d)
Bit 4 = EXTG: External Trigger Enable.
This bit is set and cleared by software.
0: External trigger disabled.
1: External trigger enabled. Allows a conversion
sequence to be started on the subsequent edge
of the external signal applied to the EXTRG pin
(when enabled as an Alternate Function).
Bit 3 = INTG: Internal Trigger Enable.
This bit is set and cleared by software.
0: Internal trigger disabled.
1: Internal trigger enabled. Allows a conversion sequence to be started, synchronized by an internal signal (On-chip Event signal) from a Multifunction Timer peripheral.
Both External and Internal Trigger inputs are internally ORed, thus avoiding Hardware conflicts;
however, the correct procedure is to enable only
one alternate synchronization input at a time.
Note: The effect of either synchronization mode is
to set the START/STOP bit, which is reset by hardware when in SINGLE mode, at the end of each
sequence of conversions.
Requirements: The External Synchronisation Input must receive a low level pulse wider than an
INTCLK period and, for both External and On-Chip
Event synchronisation, the repetition period must
be greater than the time required for the selected
sequence of conversions.
Bit 2 = POW: Power Up/Power Down.
This bit is set and cleared by software.
0: Power down mode: all power-consuming logic is
disabled, thus selecting a low power idle mode.
1: Power up mode: the ADC converter logic and
analog circuitry is enabled.
Bit 1 = CONT: Continuous/Single.
0: Single Mode: a single sequence of conversions
is initiated whenever an external (or internal)
trigger occurs, or when the ST bit is set by software.
1: Continuous Mode: the first sequence of conversions is started, either by software (by setting
the ST bit), or by hardware (on an internal or external trigger, depending on the setting of the
INTG and EXTG bits); a continuous conversion
sequence is then initiated.
372/426
9
Bit 0 = ST: Start/Stop.
0: Stop conversion. When the ADC converter is
running in Single Mode, this bit is hardware reset at the end of a sequence of conversions.
1: Start a sequence of conversions.
Note: If a write access to this register occurs, the
conversion is re-started from the SC[3:0] channel.
INTERRUPT CONTROL REGISTER (AD_ICR)
The Interrupt Control Register contains the three
priority level bits, the two source flags, and their bit
mask:
INTERRUPT CONTROL REGISTER (AD_ICR)
R254 - Read/Write
Register Page: 63
Reset Value: 0000 0111 (07h)
7
ECV AWD
0
ECI
AWDI
X
PL2
PL1
PL0
Bit 7 = ECV: End of Conversion.
This bit is automatically set by hardware after a
group of conversions is completed. It must be reset by the user, before returning from the Interrupt
Service Routine. Setting this bit by software will
cause a software interrupt request to be generated.
0: No End of Conversion event occurred
1: An End of Conversion event occurred
Bit 6 = AWD: Analog Watchdog.
This is automatically set by hardware whenever either of the two monitored analog inputs exceeds a
threshold. The threshold values are stored in registers R244/R245 and R248/R249 for channel A,
and in registers R246/R247 and R250/R251 for
channel B respectively. The Compare Result Register (CRR) keeps track of the analog inputs exceeding the thresholds.
The AWD bit must be reset by the user, before returning from the Interrupt Service Routine. Setting
this bit by software will cause a software interrupt
request to be generated.
0: No Analog Watchdog event occurred
1: An Analog Watchdog event occurred
10-BIT ANALOG TO DIGITAL CONVERTER (ADC)
REGISTER DESCRIPTION (Cont’d)
Bit 5 = ECI: End of Conversion Interrupt Enable.
This bit masks the End of Conversion interrupt request.
0: Mask End of Conversion interrupts
1: Enable End of Conversion interrupts
Bit 4 = AWDI: Analog Watchdog Interrupt Enable.
This bit masks or enables the Analog Watchdog
interrupt request.
0: Mask Analog Watchdog interrupts
1: Enable Analog Watchdog interrupts
Bit 3 = Reserved.
Bits 2:0 = PL[2:0]: ADC Interrupt Priority Level.
These three bits are used to select the Interrupt
priority level for the ADC.
INTERRUPT VECTOR REGISTER (AD_IVR)
R255 - Read/Write
Register Page: 63
Reset Value: xxxx xx10 (x2h)
7
V7
0
V6
V5
V4
V3
V2
W1
0
Bits 7:2 = V[7:2]: ADC Interrupt Vector.
This vector should be programmed by the user to
point to the first memory location in the Interrupt
Vector table containing the starting addresses of
the ADC interrupt service routines.
Bit 1 = W1: Word Select.
This bit is set and cleared by hardware, according
to the ADC interrupt source.
0: Interrupt source is the Analog Watchdog, pointing to the lower word of the ADC interrupt service block (defined by V[7:2]).
1:Interrupt source is the End of Conversion interrupt, thus pointing to the upper word.
Note: When two requests occur simultaneously,
the Analog Watchdog Request has priority over
the End of Conversion request, which is held
pending.
Bit 0 = Reserved, forced by hardware to 0.
373/426
9
ST92F124/F150/F250 - ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
11 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
This product contains devices to protect the inputs
against damage due to high static voltages, however it is advisable to take normal precautions to
avoid application of any voltage higher than the
specified maximum rated voltages.
For proper operation it is recommended that VIN
and VO be higher than VSS and lower than VDD.
Reliability is enhanced if unused inputs are connected to an appropriate logic voltage level (VDD
or VSS).
Power Considerations. The average chip-junction temperature, TJ, in Celsius can be obtained
from:
TA + PD x RthJA
TJ =
Ambient Temperature.
Where: TA =
RthJA = Package thermal resistance
(junction-to ambient).
PINT + PPORT.
PD =
PINT = IDD x VDD (chip internal power).
PPORT = Port power dissipation
(determined by the user)
ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS
Symbol
VDD
Parameter
Supply Voltage
AVDD
ADC Reference Voltage
AVSS
ADC Ground
VIN
VINOD
Value
Unit
– 0.3 to 6.5
V
VSS to VDD + 0.3
V
VSS
Input Voltage (all pins except pure open drain I/O pins)
– 0.3 to VDD + 0.3
Input Voltage (pure open drain I/O pins)
V
– 0.3 to 6.5
V
-0.3 to AVDD + 0.3
V
VAIN
Analog Input Voltage (ADC inputs)
TSTG
Storage Temperature
– 55 to +150
°C
⎥IIO⎥
Load Current
10 (2)
mA
⎥IINJ⎥
Pin Injection Current - Digital and Analog Inputs (1)
10 (2)
mA
⎥ITINJ⎥
Absolute sum of all Pin Injection Current in the device
100 (2)
mA
Notes:
Stresses above those listed as “absolute maximum ratings“ may cause permanent damage to the device. This is a stress rating only and
functional operation of the device at these conditions is not implied. Exposure to maximum rating conditions for extended periods may affect
device reliability. All voltages are referenced to VSS = 0 V.
Note 1: Pin injection current occurs when the voltage on any pin exceeds the specified range.
Note 2: Value guaranteed by design.
THERMAL CHARACTERISTICS
Symbol
Package
Value
Unit
RthJA
TQFP64
PQFP100
TQFP100
47
28
44
°C/W
374/426
1
ST92F124/F150/F250 - ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
RECOMMENDED OPERATING CONDITIONS
Symbol
TA
VDD
AVDD
fINTCLK
C33
Parameter
Ambient temperature range
Min
Max
B Suffix Version
-40
105
C Suffix Version
-40
4.5
0
0 (1)
300
125
5.5
VDD + 0.2
24
Operating Supply Voltage
ADC Reference Voltage
Internal Clock Frequency
Stabilization capacitor between VREG and VSS
Unit
°C
V
V
MHz
nF
Note: (1) > 1MHz when ADC or JBLPD is used, 2.6MHz when I²C is used
375/426
1
ST92F124/F150/F250 - ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
DC ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
(VDD = 5 V ± 10%, TA = –40° C to +125° C, unless otherwise specified)
Value
Symbol
Parameter
Input High Level
P0[7:0]-P1[7:0]-P2[7:6]-P2[3:2]P3.3-P4.2-P4.5-P5.3
Comment
TTL
CMOS
Typ
Min
(1)
Max
2.0(2)
Unit
V
(2)
V
0.6 x VDD(2)
V
0.7 x VDD(2)
V
0.7 x VDD
Input High Level
Standard Schmitt Trigger
VIH
P2[5:4]-P2[1:0]-P3[7:4]-P3[2:0]-P4[4:3]P4[1:0]-P5[7:4]-P5[2:0]-P6[3:0]-P6[7:6]P7[7:0]-P8[7:0]-P9[7:0]
Input High Level
High Hyst. Schmitt Trigger
P4[7:6]-P6[5:4]
Input Low Level
TTL
P0[7:0]-P1[7:0]-P2[7:6]-P2[3:2]-P3.3P4.2-P4.5-P5.3
CMOS
0.8(2)
V
0.3 x VDD(2)
V
0.2 x VDD(2)
V
0.25 x VDD(2)
V
-0.3
6.0
V
-0.3
VDD + 0.3
V
Input Low Level
Standard Schmitt Trigger
VIL
P2[5:4]-P2[1:0]-P3[7:4] P3[2:0]-P4[4:3]P4[1:0]-P5[7:4]-P5[2:0]-P6[3:0]-P6[7:6]P7[7:0]-P8[7:0]-P9[7:0]
Input Low Level
High Hyst.Schmitt Trigger
P4[7:6]-P6[5:4]
Input Voltage Range
VI
Pure Open Drain
P2[3:2]-P4[7:6]
Input Voltage Range
All other pins
Input Hysteresis
Standard Schmitt Trigger
VHYS
P2[5:4]-P2[1:0]-P3[7:4]-P3[2:0]-P4[4:3]P4[1:0]-P5[7:4]-P5[2:0]-P6[3:0]-P6[7:6]P7[7:0]-P8[7:0]-P9[7:0]
Input Hysteresis
High Hyst. Schmitt Trigger
250
mV
1
V
P4[7:6]-P6[5:4]
Output High Level
P6[5:4]
VOH
376/426
1
Push Pull mode
IOH= – 8mA
EMR1.BSZ bit = 1 (3)
VDD – 0.8
V
Push Pull mode
IOH= – 2mA
VDD – 0.8
V
Output High Level
P0[7:0]-P2[7:4]-P2[1:0]-P3[7:0]-P4[5:0]P5[7:0]-P6[3:0]P6[7:6]-P7[7:0]-P8[7:0]-P9[7:0]-VPWOAS-DS-RW
ST92F124/F150/F250 - ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Value
Symbol
Parameter
Min
Typ
(1)
Max
Unit
Output Low Level
P4[7:6]-P6[5:4]
Push Pull or
Open Drain mode,
IOL=8mA,
EMR1.BSZ bit = 1 (3)
0.4
V
Output Low Level
All pins except OSCOUT
Push Pull or
Open Drain mode,
IOL=2mA
0.4
V
VOL
Weak Pull-up Current
IWPU
Comment
P2[7:4]-P2[1:0]-P3[7:0]
P4[7:5]-P4[3:1]-P5.3-P6[7:6]-P6[3:0]P7[7:0]-P8[7:0]-P9[7:0]
Weak Pull-up Current
P6[5:4]-AS-DS-RW
Bidirectional
Weak Pull-up mode
VIN = 0V
50
100
300
µA
Bidirectional
Weak Pull-up mode
VIN = 0V
100
220
450
µA
ILKIO
I/O Pin Input Leakage
Input or Tri-State mode,
0V < VIN < VDD
–1
1
µA
ILKIOD
I/O Pin Open Drain Input Leakage
Input or Tri-State mode,
0V < VIN < VDD
–1
1
µA
VIN<VSS, | IIN |< 400µA
on robust analog pin
6
µA
VSS≤VIN≤VDD
1
µA
ADC Conv.Input leakage current on ro|ILKADC| bust pins
ADC Conv.Input leakage current
P4[7:6]-P6[5:4]
EMR1.BSZ bit = 1 (3)
8(4)
P4[7:6]-P6[5:4]
EMR1.BSZ bit = 0 (3)
2 (4)
All other pins except
OSCOUT
2 (4)
Overload Current
(5)
5 (4)
mA
SRR
Slew Rate Rise
(6)
20
30
ns
SRF
Slew Rate Fall
(6)
20
30
ns
IIO
⎥IOV⎥
Load current
mA
Note:
(1) Unless otherwise stated, typical data are based on TA= 25°C and VDD= 5V. They are only reported for design guide lines not tested in
production.
(2) Value guaranteed by characterisation.
(3) For a description of the EMR1 Register - BSZ bit refer to the External Memory Interface Chapter.
(4) Value guaranteed by Design.
(5) Not tested in production, guaranteed by product characterisation. An overload condition occurs when the input voltage on any pin exceeds the specified voltage range.
(6) Indicative values extracted from design simulation, 20% to 80% on 50pF load, EMR1.BSZ bit =0.
377/426
1
ST92F124/F150/F250 - ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
AC ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
(VDD = 5 V ± 10%, TA = –40° C to +125° C for Max values and 25°C for Typ values, unless otherwise
specified)
Symbol
IDDRUN
Parameter
Conditions
INTCLK
Typ (1)
Max
Unit
24 MHz
45
60
mA
Run Mode Current
CPU running with code execution
from RAM memory, all peripherals
in reset state, clock input (OSCIN)
driven by external square wave.
f INTCLK in [MHz].
any
frequency
2.5 +
1.8xfINTCLK/MHz
mA
∆IDD1
FLASH/E3 TM
Supply Current
(Read) (2)
-
2
mA
∆IDD2
FLASH/E3 TM
Supply Current
(Write/Erase) (2)
-
12
mA
24 MHz
50
mA
24 MHz
14
Typical application
Run Mode Current
CPU running with code execution
from FLASH memory, all peripherals running in a typical configuration, clock input (OSCIN) driven by
a 4-MHz crystal =
IDDRUN + ∆IDD1 + IDD Peripherals
(Timers, CAN, etc)
22
mA
IDDWFI
WFI Mode Current
∆IDD3
FLASH/E3 TM
Supply Current
(Stand-by) (4)
-
20
µA
IDDLPR
Main Voltage Regulator Power
Consumption
-
300
µA
IDDOSC
Crystal Oscillator
Power Consumption
200
µA
IDDLPWFI
Low Power WFI
Mode Current
f INTCLK in [MHz].
FLASH/E3 TM in Stand-by Mode,
Main Voltage Regulator ON, IDDLPR + IDDOSC + IDD (Standard Timer in
any
frequency
0.9xfINTCLK
4MHz / 32
550
4MHz / 32
250
-
5
/MHz(3)
1000
mA
µA
real time clock mode)
FLASH/E3 TM in Power-Down
IDDRTC
RTC Mode Current
IDDHALT
HALT Mode Current (5)
IDDSTOP
STOP Mode Current (3)
IDDTR
Input Transient IDD
Current (6)
Mode, Main Voltage Regulator
OFF, Standard Timer in Real Time
Clock mode
All I/O ports are configured in output push-pull mode with no DC
load
-
µA
25
µA
see Figure 159 (3)
µA
300
µA
Note:
All I/O Ports are configured in bidirectional weak pull-up mode with no DC load, unless otherwise specified, external clock is driven by a
square wave.
(1) Unless otherwise stated, typical data are based on VDD= 5V. They are only reported for design guide lines not tested in production.
(2) Current consumption to be added to IDDRUN when the FLASH memory is accessed.
(3) Value guaranteed by product characterization. Not tested in production.
(4) Current consumption to be added to IDDLPWFI when the FLASH memory is in stand-by mode.
(5) Value guaranteed by product characterization.
(6) The I/Os draw a transient current from VDD when an input takes a voltage level in between VSS and VDD. This current is 0 for VIN<0.3V
or VIN>VDD-0.3V, it typically reaches its maximum value when VIN is approximatively at VDD/2.
378/426
1
ST92F124/F150/F250 - ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Figure 159. Stop Mode Current
Stop Mode Current (µA)
120
100
80
60
40
20
0
-45
0
25
45
85
125
Temperature (°C)
379/426
1
ST92F124/F150/F250 - ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
FLASH / E3 TM SPECIFICATIONS
(VDD = 5V ± 10%, TA = –40°C to +125°C, unless otherwise specified
MAIN FLASH
E3 TM
RELIABILITY
Parameter
Byte Program
128 kbytes Flash Program
64 kbytes Flash Sector Erase
128 kbytes Flash Chip Erase
Erase Suspend Latency
Recovery from Power-Down
16 bytes Page Update
(1k E3 TM) -40°C +105°C
Flash Endurance 25°C
Flash Endurance
E3 TM Endurance
Data Retention
Min
Typ
10
1.3
1.5
3
Max
250
4
30
30
15
10
Unit
µs
s
s
s
µs
µs
30
200 (1)
ms
10000
3000
800000 (2)
15
cycles
page updates
years
Note:
(1) The maximum value depends on the number of E3 cycles/sector as shown in Figure 160. This maximum value corresponds to the worst
case E3 TM page update, 1 of 4 consecutive write operations at the same E3 TM address (refer to AN1152). In any case, the page update
operation starts with the write operation of the data (160 µs max). Then, one of the 4 erase operations of the unused sector may be performed, leading to the worst case.
(2) Relational calculation between E3 TM page updates and single byte cycling is provided in a dedicated STMicroelectronics Application
Note (ref. AN1152).
Figure 160. Evolution of Worst Case E3 Page Update Time
Page Update Max
300
TA=125°C
200
TA=105°C
100
TA=25°C
80
380/426
1
400
800
k page updates
ST92F124/F150/F250 - ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
EMC CHARACTERISTICS
Susceptibility tests are performed on a sample basis during product characterization.
Functional EMS (Electro Magnetic Susceptibility)
Based on a simple application running on the
product, the product is stressed by two electro
magnetic events until a failure occurs.
■ ESD: Electro-Static Discharge (positive and
negative) is applied on all pins of the device until
a functional disturbance occurs. This test
conforms with the IEC 1000-4-2 standard.
■ FTB: A Burst of Fast Transient voltage (positive
and negative) is applied to VDD and VSS through
a 100pF capacitor, until a functional disturbance
occurs. This test conforms with the IEC 1000-44 standard.
A device reset allows normal operations to be resumed.
Designing hardened software to avoid noise
problems
EMC characterization and optimization are performed at component level with a typical application environment and simplified MCU software. It
should be noted that good EMC performance is
Symbol
highly dependent on the user application and the
software in particular.
Therefore it is recommended that the user applies
EMC software optimization and prequalification
tests in relation with the EMC level requested for
his application.
Software recommendations:
The software flowchart must include the management of runaway conditions such as:
– Corrupted program counter
– Unexpected reset
– Critical Data corruption (control registers...)
Prequalification trials:
Most of the common failures (unexpected reset
and program counter corruption) can be reproduced by manually forcing a low state on the RESET pin or the Oscillator pins for 1 second.
To complete these trials, ESD stress can be applied directly on the device, over the range of
specification values. When unexpected behaviour
is detected, the software can be improved to prevent unrecoverable errors occurring (see application note AN1015).
Parameter
Conditions
Level
Unit
VFESD
Voltage limits to be applied on any I/O pin to induce a VDD=5V, TA=+25°C, fOSC=4MHz
functional disturbance
conforms to IEC 1000-4-2
>1.5
kV
VFFTB
Fast transient voltage burst limits to be applied
V =5V, TA=+25°C, fOSC=8MHz
through 100pF on VDD and VDD pins to induce a func- DD
conforms to IEC 1000-4-4
tional disturbance
>1.5
kV
Max vs.
[fOSC/fCPU]
Unit
Electro Magnetic Interference (EMI)
Based on a simple application running on the
product, the product is monitored in terms of emission. This emission test is in line with the norm
SAE J 1752/3 which specifies the board and the
loading of each pin.
Symbol
SEMI
Parameter
Peak level
Conditions
VDD=5V, TA=+25°C,
PQFP100 14x20 package
conforming to SAE J 1752/3
Monitored
Frequency Band
4/10MHz
0.1MHz to 30MHz
13
30MHz to 130MHz
25
130MHz to 1GHz
24
SAE EMI Level
3.5
dBµV
-
Notes:
1. Data based on characterization results, not tested in production.
381/426
1
ST92F124/F150/F250 - ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
EMC CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)
Absolute Maximum Ratings (Electrical Sensitivity)
Based on three different tests (ESD, LU and DLU)
using specific measurement methods, the product
is stressed in order to determine its performance in
terms of electrical sensitivity. For more details, refer to the application note AN1181.
Electro-Static Discharge (ESD)
Electro-Static Discharges (a positive then a negative pulse separated by 1 second) are applied to
the pins of each sample according to each pin
combination. The sample size depends on the
number of supply pins in the device (3 parts*(n+1)
supply pin). Two models can be simulated: Human
Body Model and Machine Model. This test conforms to the JESD22-A114A/A115A standard.
Absolute Maximum Ratings
Symbol
Ratings
Conditions
Maximum value 1) Unit
VESD(HBM)
Electro-static discharge voltage
(Human Body Model)
TA=+25°C
2000
VESD(MM)
Electro-static discharge voltage
(Machine Model)
TA=+25°C
200
V
Notes:
1. Data based on characterization results, not tested in production.
Static and Dynamic Latch-Up
■ LU: 3 complementary static tests are required
on 10 parts to assess the latch-up performance.
A supply overvoltage (applied to each power
supply pin) and a current injection (applied to
each input, output and configurable I/O pin) are
performed on each sample. This test conforms
to the EIA/JESD 78 IC latch-up standard. For
more details, refer to the application note
AN1181.
■
DLU: Electro-Static Discharges (one positive
then one negative test) are applied to each pin
of 3 samples when the micro is running to
assess the latch-up performance in dynamic
mode. Power supplies are set to the typical
values, the oscillator is connected as near as
possible to the pins of the micro and the
component is put in reset mode. This test
conforms to the IEC1000-4-2 and SAEJ1752/3
standards. For more details, refer to the
application note AN1181.
Electrical Sensitivities
Symbol
LU
DLU
Parameter
Conditions
Class 1)
Static latch-up class
TA=+25°C
TA=+85°C
TA=+125°C
A
A
A
Dynamic latch-up class
VDD=5.5V, fOSC=4MHz, TA=+25°C
A
Notes:
1. Class description: A Class is an STMicroelectronics internal specification. All its limits are higher than the JEDEC specifications, that means when a device belongs to Class A it exceeds the JEDEC standard. B Class strictly covers all the
JEDEC criteria (international standard).
382/426
1
ST92F124/F150/F250 - ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
EXTERNAL INTERRUPT TIMING TABLE
(VDD = 5V ± 10%, TA = –40°C to +125°C, CLoad = 50pF, fINTCLK = 24MHz, unless otherwise specified)
N°
Symbol
1
2
3
4
TwINTLR
TwINTHR
TwINTHF
TwINTLF
Parameter
Low Level Minimum Pulse Width in Rising Edge Mode
High Level Minimum Pulse Width in Rising Edge Mode
High Level Minimum Pulse Width in Falling Edge Mode
Low Level Minimum Pulse Width in Falling Edge Mode
Value
Formula
≥Tck+10
≥Tck+10
≥Tck+10
≥Tck+10
Min
50
50
50
50
Unit
ns
ns
ns
ns
Note:
The value in the left hand column shows the formula used to calculate the timing minimum or maximum from the oscillator clock period.
The value in the right hand two columns shows the timing minimum and maximum for an internal clock at 24MHz (INTCLK).
Measurement points are VIH for positive pulses and VIL for negative pulses.
Legend:
Tck = INTCLK period = Crystal Oscillator Clock period when CLOCK1 is not divided by 2;
2 x Crystal Oscillator Clock period when CLOCK1 7is divided by 2;
Crystal Oscillator Clock period x PLL factor when the PLL is enabled.
EXTERNAL INTERRUPT TIMING
Rising Edge Detection
Falling Edge Detection
INTn
n = 0-7
WAKE-UP MANAGEMENT TIMING TABLE
(VDD = 5V ± 10%, TA = –40°C to +125°C, CLoad = 50pF, fINTCLK = 24MHz, unless otherwise specified)
N°
Symbol
1
2
3
4
TwWKPLR
TwWKPHR
TwWKPHF
TwWKPLF
Parameter
Low Level Minimum Pulse Width in Rising Edge Mode
High Level Minimum Pulse Width in Rising Edge Mode
High Level Minimum Pulse Width in Falling Edge Mode
Low Level Minimum Pulse Width in Falling Edge Mode
Value
Formula
≥Tck+10
≥Tck+10
≥Tck+10
≥Tck+10
Min
50
50
50
50
Unit
ns
ns
ns
ns
Note: The value in the left hand column shows the formula used to calculate the timing minimum or maximum from the oscillator clock period.
The value in the right hand two columns show the timing minimum and maximum for an internal clock at 24MHz (INTCLK).
The given data are related to Wake-up Management Unit used in External Interrupt mode.
Measurement points are VIH for positive pulses and VIL for negative pulses.
Legend:
Tck = INTCLK period = Crystal Oscillator Clock period when CLOCK1 is not divided by 2;
2 x Crystal Oscillator Clock period when CLOCK1 is divided by 2;
Crystal Oscillator Clock period x PLL factor when the PLL is enabled.
WAKE-UP MANAGEMENT TIMING
Rising Edge Detection
Falling Edge Detection
WKUPn
n = 0-15
383/426
1
ST92F124/F150/F250 - ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
RCCU CHARACTERISTICS
(VDD = 5V ± 10%, TA = –40°C to +125°C, CLoad = 50pF, fINTCLK = 24MHz, unless otherwise specified)
Symbol
Parameter
Comment
VIHRS
RESET Input High Level
Input Threshold
VILRS
RESET Input Low Level
Input Threshold
VIRS
Input Voltage Range
VHYRS
RESET Input Hysteresis
ILKRS
RESET Pin Input Leakage
Value
Min
Typ (1)
Max
Unit
0.75 x VDD
V
0.25 x VDD
– 0.3
V
VDD + 0.3
V
1 (2)
0V < VIN < VDD
V
–1
1
µA
Note:
(1) Unless otherwise stated, typical data are based on TA= 25°C and VDD= 5V. They are only reported for design guide lines not tested in
production.
(2) Value guaranteed by design.
RCCU TIMING TABLE
(VDD = 5V ± 10%, TA = –40°C to +125°C, fINTCLK = 24 MHz, unless otherwise specified)
Symbol
Parameter
tFRS
RESET Input Filtered Pulse(2)
tNFR
RESET Input Non Filtered
Pulse(2)
tRSPH(3)
tSTR
Comment
Value
Min
Max
50
DIV2 = 0
DIV2 = 1
Unit
ns
µs
20
RESET Phase duration
STOP Restart duration
Typ (1)
20400
Tosc
10200
20400
Tosc
Note:
(1) Unless otherwise stated, typical data are based on TA= 25°C and VDD= 5V. They are only reported for design guide lines not tested in
production.
(2) To be valid, a RESET pulse must exceed tNFR. All reset glitches with a duration shorter than tFRS will be filtered
(3) Depending on the delay between rising edge of RESET pin and the first rising edge of CLOCK1, the value can differ from the typical value
for +/- 1 CLOCK1 cycle.
Legend: Tosc = Crystal Oscilllator Clock (CLOCK1) period.
BOOTROM TIMING TABLE
Symbol
tBRE
Parameter
BOOTROM Execution Duration
(see Figure 65 on page 136) (2)
Conditions
Typ Value (1)
Unit
fOSC = 4MHz
33
ms
Note:
(1) Unless otherwise stated, typical data are based on TA= 25°C and VDD= 5V. They are only reported for design guide lines not tested in
production
(2) Refer to AN1528 for more details on BOOTROM code.
384/426
1
ST92F124/F150/F250 - ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
PLL CHARACTERISTICS
(VDD = 5 V ± 10%, TA = –40° C to +125° C, fINTCLK = 24 MHz, unless otherwise specified)
Symbol
Parameter
Value
Min
Typ (1)
Max
Unit
FXTL
Crystal Reference Frequency
3
5
MHz
FVCO
VCO Operating Frequency
6
24
MHz
TPLK
Lock-in Time
1000 (2)
Tosc
1200 (2)
ps
0.2 (2)
%
250 (2)
kHz
PLL Jitter
350 (2)
0
PLL Jitter Impact on applicative
500kHz signal (CAN, SCI, TIMERS)
FPLLFREE
PLL free running mode Frequency
10 (2)
50
Note:
(1) Unless otherwise stated, typical data are based on TA= 25°C and VDD= 5V. They are only reported for design guide lines not tested in
production.
(2) Value guaranteed by design.
Legend: Tosc = Crystal Oscilllator Clock (CLOCK1) period.
385/426
1
ST92F124/F150/F250 - ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
OSCILLATOR CHARACTERISTICS
(VDD = 5V ± 10%, TA = –40°C to +125°C, CLoad = 50pF, fINTCLK = 24MHz, unless otherwise specified)
Symbol
fOSC
gm
VIHCK
VILCK
TSTUP
ILOAD
RPOL
VOSC
Parameter
Crystal Frequency
Oscillator Transconductance
Clock Input High Level
Clock Input Low Level
Oscillator Start-up Time
Comment
Fundamental mode crystal or external clock applied to OSCOUT
External Clock
External Clock
Min
3
1.2 (2)
2 (2)
-0.3
90
Oscillation Level
Value
Typ (1)
Max
5
1.5 (2)
VDD + 0.3
0.4 (2)
5 (2)
100
128
600 (2)
180
Unit
MHz
mA/V
V
V
ms
µA
kΩ
mV
Note:
(1) Unless otherwise stated, typical data are based on TA= 25° C and VDD= 5V. They are only reported for design guide lines not tested in
production.
(2) Value guaranteed by design.
386/426
1
ST92F124/F150/F250 - ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
EXTERNAL BUS TIMING TABLE (MC=1)
(VDD = 5V ± 10%, TA = –40°C to +125°C, CLoad = 0 to 50pF
N°
Symbol
Value (see note)
Parameter
Formula
Min
Max
Unit
1
TsA (ALE)
Address Set-up Time before ALE ↓
Tck*Wa+TckH - 48
160
ns
2
ThALE (A)
Address Hold Time after ALE ↓
TckL - 31
10
ns
3
TwALE
ALE High Pulse Width
Tck*Wa+TckH - 58
150
ns
4
TdAz (OEN)
Address Float (P0) to OEN ↓
0
0
ns
5
TdOEN(Az)
P0 driven after OEN ↑
TckL - 13
29
ns
6
TwOEN
OEN Low Pulse Width
Tck*Wd+TckH - 36
172
ns
7
TwWEN
WEN Low Pulse Width
Tck*Wd+TckH - 36
172
8
TdOEN (DR)
OEN ↓ to Data Valid Delay
Tck*Wd+TckH - 44
9
ThDR (OEN)
Data hold time after OEN ↑
0
0
ns
10
ThOEN(A)
Address (A21:A8) hold time after OEN ↑
0
0
ns
11
ThWEN(A)
Address (A21:A8) hold time after WEN ↑
0
0
ns
12
TvA(OEN)
Address (A21:A0) valid to OEN ↑
Tck (Wd+Wa+1.5) - 76
382
ns
13
TvA(WEN)
Address (A21:A0) valid to WEN ↑
Tck (Wd+Wa+1.5) - 44
414
ns
ns
ns
164
ns
14
TsD (WEN)
Data Set-up time before WEN ↑
Tck*Wd+TckH - 158
50
15
ThWEN(DW)
Data Hold Time after WEN ↑
TckL - 37
5
ns
16
TdALE (WEN)
ALE ↑ to WEN ↑ Delay
Tck (Wd+Wa+1.5) - 54
404
ns
17
TdALE (OEN)
ALE ↑ to OEN ↑ Delay
Tck (Wd+Wa+1.5) - 50
408
ns
Notes:
The expressions in the “Formula” column show how to calculate the typical parameter value depending on the CPU clock
period and the number of inserted wait cycles. The values in the Min column give the parameter values for a CPU clock
at 12MHz and two wait states for T1 and T2.
For certain versions of the ST92F150, the external bus has high-drive capabilities.
Legend:
Tck = INTCLK period = OSCIN period when OSCIN is not divided by 2;
= 2*OSCIN period when OSCIN is divided by 2;
= OSCIN period / PLL factor when the PLL is enabled
TckH = INTCLK high pulse width (normally = Tck/2, except when INTCLK = OSCIN, in which case it is OSCIN high pulse
width)
TckL = INTCLK low pulse width (normally = Tck/2, except when INTCLK = OSCIN, in which case it is OSCIN low pulse
width)
P = clock prescaling value (=PRS; division factor = 1+P)
Wa = wait cycles on ALE; = max (P, programmed wait cycles in EMR2, requested wait cycles with WAIT)
Wd = wait cycles on OEN and WEN ; = max (P, programmed wait cycles in WCR, requested wait cycles with WAIT)
387/426
1
ST92F124/F150/F250 - ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
EXTERNAL BUS TIMING
CPUCLK
A21 - A8
PORT9/1
12
PORT0
(READ)
D7-D0 IN
A7-A0
1
2
9
16
ALE
3
4
OEN
(READ)
17
8
6
5
13
WEN
(WRITE)
10
7
14
PORT0
(WRITE)
A7-A0
11
15
D7-D0 OUT
Note : OEN stays high for the whole write cycle and WEN stays high for the whole read cycle.
388/426
1
ST92F124/F150/F250 - ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
WATCHDOG TIMING TABLE
(VDD = 5V ± 10%, TA = –40°C to +125°C, CLoad = 50pF, fINTCLK = 24MHz, Push-pull output configuration,
unless otherwise specified)
N°
Symbol
1
TwWDOL
Parameter
WDOUT Low Pulse Width
Value
Formula
4 x (Psc+1) x (Cnt+1) x Tck
(Psc+1) x (Cnt+1) x TWDIN
4 x (Psc+1) x (Cnt+1) x Tck
Min
Max
167
Unit
ns
2.8
333
s
ns
167
ns
2.8
s
2
TwWDOH
WDOUT High Pulse Width
(Psc+1) x (Cnt+1) x TWDIN
333
ns
3
TwWDIL
WDIN High Pulse Width
≥ 4 x Tck
167
ns
4
TwWDIH
WDIN Low Pulse Width
≥ 4 x Tck
167
ns
Note: The value in the left hand column shows the formula used to calculate the timing minimum or maximum from the oscillator clock period,
watchdog prescaler and counter programmed values.
The value in the right hand two columns show the timing minimum and maximum for an internal clock (INTCLK) at 24MHz, with minimum and
maximum prescaler value and minimum and maximum counter value.
Measurement points are VOH or VIH for positive pulses and VOL or VIL for negative pulses.
Legend:
Tck = INTCLK period = Crystal Oscillator Clock period when CLOCK1 is not divided by 2;
2 x Crystal Oscillator Clock period when CLOCK1 is divided by 2;
Crystal Oscillator Clock period x PLL factor when the PLL is enabled.
Psc = Watchdog Prescaler Register content (WDTPR): from 0 to 255
Cnt = Watchdog Couter Registers content (WDTRH,WDTRL): from 0 to 65535
TWDIN = Watchdog Input signal period (WDIN), TWDIN ≥ 8 x Tck
WATCHDOG TIMING
389/426
1
ST92F124/F150/F250 - ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
STANDARD TIMER TIMING TABLE
(VDD = 5V ± 10%, TA = –40°C to +125°C, CLoad = 50pF, fINTCLK = 24MHz, Push-pull output configuration,
unless otherwise specified)
N°
1
Symbol
TwSTOL
Parameter
STOUT Low Pulse Width
Value
Formula
4 x (Psc+1) x (Cnt+1) x Tck
(Psc+1) x (Cnt+1) x TSTIN
2
TwSTOH
STOUT High Pulse Width
4 x (Psc+1) x (Cnt+1) x Tck
Min
Max
167
(1)
Unit
ns
2.8
s
(1)
ns
167
ns
2.8
s
(1)
ns
(Psc+1) x (Cnt+1) x TSTIN
(1)
3
TwSTIL
STIN High Pulse Width
≥ 4 x Tck
(1)
(1)
ns
4
TwSTIH
STIN Low Pulse Width
≥ 4 x Tck
(1)
(1)
ns
Note: The value in the left hand column shows the formula used to calculate the timing minimum or maximum from the oscillator clock period,
standard timer prescaler and counter programmed values.
The value in the right hand two columns show the timing minimum and maximum for an internal clock (INTCLK) at 24MHz, with minimum and
maximum prescaler value and minimum and maximum counter value.
Measurement points are VOH or VIH for positive pulses and VOL or VIL for negative pulses.
(1) On this product STIN is not available as Alternate Function but it is internally connected to a precise clock source directly derived from the
crystal oscillator. Refer to RCCU chapter for details about clock distribution.
Legend:
Tck = INTCLK period = Crystal Oscillator Clock period when CLOCK1 is not divided by 2;
2 x Crystal Oscillator Clock period when CLOCK1 is divided by 2;
Crystal Oscillator Clock period x PLL factor when the PLL is enabled.
Psc = Standard Timer Prescaler Register content (STP): from 0 to 255
Cnt = Standard Timer Counter Registers content (STH,STL): from 0 to 65535
TSTIN = Standard Timer Input signal period (STIN) , TSTIN ≥ 8 x Tck
STANDARD TIMER TIMING
390/426
1
ST92F124/F150/F250 - ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
EXTENDED FUNCTION TIMER EXTERNAL TIMING TABLE
(VDD = 5V ± 10%, TA = –40°C to +125°C, CLoad = 50pF, fINTCLK = 24MHz, unless otherwise specified)
N°
Symbol
Value
Parameter
Formula
Min
Unit
1
TwPEWL
External Clock low pulse width (EXTCLK)
≥ 2 x Tck + 10
52
ns
2
TwPEWH
External Clock high pulse width (EXTCLK)
≥ 2 x Tck + 10
52
ns
3
TwPIWL
Input Capture low pulse width (ICAPx)
≥ 2 x Tck + 10
52
ns
4
TwPIWH
Input Capture high pulse width (ICAPx)
≥ 2 x Tck + 10
52
ns
5
TwECKD
Distance between two active edges on EXTCLK
6
TwEICD
Distance between two active edges on ICAPx
≥ 4 x Tck + 10
177
ns
≥ 2 x Tck x Prsc +10
177
ns
Note: The value in the left hand column shows the formula used to calculate the timing minimum or maximum from the oscillator clock period,
standard timer prescaler and counter programmed values.
The value in the right hand two columns show the timing minimum and maximum for an internal clock (INTCLK) at 24MHz, and minimum
prescaler factor (=2).
Measurement points are VIH for positive pulses and VIL for negative pulses.
Legend:
Tck = INTCLK period = Crystal Oscillator Clock period when CLOCK1 is not divided by 2;
2 x Crystal Oscillator Clock period when CLOCK1 is divided by 2;
Crystal Oscillator Clock period x PLL factor when the PLL is enabled.
Prsc = Precsaler factor defined by Extended Function Timer Clock Control bits (CC1,CC0) on control register CR2 (values: 2,4,8).
EXTENDED FUNCTION TIMER EXTERNAL TIMING
1
2
EXTCLK
5
3
4
ICAPA
ICAPB
6
391/426
1
ST92F124/F150/F250 - ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER EXTERNAL TIMING TABLE
(VDD = 5V ± 10%, TA = –40°C to +125°C, CLoad = 50pF, fINTCLK = 24MHz, unless otherwise specified)
N°
Symbol
1
TwCTW
2
Parameter
Value
Unit
Note
-
ns
(1)
n x 42
-
ns
(1)
3 x Tck
125
-
ns
6 x Tck
250
-
ns
42
-
ns
(2)
Distance between TINA pulse edge and the following TINB pulse edge
0
-
ns
(2)
TwAD
Distance between two TxINA pulses
0
-
ns
(2)
TwOWD
Minimum output pulse width/distance
125
-
ns
Formula
Min
Max
External clock/trigger pulse width
n x Tck
n x 42
TwCTD
External clock/trigger pulse distance
n x Tck
3
TwAED
Distance between two active edges
4
TwGW
Gate pulse width
5
TwLBA
Distance between TINB pulse edge and the following TINA pulse edge
Tck
6
TwLAB
7
8
3 x Tck
Note: The value in the left hand column shows the formula used to calculate the timing minimum or maximum from the oscillator clock period,
standard timer prescaler and counter programmed values.
The value in the right hand two columns show the timing minimum and maximum for an internal clock (INTCLK) at 24MHz.
(1) n = 1 if the input is rising OR falling edge sensitive
n = 3 if the input is rising AND falling edge sensitive
(2) In Autodiscrimination mode
Legend:
Tck = INTCLK period = Crystal Oscillator Clock period when CLOCK1 is not divided by 2;
2 x Crystal Oscillator Clock period when CLOCK1 is divided by 2;
Crystal Oscillator Clock period x PLL factor when the PLL is enabled.
MULTIFUNCTION TIMER EXTERNAL TIMING
392/426
1
ST92F124/F150/F250 - ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
SCI-M TIMING TABLE
(VDD = 5V ± 10%, TA = –40°C to +125°C, CLoad = 50pF, fINTCLK = 24MHz, unless otherwise specified)
N°
Symbol
Parameter
FRxCKIN
Frequency of RxCKIN
TwRxCKIN
RxCKIN shortest pulse
FTxCKIN
Frequency of TxCKIN
TwTxCKIN
TxCKIN shortest pulse
1
Condition
Value (1)
Min
Max
Unit
1x mode
fINTCLK / 8
MHz
16x mode
fINTCLK / 4
MHz
1x mode
4 x Tck
s
16x mode
2 x Tck
s
1x mode
fINTCLK / 8
MHz
16x mode
fINTCLK / 4
MHz
1x mode
4 x Tck
s
16x mode
2 x Tck
s
TsDS
DS (Data Stable) before
rising edge of RxCKIN
1x mode reception with RxCKIN
Tck / 2
ns
2
TdD1
TxCKIN to Data out
delay Time
1x mode transmission with external
clock CLoad < 50pF
3
TdD2
CLKOUT to Data out
delay Time
1x mode transmission with CLKOUT
2.5 x Tck
350
ns
ns
Legend:
Tck = INTCLK period = Crystal Oscillator Clock period when CLOCK1 is not divided by 2;
2 x Crystal Oscillator Clock period when CLOCK1 is divided by 2;
Crystal Oscillator Clock period x PLL factor when the PLL is enabled.
Note 1: Values guaranteed by product characterization, not tested in production.
SCI TIMING
393/426
1
ST92F124/F150/F250 - ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
SPI TIMING TABLE
(VDD = 5V ± 10%, TA = –40°C to +125°C, CLoad = 50pF, fINTCLK = 24MHz, unless otherwise specified)
Value (1)
N° Symbol
Parameter
Condition
Unit
Min
Max
fINTCLK / 4
fINTCLK / 2
fSPI
SPI frequency
Master
Slave
fINTCLK / 128
0
1
tSPI
SPI clock period
Master
Slave
4 x Tck
2 x Tck
2
tLead
Enable lead time
Slave
40
ns
3
tLag
Enable lag time
Slave
40
ns
4
tSPI_H
Clock (SCK) high time
Master
Slave
80
90
ns
5
tSPI_L
Clock (SCK) low time
Master
Slave
80
90
ns
6
tSU
Data set-up time
Master
Slave
40
40
ns
7
tH
Data hold time (inputs)
Master
Slave
40
40
ns
8
tA
Access time (time to data active
from high impedance state)
9
tDis
10
tV
11
Disable time (hold time to high impedance state)
0
MHz
ns
120
ns
240
ns
120
ns
ns
Slave
Data valid
Master (before capture edge)
Slave (after enable edge)
Tck / 4
tHold
Data hold time (outputs)
Master (before capture edge)
Slave (after enable edge)
Tck / 4
0
12
tRise
Outputs: SCK,MOSI,MISO
Rise time
(20% VDD to 70% VDD, CL = 200pF) Inputs: SCK,MOSI,MISO,SS
100
100
ns
µs
13
tFall
Outputs: SCK,MOSI,MISO
Fall time
(70% VDD to 20% VDD, CL = 200pF) Inputs: SCK,MOSI,MISO,SS
100
100
ns
µs
Note:
Measurement points are VOL, VOH, VIL and VIH in the SPI Timing Diagram.
(1) Values guaranteed by design.
Legend:
Tck = INTCLK period = Crystal Oscillator Clock period when CLOCK1 is not divided by 2;
2 x Crystal Oscillator Clock period when CLOCK1 is divided by 2;
Crystal Oscillator Clock period x PLL factor when the PLL is enabled.
394/426
1
ns
ns
ST92F124/F150/F250 - ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
SPI Master Timing Diagram CPHA=0, CPOL=0
SS
(INPUT)
1
13
12
SCK
(OUTPUT)
4
MISO
(INPUT)
6
MOSI
(OUTPUT)
10
5
D7-IN
7
D6-IN
D0-IN
D6-OUT
D7-OUT
11
D0-OUT
VR000109
SPI Master Timing Diagram CPHA=0, CPOL=1
SS
(INPUT)
1
13
SCK
(OUTPUT)
5
MISO
(INPUT)
6
MOSI
(OUTPUT)
10
12
4
D7-IN
7
D6-IN
D0-IN
D6-OUT
D7-OUT
11
D0-OUT
VR000110
SPI Master Timing Diagram CPHA=1, CPOL=0
SS
(INPUT)
1
13
SCK
(OUTPUT)
4
MISO
(INPUT)
5
D7-OUT
6
MOSI
(OUTPUT)
12
10
D6-OUT
D0-OUT
7
D6-IN
D7-IN
11
D0-IN
VR000107
SPI Master Timing Diagram CPHA=1, CPOL=1
SS
(INPUT)
1
12
SCK
(OUTPUT)
MISO
(INPUT)
MOSI
(OUTPUT)
5
13
4
6
10
D7-IN
7
D7-OUT
11
D6-IN
D6-OUT
D0-IN
D0-OUT
VR000108
395/426
1
ST92F124/F150/F250 - ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
SPI Slave Timing Diagram CPHA=0, CPOL=0
SS
(INPUT)
2
1
4
MISO HIGH-Z
(OUTPUT)
8
MOSI
(INPUT)
3
12
13
SCK
(INPUT)
5
D7-OUT
D6-OUT
D0-OUT
11
10
D7-IN
9
D6-IN
D0-IN
7
6
VR000113
SPI Slave Timing Diagram CPHA=0, CPOL=1
SS
(INPUT)
2
1
13
12
SCK
(INPUT)
4
5
MISO
HIGH-Z
(OUTPUT)
8
MOSI
(INPUT)
3
D7-OUT
D6-OUT
D0-OUT
11
10
D7-IN
9
D6-IN
D0-IN
7
6
VR000114
SPI Slave Timing Diagram CPHA=1, CPOL=0
SS
(INPUT)
2
SCK
(INPUT)
HIGH-Z
MISO
(OUTPUT)
1
4
13
3
5
D7-OUT
D6-OUT
8
10
MOSI
(INPUT)
12
D7-IN
D0-OUT
9
11
D6-IN
D0-IN
7
6
VR000111
SPI Slave Timing Diagram CPHA=1, CPOL=1
SS
(INPUT)
2
1
HIGH-Z
MISO
(OUTPUT)
5
8
D6-OUT
10
D7-IN
6
3
4
D7-OUT
MOSI
(INPUT)
13
12
SCK
(INPUT)
D0-OUT
9
11
D6-IN
D0-IN
7
VR000112
396/426
1
ST92F124/F150/F250 - ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
I2C/DDC-BUS TIMING TABLE
(VDD = 5V ± 10%, TA = –40°C to +125°C, CLoad = 50pF, fINTCLK = 24MHz, unless otherwise specified)
Symbol
fINTCLK
fSCL
TBUF
THIGH
TLOW
THD:STA
TSU:STA
THD:DAT
TSU:DAT
TR
TF
TSU:STO
Cb
Parameter
Protocol Specifications
Standard I2C
Fast I2C
Min
Max
Min
Max
2.5
2.5
0
100
0
400
Formula
Internal Frequency (Slave Mode)
SCL clock frequency
Bus free time between a STOP and
4.7
START condition
SCL clock high period
4.0
Standard Mode
4.7
SCL clock low period
Fast Mode
Hold time START condition. After this
4.0
TLOW + Tck
period, the first clock pulse is generated
Set-up time for a repeated START condi- TLOW + THIGH
4.7
tion
– THD:STA
FREQ[2:0] = 000
3 x Tck
FREQ[2:0] = 001
4 x Tck
Data hold time
0 (1;2)
FREQ[2:0] = 010
4 x Tck
FREQ[2:0] = 011
10 x Tck
Data set-up time
TLOW – THD:DAT
(Without SCL stretching)
FREQ[2:0] = 000
7 x Tck
250(1)
Data set-up time
FREQ[2:0] = 001
15 x Tck
(With SCL stretchFREQ[2:0] = 010
15 x Tck
ing)
FREQ[2:0] = 011
31 x Tck
Rise time of both SDA and SCL signals
1000 (1)
Fall time of both SDA and SCL signals
300 (1)
(1)
4.0
TLOW + THIGH
Set-up time for STOP condition
– THD:STA
Capacitive load for each bus line
Unit
MHz
kHz
1.3
µs
0.6
µs
µs
1.3
0.6
µs
0.6
µs
0 (1;2)
µs
0.9 (1;3)
100 (1)
ns
20+0.1Cb (1)
20+0.1Cb (1)
ns
ns
0.6 (1)
ns
400
400
pF
Note:
(1) Value guaranteed by design.
(2) The ST9 device must internally provide a hold time of at least 300 ns for the SDA signal in order to bridge the undefined region of the falling edge of SCL
(3) The maximum hold time of the START condition has only to be met if the interface does not stretch the low period of SCL signal
Legend:
Tck = INTCLK period = Crystal Oscillator Clock period when CLOCK1 is not divided by 2;
2 x Crystal Oscillator Clock period when CLOCK1 is divided by 2;
Crystal Oscillator Clock period x PLL factor when the PLL is enabled.
Cb = total capacitance of one bus line in pF
FREQ[2:0] = Frequency bits value of I2C Own Address Register 2 (I2COAR2)
I2C TIMING
SDA
t BUF
t LOW
tR
t HD:STA
tF
t SP
SCL
t SU:STO
t HD:STA
P
S
t HD:DAT
t HIGH
t SU:DAT
t SU:STA
Sr
P
397/426
1
ST92F124/F150/F250 - ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
I2C/DDC-BUS TIMING TABLE (Cont’d)
The following table gives the values to be written in
the I2CCCR and I2CECCR registers to obtain the
required I2C SCL line frequency.
Table 70. SCL Frequency Table
I2CCCR Value
fSCL
(kHz)
400
300
200
100
50
fCPU=12 MHz
fCPU=24 MHz.
VDD = 5 V
RP=3.3kΩ
I2CECCR I2CCCR
0
86h
0
89h
0
90h
0
36h
0
72h
RP=4.7kΩ
I2CECCR I2CCCR
0
85h
0
89h
0
8Fh
0
36h
0
72h
RP=3.3kΩ
I2CECCR I2CCCR
0
8Fh
0
95h
0
A2h
0
71h
0
64h
Legend:
RP = External pull-up resistance
fSCL = I2C speed
NA = Not achievable
Note:
– For speeds around 200 kHz, achieved speed can have ±5% tolerance
– For other speed ranges, achieved speed can have ±2% tolerance
The above variations depend on the accuracy of the external components used.
398/426
1
RP=4.7kΩ
I2CECCR I2CCCR
0
8Eh
0
94h
0
A2h
0
70h
1
64h
ST92F124/F150/F250 - ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
J1850 BYTE LEVEL PROTOCOL DECODER TIMING TABLE
(VDD = 5V ± 10%, TA = –40°C to +125°C, CLoad = 50pF, fINTCLK = 24MHz, unless otherwise specified)
Value
Symbol
Parameter
Receive Mode
Transmission Mode
Unit
Note
-
µs
(1)(2)
Min
Max
Nominal
0
≤7
TF
Symbols Filtered
TIB
Invalid Bit Detected
>7
≤ 34
-
µs
(1)(2)
TP0
Passive Data Bit “0”
> 34
≤ 96
64
µs
(1)(2)(3)
TA0
Active Data Bit “0”
> 96
≤ 163
128
µs
(1)(2)(3)
TP1
Passive Data Bit “1”
> 96
≤ 163
128
µs
(1)(2)(3)
TA1
Active Data Bit “1”
> 34
≤ 96
64
µs
(1)(2)(3)
TNBS
Short Normalization Bit
> 34
≤ 96
64
µs
(1)(2)(3)
TNBL
Long Normalization Bit
> 96
≤ 163
128
µs
(1)(2)(3)
TSOF
Start Of Frame Symbol
> 163
≤ 239
200
µs
(1)(2)(3)
TEOD
End Of Data Symbol
> 163
≤ 239
200
µs
(1)(2)(3)
TEOF
End Of Frame Symbol
> 239
-
280
µs
(1)(2)(3)
TBRK
Break Symbol
> 239
-
300
µs
(1)(2)(3)
TIDLE
Idle Symbol
> 280
-
300
µs
(1)(2)(3)
Note:
(1) Values obtained with internal frequency at 24 MHz (INTCLK), with CLKSEL Register set to 23.
(2) In Transmission Mode, symbol durations are compliant to nominal values defined by the J1850 Protocol Specifications.
(3) All values are reported with a precision of ±1 µs.
J1850 PROTOCOL TIMING
T SOF
T P0
T A0
T P1
T A1
T EOD
T NBS
T IDLE
T EOF
“0” LONG
“1” LONG
“1” SHORT
EOD
T P0
T A0
T P1
T A1
T EOD
T NBL
EOF / IDLE
“0” SHORT
T SOF
NB SHORT
SOF
VPWO
T IDLE
T EOF
EOF / IDLE
NB LONG
EOD
“1” SHORT
“1” LONG
“0” LONG
“0” SHORT
SOF
VPWO
399/426
1
ST92F124/F150/F250 - ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
10-BIT ADC CHARACTERISTICS
Subject to general operating conditions for VDD, fOSC, and TA, unless otherwise specified.
Symbol
Parameter
Conditions
fADC
ADC clock frequency
VAIN
Conversion range voltage (2)
VAINx
Analog Input Voltage
RAIN
External source impedance
Min
Typ 1)
Max
Unit
1
4
MHz
AVSS
AVDD
V
-0.2
AVDD +0.2
10 (3)
CADC
Internal sample and hold capacitor
RADC
Analog input pin impedance
1.7
tSTAB
Stabilization time after ADC enable
10
Conversion time (Sample+Hold)
tADC
- Sample capacitor loading time
- Hold conversion time
IVDDA
VDDA input current
6
(3,4)
fADC = 4 MHz
7
kΩ
pF
kΩ
µs
8
20
1/fADC
1 (4)
mA
Figure 161. Typical Application with ADC
VDD
RAIN
AINx
VAIN
ADC
CIO
~2pF
ILKADC
±1µA
VDD
AVDD
0.1µF
AVSS
Notes:
1. Unless otherwise specified, typical data is based on TA=25°C and VDD-VSS=5V. These values are given only as design
guidelines and are not tested.
2. VAIN may exceed AVSS or AVDD. However the conversion result in these cases will be 0000h or FFC0h respectively.
3. Any external serial impedance will downgrade the ADC accuracy (especially for resistance greater than 10 kΩ). Data
based on characterization results, not tested in production.
4. Value guaranteed by design.
400/426
1
ST92F124/F150/F250 - ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
10-BIT ADC CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)
ADC Accuracy (VDD=5V+/-10%, TA=-40°C to +125°C)
Symbol
Parameter
Typ 1)
Conditions
Monotonicity
Guaranteed 2)
No missing codes
Guaranteed 2)
Max
|Et|
Total unadjusted error 3)
1.5
6
|Eo|
Offset error 3)
1
5.5
|Eg|
Gain Error 3)
1.5
6
|Ed|
Differential linearity error 3)
0.5
1.5
|El|
Integral linearity error 3)
0.5
1.5
fADC = 4MHz
Unit
LSB
1. Typical data is based on TA=25°C, Vdd=5V
2. Monotonicity and No Missing Codes are guaranteed by design.
3. Refer to Figure 162. for the definition of these parameters.
Figure 162. ADC Accuracy Characteristics
Digital Result DiHR/DiLR
EG
1023
1022
1021
1LSB
IDEAL
A VDD – A VSS
= -----------------------------------------
1024
(2)
ET
(3)
7
(1)
6
5
4
(1) Example of an actual transfer curve
(2) The ideal transfer curve
(3) End point correlation line
EO
EL
3
ED
2
ET=Total Unadjusted Error: maximum deviation
between the actual and the ideal transfer curves.
EO=Offset Error: deviation between the first actual
transition and the first ideal one.
EG=Gain Error: deviation between the last ideal
transition and the last actual one.
ED=Differential Linearity Error: maximum deviation
between actual steps and the ideal one.
EL=Integral Linearity Error: maximum deviation
between any actual transition and the end point
correlation line.
1 LSBIDEAL
1
0
1
AVSS
Vin (LSBIDEAL)
2
3
4
5
6
7
1021 1022 1023 1024
AVDD
401/426
1
ST92F124/F150/F250 - GENERAL INFORMATION
12 GENERAL INFORMATION
12.1 ORDERING INFORMATION
Figure 163. Device Types
ST92 F 150 J D V 1 Q C
Temperature Code:
B: Automotive -40°C to 105°C
C: Automotive -40° C to 125° C
6: Standard -40° C to 85° C
Package Type:
Q: PQFP
T: TQFP
Memory Size:
2: 256K
1: 128K
9: 64K
Pin Count:
V: 100 pins
R: 64 pins
Feature 2:
C: 1 CAN
D: Dual (2) CAN
No Character: No CAN
Feature 1:
No Character: No J1850
J: J1850
ST Sub-family
Version:
F: Flash
No Character: ROM
ST Family
12.2 VERSION-SPECIFIC SALES CONDITIONS
To satisfy the different customer requirements and to ensure that ST Standard Microcontrollers will consistently meet or exceed the expectations of each Market Segment, the Codification System for Standard
Microcontrollers clearly distinguishes products intended for use in automotive environments, from products intended for use in non-automotive environments. It is the responsibility of the Customer to select the
appropriate product for his application.
402/426
1
ST92F124/F150/F250 - GENERAL INFORMATION
ORDERING INFORMATION (Cont’d)
Table 71. Supported part numbers
Part Number
Program
Memory
(Bytes)
RAM
(Bytes)
ST92F124R9TB
ST92F150CR9TB
64K FLASH
Temperature
TQFP64
-40°C to 105°C
TQFP64
-40°C to 105°C
ST92F150CV9TB
TQFP100
-40°C to 105°C
ST92F124V1QB
PQFP100
-40°C to 105°C
ST92F124V1TB
TQFP100
-40°C to 105°C
ST92F124V1T6
ST92F150CR1TB
ST92F150CV1QB
2K
Package
4K
128K FLASH
ST92F150CV1TB
ST92F150JDV1QC
6K
ST92F150JDV1TC
ST92F250CV2TC
ST92F250CV2T6
ST92F250CV2QB
TQFP100
-40°C to 85°C
TQFP64
-40°C to 105°C
PQFP100
-40°C to 105°C
TQFP100
-40°C to 105°C
PQFP100
TQFP100
-40°C to 125°C
TQFP100
256K FLASH
ST92F250CV2TB
8K
TQFP100
-40°C to 85°C
PQFP100
-40°C to 105°C
TQFP100
-40°C to 105°C
Contact ST sales office for product availability
403/426
1
ST92F124/F150/F250 - GENERAL INFORMATION
12.3 PACKAGE MECHANICAL DATA
Figure 164. 64-Pin Thin Quad Flat Package
D
A
D1
A2
Dim.
mm
Min
Typ
A
A1
b
e
E1 E
L
Min
Typ
Max
1.60
0.063
0.15 0.002
0.006
A1
0.05
A2
1.35
1.40
1.45 0.053 0.055 0.057
b
0.30
0.37
0.45 0.012 0.015 0.018
c
0.09
0.20 0.004
0.008
D
16.00
0.630
D1
14.00
0.551
E
16.00
0.630
E1
14.00
0.551
e
0.80
0.031
θ
0°
3.5°
L
0.45
0.60
L1
7°
0°
3.5°
7°
0.75 0.018 0.024 0.030
1.00
L1
0.039
Number of Pins
c
h
inches
Max
N
64
Figure 165. 100-Pin Thin Quad Flat Package
A
D
D1
Dim.
A2
mm
Min
Typ
A
A1
inches
Max
Min
Typ
Max
1.60
0.063
0.15 0.002
0.006
A1
0.05
A2
1.35
1.40
1.45 0.053 0.055 0.057
b
0.17
0.22
0.27 0.007 0.009 0.011
C
0.09
b
e
E1
E
c
L1
0.630
D1
14.00
0.551
E
16.00
0.630
E1
14.00
0.551
e
0.50
0.020
θ
0°
3.5°
L
0.45
0.60
L1
7°
0°
3.5°
N
7°
0.75 0.018 0.024 0.030
1.00
0.039
Number of Pins
h
1
0.008
16.00
L
404/426
0.20 0.004
D
100
ST92F124/F150/F250 - GENERAL INFORMATION
Figure 166. 100-Pin Plastic Quad Flat Package
D
A
D1
Dim.
A2
D2
A1
b
e
E2 E1 E
L
1.60 mm
c
mm
Min
Typ
A
inches
Max
Min
0.50 0.010
0.020
0.25
A2
2.50
b
0.22
0.40 0.009
c
0.11
0.23 0.004
2.90 0.098 0.106 0.114
0.016
0.009
D
23.20
0.913
D1
20.00
0.787
D2
18.85
0.742
E
17.20
0.677
E1
14.00
0.551
E2
12.35
0.486
e
0.65
0.026
L
0×- 7×
0.73
0.88
Max
0.134
A1
2.70
Typ
3.40
1.03 0.029 0.035 0.041
Number of Pins
N
100
405/426
1
ST92F124/F150/F250 - GENERAL INFORMATION
12.4 DEVELOPMENT TOOLS
STMicroelectronics offers a range of hardware
and software development tools for the ST9 microcontroller family. Full details of tools available for
the ST9 from third party manufacturers can be obtain from the STMicroelectronics Internet site:
➟ http//mcu.st.com.
Tools from these manufacturers include realtime
kernel software and gang programmers.
Table 72. STMicroelectronics Development Tools
Supported Products
Emulator
ST92F124 (TQFP64, TQFP100)
Programming Board
ST92F150-EPB/EU
ST92F150 (TQFP64, TQFP100,
PQFP100
ST92F250 (1) (TQFP100, PQFP100)
ST92F150-EMU2
ST92F150-EPB/US
ST92F150-EPB/UK
Note 1: The I²C 1 and the general purpose I/Os P3.0, P6.6 and P6.7 cannot be emulated by this emulator.
Since the upper 128Kbytes of Flash memory are emulated with a RAM memory, the programming operations on the F4 and F5 Flash sectors are not emulated.
12.4.1 Socket and Emulator Adapter Information
For information on the type of socket that is supplied with ST92F150-EMU2, refer to the suggested list of sockets in Table 73.
Note: Before designing the board layout, it is recommended to check the overall dimensions of the
socket as they may be greater than the dimensions of the device.
For footprint and other mechanical information
about these sockets and adapters, refer to the
manufacturer’s datasheet (available from www.yamaichi.de for TQFP100 and PQFP100 and from
www.cabgmbh.com for TQFP64).
Table 73. Suggested List of Socket Types
406/426
1
Device
Socket (supplied with ST92F150EMU2)
Emulator Adapter (supplied with
ST92F150-EMU2)
TQFP64 14 x14
CAB 3303262
CAB 3303351
TQFP100 14 x14
YAMAICHI IC149-100-*25-*5
YAMAICHI ICP-100-5
PQFP100 14 x 20
YAMAICHI IC149-100-*14-*5
YAMAICHI ICP-100-4-4
ST92F124/F150/F250 - KNOWN LIMITATIONS
13 KNOWN LIMITATIONS
Limitations described in this section apply to all silicon revisions. Additional limitations exist on specific silicon revisions identified by the following
trace codes:
– Gxxxxxxxx1 (ST92F124)
– AxxxxxxxxZ (ST92F150)
– AxxxxxxxxY (ST92F150)
– AxxxxxxxxA (ST92F250)
Please contact your nearest sales office for further
information.
13.1 ST92F124/F150/F250 KNOWN LIMITATIONS
13.1.1 FLASH ERASE SUSPEND LIMITATIONS
13.1.1.1 Description
In normal operation, the FSUSP bit (bit 2 in the
FCR register) must be set to suspend the current
Sector Erase operation in Flash memory in order
to access a sector not being erased. The Flash
sector erase operation is done in 3 different steps:
1. Program all addresses to 0 on selected sectors
2. Erase and erase verify
3. Reprogramming
If the erase suspend is performed during Steps 1
and 2, the flash works correctly. If the erase suspend is performed during Step 3, the PGER bit (bit
6 in the FESR1 register) is set although no program error occurred.
13.1.1.2 Workaround
After a Sector Erase suspend operation, the software must check the status register to detect if an
erase error occurred (the corresponding sector
must be discarded). Then the software must reset
the FEERR bit. This automatically resets the flash
status register.
Whatever the state of the PGER bit at the end of
the erase operation, it will not impact the application and an erase error is still detected.
407/426
1
ST92F124/F150/F250 - KNOWN LIMITATIONS
KNOWN LIMITATIONS (Cont’d)
13.1.2 FLASH CORRUPTION WHEN EXITING
STOP MODE
Description
Under very specific conditions, the first read performed in flash memory by the core when exiting
stop mode may be corrupted.
Impact on application
As this first read is an opcode, this corruption may
lead to an unpredictable behavior of the application.
Workaround
Description
In ST92F124/F150/F250 datasheet, there is a
warning in the WUCTRL register description:
“In order to avoid to execute register write instructions after a correct STOP bit setting sequence
and before entering the STOP mode, it is mandatory to execute 3 NOP instructions after the STOP
bit setting sequence.”
The workaround is to replace these 3 NOPs by the
following assembly code:
nop
ldw RRx,0
RRx is an unused register in the register file.
In a C language software, implement the following
code.
Declare a dummy variable in the register file (for
example in RR0 16-bit register)
Implementation
#pragma register_file
Dummy_16bit_data
volatile unsigned int
Dummy_16bit_data;
And replace the actual STOP bit setting sequence
(specified in datasheet):
spp(WU_PG);
WU_CTLR = WUm_wuit | WUm_id1s | WUm_stop;
WU_CTLR = WUm_wuit | WUm_id1s;
WU_CTLR = WUm_wuit | WUm_id1s | WUm_stop;
asm("nop");
asm("nop");
asm("nop");
408/426
1
0
ST92F124/F150/F250 - KNOWN LIMITATIONS
KNOWN LIMITATIONS (Cont’d)
By:
spp(WU_PG);
WU_CTLR = WUm_wuit |
WU_CTLR = WUm_wuit |
WU_CTLR = WUm_wuit |
asm(“nop”);
Dummy_16bit_data
WUm_id1s | WUm_stop;
WUm_id1s;
WUm_id1s | WUm_stop;
= 0;
Compiled code (with –O2 optimization option) and hexa is:
C language
Assembly
Hexa
WU_CTLR = WUm_wuit |
WUm_id1s | WUm_stop;
ld @WU_CTLR, #7
F5 F9 07
WU_CTLR = WUm_wuit |
WUm_id1s;
ld @WU_CTLR, #3
F5 F9 03
WU_CTLR = WUm_wuit |
WUm_id1s | WUm_stop;
ld @WU_CTLR, #7
F5 F9 07
NOP
nop
FF
Comment
The CORE executes the
following NOP and
prefetch the 2 following
bytes (BF and 00)
The two first bytes fetch
in flash after wake up are
00 00
Dummy_16bit_data = 0;
ldw RR0,#0
BF 00 00 00
RR0 is always filled with
00 RR0 is not used in the
software
409/426
1
ST92F124/F150/F250 - KNOWN LIMITATIONS
KNOWN LIMITATIONS (Cont’d)
13.1.3 I2C LIMITATIONS
Limitations
Description
Section 13.1.3.1
Start condition ignored
Mustimaster mode
Section 13.1.3.2
Missing bus error
Master transmitter mode
Section 13.1.3.3
AF bit (acknowledge failure flag)
Transmitter mode (Master and Slave)
Section 13.1.3.4
BUSY bit
Mustimaster mode
Section 13.1.3.5
ARLO (arbitration lost)
Multimaster mode
Section 13.1.3.6
BUSY flag
All
13.1.3.1 Start condition ignored in multimaster
mode
Description
In multimaster configurations, if the ST9 I2C receives a START condition from another I2C
master after the START bit is set in the I2CCR register and before the START condition is generated
by the ST9 I2C, it may ignore the START condition
from the other I2C master. In this case, the ST9
master will receive a NACK from the other device.
On reception of the NACK, ST9 can send a re-start
and Slave address to re-initiate communication.
13.1.3.2 Missing
transmitter mode
Description
BUS
error
in
master
BERR will not be set if an error is detected during
the first or second pulse of each 9-bit transaction.
Single Master Mode:
If a Start or Stop is issued during the first or
second pulse of a 9-bit transaction, the BERR flag
410/426
will not be set and transfer will continue however
the BUSY flag will be reset.
Multimaster Mode:
Normally the BERR bit would be set whenever unauthorized transmission takes place while transfer
is already in progress. However, an issue will arise
if an external master generates an unauthorized
Start or Stop while the I2C master is on the first or
second pulse of a 9-bit transaction.
Workaround
Workaround
1
Mode
Single Master Mode:
Slave devices should issue a NACK when they receive a misplaced Start or Stop. The reception of a
NACK or BUSY by the master in the middle of
communication gives the possibility to reinitiate
transmission.
Multimaster Mode:
It is possible to work around the problem by polling
the BUSY bit during I2C master mode transmission. The resetting of the BUSY bit can then be
handled in a similar manner as the BERR flag
being set.
ST92F124/F150/F250 - KNOWN LIMITATIONS
KNOWN LIMITATIONS (Cont’d)
13.1.3.3 AF bit (acknowledge failure flag) in
transmitter mode (slave and master)
Description
13.1.3.5 ARLO (arbitration
multimaster mode
Description
The AF bit is cleared by reading the I2CSR2 register. However, if read before the completion of the
transmission, the AF flag will be set again, thus
possibly generating a new interrupt.
In a Multimaster environment, when the interface
is configured in Master Receive mode it does not
perform arbitration during the reception of the Acknowledge Bit. Mishandling of the ARLO bit from
the I2CSR2 register may occur when a second
master simultaneously requests the same data
from the same slave and the I2C master does not
acknowledge the data. The ARLO bit is then left at
0 instead of being set.
Workaround
Software must ensure either that the SCL line is
back at 0 before reading the SR2 register, or be
able to correctly handle a second interrupt during
the 9th pulse of a transmitted byte.
13.1.3.4 BUSY flag in multimaster mode
Description
The BUSY flag is NOT updated when the interface
is disabled (PE=0). This can have consequences
when operating in Multimaster mode; i.e. a second
active I2C master commencing a transfer with an
unset BUSY bit can cause a conflict resulting in
lost data.
Workaround
Check that the I2C is not busy before enabling the
I2C Multimaster cell.
lost)
flag
in
Workaround
None
13.1.3.6 BUSY flag gets cleared when BUS
error occurs
Description
BUSY bit gets cleared when the BUS error occurs
but the bus is actually BUSY (SCL line shows CLK
pulses). Contradictory, M/SL bit is unaffected on
BUS error
Workaround
If a Bus Error occurs, a Stop or a repeated Start
condition should be generated by the Master to resynchronize communication, get the transmission
acknowledged and the bus released for further
communication
411/426
1
ST92F124/F150/F250 - KNOWN LIMITATIONS
KNOWN LIMITATIONS (Cont’d)
13.1.4 SCI-A AND CAN INTERRUPTS
Description
SCI-A interrupt (I0 channel) and CAN interrupts
(channels E0, E1, F0, F1, G0, G1, H0, H1) do not
respond when the CPUCLK is prescaled (MODER
register).
Workaround
Avoid using CPU prescaler when SCI-A and/or
CAN interrupts are used in the application.
13.1.5 SCI-A MUTE MODE
13.1.5.1 Mute Mode Description
The SCI can be put in Mute mode waiting for an
Idle line detection or an Address Mark detection,
and discarding all other byte transmissions. This is
done by setting the RWU (Receiver wake-up) bit in
the SCICR2 register (R244, page 26). This bit can
be reset either by software, to leave the Mute
mode, or by hardware when a wake up condition
has been reached.
A received data is indicated by the RDRF (Read
Data Ready Flag) bit in the SCISR register (R240,
page 26). This status bit is evaluated at the end of
the stop bit. If the RWU bit is in the set state at the
end of the stop bit, the data is not loaded in the
data register and the RDRF bit is not set.
On the contrary, if the RWU bit is in the reset state
at the end of the stop bit the data is loaded in the
data register and the RDRF bit is set.
13.1.5.2 Limitation Description
The SCICR2 also contains the following configuration bits: Interrupt Enable, Transmitter Enable, Receiver Enable and Send Break.
When the value of one of these bits is modified by
software, the SCICR2 register is read, its value is
modified and reloaded in the SCICR2 register. If
the SCI-A is in Mute mode during the read operation (RWU=1) and if an address mark event occurs
(resetting the RWU bit) before the write operation,
the RWU bit is set before the end of the stop bit. In
this case, the RDRF bit is not set, the data is not
received and no flag indicates the lost of the data.
RWU
int
Mute mode mechanism
Consequence
The address byte is lost and the SCI-A is again in
Mute mode.
1
Stop
RWU
RDRF
412/426
data
Address
Stop
data
Address
Data Line
Start
Data Line
Start
Figure 1. Mute Mode Mechanism on address mark
RDRF
ld r0,SCICR2
and r0,0x80
ld SCICR2, r0
Corrupted Mute mode mechanism
under an SCICR2 access
13.1.5.3 Workaround
If you need to disable the SCI-A interrupt while it is
in Mute mode, use the global interrupt mask in the
dedicated interrupt controller, refer to Section 5.7
“Standard Interrupts” in the datasheet. Do not
change the TE, RE and SBK bits in the SCICR2
register while the SCI-A is in Mute mode.
ST92F124/F150/F250 - KNOWN LIMITATIONS
KNOWN LIMITATIONS (Cont’d)
13.1.6 CAN FIFO CORRUPTION WHEN 2 FIFO
MESSAGES ARE PENDING
Description
Under certain conditions, FIFO corruption can
occur in the following cases:
WHEN a bxCAN RX FIFO already holds 2 messages (i.e. FMP==2)
AND the application releases the same FIFO
(with the instruction CANx_CTRL_CRFRy |=
CRF_rfom;
x=0 for the CAN_0 cell
x=1 for the CAN_1 cell
y=0 for the Receive FIFO 0
y=1 for the Receive FIFO 1 )
Figure 2. FIFO Corruption
FMP
Initial State
0
Receive Message A
1
Receive Message B
2
Receive Message C
3
Release Message A
2
Release Message B
2
and Receive Message D
Receive Message E
3
Release Message C
2
Release Message E
1
Release Message B
0
WHILE the bxCAN requests the transfer of a new
receive message into the FIFO (this lasts one CPU
cycle)
THEN the internal FIFO pointer is not updated
BUT the FMP bits are updated correctly
Impact on Application:
As the FIFO pointer is not updated correctly, this
causes the last message received to be overwritten by any incoming message. This means one
message is lost as shown in the example in Figure
2 The bxCAN will not recover normal operation
until a device reset occurs.
FIFO
*v
- - v
A
v
A
v
A
When the FIFO is empty, v and * point to the same location
*
- *
B -
*
B C * does not move because FIFO is full (normal operation)
* v
A B C
* v
Normal operation
D B C
v
*
D B C * Does not move, pointer curruption
* v
E B C D is overwritten by E
v *
E B C C released
v
*
E B C E released instead of B
* v
E B C * and v are not pointing to the same message
the FIFO is empty
* pointer to next receive location
v pointer to next message to be released
413/426
1
ST92F124/F150/F250 - KNOWN LIMITATIONS
KNOWN LIMITATIONS (Cont’d)
Workaround 1
:
The workaround is to replace any occurrence of
spp (CANx_CTRL_PG);
CANx_CTRL_CRFRy |= CRFR_rfom;
by:
spp(CANx_CTRL_PG);
if ((CANx_CTRL_CRFRy & 0x03) == 0x02)
while (( CANx_CTRL_CMSRy & 0x20) && (CANx_CTRL_CDGRy & 0x08));
CANx_CTRL_CRFRy |= CRFR_rfom;
x=0 for the CAN_0 cell
x=1 for the CAN_1 cell
time when the received message is loaded into the
FIFO.
y=0 for the Receive FIFO 0
y=1 for the Receive FIFO 1
We could simply wait for the end of the reception,
but this could take a long time (200µs for a 100-bit
frame at 500kHz), so we also monitor the Rx pin of
the microcontroller to minimize the time the application may wait in the while loop.
Explanation of Workaround 1
First, we need to make sure no interrupt can occur
between the test and the release of the FIFO to
avoid any added delay.
The workaround checks if the first 2 FIFO levels
are already full (FMP = 2) as the problem happens
only in this case.
If FMP≠2 we release the FIFO immediately, if
FMP=2, we monitor the reception status of the
cell.
The reception status is available in the CMSR register bit 5 (REC bit).
Note: The REC bit was called RX in olders versions of the datasheet.
If the cell is not receiving, then REC bit in CMSR is
at 0, the software can release the FIFO immediately: there is no risk.
If the cell is receiving, it is important to make sure
the release of the mailbox will not happen at the
414/426
1
We know the critical window is located at the end
of the frame, 6+ CAN bit times after the acknowledge bit (exactly six full bit times plus the time from
the beginning of the bit to the sample point). Those
bits represent the acknowledge delimiter + the end
of frame slot.
We know also that those 6+ bits are in recessive
state on the bus, therefore if the CAN Rx pin of the
device is at ‘0’, (reflecting a CAN dominant state
on the bus), this is early enough to be sure we can
release the FIFO before the critical time slot.
Therefore, if the device hardware pin Rx is at 0
and there is a reception on going, its message will
be transferred to the FIFO only 6+ CAN bit times
later at the earliest (if the dominant bit is the acknowledge) or later if the dominant bit is part of the
message.
ST92F124/F150/F250 - KNOWN LIMITATIONS
KNOWN LIMITATIONS (Cont’d)
Figure 3. Workaround 1 in Assembler
asm (“
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
Bytes/cycles
CAN0_CTRL page
2/4
spp #36 for CAN1
FIFO 0
2/4
Replace R244 with R245 for FIFO 1
3/6
3/6
(JRNE instruction)
2/6
if FMP is not 2 then FIFO
release can be done
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
pushw RR232
srp
#31
_whileloop: btjf r1.5, _release
btjf
r12.3, _whileloop
/*
/*
/*
/*
push working group
set group F as working group
REC bit of CMSR register
RX bit of CDGR register
*/
*/
*/
*/
_release:
/* set RFOM bit of CRFR register
3/6
/* NB: Replace R244 with R245 for FIFO 1
/* restore previous working group 2/10
spp #48
ld
r0, R244
and
cp
jxnz
r0, #3
r0, #2
_release
popw
or R244, #32
RR232
set
Use
For
NB:
2/8 or 10
2/4
3/6 or 10 if jmp
3/6 or 10 if jmp
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
“);
We can assume a time quantum number between
8 and 25. The worst case is when the baud rate
prescaler is 0 (BRP=0) and the time quantum is 8,
ie. TS1+TS2=5. This means a CPU frequency of
8MHz and 1 Mbits/sec for the CAN communication. In this case the minimum time between the
end of the acknowledge and the critical period is
52 CPU cycles (48 for the 6 bit times + 4 for the
(PROP SEG + TSeg 1). According to the previous
code timing, we need less than 22 cycles from the
time we see the dominant state to the time we perform the FIFO release (one full loop + the actual
release) therefore the application will never release the FIFO at the critical time when this workaround is implemented.
At low speed, this time could represent a long
delay for the application, therefore it makes sense
to evaluate how frequently this delay occurs.
Timing analysis
frame
- Time spent in the workaround
Inside a CAN frame, the longest period that the Rx
pin stays in recessive state is 5 bits. At the end of
the frame, the time between the acknowledge
dominant bit and the end of reception (signaled by
REC bit status) is 8T CANbit , therefore the maximum time spent in the workaround is:
8T CANbit +T loop +T test +T release in this case or
8TCANbit+68TCPU.
In order to reach the critical FMP=2, the CAN node
needs to receive 2 messages without servicing
them. Then in order to reach the critical window,
the cell has to receive a third one and the application has to release the mailbox at the same time, at
the end of the reception.
In the application, messages are not processed
only if either the interrupt are disabled or higher
level interrupts are being serviced.
Therefore if:
TIT higher level + TIT disable + TIT CAN < 2 x T CAN
the application will never wait in the workaround
TIT higher level: This the sum of the duration of all the
interrupts with a level strictly higher than the CAN
interrupt level
TIT disable: This is the longest time the application
disables the CAN interrupt (or all interrupts)
TIT CAN: This is the maximum duration between
the beginning of the CAN interrupt and the actual
location of the workaround
415/426
1
ST92F124/F150/F250 - KNOWN LIMITATIONS
KNOWN LIMITATIONS (Cont’d)
TCAN frame: This is minimum CAN frame duration
Figure 4. Critical Window Timing Diagram
CAN Frame
Critical window: the received
message is placed in the FIFO
Acknowledge: last
dominant bit in the frame
A release is not
allowed at this time
Time to test RX pin and to
release the FIFO 4.5 µs@4MHz Time between the end of the
acknowledge and the critical windows
- 6 full CAN bit times+ time to the sample point
approx. 13µs @ 500kBd
Figure 5. Reception of a Sequence of Frames
FMP
0
BUS
TCAN frame 1
1
TCAN frame 2
TIT disable
CPU
Side-effect of Workround 1
Because the while loop lasts 16 CPU cycles, if
fCPU≤16MHz at high baud rate, it is possible to
miss a dominant state on the bus if it lasts just one
CAN bit time and the bus speed is high enough
(see Table 74)
Table 74. While Loop Timing
fCPU
24 MHz
16 MHz
8 MHz
4 MHz
fCPU
Baud rate for possible
missed dominant bit
No dominant bit missed
1 MBaud
> 500 kHz
> 250 kHz
> fCPU / 16
Note: As can be seen from the above table, no
side effect occurs in cases when fCPU is 16MHz or
higher and if the CAN baud rate is below 1MBaud.
416/426
1
2
2
TCAN frame 3
TIT higher level
TIT CAN
If this happens, we will continue waiting in the
while loop instead of releasing the FIFO immediately. The workaround is still valid because we will
not release the FIFO during the critical period. But
the application may lose additional time waiting in
the while loop as we are no longer able to guarantee a maximum of 6 CAN bit times spent in the
workaround.
In this particular case the time the application can
spend in the workaround may increase up to a full
CAN frame, depending of the frame contents. This
case is very rare but happens when a specific sequence is present on in the CAN frame.
The example in Figure 6 shows reception if TCAN
is 12/fCPU and the sampling time is 16/fCPU.
If the application is using the maximum baud rate
and the possible delay caused by the workaround
is not acceptable, there is another workaround
which reduces the Rx pin sampling time.
ST92F124/F150/F250 - KNOWN LIMITATIONS
KNOWN LIMITATIONS (Cont’d)
Workaround 2
after the acknowledge and the critical slot. If a
dominant bit is read on the bus, we can release the
FIFO immediately. This workaround has to be
written in assembly language to avoid the compiler
optimizing the test sequence.
Workaround 2 (see Figure 7) first tests that
FMP=2 and the CAN cell is receiving, if not the
FIFO can be released immediately. If yes, the program goes through a sequence of test instructions
The implementation shown here is for the CAN
on the RX pin that last longer than the time bebus maximum speed (1MBd @ 8MHz CPU clock).
tween the acknowledge dominant bit and the critical time slot. If the Rx pin is in recessive state for
more than 8 CAN bit times, it means we are now
Figure 6. Reception with TCAN=12/fCPU and sampling time is 16/fCPU
CAN Bus signal
R R R D R R R D R R R D R R R D R R R D
Sampling of Rx pin
Figure 7. Workaround 2 in Assembler
asm (“
spp #48
ld
r0, R244
and
cp
jxnz
r0, #3
r0, #2
_release
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
Bytes/cycles
CAN0_CTRL page
2/4
spp #36 for CAN1
FIFO 0
2/4
Replace R244 with R245 for FIFO 1
3/6
3/6
(JRNE instruction)
2/6
if FMP is not 2 then FIFO
release can be done
*/
*/
set
Use
For
NB:
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
pushw RR232
srp
#31
btjf
r1.5, _release
/* push working group
/* set group F as working group
/* REC bit of CMSR register
2/8 or 10
2/4
3/6 or 10 if jmp
*/
*/
*/
btjf
btjf
btjf
btjf
btjf
btjf
btjf
btjf
btjf
btjf
btjf
/* sample RX bit for 8 bit time
/* ie. 11 btjf instructions
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
3/6
3/6
3/6
3/6
3/6
3/6
3/6
3/6
3/6
3/6
3/6
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
_release:
popw
r12.3,
r12.3,
r12.3,
r12.3,
r12.3,
r12.3,
r12.3,
r12.3,
r12.3,
r12.3,
r12.3,
_release
_release
_release
_release
_release
_release
_release
_release
_release
_release
_release
or R244, #32
RR232
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
/* set RFOM bit of CRFR0 register 3/6
/* NB: Replace R244 with R245 for FIFO 1
/* restore previous working group 2/10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
if
if
if
if
if
if
if
if
if
if
if
jmp
jmp
jmp
jmp
jmp
jmp
jmp
jmp
jmp
jmp
jmp
*/
*/
*/
“);
417/426
1
ST92F124/F150/F250 - KNOWN LIMITATIONS
KNOWN LIMITATIONS (Cont’d)
13.2 ST92F150-EMU2 EMULATION CHIP KNOWN LIMITATIONS
Additional limitations exist on Emulation chips (EMU2 emulator). These limitations correspond to those
present in AxxxxxxxxY trace codes (ST92F150). They are listed in the following table.
Section
Section 13.2.1
Section 13.2.2
Section 13.2.3
Section 13.2.4
Section 13.2.5
Section 13.2.6
Section 13.2.7
Section 13.2.8
Section 13.2.9
Section 13.2.10
Section 13.2.11
Section 13.2.12
Limitation (AxxxxxxxxY trace code)
P1 I/O PORT CHARACTERISTICS
RESET BEHAVIOUR FOR BI-DIRECTIONAL, WEAK PULL-UP PORTS
HIGH DRIVE I/Os WHEN BSZ=1
ADC PARASITIC DIODE
ADC ACCURACY VS. NEGATIVE INJECTION CURRENT
I2CECCR REGISTER LIMITATION
I2C BEHAVIOUR DISTURBED DURING DMA TRANSACTIONS
MFT DMA MASK BIT RESET
DMA DATA CORRUPTED BY MFT INPUT CAPTURE
SCI-A WRONG BREAK DURATION
LIN MASTER MODE NOT AVAILABLE ON SCI-A
LIMITATIONS ON TQFP64 PACKAGES
13.2.1 P1 I/O PORT CHARACTERISTICS
During reset, 5 I/Os of Port P1 are in High Impedance state (Hi-Z), which corresponds to the datasheet specification, however, contrary to the datasheet specification, they get a Weak Pull Up
after the delay of 20400 clock periods (tRSPH) following a reset (external reset signal low). Refer to
Table 75.
Table 75. Reset Behaviour Table
These I/Os behave in the same way following an
external, watchdog or software reset.
13.2.2
RESET
BEHAVIOUR
FOR
BIDIRECTIONAL, WEAK PULL-UP PORTS
This section applies to ports P4[1], P8[7:2] and
P9[7:0].
Rev Z Behaviour
Port Behaviour
Datasheet
Port
After these
Condition While RESET During next
20K Clock
20K Clock
is low
Cycles
Cycles
Bi-Dir + WPU
P1[7:3]
Bi-Dir
Hi-Z
Hi-Z
P4.1
Bi-Dir + WPU
Hi-Z
Hi-Z
Bi-Dir + WPU
P8[7:2] Bi-Dir + WPU
Hi-Z
Hi-Z
Bi-Dir + WPU
P9[7:0] Bi-Dir + WPU
Hi-Z
Hi-Z
Bi-Dir + WPU
Shaded areas represent erroneous operations.
During the reset phase (external reset signal low)
and the delay of 20400 clock periods (tRSPH) following a reset, these ports are in High Impedance
state, while according to the datasheet they should
418/426
1
Control Register Value
PxC0
PxC1
PxC2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
have weak pull-ups. These ports then enter Weak
Pull-up state until the user overwrites the reset
values of I/O Port Control Registers PxC0, PxC1
and PxC2.
ST92F124/F150/F250 - KNOWN LIMITATIONS
KNOWN LIMITATIONS (Cont’d)
During reset, the risk of power consumption in the
input stage due to floating inputs is avoided by a
design feature.
However, if the application requires pull-ups
during reset (for instance, in order to send known
logic values to external devices), external pull-ups
must be provided. When the I/O port outputs a
zero, there will be some additional power consumption as these external pull-ups are not
switched off.
These ports behave in the same way following an
external, watchdog or software reset.
13.2.3 HIGH DRIVE I/OS WHEN BSZ=1
Description
If the BSZ bit in the EMR1 register (bit 1 of R245,
page 21) is set so as to use high-drive output
buffers for P4[7:6] and P6[5:4], all I/O ports as well
as AS, DS and RW will also use high-drive output
buffers.
Impact On Application
P0[7:0], AS, DS and RW have the same VOH parameter value as P6[5:4].
P0[7:0]-P2[3:2], AS, DS and RW have the same
VOL and IIO parameter values as the P4[7:6] and
P6[5:4].
These I/Os using high-drive output buffers will
generate more noise than those using the
standard low-noise output buffers.
13.2.4 ADC PARASITIC DIODE
Description
A parasitic diode is present between an ADC input
and AVDD.
As described in the datasheet, the user has the
possibility to switch off AVDD when he switches off
the ADC to save power consumption. However, if
AV DD is connected to ground and a voltage is
present on the Input Port, an increase in power
consumption can occur.
The Input Port affected by this diode is the one
pointed to by the analog multiplexer of the ADC, if
the port is set up as AF analog input. When the
ADC is stopped, the multiplexer points to the first
input to be converted in a scan (i.e. the channel
pointed to by the SC[3:0] bits).
Workaround
In order to avoid this problem, the I/O connected to
the ADC has to be set up in any mode except AF
analog input (i.e. any combination of PxC2.. PxC0
except 111).
1. Deprogram analog input mode from the I/O port
which is pointed to by the SC[3:0] bits (start
conversion channel, b7..b4 of CLR1).
For example the I/O can be reprogrammed as
an open drain output, with the data at 1. The
high impedance of the output stage then
avoids a conflict with the external voltage
source. In order to avoid potential power consumption in the input buffer of this I/O,
depending on the external voltage applied to
the pin, it is wise to set the 'start conversion
channel' to a channel which carries levels
below 800 mV or above (VDD - 800 mV).
Another possibility is to modify the SC[3:0]
bits so that they point to an I/O Port which is
not used as an analog input.
2. Next, switch off the A/D Converter.
The current in AVDD will be zero, whatever the
logic levels on the analog inputs, and whatever the
voltage level applied to AV DD (between 0 and
VDD).
13.2.5 ADC ACCURACY
INJECTION CURRENT
Description
VS.
NEGATIVE
If a negative current is injected to an input pin (i.e.
input signal voltage below -0.3V), a part of this current will be drawn from the adjacent I/Os. The following curve quantifies this current:
419/426
1
ST92F124/F150/F250 - KNOWN LIMITATIONS
KNOWN LIMITATIONS (Cont’d)
Figure 8. Impact of negative current injection on adjacent pin
350
300
Current drawn
250
from adjacent
200
pin (uA,
150
absolute
100
value)
50
0
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
Current injection (mA)
Impact on application
If the adjacent I/O is used as an analog input (Port
7 and 8 only), the current drawn through the external resistor generates a difference in potential,
resulting in a conversion error.
13.2.6 I2CECCR REGISTER LIMITATION
It is not possible to write to the CC7 and CC8 bits
in the I2CECCR register. These bits remain at
their reset value (0).
Impact on application
The baudrate prescaler cannot be higher than 258
(CC8:7=0 and CC6:0=1). As a consequence, the
baudrate cannot be lower than fSCL=INTCLK/258
Workaround
None.
13.2.7 I2C BEHAVIOUR DISTURBED DURING
DMA TRANSACTIONS
Description
If a DMA transfer occurs on SCI-M, MFT or J1850
during I2C transmission or reception, I2C peripheral may be disturbed.
In transmission mode, additional bytes can be observed on I2C lines (SDA and SCL). In reception
420/426
1
mode, additional bytes can be seen in the I2CDR
register.
Workaround
Avoid using DMA transfer while I2C peripheral is
running.
13.2.8 MFT DMA MASK BIT RESET
Introduction
The MultiFunction Timer is a 16-bit timer with Input
Capture and Output Compare modes. In Input
Capture mode, the timer value is saved when an
external event occurs. In Output Compare mode,
the timer changes an I/O pin level when it reaches
the Compare Register value.
In these two modes the event (Input Capture or
Output Compare) may generate an interrupt or request a Direct Memory Access.
– In interrupt Input Capture mode (or Output Compare mode), the interrupt routine saves the counter in the RAM or the Register File (or updates
the compare register from a location in RAM or
in the Register File).
– In DMA mode these transfers are done automatically.
ST92F124/F150/F250 - KNOWN LIMITATIONS
KNOWN LIMITATIONS (Cont’d)
The choice between Interrupt or DMA modes is
defined by the CP0D and CM0D bits (bit 6 and bit
3 in the IDMR register, R255 page 10/8).
CP0D : Capture 0 DMA Mask. Capture on REG0R
DMA is enabled when CP0D = 1.
CM0D: Compare 0 DMA Mask. Compare on
CMP0R DMA is enabled when CM0D = 1.
In DMA mode a DMA counter register and a DMA
address register define the location and the size of
the memory block (RAM or Reg. File) involved in
these transfers.
Each DMA transfer decreases the counter value.
When the counter reaches 0, an EndOfBlock
event occurs on the DMA controller. This event is
detected by the MFT which resets the CP0D or the
CM0D bit.
Limitation Description
If a MFT DMA request (for instance MFT1) occurs
when another peripheral DMA request is being
serviced (for instance MFT0), and if the MFT0
DMA corresponds to an End-of-Block, the MFT1
resets its DMA Mask bit even if the End-of-Block
signal is dedicated to the MFT0.
This limitation is due to wrong End-of-Block event
management by the MFT, it does not impact the
SCI and the I2C but they can be involved in the
limitation if:
– First peripheral requests a DMA transfer with
End-of-Block event,
– Other peripherals request a DMA transfer with a
higher priority level between the same two DMA
arbitrations. As a consequence, the MFT1 DMA
request is not serviced and a DMA transfer is
lost. This is also true for a Top Level Interrupt
(higher priority than DMA).
Arbitration
End-Of
-Block
MFT0
Output DMA
Com- Request
pare
DMA
Transfer
CM0D
reset
End-of-Block
Interrupt
Routine
Interrupt
Request
MFT1
Output
Compare
DMA
DMA
Request
Transfer
CM0D
reset (1)
The next Output Compare
event generates an interrupt
and not a DMA request.
(1) The MFT1 CM0D bit should not be reset by the End-ofBlock signal unless its DMA request is being serviced.
421/426
1
ST92F124/F150/F250 - KNOWN LIMITATIONS
KNOWN LIMITATIONS (Cont’d)
Impact On Apllication
1. The MFT1 wins the next DMA Arbitration, the
DMA request is serviced.
The MFT0 interrupt routine is executed before
the next Input Capture or Output Compare
event. It detects that a wrong Mask Bit Reset
has occurred on the MFT1 and re-enables the
DMA Mask.
=> There is no application impact.
2.
The MFT1 does not win the next DMA Arbitration, the DMA request is not serviced. The
MFT1 will not request the DMA again as its
DMA Mask bit is reset.
=> A DMA transfer is lost.
The MFT0 interrupt routine is executed before the next Input Capture or Output Compare event. It detects that a wrong Mask Bit
Reset has occurred on the MFT1 and re-enables the DMA Mask.
=> An Input Capture value is lost or a Compare value is used twice.
3. The MFT1 wins the next DMA Arbitration, the
DMA request is serviced.
The MFT0 interrupt routine is not executed
before the next MFT1 Input Capture or Output
Compare event. This new event generates an
Interrupt. The interrupt routine must check
that the DMA counter is equal to 0. If it is not
equal to 0, the DMA counter and address
must not be changed, but the DMA Mask
must be set.
=> An Input Capture value or a Comparison
value must be handled by the interrupt routine.
If this failure recovery management can be
executed fast enough within the interrupt routine, there is no impact on the application.
Otherwise the counter will reach the new
compare value before it has been loaded in
the Compare Register or a new input capture
event will occur before the previous value has
been saved.
422/426
1
4.
The MFT1 does not win the next DMA Arbitration, the DMA request is not serviced. The
MFT1 will not request the DMA again as its
DMA Mask bit is reset.
=> A DMA transfer is lost.
The MFT0 interrupt routine is not executed
before the next MFT1 Input Capture or Output
Compare event. This new event generates an
Interrupt. The interrupt routine must check
that the DMA counter is equal to 0. If it is not
equal to 0, the DMA counter and address
must not be changed, but the DMA Mask
must be set.
=> An Input Capture value or a Comparison
value must be handled by the interrupt routine.
If this failure recovery management can be
executed fast enough within the interrupt routine, only one transfer is lost. Otherwise the
counter will reach the new compare value
before it has been loaded in the Compare
Register or a new input capture event will
occur before the previous value has been
saved.
Workaround
If it is not possible to limit the DMA to one MFT
only (no DMA with another MFT, SCI-M or I2C),
the following failure recovery management must
be included in the MFT, SCI-M, I2C Interrupt routines (if the DMA is used).
1. Following an End-of-Block event (DMA counter equal to 0):
Check the other MFT DMA counter (both
MFTs if this is the SCI-M or the I2C interrupt
routine). If the counter does not equal 0 and
the DMA mask is reset, reset the interrupt flag
bit, set the DMA Mask bit.
2. Following an Input Capture or an Output
Compare event (DMA counter does not equal
0):
Execute the transfer by software, modify the
DMA counter and address, reset the interrupt
flag bit, set the DMA Mask bit.
ST92F124/F150/F250 - KNOWN LIMITATIONS
KNOWN LIMITATIONS (Cont’d)
Here is an example of a patch for the MFT1 using
DMA in ouput compare mode, inserted at the beginning of the MFT0 interrupt routine:
spp #8 ;Set to page 8 (mft1)
tm T_IDMR,#0x08 ;test mft0 OCMP dma
mask bit
jxnz MFT0_it_routine
cpw DMA_CNT1,#0 ;If the DMA count is
not at zero the block did not complete
jxeq MFT0_it_routine
and T_FLAGR,#11011111b ;Clear dma
compare interrupt request
or T_IDMR,#0x08 ;Re-enable the compare 0 dma
MFT0_it_routine: ;MFT0 interrupt routine code
In addition, the peripheral DMA priorities must be
organized so that the MFT DMA priorities are the
highest. This way the impact is limited: DMA requests with the wrong Mask Bit Reset are serviced.
Workaround Limitation
If the counter event period is too short, the failure
recovery in the interrupt routines will not work.
13.2.9 DMA DATA CORRUPTED BY MFT INPUT
CAPTURE
Description
If the MFT requests a DMA transfer following an
input capture event and while a DMA transfer is
currently ongoing to or from another peripheral
(SCI-M, I2C, or second MFT), the DMA data is corrupted (overwritten by the captured data).
13.2.10 SCI-A WRONG BREAK DURATION
Description
A single break character is sent by setting and resetting the SBK bit in the SCICR2 register. In
some cases, the break character may have a
longer duration than expected:
- 20 bits instead of 10 bits if M=0
- 22 bits instead of 11 bits if M=1.
In the same way, as long as the SBK bit is set,
break characters are sent to the TDO pin. This
may lead to generate one break more than expected.
Occurrence
The occurrence of the problem is random and proportional to the baudrate. With a transmit frequency of 19200 baud (fCPU=8MHz and
SCIBRR=0xC9), the wrong break duration occurrence is around 1%.
Workaround
If this wrong duration is not compliant with the
communication protocol in the application, software can request that an Idle line be generated
before the break character. In this case, the break
duration is always correct assuming the application is not doing anything between the idle and the
break. This can be ensured by temporarily disabling interrupts.
The exact sequence is:
- Disable interrupts
- Reset and Set TE (IDLE request)
- Set and Reset SBK (Break Request)
- Re-enable interrupts
Workaround
Avoid using the MFT Input Capture function in
DMA mode while another peripheral is in DMA
mode.
13.2.11 LIN MASTER MODE NOT AVAILABLE
ON SCI-A
LIN Synch Breaks (13 low bits) generation is not
possible on SCI-A. LINE bit has no effect on break
length.
423/426
1
ST92F124/F150/F250 - KNOWN LIMITATIONS
KNOWN LIMITATIONS (Cont’d)
13.2.12 LIMITATIONS ON TQFP64 DEVICES
13.2.12.1 AIN[7:0] NOT AVAILABLE ON
TQFP64 DEVICES
ADC Channels from AIN0 to AIN7 are not present
on TQFP64 devices.
424/426
1
13.2.12.2 EFT0 AND EFT1 NOT AVAILABLE ON
TQFP64 DEVICES
Extended Function Timers are not present on
TQFP64 devices.
ST92F124/F150/F250 - REVISION HISTORY
14 REVISION HISTORY
Date
Revision
29-oct-2004
3.0
19-nov-2004
4.0
Main Changes
Revision number incremented from 1.5 to 3.0 due to Internal Document Management System change
Changed document status: Datasheet instead of Preliminary Data
Added 2EFT for TQFP64 devices
Changed description in Section 1.2.2 on page 10
Replaced 1 by DPR1 in Page 21 column (Figure 26 on page 42)
Removed references to sector 2 (mirrored) in Figure 30 on page 49, Table 7
on page 51. and Figure 41 on page 70
Removed formula in the description of I2CCCR on page 276 and added Table 70 on page 398.
Removed “mask option” in the description of ETO bit on page 147
Changed “INTCLK range” table (FREQ[2:0] bits) on page 277
Replaced RX by REC and TX by TRAN in CMSR register on page 343
Changed Section 10.11 on page 361 (added divider/2) and Table 69 on
page 371.
Changed “FLASH / E3 TM SPECIFICATIONS” on page 380
Changed IIO values in “DC ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS” on page 376
Changed note for IDDHALT in “AC ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS” on
page 378 (note 5)
Added Table , “BOOTROM TIMING TABLE,” on page 384
Changed ACD Accuracy table on page 401
Changed Table 73 on page 406.
Added Section 13 on page 407
Changed Table 69 on page 371.
425/426
1
ST92F124/F150/F250 - REVISION HISTORY
Notes:
Information furnished is believed to be accurate and reliable. However, STMicroelectronics assumes no responsibility for the consequences
of use of such information nor for any infringement of patents or other rights of third parties which may result from its use. No license is granted
by implication or otherwise under any patent or patent rights of STMicroelectronics. Specifications mentioned in this publication are subject
to change without notice. This publication supersedes and replaces all information previously supplied. STMicroelectronics products are not
authorized for use as critical components in life support devices or systems without express written approval of STMicroelectronics.
The ST logo is a registered trademark of STMicroelectronics.
All other names are the property of their respective owners
© 2004 STMicroelectronics - All rights reserved
STMicroelectronics group of companies
Australia – Belgium - Brazil - Canada - China – Czech Republic - Finland - France - Germany - Hong Kong - India - Israel - Italy - Japan Malaysia - Malta - Morocco - Singapore - Spain - Sweden - Switzerland - United Kingdom - United States of America
www.st.com
426/426
1